(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "[Miscellaneous papers relating to American Indian languages]"

J 

V 

M 




^7 



/•' 



r^l 



LINGUISTIC FAMILIES 

OF THE 

INDIAN TRIBES NORTH OF MEXICO, 

WITH 
PROVISIONAL LIST OF THE PRINCIPAL TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 



Linguistic Families. 



Family. 



Abbreviation. 



Former name. 



Adaizan 

Algonquian 

Athapascan 

Attacapan 

Caddoau 

Catawban 

Chimaknan 

Chininiesyanian 

Chiuookan 

Chitimachan ... 
Coahuiltecan . . . 

Copeau 

Ehuikan 

Eskimauan 

Haeltziikan 

Iroquoian 

Kalapooan 

Keresan 

Kiowan 

Kituuahan 

Koluschan 

Kiisau 

Lutnaman 

Mariposan 

Mendociuan 

Moquelumnan .. 
Muskhogean ... 

Natchesan 

Nojan 

Palaikan 

Piman 

Pujuuan 

Saliuau 

Salishan 

Shahaptanian . . 

Shastian 

Shoshonian 

Siouan 

Skittagetan 

Taensau 

Takilman 

Tafioan 



Adz..., 
Alg.... 
Ath.... 
Attc ... 
Cad.... 
Catb... 
Chimk 
Chmsy 
Cbiu.., 
Chit .. 
Coah.. 
Cop.... 
Ehnk . 
Esk . . . 
Haeltz 
Irq ... 
Kalap . 
Ker ... 
Kiow . 
Kit ... 
Kol ... 
Kus... 
Lut . . . 
Mar... 
Mend . 
Moq .. 
Musk . 
Natch . 
Noj ... 
Pal ... 
Pirn... 
Puj ... 
Sain .. 
Salsh . 
Shap.. 
Shast . 
Shos .. 
Su.... 
Skitt.. 
Taen.. 
Tak... 
Tan... 



Tinne. 
Pawnian. 



Wintun. 

Karok. 

Inmiit. 



Cootenay. 



Klamath. 
Yokuts. 
Pomo. 
Mutsun, 



Pit River. 

Meidoo. 
San Antonio. 



Numa. 

Dakotan. 

Haidan. 



1292 T N- 



LINGUISTIC FAMILIES. 
Linguistic Families — Continued. 



Family. 



Abbreviation. 



Former name. 



Tchumashan 
Timucuan . . . 
Tonkawan .. 

Uchean 

Unungunian 
Waiilatpuan 
Wakashan .. 

Waahoan 

Weitspekan . 
Wislioskan .. 
Yakonan .... 

Yukian 

Yuman 

ZuQian 



Tchu. 

Timu 

Tonk 

Uch.. 

Unu . 

Wail. 

Wak. 

Wash 
Weit. 
Wish. 
Yak.. 
Yuk.. 
Yum . 
Zun.. 



Santa Barbaran. 

Abt. Nootka. 
Yurok. 




r: or 



2f 



TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 



Abbato-tenah. Ath. 

Abeca (part of Creeks). Musk. 

Aberginiau (collective term for some New England tribes). Alg. 

Abiquiu (Pueblo town). 

Abitiki. See Abittibi. 

Abittibi. Alg. 

Abuaki. Alg. 

Absaroka. See Crow. 

Abwoin (collective for Sioux and Assiniboins). " 

Acaua. See Quapaw. 

Accocessaw. See Arkokisa. 

Accomac. Alg. 

Accohanoc. Alg. 

Accominta (division of Pawtucket confederacy). Alg. 

Achalaque Province. See Cherokee. 

Achansa. See Quapaw. 

Achaques (division of Nipissings). Alg. 

Acheto-tinneh. Ath. 

Achsissagliec. See Missisauga. 

Ackenatzy. (Probably Aconecho.) 

Acolapissa. (Collective term for coast tribes near the Choctaws.) Musk. 

Acoma (Pueblo town). Ker. 

Aconecho =Akenatzy ? 

Acquiuoshionee. See Iroquois. 

Acquintanacsuak. Alg? 

Acuco. See Acoma. 

Acuera Province. Musk? 

Adae. Adz. 

Addees. See Adae. 

Adirondack. Alg. 

Adshusheer. 

Aes. Cad. 

Affats-tena. See Abbato-tenah. 

Agawam. (Part of Pawtucket confederacy.) Alg. 

Aggiticcah. (Shoshonees at Salmon Falls on Snak6 Eiver.) Shos. 

Aglegmut. See Oglemut. 

Agnichronnon. See Mohawk. 

3 



4 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Agnier. See Mohawk. 

Agiiieronou. See Mohawk. 

Agonal. See Iowa. 

Agounonsiouni. See Iroquois. 

Agotsegeneii. See Mohegan. 

Aguas Nuevas. See Cibillabattano. 

Ahalpam. (On Lower Santiam River.) Kalap. 

Ahautchuyuk. Kalap. 

Ahazat. See Ahowsaht. 

Ahealt. Kol. 

Ahk. See Auk. 

Ahnahaway. See Ahwahawa. 

Ahouaudate. See Huron. 

Ahowsaht. Wak. 

Ahsheewai. See Zuni. ^ 

Ah-tena (not to be confounded with Atnah). Ath. 

Aht. See Wakashan Family. 

Ahwahawa. Su. 

Aijoue. See Iowa. 

Ainove. See Iowa. 

Aiowai. See Iowa. 

Aitizzart. See Ayhuttizaht. 

Akaichie (division of Sciatogas). Wail? 

Akamsea. See Quapaw. 

Akansa. See Quapaw. 

Alabama (division of Greek confederacy). Musk. 

Alberni (Barclay Sound, Vancouver Island). Wak? 

Alchedune. See Yalchedune. 

Alei (probably Alsea). 

Aleut. See Unungun. 

Aleya. See Alsea. 

Algonquin (1. Tribe on Ottawa River; 2. Synonym for Ojibwa). Alg. 

Alkansas. See Quapaw. 

AUacaweah. Collective for bands on Upper Yellowstone. Shos ? 

Allegan. See Alligewi. 

Alliatan. See Snake. 

Alligewi (traditional). 

Almouchico. See Armouchiquois. 

Alsea. Yak. 

Amacaba. See Mojave. 

Amalecite. See Etchimin. 

Amalingan. See Etchimin. 

Amaskohegan. See Aresaguntacook. ^ • 

Amalistes. See Etchimin. 

Ambawtawhoot-tinneh. See Abbato-tenah. 

Ambawtawhoot-tinneh. Ath. • 



AGNIER ABUASSAWTEE. O 

Amelick. See Etchimin. 

Ameriscoggin. See Aresaguntacook. 

Amikou6. See Amikway. 

Amikway. Alg. 

Amikwuk. See Tsillawdawhoot-tinneh. 

Am payout. See Yampa CTte. 

Amucliaba. See Mojave. 

Auacliorema. 

Anacostau (White River). See Nocotchtank. 

Anadawco. Cad. 

Anantooca. ^S^ee Onondaga? 

Anasagiintacook. See Aresaguntacook. , 

Anasitch. See Coos. 

Ancara. 

Aucasisco (Schoolcraft). See Casco. 

Andaico. See Anadawco. 

Andastaerounon. See Conestoga. 

Andastes. See Conestoga. 

Aneega. See Hennega. 

Andatahouat. See Ottawa. 

Aneyoute. See Oneida. 

An-kutshi. See Haian-kutchin. 

Anie. See Mohawk. 

Angechagemut (part of Ikogmut). Esk. 

Anniegue. See Cayuga. 

Antou-kwahn. See Tongas. 

Anuier. See Mohawk. 

Au-kutchin. See Hai-an-kutchin. 

Anlygmute. See Unaligmut. 

Anoyint. See Oneida. 

Antastoui. See Conestoga. 

Antokee. See Onondaga ? or Kanticoke ? 

Apache (1. An Athapascan tribe ; 2, Synonym for Apahuatche q. v.). 

Apache de Navajoa. See Navajo. 

Apache-Mojave. See Yavapai. 

Apache- Yuma. See Tulkepa. 

Apahuatche. Applied by Indians of Southern Arizona to hostile tribes 

of northern mountains. 
Apahwatche. See Apahuatche. 
Apalachee. Musk. 
Apalousa. See Opelusa. 
Apanenae. See Pawnee. 
Apolashe. See Opelusa. 
Applegate Creek Indians. See Nabiltse. 
Appomattoc. Alg. 
Aquassawtee. See Coosawda. 



€ TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Aquauachuque. See Atquanachooks. 

Aquackauonk (part of the Unami). Alg. 

Aquatzagane. See Mohegan. 

Aranama (probably Arrenamuse). 

Arapalio. Alg. 

Arapasca. See Athapascan family. 

Arc-a-Plat. See Cooteuai. 

Aresaguntacook (division of Abnaki confederacy). Alg. 

Arikara. Cad. 

Arivaipa (division of Apaches). Ath. 

Ark. See Auk. 

Arkansa or Akamsea. See Quapaw, 

Armouchiquois (collective term for southern New England tribes). Alg. 

Arrapahay (division of Arapaho). Alg. 

Arrenamuse (Texas). 

Arrohattoc. Alg. 

Arsek. Alg. 

Artsmilsh (collective term for Indians of Shoalwater Bay). Chin. 

Arwahcahwa. See Ahwahawa. 

Ascena. See Caddo. 

Aseeguang. Kol. 

Ashley Eiver Indians (may be Kiawaws). 

Asinais Spanish (Texas). Caddoan. 

Asistagueronon. See Mascotiu. 

Askikonanheronon. See Nipissing. 

Asphalashe. See Opelusa. 

Assigumaig. See Ausegumaug. 

Assiniboin. Su. 

Assinipoualak. See Assiniboin. 

Assony. See Nassoni. 

Assotoue. See Uzutiuhe. 

Atakhtan. See Ah-teua. 

Atasi. See Autossee. 

Atatchasi. See Uzutiuhe. 

Atawawa. See Ottawa. 

Atfalati. Kalap. 

Athabasca. Ath. 

Atimaco. See Timucua. 

Atirhagenrenset. See Neutral Nation. 

Atka. See Nikhukhnin. 

Atkah. See Nikhukhnin. Salsh. 

Atna. See Ah-tena. 

Atnaer. See Ah-tena. 

Atnah. See Shooshwap. 

Atnaxthynne. See Ah-tena. 

Atquanachuke. Alg. ? 



AQUAUACHUQUE BIG BELLY INDIANS. 7 

Atsina. Alg. 

Atsistaerhonnon. See Mascotin. 

Attigouaiita (1. Division of Hurons; 2. Synonym for Hurons). Irq. 

Attakapa. Attc. 

Attenmut. (Part of Malilemut.) Esk. 

Attigouantan. See Wyandot. 

Attikameque. Alg. 

Attionidaron. See Neutral Nation. 

Attiweudaronk. See Neutral Nation. 

Athapascan family. Interior of Alaska and Northwest British America. 

Atuamih. Pal ? 

Aucocisco. See Casco. 

Auk. Kol. 

Auquagaw. See Oquaga. 

Aurickaree. See Arikara. 

Ausegumaug. (May be Mascotins.) Alg? 

Autossee (division of Creek Confederacy). Musk. 

Avoyel. 

Aweatsiwaenrrhonon. See Winnebago. 

Ayauway. See Iowa. 

Ayeui. See loni. 

Ayhuttisaht. Wak. 

Ayonai. See loni. 

Ayrate. See Lower Cherokees. 

Aytchart. Not Ahowsaht or Ayhuttisaht; may beChaykisaht. Wak» 

Aziagmut. (Division of Kavi^gmut.) Esk. 

Babine Indians. Ath. 

Backbook. South Carolina. 

Baloballa. See Bellacoola. 

Banattee. See Bannock. 

Bannock. Shos. 

Battlelemuleemauch. See Methow. 

Beaux Hommes. See Quapaw. 

Bahama. (Texas ; may be Ebahamo.) 

Baldhead Indians. Lewis & Clarke. 

Bayagula. Musk. 

Bear River Indians. North Carolina. 

Beaver Indians. See Isa-ttine. 

Belantse-etea. See Hidatsa. 

Belbella. See Bellacoola. 

Belem (Pueblo town). 

Bellacoola. Salsh. 

Belly Indians. See Grosventre. 

Beshequeguelts. See Miseequigwelis. 

Berseamite. Alg. 

Big Belly Indians. See Grosventre. 



8 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Big Devils (probably Yanktonais). 

Bilikulg,. See Bellacoola. 

Biloxi. Musk. 

Blanche or Blanc Barbu (doubtful). 

Birch Indians. See Tennuth-kutchin. 

Biskatrong^. Texas. 

Blackfoot Indians : (1. Satsika, q.v.', 2. Division of Satsika ; 3. Division 

of Teton Sioux.) 
Black Pawnee. See Arikara. 
Blood Indians. (Division of Satsika, q. v.) Alg. 
Bolixie. See Biloxi. 
Bonak. See Bannock. 
Bonnack. See Bannock. 
Borrado. Coah. 

Brazos (collective term for Indians on Brazos River, Texas). 
Brotherton Indians (collective.) Alg. 
Brushwood Indians. See Tsillawdawhoot-tinneh. 
Belbella. See Bellacoola. 
Bissirinien. See Nipissing. 
Birch-rind Indians. See Tsaltsan-ottine. 
Caagu. See Cayuse. 

Caddo 1. A tribe; 2. A confederacy. Cad. 
Cahinnio. 
Cahokia. Alg. 
Cailloux. See Cayuse. 
Caiyoquo. See Cayuga. 
Cake. Kol. 

Calispellum. See Pend d'Oreille. 
Callapooya (collective). Kalap. 
Camiltpaw. Shap. 
Calispellum. See Pend d'Oreille. 
Caloosa. 

Cumquekis. Haeltz. 

Canadaquois. (Collective for Canadian Indians.) Alg. & Irq. 
Canai. See Conoy. 
Canarsee. Alg. 
Canasatauga. See Conestoga. 

Caninahoic. (May be a northern band of Shoshonian family.) 
Cannensi. See Comanche. 
Canohatina. See Caddo. 
Cansa. See Kansa. 
Canunga. See Mohawk. 
Caouita. See Coweta. 
Cape Fear Indians. North Carolina 
Oapichi (with Natchitoches). Cad. 
Capote (Division of Utes). Shos. 



BIG DEVILS CHEMACUM, \} 

Carancaguace. See Carankawa. 

Carankawa. Attc. 

Carantouan. (May be Erie.) 

Caribou-Eaters. See Ethen-eldeli. 

Caribou Indians. See Tutcbohn-kutchin. 

Carrier Indians. See TacuUi. 

Casita. See Cussetaw. 

Cataba. Catb. 

Castahana (" Snake band" on heads of Platte and in mountains. Shos ? 

Cataka. Probably Kwada, g. v. Shos"? 

Cathlacumup. Chin. 

Cathlascon. See Wasco. 

Cathlacomatup. Chin. 

Cathlahaw. Chin. 

Cathlamet. Chin. 

Cathlanaquia. Chin. 

Cathlapotle. Chin? 

Catskill (division of Munsee). Alg. 

Cauneeyenkee. See Mohawk. 

Caughnawaga (1. Saint Eegis Indians. 2. Mohawk town). Irq. 

Cautanoh. See Tuscarora. 

Cayas. See Quapaw. 

Cayuga. Irq. 

Caygua. See Kiowa. 

Cayuquet. See Kyoquaht. 

Cayuse. Wail. 

Ceni. See Asinai. 

Cexeninuth. See Exemnuth. 

Chactiouman. See Chokchooma. 

Chaducutl. (West coast Vancouver Island.) Wak. 

Chalchuni. See Chatcheni. 

Chanee (division of Osages). Su. 

Chaouanon. See Shawnee. 

Charcowa. Kalap ? 

Charrow. See Cheraw. 

Chasta Scoton. See Shastacosta. 

Chatcheeni. Skitt. 

Chat. See Shawnee. 

Chaudiere Indians. See Colville, 1. 

Chauenow. See fehawnee. 

Chawa. See Cheyenne. 

Chaykisaht. Wak. 

Cheahtoc. See Chetco. 

C'heattee. See Chetco. 

Chehalis. Salsh. 

Chemacum. Chimk. 



10 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Cliemeguaba. See Chemehueva. 

Chemeliueva. Shos. 

Cbenandoane. See Seneca. 

Chennessie. See Seneca. 

Oliepewayan. See CJiippewyan. 

Chei^ontia. 

Cberachee. See Cherokee. 

Cheraw. Catb? 

Cherokee. Irq. 

Chesapeak. Alg. 

Chetco. Ath. 

Chetimaches. See Shetimasha. 

Chetlessenten. Ath. 

Cheveux Releves. 1. Algonquin tribe; 2. Applied to another tribe 

(Missisauga?) near Lake Huron. Alg. 
Cheveriche. See Senvarits. 
Cheyenne. Alg. 
Chicacha. See Chickasaw. 
Chickahomini. Alg. 
Chicorea. Ga. or S. C. coast. 
Chickasaw. Musk. 
Chicklezat (probably Chaykisaht). 
Chictagah. See Illinois confederacy. 
Chictaghic. See Illinois confederacy. 
Chien. See Cheyenne. 
Chihohocki (may be Unalachtgo). 
Chilcaht (may be a collective term). Kol. 
Chilcotin. See Tsilco-tinneh. 
Chilluckittequaw. Chin ? 

Chilion (division of Apaches (Grileno ?) at Camp Apache). Ath. 
Chilkhakmut. See Ugalakmut. 
Chiltz. See Chehalis. 
Chilwayhook. 

Chimsian (collective). Chmsy. 
Chinook. Chin. 
Chin Indians. See Nagailer. 
Chimnapum. Salsh ? 
Chiouanon. See Shawnee. 
Chippewa. See Ojibwa. 

Chippewyan. 1. Sawcesaw-tinneh ; 2. used for Athapascan family.) 
Chiricahua. See Segata-jenne. 
Chiricagui. See Segata-jenne. 
Chiskiac. Alg. 
Chitgagane. See Sitka. 
Chitwont. See Similkameen. 
Chocrelatan. Ath. 



CHEMEGUABA COCHEES. 11 



Choctaw. Musk. 

Chokchooma. Musk. 

Oliowanoc. Irq. ? 

Chopunnish. See I^ez Perce. 

Chonacba. See Washita. 

Christineaux. See Cree. 

Chuali)ay. See Colville (1). 

Chugachigmut. Esk. 

Chukchageinut (division of Kuagmut). Esk. 

Chukchi. See Yuit. 

Chuklukmut. See Yuit. Esk. 

Chutsinni. See Hoodsunoo. 

Chymsyan. See Chimsian. 

Cibariche. See Seuvarits. 

Cibillabattano (division of Apaches). Ath. 

Circee. See Sursee. 

Civalletano. See Cibillabattano. 

Ciri6. See Sursee. 

Clackama. Chin. 

Clahnaqua. Chin. 

Clahoos. Haeltz. 

Clahoquaht. Wak. 

Clahosaht. See Macaw. 

Clallam. Salsh. 

Clallueeis. Haeltz. 

Clauaminamun. Chin. 

Clanninata. Chin. 

Classet. See Macaw. 

Clatsacamin. Chin. 

Clatscanai. See Tlatscanai. 

Clatsop. Chin. 

Claxtars. See Tlatscanai. 

Clayoosh. See Clahoos. 

Clehure. See Clahoos. 

Clelikittee. Haeltz. 

Clickatat. Shap. 

Clictar. See Clictas. 

Clictas. Skitt. 

Clinquit. Shap. 

Cloo. Skitt. 

Clyoquot. See Clahoquaht. 

Closset. See Macaw. 

Clowetsus. Haeltz. 

Cochiti (Pueblo town). Ker. 

Coco-Maricopa. See Maricopa. 

Cochees. Chiricahua Mountains, Cochise Apaches 



12 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Cocopa. Turn. 

Cochise Apaches (named from chief?). Division of Apaches. Ath. 

Cceur d'Alene. Sajsh. 

Oogwell. See Quacolth. 

Colapissa. See Acolapissa. 

Collotero. See Coyotero. 

Colville. 1. A tribe; 2. A confederacy Salsh. 

Comanche. Shos. 

Comumpah ("mixture of Shoshonis and Utes") located in territory of 

Gosiats, west of Salt Lake, and perhaps identical with them. 

Shos. 
Conerd Helene. See Coeur d'Alene. 
Confederates. See Iroquois. 
Congaree. South Carolina. 
Connamoc (included) Corees). Irq. 
Conoy. Alg. 
Conza. See Kansa. 
Cookkoo-oose. See Coos. 
Cooniac. Chin ? 

Coosawda. Division of Creek confederacy. Musk. 
Cooshattie. See Coosawda. 
Coosaw. See Creek. 
Coosuc. Alg. 
Coosaw. See Creek. 
Coos. Kus. 
Cootenai. Kit. 
Copalis. Chin. 
Copaha. See Quapaw. 
Copalux. See Copalis. 

Copper Indians. 1. Tsaltsan-ottin6; 2. Ah-tena. Ath. 
Coppermine Apaches (division of Apaches). Ath. 
Coppermine Indians. See Tsaltsan-ottin6. 
Coquille. Ath. 
Coquin. See Tototin. 
Coquilth. See Quacolth. 
Coranine. See Coree. 
Corbeaux. See Crow. 
Corchaug. Alg. 
Coree. 

Coroa. Louisiana. 
Cosnino. Yum. 
Cosuthentun. Ath. 

Cotorne. See Cootenai. * 

Cottonoi. See Cootenai. 
Couata-soua. See Ottawa. 
Coutonia. See Cootenai. 



COCOPA — DIGGER. 13 

Coiiteaux. See Nicutamux. 

Cowassayee. Shap? 

Cow Creek Indians. See Hewut. 

Cowichiu. Salsh. 

Coweta. Division of Creeks. Musk. 

Cow. See Kansa. 

Cowghaliugen. See Khagantayakliuukhin. 

Cowlitz. Salsli. 

Cowwelth. Skitt. 

Coyuklesatucli. See Howclmclisaht. 

Coyoukou. See Koyukukh-otaua. 

Coyote. See Coyotero. 

Coyotero (division of Apaches). Ath. 

Cozaby. (division of Piutes east of Mono Lake, Nev.) Shos. 

Crosswer. See Cumsliawas"? 

Cuclian. See Yuma. 

Cuelca-jenne (division of Apaches.) Between Pecos and Eio Grande 
Rivers.) 

Cum Umbah. See Comumpah. 

Cumshawas. Skitt. 

Cuni. See Zufii. 

Cussetaw. Musk. 

Cutsahnim. See Similkameen. 

Cutgane. See Yuma. 

Cruzado (Spanish name; doubtful), New Mexico. 

Crow. 1. A Siouan tribe on Upper Missouri; 2. A synonym for 
Tutchohn-kutchin. 

Daho-tena. Ath. 

Deguthee-dinai. See Degothi-kutchin. 

Dahcotah. See Sioux. 

Daunkotapi. See Sioux. 

Deer-horn Eskimo. See Naggeuktoomute. 

Degothi-kutchin. Ath. 

Delaware Confederacy, composed of the Minsi (Munsee, afterward sep- 
arate), Unami, and dnalachtgo. Alg. 

Des Chutes Indians. Collective for Wascos (Chin); Teninos and 
Warm Spring Indians. Shap. 

D6terreur de Racine. See Digger. 

Donginga. See Ta'^wa^zhika. 

Dog-rib Indians. See Thlingcha-tinneh. 

Doquachabsh. Salsh. 

Dotami. Upper Platte, and in mountains; supposed to be Comanches. 
Shos ? 

Digger, indefinite term applied to northwestern Shoshonian bands, and, 
also, to bands in California. Applied especially to the Hocanticar a 



14 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Dionondadie. 8ee Tionontati. 

Dixies. Probably misprint for Sixes. Ath. 

Dog Soldiers. Baijd of Cheyennes. Alg. 

Dtinne. See Athapascan family. 

Dughdwabsh. See Dwamish. 

Dughsocum. Salsh. 

Dughwalia. Salsh. 

Dusgeowa-ono. See Tuscarora. 

Eagwe-Howe. See Iroquois. 

Eaux. See Osage. 

Eastern Sioux. See Santee Sioux. 

Ebahaino. Texas. 

Echeeloot (Washington Territory). Chin? 

Eclikimo. See Eklikheeno. 

Edchawtawhoot-tinneh (may be Daho-tena). Ath. 

Edisto. 

Eesteytoch. Haeltz. 

Eel Eiver Indians (division of Miamis). Alg. 

Ehanktowana. See Yanktonais. 

Ehateset. See Ayhuttisaht. 

Ehonkeronon. See Algonquin (tribe). 

Elati Cherokee. See Lower Cherokee. 

Elk Mountain Utes (included Seuvaritsj division of Utes in Southeast 

ern Utah). Shos. 
Elwa. Salsh. 
Erie. Irq. 
Eriga. See Erie. 
Eklikheeno. Kol. 
Ekogmut. See Ikogmut. 
Epicirinien. See Nipissiug. 

Eriehrounon. See Shawnee (used by Wyandots for Shawnees. Shea.) 
Ererion. See Erie. 
Erigoanna (Texas) ? 
Esaw. See Catawba. 

Eskimauan family. Arctic coasts and islands of America. 
Eskimantzik. See Eskimauan. 
Esopus Indians (collective name for all the Munsees, except the Minni- 

sinks). Alg. 
Esquiate. See Hishquayaht. 
Essenape. ^See Assiniboin *? 
Este-Muskokee. See Creek Confederacy. 
Etakmur or Etakbush. Salsh. 
Etchimin. Alg. 
Ethen-eldeli. Ath. 
Etonontathronnon. See Tionontati. 
Ettchaottine. Ath. 



DIONONDADIE GILAND. 15 

Eucher (probably Yuquachee). 
Euquache. See Yuquachee. 

Euquatop Apaches (division of Apaches in Texas). Ath. 
Eutaw. See Ute. 
Ewinte. See Uiutats. 
Exeninuth. Haeltz. 
Eyackimah. See Yakama tribe. 
Farmington Indians. See Tunxis. 
Fall Indians. See Grosventre. 
Faraone. See Yuta-jenne. 
Fire Nation. See Mascotin. 

Fish Utahs (division of Utes, at Red Lake, Utah ?). Shos. 
Five Nations. See Iroquois. 
Flatbow. See Cootenai. 
Fishing Chukchis. See Ynit. 

Flathead. Applied to different tribes in various parts of America, 
especially to the Salish proper ; also to the Waxsaws, Choctaws, &c. 
Fox. Alg. 

Folle Avoine. See Menominee. 
Foolish Folks. See Tutchohn-kutchin. 
Folsavoin. See Menominee. 
Fulawin. See Menominee. 
Gahgwahgeonuh. See Neutral Nation. 
Galice Creek Indians. See Taldushdun-dud-te. 
Galzane. See Kuilchana. 
Ganaweese. See Conoy. 
Ganeaga-ono. See Mohawk. 
Gaspesian (division of Micmacs). Alg. 
Gemex. See Jemes. 
Genesee. See Seneca. 
Gens de Bouleaux. See Tennuth-kutchin. 
Gens de Large. See Natsit-kutchin. 
Gens de Milieu (probably Kutcha-kutchin). 
Gens des Bois. 1. Haian-kutchin ; 2. Abbato-tenah. 
Gens des B-uttes. See Teuan-kutchin. 
Gens des Chaudieres. See Colville (1). 
Gens des Feuilles. See Wahpeton. 
Gens des Feuilles tirees. See Wahpacuta. 
Gens des Foux. See Tutchohn-kutchin. 
Gens des Prairies. See Mascotin. 
Gens des Terres. Alg. 
Gens du Lac. See Medawaconton. 
Gens du Sang. 1. Foxes; 2. part of Nipissings. 
Ggoneahseabneh. See Iroquois. 
Gila Apaches. See Tjuiccu-jenne. 
Giland. See Tjuiccu-jenne. 



16 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS 

Gileno. See Tjiiiccu-jenue. 

Gogouin. See Cayuga. 

Goiogoen. See Cayuga. 

Gosliip. See Gosiats. 

Gosliip Shoshouee. See Gosiats. 

Gosha Ute. See Gosiats. 

Gosh Yuta. See Gosiats. 

Goshoot. See Gosiats. 

Gosiats (collective term for several bands in Utah). Shos. 

Goyogouin. See Cayuga. 

Grandes Eaux. See Great Osage. 

Grand Tuc. See Great Osage. 

Green Eiver Snake. See Washaiki. 

Gros Ventres (collective term for the Minnetarees, northern Arapa- 

hoes, and Atsina). 
Gros Ventres of the Missouri. See Minnetaree. 
Gros Ventres of the Prairie. See Atsina. 
Grovent. See Gros Ventres. 
Guachule Province. Timu.? 
Guale Province (Amelia Island, Fla.). Timu.? 
Guandastogu6. See Conestoga. 
Guashilla. Haeltz. 
Guyaudot. See Wyandot. 
Gweugweh-ono. See Cayuga. 
Hackensack (division of the Unami). Alg. 
Haeelbzuk (collective term for Haeltzukan family). 
Hahatonwan. See Ojibwa. 
Haian-kutchin. Ath. 
Haida. See Skittagetan family. 
Hama. See Huma. 
Hamockhave. See Mojave. 
Han-kutchin. See Haian-kutchin. 
Hannakalal (doubtful). Salsh. 
Hare Indians. See Kawcho-tinneh. 
Hasatch (Pueblo village). Ker. 
Hassinango. Irq.? 
Hastriryini. See Taensa. 
Hatorask. See Hatteras. 
Hatteras. Alg. 
Hawalco. See Hualapai. 
Haverstraw (part of the Unami). Alg. 
Hemez. See Jemes. 
Hennega. Kol. 
Hewut. Ath. 

Hickory Apache. See Tannah-shissen. 
Hidatsa. See Minnetaree. 



GILE\0 HIINKPAPA. 1 7 

Hihigbennimo. See Sans Puelles. 

nishqiiayaht. Wak. 

Hitchitee (division of Creek confederacy). Musk. 

Hocaniish. Salsh. 

Hocandikali. Hee Hocanticara. 

Hocanticara. Shos. 

Hoeliungara. See Winnebago. 

Hodenosaunee. See Iroquois. 

Hodeaannogetau. See Onondaga. 

Hogelander. See Nochpeem. 

Hob. Cbimk. 

Hoba. See Assiniboin. 

Hobilpo Tiisbepaw. See Salisb tribe. 

Hokium. Salsb? 

Hokwaits (Piute band). Sbos. 

Homamisb. Salsb. 

Honanneboont. See Seneca. 

Hongwe-Ongwe. See Iroquois. 

Houque-ronon (probably Algonquin 1). Alg. 

Hoocb. See Hob. 

Hoodnid. See Hunab. 

Hoodsunu. Kol. 

Hook (Soutb Carolina). 

Hionab-kwabu. See Hunab. 

Hooneak. See Hunab. 

Hopi-Sbinumo. See Moqui. 

Horican (part of Mobegans, 3). Possibly a corruption of Hierocoyes or 

Iroquois). 
Horn Mountain Indians. Atb. 
Horoji. See Winnebago. 
Hotangke. See Winnebago. 
Hotawa. See Oto. 
Houaguan. Skitt. 
Houma. See Hum a. 
Housatonic. See Stockbridge Indians. 
Howcbuclisabt. Wak. 
Hualapai. Yum. 
Hudsunu. See Hoodsunu. 
Hueco. See Waco. 

Huitsla (52° to 55° Britisb Columbia). 
Hullooetell (on Clarke's Fork. Lewis & Clarke). Salsh? 
Huma. Musk. 
Humptulup. Salsb? 
Hunacow. See Hunab. 
Hunab. Kol. 
Huukpapa. See TJncpapa, 
1292 T N 3 



18 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

HuDua. See Hunah. 

Hnnxit (Houaguau?). Skitt. 

Huron (1. A tribe forming the base of the mocfern Wyandots. 2. Syno- 
nym for Wyandot). 

Husky. Bee Eskimauan family. 

Hydab. See Skittagetan family. 

Ichuarumpats (Piute band). Shos. 

Iccujenne (division of Apaches). Ath. 

I( tan (general term for several Shoshonian bands, especially Washaiki 
and Comanches). Shos. 

Ihauktonwau. Bee Yankton. 

Ihanktonwanna. Bee Yanktonais. 

Ikogmut. Esk. 

Ikoklagmnt (division of Ikogmut). Esk. 

Illinois confederacy. Alg. 

Imahklimut (division of Okeeogmut). Esk. 

Incomecanetook. Salsh. 

Ingaleet. Bee Kaiyuhkhotana. 

Inglutaligemut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. 

Ingnhklimut. Esk. 

Ini. Bee loni. 

Inkalichljuaten (collective term for several Alaskan tribes). Ath. 

Jnkaliten (collective term for several Eskimauan and Athapascan tribes 
of Alaska). # 

Snkiiliichliiate. Bee Inkalichljuaten. 

Innuit. Bee Eskimauan family. 

Inspellum. Bee Nespelum. 

Insulaire. Bee Algonquin 1. 

Intietook (division of Okinagans). Salsh. 

Honi. Cad. 

Iowa. Su. 

Iroquois confederacy. Irq. 

Irrohatec. Bee Arrohattoc. 

Isangyati. Bee Santee Sioux. 

Isa-ttine. Ath. 

-Isbquat. Bee Hishquayaht. 

Iskousogo (may be Mascotin). 

3J8le de Pierre Indians. Bee Sinkiuse. 

Isieta (name of two Pueblo towns in New Mexico and Texas). Tan. 

ilssati. Bee Santee Sioux. 

Itawan (S. C. 1707). 

Itkalyaruiu. Bee Kutcha-kutchin. 

Iwillik. Esk. 

Jacou. Bee Yacon. 

^atam. Bee letan. 

Jaupim, Bee Yeopim. 



HUNNA KATLAWOTSET. 19 

Jecarilla. See Taiinali-sliissen. 

Jegosasa. Bee Neutral Nation. 

Jeines (Pueblo town). Tan. 

Jennito. (An Iroquois tribe, perhaps Oneida.) 

Jenontowano. *SV(; Seneca. 

Jicarilla Apaches. See Tannah-shissen. 

Jonie. See loni. 

Joshua. Ath. 

Jugelnuten. See Kaiyuhkhotaua. 

Junnachotana. See Unakhotana. 

Junnakachotana. See Koyukukhotana. 

Kaadgettee. Kol. 

Kaaskaquatee. Kol. 

Kadapaw (perhaps Cataba, g. v.). 

Kadiakski. See Kaniagmut. 

Kagataya-Koung'u. See Unungunian family. 

Kahkwah. See Neutral. 

Kahneahka. See Mohawk. 

Kaialigmut. Esk. 

Kaiganskoi. See Kygahni. 

Kaishadeh. See Tongas. 

Kaivavwits. Piute band. Shos. 

Kaiyuhkhotaua. Ath. 

Kaiyukakho-tana (part of Kaiyuhkhotaua). Ath. 

Kaka. See Cake. 

Kalispelm. See Pend d' Oreille. 

Kaljush. See Koluschan. 

Kaluga. See Koluschan. 

Kaniagmut. Esk. 

Kamloops. Salsh. 

Kanagist. See Kaniagmut. 

Kauatshagauha. See Mohegan. 

Kanawha. See Conoy. 

Kangr^aligmut. Esk. 

Kaninahoick. See Caninahoic. 

Kaninaveish. See Caninahoic. 

Karweewee. See Artsmilsh. 

Kansas. Su. 

Kapaha. See Quapaw. 

Kapa. See Quapaw. 

Kappaw. See Quapaw. 

Kaskaskia. Alg. 

Kaskia. Heads of Platte, &c. Maybe a Comanche band. 

Kataghayekiki. See Khagantayakhunkhin. 

Kata-Kutchin. See Kutcha-Kutchiu. 

Katlawotset. See Killawat. 



20 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Katakill. See Catskill. 

Kaviagmnt. Esk. 

Kaveak. See Kavaigmut. 

Kaviazagemut (divisioQ of Kaviaginut). Esk. 

Kaw. See Kansas. 

Kawcbo-tinueli. Atb. 

Kauyaichits. Piute band. Shos. 

Keats (Piute band). Sbos. 

Keauwee (S. C. 1701). May be a division of Oberokees. 

Keawa. See Kiowa. 

Kecbumacarlo. Cbmsy. 

Kecotan. Alg. 

Keecbi. Cad. 

Keecbis. Cbmsy. 

Keekbeatla. Cbmsy. 

Kegiktowrigemut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. 

Kebk. See Cake. 

Kelutsab. Cbmsy. 

Kemabwivi. See Cbemebueva. 

Kenai. See Atbapascan family. 

Kenaitse. See Knaiakbotana. 

Keuaizer. See Atbabascan. 

Keuatbtoix. Cbmsy. 

Keuawa. See Conay. 

Kenayem. See Knaiakbotana. 

Kencbenkieg. Cbmsy. 

Kenisteuo. See Cree. 

Kennebec. See Norridgewock. 

Kera. See Queres Nation. 

Kerokia. See Cabokia. 

Ketandous. Cbmsy. 

Ketabbonneet. See Tongas. 

Ketlitk kutcbin. See Koyukukbotaua. 

Ketscbet naer. See Ab-tena. 

Ketoonocsbelk. Cbmsy. 

Kettle Falls. See Colville tribe. 

Ketwilkcipas. Climsy. 

Kewaugbtcbenuuaugb. Salsb. 

Kbagantayakbunkbin. Unu. 

Kliionoutaterrbonon. See Tionontati. 

Kbununab. Atb. 

Kkgestayle-kke-ottine. See Atbabasca. 

Kiataw. See Coyotero. 

Kicbai. See Keecbi. 

Kicbesipiirini. See Algonquin tribe. 

Kicbkakonerac. See Kiskakon. 



KATSKILL KLAIIAR. 2 I 



Kicksatee. Kol. 

Kicktiiwanc. See Kitchawong. 

Kicopoux. See Kickapoo. 

KicktawanC. See Kitchawong. 

Kidahnuts. See Tongas. 

Kigiklikliuni. Unu. 

Kikhtogaraut. See Shiwokugmut. 

Kikiallu. Salsh. 

Kilcatali. Climsy. 

Kilistinon. Sec Cree. 

Kiliwatsal. See Killawat. 

Kilkat. See Chiinmesyanian family. 

Killawat. Yak. 

Killamuck. See Tillamook. 

Kilsmaht. Wak. 

Kimnepatoo. Esk. 

Kingeegamut (division of Kaviagmut). Esk. 

Kinai. See Knaiakhotana. 

Kinamut. See Knaiakhotana. 

Kinnawalax. Chmsy. 

Kinroalax. See Kinnawalax. 

Kious. See Sioux. 

Kironona. See Carankawa. 

Kiowa. Kiow. 

Kishawin. Skitt. 

Kiskakon. Alg. 

Kispachalaidi. Chmsy. 

Kispachlahts. See Kispachalaidi. 

Kitchaclalth. Chmsy. 

Kitchawong (part of Wappinger. 2). Alg. 

Kitegue. Esk. 

Kithahtla. See Keekheatla. 

Kithateens. Chmsy. 

Kitlan. Chmsy. 

Kitlope. Chmsy. 

Kitseelaiso. Chmsy. 

Kitahon. Chmsy. 

Kittamaat. Chmsy. 

Kittear Eskimo. See Kittegarute. 

Kittegarute. Esk. 

Kittistzu. Chmsy. 

Kitunaha. See Cootenai. 

Kitwilcoits. Chmsy. 

Kiwaa. See Kiowa. 

Kittycatat. See Wichita. 

Klahar. See Clahoos. 



22 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Klahohquaht. See Clahoqualit. 
Klaizzart. See Claliosaht. 
Klamath (of Oregon). Lut. 
Kleneecate. See Koluschan. 
Knaiakhotana. Ath. 

Kuiktagemut (division of Kaviagmnt). Esk. 
Knisteneaux. See Oree. 
Koassati. See Ooosawda. 
Koeats. See Keats. 
Kokwai-y-toch. Haeltz. 
Kolchaina. See Kuilchana. 
Koloshe. See Koluschan family. 
Kolouche. See Koluschan family. 
Kolshina. See Kuilchana. 
Koltshane. See Kuilchana. 

Koluschan family (coast of Southern Alaska and adjacent part of Brit- 
ish America). 
Konage. See Kauiagmut. 
Kopagmut. Esk. 
Koskiemo. Haeltz. 

Kosukogemut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. 
Kosunats (division of Utes). Shos. 
Koumchaouas. See Cumshawas. 
Kowagmut. See Kuagmut. 
Koyukunskoi. See Koyukukhotana. 
Koyugmut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. 
Krih. See Cree. 
Kuagmut. Esk. 

Kuilchana (collective term for inland tribes of Alaska). Ath. 
Kukuth-kutchin. See Tukkuth-kutchin. 
Kullas Palus. See Pend d'Oreille. 
Kullerspelm. See Pend d'Oreille. 
Kungugemut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. 
Kuschkukchwakmuten. See Kuskwogmut. 
Kuskokwimen. See Kuskwogmut. 
Kuskulchewak. See Kuskwogmut. 
Kuskwogmut. Esk. 
Kutani. See Cootenai. 
Kutcha-kutchin. Ath. 
Kuynkantsi. See Koyukukhotana. 
KwMa (division of Comanches). Shos. 
Kwaiantikwokets (Piute band). Shos. 
Kwaikmut (division of Kaviagmut). Esk. 
Kwakiutl. See Quacolth. 
Kwalhioqua. See Willopah. 
Kwatumeta-tene. See Quatomah. 



KLAHOHQUAHT LUGIISEELEE. 25 

Kwehtlniiunisli. -See Nugbquetelbabisb. 

Kwichagmut (division of Oglemut). Esk. 

Kwiengoriiats. (Piute baud.) Sbos. 

Kwikhpagemut. See Ikoginut. 

Kwithluageiiuit. ISee Ikogmut. 

Kwiutnpiis. Slios. 

Kycncut. See Kyoqualit. 

Kygahni (collective term). Skitt. 

Kygargey. See Kygabiii. 

Kyoquabt. Wak. 

Labassa. See Sabassa. 

Laekquelibla. Haeltz. 

Lagotali. See Sioux. 

Laguua (Pueblo town). Ker. 

Labanna. Salsb "? 

Lake Indians. See Senijextee. 

Lapierre's House Indians. See Tukkuth-kutebin. 

La Plaine Indians. See Bald-Head Indians. 

Lartielo. See Spokan. 

Leesbtelosb. Doubtful ; bead of Willamette River, Or. 

Lenape. See Delawares. 

Lenni-Lenape. See Delawares. 

Lentis (Pueblo town; may be Nuestra Senora de los Angeles de Tecos). 

Lepan. Atb. 

Lilowat. Salsb. 

Linneway. See Illinois confederacy. 

Lipano. See Lepan. 

Little Mistassini Indians. Alg. 

Llanero. See Cuelca-jenne. 

Lodalondak. See Adirondack. 

Loquilt (Lilowatf) Salsb. 

Los Lentes. See Lentis. 

Los Luceros (Pueblo town). Tan. 

Lototen. See Tootootni. 

Loucbeux. See Kutcbiu. 

Loup (1. Collective Frencb term for Delawares, Mobegans, and con- 
nected tribes. 2. Part of Pawnees). 

Lower Cberokees (part of Cberokees formerly on beads of Savannah 
River). Irq. 

Lower Killamuc. See Yacon. 

Lower Quarter (Nortb Carolina, 1701). 

Luckamute. Kalap. 

Luckaso. Killamuc language. Lewis & Clarke. 

Luckawi. Killamuc language. Lewis & Clarke. 

Lucton. Killamuc language, Lewis & Clarke. 

Lugbseelee. Kol. 



24 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Lulauna. Skitt. 

LuiBiiii. Salsli. 

Lutuami. See Klamath. 

JVIacaw. Wak. 

Machapunjja. Alg. 

Mackacliack. See Mequachake. 

IVIackanotin. ^ee Macuootini. 

Mackenzie Eiver Eskimo. See Kopagmut. 

Macnootini. Ath. 

Madowesian. See Sioux. 

^aechacbtiuni. See Seneca. 

Magemut. Esk. 

3Iaha. See Omaha. 

Mahackeno's tribe. Alg. 

Mahaquase. See Mohawk. 

Mahawha. See Ahwahawa. 

Mahingau. See Mohegan. 

Mablemut. Esk. 

Maiken. See Mohegan. 

Makagmut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. 

Makah, See Macaw. 

Maleigmjuteu. See Mahlemut. 

Malimoot. See Mahlemut. 

Malochee. See Mequachake. 

Mamekoting (division of the Muusees). Alg. 

Mandan. Su. 

Mangoac. Irq ? 

Manbasset. Alg. ' 

Manhattan. See Eecgawawanc. 

Mannahoac (tribe and confederacy). 

Mannawousut. See Manosaht. 

Manosaht. Wak. 

Mansopelea. See Mousopelea. 

Maqua. See Mohawk. 

Maquachee. See Mequachake. 

Maquintiquot. Alg. 

Marespink. Alg. 

Marhar. See Omaha. 

Marhoo Chin, 

Maricopa. Yum. 

Marimuskeet. See Mattamuskeet. 

Marlain. Probably Crow. 

Marmalilacalla. Haeltz. 

Maroa. See Tamaroa. 

Mary's River ludians. See Saint Mary Indians. 

Mascolitin. See Mascotin. 



LULANNA MESSENECZ. 25 



Mascotin. Alg. 

Maskagau. See Maskego. 

Maskego (division of Ojibwa). Alg. 

Maskoki. See Creek coufederacy. 

Massachuset. Alg. 

Massapequa. Alg. 

Massawoinec. See Iroquois. 

Massetta. Skitt. 

Massinacac. Irq. 

Massit. See Massetta. 

Mastiiiclia. See Cree. 

Matauwake. See Metoac. 

Matchclat. See Muchlaht. 

Matcbedash Indians. See Missisauga. 

Mathlanobe. yiS'ee Multnomah. 

Matinecock. Alg. 

Matotautes. Probably Oto. 

Mattamuskeet. See Machapunga. 

Mattapanient (Maryland). Alg. 

Mattaponi. Alg. 

Mattasoon. See Ahwahawa. 

Matuwack. See Metoac. 

Mauquauwog. See Mohawk. 

Mauvais Monde Indians. See Ettchaottine. 

Mavvatadau. See Mandan. 

Mawatangna. ;S'ee Mandan. 

Mayganathicoise. See Mohegau. 

McCedas. See Mandan. • 

Mdewakontonwan. See Medawacontou. 

Meadow Indians. See Mascotin. 

Meatwho. See Methow. 

Mechkentowoon. Part of Mohegan 3. Alg. 

Medawacontou. Part of Sioux. Su. 

Meheriiu. Irq. 

Melicete. See Etchimin. 

Menecowegee. See Minneconjou, 

Mengwe. See Mingo. 

Menominee. 

Meiitou. (French, doubtful.) 

Menuache. See Muache. 

Mequachake (division of Shawnees.) Alg. 

Merric. See Meroke. 

Meioke. Alg. 

Mescalero. See Se-jenne. 

Mescousing (probably Mascotin.) 

Messenecz. See Fox. 



26 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Meteowwee. See Methow. 

Methow. Salsb. 

Metlahcatlab. Chrasy. 

Metoac (collective terra for Long Island tribes). Alg. 

Meuaclie. See Muaclie. 

Miami. Alg. 

Michigamea. Alg. ? 

Miclilait. See Muchlaht. 

Micmac. Alg. 

Miednoff'skoi. See Ah-tena. 

Mie-missouk. See Misonk. 

Mikasuki. Musk 

Millbank Sound Indians (collective term for several Haeltzukan tribes). 

Haeltz. 
Mimbre. See Iccu-jenue. 
Mimbreno. See Iccu-jenne. 
Mingo. 1. Synonym for Iroquois ; 2. detached band of Iroquois ; 3. 

synonym for Conestoga. 
Minneconjou (division of Teton Sioux). Su. 
Minnekenozzo. See Minneconjou. 
Minnetaree. See Hidatsa. 
Minnetarees of Fort de Prairie. See Atsina. 
Minueway. See Illinois. 
Minnisink (division of the Munsees). Alg. 
Minocautong. See Medawacontou. 
Minqua. See Conestoga, 
Minsi. See Munsee. 
Miseequigwelis. Salsh. 
Miskaiwhu. Salsh. 
Miskauki. See Fox. 
Misonk. Salsh? 
Missisauga. Alg. 

Mississippi Sioux. See Santee Sioux. 
Missouria. Su. 
Mithouic. See Methow. 
Mnacadeus. See Man dan. 
Moapariats (Piute band). Shos. 
Mobilian.' Musk. 

Moccasins-with-holes. See Broken Moccasin Indians. 
Modoc. Lut. 

Moelobite (doubtful). Musk? 
Moguino (Pueblo village). Keres. 
Mohahoe. See Mojave. 
Mohave. See Mojave. 
Mohawk (1. an Iroquois tribe; 2. synonym for Iroquois confederacy). 

Irq. 



METEOWWEE — MUSCODAINSUG. 27 

Moliegan (1. a tribe in Connecticut; 2. a tribe on the Hudson Kiver^ 

3. a group of tribes on and near Hudson River, including 2-^ 

4. collective term for Algonquian bands of Hudson River and 
Southwestern New England). Alg. 

Moliemencho. Irq. ? 

Moliuaclie. See Muaclie. 

Moki. Bee Moqui. 

Molalla. Wail. 

Mole-Alleg. Bee INIolalla. 

Molel. See Molalla. 

Monacan tribe and confederacy. Irq. ? 

Monahassano. Irq. ? 

Monasiccapano. Irq. ? 

Montagnais (1. collective term for Algonquian bands, northeast of 

Ottawa River, Canada; 2. collective terra for several Northwestern 

Athapascan tribes). 
Montauk. Alg. 
Montowese's tribe. Alg. 
Moouchat. Wak. 

Moquats (not Nogwats) Piute band. Shos. 
Moqui. Shos. 
Moratoc. Alg "? 
Morautacund. Alg. 
Mosette. See Massetta. 
Mouisa (French ; doubtful). 
Mountaineer. See Montagnais 1. 

Mountain Indians (1. Tutchohn-kutchin ; 2. Daho-tena). 
Mountain-men. See Tenan-kutchin. 
Mountain Sheep Eaters. See Tucarica. 
Mouringan. See Mohegan. 
Mousopelea. Lower Mississippi river. 
Movwiats (Piute band). Shos. 
Mowatchit. See Moouchat. 
Mowiats. See Movwiats. 
Moyawans. Alg. 
Muache (division of Utes). Shos. 
Muchlaht. Wak. 
Muckleshoot (collective term for bands on Muckleshoot Reservation). 

Salsh. 
Multnomah. Chin. 
Mummockahavi. See Mojave. 
Munsee (one of the three divisions of the Delawares and afterward a 

distinct tribe). Alg. 
Murtilpar. Haeltz. 
Muscodainsug. See Mascotin. 



28 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Muscogee (1. The chief di\ision of the Creek confederacy; 2. Synonym 

for the Creek confederacy.) Musk. 
Musquaki. See Fox. 
Musquotan. See Mascotin. 
Muzcalero. See Se-jenne. 
Naauee. See Nehaunee. 
Naaneeaaghee. Kol. 
Naansi (French, 1680). 
Naas. See Nass. 
Nabedatche. Cad. 
Nabiltse. Ath. 
Nabiri (French, 1680). 
Nacogdoches. Cad. 
Nacook. See Sowhegan. 
Naelim. See N.ehalim. 
Nagailer. Ath. 
Naggeuktormut. Esk. 
Nauni. See Comanche. 
!Nalalsemoch. Haeltz. 
Namanamin. Kalap? 
Namaoskeag. Alg. 
i^amasket. Alg. 
ISTambe (Pueblo town). Tan. 
Kamollo. See Yuit. 
Namoit. Kalap. 
Nanaimo. Salsh. 
Nanoos. Haeltz. 
JSIansamund. Alg. 
Nautautacund. Alg. 
Nanticoke. Alg. 
-Nanzatico. See Nantautacund ? 
Narcoctaw. Haeltz. 
Nargota. See Sioux. 
Narraganset. Alg. 
Nasal. Chin. 
Nascapee. Alg. 
Nascotin. Ath. 
Nascud. See Nascotin. 
Nashua. Alg. 

Nass (collective term for several Chimmesyanian tribes). Chmsy. 
Nassoni. Cad. 
Natacook. See Sowhegan. 
Natage (division of Apaches). Ath. 
Natche. Natch. 

Natche-kutchin. See Natsit-kutchin. 
Natchitoche. Cad. 



MUSCOGEE NEUTRAL NATION. 29 

Nation de Feu. *S'ee Mascotiu. 

Xation dc I'Isle. tiee Algonquin tribe. 

I^ation du Petun. tSee Tiououtati. 

Nation du Porc-peit;. Alg. 

Natliantin. Ath. 

Natootetain (may be Ntshaautin). Ath. 

Natsit kutchin. Ath. 

Natuessuag". See Sioux. 

Naudowessie. See Sioux. 

Naus (Maryland). Alg. 

Nauset. Alg. 

Nauwanatats (Piute band). Shos. 

Nawaa (division of Mohegaus, 3). Alg. 

Naweetee. Hailtz. 

Navajo. Ath. 

Navesink (division of the Unami). Alg. 

Necariage. See Wyandot. 

Nechacokee (may be Ochechole). Chin? 

Necomanchee. Chin. 

Necoon. Skitt, 

Neculta. See Taculta. 

Neeardeoudargowar. See Oneida. 

Neecelowes. See Neeslous. 

Neeslous. Chmsy. 

Neeutubvig. Salsh? 

Neewamish. Salsh. 

Nehalim. Salsh. 

Nehaunee (1. Collective term for a group of Athapascan tribes. 2, Ne- 

haunees of Chilkaht River, part of Khununah. 3. Synonym for Ah- 

tena). Ath. 
Nehawretawgo. See Oneida. 
Nehiro-irini. Alg. 
Nemarh. See Marhoo. 
Nemue. See Comanche. 
Ne Perce. See Nez Perce. 
Nepicinqui. See Nipissing. 
Nesaquake. Alg. 
Nespelum. Salsh. 
Nespod. Haeltz 'i 
Nestucca. Salsh. 
Netchillik. Esk. 
Neuchadlit. See Noochahlaht. 
Neuchallet. See Noochahlaht. 
Neus Indians. See Neusioc. 
Neusioc. Alg. 
Neutral Nation. Irq. 



30 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Neuwittie. See Naweetee. 

Newchema. See Nuchima. 

Neweetg. See Naweetee. 

Newhawtehtahgo. See Oueida. 

ISTewicargut. Atli. 

ISTewichawanoc. Alg. 

N(\yetse-kutshi. See Natsit-kutchin. 

Nez Perce (1. The Sliahaptin proper; 2. The Caddoes; 3. The lowas). 

Shap. 
l^iautic (two tribes, eastern and western). Alg. 
Nibissirinien. See Nipissing. 
Nickomin. See Necomanchee. 
!Nicoutamuch. Salsb. 
Nicozbautin. Ath. 
i^icutamiix. See Nicoutamuch. 
Nightan. Skitt. 

Nijora. Near head of Gulf of California. 
Nijuni. See Comanche. 
Nikhukhniu. Unii. 
Nilco Province. Arkansas. 
Nimkish. Haeltz. 
Ninstance. See Hunxit. 
Nipegon. See Winnebago. 
Nipissing. Alg. 
Nipmuc. Alg. 
Nisqualli. Salsh. 
Nitchihi. See Kiowa. 
Nittinaht. Wak. 
Noache (division of Utes). Shos. 
Noahha. Salsh, 

Nochpeem (division of Wappinger, 2). Alg. 
Nocochtank. Alg. 
Nogwats (Piute band). Shos. 
Nogwuhmut (division of Yuit). Esk. 
Nohannie. See Nehaunee. 
Nonienuche. See Weminuche. 
Nominie. See Oonawmanient. 
Nonstoki. See Nestucca. 
Noochahlaht. Wak. 
Nooknachamish. Salsh. 
Nooksahk. Salsh. 
Noolteuatini. Ath. 
Nooltonatria. See Nooltenatini. 
Noothum. Salsh. 
Nootka. See Yuclulaht. 
Norridgewock. Alg. 



NEUWITTIE OGULMUT. 31 

Northern Indians. See Athabasca. 

Nottowa. Irq. * 

N'Pochle. Hee Sans Puelles. 

N'quutlinauiish ([)robab]y Qiiehtlmamish). 

Nsietshawus. See Tillamook. 

Ntshaautiu. Ath. m 

Nuagnntits (Piute band). Shos. 

Nuchusk (probably Chugachigmnt). 

JSTudarcha. See Missouria. 

JSfuestra Senora de Belem. See Belem. 

l!f iiestra Senora de la Asunpcion de Zia. See Silla. 

Niiostra Senora de Guadalui)e do Pojuaque. See Pojuaque. 

Niiestra Senora de (xuadalupe de Zuiii. See Zniii. 

JS^uestra Senora de Los An^^eles de Tecos (Pueblo town). 

l^uestra Seiiora de Los Dolores de Sandia. See Sandia. 

Nughleinmj". See Lumnii. 

Nngh-quetelbabish. Salsh. 

Nukhlumuii. See Lunimi. 

I:^uklukayette (probably part of the Teaan-kutchin or Kutcha-kutchin). 

Ath. 
!Nukmut (part of Kaviagmut). Esk. 
Nulaautin. Ath. 
Nulato. See Nulato-khotana. 

Nulato-khotanaana (division of Kaiyuhkhotana). Ath. 
Numa. See Shoshonian family. 
Numepo. See Nez Perce, 
l^iinatogmut. Esk. 
Niinatungmeun. See Nunatogmut. 
Nundawaono. See Seneca. 
l!fiindawaronoh. See Seneca. 
ItTiiuivak people. See Magemut. 
Nushagagmut. Esk. 
Nasklai^uni. See Clallam. 
Nussamec. Alg. 
Nutachi. See Missouria. 
Niiwukmut. Esk. 
Nuwungmeun. See Nuwukmut. 
O ikachoy-Atte. See Alabama. 
O.ikinacken. See Okinagan. 
Ochangra. See Winnebago. 
Ochatequin. See Huron. 
Ocki Piute (Piute band). Shos. 
Ogalla. See Oglala. 
Oglala (part of Teton Sioux). 
Oglemut. Esk. 
Ogulmut. See Oglemut. 



32 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Ohiaht. Wak. 

Oiatuch. See Ohiaht. 

O-i-clela. Haeltz. 

Oiagouin. See Cayuga. 

Ojibwa. Alg. 

Ojo Caliente. 1. Zuni village. Zun. 2. Warm Sifring Apaches. Ath. 

Okandanda. See Oglala. 

Okani. See Kaiisa. 

Okeeogmlit. Esk. 

Okiuagan. Salsh. 

Okuaka. See Oglala. 

Omaha. Su. 

Onayalekaono. See Oneida. 

Oncpapa. See Uucpapa. 

Ondalaumak. See Ottawa. 

Oneida. Irq. 

Oiieyyatecaronoh. See Oneida. 

Ongwe-Honwe. See Iroquois. 

Onieletoch. Haeltz. 

Ouiougoueu. See Cayuga. 

Oniotaaug. See Oneida. 

Oniouenronnon. See Cayuga. 

Onkdaka. See Oglala. 

Onneyut. See Oneida. 

Onuogante. See Oneida. 

Onnontae-rounon. See Onondaga. 

Onnontagu^. See Onondaga. 

Onondaga, Irq, 

Onorochrhonon. See Oneida. 

Ontationne. See Tiouontati. 

Ontpouea, Irq. ? 

Ontonagannha. See Erie. 

Ookjoolik. Esk. 

Oonawmanient, Alg. 

Ooquesiksillik. Esk. 

Ootlashoot Tushepaw (Lewis »& Clarke). Salsh. 

O[)anango. See Micmac, 

Opechisaht. Wak. 

Opecluset. See Opechisaht. 

Opelusa, Louisiana. 

Openagi. See Abuaki. 

Opossian, Alg, 

Oquaga (division of Oneidas). Irq. 

Orquisaco. Cad. 

Orunge (collective for Delawares, Mohegaus, and connections). Alg. 



OHIAHT PACAO. 33 

Osage. Su. 

Osaukee. See Sac. 

Osliawanong. Sec Shawnee. 

Osiiipoille. See Assiniboin. 

Osocbi. See Uzutiiilie. 

Osotcboue. See Uziitiube. 

Osottoez. See Uzutiiibe. 

0,ssii)ee. Alg. 

Ossnobian. See Assiniboin. 

Otali-Cberokee. See Upper Cherokee. 

Oto. Su. 

Otontanta. See Oto. 

Ottare-Cherokee. See Upper Cherokee. 

Ottawa. 1. An Algonquin tribe ', 2. Collective name for Indians o» 

Ottawa River ; 3. Incorrectly applied to the Otoes. 
Ottoe. See Oto. 
Ouachita. See Washita. 
Ouachtenon. See Wea. 
Onakich. See Wakashan. 
Onaonakecinatouek. See Huron. 
Ouasash. See Osage. 
Ouatenon. See Wea. 
Oubcnaki. See Abnaki. 
Onchipawha. See Ojibwa. 
Ouchucblisit. See Howchuclisaht. 
Onendat. See Huron. 
Ouenrohronnon. See Wenro-rons. 
Ougatanon. See Wea. 
Ouisconsin. Mascotin ? 
Oumalominec. See Menominee. 
Ounepigon. See Winnebago. 
Ousasoy. See Osage. 
Oustac (may be Westo). 
Outagami. See Fox. 
Oateoua. See Ottawa. 
Outtoaet. See Ottawa. 

Ouyape. See Quapaw. • 

Overhill Oherokees. See Upper Cherokees. 
Owenunga. See Abnaki. 
Owillapsh. See Willopah. 
Oyaudah. See Cherokee. 
Oyatoh-ono. See Cherokee. 
Ozenbogue (French, 1675; doubtful). 
Ozini. Alg. 
Pacaha. See Quapaw. 
Pacao (Texas). 

1292 T N 3 



34 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Pachany. See Nochpeem. 

Pachenaht. Wak. 

Pachimi. See Nochpeem. 

Padouca. See Comanche. 

Pagaits (Piute band). Shos. 

Pagan. See Piegan. 

l^gayuats (Gosiats band, not the Pagaits or Paguits). Shos. 

Fagont. See Piute. 

Pagtiits fPiiite baud, not Pagaits). Shos. 

Pahkee. See Atsina. 

Pahnjete (said to be part of Utes). Shos. 

Pahoja. See Iowa. 

I?ali Utah. See Piute. 

Pahvant. Shos. 

Pailsh (probably Copalis). 

Paiute. See Piute. 

Pajalat (Texas). 

Z^alaquesson (French, lower Mississippi Eiver region). 

Palenachendchiesktajeet. See Iroquois. 

Pallalt (British Columbia). Salsh? 

Palletto-palla. See Paloos. 

Paloos. Shap. 

Palux. See Copalis. 

^alaxie. See Biloxi. 

Ba^acaeac. Alg. 

JUamlico. Alg. . - 

BfiiBipticough. See Pamlico. 

!0<'^.-ai«anki. Alg. 

Pauaiti. See Bannock. 

Panaraints (Piute division). Shos. 

Pan^. See Wichita. 

Pangkaw. See Ponca. 

Panie. See Pawnee. 

Pamnionkee. See Pawnee. 

Panka. See Ponca. 

Papabi-ootam. See Papago. 

;^.ipago. Pirn. 

Haginachois. Alg. 

B.'ioanagats. Piute band. Shos. 

Panant Ute (probably Pahvant). 

Baroomporiats, (Piute band). Shos. 

Paroomyats (not Paroompaiats). Piute band. Shos. 

Parushapats (Piute band). Shos. 

Paruiguns (Piute band). Shos. 

Pascagula. Musk. 

if^ascatoe (may be Partapsco). Alg. 



Pi-CHANY — PICURIS. 35 

Pasciotoe (may be Patapsco). Alg. 
Paspatank. Alg. 
Paspehay. Irq! 

Paspikaivats (Piute band). Shos. 

Passamaquoddy. Alg. ^ • 

Pastoligmut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. 
Patapsco. Alg. 
Patcheeua. See Paclienaht. 
Patclioag. Alg. 
Pateskeet. See Poteskeet 
Pa LTcbe. See Piute. 
Paugusset. See Wepawaug. 
Pauraanake. See Metoac. 
Paunak. See Bannock. 
Paunch Indians. See Gros Ventres. 
Pautah. See Piute. 
Pautequami. See Pottawotomi. 
Paviotso. See Piute. 

Pawnee (1. Pawnees proper; 2. Sometimes used for Arikara). Cad. 
Pawnee-Pict. See Wichita. 
Pawtucket (tribe and confederacy). Alg. 
Payuche. See Piute. 
Peauguichia. See Piankishaw. 
Peccos. See Pecos, 
Pecos (Pueblo town). Tan. 
Pedee. South Carolina. • 

Pelloatpalla Chopuunish. See Paloos. 
Pelone (part of Apaches). Ath. 
Pend d'Oreille. Salsh. 

Pend d'Oreille of the Upper Lake. See Cceur d'Alene. 
Pennacook. Alg. 
Penobscot. Alg. 
Peoria. Alg. . « 

Pequawket. Alg. 
Pequot. Alg. 
Perquiman. Alg. 
Perrian. See Peoria. 
Petite Nation. Alg. 
Petun. See Tionontati. 
Petuneux. See Tionontati. 
Pey Ute. See Piute. 
Piankatank. Alg. 
Piankishaw. Alg. 
.Pichena. (Perhaps Pecana). 
Picuris (Pueblo town). Tan. 



36 TKIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Pict (perhaps Piccawillani bandof Miamisj may be Piqua Shawnees or 

Piaukishaws). 
Piegan (part of Satsika). 
Pierruiats (Gosiats baud). Shos. 
Pikakwanarats (division of Utes). Shos. 
PikmiktaHgmut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. 
Pima. Pim. 
Pinal. See Pinaleiio. 
Pinalefio (division of Apaches). Ath. 
Pinal Llano. See Pinaleuo. 
Pintiats (Piute band). Shos. 
Piro (1. Language of Sinecu Pueblo, Mexico. Tan. 2. Used as synonym 

for people of Taos Pueblo). Tafl. 
Piscataqua. Alg. 
Pisquows. Salsh. 
Pissasec. Alg. 
Pitalec. Coah. 
Piucha (probably Piute). 
Piute (collective term for a number of bands in and bordering upon 

Nevada and Utah; relationship not yet defined). Shos. 
Pocomtacook. Alg. 
Pocumtuck. See Pocomtacook. 
Podunk. Alg. 
Pohoji. See Shoshoni. 
Pojuaque (Pueblo town). Tan. 
Pokanoket. See Wampanoag. 
Ponashita. See Bannock. 
Ponca. Su. 

Poncarar. See Ponca. ^ 

Ponus' tribe. Alg. 
Poquonnuc. Alg. 

Porcupine Nation. See Nation du Porc-^pi^. 
Porteur. See Taculli. 
Poruche. See Weminuche. 
Potano's tribe. Tirau. 
Potatuc. Alg, 
Poteskeet. Alg. 
Potomac. Alg. 
Pottawotomi. Alg. 
Poualak. See Assiniboin. 
Poue. See Pottawotomi. 
Povuate (Pueblo village). Ker. 
Powhatan (tribe and confederacy). Alg. 
Puanag. Sec Sioux. 
Puant. See Winnebago. 
Pudding River Indians. See Ahantchuyuk. 



PICT — QUIAHANLES. '-^t 

Pueblo (collective^for pueblo buildiug Indians iu the southwest part of 

tlie United States). 
Punashly. See Bannock. 
Punclia. See Ponca. 
Puyallup. Salsh. 
Premorski. See Ikogmut. 
Primoski. See Ikogmut. 
Pshwanwappani. See Yakama tribe. 
Pyede. See Piede. 
Quackoll. See Quacolth. 
Quacolth (1. A tribe; 2. A collective term for tribes of same language). 

Haeltz. 
Quactos. Skitt ? 
Quaks'namisb. See Squoxon. 
Quainoo (may be Quanee). 
Quaitso. Salsh. 
Quanee. Skitt? 
Quanoatinna. See Caddo tribe. 
Quantlen. Salsh. 
Quapaw. Su. 

Quaquidto (Vancouver Island, possibly Kyoquaht). Wak? 
Quatomah. Ath. 
Quatoghie. See Wyandot. 
Quatouwa. See Quatomah. 
Quatsinu. Haeltz. 
Quarreler. See Kutchin. 
Quawguult. See Quacolth. 
Quazacmash. Salsh. 
Queah. Skitt. 
Queets. See Quaitso. 
Quehaneeculta. Haeltz. 
Quehaquacolt. Haeltz. 
Quehmamish. Salsh. 
Quelanbuheche (French, 1675, doubtful). 
Quelaptoulilt. Salsh ! 

Quenaitsath (may be Kwaaksat baud of Quillehutes). 
Queniult. Salsh. 

Quentleahmish (may be Quehtlmamish). Salsh. 
Queou Coup6. See Kiskakou. 
Quera. See Queres. 
Querepisa. See Acolipissa. 
Queres (a Pueblo tribe, chief town San Domingo ; probably included 

all towns of the same language). Ker. 
Querqueliu. Chin. 
Queugue. See Cayuga. 
Quiahanles. Skitt. 



38 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Qiiiarlpi. See Colville tribe. 

Quicsultiuut. Hailtz. 

Quigate (may be Quapaw). 

Qiiillequaqua. See Willopah. 

Quioaitle. See Queniult. 

Quinet (French, 1675, Texas coast or vicinity). 

.Quinipissa. See Acolapissa. 

Quiimechaut (may be Quenaitsatb). Salsb ? 

Quinnipiac. Alg. 

Quioucobauoc. Alg. 

Qiioaqui (French, 1675, western gulf region). 

Rapid Indians. See Gros ventre. ' 

Bappahauoc. Alg. 

Raritan (division of the Unami). Alg. 

Rascal. See Rogue River Indians. 

Rat River Indians. See Vunta-kutchin. 

Rat tribes (on Koo and Kuprianofif Ids.). May be Hoodsunoo or Cake. 

Rat Indians. See Tukkuth-kutchiu ; probably also used for Vunta- 
kutchin. 

Recgawawanc (division of Wappinger 2). Alg. 

Rechahecriau (probably Cherokee). 

Red-fish Indians. See Sluacus-tinneh. 

Red-knife Indians. See Tsaltsanottine. 

Ree. See Arikara. 

Renard. See Fox. 

Rhachoabish. Salsh. 

Rhagenratka. See Neutral Nation. 

Rhea. See Arikara. 

Riccaree. See Arikara. 

Riccohockan (probably Cliferokee). 

Riguehronon. See Erie. 

River Indians (1. Collective term for Indians on lower Connecticut River ; 
2. Collective term for Indians on Hudson River; 3. Synonym for Mi s- 
sisangas). Alg. 

Robbers. See Bannock. 

Rocky Mountain Indians. See Daho-tena. 

Rogue Indians (collective term for Indians on Rogue River, Oregon). 
Ath. 

Rogue River Indians. See Rogue Indians. 

Rootdigger (an indefinite term, about identical with Bannock or Piute). 
Shos. 

Roundhead. See Tete de Boule. 

Saameua. See Mcutamux. 

Sabassa. Chmsy. 

Sac. Alg. 

Sachimer. See Sacumehu. 



QUIARLPI SANTIAM. 39 

Sacmeuh. See Sacumehu. 
SSacumehu. Salsh. 
Sacbusli. Salsh. 
iSacoqui. See Sokokee. 
Sahaptin. See Nez Perce. 
Sahehwamisli (probably Salianamish). Salsb. 
Sahmamish. Salsli. 
Sahwaunoo. See Shawnee. 
Saint Francis (chietiy Abnakis). Alg. 
Saint Helena (South Carolina). 
Saint Mary's. Kalap. 
Saint liegis (secondary tribe). Irq. 
Saki. See Sac. 
Salish. Salsli. 

Salteiir: (1. Part of Ojibwa; 2. Used for Ojibwa). Alg. 
Salt Lake Diggers. See Hocanticara. 
Samdan. Kol. 

Samilkamuigh. See Similkameen. 
Samish. See Salsh. 
Sami)ich. See Sanpits. 
Sampichya. See Sanpits. 
San Augustin del Isleta. See Isleta. 
San Buena Ventura de Cochiti. See Cochiti. 
Sandia (Pueblo town). Tan. 
San Diego de Jemes. See Jeuies. 
San Diego de Tesuque. See Tesuque. 
San Domingo (Pueblo town). Ker. 
San Estevan de Acoma. See Acoma. 
Sanetch. Salsh? 

San Felipe (Pueblo town). Ker. • 

San Francisco de Nambe. See Nanibe. 
San Geronimo de Taos. See Taos. 
Sanhican: (1. Karitan ; 2. Used for Mohawk). 
San Josef de la Laguna. See Laguna. 
San Juan de los Caballeros. See San Juan. 
San Lorenzo de Picuris. See Picuris. 
Sanpede. See Sanpits. 
San Pedro Indians (Texas). 
Sanpits (division of Utes). Shos. 
Sans Puelles. Salsh. 
Santa Ana (Pueblo town). Ker. 
Santa Clara (Pueblo town). J^er. 
Santee (South Carolina). 

Santee Sioux (collective term for eastern Sioux). Su. 
Santiam: (1; A tribe of the Waiilatpuau family; 2. Collective term for 
Santiam proper and Ahalpam). 



40 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Santo DoiniDgo. See San Domingo. 
S.ai Tomas de Abiquiu. See Abiquiu. 
Siip. See Sapoui. 
Saponi. Su? 
^Saque. See Sac. 
.tSarci. See Cberaw. 
barapina. Alg. 
Sadisto. See Spokan. 
Sarsi. See Sursee. 
Sasitka. See Satsika. 
Satcap (perbaps Seapcat). 
Satcbet. See Scadjat. 
'Satana. See Sbawnee. 
.Satsall. Salsb. 
Satsika. Alg. 
Sauk. See Sac. 
Saukauhituc. Skitt? 

Saidtern 1. Division of Ojibwa ; 2. Ojibwa. Alg. 
Sauwontiats (Piute baud). Sbos. 
Savannab: (1. Indians ou Savannab Eiver ; 2. General term for Prairie 

Indians in different regions; 3. Synonym for Sbawnee). 
Savinnar (Vancouver Islaud). 
Savannuca. See Savanogee. 

Sawanogee (part of Sbawnees living witb Creeks). Alg. 
Sawcesaw-tinneb. See Atbabasca. 
Saybaymamisb (probably Sabmamisb). Salsb. 
Sayou^tla. &ee Siuslaw. 
Sbalusb. Salsb. 
Scbagbticoke. See Scaticook. 
Scaticook (secondary tribe). Alg. 
Scbeetswisb. See Coeur d'Alene. 
Scbissatuck. See Sesbabt. 
Scbitcba. See Sitka. 
Scbitsui. See Oceur d'Alene. 
S'Clallam. See Clallam. 
Scodamisb (perbaps Squadabsb q. v.). 
Scboomadit (Vancouver Island). 
Scbwogelpi. See Colville tribe. 
Sdodobobisb. Salsb. 
Sdoqualbicb. See Snoqualmi. 
Sdoqualbusb. See Snoqualmi. 
Seapcat. Salsb. 
Secamisb. Salsb. 
Secatoag. Alg. 

Secatquonay (probably Sitka q. v.). 
biicbelt (Britisb Columbia). 



SANTO DOMINGO SHINNECOCK. 41 



Secotan. Alg. 

Secowoconioco. Alg. 

Sedeutary Chukclii.s. See Yuit. 

8ee])ohs-hauiu-iuakakee. See Maiidau. 

Segata-Jeniie (division of Apaches). Atb. 

Segwallitsu. Salsh. 

yc-jenne (division of Apaches). Ath. 

8elawig'uiut (division of Kiyiginut). Esk. 

Seminole. Musk. 

Seneca. Irq. 

Senijextee. Saish. 

Sequin. Alg. 

Seretee. See Santee. 

Seshaht. Wak. 

Sessitong". See Sisseton. 

Setauket. Alg. 

Seuuowkahtah. See Onondaga. 

Seuvarits (division of Utes). Shos. 

Seviche. See Shivwits. 

Sewee (South Carolina). 

Shackahonea. Irq. 

Shakie (perhaps Sac). 

Shaktoligmut (division of Mahlemut). Esk. 

Shalattoo. Salsh. 

Shallee. See Ootlashoot Tushepaw. 

Shanwappom. Sec Yakama tribe. 

Sharha. See Cheyenne. 

Shastacosta. Ath. 

Shaway. Sec Cheyenne. 

Sliawnees. Alg. 

Slieastuckle (probably Siuslaw). 

Shebasha. See Sabassa. 

Sheberetche. See Seuvarits. 

Siiechart. See Seshaht. 

Shemelakomuch. See Similkameen. 

Slienonia. See Moqui. 

Sheep Indian. See Abbato-tenah. 

Sheepeater. See Tucarica. 

Slieshapootosh. See Nascapee. 

Sheshatapooshoish. See Nascapee. 

Shetiinasha. Chit. 

Shewhapmuth. See Shooshwap. 

Shirrydika 1 (division of Washaiki) ; 2 See Arapho. 

Shienne. See Cheyenne. 

Shimaiwiva. See Chemehueva. 

Shiunecock. Aler. 



42 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Shinumo. See Moqui. 

Sbis Inday (used for Apache, but probably Taimah-shissen). Ath. 

Shistacoostee. See Sliastacosta. 

Shiverets. See Seuvarits. 

Shivwits. Shos. 

Shiwi. See Zulii, 

Shoalwater Bay. See Artsmilsh. 

Shoccori (North Carolina). 

Shockey (perhaps Sac). • 

Shoe Indians. See Ahwahawa. 

Shomamish. Salsh. 

Shoueanawetowah. See Cayuga. 

Shooshwap. Salsh. 

Shoshokie. See Tussawehe. 

Shoshoni. See Washaiki. 

Shoshoteos. See Tussawehe. 

Shonagan. Skitt. 

Shottinamish. Salsh. 

Shoto. Chin? 

Shouaguan. Skitt. 

Shyik. Shap. 

Shwoyelpi. See Colville tribe. 

Siaywa. Shap. 

Sicaog. Alg. 

Sicanee. See Thekenneh. 

Sickename. See Seguin. 

Sicnahuttee. Kol. 

Sierra Blanca (division of Apaches). Ath. 

Sikseso-tene. See Sixes. 

Siksikhoa. See Satsika. 

Silela (Oregon). 

Silla (Pueblo town). Ker. 

Similkameeu. Salsh. 

Sinniker. See Seneca. 

Sinakemish.. Salsh. 

Siuipoual. See Sans Puelles. 

Sinnager. See Seneca. 

Sinniki. See Seneca. 

Sinkiuse. Salsh. 

Sinpavelish. See Sans Puelles. 

Sinpohellechach. See Sans Puelle. 

Sinselan. Sec Siuslaw. 

Sinspeelish. See Nespelum. 

Sintsink (division of Wappingers 2). Alg. 

Sisseton (division of Sioux). Su. 

Sistasoone. See Sisseton. 



SHINUMO SNOQUALAMUKE. 43 

Sitka: (1. A Koluschari tribe; 2. Incorrectly used for Satsika). 
Sitka-quonay. See Sitka. 
Sitkliinskoi. See Koluschiin family. 
Sitleece (British Columbia). Atli? 
Siuslaw. Yak. 

Siwanoy (division of Wappingers 2). Alg. 
Siwiuowe. See Sbawnee. 
Sixes. Atb. 

Six Nations. See Iroquois. 
Skaddal. Salsb? 
Skadjat. Salsb. 
Skaget. See Skadjat. 
Skainamisb. Salsb. 

Skamoynumacli (division of Okinagans-Ross). Salsb. 
Skat-kwabn. See Skut-kwabu. 
Skatkmiscbi. See CtBur d'Alene. 
Skeawamish or Skeywbamisb (same?). Salsb. 
Skedan. Skitt. 

Skeetsomisb (may be Coeur d'Alene). 
Skena. (Collective.) Cbrasy. 
Sketch-bugb. See Coeur d'Alene. 
Skilloot (Lewis & Clarke). Cbin. 
Skinpaw. Sba ? 
Skitsaib. See Coeur d'Alene. 
Skittagat. Skitt. 
Skittega. See Skittagats. 
Skodamisb. Salsb. 
Skoffie. See Nascapee. 
Skokomisb. Salsb. 
Skopamisb. Salsb. 
Skoylpeli. See Colville tribe. 
Skucstanajurap (probably Sk'tablejum). Salsb. 
Skitkwabn. Kol. 
.Sk'tablejum. Salsb. 
Skwale. See Nisqualli. 
Slave. See Ettcba-ottine. 

Slave Indians: (1. Acbeto-tinneb; 2. Collective. Atb. 
Slowercuss-Dinai. See Sluacus-tinneb. 
Sluacustinneb. Atb. 
S'Magemut. See Magemut. 
Smes. See Smeush. 
Smeusb. Salsb. 
Snake (general term for northern Shoshonian bands, especially the 

Wasbaiki and Bannocks). Sbos. 
Snohomish. Salsb. 
Snoqualamuke. See Snoqualmi. 



44 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

• 

Suoquamish. Salsb. 

Soak. Salsb. 

Sobabruc. Salsb. 

Sockamuke. Salsb. 

Sogup (divisiou of Utes). Sbos. 

Sokokee. Alg. 

Songisb. Salsb. 

Sounoutouau. See Seneca. 

Soiiuoutoue-ronnon. See Seneca. 

Sonusbogwatowar. See Cayuga. 

Soosooit tcoUective). Esk. 

Soquatuck. See Sokokee. 

Sorcier. See Nipissing. 

Sorsi. See Sursee. 

Sotto. See Ojibwa. 

Souriquois. See Micmac. 

Soulier Noir. See Abwabawa. 

Souteu. See Ojibwa. 

Soutbois. See Uzutiube. 

Sowbegan. Alg. 

Soyitinu. Haeltz. 

Spokau. Salsb. 

Squadabsb. Salsb. 

Squalleabmisb. See Nisqualli. 

Squalz. See Nisqualli. 

Squannaroo (Lewis & Clarke). Salsb. 

Squawkibow. See Neutral Nation. 

Squawmisbt. Salsb. 

Squiaelp. See Colville tribe. 

Squhiamisb. See Squonamish. 

Squiuters. See Kutcbin. 

Squonamisb. Salsb. 

Squoxon. Salsb. 

Stackiu. See Stabkeen. 

Stactalejabsb. Salsb. 

Stabkeen. Kal. 

Staitan (probably Crow). 

Staklamisb. Salsb. 

Staktamisb. Salsb. 

St-ca-misb. See Secamisb. 

Stegarakie. Irq? 

Stebtsasamisb. Salsb. 

Stebcbasamisb. See Stebtsasamisb. 

Steilacoomamisb. See Stillacum. 

Stekin. See Stabkeen. 

Stick. See Kbununab. 



SNOQUAMISH TAGNO. ^ 45 

Stickeeii. See Stahkeen. 

Stietshoi. See Cceiir d'Alene. 

Stikeen. See Stahkeen. 

Stillacuin. Salsli. 

Stitcheosawmish. See SteLtsasamish. 

Stotuchwamish. See Stolutsivliamisli. 

Stolakwamisli. See Stillacum. 

Stolutswbamish. Salsh. 

Stone Sioux. See Assiniboin. 

Stono. North Carolina. 

Strongbow. See Edchawtawhoot-tinneh. 

Srootlemamish. See S'hotlmamish. 

Suanaimuch. Salsh ? 

Sumas. Salsh? 

Sundown. See Samdan. 

Suppai (Cosninos ?). 

Suquamish. Salsh. 

Sursee. Ath. 

Susquehanna. See Conestoga. 

Sussee. See Sursee. 

Suthsett (Vancouver Island), Probably Seshaht. 

Svernofftsi. See Ogleinut. 

Svhet damsh (may be Swedebish). Salsh. 

Swalash. Salsh. 

Swedebish. Salsh. 

Swinomish. Salsh. 

Swoquabish. See Suquamish. 

Swulchabsh. Salsh. 

S'yilalko absh. Salsh. 

Tabeguachi. See Timpanagats. 

Tabenache. See Timpanagats. 

Tabequache. See Timpanagats. 

Tabewache. See Timpanagats. 

Tabiachi. See Timpanagats. 

Tabittiki. See Abittibi. 

Tabuat Utah (probably Timpanagats). Shos. 

Tacco (named as a Koloschian tribe, but may be the Tahkotiuneh. 

Tachie. See loni. 

Taculli (collective term for a group of tribes on the headwaters of Fraser 

River, British Columbia). Ath. 
Taculta. Haeltz. 
Tadousac. Alg. 
Taeeteetaw. Kol. 
Taensa. Taen. 

Taensapaoa.* See Tangipahoa. 
Tagno. See Tano. 



46 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Tahano (probably Tafio). 

Tahkah (probably Toquaht). 

Tahkali. See Taculli. 

Tahko-tinneh (division of Khununali). Ath. 

Tahos. See Taos. 

Tabzee. See Apache. ^ 

Taigh. SeeTy\g\\. ' » 

Tairtla. See Tyigh. 

Tait. Salsb. 

Taitinapain. Shap. 

Taiyayauokhotana (division of Kaiyuhkhotana). Ath. 

Takaiyakhotaua (division of Kaiyuhkhotana). Ath. 

Takayaksen. See Kaiyuhkhotapa. 

Takilma. Tak. 

Takoo. See Tacco. 

Takuth-kutchin. See Tukkuth-kutchin. 

Talcotin. See Tantin. 

Taldushduu-dudte. Ath? 

Tallgwee. See Alligewi. 

Talquatee. Kol. 

Talusa (French, 1680, probabjy Arkansas or Louisiana). 

Tamaroa. Alg. 

Tamp Pah Utah. See Yampaticara. 

Tauai. See Athapascan family. 

Tanana. See Tenan-kutchin. 

Tangipahoa. 

Tanico. See Tunica. 

Tankiteke (division of Wappingers 2). Alg. 

Tanna-kutshi {msky be Tenan-kutchin). 

Tannah-shissen (division of Apaches). Ath. 

Tafio (collective term for several Pueblo towns of same language). Tan. 

Tanta-kwau. See Tongas. 

Tantawats. See Chemehueva. 

Tautsawhot-dinneh. See Tsaltsan-ottine. 

Taos: (1. A Pueblo to wn—Tanoan family; 2. A Pueblo "nation "in 1634, 

with Taos Pueblo as chief town ; 3. Division of the Utes, named 

from habitat in Taos Mountains. 
Tappan (division of the Unami). Alg. 
Taranqua (probably Carankawa). 
Taracone. See Yuta-jenne. 
Taraha (French 1675, doubtful). 
Tarreormeut (may be Kittegarute). 
Tasauwihi. See Tussawehe. 
Tash Ute. See Taos Ute. 
Taskirero. See Tuscarora. 
Tatanchok-kutchin (probably Tutchohn-kutchin). 



TAHANO — TENUCTAW. 47 

Tathzey-kutcbin (probably Tatsah-kutchin). 

Tatla (British Columbia, may be Thetliotiu). Ath! 

Tatlit-kutchin (probably Tatsah-kutchin). 

Tatsah-kutchin. Ath. 

Tatschigmut. See Unaligmut. 

Tatshiautiu. Ath. 

Tatuskey. See Morautacund. 

Tautiu. Ath. 

Tauxeueiit. Alg. 

Tauxitaniau. Irq? 

Tawaa. See Ottawa. 

Tawacoiii (division of Wichitas). Gad. 

Ta"wa"zbika (part of the Quapaw). Su. 

TayWaugh. See Tehua 1. 

Tchede-tene. See Chetco. 

Tchinkitane. See Koluschan. 

Tchinkitanien. See Koluschan. 

Tchioumaqui. Louisiana. 

Tchougatchi-Konaga. See Chugachigmut. 

Tchougazez Esquimaux. See Chugachigmut. 

Tchouktchi Asiatique. See Yuit. 

Tchutlestchum-teue. See Chetlessenten. 

Tdha-kuttchin (may be Vunta-kutchin, or Tukkuth-kutchin). 

Teahawrehhogeh. See Mohawk. 

Tebechya. See Timpanagats. 

Teet. See Tait. 

Tt'guinateo. Irq! 

Tegua. See Tehua. 

Tohaniu-kutchin. See Knaiakhotana. 

Tehowneanyohent. See Seneca. 

Tehua: (1. Collective term for several Pueblo towns of one language; 

2. Town of the Moquis). Tan. 
Tejua (part of Apaches, according to Conde, but may be intended for 

part of Pueblos). 
Telategmut (division of Ikogmut). Esk. 
Temiscamiug. Alg. 

Temoksee. (South of Jacobsville, Nev.; Piute Band). Shos. 
Temoria. See Tamaroa. 
Tempanahgoe. See Timpanagats. 
Tf nan-kutchin. Ath. 
TiMiina. Shap. 
Tenuuth-kutchin. Ath. 
Teupenuy Ute. See Timpanagats. 
Tensaw. See Taensa. 
Tennai. See Navajo. 
Tenuctaw. Haeltz. 



48 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Tesuque (Pueblo town). Tan. 

Tetau. 8ee Comanche. 

Tete de Boule (baud near head of Ottawa Kiver, Canada). Alg. 

Tete Platte. See Choctaw. 

Tewictovee. See Miami. 

Texas. See loni. 

Thekenneh (may be Daho-tena). Ath. 

Thetliotin. Atli. 

Thickwood ludiaus. See Edchawtawhoot-tiuneh. 

Thiuthonha. See Teton. 

Thiroki. See Cherokee. 

Thlingcha-tiuneh. Ath. 

Thlinket. See Koluschan family. 

Thljegouchotaua. See Kaiyuhkhotana. 

Thuaina. See Athapascan family. 

Thoigarikkah. See Nez Perce (1). 

Thynne. See Athapascan family. 

Tigua. /S'ee Tehua (1). 

Tiguex (probably Tehua) (1). 

Tillamook. Salsh. 

Timpaiavats (division of Utes). Shos. 

Timpanagats (division of Utes). Shos. 

Tijupanaguchya. See Timpanagats 

Timpanogo. See Timi)anagats. 

Timpashauwagotsits (Piute band). Shos. 

Timucua. Timu. 

Tinu6 or Tinueh. See Athapascan family. 

Tintonha. See Teton. 

Tionontati. Irq. 

Titlogat People (probably Tutchohn-kutchin, or part of them). Ath. 

Tiwadima" (division of the Quapaws). Su. 

Tiyakhunin. See Uuungun. 

Tjuiccu-jenne (division of Apaches). Ath. 

T'kitske. See Kaiyuhkhotana. 

Tlaoquatch. See Clahoquaht. 

Tlatscanai. Ath. 

Tliukit. See Koluschan family. 

Tnai. See Knaiakhotana. 

Tuaina. See Knaiakhotana. 

Toanhooch. See Twaua. 

Tobacco Nation. See Tionontati. 

Tocwogh. Alg. 

Tohotaenrat. Irq. 

Tokali. See Taculli. 

Tolkotiii (probably Tootootni). 

Tomoco. See Timucua. 



TLSUQUE TSIMSHEKAN-. 49 

Tomgass. /S'ee Tongas. 

Toiicawa. Tonk. 

Tongas. Kol. 

Tonginga. *SVe Ta"wa"zhika. 

Tonto (1. A Yuman tribe; 2. Vinni ettinenne Apaches). 

Too. Skitt. 

Tookariccah. /S'ee Tiicarica. 

Tootootni (111 Oregon, not Tataten of California). Atli. 

Topingii. See Ta"vva"zhika. 

Toquaht. Wak. 

To<iuatax. iSee Toquabt. 

Toqnima (head of Reese River Valley, Nevada; Piute band). Shos. 

Toriman. See Tiwadima". 

Torountogoats (Gosiats band). Shos. 

Tosawee. See Tussawehe. 

Tosiwitche. See Tussawehe. 

Totero. See Tutelo. 

Totiri. See Tutelo. 

Tototin (1. Tootootin of Oregon ; 2. Tataten of California). Ath. 

Touchoiita-kutchin. See Tutchohn-kutchin. 

Toustchipa. See Tushepaw. ^ 

Towahha. Salsh. 

Towaccaro. See Tawacoui. 

Toweahge. See Wichita. 

Toweash. See Wichita. 

Towiac. See Tawacoui. 

Toy Piute (Piute band at Lower Carson Lake, Nevada). Shos. 

T'quawquamish. Salsh. 

Trats^-kutshi (named as a part of " Tathzey-kutchin." Probably Tatsah- 

kutchin). Ath. 
Trij)auiec. Alg.? 

True Thnaina. See Knaiakhotoma. 
Tsalakee. See Cherokee. 
T8altsan-ottiu(5. Ath. 
Tsatsuotin. Ath. 
Tsauwarits. See Tsowvaraits. 
Tschgatzi. See Chugachignmt. 
Tschinkaten. See Tenan-kutchin? 

T^schnagmut (collective term for Kaviagmnt and Unaligmut). Esk. 
Tschugatschi. See Chugachignmt. 
Tscliugazzi. See Chugachigmut. 
Tsihailish. See Chehalis. 
Tsilco-tinneh. Ath. 

Tsillane (division of Okinagans (Ross). Salsh. 
Tsillawdawhoot-tinneh. See Edchawtawhoot-tinneh. 
Tsimsheean. See Chimsian. 
1292 T N 4 



50 Tribal names and synonyms. 

Tsoigah-rikkah. See Nez Perce 1. 

Tsomass. Bee Sumas. 

Tsonnontouau. See Seneca. 

Tsouwaraits (Piute baud ; formerly four bands). Shos. 

Tsuh-tyuh. See Isa-ttine. 

Ttynai. See Athapascan family. 

Tualiti. See Atfalati. 

Tuanoh. See Twana. 

Tucarica (named as a distinct tribe, but may be a part of Washaiki). 

Shos. 
Tuinontatek. See Tionontati. 

Tukkuth-kutchin (mentioned by Dall in 1877, but not in 1885). Ath. 
Tukuarikai. See Tucarica. 
Tulkepa (said to be Tonto, 1). Yum. 
Tumwater Indians. Chin. 
Tungass. See Tongas. 
Tun Ghaase. See Tongas. 
Tunica. 

Tunich. See Athapascan family. 
Tuuxis. Alg. 
Tusc. See Tuscarora. 
Tuscarora. Irq. 
ITushepaw (1 collective term used by Washaiki, &c., for Indians south 

and southeast of them ; 2 Used by Lewis & Clarke as the name of 

a tribe, perhaps the Salish tribe). 
'Tuski. See Yuit. 
'T?issawehe. Shos. 
Tutchohn-kutchiu. Ath. 
Tutelo. Su. 

Tuwurints. Gosiats band. Shos. 
Twahtwah. See Miami. 
"Twakauhah. See Neutral Nation. 
Twaua. Salsh. 

Twankenna. See Neutral Nation. 
'Twightwee. See Miami. 
Twovrokanae. See Tawaconi. 
'Tyigh (Teaxtkni of Klamaths). Sha. 
a^Tainuiuts (Piute band). Shos. 
IJ'chee. Uch. 
Ucletah. See Yuclulaht. 
Uclenu. Haeltz. 

"Ugagogmut (division of Ogulmut). Esk. 
Ugalakmut (named by Dall in 1877, but not in 1885). Esk. 
Ugalentsi. See Ugalakmut. 
Ugalyakhmutsi. See Ugalakmut. 
Ugashigmut (division of Ogulmut). Esk. 



TSOIGAH-RIKKAH WABINGA. 51 

Ugaxpaxti (divisiou of the Quapaws). Su. 

TJ^tiulta. See Yucliilaht. 

Uiukarets (Piute band). Sbos. 

TJintats (division of the Utes). Shos. 

Ukaj^enuit (division of Iko<^inut). Esk. 

Ukwogmiit (division of Okeeogmut). Esk. 

Ulseah. See Alsea. 

Ultschna. See Kanifio-mut. 

Uhikagmut. See Kaiyuhkhotana. 

Ulukakhotaua (division of Kaiyuhkhotana. Ath. 

Uinano. See Yumano. 

UmntiHa. Slia. 

Umpqua. Atli. 

Unakliotana. Atli. 

Uuahicbtgo (division of the Delawares). Alg. 

TJnalakligemut (division of Unaligmut). Esk. 

Unalaska. See Khagantayakhunkhin. 

Unaleet. See Unaligmut. 

Unaligmut. Esk. 

Uuami (division of the Delawares). Alg. 

Uncowa. Alg. 

Uucpapa (division of the Teton Sioux). Su. 

Unkakaniguts (Piute band). Shos. 

Uukapanukuints (Piute band). Shos. 

Unungun. Unu. 

Upatsesatuch. See Opechisaht. 

Upper Cherokees (part of Cherokees formerly living in mountains in 

western lN"orth Carolina and on headwaters of Tennessee River). 

Irq. . 
Upper Chinook. See Watlala. 
Upsaroka. See Crow. 
Uqluxlatuch (probably Yuclulaht). 
Ushery (probably Catawba). 
Uskeemi. See Eskimauan family. 
Utah. See Ute. 
Utaouax. See Ottawa. 
Utawa. See Ottawa. 
Ute. Shos.' 

Utumpaiats (Piute band). Shos. 
Uzutiuhe (part of the Quapaws). Su. 
Yanta-kutshi. See Vunta-kutchin. 
Vaquero (divisiou of Apaches). Ath. 
Vermillion (probably division of Kickapoos). Alg. 
Vinni-ettinenne (division of Apaches). Ath. 
Yunta-kutchin. Ath. 
Wabinga. See Wappinger. 



52 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

Wacamuc. Kalap ! 

Waccamaw (South Carolina). 

Waccanessisi. Cbiu, 

Waccoa. See Woccon. 

Wachuset. Alg. 

Waco. Cad. 

Wahclella Shahala (may be Watlala). Chin? 

Wahkiacum. Chin. 

Wahowpiim. See Clickatat. 

Wahpapi. See Walpahpee. 

AVahpatong. See Wahpeton. 

TTahpeton (part of Sioux). Su. 

Wahpecuta (part of Sioux). Su. 

Wahshawshee. See Osage. 

Wahtohtana. See Oto. 

Wakashan family (west coast of Vancouver Island). 

Wakynakaine. See Akiuagan. 

Wallahpah. See Willopah. 

Wallapai. See Hualapai. 

Wallawalla. Sha. 

Walker Eiver Piute. See Ocki Piute. 

Walkiupahpee. See Walpalipee. 

Walpahpee Snakes (Shoshonian band in Eastern Oregon). Shos. 

Wampanoag. Alg. 

Wanami. See Unanii. 

Waoranec (division of the Munsees). Alg. 

Wapanachki (1. Delawares, Mohegans, and connected tribes; 2. Ab- 

naki confederacy). Alg. 
Wapatoota. See Wahpecuta. 
Wapekute. See Wahpecuta. 
Wappanoo. See Wappinger. 
Wappatoo Indians. See Atfalati. 
Waj)pinger (tribe and confederacy). Alg. 
Warareereeka (one of three divisions of Snakes (Ross); maybe War^- 

dika, division of Bannocks). Shos. 
Warm Spring Indians: (1. Apache band, probably part of Se-jenne ; 2. 

Collective term for Indians on Warm Spring reservation, Oreg.). 
Warranawonkong (division of the Munsees). Alg. 
Warrasqueoc. Alg. 
Wasco. Chin. 
Washaiki. Shos. 
Wasbakeek. See Washaiki. 
Washawshe. See Osage. 
Washita. Louisiana. 
Washo. Wash. 
Wassaw. See Waxsaw. 



WACAMUC WICHITA. 63 

Wat-Coosa (North Carolina). 

Wateree. Catb. 

Watlala (probably a collective term). Chin. 

Wattasoou. See Ahwahawa. 

Waulatpu. See Cayuse. 

AVawarsiuk (division of the Munsees. Alg. 

Wawyachtonoc (division of Mohegans, 3). Alg. 

Waxsaw (North Carolina). 

Wea (formerly part of the Miamis). Alg. 

Weauoc. Alg. 

Weandah. See Cherokee. 

Weber Ute (local name of a band of Utes). Shos. 

Wecquaesgeek (division of Wappingers, 2). Alg. 

Weitletoch. Haeltz. 

Wekeemoch. Haeltz. 

Welsh Indians (applied to several tribes, especially the Mandans). 

Weminuche. See Wiminuiuts. 

Wenatshepura (saicj to be the Pisquows, but both names are mentioned 
as distinct in treaty of 1855). 

AVenrorouo (Onenrohrouuon, lived with Hurons ; not to be confounded 
with Ouiouenronnon or Cayugas). Irq? 

Weopomeoc. Alg. 

Wepawaug. Alg. 

Wequehacbke. See Wappinger, 1. 

Werowocomoco. Alg. 

AVestenhuc (division of Mohegans, 3; afterward called Stockbridges : 
Euttenber). Alg. 

AVesto. North Carolina. 

Western Aleut. See Nikhukhuin. 

Western Snake. See Wihinasht. 

AYetapahato. Head of Platte River, allied with Kiowas and sup- 
posed to be part of the Comanches (Lewis and Clarke). Shos. I 

AVewarka. Haeltz. 

Wewarkum (not Wewarka). Haeltz. 

AVharcoot. Salsli. ? 

AVhashwhypum. See Clickatat. 

Wheelpoo. See Colville tribe. 

Whelappa. See Willopah. 

Whilapa. See AVillopah. 

AVhinega. See Hunah. 

Whiscaw (with Yakama confederacy). 

AVbite Mountain Apache. See Coyotero. 

Whonkentea. Irq. ? 

AVhulwhypum, See Clickatat. 

Wiccaninish. Salsh ? 

Wichita. Cad. 



54 TRIBAL NAMES AND SYNONYMS. 

'Wico. See Waco. 

Wicocoinoco. Alg. 

Wicomesse (probably Wicocoraoco). Alg. 

Wiekagjoc (divisiou of Mohegans 3). Alg. 

Wihiuasht (band of Saakes -west of Baunocks; name now obsolete). 

Shos. 
Willetpo Chopunnish. See Cayuse. 
Willopah. Ath. 

Wiminuints (division of Utes). Shos. 
"Wiudaw (probably "Wyandot). 
Wingandacoa. See Secotan. 
Winnas Snake. See Wihinasht. 
Winnebago. Su. 
Winneraucca Indians (collective term for Pintes under Winnemucca). 

Slios. 
Winuepesaukee. Alg. 
Winootchi (named as a tribe of Washington Territory, but may be a 

collective term). 
Winyaw. South Carolina. 
Wisacky. See Waxsaw. 
Wisham. Chin. 
Wishtenatin. Ath. 
Wasscopam. See Wasco. 

Wisswham. See Wisham. , 

Waccon. Catb. 

Womenunche. See Wiminuints. 
W^ongunk. Alg. 

Wood people. See Haian-kutchin. 
W'tassone. See Oneida. 
Wundat. See Wyandot. 
Wyandot (a secondary tribe formed of the Hiirons and other tribes 

confederated after being driven from Canada). Irq. 
Wyanoke. See Weanoc. 
Xicarilla. See Tannah-shissen. , 

Xumaia. See Yuma. 
Yabipaee. See Yavapai. 
Yacon. Yak. 

Yagats (Piute band). Shos. 
Yahshute. See Joshua. 

Yahooskin Snakes (Shoshonian body in Eastern Oregon). Shos. 
Yakama (tribe and confederacy). Shap. and Salish. 
Yakutat. Kol. 
Yaltasse. See Yatassee. 
Yamassee. Musk. 
Yamel. Kalap. 
Yamhill. See Yamel. 



wico — zuNi. 65 

YaiDkallie. See Yonkalla. 

Yampapa, See Yainpaticara. 

Yampaticara (Shoshoniaii body, sometimes classed as part of Utes). 

Shos. 
Yampao. See Yavipai. 
Yampa Ute. See Yampaticara. 
Yaucton of the Plains (probably Yanktouais). 
Yanctoii of the South. See Yankton. 
Yankton (division ot Sioux). Su. 
Yanktonais (division of Sioux). Su. 
Yasucbau. See Joshua. Ath. 
Yatassee. Cad. 
Yattapo. ;S'er Yatassee ? 
Yavipai. Yum. 
Yazoo. Musk ! 

Yeletpo-Chopunnish. See Cayuse. 
Yellowknife Indians (1. xVh-teua; 2. Tsaltsan-ottin^). 
Yendat. See Wyandot. 
Yengetong. See Yankton. 
Yeopim. Alg. 
Yeppe (wander on Upper Platte and in mountains; supposed to be part 

of Comanches). Lewis and Clarke. Shos.? 
Yoacomoco (probably Secowocomoco). Alg. 
Yonkalla. Kalap. 
Youiccoue. See Yacon. 
Youmatalla. See Umatilla. 
Yowani. Musk. 
Yuclulaht. Wak. 
Yuculta. See Taculta. 
Tuit. Esk. 

Yukon Indians. See Kutcha-Kutchin. 
Yukonikhotana. See Unakhotana. 
Yuma. Yum. 

Yumaao (division of Apaches!) Ath. 

Y'uquachee. Ath. ' 

Yuta. See Ute. 

Y utahkah. See Navajo. 

Yuta-jenne (1. Apache name of Navajos ; 2. An Apache band). Ath. 

Yutanund. Alg. 

7i ludia. See Sandia. 

Zia. See Silla. 

Zufii. Zun. 



;-,LVKNTH ANM'JAl.. REPCPT PLATK 1. 








■s, 





/is^ 



^57 



SMITHSONIAN I X S T I T t; I I < ) V 
'tr 

BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DI HECTOR 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 



OF THE 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES 



BY 



JAMES (CONSTANT IN E PILLING 




WASHINGTON 

GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
18 02 



LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 



Sinitlisonian iiistitntioii — Buieau of etbiiolojiy. Catalogue of liu- 
jiuistic niaiiusciii)ts in the library of the IJuicau of «'thiioIoj;y. By 
James C. Pilling. 

lu Bureau of ctliiiology first aunual report; lialf-title as above, p. ons, text jip. 
555-577, Washington, 1881, royal 8-. 

Issued separately with cover title as folloAvs: 

Catalogue | of | linguistic manuscripts | in the | library of the Bureau 
of ethnology | by | James C Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual 
report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | fVignette| j 

Washington | Government printing office | 1881 

Cover title as above, uo iuside title, half-title as under entry next above p. 553^ 
text pp. 555-577, royal 8"-. One huiulred c'0])ies issued. 

Smithsonian institution — Bureau of ethnology j J, W. Powell cli 
rector | Proof-sheels | of a | bibliogiaphy | of | the languages | of the 
; North American Indian.s | by | James Constantine Pillijig | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice (signed ,T. W. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4, 1884) 
]!)). v-viii, introduction pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of lil)raries re- 
lerred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 
1-839. additions and corrections pp. 841-lOyO, index of languages and dialects pp. 
1091-1135, plates, 4^. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or 
first wor<l of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of 
the sheet only. 

Smithsonian institution | Biiieau of ethnology: J, W. Powell, di- 
rector I Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling I [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government i^rinting office j ISST 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (April 20. 1887) pp. iii-v, 
text pp. 1-109, chron(dogic index pp. 111-116, 8 fac-similes. 8 -. An edition of 1(X1 
copies was issued in royal S'-^. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di 
rector | Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Constan 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso Idank 1 1. preface (Se]>tember 1, 1887) 
pp. iii-v, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8^. An edition of 10() copies 
was issued in royal 8^. 

Ill 



IV LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES, BUREAU OP^ ETHNOLOGY. 

Smitlisonian institution | Bnreau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- 
rector I Bibliography | of the | Iroquoian languages | by | James Con- 
stantine Pilling- | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1888 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (December 15, 1888) 
pp. iii-vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 fac- 
similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8'. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J, W. Powell, di- 
rector I Bibliography | of the | Muskhogean languages | by ( James 
Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1889 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (May 1.5, 1889) pp. 
iii-v, text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 10.5-114, 8 . An edition of 100 copies 
issued iu royal 8'-\ 

Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot's Indian bible | and | on his other 
translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts | 
Extract from a "Bibliography of the Algonquian languages"] 
[Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 181)0 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-.58, 21 fac similes, 
royal 8'^. Forms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algoniiuian languages, title 
of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W, Powell, di- 
rector I Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James 
Constantine Pilling | [A'ignette] | 

Washington | Government i)rinting office | 1891 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (June 1, 1891) pp. 
iii-iv, introduction p. v, index of languages pp. vii-viii, list of fac-similes pp. ix-x, 
text pp. 1-549, addenda pp. 551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614, 82 fac-similes, 8°. 
An edition of 100 copies issued iu royal 8°. 



PREFACE 



Tlic series of bibli()iira])liies of wliicli this forms the sixth nniiil)er 
was stiirte<l in 1SS7 witli the Eskiinauaii as the tirst issue. They are 
all based ii]>oii the "Proof Sheets of a Bibliography of the Nortli Amer- 
ican Languages," by the same author, i)rinted in 1<SS5. in an edition of 
JIO ('oi»ies. Titles and collations of these works will be found on a 
previous page. 

The next in order of ]»ublication are to be the Chinookan (including 
the Chinook Jargon), the Salishan, and the Wakaslian. all of which are 
well under way. 

The name adopted by the Bureau of P^thnology for tliis tamily of 
languages (Athapascan) is that used by Gallatin in the American An- 
tiquarian Society's Transactions, vol. ii, 183(). It has been objected to 
by a number of missionaries — students of various dialects of this family 
in the Northwest — but priority demanded that Gallatin's name should 
be retained. It is derived from the Jake of the same name, which, ac- 
cording to Father Lacombe, signifies "place of hay and reeds." 

The following account of the distribution of the Athapascan people 
is taken from Powell's "Indian Linguistic Families," in the Seventh 
Annual Keport of the Bureau of Ethnology: 

The boundaries of the Athapascan family, as now understood, are best given under 
three primary groups: Northern, Pacitic, and Southern. 

Xorthern group. — This includes all the Athapascan tribes of British North America 
and Alaska. In the former region tlie Athapascans occupy most of the western 
interior, being bounded on thf north by the Arctic Eskimo, who inhabit a narrow 
strip of coast; on the east by the Eskimo of Hudson's Bay as far south as Churchill 
Eiver, south of Avhich river the country is occupied by Algtmquian tribes. On the 
south the Athapascan tribes extended to the main ridge between the Athapasca and 
.S;iskatchewan rivers, where they met Algonquiau tribes; west of this area they 
were bounded on the south liy Salishan tribes, the limits of whose territory on Era- 
ser River and its tributaries appear on Tolmie and Dawson's map of 1884. On the 
west, in British Columbia, the Athapascan tribes nowhere reach the coast, being cut 
off by the Wakashan, Salishan, and Chimmesyan families. 

The interior of Alaska is cliielly occni)ied by tribes of this family. Eskimo tribes 
have entroached somewhat upon the interior along the Yukon, Kuskokwim, Kowak, 
and Noatak rivers, reaching on the Yukon to somewhat below Shagelnk Island and 
on the Kuskokwim nearly or (luite to Kohnakoft' Kedoubt. U]ion the two latter 
they reach (|uite to their heads. A few Kutthiu tribes are (or have been) north of 
the Porcupine and Yukon rivers, but until I'ecently it has not been known that they 
extended north beyond the Yukon and Romanzoff mountains. Explorations of 



VI PREFACE. 

Lieut. Stoney, in 1885, establisli the fact that the region to the north of those luoun- 
taius is occupied by Athapascan tribes, and the map is colored accordingly. Only 
in two places in Alaska do the Athapascan tribes reach the coast: the K'naia-kho- 
tana, on Cook's Inlet, and the Ahthena, of Cooper River. 

Pacific groitp.—lJn\U<.e the tribes of the Northern group, most of those of the Pacific 
o'roup have removed from their priscan habitats since the advent of the white r.ace. 
The Pacific group embraces the following: Kwalhio(iua, formerly on Willopah River, 
Washington, near the lower (Chinook; Ovvilapsh, formerly between Shoalwater Bay 
and the heads of the Cholialis River, Washington, the territory of these two tribes 
being practically continuous; Tlatscanai, formerly on a smiill stream on the north- 
west side of Wapatoo Island. Gibbs was inforuied by an obi Indian that this tribe 
"formerly owned the prairies on theTsihalis at the mouth of the Skukumchuck, but, 
on the failure of game, left the country, crossed the Columbia River, and occupied 
the mountains to the south," a statement of too uncertain character to be depended 
upon; the Athapascan tribes now on the Grande Ronde and Siletz Reservntioas, 
Oregon, whose villages on and near the coast extended from Coquille River south- 
ward to the California line, including, among others, the Upper Coquille, Sixes, 
Euchre, Creek, Joshua, Tutu tfinne, anil otlier "Rogue River" or "Tou-touten 
bands," Chasta Costa, Galice Creek, Naltunne tfumc, and Chetco villages; the Atha- 
pascan villages formerly on Smith River and tributaries, California; those villages 
extending southward from Smith River along tiie California coast to the mouth of 
Klamath River; the Hupa villages or "clans" formerly on Lower Trinity River, 
California; the Kenesti or Wailakki (2), located as follows: "They live along the 
western slope of the Shasta Mountains, from North Eel River, above Round Valley, 
to Hay Fork; along Eel aud Mad rivers, extending down the latter about to Low 
Gap; also on Dobbins and Larrabie creeks;" and Saiaz, who "formerly occupied 
the tongue of land jutting down between Eel River and Van Duseu's Fork." 

Southern group. — Includes the Navajo, Apache, and Lipan. Engineer Jos6 Cortez, 
one of the earliest authorities on these tribes, writing in 1799, defines the boundaries 
of the Lipan and Apache as extending north and south from 29^ N. to 36^ N., and 
east aud west from 99^ W. to 114^ W. ; in other words, from central Texas nearly 
to the Colorado River in Arizona, where they met tribes of the Yuma stock. The 
Lipan occupied the eastern part of the above territory, extending in Texas from the 
Comanche country (about Reil River) south to the Rio Grande. More recently both 
Lipan and Apache have gradually moved southward into Mexico, where they extend 
as far as Durango. 

The Navajo, since first known to history, have occupied the country on and south 
of the San Juan River in northern New Mexico and Arizona aud extending into 
Colorado and Utah. They were surrounded on all sides by the cognate Apache 
except upon the north, where they meet Shoshonean tribes. 

The present volume embraces 544 titalar entries, of wliicli 428 relate 
to printed books aud articles and IIC to mauuscripts. Of these, 517 
have been seen and described by the compiler, 422 of the prints and 
95 of the manuscripts, leaving 27 as derived from outside sources, IG of 
the prints and 21 manuscripts. Of those unseen by the writer, titles 
and descriptions have been received in most cases from persons who 
have actually seen the works and described them for him. 

So far as possible, during the proof-reading, direct comparison has 
bee.i made with the works themselves. For this purpose, besides his 
own books, the writer has had access to those in the libraries of Con- 
gress, the Bureau of Ethnology, the Smithsonian Institution, and to 
several private collections in the city of Washington. Mr. Wilberforce 



PREFACE. 



VII 



Eaiiies has compared the titles of works contained in his own library 
and in the Lenox, aud recourse lias been had to a number of librarians 
tbrou^^liout the country for tracings, ])hoto^iaplis, etc. The result is 
that of the oL7 works des -ribed <li' ri.sii comparison of pr.xd" has been 
made direct with the original sources in the case of 4'J4. In this later 
reading- collations and desi'riptions have l)een entered into more fully 
than had previously been done and capital letters tre^ited with moie 
severitv. 




iVwx.^^^^ \^ 




Wash iNif TON, D. 0., '/une I'j, l>s!):2. 



INTRODUCTION 



In the compilation of this catiUogue the aim has been to iiidude 
eveiythin.u, i)iinted or in inannscript, lelatinjj- to the Atliapasean hm- 
guages: books, jtaniphh^ts, artich'S in magazines, t)'acts, serials, etc., 
and sncli reviews and announcements ot* publications as seemed worthy 
of notice. 

The dictionary plan has been followed to its extreme limit, the sub- 
ject and tribal indexes, references to libraries, etc., being included in 
one alidiabetic series. The primary arrangement is alphabetic by 
authors, translators of works into the native languages being treated as 
authors. Under each author the arrangement is, first, l)y printed works, 
and second, by manuscripts, each group being given chronologically; 
and in the case of printed books each work is followed through its 
various editions before the next in chronologic order is taken up. 

Anonymously printed works are entered under the name of the author, 
when known, and under the first word of the title, not an article or 
prei)osition, when not known. A cross-reference is given from the first 
words of anonymous titles Avhen entered under an author and from the 
first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or 
not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under 
the dialect to Avhich they refer when he is not known. 

Each author's name, with his title, etc., is entered in full but once, 
i. e., ill its alphabetic order. Every other mention of him is by sur- 
name and initials only, except in those rare cases when two i>ersous of 
the same surname have also the same initials. 

All titular matter, including cross-references thereto, is in brevier, all 
collations, descriptions, notes, and index matter in nonpareil. 

In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the 
spelling of proi)er names used in the particular work itself has been 
followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers 
is given. In the index entries of the tribal names the compiler has 
adopted that spelling which seemed to him the best. 

As a general rule initial cai»itals have been used in titular matter in 
only two cases: first, for jnoper names, and second, when the Avord 
actually appears on the title-page with an initial capital and with the 
remainder in small capitals or low er-case letters. In giving titles in the 
German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have been 
resjiected. 

When titles are given of works not seen by the compiler the fact is 
stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, and in 
either case the authority is usually given. 



INDEX OF LANGUAGES. 



Anrciia. See AlitiiiiM'. 

AlitiiiiK' 1 

ApiU'he 3 

Applegate Creek, 8«'e Nabiltse. 
Aiivaipa Apaclu'. See Apaelie. 

Athapascan 4 

Atiia. SeeAhtiiiue. 

Beaver ' .... 8 

Carrier Indians. See Tacnlli. 
Chin Indians. See Nagailer. 

Cliip]>e\\ van 10 

Cliiracalina Apache. See Apache. 
Cook's hdet Indians. See Kenai. 
Copper Indians. See Ahtinne. 
Coi^permine Apache. See Ai>ache. 

Coquille 20 

Coyotero Apache. See Apache. 

Dene -5 

Dene Dindjie. See Dene. 

Dog Rib .20 

Faraone. See Apache. 

Hare Indians. See Peaii de Lievre. 

Haynarji'er. See Henagi. 

Henagi 41 

Hoopa. See Hupa. 

Hndson Bay 41 

Hupa 41 

lukalik 4:i 

Inkalit-Kenai. See Kenai. 
Jicarilla Apache. See Apache. 

Kaiyuhkhotana 43 

Kenai 44 

Khitskenai. See TIatskenai. 

Koltschane 49 

Kntchiii 50 

Kwalliiokwa 50 

XI 



XI [ INDEX OF LANGUAGES. 

Page. 

Li]'HU 54 

Lototeii. See Tututen. 

Louclienx 55 

Mesealero A])adie. See Apache. 
Micluooski. See Ahtimie. 
Mimbreiio Apaclie. See Apache. 

Moiitaguais G5 

Kabiltse 74 

Nagailer 74 

Naliawuy. SeeNeliawiii. 

^sn-ajo 74 

Nehawiii 75 

Northern Indians. See Athapascan. 
Nnlato Inkalik. See Inkalik. 

Pean de Lievre 77 

Pinaleno Apaclic, See Apache. 

Royne Ki^'er ' 90 

Sierra P>lanca Apaclie. See Apache. 

Sikani 94 

Shive 05 

Slavi. See Shive. 

Sursee 06 

Sussee. See Sursee. 

Taculli 97 

Tahkali. See Taculli. 

Tnhlewah 97 

Takudh. See Tukudh. 
Tenan-Kutchin. See Kntchiii. 
Ten ana. See Kntchin. 
Tenana-lnkalik. See Inkalik. 

Tinne 9,*^ 

Tlatskenai 98 

Tolowa. See Tahlewah. 

Tukudh 102 

Tututen 1 03 

Ugalenzen 103 

Illuluk-Inkalik. See Inkalik. 

Umi^kwa 1 03 

Unakhotana 1 04 

Wailakki 107 

White Mountain Apache. See Apache. 

Willopah 109 



LIST OF FACSIMILES 



Paf.-e. 

Morice's Dene Syllabaiy (»7 

Titk' i>age of Morice's Dt'iie Primer 70 

Title paii'e <>f Morice's Deue Catecliisiu 71 

Perrault's ^loiitagnais Syllabary 78 

XIU 



BIBLIOGRAPHY 01' THE ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



By James C. Pillino. 



[An asterisk within paraiithoatvs iiKlicatis tliat tlic conipilirr has scun no copy of the work referred to.] 

A. 



Abbott (G. H.) Vocabulary of i\w 
C()([uillo language. 

Manuscript, 6 pages, folio, in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology, 'Washington, 1). ('. 
Taken down in 1858 at the Siletz Indian Agency, 
Oregon, with the assistance of the interpreter 
at t hat agency , and recorded on one of t lie blanks 
of 180 words issued by Mr. Geo. Gibbs. The 
blanks are all filled and about 20 words added. 

A jiartial copy, made by Mr. Gibbs, consist- 
ing of the 180 words of the standard vocabulary, 
with some changes in the alphabetic notation, 
is in the same library, 

Adam (Lucien), Esameii grammatioal 
compart de seize langues am^ricaincs. 

In Congres Int. des Am^ricanistes, Compte 
rendu, second session, vol. 2, pp. 161-244, and 
eix folded sheets, Luxembourg & Paris, 1878, 
8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, Congress.) 

This work is subdivided under twenty two 
headings, "Des different es classes de noms et 
du genre." "Diipluriel des noms," etc., un- 
der each of which occur remarks on all the six- 
teen languages, among which is the Monta- 
gnais. The six folded sheets at the end contain 
a comparative vocabulary (13.5 words and the 
numerals 1-100) of fifteen languages, among 
them the Montagnais. 

Issued separately as follows : 

Examen grammatical compare? | de | 

seize laugues am<?rioaiue8 | par Lucien 
Adam j Conseiller a la Cour de Nancy. | 

Paris I Maisonueuve et C^<', fiditeurs, 
I 25, Quai Voltaire, 25 | 1878 

Half'title verso "extrait du" etc. 1 1. title as 
above verso blank 1 1. text pp. .'5-88. six folding 
tables, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Congress, 
Gatschct, Wellesley. 

Trlibner, 1882 catalogiie. p. 3, prices a eojiy 
6«. ; Leclerc, 1887, p. 3, 1,") fr. ; Maisonneuve, 
1888, p. 42, 15 fr. 



Adelung (.Joliaun Christopli) [and Vater 
(.J. 8.)] Mitbridates | oder | allgemcinc 

I Sprachcnkundo | mit | dem Vater 
Unser als Spracbprobo | in bey nahc | 
fiiufhuudert Spraclien und Mundartcn, 

I von I .Joliann Christopli Adelung, | 
Cliurfiir.stl. Siich.si.sclieii Hofrath und 
Ober-Bibliotlickar. | [Two lines quo- 
tation.] I Erst<'r[-Vierter] Thcil. | 

Berlin, | in(lerVo,ssischonBucbliand- 
lung, I 1806[-1817]. 

4 vols. (vol. 3 in three parts). 8°. 
Tol. 3, part 3, is devoted to American lin- 
guistics ; the Athapascan contents are as fol- 
lows : General remarks on the Apache, pp. 177- 
179; of the Naba.joa, pp. 179-180. — Short discus- 
sion of the Kinai, pp. 228-229. — Comparative 
vocabulary of the Urgal,jachmutzi (from Eesan- 
olf ), with four Kinai vocabularies respectively 
from DawidofF, Resanoft", Lisiansky, and " Fn- 
genannten," pp. 230-231. — A few words in 
Sussee (from Vmfreville), p. 254. — General dis- 
cussion of the Chepewyan, with examples 
from Mackenzie and Dobbs, pp. 419-424.— Vo- 
cabulary of the Chepewyan and Nagailer (both 
from M.-'ckenzie) and the Hudson Bay Indians 
(from Dobbs), p. 424. 

Copies seen: As(or, Bancroft, British Mu- 
seum, Bureau of Etlnudogy, Congress, Eames, 
Trumbull. "NVatkinson. 

Priced by Triibner (18.'.6). no. 503. 11. 16*. Sold 
at the Fisclier sale. no. 17. for U. : another copy, 
no. 2042. for \6i. At the Field sale, no. 16, it 
brought $11.85; at the Squier sale. no. 9, $5. 
Leclerc (1878) prices it, no. 2042. 50 fr. At the 
Pinart sale, no. 1322, it sold for 25 fr. and at the 
Miirphy sale, no. 24,' a lialf-ealf. marble-edged 
copy brought .$4. 
Ahtena. See Ahtinne. 
Ahtinn^ : 

General discussicm See Bn.schmann (.J. C. E.) 
Numerals Allen (H. T.) 

Numerals Dall(W.H.) 



ATH- 



-1 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Ahtinne — Continued. 

Numerals 

Sentences 

Tribal names 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabi?rary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 



Ellis (R.) 
Allen (H. T.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Allen (H. T.) 
Baer (K. E.von). 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Bnscliniann (J. C.E.) 
Ball (W. H.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
J6ban (L. F.) 
Latham (R.G.) 
Piuart (A. L.) 
Wrangell (F. vou). 
Daa (L.K.) 
Ellis (R.) 

Petitot (R. F.S.J.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Scbomburgk (R. H.) 

Allen (Lieut. Henry T.) 49th Congress, 
I 2tl Session. | Senate. | Ex. Uoc. | No. 
125. I Eeport | of | an expedition | to | 
the Copper, Tauanit, and K6ynlvuk 
rivers, | in the | Territory of Alaska, | 
in I the year 1885, | ''for the purpose 
of obtaining all information ^yhich will 
I be valuable and important, especially 
to the I military branch of the govern- 
ment." I Made under the direction of [ 
General Nelson A. Miles, Commanding 
the Department of the Coluuiltia, | l>y 
I lieut. Henry T. Allen, | Second 
United States Cavalry. | 

Washington: | Government printing 
office. I 1887. 

Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. 3-8. cor- 
respondence pp. 9-1-1, introduction p. 15, half- 
title p. 17, text pp. 19-172, .') maps and 29 plates, 
8°. 

Sentences in the Miduoosky language, p. 51. — 
Natives of Copper River (pp. 125-136) contains 
some general remarks on their language, a 
vocabulary of 53 words Englisli-Midnoosky, p. 
134, and tlie numerals 1-10 of the Midnoosky 
and Apache (tlie latter from Lieut. T. B. 
Dugan, V. S. A,) compared, p. 135. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Fames, 
Pilling. 

Some copies are issued without the docu- 
mentary heading of five Hues at the begiuningof 
the title-page. (Bureau of Ethnology. Pilling.) 

Partly rejirinted as follows : 

Atnatanas ; natives of Copper river, 

Alaska. By Lieut. Henry T. Allen, U. 
S. Army. 

In Smithsonian Inst. Annual Report for 
1886, part 1, pp. 2.^8-266, Washington, 1889, 8°. 
(Pilling.) 

Vocabulary and numeral.s as under title next 
above, p. 265. 

Iieprint?(l as follows : 



Allen (H. T.) — Continued. 

Atnatanas, or natives of Copper river. 

Ill Quebec Soc. de G6og. Bull. 1886-87-88-89, 
pp. 79-90, Quebec, 1889, 8°. 

Linguistics as under titles above, pp. 87-88. 
American Bible Society: These woi'ds following 
a title or within parentheses after a note indi- 
cate that a cojiy of tlie work referred to has been 
seen by the compiler in the library of that in- 
stitution, Kew York City. 
American Bible Society. 1776. Centen- 
nial exhibition. 1876. | Specimen verses 
I from versions in different | languages 
and dialects | in which the | holy 
scriptures | have been printed and cir- 
culated by the | American bible society 
I and the | British and foreign bible 
society. | [Picture and one line quota- 
tion.] j 

New York: | American bible society, 
I instituted in the year MDCCCXVI. | 
1876. 

Title verso picture. etc. 1 1. text pp. 3-47, ad- 
vertisement p. 48, 16°. 

St. John, iii, 16, in the Tinn6 language (syl- 
laliic charaeters), p. 36. 

Copies seen : American Bible Society, Pilling, 
Trumbull. 

Editions, similar except in date, .appeared in 
1S79 ( Wellfsley) and in 1884 (Pilling). 

Specimen verses | trom versions in 

different | languages and dialects | in 
which the | Holy Scriptures ] have been 
printed and circulated by the | Ameri- 
can liible society I and the | British and 
foreign bible society. | [Picture of bible 
and one line quotation.] | Second edi- 
tion, enlarged. | 

New York: | American bible society, 
I instituted in the year MDCCCXVI. | 
1885. 

Title verso note 1 1. text pp. 3-60, index pp. 
61-63, advertisement p. 64, 16°. 

St. John, iii, 16, in the Tinn6 or Chippewyan 
(roman and syllabic) and Tukudh (roman), p. 
47. 

Copies seen : Wellesley. 

Tliere is an edition, otherwise as above, dated 
1888 (Pilling). 

Issued also with title as above and. in addi- 
tion, tlie following, which encircles the border 
of the title-page: Souvenir of the World's in- 
dustrial and cotton i centennial exposition. | 
Bureau of education : Department of the in- 
terior. I New Orleans, 1885. (Pilling.) 

Muestras de Aersiculos | tomados de 

las versiones en difereutes | lenguas y 
dialectos | en que las | sagradas escri- 
turas I han siilo impresas y puestas en 
circulaciou por la | Sociedad biblica 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



American liibli! Society — Coiit iniicil. 
aiui)ri<!iin;i | y la | Soeicfbid bihlica. in- 
glcsa y cxtranjcra. | [Ik'sif^ii and one 
lino (iiiotation.] 

Nucva "\'()rl< : | Socicilail ln'hjica ainc- 
ricaua. | Fiiiidaila en el Ano (!<■ 181G. | 
1889. 

Titlo as above Ycrso ])icturc ntc. 1 l.ti'xt ipji. 
3-50, liistorical ami other obscrvatioiiH ]p]).51 
CO, iiiilfx PI). 01-0:3, picture and (lusfription ji. 
C4, 16°. 

St. John iii, 10, in (he Tinn6 (syllabic oliar- 
acters), Chippewyan (reman), and Tiikitdh 
(roman), p. 47. 

Copies seen : I'illiiiu. Wclh'sley. 
American Tract Socict,\- ; These words follovvin}; 
a title or witliin parentlie.ses after a note indi- 
cate tliat a copy of tlie work referred to has 
been seen by tlie compiler in the library of tliat 
institution. New York City. 

Anderson (Alexander Canltlcld). Vocali- 
nlary oi' the, Talikali or Carrier. 

In Hale (H.), Ethnop-aphy and pliilolojiv of 
the F. S. exploring: ex]iedition, pp. 570-020, line 
A, Philadelphia, 1846. 4^. 

Reprinted in Gallatin (A.). Hale's Indians of 
northwest America, in American Eth. Soc. 
Trans, vol. 2. pp. 78-82. New York, 1848, 8°. 

Notes on the Indian tribes of British 

North Anieriea, and the northwest 
coast. Conimunicated to Geo. Gibbs. 
esq. By Alex. C. Anderson, es(|., late 
of the lion. H. B. co., and read before 
the New York Historieal Society. No- 
A-ember, 1862. 

In Historical Mag. first series, vol. 7, \>]t. 
73-81, New York & London, 1803, sni. 4'. 

Includes a sliort account of tlie Talicullys, 
with a few projier names witli Ennlisli sifruifl- 
c at ion. 

■ Notes I on | nortli-western America. 

I By I Alexander Canlfleld Anderson, 
J. P. I (Formerly of the Hudson's Bay 
Company. ) | 

Montreal : Mitcliell & Wilson, Print- 
ers, 192 St. Peter Street. | 1876. 

Cover title as above, no inside title; text jip. 
1-22, 12°. 

Under tlie heading; of ■■ Indians," ])j). 20-22, is 
given a short account of the natives of that 
region, including tlm " ('liipcwyan race." which 
includes a few tribal names with English sig- 
nifications. 

Co}}iex xee» : Bureau of Ethnology. 
Concordance of the Athabascan lan- 
guages. 

Manuscript, 8 unnumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Wash- 
ington, D. (J. Recorded at Cathlamut. Wash- 
ington Ty., 24th Eeliruary, 1858. 



Anderson (A. C.) — Continued. 

Thi^ first four leaves, written on one side 
(inl.\ , contain a comj>arativo vocabulary nf 108 
words of the following languages: English 
(;iiii)wyan, Tacnlly, Klatskanai, Willojiah 
I'^pjier I'mixiua. Tootooten, Applegate Creek 
]Io))ali, and Haynarger. The reinaining four 
leaves, written on both sides and headed Ap 
pondix, contain notes and memoranda con 
nected with tlui vocabularies collated in the 
accompanying abstract. 

Apache; 
General dis<-ussion See Adelung (.1. C.) and 

Yater(J. S.) 

General discussion Bancroft (H. H.) 

General discussion P.erghaus (H.) 

General discussion Buschmann (J. C. E.) 

General discussion Cremony (J. C.) 

General discussion Jelian (I... F.) 

Gi'ueral discussion Orozco y Berra (M.) 

General discussion I'imentel (F.) 

General discussion Smart (C.) 

General discussion AYliite (.J. B.) 

Gentes Bonrke (J. G.) 

Grammatic comments Featherman (A.) 

Grammatic comments Miiller (F.) 

Grammatic connneuts White (J.B.) 

Grammatic treati.se Bancroft (H. H.) 

Grammatic treatise Cremony (J. C.) 

Numerals Allen (H.T.) 

Numerals Bancroft (H. H.) 

Numerals Cremony (J. C.) 

Numerals Dugan (T. B.) 

Numerals Gatschct (A. S.) 

Numerals Haines (E.M.) 

Numerals Haldeman (S. S.) 

Numerals Pimentel (F.) 

Numerals Tolniie (W. ¥.) and Daw- 
son (G.M.) 

l'roi)er names Catlin (G.) 

Proiier names Cremony (J. C.) 

Proi)er n.imes White (J. B.) 

Relationships Morgan (L. H.) 

Relationships "White (J.B.) 

Sentences Bancroft (H. H.) 

Sentences White (J.B.) 

Text Bancroft (H.H.) 

Tribal names Balbi (A.) 

Tribal names Higgins (N. S.) 

Tribal names J6han(L. F.) 

Tribal names White (J. B.) 

Yocabulary Allen (H. T.) 

Yoi abulary Bancroft (H. H.) 

A'orabulary Bartlctt (J. R.) 

Yocabulary Bonrke (J. G.) 

Yocabulary Bus/^lnnann (J. C. E.) 

Yocabulary Chapin (G.) 

Yocabulary Cremony (■!. C.) 

Yocabulary Froebel (J.) 

Yocabulary Gatsehet (A. S.) 

Yocabulary Gilbert (G.K.) 

Yocabulary Henry (C. C.) 

Yocabulary Higgins (N. S.) 

Yocabulary Hotfman (W.J.) 

Yocabulary Loew (O.) 

Yt)cabulary McElroy (P, l),) 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Apache — Coutinued. 



Vorabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulai'y 
Vocabulary 
' Vocabulary 
Words 
"Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 

Words 

Apache John. 



Palmer (E.) 
Pimentcl (F.) 
Eitby(C.) 
Schoolcraft (IT. K.) 
Sherwood (W. L.) 
Simpsou (J. n.) 
Smart (C) 
Ten Kate (H. F.C.) 
Turner (W.W.) 
Whipple (A. W.) 
White (J. B.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Yarrow (H. C.) 
Bourke {.T. G.) 
Daa (L. K.) 
Ellis (II.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Tolmio (W. F.) and Daw- 
son (G. M.) 
AVilsim (E. F.) 



See Gatschet (A. 8.) 

Apostolides (S.) L'oraisou dominicale 
I i-ii I Cent Liiugues Dift'^rentes; | 
pii))licc et vendue an profit des | mal- 
heui'enx r6fugies Cr^tois, | actnelle- 
nient eu Gn^ee. | C"ompil6e par S. Ajios- 
tolideH. I [Soriptnre text, two lines.] | 

Londres: ] imprim6 et publit? par W. 
M. Watts, I 80, Gray's-inn road. | (En- 
tered at stationers' hall). [1869.] (*) 

Scfdiid titlf : Our lord's prayer | iu | One 
Hundred Diti'erent Languages ; | published for 
the benefit of the | poor Cretan refugees, | now 
in Greece. | Compiled by S. Apostolides. | 
[Scripture text, two lines.] j 

London: | printed and piiblislied by W. M. 
Watts, I 80, Gray's-inn road. 

First title verso blank 1 1. second title versf) 
blank I 1. dedication iu Frencli verso blank 1 1. 
dedication in English verso blank 1 1. preface 
(French) pp. ix-x, preface (English) pp. xi-xii, 
index pp. xiii-xiv, half-title verso blank 1 1. 
text (printed on one side only) 11. IT-UG, 12°. 

The Lord's ])rayer iu Chepewyan, 1. 32. 

Title from Mr. Wilberforce Fames, from coi>y 
belonging to ^Ir. E, P.Vining, Brookline, Mass. 

For title of the second edition see in the Ad- 
denda, p. 113. 

Applegate Creek. See Nabiltse. 

Arivaipa Apache. See Apache. 

Arny (Gov. W. Y. M.) Vocalnilary of 
the Navajo language. 

Manuscript, 10 unntuubered leaves, 4°, in tlie 
liln-ary of the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected 
on the Navajo reservation iu New Mexico, 
Noveuiber. 1,'!74, with the assistance of Prof. 
A'alentuie Friese and Kev. \V. B. Trnax. 

Recorded on one of the fonus (no. 170) of the 
Smithsonian Institution, containing 211 words, 
equivalents of all of which are given iu Naviyo. 



Amy ( W. F. M. ) — Continued. 

This nuiuuscript was referred, Dec. 26, 1874, 
to Dr. Trumbull for inspection, and was 
returned by hiiu witli tlic recommendation that, 
after certain changes in tlu^ phonetic notation, 
it be published by th(> Institution. 

Astor : This word following a title or within paren- 
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
iu the Astor Library, New York City. 

Athapascan. Vocabulary of the lan- 
guage spoken by the Indians of Cook's 
Inlet Bay. 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, folio, written on both 
sides, in the library of the Bureau of J'thnology. 

Contains 60 words. 



Athapascan : 

General diseussiou See 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General di,scu8si(m 

General discussion 

General discussion 

Geographic names 

Grammatic comments 

Granunatic comments 

Grammatic comments 

Proper uames 

Proper names 

Relationships 

Sentences 

Syllabary 

Tribal names 

Tribal names 

Tribal names 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

See also Chippewyan 

Atna. See Ahtinne. 

Authorities : 

See Dufosse (E.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Leclerc (C.) 
Ludewig (H. E.) 
McLean (.J.) 
Pilling (.1. C.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Quaritch (B.) 
Sabin (J.) 
Steiger (E.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Trumbull (J. H.) 
Vater (J.S.) 



Bastiau (P. W. A.) 
Buschmanu (J, C, E.) 
Campbell (J.) 
Gabelentz(H. G. C.) 
Keane(A. H.) 
Scolder (J.) 
Trumbull (J. U.) 
Petitot(E. F.S.J.) 
Dorsey (J. 0.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Grasserie (R. de la). 
Catliu (G.) 
Petitot(E. F.S.J.) 
Dorsey (J. O.) 
Potitot(E. F.S.J.) 
Morice (A. G.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Petitot(E. F.S.J.) 
Athapascan. 
Bancroft (H. IL) 
Brinton (D.G.) 
Daa (L.K.) 
Ellis (R.) 
Hearne (S.) 
Kovar (E.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
; Montagnais; Tinnd. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES, 



Azpell (Dr. Thnmafi F.) ^'(K•ul>llIiu\v of 
tLo IIoo})a laiif,ni:if^o. 

Mauusci'ipt, 10 iiiiiiumhorcil leavea, 4"^, in the 
library of tho Bureau of Kdiiiology, Wa«liiiif;- 
ton, U. C. Kecorded iit (Jaiiij) Gaston, Califor- 
nia, Aug. 14, 1870, on Suiitlisoniaii form no. 170. 

The printed form contains blanks for 211 
words, all of whicli arc Kivi'ii. and in .uldition a 
few other words and about J'l plirasiM and sen- 
tences. In transmitting the manuscriiit Dr. 
Azpell writes as follows: 

Camp Gaston, IIoopa Valley, Cal., 

Aug. 14th. 1S70. 
Secretary o/ Smithiionian rnttitHtion, 

Wunhinyton, I>. C: 
Sir : I have tho honor to enclose herewith tlie 
vocabularies of the Nohtin-oah (or IIoopa) and 
Sa-ag-its (or Klamath) tribes of Indians. 

I have adhered as closely as possible to the 
orthography given in the Smithsonian instruc- 
tions, with tho single exception of sub.stituting 
tho Greek x i'or "kk" in representing the 



Azpell (T. F. ) — C'ontiiinf'd. 

gultui-al asl>irat<-, whiib lellii- I think repre- 
sents till' sound IxMler. 

'i'he syllaliie .sounds have been can-fully com 
pari^l in the pronunciation of s<;veral Indians 
of <;acli trilie, and I am aide to hold conununiea 
tion with them by reading otf the wor-ds as I 
liave written them, which seems to i)rove their 
accuracy. 

The Indian languages in this vicinity are 
rapidly becoming cori'ujded by contact witli 
tlie white man, the younger Indians speaking 
in a dillerent dialect from the elder ones, and 
probably in a generation or two will be no 
longer n^'ogni/.able. Knowing this to be; the 
case, I have endeavoied to get the most cor- 
rect ]>ronunciation from the older Indians, and 
this, l)eing very tedious, nuist be my a])ology 
for s(«iaing delay and also for writing tlie two 
tribes on one form, as 1 have spoiled one by 
pencil marks. 

Very respectfully, your ob't serv't, 

T. F. Azpell, 
Amt. iSury. U. S.A. 



B. 



Baer (Karl Ernst von). Statistlsche imtl 
etliuographiscbe Nachricbteii | iiber | 
die Russisclieu Besitzuiifieu | an der | 
Nordwestkiiste von Amerika. | Gesaiu- 
melt I von dem ebemaligen Oberver- 
walter diesei" Besitzimgeu, | Contre- 
Admiral v. Wraugcll. | Atif Kosteu der 
Kaiserl. Akademie (Ut WisHcuscbaften j 
heransgegebeu | uiid iiiit den Herocb- 
nungen aus WrangcH's Wittcrnngs- 
beobacbtuugeu | uud auiU-rn Zusiitzeu 
vermebrt | von | K. E. v. Baor. | 

St. Petersburg, 1839. | Bucbdnickerci 
der Kaiserlicheu Akademie der Wisscn- 
scbaften. 

Forms vol. 1 of Baer (K. E. von) and Helm(^r• 
Ben (G. von), Beitriige zur Kenntuiss des Uuss- 
ischen Reiches, St. Petersburg, 183!t, 8". 

Short comparative vocabulary of the Atna, 
Ugalonzen, and Koloschen, p. 9'.). — Comparative 
vocabulary of the Aleut, Katljack, Tscliugiit- 
schen, Ugalenzen, Kenaier, Atnaer of Copper 
River, Koltschauen of Copper River, and 
Koloschen of Sitka, p. 259 (folding sheet). 

Balbi (Adrien), Atlas | etbnograpbiqne 
dn globe, | on | olassilication <U'S pcii- 
plesiauciens et luoderiu'sld'apres leius 
laugues, I prdc^de | d'lin di.sconr.s siir 
l'utilit6 et rimportance <le retiide (b',s 
langues appliquee a plusieurs braiu-lics 
des connais.sances bniuaincs; d'nn 
aperyn | sur les moyens grapbii^iies eni- 



Balbi (A.) — Coiitinned. 

ploy(5s jiar le.s diUV'i'ens penplcs de la 
terre; d'lm conp-d'ieil sur I'bistoire | 
do la langue slave, et sur la marcbe pro- 
gressive de la civilisation | et de la lit- 
t^ratiire en Kiissie, | avec environ sept 
cents V()cal)iiliiires des principanx idi- 
omes coiiniis, | et suivi | du tableau 
pbysique, moral et i)olitiqiie | des cinq 
parties du nioiide, | 1 )f'dii^ a S. M. I'Eiu- 
pereur Alexandnr; par Adrien Halbi, | 
ancieu professeur ib^ gdograpbie, do 
pbysiqtie et de miitli(Smatiques, | mem- 
bre correspoudant de I'Atb^nde de Tre- 
vise, etc. etc. | [Design.] | 

A Paris, | Chez Key et Gravier, li- 
braires, Quai des Augustins, N" 55. | 
M.DiJCC.XXVI [1826]. | Imprime cbez 
Paul Renouard, Rue Garenciere, N" 5. 
F.-S.-G. 

Half-title 1 1. tith' ver.so blank 1 1. dedication 
2 11. table synoptique 1 1. text plates i-xli (single 
and double), table jilates xlii-xlvi, addition.s 
plates xlvii-xlix, errata 1 p. fidio. 

Plate xxxii, Langues du jilateau central de 
rAmeri<iue du Nord, embraces the Apaches, 
with a list of the prin(;ipal divisions. — Plate 
xxxiii, Region Missouri-Cidumbieune, em- 
braces the Sussee. — Plate xxxiv, Langues de la 
r6gion Allegliani(iue et des lacs, embr.aces the 
Tacoullies. — Plate xxxv, Langues de la c6te 
ociudi-ntale d(^ I'Amfiriiiue du Nord, includes 
thi^ Kinait ze. — Plate xli, Tableau polyglotte des 
langues am6ricaines, includes a vocabulary of 



6 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Balbi (A.) — Continued. 

26 words of the Sussee, Cheppewyan, TacouUiea 
or Carriers, and Kinai. 

Copies seen : Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Watkiuson, Wellesley- 
Bancroft : Tliis word folhnving a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates tluit a copy 
of the work referred to lias been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Mr. II. H. Bancroft, 
San Francisco, Cal. 

Bancroft (Hubert Howe). The | native 
races | of | tlie Pacific states | of | 
North America. | By | Hubert Howe 
Bancroft. | Volumel. | Wild tribes [-V. 
Primitive history]. | 

Now York: | D. Appleton and com- 
pany. I 1874 [-1876]. 

5 vols, maps and plates, 8°. Vol. I. Wild 
tribes; II. Civilized n.atious; III. Myths and 
languages; IV. Antiquities ; V. Primitive his- 
tory. 

Some copies of vol. 1 are <lated 1875. 

Ch.ipter 2 of vol. 3 (pp. 574-G03) includes a 
genei'al discussion of the Tiuneh family, with 
examples, pp. 583-585. — Chepewyan declen- 
sions, pp. 585-586. — Partial conjugation of the 
verb yaws' thee, to sjjeak; p. 586. — General dis- 
cussion of the Kutchin and Kenai, with exam- 
ples, pp. 586-588; of the Atnah, with a short 
vocabulary, pp. 589-590; of the Kenai, with 
examples, pp. 590-591 ; of the Tacullies, with 
examjjles, pp. 591-593. — NumeraLs 1-10 of the 
Tolewah, Hoopah, and Wi-lackee, \t. 593. — 
General discu.ssion of the Apache and Navajo, 
with examples (from Cremony), pp. 593-597. — 
Conjugation of the Apache verbs to be, to do, to 
eat, to sleep, to love, and numerals 1-2000, pp. 
597-600. — Apa(die sentences, jj. 600. — Speech of 
Gen. Carleton in Apache, with interlinear Eng- 
lish translation, jjp. 600-602.— Lord'.s prayer in 
Lipan (from Pimentel), p. 602.— Comparative 
vocabulary of 11 words of the Apache, Apache 
Coppermine, Atnah, Beaver, Chei)ewyan, Dog- 
rib, Hoo])ah, Inkilik, Inkalit, Kenai, Kolt- 
shane, Kutchin, Kwalhioqua, Loucheux, Nav- 
ajo, Northern Indian, Ai)achc Pinalefio, Sursee, 
TacuUy, Tenan Kutchin, Tlatskanai, Ugalenze, 
TTmpqua, I'nakatana, Xicarilla, Apache Mes- 
calero, p. 603. 

Copies seen : Astor, Banci-oft, Brinton, Brit- 
ish Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, 
Eames, Powell. 

The I native races | of | the Pacific 

states I of ! North America. | By | Hu- 
bert Howe Bancroft | Volume I. j Wild 
tribes[-V. Primitive history]. | 

Author's Copy, | San Francisco. 1874 
[-1876]. 

5 vols. 8°. Similar, except on title-page, to 
previous editions. One hundred copies issued. 

Copies seen : Bancroft,British Museum, Con- 
gress. 



Bancroft (H. H.) — Continued. 

In addition to the above the work hai been 
issued with the imprint of Longmans, London; 
Maisonneuve, Paris; and Brockhaus, Leipzig; 
none of which have I seen. 

The works | of | Hubert Howe Ban- 
croft. I Volume I[-V]. | The native 
races. | Vol. I. Wild tribes[-V. Primi- 
tive history]. | 

San Francisco: ( A. L. Bancroft & 
company, i»ublishers. | 1882. 

5 vols. 8°. This series includes the History of 
Central America, History of Mexico, etc., each 
with its own system of numbering and also 
numbered consecutively in the series. 

Of these works there have been published 
vols. 1-39. Tlie opening paragrivph of v<d. 39 
gives the following information: "This volume 
closes the narrative portion of my historical 
series; there yet remains to be completed the 
biogr.iphical section." 

Copies seen : Biincroft, British Museum, 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress. 
Baptismal card: 

Chippewyan See Church. 

Barnhardt (W. H.) Comparative vocab- 
ulary of the languages spoken by the 
"Umpqua," "Lower Rogue RiA^er," 
and Calapooia tribes of Indians. 

Manuscript, 4 unnumbered leaves (recto of 
the first and verso of the last blank), folio, in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Re- 
corded in May, 1859. 

Each vocabulary (of which only thelTmpqua 
is Athapascan) contains 180 words, those con- 
stituting the standard vocabulary compiled by 
the Smithsonian Institution. The vocabulary 
is followed by the "rales adopted in spelling." 

There is a cojiy of this manuscript, 4 11. folio, 
made by its compiler, in tlic same library, and 
also a copy of the Ump(iua (6 11. folio), accord- 
ing to the original spelling in one column and a 
revised spelling in a second. The latter copy 
was made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. 

Barreiro (Antonio). Ojeada | sobre 
Nuevo-Mexico, | (pie da una idea | de 
sus producciones naturales, y de algu- 
uiis otras | coaas que se consideran 
o])ortunas para mejorar | su estado, 6 ir 
l)roporcioiiaudo su futura felicidad. | 
Formada | por el lie. Antonio Barreiro, 
I asesor de dicho territorio. | A i)eti- 
ciou I del escmo. senor miuistro que fue 
dejnsticia don | Jos6 Ignacio Esiiinosa. 
i Y dedicada | al escmo. senor vice-pres- 
idente de los Estados Uui- | dos Mexi- 
canos don Auastacio Bustamente. | 

Puebla : 1832. | Imprenta del ciuda- 
dano Jos^ Maria Campos, esquina | de 
la Carniceria uiimero 13. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



Barreiro (A.) — Continued. 

Title VLTSO bliuik 1 1. (U-ilicatioii 1 1. text ]i 
.1-42, statistics 2 11. aiit-ndii'i- half-title ami ii 
2-10 of text, .mil. 4". 

Ten Niibajoe words anil cxpre.sHioii.s, p. 10 
ap^iidice. 

Copieg seen: (l<>n;iress. 

Bartlett (.John Knssell). \'(iealiii]ar.v 
the A]):iehe lan,niiiiu:e. 

In Whipple (A. W.) and tithois, E.^Lploratici 
and survey.-*, p. 85, Washington, 18,''>5, 4". 

Consists of 25 words used in eoiiii>arlson wi 
other languages of tlio same stoek, the otl 
vocahularies being taken from iirinted sonre 



of 



th 



Vocabulary of the Coiiporniiiic 

Apache (Mimhieno) hinejuaojc. 

Manuscript, fi nnnuinbered leaves, written 
on one side only, folio, in tlu> library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. " Obtained by Mr. Bart 
left from Mancus Colorado, chief of the Copper- 
mine Apaches, July, 1851. The language 
abounds in gutturals. Mr. Turner identified it 
as of the Chipewyan stock." 

The vocabulary is recorded on one of the 
Smithsonian forms of 180 English words, equiv- 
alents of about 150 of which are given. It is a 
copy by Dr. Gibbs. The ■wheroaboiits of the 
original I do not know. 

John Kussell Bartlett, author, born in Prov- 
idence, R. I., 23 Oct., 1805, died there 28 May, 
1886. He was educated for a mercantile career, 
entered the banking business at an early age, 
and was for six years cashier of the trlobe bank 
in Providence. His natural bent appears to 
have been in the direction of science and belles- 
lettres, for he was prominent in founding the 
Providence athenoeuni and was an active mem- 
ber of the Franklin society. In 1837 he engaged 
in business with a New Y(u-k house, but was 
not successful, and entered the book-importing 
trade under the style of Bartlett & "Welford. 
He became a member and was for several yeais 
corresponding secretary of the New York his- 
torical society, and was a member of the Amer- 
ican ethnographical society. In 1850 President 
Taylor appointed him one of the commissioners 
to tix the boundary between the United States 
and Mexico under the treaty of Guadaloupe 
Hidalgo. This service occupied him until 1853, 
when he was obliged to leave the work incom- 
plete, owing to the failure of the aiipropriation. 
He became secretary of statt' for Kbode Island 
in May, 1855, and held the olKce until 1872. He 
had charge of the John Carter Brown Library 
in Providence for several years, and prepared 
a four-volume catalogue of it, of which oiu^ 
hundred copies were printed in the highest 
style of the art. — Appleton's Cyclop, of Ain.liioij. 

Bastian (Philipp Wilheliu Adolf). Etli- 
nologie und vergleichende Liuguistik. 

In Zeitschrift flir Ethnologie,vol.4(1872),pp. 
137-162, 211-231, Berlin [n.d.], 8=^. 



Bastian (P. W. A.) — Continued. 

(."oiitains exaiiii>h-s in and grammatic com- 
iiiciits upon a nMiiil>eiof Ameiiciiii languages, 
among them lln- .\ lliai>askan, p. 230. 
Bates (Hciiiy Walton). Stanford's | coni- 
]t('ndiiiin of nconrajihy and travel | 
bancd on Ilcllwald'.s ' DieKrdfund ilire 
Volkcr' Cent lal America | tlie West In- 
dies and I Sonth America | Edited tind 
extended | l{y H. \V. IJates, | a.ssistanl- 
secretary <d" the IJoyal j;eojrra]dii(al 
society; | aiitlior of ''i'he naturalist on 
the river Amazons' | With | ethiU)lo>r- 
ical ai)])endi.K by A. II. Keane. B. A. | 
Maps and illustrations | 

Loudon I Edward .Stanford, .'")5, Char- 
iu-i cross, S. \V. | 1878 

Half tith'vi-rso blank 1 1. frontispiece 11. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface ]ip. v-vi, contents pp. 
vii-xvi,list()f illustrations pp.xvii-xviii, list of 
maps p. xix, text pp. 1-5G1, index pp. 563-571, 
maps, 8<^. 

Keane (A. 11.), Ethnography and philology of 
America, pp. 443-501. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Congress, 
Eames, Geological Survey, National Museum. 

Stanford's | Conipcudiuni of geogra- 
phy and travel | based on Hellwald's 
'Die Erde imd ihre Volker' | Central 
America | the West Indies | and | South 
America | Edited and extended ( By H. 
W. Bates, | Author of [&c. two lines.] 
I With I ethnological appendix by A. 
11. Keane, M. A. J. | Maps and illustra- 
tions I Second ami revised edition. | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, S. W. I 1882. 

Half-title ver.so Idank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp.vii-xvi, list of 
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pj). 443-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps, 8°. 

Linguistics as under previous title,pp.443-561 . 

Copies seen : British Museum, Harvard. 

Stanford's | Compendium of geogra- 
phy and travel | liascd on Hellwald's 
'Die Erde und ilirc Volker' | Central 
America the West Indies | and South 
Amei'ica | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, | assistant-secretary [«fec. 
two lines.] | With | ethnological ap- 
pendix by A. 11. Keane, M. A. I. | Maps 
and illustrations | Third edition | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, S. W. I 1885 

CoUatiim and contents as in second edition, 
title and descrijition of which are given above. 

Copies seen : Geological Survey. 



8 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OP THE 



Beach (William Wallace). The | Indian 
uiiscellauy ; ] coutainiug { Pajjeis on tlie 
History, Antiqnities, Arts, Languages, 
Religions, Traditions and Superstitions 
I of I the American aborigines; | with | 
Deseriptious of their Domestic Life, 
Mannexs, Customs, | Traits, Amuse- 
ments and Exjiloits ; | ti-avels and ad- 
ventures in the Indian country; | Inci- 
dents of Border Warfare; Missionary 
Relations, etc. | Edited l>y W. W. 
Beach. I 

Albany : | .J. Munsell, 82 .State street. 
I 1877. 

Title verso bLink 1 1. dedication verso blank 
1 1. advertisement verso blank 1 1. contents pp. 
vii-viii, text pp. 9-477, errata 1 p. index pp. 479- 
490, 80. 

Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of the 
Pacitic states and territories, pp. 416-447. 

Copies seen : Astor,Brinti)n, British Museum, 
Congress, Eames, Geological .Survey, Massachu- 
setts Historical Society, Pilling, Wisconsin His- 
torical Societj-. 

Priced by Lederc, 1878 catalogue, no. 2663, 20 
fr. ; the Miu-phy copy, no. 197, brought !|;1.25; 
priced by Clarke &. co. 188G catalogue, no. 6271, 
$3.50, and by Littletield, Nov. 1887, no. 50, $4. 

Beadle (J.H.) The | undeveloped West ; 
I or, I five years in the territories: | 
I being | a complete history of that vast 
region be- | tween the Mississii)pi and 
the Pacific, | its resources, climate, in- 
habitants, natural curiosities, etc., 
etc. I Life and adventure on | ])rairie8, 
mountains, and the Pacific coast. With 
two hundred and forty illustrations, 
from original | sketches and i)hoto- 
graphic views of the scenery, | cities, 
lands, mines, people, and curi- | osities 
of the great West. | By J. H. Beadle, | 
western correspondent of the Cincin- 
nati Commercial, and author | of "Life 
in Utah," etc., etc. | 

Issued by subscription only [&c. two 

lines.] I National publishing company, 

I Philadeliihia, Pa. ; Chicago, 111. ; 

Cincinnati, Ohio; | and St. Louis, Mo. 

[1873.] 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. 15-16, 
list of illustrations pp. 17-22, contents pp. 23- 
32, text pp. 33-823, map, plates, 8°. 

Short vocabulary, Navajo, Mexican-Spanish, 
and English, p. 545.— Numerals 1-20 of the 
Navajo, j). 545. — Navajo words pasHm. 

Copies seen : Boston Athenjeuni, Congress. 

There is an edition, with title but slightly 
ditlfereut fi'om the above, except in the imprint, 
which reads: Published by | the National pub- 



Beadle (J. H.) — Continued. 

lishing CO., | Philadelphia, Pa., Chicago, III., 
and St. Louis, Mo. (Brooklyn Public, Con- 
gress.) 
Beaver : 

Bible, Mark See Garrioch (A. C.) 

Bible passages Garrioili (A. C.) 

Catechism Bompas (W. C.) 

Catechism Garrioch (A. C.) 

Hymns J5ompas (W. C.) 

Hymns Garrioch (A. C.) 

Prayer book Bompas (^Y. C.) 

Prayer book Garrioch (A. C.) 

Prayers Bompas (W. C.) 

Primer Bomjias (W. C.) 
Ten commandments Garrioeli (A. C.) 

Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) 

Vocabulary Bompas (W. C.) 

Vocabulary Buschmanu (J. C. E.) 

Vocabulary Garrioch (A. C.) 

Vocabulary Howse (J.) 

Vocabulary Kennicott (K.) 

Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 

Vocabulary M'Lean (J.) 

Vocabulary Morgan (L. H.) 

Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.) 

Words Daa (L. K.) 

Beaver Indian primer. See Bompas (W. 

C.) 
Berghaus {Dr. Heinrich). Physikal- 
ischer Atlas. | Geographische Jahrbuch 
I zur Mittheilung aller wichtigei'u neuer 
Erforschuugen von j D^ Heinrich Berg- 
haus. I 18.51:111. I Inhalt: | [&c. twen- 
ty-three lines in double columns.] | 
Gotlia: Justus Perthes. [1851.] 
Title verso Ijlank 1 1. text pj). 1-66, 3 plates, 
4°. 

Ueber die Verwandtschaft der Schoschonen, 
Komantschen und Apatschen, pp. 48-62, con- 
tains general comments on the Ajiache language 
and its relations to the others mentioned, but 
gives no examples. 
Copies seen : Congress. 

Bergholtz (Gustaf Fredrik), The Lord's 
Prayer | in the | Principal Languages, 
Dialects and | Versions of the World, | 
printed in | Type and Vernaculars of 
the I Different Nations, | compiled and 
published by | G. F. Bergholtz. | 

Chicago, Illinois, | 1884. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. contents pp. 3-7, 
preface p. 9, text ])p. 11-200, 12°. 

Lord's prayer in Chipewyan (from Kirkby), 
p. 37; Slav6 (from Bompas), p. 169. 

Copies seen : Congress. 

Bible : 

Genesis Taculli See Morice (A. G.) 

New test. Chippewyan Kirkby (W. W.) 

New test. Tukudh M'Douald (R.) 

Matthew .Slave Reeve (W, D.) 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



Bible — C'oiit 


nued. 




Mark 


Beavei 


Garrioch (A. C.) 


Mark 


Slave 


Koeve(W. D.) 


Mark 


Tiiin6 


Kirkl.y (\V. W.) 


John 


Tinu6 


Kirkhy (W. \V.) 


Gospels 


C'hippi 


wyau Kirkhy (W. \V.) 


Goapela 


Slave 


JioMipas (W.C.) 


Go.si)el3 


Tukn( 


h M'DonahMU.) 


John i-iii 


Tukudh M'l>onahl(K.) 


Bible history: 






Montaj;iiais 


Se 


'Le<;..ir(L.) 


Tukutlh 




M'Douald (K.) 


Bible lesson: 






U^d6 


Set 


>Faraud (H.J.) 


Bible passages: 






Boaver 


See Garrioch (A. C.) 


Chippowyan 




Church. 


D6n6 




Grouard (E.) 


Hudson Bay 




British. 


Slave 




British. 


Slave 




Gilbert & Eivington. 


Tinn6 




American. 


Tinn6 




Bible Society. 


Tinn6 




Bompas (W. C.) 


Tiun6 




British. 


Tinn6 




Gilbert & liivington. 


Tukudh 




American. 


Tukudh 




Bible Society. 


Tukudh 




Bompas (\V. C.) 


Tukudh 




British. 


Tukudh 




Church. 


Tukudh 




Gillwrt & Rivington. 



Bible Society. Specimen verses | in 164 

I Languages and Dialects | in which 

the holy scriptures have heen printed 

and circulated by the | Bible society. 

I [Design and one line quotation.] | 

Bible house, | Coi-ner Walnut and 
Seventh Streets, 1 Philadelphia. [1876?] 
Cover title as above verso advertisement, uo 
inside title, text pp. 3-39, index pp. 40-41, his- 
torical sketches etc. pp. 42-46 and cover, 18°. 

St. Johu,iii, 16, in Tinu6 (syllabic characters), 
p. 36: 

Copies aeen : Eames, Pilling, Wellcsley. 

Specimen verses | in 21,5 | languages 

and dialects | in ^vhich the | holy scrip- 
tures] have been printed and circulated 
by the | Bible society. | [Design and 
one line quotation.] | 

Bible house, | corner Walnut and 
Seventh streets, : Philadelphia. | Craig, 
Finley& co., prs. 1020Archst,Philada. 
[1878?] 

Printed covers (title as above on the front 
one), no inside title, contents pp. 1-2, text pp. 
3-48, 16°. 

St. John, iii, 16, in Tukudh (Loucheux In- 
dians), p. 26; Chippewyan or Tiun6 (syllabic 
characters), p. 27. The .so-called "Chippe- 
wyan in romau on p. 27 is really Chippewa. 

Copiee seen : Pilling. 



Bible Society — Continued. 

Sotae coi)ies have slightly variant title 
(Kanies) ; others have the title printed in a dif- 
ferent type and omit tlii^ line beginning with 
the word "Craig." (Eames.) 

Bollaert (William). Observations on the 
Indian Tribes ot Texas. By William 
Bollaert, F. K. G. S. 

In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 2, 
pp. 262-283, London, n. d. 8°. 

A few Words iu the Lipan language, pp. 278- 
279. 

[Bompas (Bishop William Carpenter).] 
Beaver Indian iniuicr. 

Colophon : London : Gill)ert &, Riv- 
ington, Whitefriars Street, and St. 
John's S(iuare. [187-?] 

No title-page, hoatling only; text (witli head- 
ings iu English) pp. 1-36, 16°. Printed for the 
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. 

Lord's jirayer, creed, general confession, com- 
mandments, pp. 1-2.— Catechism, pp. 3^ — 
Prayers, i)p. 5-7.— Lessons, pp. 8-11.— Texts, p. 
11.— Les.sons 1-26, pp. 11-24. — Ilymns (double 
coliunns), pp. 2.5-30. — Vocabulary (alphabet- 
ically arranged by English words, double col- 
umns), pp. 31-36. 

Copiet tseeii: Pilling, Society for Promoting 
Christian Knowledge, Wdlesley. 

[ ] Chipewyan primer. 

Colophon : London : Gilbert & Riv- 
ington, Whitefriars Street, and St. 
John's S<iuare. [187-?] 

No title-page, heading only; text (with Eng- 
lish headings) pp. 1-36, 16°. Printed for the 
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. 

Lessons 1-24, pp. 1-9.— Lord's prayer, creed, 
commandments, prayers, etc., pp. 9-13. — Les- 
sons 1-41, pp. 13-32. — Hymns (double columns), 
pp. 33-36. 

Copies teen : Pilling, Society for Promoting 
Christian Knowledge, Wollesley. 

[ ] Dog Rib primer. 

Colophon : London : Gilbert & Riv- 
ington, Whitefrairs Street, and St. 
John's Square. [187-?] 

No title-page, heading only; test (with head- 
ings iu English) pp. 1-22, 16°. Printed for the 
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. 

Lord's prayer, morning prayer, creed, com- 
mandments, confession, jirayers, etc., pp. 1-6. — 
Scripture texts, pp. 6-16.— Hymns (double col- 
umns), pp. 17-22. 

Copies seen : Pilling, Society for Promoting 
Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

[ ] Tinn6 i^rimer. 

Colophon: Loudon: Gilbert & Riv- 
ington, Whitefriars Street, and St. 
John's S(iuare. [187-?] 



10 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF TH15 



Bompas (\V. C.) — Continued. 

No title-page, heading only ; text (with head- 
ings in English) pp. 1-7C, 10°. Printed for the 
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. 

Texts on scripture subjects, jirayers, etc., pp. 
1-37.— Cfatecbism, pp. 37-40,— Creed, command- 
ments, prayers, etc., pp. 40-48.— Catechism, pp. 
48-55. — Creation, patriarchs, etc., pp. 55-05. — 
Hymns (double columns), pp. 07-76. 

OopieK seen: Pilling, Society for Promoting 
Christian Knowledge, "Wellesley. 

[ ] Tukudh priinor. 

Colophon: London: Gilbert & Riv- 
ingtou, Whitefriars Street, and St. 
John's Square. [187-?] 

No title-page, heading only; text (with Eng- 
lish headings) pp. 1-55, 10°. Printed for the 
Society for Promoting Christian Kjiowh^lge. 

Scripture lessons, prayers, conmiandments, 
gospels, collects, catechi.sm, etc., pp. 1-51. — 
Hymns (double columns), pp. 52-55. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

[ ] Manual of devotion, | in the | Bea- 
ver Indian Dialect. ; Compiled from the 
manuals of the veneral)le | archdeacon 
Kirkby, | by the l)ishop of Athabasca. 
I For the use of the Indians | in the | 
Athabasca diocese. | [Seal of the soci- 
ety.] I 

London: | Society for promoting 
christian knowledge, | Northumber- 
land avenue, Charing cross; | 43, Queen 
Victoria street; and 48, Piccadilly. 
[1880.] 

Title verso syllabarium 1 1. text (in syllabic 
characters with English headings in roman) 
pp. 3-48, 24°. 

Hymns uos. 1-21, pp. 3-24. — Prayers, pp. 25- 
37. — Catechism, pp. 37-43. — Lessons uos. 1-7, pp. 
44-48. 

Copies teen : Eame.s, Pilling. Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

See Garrioch (A. C.) for another edition of 
this work. 

[ ] The four gospels, | translated into 

the I Slav6 language, | for the Indians 
of north-west America. | By the | 
Right Rev. The bishop of Athabasca. | 
London : | printed for the British and 
foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria 
street. | 1883. 

Title verso printers 1 1. contents verso blank 
1 1. text in roman cliaraeters pp. 1-282, 16°. 

Matthew, pp. 1-84.— Mark. pp. 85-i;(4.— Luke, 
pp. 13.5-221.— John, pp. 222-282. 

Copies seen .■ British and Foreign Bible Soci- 
ety, Pilling, Welleslej-. 



Bompas (W. C.) — Continued. 

Colonial Church Histories. | Diocese 

of Mackenzie river. | By right reverend 
I William Carpenter Bumjjas, D.D. | 
bishop of the diocese. | With map. ( 
Published under the direction of the 
Tract connnitt (•('. | 

London: | Society for ]»ronioting 
christian knowledge, | Northumher- 
land avenue. Charing cross, W. C; | 
43, Queen Victoria street, E. C. ; | 
Brighton : 13.'), North Street. | New 
York : E. & J. B. Young & co. | 1888. 

Title verso blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1 
1. text pp. 1-108, map, 10°. 

In some copies tlie authoi's name is mis- 
printed Bompus. 

Cliapter v, L.anguages (pp. 51-58), consists of 
general reniiirks on the three languages within 
tlie dioce.se — Tenni, Tukudli, .and Western 
i;s(iuim.aux — and gives in each St. John, iii, 16, 
p. .55, and the r,,ord's ]>rayer, ])p. 57-.58. 

Copies seen.: Eames, I'illing. 

[ ] Words of the Chipewyan Indians 

of Athabasca, arranged according to 
Dr. Powell's schedules [in the Intro- 
duction to the study of Indian lan- 
guages, second edition]. 

Manuscript, 10 pages, 4°, in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. Itecorded in the 
early part of 1890. 

In transcribing this material Bishop Horden 
has given tlie Cliii)e\\'yan words only, using 
the numbers given in I'owell's Introduction in 
lieu of the English words there given. Some 
at least of the words in each of the 29 schedules 
in the Introduction are given, in .some cases — 
those of the shorter schedules — equivalents of 
all the words being given, the vocabulary as a 
whole embracing about 800 words, phrases, and 
sentences. 

The manuscript is clearly written, three 
columns to a page. 

[ ] Vocabulary of the language of the 

Tene Indians of Mackenzie River, 
being a dialectic variety only of the 
Chipewyan language, with the same 
linguistic structure. 

Manuscript, 11 ])age8, 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. He- 
corded in the early part of 1890. 

The vocabulary i)roper consists of about 2,000 
words, arranged aljihabetically by English 
words, and is followed by the numerals, adverbs 
of time, place, and quantity, c(mjunctions, 
prepositions, interjections, ju-onouns, verbs, 
with conjugations. 

See Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas 

(W. C.) 

Mr. Bompas, a son of the late C. C. Bompas, 
esq., sergeant-at-law, was born in Loudon, Eng- 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



11 



Bompas (W. C.) — ContimuMl 

laud, in 18^4. Having been fiiMt trained to the 
legal professiou, ho was ordained deacon by tlio 
then I?i.sliop of Lincoln in lHr>'.>. After serving 
several euraeies in the dioecst^ of Lincoln, ho 
canu! to Canada as a missionary ol' the Ohiireh 
missionary so('iety in 1HC5, having liist I'eceived 
priestly orders from the jiresent IJisliop of 
Rupert's Land a<-ting as eonmiissary for tlie hito 
J^ishop of London. In 1874 In* was again snni- 
nioned to England to receive episcopal orders 
as Bishop of Atliabasca, and in 1HS4, the i)res- 
ent diocese of Mackenzie being jiortioned olf 
from that of Atliabasca, his titles was clianged 
to Bisho]) of Mackenzie Kiver, the Uiglit Uev. 
Dr. Young being consecrated as Bishop of Ath- 
nbas(^a. 

He has written and published material in the 
Algoiuiuiau languages, as well as a i)rimer in 
Kskinio. 

Boston Athena»nni : These words f(dlowiiig a t itle 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution, 
Boston, Mass. 

Boston I'ublic : Tliese words following a title or 
witliin parentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of tlio work referred to has bi'en seen by 
the compiler iu that library, Boston, Mass. 

Bourke (Capf. John Gregory). Au 
Apache campuign | in the Sierra Madre. 
j All account of the expedition in j)iirsnit 
of the I hostile Chiracahua Apaches in 
the I spring of 1883. | By | John G. 
Bourke, | Captain Third Cavalry, IT. S. 
Army, | Author of ' The Snake Dance 
of the Moquis." | Illustrated | 

New York | Charles Scribiier's sons. 
I 1886. 

Title verso copyright 11. preface pp. iii-iv. list 
of illustrations verso blank 1 1. text ])p. 1-112, 
16°. 

Many Apache terms with English detiuitious 
passim. 

Copies seen ; Congress. 

Vesper hours of the stone age. By 

John G. Bourke. 

In American Anthropologist, vol. :!, i)p. .'iS- 
63, AVashington, 1890, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Contains a luimber of Apache terms passim. 

Notes upon the gentile organization 

of the Aj)aclies of Arizona. 

In the Journal of American FolkLore, vol. 
3, pp. 111-126, Boston and Kew York, 1890, 8°. 
(Pilling.) 

List of Apache gentes, with English mean- 
ings, collected at San Carlos Agency and Fort 
Apache, Arizona, in 1881 and 1882, pp. 111-112; 
of the Tonto Apaches, p. 112; of the Chima- 
huevis, p. 113; of the Apache- Yumas, p. 113.— 
" Parcialidades " of the Apaches (from Escu- 
dero), p. 125. 



Bourke (J. (».) — Continued. 

Notes on Ai)aeho mytliology. 

In the Journ:il of American Fidk-Lore, vol. 
3, im. 209-212, Boston and New York, 1890, 8°. 
(Pilling.) 

Many .\paclie terms |iassim. 

Vocahulaiy of the Sierra Blaiica and 

Chiracahua diah-cts of the Ai>ache- 
Tiiiiieh fiimily. (*) 

Manuscripli in jios.session of its author. Con- 
sists of 2.r)(MI words, et<'.. and inchules a vocah- 
uhiry of tlie s;nne l;ingu:ige ]>rep:ired by Lieut. 
Wm. (1. Elliot, Ninth Infantry. 

During the tinu^ (,'a))t;ii7i Bourke was on duty 
as ;iid<'-de camp to Uh- late (ieneral Crook he 
en.joyed exce]>tionally good oi)portunities for 
compiling an Apiuihe vocabulary, and suc- 
ceeded in obtaining and analyzing a number of 
complete .sentences, ]>rayers, invocations, many 
n.imes of animals, plants, places, i't<'. 

Brinler: -This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work refeiTcd to was seen by the com- 
piler at the sale of books belonging to the kite 
George Brinley, of Hartford, Conn. 

Brinton: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work refeiTcd to has been seen by the com- 
liiler in the library of Dr. D. G. Brinton, Phila- 
delphia, Pa. 

Brinton {Dr. Daniel Garrison). The 
language of paheolithic man. 

In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 25, 
pp. 212-225, Philadelphia, 1888,8°. (Congress.) 

General discussion of the Tinnc or Athapas- 
can laugTiage, pp. 214-215.— Terms for /, thou, 
man, divinity, in Athapascan, p. 216. — Tinn^ 
words, p. 220. 

Issued separately as follows : 

The language | of | palaeolithic man, 

I By I Daniel G. Brinton, M. D., | Pro- 
fessor of American Linguistics and Ar- 
chjeology in the University of Pennsyl- 
vania. I Read before the American phil- 
osophical society, | October 5, 1888. | 

Press of MacCalla &. co., | Nos. 237-9 
Dock Street, Philadelphia. | 1888. 

Printed cover as above, title as above verso 
bhink 1 1. text pp. 3-16, 8°. 

Linguistics as under title next above, pp. 5- 
6,7,11. 

Copies seen : Fames, Pilling. 

Essays of an Americanist, j I. Eth- 
nologic and Archieologic. I II. Mythol- 
ogy and Folk Lore. | III. Graphic 
Systems and Literature. | IV. Lin- 
guistic. ( By I Daniel G. Brinton, A.M., 
M.D., I Professor [&c. nine lines.] | 

Philadelphia: | Porter & Coates, | 
1890. 



12 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, 
conteuts pp. v-xii, text pp. 17-467, iudex of 
authors iind authorities pp. 409-474, index of 
subjects pp. 475-489, 8°. A collected reprint of 
some of Dr. Briiitou".s more iuiportaut essays. 

Tlie earliest form of human speech as re- 
vealed by American toujiues (read before the 
American riiilosophical Society in 1885 and 
published in their proceedings under the title 
of "The language of palieolithic man"), pp. 
39(M09. 

Comments on the Tinne language, pp. 394- 
395.— Tinn6 words, p. 405. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Etluiology, Eames, 
PiUing. 

The American Race : | A Linouistic 

Classification and Ethnogiapliic | De- 
scription of the Native Tribes of | 
North and South America. | By | Daniel 
G. Brinton, A. M., M. D., | Professor 
[&c. ten lines.] | 

New York: | N. D. C. Hodges, Pub- 
lisher, 1 47 Lafayette Place. | 1891. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. dedication 
Terso blank 1 1. preface pp. ix-xii, contents pp. 
xiii-xvi, text pp. 17-332, linguistic appendix 
pp. 333-364, additions and corrections pp. 305- 
368, index of authors pp. 309-373, index of sub- 
jects pp. 374-392, 8°. 

A brief discussion of the Athabascans 
(Tiun6), with a list of divisions of the Atha- 
bascan linguistic stock, pp. C8-74. 

Copies seen : Eames, rilling. 

Daniel Garrison Brinton, ethnologist, born in 
Chester County, Pa., May 13, 1837. He was 
graduated at Yale in 1858 and at the Jeflerson 
Medical College in 1801, after which he spent a 
year in Europe in study and in travel. On his 
return lie entered the army, in August, 1802, as 
acting assistant surgeon. In February of the 
following year he was commissioned surgeon 
and served as surgeon-in-chief of the second 
division, eleventh corps. He was present at the 
battles of Chancellorsville, Gettysburg, and 
. other engagements, and was appointed medical 
director of his corps in October, 1863. In con- 
sequence of a sunstroke received soon after the 
battle of Gettysburg he was disqualified for 
active service, and in the autumn of that year he 
became superintendent of hospitals at Quiucy 
and Springfield, 111., until August, 1805, when, 
the civil war having closed, ho was brevetted 
lieutenant-colonel and discharged. He then 
settled in Philadelphia, where he became editor 
of "The Medical and Surgical Reporter," and 
also of the quarterly "Compendium of Medical 
Science." Dr. Brinton has likewise been a 
constant contributor to other medical journals, 
chiefly on questions of public medicine and 
hygiene, and has edited several volumes on 
therapeutics and diagnosis, especially the pop- 
ular series known as "Napheys's Modern Ther- 
apeutics," which has passed through many 
editions. In the medical controversies of the 



Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 

day, he has always taken the position that med- 
ical science should be based on the results of 
clinical observation rather than on physiological 
experiments. He has become prominent as a 
student and a writer on American ethnology, 
his work in this direction beginning while he 
was a student in college. The winter of 1856-'57, 
spent in Florida, supplied him with material 
for his first published book on the subject. In 
1884 lie was appointed professor of ethnology 
and ardueology in the Academy of Natural 
Sciences. Philadelphia. For some years he has 
been president of the Numismatic and Anti- 
quarian Society of Pliiladelphia. and in 1886 he 
was elected vice-president of the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science, to 
preside over the section on anthropology. Dur- 
ing the same year he was awarded the medal 
of the Soci6t6 Americaine de France for his 
"numerous and learned works on American 
ethnology." being the first native of the United 
States that lias been so honored. In 1885 the 
American publishers of the " Iconographic En- 
cyclop;edia" requested him to edit the first vol- 
ume, to contribute to it the articles on "Anthro- 
pologj-" and "Ethnology," and to revise that 
on "Ethnography," by Professor Gerland, of 
Strasburg. He also contributed to the second 
volume of the same work an essay on the "Pro- 
historic Ardueology of both Hemispheres." 
Dr. Brinton has established a library and pub- 
lishing house of aboriginal American litera- 
ture, for the purpose of placing within the 
reach of scholars authentic materials for the 
study of the languages and culture of the native 
races of America. Each work is the production 
of native minds and is printed in the original. 
The series, most of which were edited by Dr. 
Brinton himself, include " The Maya Chron- 
icles " (Philadelphia. 1882); "The Iroquois 
Book of Bites" (1883); 'The GUegiience: A 
Comedy Ballet in the Nahuatl Spanish Dialect 
of Nicaragua " (1883) ; "A Migration Legend of 
the Creek Indians" (1884); "The Lenape and 
Their Legends" (1885); "The Annals of the 
Cakchiquels ' (1885). ["Ancient Nahuatl 
Poetry" (1887); Rig A^eda Americanus (1890)]. 
Besides publishing numerous papers, he has 
contributed valuable reports ou his examina- 
tions of mounds, shell-heaps, rock inscriptions, 
and other auti(iuities. He is the author of " The 
Floridiau Peninsula : Its Literary History, In- 
dian Tribes, and Antiquities" (Philadelphia, 
1859) ; • ' The Myths of the New "S\"orld : A Treat- 
ise ou the Symliolism and Mythology of the Red 
Race of America" (New York, 1868); "The 
Religious Sentiment: A Contribution to the 
Science and Philosophy of Religion" (1870); 
"American Hero Myths : A Study in the Native 
Religions of the Western Continent" (Philadel- 
phia, 1882); "Aboriginal American Author.s and 
their Productions, Especially those in the Native 
Langmiges" (1883); and "A Grammar of the 
Cakchiiiiiel Language of Guatemala" (1884). — 
Apjdeton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



13 



British ;m«l P'oit^i^'ii I'.ilili' S(Mii'l,\ : 'I'lnsc wnnls 
fiilldwint; ii titlii or williMi icirciilIicMcs alter n 
iidd' iiiiliculo tlial a copy of tlio wmk lias been 
si'i'ii Iiy tlic'coiiiliilor ill tli<i lilirarv ol' llial iiisti- 
liilioii, lit) tiiHcii A'icloiiaiStriil. r,<iTi<|.iii, Kiiu;. 

British iiiid Forc-i^ii liiblc Society. Spoci- 
iiiciis (if .sonic of the liiiij,'u;igc,s iiiul 
(liiilccts I in wliidi | Tlir Hiitish and 
Forcij^u ]>il)lc Society | liiis ]»rinte(l or 
circulated | tlie holy script ii res. 

fV>/(*/*/(o/(;Lonilon : printedliy Messrs. 
(jiilln'rt»V- Kiviugtou,fortlie Rriti.shand 
foreign bible society, Queen Victoria 
street, E. C, wlu^re all information con- 
corning the society's Avork may bi; 
obtained. [ISOO?] 

1 sheet, largo folio, 28 by 38incliOS, Gcoliiiiiiis. 

St.. I dim, iii, 10, in 134 langiiaf^vs, among tlieiii 
tlio Tinuo (syllabic characters), ho. 128. 

Copicx seen: British and Foreign liible Soci- 
ety, Pilling, Wellesley. 

St. John iii. 1(5 | in some of the | lan- 

guaocs and dialects | in whicii the | 
British & Foreign Bible Society | litis 
printed or circxrlated the holy scrip- 
tures. I [Picture ami one line (iiiota- 
tion.] I 

London : | printed for tlie British and 
foreign liible society, | By (iilbert & 
Kivington, 52, St. John's Sqiuvre, E. C. 
I 1875. 

Title as above verso contents 1 1. text \>\i. :i-;i(i, 
historical and stati.stieal remarks verso olfieers 
and agencies of tlio society 1 1. 

St.. John. iii. 10, in the Tiniie (syllaliie charac- 
ters), 11.20. 

Cojnex seen : British and Kori'igii I'lihle Soci- 
ety, Billing, Wellesley. 

Some copies are dated 18()8. (■) 

Tho two "Specimens" of 180;).' and 180S, 
issued by this society and titled in the previous 
bibliographies of this series, contain no Atha- 
pascan. 

St. John III. l(i I in some fif the | 

languages and dialects | in which tho | 
British and foreign | bibb' society j has 
printed and circulated ( the holy scrip- 
tures. I 

Loudon: | British and Foreign l>ible 
Society, Queen Victoriii Street. | Pliihi- 
deljdiia Bible Society, Cor. Walnut and 
Seventh Sts.,. I Philadel]ihia. [lS7(i?l 

Cover title vi>rso contents, no jnsiile title. 
text pp.n-tiO, Ifio. 

.St. John, iii. 10. in Ilie Tinne (.syllabic <liaiae- 
ters).i(. 29. 

Copies geen : Pilling. 



British and I'"or«idn ISiblr Society — ("td. 
St. Joiiii iii. l(i I ill niosl of (lie | lan- 
guages and ditileets | in \vlii(-h (lie | 
I'iritishiV Foreign Bible Society | ha.s 
printed or circulated the holy scriji- 
tures. [Design and one line ([tint at ion. J 
I Enlarged edition. | 

London: | i»rinte(l for the British and 
foriiigu biblo society, | By Gill)»'rt A, 
Kiviiigton, 52, St. John's Sfiuaro, E.G. 
I 1878. 

Pl'iiited (iovers (tille as above on the front one 
verao cpiotation and notes), no inside title, con- 
tents ]ip. 1-2, text 1111.3-48, 10-. 

St.. John, iii, 10, intlieTukndli, p. 20. — C'hlppe- 
wyan or Tinn6 (syllabic cliaracters), \>. 27. 
The so-called " Chippewyan" version in romau 
characters given in this and siibsefnient edi- 
tions is really Chippewa. 

Copies seen: Americ'in Bible Society, Pilling. 

St. .Tohu iii. 16 | in most of the | lan- 
guages and dialects | in which the | 
British &■ Foreign Bible Society ] has 
printed or circuhited the holy scrip- 
tures. [Design and Olio line ([notation.] 
I Enlarged edition. | 

Loudon: | ]iriiited for the British aiul 
foreign liilile society, | By GilViort & 
Kivington, 52, St. John's S(iuare, E. C. 
I 1882. 

Title as above reverse rj notation and notes I 
1. contents pp. 1-2, text pp. 3-48, historical and 
statistical remarks verso oflieers and agencies 
1 1. IC^. 

IJngnistic cdiilents as in tlie edition of 1878, 
titled next above. 

Copies seen: British and I'oreign Biblo Soci- 
ety, British Mnsenni, I^illing, Wellesley. 

Enanr, ott> Joanna, r.i.3ii ex. 16.1 0t'»p;i3uu| 

nepeBO,^oni cBnineniiaro nncania, | na^anntixi | 
ne.TiiKoypnTancitnMi. ii iinooTpanntiMT. | (5H(5.ie- 
iicKiiJib ooiuocTnoAib. [Design and one line 
(juottition.] I 

He-iaTiiiio ,t.iii ('ipnTaiiruaro ri iinocTpaniiaro 
BiH'i.iPiicKaro | o('iiii(\TBa, | y T.i.ii>(iepra ii Ph- 
BiiiirToiia (Lmited), 52, Ct. J/Koncb CKBCpi, 
.loH.iOHi. I 1885. 

Literal trannlation : The gospel by .lolin. 3d 
chapter, 16th verse. I Samples | of tho transla- 
tions of the holy scripture, | published | by tho 
I'ritish and foreign | bible society. | "(lod's 
word eiidnreth forever." | 

Printed for the P.ritisb and foreign bible | 
society, | at Ciilbert A- Bivington's (Limited), 
."■2. St..Tobns Si|iiare, Boiidon. | 1885. 

I'riiileil covers (title as above on front one 
\(is(i (|iiotatioii and notes), contents pp. 5-7, 
text pp. !)-08, 10^. a 

St.. John, iii. 10. in ( 'liipiiewyan or Tinne (syl- 
labic characters). Slave, and Tnkndh.p. 37. 
1 Copies seen ; rilling, 



14 



lUBLlOGRArilY OF THE 



British ami Foreign Biblo Hociety — Ct'd. 

Ev. St. Joli. iii. 16. | iu den meisten 

<lor Spvachcn nnd Dialecte ! in wclclion 
(lie I Britisehe und Ansliiiulische Biljcl- 
gesellscliaft | dielioiligeSchrift dnickt 
nnd verbrcitet. I [Design and one line 
qnotation.] | Vermehite Anflage. | 

London : Britisclie nnd Ausliindisclie 
Bil)elgcsenschaft, | 116 Queen Victoria 
Street, E. C, | 1885. 

Title as above on cover reverse a quotation, 
contents i)p. 1-4, text pp. 5-67 (ver.so of p. 67 
notes), remarks, otficers, agencies, etc. 3 11. 16°. 

St. John, iii, 16, in the Slave of Mackenzie 
River (syllabic anrl ronnm), p. .58; Tinue or 
Chipjiewyan of HuiL-Jon's Bay (syllabic), p. 63: 
Tukiulh, p. 64. 

Cop'ni- seen : Pillinj;. 

In this ami tlie following (ulitions the Ian- 
gnages are arr:ini;('(l alphabetically. 

8t. Jean III. 16, Are. | Spt^eimen.s | de 

la tradnetion de ee jtassage dans la])lu- 
part I des langnes et dialeetes | dans 
lesqnels la | Soeii^t^. Bihliijne Britan- 
niqne et fitraiigere | a inii)rinie on mi.s 
en circulation les saintes »5critures. | 
[Design and one line quotation.] | 

Londres:| Soei^t4 biblique l)ritan- 
uiqne et €trangere, | 146, Queen Vic- 
toria Street, E. C. | 188.5. 

Title on cover as above reverse f|uotation, 
contents pp. 1-4, text pp. .5-67 (verso of p. 67 ob- 
servations), remarks etc. .3 11. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as in the (nrniaii edition 
of 188") titled next above. 

Copies seen : British and Foreign 15iblt> Soci 
ety, Pilling. 

■ St. John iii. 16,&c. | in most of tlie | 

languages and dialects | in wliiclitlie | 
liritish and foreign bible society | has 
printed or circulated tlu' h(dy scrip- 
tures. [Design and one line (quotation.] 
I Enlarged edition. | 

London: | the British and foreign 
bible society, | 146, Queen Victoria 
Street, London, E. C. | 1885. 

Title as above verso quotation and notes, 
contents pp. 3-4, text ])p. 5-67, remarks etc. 
verso p. 67 and tAVo following 11. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as iu the German edition 
of 1885 titled above. 

Copies seen: British and Foreifiu Bible So- 
ciety, Eames, Pilling, "NVellesley. 

Some cojiies, otberwise unchanged, aie ilated 
1886. (Pilling.) 

St. John iii. 16, »S:e. | in most of the | 

ianguagesand dialects | in which the | 
British and foreign bible society | has 



British and Foreign Bibk' Society — Ct'd. 
])rinted or circulated the holy scrip- 
tures. I [Design and oiu' line (|uota- 
don.] I Enlarged edition. | 

London: | the British anil loreign 
bible society, | 146, Queen Victoria 
Street, London, E. C. | 1888. 

Frontispiece (fac-simile of the (Queen's text) 
1 1. title as above verso qnotation and notes 1 1. 
contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-67, remarks etc. 
verso p. 67 and two following 11. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as in the German edition 
of 1885 titled above. 

Copies seen : Pilling, \^'eIlesley. 

St. John iii. 16, &c. | in most of the | 

languages and dialects | in which the | 
British and foreign bible society | has 
printed or circulated the holy scrip- 
tures. I [Design and one line (luotatiou.] 
I Enlarged edition. | 

London: | the British and foreign 
bible society, | 146 Qneen Victoria 
Street, London, E. C. | 1889. 

Title as above verso notes etc. 1 1. contents 
p]). 3-4, text ])p. 5-83. historical sketch etc. 2 11. 
16°. 

.St. John, iii, 16, iu Beaver, p. 10; Chipewyan, 
]). 21 ; Slave (roman and syllabic), p. 73; Tinn6 
(syllabic), p. 79; Tnkndh, p. 79. The so-called 
"Tinne," in roman characters, p. 78, la Chip- 
pewa. 
Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

Sonui copies are dated 1890 (Pilling). 
British Museum : These words following a title or 
within parentlieses after a note indicate that a 
co]>y of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution, 
London, Eng. 

Bureau of Ethnology: These words following a 

title or within parentheses after a note indicate 

-; that a copy of the work referred to h.as been seen 

by the compiler in the library of the Bureau of 

Ethnology, Washington, D. C. 

Buscliinann ( Johann Carl Ednard). tjber 
(U'u Xaturlant. Von Hrn. Bnschmann. 

In Tviiuigliche Akad. der Wiss. zii Berlin, 
Abhandlungen aus dem .Jahre 1852, pt. 3, pp. 
391-423, Berlin, 1853, 4°. 

Contains a few words of Tacullie», Kinai, 
Ugalenzisih, and Inkilik. 

Issued separately as follows : 

ijber I den Natnrlaut, | von | Joh. 

Carl Ed. Bnschmann. | 

Berlin, | InFerd. Diimnder"s^^.•rlag8- 
]5nc]ili;indlnng. | 1853. | Gedruckt iu 
der Drnckerei der koniglichen Akade- 
mie I der Wissenchaften. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text p]). 1-33, Inhalts- 
(jbersicht p. [34], 4°. 

Copies seen : A.stor, British Museum, Eames, 

Translated and reprinted as follows ; 



ATiiAPASt ;a n r. a n(j uag J':s. 



15 



Buschmann (J. C. E.) — Coiitiuucd. 

"On Natural Smiiids," Ity Professor 

J. C. E. Buscliiiiaiiii. 'I'raiisliitcd by 
Campbell Clarko, csci., I'vmw IIk^ Ali- 
luiudlnnt^cu dw IvJiiiiirliclicn Akadciuin 
der WissciiHcdiaftcu zu Jk'ilin, au« dt^iii 
Jahro 18r)2. 

Ill Philological Soc. (of I.Dndnii | I'roc. vol. 0, 
pp. 188-200, London, 18.')4, H . 

Vorwaudtsfliaft der Kinai-Idiomii 

des rus.si.scheii NordaiiKU'ika's init deiii 
grosscnathapaski.srhen Spi-achstaimnc. 

In Kiiiiigliclio Akad. der Wiss. 7.ii Uerliu, 
Bericlitau.sdein Jalire lS.-)4, pp. 231-23G, Berlin, 
[1855], 8°. 

Coiuparativi* vocaltiilarv of flO words of the 
KonaiSpraclit-n (Kouai, Atnah, Koltschauou, 
Inkilek, lukalit, and Ugalcn-^on), witli llie 
Atliapaski.sclie-Sin-aclien (C'hoi)r'wvan,Tahkoli, 
Kiitchin, Siisscc, Doirrib, Tlatskanai, and Unip- 
qua), on folded slicct faciny' \>. 'iiiO. 

Dor athapaskisolu! Sprachstainin, 

diiro'ostollt YOU Urn. IJnscliiiiaiin. 

In Kiinielii'lit' Akad. der Wiss. zii licilin, Al)- 
liandlunjicn aas diMu Jahro 1.^55, \>\>. 144-.310, 
JScrlin, 1850, 4°. 

Divisions of tlie Athapascan family, pp. 150- 
101. — Numerals 1-6 of the Chcpowyan and Kut- 
chin, p. 163. — "Words in the Chopewjan, Tah- 
kali, Kutchin, Sussoc, Uojirib, Tlatskanai, and 
Umpqua, pp. 160-168. — Yocabularv,Enf;lish and 
Chopewyan (from Kichardson), pp. 174-177. — A 
few word.s of the Tacnllics (fi'om Mackenzie), 
p. 177. — Vocabulary of the Tacullies (from Har- 
mon), pp. 177-179. — A few Kutchin words (from 
llichardson), p. 179.— Vocabulary of the Doj;- 
rib (from Ivichardson), pp. 179-180.— A .short 
vocabulary of the Ump([ua (from Tolmie), p. 
180.— A short Chepewy.an vocabulary (from 
Mackenzie), pp. 180-181.— Chepewyan vocabu- 
lary (from Thompson in Dobbs'), pp. 181-182. — 
A few Chepewyan words (from Archreologia 
Americana), p. 182. — Clici)cwyan vocabulary 
(from Kichardson), i)p. 182-183. — Short vocab- 
ulary of the Dogrib (fr(mi Kichardson), p. 183.— 
Sliort conii)arativo vocabulary of the Chepe- 
wyan of Tlio'mpson, Mackenzie, and Kicliard- 
.>ion, p. 183; of the Chepewyan (from Uobbs, 
Mackenzie, and Kichardson) and Tacullic 
(from Harmon), p. 184; of the Clicpewyan (fi'om 
Thomi).son) and Tahkali (from Harmon), p. 184; 
of the Chepewyan (from Mackenzie) and Tah- 
kali (from Harmon), i>. 184; of the Cliepewyan 
(from Kichard.son) and Tahkali (from Harmon), 
!>. 184.^('omparativo vocabulary of thi^ Chip- 
ewyan and Kutchin (Sussee), ji. 185; of tlie 
Chepewyan and Dogrib, jip. 185-180; of the 
Chepewyan and rmiKjua, p. 180; of the Tahkali 
and Kutchin, p. IHO; of the Tacullies and Dog- 
rib, pp. 180-187; of the Tahkali and Umpqua; 
Kutchin and Dogrib; Sussee and ITmi)qua; 
Dogrib and Umpqua, p. 187; of the Tlatskanai '< 
and Umpcjua, p. 188.— Coiuparative tables of 
words of the Chepewyan, Tahkali (from Har- 1 



Buschmann (J. C. E.) — (!oiitiniif'd. 

mon), Kutchin, Dogrib, Uin])qua, Tl;vtskanai, 
Tahkali (frrmi Halo), Sussee, ]>. 188-197.— Com- 
parative vocabulary in 10 i)arallel columns of 
the Chepewyan of Dobbs, Mackenzie, and 
Itii-hiird.son; Tacullies of Harmon and Hale; 
Kutiliin, Susse(!, Dogi-ib, Tlatskanai, and 
Umpriua, p. 198-209.— Alphabet ische und sye- 
tematischo Verzeichnung zuden Wortverzeich- 
nissen der alhapasklschen Sprachen, pjt. 210- 
222. — ("oiui>;iiativc tables of words of thi^ Kiuai 
language of Dawydnw, Kesanow, Kinaize, 
AVrangell, and Lisiansky, pp. 233-245.— .\lpha- 
betische Verzeichnung zu den Kinai-Wortvcr- 
zeichnissen, pp. 24.5-240.— Divisions of the Ath- 
apaski.sche and Kiuai, p. 260.— Ubersicht der 
kinai-athapaskischen Worttafidri, jip. 204-206.— 
A li)liab(^t ische Verzeichnung zu deuWorttafeln 
des athai)askischen Sprachstauuu.s, pp. 206- 
208.— Comparative vocabulary of the Chcpe- 
wyiin, T;thkali, Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Tlats- 
kanai, Uniixiua, Naviijo, Tieorilla, Kiuai, Atnah, 
Ugalenzen, Inkilik, Inkalit, Kcdtschanen, and 
Koloscliisch, pp. 209-272; of the Chepewyan, 
Tahkali, Kutchin, Sussee, Dogrib, Thitskanai, 
Umpqua, Navajo, Tieorilla, Kiuai, Atnah, Ugal- 
enzen, Koltschanen and Koloschiscli, pp. 273- 
282; of the Chepewyan, Tahkali, Dogrib, Tlat.s- 
kanai, Umpqua, Kinai, Atnah, Ugalenzisch, In- 
kilik, Inkalit, Koltschanen, und Koloschisch, 
p. 283.— Comparative tables of word.s from the 
above-named languagea, pp. 284-312. 
Issued separately as follows: 

Der I atliapa8ki,scLe Spraclistamm 

I dargestellt | von | Joli. Carl Ed. 
Biischnianu. | Ans den Al)liaudliin<rou 
der kouiojl. Akademie der Wisseu- 
scliafteu I zii Berlin 1855. | 

Berlin. | Ciedriukt in der Driickerei 
der konigl. Akademie | der Wi.s.son- 
scliaften | 1856. | In Commission be! F. 
Diimmler's Verlags-Bnoliliaudliintc. 

('over title as above, title as above verso note 
1 1. text pp. 149-313, Tnhalts-tJborsicht pp. 314- 
319, Berichtigungen p. [320J,4°. 

Linguistic contents as in original article 
titled next above. 

Copii'siieen : Astor, I'.rinton, liritisli ]\Iiiseuni, 
Kanies, Pilling, Trumbull. 

Triibner's catalogue, l.'^uG, no. 039, prices it 
0*. ; the Fischer cojiy, catalogue no. 273, brought 
11*.; the Squier copy, catalogue no. 142, $1.13; 
priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2050, 10 fr. ; the 
:Murphy cojiy, catalogue no. 2850, brought $2; 
priced by (Juaritch, no. 30031, 7«. Orf. 

Die Simren der aztekiseheu .Si>rache 

im nordlichen Mexico und InHieren 
ainerikanischcn Xorden. Zugleieh eine 
Miisteruugder Viilker und Spnieheudes 
nordlichen Mexieo's und der Westseite 
Nordamerika's von Guadulaxara an bis 
zum Eismeer. You Joli. Carl Ed. Buscli- 
mauu. 



16 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Buschmann (J. C. F>.) — Continued. 

In K()iii{;liclio Akad. dor Wiss. zu I5(Mliii, 
Abh<aii(lluuj;ou aiis dein Jahre 1854, Zweilcr 
Siilip.-P.and, pi>. 1-819 (forms the whole vol- 
ume), Berlin, 1859, 4°. 

General discussion of the Nava,jo, pp. 29,'!- 
208; of the Apache, j)]). 298-322.— Comparative 
vocahnlary (42 words) of the Na\ajo and Ti- 
corilla (from Simpson), p. 320. — General discus- 
sion " Aihapasliischer Sprachstamm," pp. 322- 
323.— Remarks on the Hoopah, with a short vo- 
cabulary, pp. 075-576. — Rem.ai'ks on Hale's Eth- 
nography and Philology, with linguistic classi- 
fication of languages, pp. 002-608. — Remarks on 
the Atnahs, pp. 690-691. — ■Wortvorzeiclmiss der 
Atnah am Knpferfluss, nach AVrangell, pp. 
691-t)92. — Remarks on the Kinai, pp. 695-690.— 
Remarks on the Inkilik and Tnkalit, pp. 704- 
707. — Woriver/.eichniss dor Inkilik nach Sagos- 
kin and Wassil.jew, ])p. 707-708. —"Wortverzeich- 
niss der Inkalit-Jug-elJniit, nach Sagoskin, p. 
708. 

Issued separately as follows : 

Die i Spuren der aztekisclien Spraebe 

I im nordlichen Mexico | tmd liohereu 
amerikaniscluMi Nordeu. | Zngleicli | 
cine Mnsteruug der Volker tmd Spra- 
cheu ! des iiordliclion Mexico's | nnd dei* 
Westseite Nordameril<a's | von Gnadal- 
axara an 1)i.s zuni Eismeer. | Von | Joli. 
Carl Ed. Bnsclimimn. | 

Berlin. | Gednickt in <lor Bnchdruck- 
ereider Konigl. Akadeniie der Wisseu- 
soliaften. | 1859. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. gener.al title of the 
series verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 
1 1. abgekiirtzte Inhalts-trbersicht pp. vii-xii, 
text pp. 1-713, Einloitnug in das geographische 
Register pp. 714-718, geographische Register 
pp. 718-815, vermischte Nachweisuugen pp. 810- 
818, Verbesserungen, p. 810, 4°. 

Copies seen : Astor, Brinton, Eames, Jlaison- 
neuve, Quaritch, Smithsonian Institution, 
Trumbull, Pilling. 

Published at 20 ilarks. An uncut half-mo- 
rocco copy was sold at the Fischer .sale, cata- 
logue no. 269, to Quaritch, for 21. \U. ; the latter 
l)rice8 two copies, catalogue no. 12552,one 21. 2s. 
the other 2Z. iOs. ; the Pinart copy, catalogue no. 
178, brought 9 fr.; Koehler, catalogue no. 440, 
in-ices it 13 M. 50 pf. ; priced again by Quaritch, 
no. 30037, 21. 

Systematisclie Worttafol dcs atlia- 

paskischen Sprachstaiiims, aiifgestellt 
nnd erliiutert von Hrii. Bii.solimann. 
(Dritte Abthoilnng dcs Apache.) 

In lvonigli<'he Ak.id. der Wi.ss. zu Berlin, 
Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1859, pt. 3, pp. 
.501-580, Berlin, 1800, 4". 

Gene.i'al discussion, with examples, pp. 501- 
519.— Oomparativo vocabulary. English-Chep- 
ewyau (two dialects), Biber (two dialects) and 
SJccaui (all from Howsc), pp. 5,0-527; of the 



Buschmann (J. C. E.) — Continued. 

Cbipi)ewayan and Biber (both from 'McLe.in), 
pp. 529-531.— General discussion, pp. ,531-545. — 
Systematisclie Worttafel des athapaskischen 
Sprachstamms', including words of the Apache, 
Apachen der Kupfergruben, Atnah, Biber- 
Indianer, Chepewyan, Dogrib, Hoopah, Inkilik, 
Tnkalit, Kinai, Koltsehanen, Koloschen, ICiit- 
cliin, Kwalhioqua, Loucheux, Nav.ajo, K'orthern 
Indians, Pinaleno, Sussee, Sicani, Tahkali oder 
Tacullios, Tlatskanai, Fgalenzen oder ITgal- 
achmjut, Umpqua, and Xicarilla, pp. 546-581. 
Issued separately as follows ; 

Systematisclie "Worttafel | des atha- 

paskisclien Spraclistarams, | anfgestcllt 
nnd erlautert | von | Job. Carl Ed. 
Busclimann. | Dritte Abtbeilnng des 
Apache. | Ans den Abhandlungen der 
kijnigl. Akademie der Wis,senschafteu 
zu Berlin 18.59. | 

Berlin. | Gedrnckt in der Druckerei 
der konigl. Akademie | der AVis.sen- 
scliaften. | 1860. | In Commission von 
F. Diimmler's Verlags-Buchbandluug. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso note 
11. text pp. 501-581, Inlialts-tJbersicht pp. 582- 
58,5, ]?emerkuugeu p. 586, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title nest above. 

Copies seen .- Astoi", Eames, Pilling, Trum- 
bull, Watkinson. 

Published at 7 M. 80 pf. ; a copy at the Fischer 
sale, catalogue no. 277, l)rouglit 13s. ; priced in 
the Triibner catalogue of 1882, 3«. 

Die Volker und Spracben im luuern 

des britiscben Nordamerika's. 

In Kiinigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 
Monatsborichte aus dem .Talire 18.58, pp. 405-486, 
Berlin, 18.59, 80. (National Mn.seum.) 

Mainly devoted to the Athapascan and its 
various divisions. 

Das Apaclie als eino athapaskiscbo 

.Sprache erwiesen von Hrn. Buschmann 
in Verbindung mit einer systemati- 
sclien Worttafel des athapaskischen 
Sprachstamms. Erste Al)tbeilung. 

In Kiinigliche Akad. der Wi.ss. zu Berlin, Ab- 
h.andlungen, ans dem Jahre 1860, pp. 187-282, 
Berlin, 1801, 4°. 

Geschichto der athapaskischen Verwandt- 
schaft, pp. 187-202. — Nachrichten iiber die 
Volker, pp. 202-222.— Sprachen, pp. 223-244.— 
"Wortverzeichnisse, pp. 244-276. 

Under t he three divisions first n.amed occurs 
a general discussion of tlio various Athapascan 
Languages, with comments upon and ex.imples 
from the works of Turner, Eaton, Whipple, 
Bartlett, Schoolcraft, Henry, and others. 
In the last division occur the following: 
Comparative vocabulary of the Apache 
(from Henry), Navajjo (from Eaton), Nava.jo 
(from Whipple), Pinalefio (from Whipple), and 
Hoopah (from Gibbs), pp. 250-201,— Compara- 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



17 



Buschmann (.!.('. H.) — Coiitiiiurd. 
tiv«( vocMliiiliiry of tlio Aikk^Iui (•'rom Henry), 
Xiiviijo (from Katoii), iiiid Tinjilcno (fniiii 
Whipple), jip. 202-209. — (Joinpanitivo VDcabn- 
lary of tlm Navii,io (from Eaton), and Pinalcno 
(from Wliipple), pp. 2f>'.1-272.— Voeabiilary of 
tho Coppermine Apaclie (from Har(lett), p. 
272. — Voeal)nlarv of (lie Xicarilla (from Simp- 
.son), ]). 27;t. 

Is.siied .separately as foUow.s: 

Das Aparlu' | als oiue athapaHkischo 

Sjnaclio (U'wicsi'ii | von | Joli. ('ail E<1. 
Unsclimanii; | in V(n'1»iu<lnnj^ iiiit oincr 
( Ky.stcmatischcii Wofttafcl dcs atha- 
paskisclu'ii Si»iaclistaiiiiii.s. | Hrstc Ali- 
th(Mluiijj. I Aus (Icii Aliliaii(lliiii,n('ii dcr 
kijiiigl, Akatlfiuic, dcr Wisscuxchaften 
zii Berlin lS(i(). | 

Berlin. | Gcdrnclct in dor Drnckerei 
dor kiinigl. Akadcmio | dcr Wissen- 
schaftfn. | 1860. | In Conimis.sion von 
F. Diiiiiniler's Vcrlaf^H-Hnclihaudlung. 

Cover title, title 1 1. text pp. 187-252, 4"^. 

Linfiui.stie eontent.s as iiiiiler title next above. 

Copies seen : Dunbar, Pilling, Watkniaou. 

Die Vcrwandsehafts - Verhiiltnisse 

der atbapaskisclicn vSpracheu dargc- 
stfllb von Ifrn. Bii.schmauu. Zweite 
Abtbeilnug dcs Apache. 



Buschmann (J. C E.) — Continued. 

In KiiniKlicho Akad. dcr Wiss. zu Berlin, Ab- 
liaiidliingen, aus deiu Jahre 1802, pp. 105-252, 
H.'rlin, wo:!, 4^. 

Die Sprai'lien ziisammen, alle oder nielirere, 
]>p. 1!)0-2UH. — Verwandseliafts ■ Verliiillnisso 
nilt bescliriinktcn Spraclien, pp. 208-220.— lUoa 
zwei .Spraelien vergleii'hen, pp. 220-230. — Stu- 
fenleiter dor Verwand.seliaft dcr athapaski.s- 
elieii .Spraelien, l>p. 2r)l-2.'>2. 

Tli(! languages treated are tlie .Vpaehc, 
Xava.jo, I'inaleno, Xicarilla, Hoopali, Cliepi-- 
wyan, Siissee, Talikali, Tlatskanai, Umpipia, 
ICinai, Dogrib, Inkalik, Louidicux, Ugal(!U/.i. 

Issued .separately as follows : 

Die Vt'i-wandschaftM - Verliiiltni.sso 

I der atliai)aHkisclicn Sprachen | darge- 
.stellt von I Joli. Carl Etl. Buschiuann. 
I Zwcito Ahtheilung | dcs ApaclK?. | 
Aus den Ahhandlnngcn der konigl. 
Akadeniie <ler Wisseuschaften /ii Ber- 
lin lSf)2. I 

Uerlin. | Gcdrnckt in der Krnekerei 

der konigl. Akadeniie | der Wissen- 

sihafteii, I IS()3. | In Commission bei 

V. Diiminler's Verlag.s-Bnebbandluug 

I Ilarwitz niul Gossniann. 

Cover title, title 1 1. text pp. 195-252, 4^. 

Linguistic eontent.s as under title noxtabove. 

Copies seen : Bancrolt, i'illing, Walkinaoa. 



c. 



Campbell (.lobn). The affiliation of the 
Algon((iiin languages. By John Camp- 
bell, M. A. 

In Canadian Inst. I'roc. new series, vol. 1, pt. 
1, pp. 15-,-.:i, Toronto, 1879, 8^. 

Comparison of cliara(!teristi(; forms in Algon- 
quin, with the same in neighboring families, 
among lliem the Athapascan. 

Issued se]>arately as follows : 

The affiliation of the Algonquin lan- 
guages. By .John Campbell, M. A., pro- 
fessor of cbureb history, Presbyterian 
college, Montreal. 

[Toronto, 1871t.J 

No title-page, text pp. 1-41, 8°. 

Linguistics as under title next above. 

Copies seen : Shea. 

The unity of the human race, con.sid- 

ered from an American standpoint. 

In British and Foreign Evangelical Kcview, 
new series, no. :!7, pp. 74-101, London. .lanuary, 
1880, 8°. (Billing.) 

By a coiiious exhibition and comi)arisoii of 
grammatical and lexical forms, this article pro- 
fesses to discover in America t wo main families 
of speech, and to connect these with the Xorth- 

ATH^ )i 



Campbell (.1. ) — Continued. 

cm Asiatic and Malay Polynesian families, re- 
spectively. It, aliounils in wonhs and sentences 
IVom and remarks concerning the American 
languages, among them the Tiuneh. 

Origin of the aborigine,") of Canada. 

In Quebec Lit. and llist. Soc. Trans, session 
1880-lSSl, ])p. (il-93, and a])pendix, i>p. i-xxxiv, 
Quebec, 1882, 12'^. (Pilling.) 

The first part of tliis jiaper is an endeavor to 
show a resemblance between various families 
of the New World and between these and va- 
rioiis peoples of the Old World, and contains 
words in several American languages. (Com- 
parative vocabulary of the Tinneh and Tungus 
languages, about 75 words and phrases, pp. 
xii-xiv. 

Issued separately as follows : 

Origin | of the | aborigines of Can- 

iida. I A paper read before the Literary 
and historical society, | Qtiebec, | by | 
jnof. .[. Campbell, M. A., | (of Mon- 
treal,) I I)el<Sgne (Jcneral do I'lnstitu- 
tion Ethnographi(iu»^ <b^ Paris. | 

(^uelxM- : I printed at the "Morning 
chronicle" office. | 1881. 



18 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THP: 



Campbell (J.) — Continnod. 

Printed cover as abovp, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
1-33, aud appendix pp. i-xxxiv, 8'^. Tweuty-fivo 
copies printed. 

Linguistic content.s a.s under title next above. 

Copies seen ; "Wellesley. 

Asiatic tribes in North America. By 

John Campbell, M. A. 

In Canadian Inst. Proc. new series, vol. 1, pp. 
171-206, Toronto, 18K4. 8^'. 

General comments on the Tinneh family, 
with a list of tribes aud examples, pp. 172-173, 
174-175. — Comparative vocabularj' of the Tinneh 
and Tungus languages (about 80 words, alpha- 
betically arranged by English words), pp. IflO- 
191. — Numerals 1-10 of the Tinneh compared 
with the Peninsular, p. 192. 

Issued separately, repaged, as follows : 

Asiatic | tribes in North America. | 

By John C"ami>bell, M.A., | Professor of 
Clinrch History, Presbyterian College, 
Montreal. 

[Toronto, 1884.] 

Half-title reverse blank 1 1. no inside title, 
text pp. 3-38, 8^. Extract from the Proceed- 
ings of the Canadian Institute. 

Linguistics as under title next above, pp. 4- 
5, 6-7, 22-23, 24. 

Copies seen : Hrinton, Pilling, ^Vellesley. 

Canadian Indian. Vol. I. October. 1890. 
No. I [-Vol. 1. September, 1891. No. 
12]. 1 The I Canadian | Indian | Editors 
I rev. E. F. Wilson | II. B. Small. | Pnb- 
lished nnder the Anspices of | the Cana- 
dian Indian Kesearchal [sic] | Society 
I Contents 1 [&c. double columns, each 
eight lines.] | Single Coi)ies. 20 cents. 
Annual Subscription, $2.00. | 

Printed and Published by Jno. Ruth- 
erford, Owen Sound, Ontario [Canada]. 
[1890-1891.] 

12 numbers: cover title as above, text pp. 1- 
356, 8^. A continuation of Our Forest Children, 
described elsewhere in this bibliography. The 
publication was suspended with the twelfth 
number, with the intention of resuming it in 
January, 1892. The word " Eesearchal " on the 
cover of the first number was corrected to 
" Research " in the following numbers. 

Wilson (E. F.), A comparative vocabulary, 
vol. 1, pp. 104-107. 

Copies seeu : Fames. Pilling, "Wellesley. 
Carrier Indians, ^iee TacuUi. 
Catechism : 

Beaver See Bompas (W. C.) 

Beaver Garrioch (A. C.) 

Chippewyan Kirkliy (W. AV.) 

Cliippewyaii Kirkby (W.'U'.) and liom- 

pas (W. C.) 
D6n6 Glut (J.) 

Uen6 Morice (A. G,) 

D^n6 Seguin (— ). 



Catechism — Continued. 
Montaguais Legotf(L.) 

Montagnais Perrault (C. O.) 

Moutagnais A'egieville (V. T.) 

Slave Kirkby(W. W.) 

Tukudh M'Donald (R.) 

Catlin (George). North and South Amer- 
ican Indians. | Catalogue | descriptive 
and instructive | of | Catlin's | Indian 
Cartoons. Portraits, types, and customs. 
I 600 ]>aiiitings in oil, | with | 20.000 
full length tigures | illustrating their 
various games, religious ceremonies, 
and I other cvistoms, | and | 27 canvas 
paintings | of | Lasalle's discoveries. | 

New York: | Baker & Godwin, Print- 
ers, I Printing-house square, ( 1871. 

Abridged title on cover, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. renuirks verso note 1 1. text pp. 5-92, 
certiticates pp. 93-99, 8=:. 

Proper names with Engli.sh significations in 
a number of American languages, among them 
the Navalio, Copper, Athapasca, Dogrib, and 
(Jhippewyan. 

Copi.es seen : Astor, Congress, Eames, AVelles- 
ley, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

Chapin (Col. G.) Vocabulary of the 
language of the Sierra Blanco Apaches. 

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the 
librai-y of tlio Bureau of Ethnology. Collected 
at Camp Goodwin. Arizona, July, 1867. 

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian forms 
(no. 170), containing 211 words, e<iuivalent8 of 
about 180 of which are given in the Apache. 

There is in the same library a copy (6 11. folio) 
of the voeabuLiry, also made by Dr. Chapiu. 

Charencey (Comte Charles F^lix Hya- 
cintheGouhier de). Recherches surlee 
noins dcs points de I'espace. 

In ACadt'uiie nationale des sciences, arts et 
belles-lettres de Caen, Mem. pp. 217-303, Caen, 
1882, 8^. 

Terms for the cardinal points of the compass, 
with discussion thereon in Peau de Lievre, pp. 
230-238; Chippewyan or Montaguais, p. 239; 
Dindjie, pp. 239-240. 

Issued separately as follows : 

Recherches | sur les | noms des points 

de I'espace 1 par \ M. le C^^ de Charencey | 
membre [&c. two lines.] | [Design.] | 

Caen | imprimerie de F. le Blanc- 
Hardel | rue Froide, 2 et 4 | 1882 

Cover title as above, title as above verso note 
1 1. text pp. 1-86, 8°. 

F.amille Athabaskane: Peau de Lievre, Chip- 
])ewyan or Montagnais, and Dindjie, pp. 21-23. 

Copies seen : Brint(ni, Pilling, Wellesley. 

Linguistic contents asunder title next above. 

Chilig Takudh tshah zit. See M'Donald 

(R.) 
Chin Indians. Sec Nagailer 



AI'IIATASCAN LANGUAGES. 



19 



Chipewyan juiiiHr. 

Chippewyan ; 

|{n|iti.siiiiil <:ii(l S 

Hildc, Nrw lent. 
mi)l.', (..Ill- ■gospels 
Hildc. ]ia.s.H;ij;es 
Catoi'liisin 
CaU'cliisiii 

tieiicnil (li>:cuHHii>ii 

Genoral discnsHinn 
(loiicral (lisfusHioii 
(riMiimialic (■DimiicntH 
(i mill Ilia tie I'oiiiniciit.'^ 
Graiiiinatic troatiso 
Hymn book 
Hj-mns 
Hymns 
Hynms 

Legends 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's i>rayer 

Lord's jirayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Prayer book 
Prayer book 

Prayers 

Prayers 

Primer 

Proper names 

Songs 

Syllabary 

Syllaliary 

Ten commandments 

Ten commandments 

Text 

Tribal names 

Vocabulary 

"Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 



Sco Bompas (W. 



.' Churcb. 
Kirkby (W.W.) 
Kirkby (W. \V.) 
<'hiMcli. 

Kirkby (W.W.) 
Klrkliy(\V. AV.)and 

r.oiiipas ('SN''. C.) 
Adeliing (J. C.) and 

Vater(.T. S.) 
Duncan (D.) 
Tacbe (A. A.) 
(iailatiu (A.) 
(iraudin ( — ). 
Kancroft (11. TI.) 
Kirkby (W. "W.) 
Bompas (W.C.) 
Kirkby (W. W.) 
Kirkby (W.W.) and 

Homjias (W. C.) 
Petitot (K. F. S. J.) 
Apostolides (S.) 
Bcrgholtz (G. F.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 
Kirkby {W. W.) 
Lord's. 
Kost (K.) 

Buschniann (J.C.E.) 
Classical. 
Ellis (R.) 
Haines (E.J.) 
James (E.) 
Kirkby {W. W.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Tolmie ("W. F.) and 

Dawson (G. M.) 
Kirkby ("W. W.) 
Kirkby (W. W.) and 

I5ompas ("W. C.) 
Bomjias (W. C.) 
Tuttle (C. Pv.) 
Bompas (W.C.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 
Syllabarium. 
Tuttle (C. It.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 
Kirkby (W.W.) 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Adclung (J.C.) and 

Vater (J. S.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Balbi(A.) 
Bancroft (iB.H.) 
Bompas (W.C.) 
Busclnnann (J.C.E.) 
(lallatin (A.) 
Howse (J.) 
Jehan (L. F.) 
Kcnnicott (P.) 
LatlKim (K. G.) 
Lefroy (J.H.) 
"Mackenzie (A.) 



Chippe'wyan — Continued. 

Vocabulary M"L»'an (J.) 

Vocabulary M<-Plierson (H.) 

Vocabulary Ki cv*! ( \V. I).) 

Vocabulary Kicliardson (J.) 

Vocabulary Koclirig (F. L. O.) 

Vocabulary Koss (U. B.) 

Vocabulary 'riiiuiipsiin (E.) 

Vocabulary Wliipple (A. W.) 

Vocabulary Wil.sou (E. F.) 

AVords (Jliarcncey (H.de). 

Words Ellis (li.) 

Words Latham (R. G.) 

Words Lesley (J. P.) 

Words Scbombiirgk (R. H.) 

Words 'J'oliuie (W. K.) and 

Dawson (G. AJ.) 
See also Athapascan ; Montagnais ; Tinn6. 
Chiracahua A])aclic. See Apache. 
Church Missionary (ficamr. liangiiages 
of N.^ W. America. 

In Church Missionary Gleaner, no. 90. Lon- 
don, 1881, 4°. ("Welle.sley.) 

Contains St. John, iii, IG, in Chippewyan or 
Tinne in both roman and syllabic characters, 
and in Tukudh. 

Rexirinted from the British and Foreign Bible 
Society's Specimens, etc. 

Church Missionary Society : These words follow- 
ing a title or inclosed within parentheses after 
a note indicate that a cojiy of the work referred 
to has been seen by the compiler in the library 
of that institution, London, England. 

Church Missionary Society. | Diocese of 
Mackenzie river, | N. "\V. T. | One lord, 
one faith, one baptism. | Matt, xxviii. 
19. I Born of Water | and | Of the 

Spirit. I Lnke xviii. 16. | Xame 

I Baptized by the Rev | at 

on I S]ionsors | 

I I [Scripture text from 

Mark xvi. Ifi. two lines.] 

[London: Clmrch mis.sionary soci- 
ety. 187-?] 

Card, 64 by '> inches, verso picture of bap- 
t ism. Prepared for use among the Chippewyan 
Indians. 

Copies seen : Fames. Pilling. 

[One lino syllabic characters.] | 

Church Missionary Society. | Diocese 
of Mackenzie river, | N. W, T. | [One 
line syllabic characters.] | Indian 

Name | Baptized Name 

I By the Rev | on 

18.. I [One lini^ syllabic characters.] 

[London: Cbnrtdi missionary soci- 
ety. 187-?] 

Card, 4g by 3J inches, verso picture of bap- 
tism. Prej>ared for use among the Chippewyan 
Indians. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 



20 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Classical. The | clnssical jotiruiil; | for 
I September and Deeeiiiber | ISll. Vol. 
IV. I [Two lines ((notation in Greek 
and a niouoj^ianiniatic device.] | 

London: | printed by A. J. Valjiy, | 
Took'.s court, Cliancei-y lane ; | sold by 
I Sherwood, Neely, | and Jones, Pater- 
noster row ; I and all other booksellers. 
[ISIL] 

Title verso blank 1 1. contents (of no. vii) pji. 
iii-iv, text pp. 1-526, index pp. 527-5H7, verso p. 
5;J7 colophon givinj: date 1811, 8'^. 

Kiiniernls 1-10 in Chippcwyan (fi'oui Miie- 
kenzie), ]i. 116. 

C'opii'n seen : Congress. 

[Clut (Archbishop J.)] Jd.sns-Christ 
Nnpankannweri, \\6 dze pany(5nik' et< an 
I lawale.s.sl nnzin awo' 1^ yeuiwen si tta, 
d6gay6 Mokeri | Bare Alaco pauuiyat- 
*iui"ou <"fe ekkwaaddi : 

[Dayton, Ohio: Pliilii) A. Kemper. 
1888?] 

A .small card, about 3 by 5 incbes in .size, 
headed as above and containing twelvo "Prom- 
i.ses of Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary" 
in the Dog Rib ("Plats-Cotes '') laygnage. On 
tlio reverse is a colored jiicture of the sacred 
heart, with verse in English. Mr. Kemper has 
published the same promises on similar cards 
i?i many languages. 

Copies gcen : Eames, Pilling. 

Deu6 Castor catechism by R. P. J. 

Glut, bishop of Erundel. (*) 

Manuscript in possession of Father fimilo 
Petitot, Mareuil-les-Meaux, France, -who has 
kindlj' furnished me the above title. See 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 

Coleccion polididmica Mexicana | que 
conticne | la oracion dominical | ver- 
tida en cincuenta y dos idiomas indi- 
genes I de aquella repiljlica \ dedicada 
1 ii N. S. P. el senor Pio IX, pont. max. 
I por la I sociedad Mexicana de geo- 
grafia y estadistica. | [Vignette.] | 

Mexico ( libreria de Eugenio Maille- 
fert y comp. | esqnina del Refugio y 
Pte. del Espiritu santo | [Inipreuta de 
Andrade y Escalante] I860 

Title verso printers 1 1. text pj). i-vii, 1-52, 
folio. 

Lord's prayer in the Lipan language, p. 12. 

Copies seen ; Pilling. ' 

Congress: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a ntte indicates that a copy j 
of the work referred to has been seen by the | 
compiler in the Library of Congress, Washin; 
ton, 1). C. 

Cook's Inlet Indians. Sec Kenai. 

Copper Indians. See Ahtinne. 

Coppermine Apache. See Apache. 



Coquille ; 

Tribal names See Dorsey (J. O.) 

Vocabulary Abbott (G. H.) 

Vocabulary Dorsey (J. O.) 

Ooyotero Apache. See Apache. 
Crane (Agnes). The Origin of Speech 
I and I Development of Language. | 
By I Agnes Crane. 

[Brighton: J. G. Bishop, Printer, 
"Herald" office, 188-?] 

Cover title as above verso printer, no inside 
title, text pp. l-4:i authorities p. [44], 16°. 

Comments upon and examples in a number of 
American languages, among them a few Tinne 
words, p. 21. 

Copie)i seen : "Wellcsley. 

Cremony (John C.) Life | among the 
A]»aches: | by | John C. Cremony, | 
interpreter [»fee. four lines.] | [Mono- 
gram.] I 

San Francisco: | A. Roman & com- 
pany, publishers. | New York : 27 How- 
ard Street. | 1868. 

Title verso cojiyright 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. contents pp. 5-10, preface pp. 11-12, 
text pp. 13-322, 12^. 

Apache numerals 1-1000, pp. 238-239. —A 
short account of the Ai)ache language, with 
examples, pp. 239-243. 

Copies seen : Geological Survey. 

Vocabulary | of the | Mescalero 

A])ache | language. | Bj^ | John C. Cre- 
mony, I capt. U. S. A. I 1863 

Maimscript, pp. 1-78, 4°, in the Bancroft 
library. San Francisco, Cal. 

Vocabulary of words in common use, 352 
words, pp. 1-15. — Present, imperfect, and future 
tenses, indicative mood, verb to be, p. 16. 
Author unable to continue investigation by 
reason of the lack of ability on the part of the 
interpreter. — Perscmal pronouns, p. 17. — Pres- 
ent, imperfect, and future tenses, indicative 
mood, and ])resent of subjunctive mood, verb to 
do, p]). 18-19. — All the tenses of indicative 
mood, part of subjunctive and all of imperative 
moods, verb to love, pp. 20-22. — Indicative and 
imi)erative moods, verb to eat, jip. 24-26. — Same 
moods, verb to sleep, pp. 26-28. — List of 125 
verbs in common use, pi>. 28-40. — Vocabulary of 
fifty-four miscellaneoTis words, pp. 40-44. — 
TJiirty-eiglit short phrases in ordinary use, pp. 
48-54. — >i'umerals to 20, irregularly to 100, for 
200, 1000, 2000, pp. 50-58.— Apache and Spanish 
names of thirty-six men and thirteen women 
of the tribe, with signitieation in English, pp. 
60-64. — Mode of bestowing names on persons, 
pp. 64-06.— Additional words and phrases, ppr. 
68-78. 

Vocabulary of the language of the , 

Mescalero Apaches. 

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered 11. folio, in the 
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Obtained 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAfJES. 



21 



Cremony (.1. C.) — ContiiiMcil. 

by Ciiiit. Crfiiioiiy at Kort .SimiiuM', I'osnui' 
JU)d(iiiili), on the Pecos Kivci', N. Mcx., in 1H(>:!. 
Kcconli'il on one of the lilanlc tonus of ll^O 
wonls issued by llie Siiiitlisoiiian Institution. 
The Apaclie eiiuivah'uts of aljout 100 of lh(^ 
Englisli words are given. Tliis niiinuseript is 
a copy, by L)r. Geo. Gibbs; the when^abouts of 
the original, which was forwarded to tlic Smith- 
souian Institution by Urig. Gen. James II. 
Carleton, then coniniaiiding the Department of 
New Alexico, I do not know. 

Crook {(l(')i. Cieoif't'). Vocalmlary of 
the Hoopah or luiUaus of Ihe lo\V('r 
Triuity river. 

Manuscript, 2 leaves, 4^, in the lil>rarv of I lie 
Bureau of Ethncdogy, Washington, 1). ('. 

Consists of about- 150 wonls selected from 
those used by the Smithsouiau ou its lilauk 
form of 180 wonls. 

Yofabiilary of tlm Taliiwalatigtia<fe. 

Mainiscript, '■> unnumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Wasli- 
ington, D. C. 

Keconled on one of the Smithsonian forms 
issued for the collection of American linguis- 
tics. The English words given juimber ISO, 
and the corresponding blanks in this vocabu- 
lary are all tilled. 

In the .same library is a copy of this vocabu- 
lary, made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. 

George Crook, .soldier, was born, near Dayton, 
Ohio, Sept. 8, 1828. He was graduated at the 
U. S. Military Academy in 1852, and was on 
duty with the Fourth Infantry in California in 
1852-1861. He participated in the Rogue river 
expedition in 1856, and commanded the Pitt 
river expedition in 1857, where he was engaged 
in several actions, in one of which he was 
wounded by an arrow. Ho had risen to a cap- 
taincy, when, at the beginning of the civil war, 
he returned to the east and became colonel of 
the Thirty-si.xth Ohio Infantry. He afterward 
served in the West Virginia campaigns, in 
command of the Third provisional brigade, 
from May 1 to Aug. 15, 18C2, and was wounded 
in the action at Lewisburg. He engaged in the 
northern Virginia and Mai'vland campaigns in 
August and September, 1802, and for his 
services at Antietam was brevetted lieutenant- 
colonel, IT. S. Army. Ho served in Tennessee 
in 18G;i, and on July 1 he was transferred to the 
command of the Second cavalry division. After 
various actions, ending in the battle of Chick- 
amauga, ho pursued Wheeler's Confederate 
cavalry from the 1st to the 10th of October, 
defeated it, and drove it across the Tennessee 
witli great loss. He entered upon the command 
of the Kanawha district in western Virginia in 
February, 1804, made constant raids, and was 
in numerous actions. Ho took part in Sheri- 
dan's Shenandoah cami)aign in the autumn of 
that year and received the brevets of brigadier- 
general and ma.jor-general in the U. S. Army, 
March 13, 1805. Geu. Crook had ccnnmaud of 



Crook ((i.) — Coiitiiiiied. 

the cavalry of the Army of tb<^ Potomai; from 
March 20 till .\pril 9, during whicli time be was 
engaged at Dinwiddle Court House, Jetters- 
ville, Saihn-'s (Jreek, and Farnivillc, till the sur- 
render at Apjiomatlox. He was afterward 
transferred to the command of Wilmington. X. 
C, where ho nunained from Sept. 1, 1805. till 
Jan. 15, 1800, when be was mustered out of the 
volunteer service. After a six weeks' leave of 
absence he wa,s assigiu'd to duty on the board 
ai)pointed to examine rifle tactics, wa.s com- 
missioned lieutenant-colonel of the Twenty- 
third infantry. U. S. Army, on July 28, 1806, and 
assigned to the district of lioise, Idaho, where 
lie remained until 1872, activi'ly engaged against 
the Indians. In 1872 (ien. Crook was assigned 
to the Arizona district to quell the Indian dis- 
turbances. He .S('nt an ultimatum to the chiefs 
to return to their reservations or "be wiped 
from tlic face of the earth." No attention was 
paid U) his demand, and ho attacked them in 
the Tonto basin, a stronghold deemed imjireg- 
uable, and enforced submission. In 1875 he 
was ordered to ([Uell the disturbances in the 
Sioux and Cheyenne nations in the northwest, 
and defeated those Indians in tlie battle ot 
Powder IMver, W.yoming. In March another 
battle resulted in the destruction of 125 lodges, 
and in June the battle of Tongue Kiver was a 
victory for Crook. A few days later the battle 
of the Rosebud gave hini another, when the 
maddened savages massed their forces and suc- 
ceeded in crushing Custer. Crook, on receiving 
reeuforcements, struck a severe blow at Slim 
Buttes, Dakota, and followed it np with such 
relentless vigor that by May, 1877, all the hos- 
tile tribes in the northwest had yielded. In 
1882 he returned to Arizona, forced the Mor- 
mons, squatters, miners, and stock-raisers to 
vacate the Indian lands which they had seized. 
In the spring of 1883 the Cliii'icahuas began 
a series of i-aids. General Crook struck the 
trail, and, instead of fidhiwing, took it back- 
wai'd, penetrated into and took possession of 
their strongliolds, and, as fast as the warriors 
returned from their plundering excursions, 
made them prisoners. He marched over 200 
miles, made 400 prisoners, and captured all the 
horses and plunder. During the two years fol- 
lowing he had sole charge of the Indians, and 
no depredation occurred. [He died in Chicago 
March 21, lS9i).]—Appleton'g Cyclop.of Am.Biog. 

Curtin (Jeremiah). [Words, phrases, 
and seuteuces in the language of the 
Hoopa Indians, Iloopa Valley, Oregon.] 

Manuscript, 101 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Colle('ted in the Hoopa 
\'alley, December, 1888 - January, 1889. Re- 
corded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to 
the Study of Indian Languages, .second edition, 
pp.77-102. 105, 109-111, 113-125, 127-130, 132-136, 
184-187, 189-228, and 5 unnumbered pages at iiie 
end. Of the schedules given in the work nos. 
1, 2. 3, 4. 5. 6, 7, 8. 18, 22, 24. 25, 26, 27, and 28 are 



22 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THfi 



Curtin (J.) — Cdntinued. 

fcompletely filled, no.s. 10, 12,14,16,17,18,19, 20, 
21, and 23 are partly lillcd, and uos. 9, 11, and 15 
are blank. 

The alphal)et adopted by tbo Bureau of Eth- 
llblogy ia used. 

Jeremiah Cuttiu was born in Milwaukee, 
Wis., about 1835. Ho had littlo education in 
childhood, but at the age of twenty or twenty- 
one prepared himself to enter Phillips Exeter 
Academy, made extraordinary progress, and 
soon entered Harvard College, where he was 
graduated in 1863. By this time he had become 
noted among his classmates and acquaintances 
for his wonderful fac^ility as a linguist. On 
leaving college he had acquired a good knowl- 
edge of French, Spanish. Portuguese, Italian, 
Rumanian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Icelandic, 
Gothic, German, and Einnish, besides Greeli 
and Latin. He had also made considerable 
progress in Hebrew, Persian, aiul Sanskrit, and 
was beginning to speak Russian. When Ad- 
miral Lissofsky's fleet visited this country, in 
1864, Curtin became iicquainted with tlieofheers 
and accompanied the expedition on its return 
to Russia. In St. Petersburg he obtained 
employment as a tran.slator of i>olyglot 
telegraphic dispatches, but he was presently 
appointed by Mr. Seward to the office of secre- 
tary of the United States legation, and ho 
held this place till 1868. During this period 
he became familiar with the Polish, Bohe- 
mian, Lithuanian, Lettish, and Hungarian 
languages, and made a beginning in Turk- 
ish. From 1868 till 1877 he traveled in east- 
em Europe and in Asia, apparently in the 
service of the Russian government. In 1873, at 
the celebration at Prague of the 500th anni- 
versary of the birth of John Huss, he delivered 
the oration, speaking with great elocjuence in 
the Bohemian language. During his travels in 
the Danube country he learned to speak 
Slovenian, Croatian, Servian, and Bulgarian. 
He lived for some time in the Caucasus, where 
he learned Mingrelian, Abkasian, and Arme- 
nian. At the beginning of the Russo-Turkish 
war in 1877, he left the Russian dominions, and, 
after a year in London, retiu-ued to his native 
country. Since then he has been studying the 
languages of the American Indians and has 
made valuable researches under the auspices 
of Maj. John W. Powell and the Bureau of 
Ethnology. He is said to be acquainted with 
more than tifty languages. — Ajtpleton's Cyclop, 
(if A m. Biog. 

Gushing (Fiauk Haniiltoii). Vocabu- 
lary of the Navajo lauguage. 

Manuscript in possession of Mr. A. S. Gat- 
schet, "Washington, D. C. 

Recorded in a folio blank book, on p. 46 of 
which are twenty-fourseutonces, and, lui p. 73, 
twenty-fi\'e words anil phrases. This is a copy, 
made by Mr. Gatschet from tlie original, which 
is intlje possession of its eomi)iler. 



Gushing (F. H.) — Continued. 
See Gatschet (A. 8.) 

Frank Hamilton Cuslxiug was borii in North- 
east, Erie County, Pa., July 22, 1857. He numi- 
fested in early childhood a love for archeoh)g- 
ical i)ursuits, and at the age of eight years 
began to collect fossils and minerals, made .a 
complete Indian costume, and lived in a bark 
hut in the woods. He learned that wherever 
Indian encampments liad been long established 
the soil an<l vegetation had undergone a change, 
which assisted him in his search for relics. At 
the age of tifteen he had discovered the process 
of making an-ow-heads from flint by pressure 
with bone. In 1870 his father moved to Medina, 
N. T., where the son's researches found new 
ground. In the town of Shelby were ancient 
remains of fortitications, rich in relies, and they, 
with ancient burial grounds and camp sites in 
Madison and Onondaga counties, were carefully 
searched. In the spring of 1875 he became 
a student in Cornell University, but later 
spent most of his time as assi.stant to Dr. 
Charles Rau in the preparation of the Indian 
collections of the National Museum for the Cen- 
tennial exposition at PhiladeliAia, and was 
curator of the entire collection until the close 
of the exhibition, when he was appointed 
curator of the ethnological deijartment of the 
National Muscnim. During the summer of 1876 
lie gained his first knowledge of the Pueblo 
Indians, and in 1879 he joined Maj. J. W. 
Towcll in his (expedition to New Mexico. The 
I'xpiMlition spent two months among the Zuiii 
ludian.j, and Mr. Cushing, at his own request, 
was left there. Diu-ing the second year of his 
sojourn he had so tar made himself one of the 
tribe and gaintnl the esteem of the chiefs that 
he was formally adopted and initiated into the 
sacred esoteric society, the "Priesthood of the 
Bow." In 1882 he visited the east with a party 
of six Zufiis, who came for the purpose of 
taking water from the "Ocean of Sunrise," as 
a religious ceremony, and carrying it to their 
temple in the Pueblos. Four of the Zunis 
returned, while Mr. Cushing remained with the 
other two during the summer in Washington, 
for the purpose of writing, with their aiil, a 
paper on Zufii fetiches. In September of the 
same year he returned to Zuni ; but in the spring 
of 1884 failing health obliged his return for two 
years to the east. Again he had with him for 
some time three of the Zuiiis, to aid him in the 
preparation of a dictionary and grannuar of 
their language and in translations of myth and 
beast stories, songs, and rituals. In 1886 Mr. 
Cushing organized the Hemenway Archfeolog- 
ical Expedition, and as its director discovered 
and excavated extensive buried cities in Ari- 
zona and New Mexico ; but in 1888 he was again 
jirostratcd by illness. He is now writing con- 
tiiliutions for the Bureau of Ethnology on the 
iclation of ]uiuiitive drama to creation lore and 
other ZuIii works. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



23 



D. 



Daa (Ludwig Kristeusen). On thf aflin- 
itu'H betwotMi the liinguages of the 
iioithoru tribes of the old and new con- 
tinents. By Lewis Kr. Daa, Esq., of 
Christiauia, Norway. (Read December 
the 20th.) 

In I'hilological Soc. [of London] Trans. 1R5G, 
pp. 251-204, London [18!)7],8>. ((^onsrcss.) 

Ooinp.arativc tables sliowinj: atliuities be- 
tween A.siatic and American languages, pj). 
264-285, contain words from 7uany North 
Aniirican languages, the Athapascan Ixdng as 
follows: Athabasca, Beaver, Kutcliin, Sikanni, 
Tahkall, Navajo, Jecorilla, Tlatskanai. Kinai, 
Loncheux, Atnah, Ugalcui, Umkwa, Dogrib, 
Navajo, and Apache. 

Dall (William Healey). Alaska | and ] 
its resources. | By | William H. Dall, | 
director of the scientific corps of the 
late Western union | telegraph expedi- 
tion. I [Design.] | 

Boston: | Lee and Shepard. | 1870. 

Frontispiece 1 I. title verso copyright and 
printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. intro- 
duction pp. v-viii, contents pp. ix-xii, half-title 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-526, appendix pp. 
527-609, index pp. 610-627, notes etc. p. [628], 
ni.-ips and plates, 8°. 

Comparative vocabulary of 26 words and the 
numerals 1-10 of the Ugalentsi, Ahtena, Kenai- 
tena, Tenan-Kutch'in, Kutcha-Kutch'in, Kai- 
yulikhatiina (Ulukuk), Kdiyukhatana (north- 
e.astern) and Unakhatana, pp. 550-551. — "Words 
towards vocabularies of the Tinneh tribes," 
constituting a comparative vocabulary of the 
Nuliito In'galik, Ulu'kuk In'galik, TanauA 
lu'galik, Unakhatdua, and Tendu Kutcbin, 
pp. 566-575. 

Copies geen : Boston AtbeniBum, British Mu- 
seum, Congress, Eames, Powell, Triuubull, 
Watkiuson. 

A copy at the Field sale, catalogue no. -180, 
brought $1.50. 

Some copies have the imprint, London: | 
Sampson Low, Son, and Marston, | Crown 
Buildings, 188, Fleet Street. | 1870. (British 
Museum, Bureau of Ethnology.) 

On the Distribution of the Native 

Tribes of Alaska and the adjacent ter- 
ritory. By W. H. Dall. 

In American Ass. Adv. Sci. Proc. vol. 18, pi). 
263-273, and 2 folding sheets, Cambridge, 1870, 8°. 

Contains, on a folding sheet between pp. 272- 
273, a vocabulary of 26 words .and the numerals 
1-10 of the Ug.ileutsi, Ahtena, Tenan-kutchiu, 
Kutcha-kutcliin, Unakhatana, Kaiyuhkhotaua 
of Ululuk Kiver and Kaiyuh River, 



Dall (W. H.) — Continued. 

A<ldress by William H. Dall. Vice- 

])resident, section H, antliroi>ology, 
The native tribes of Alaska. 

In American Ass. Adv. Sci. Proc. vol. 34, pp. 
363-379, Salem, 1886, 8^. (Pilling.) 

General discussion of the habitat and atliu- 
ities (tf the Tinneii or Atlial>ask.aus, p. 376. — 
Tribal divisions of the Tinutili, pp. 378-379. 
Issued separsitcly .is IVdlows: 

The native tribes of Ala.ska. | An | 

address | before the | section of 
anthropology | of the | American asso- 
ciation for the advancement of science, 
I at I Ann Ai-bor, August, 1885. | By | 
William H. Dall. | Vice president. | 
(From the Proceedings of the American 
Association for the Advancement | of 
Science, Vol. xxxiv, Ann Arbor Meet- 
ing, August, 1885.) I 

Printed at the Stilem press. | Salem, 
Mass. I 1885. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 3-19, 8°. 

General remarks upon the habitat and affin- 
ities of the Tinneh or Atbabaskans, p. 16. — 
Tribal divisions of the Tinneh, pp. 18-19. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

William Healey Dall, naturalist, was bom in 
Boston, Mass., Aug. 21, 1845. He was educated 
at the Boston public schools, and then became 
a special pupil iu natural sciences under Louis 
Agassiz and in anatomy and nu'diciue under 
Jeffries Wymau and Daniel Braiuard. In 1865 ho 
was apiiointed lieutenant iu the International 
telegraph exiiedition, and iu this capacity vis- 
ited Alaska iu 1865-1868. From 1871 till 1880 
he was assistant to the V. S. Coast Survey 
and underits direction spent the years 1871 to 
1874 and 1884 iu that district. His work, besides 
the exploratiou and description of the geog- 
raphy, included the anthropology, natural his- 
tory, and g(>ology of the Alaskan and adjacent 
regions. From the field work and collections 
have resulted maps, memoirs, coast pilot, and 
papers on these subjects or branches of them. 
[Since 1884 he has been] paleontologist to the 
tJ. S. Geological Survey, and since 1869 he has 
been honorary curator of the department of 
mollusks in the U. S. National Museum. In this 
ottiee- he has made studies of recent and fossil 
mollusks of the world, and esiieeially of North 
America, fi'om which new information has been 
derived concerning tlio brachiopoda, patellidae. 
chitonidaj, and the mollusk fauna of the deep 
sea. These studies have gi'own out of those 
devoted to the fauna of northwestern America 
and eastern Siberia. Mr. Dall has been liooored 



u 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Dall ( W. H.) — Continued. 

with clcition.s to nearly all the sciontiflc soci- 
eties in this coniitry, aud to many abroad. In 
1882 aud in 1885 he was vice president of the 
American Association for the Advancement of 
Science, aud inesided over the seitions of biol- 
ogy and anthropology. Uis scieutitic papers 
iuclude about two hundred tith's. Among the 
separate books are "Alaska and its Kesources" 
(Bo.ston, 1870) ; " Tribes of the Extreme North- 
west" (Washington, 1877); "Coast Pilot of 
Alaska, Appendix 1, Meteorology and. lUbliog- 
raphy " (1879) ; "The Currents and Tempera- 
tures of Bering Sea and the Adjacent Waters" 
(1882); "Pacific Coast Pilot aud Islands of 
Ahiska, Dixon Entrance to Yakutat Bay, with 
the Inland Passage" (1883); "Prehistoric 
America," by the Marquis de Nadaillac, edited 
(New York, 1885); aud "Report ou the Mol- 
lusca, Brachiopoda, aud Pelecypoda" of the 
Blake dredging expedition lu the West In- 
dies (Cambridge, 1886). — Appletoiii Cyclop, of 
Am. Biog. 

David vi psalmiit Tukiidli. See M'Don- 
ald(K.) 

Davidoff (Gavrilalvanovich). 4ByKpaTHoe 
nyTeuiarBie | Bb AMepiiKy | MopcKHXi o-tuue- 
poBi I XBOCTOBa II /11aBbi40Ba, | nHcamtoe CHMb 
noc.rfcjHUMb. I Macr^ iicpBafl [-Biopaa]. | 

Bi, C. IlerepByprt. | Ile'iauiaiio bi Mopcitoii 
Tiiiiorpa*iii 1810 [-1812] 104a. 

Trannlation. — Two voyages | to America | by 
the naval othcers'l Khwostotf aud Davidoft', | 
written by the hitter. | Part tirst[-secondJ. | 

At St. Petersburg | printed in the Naval 
Printing Oftice in the year 1810[-1812). 

2 vids. 8°. Vocabulary of the lienai (of tribes 
living ou Kenai Gulf, Cook's Inlet), vol. 2, pp. 
xiii-xxviii. 

Copies seen .- British Museum, Congress. 

The German edition, Berlin, 1810, S'^", contains 
no linguistics. 

Davidson ((jleorge). Report of Assi.staut 
George Davidson relative to the re- 
sources and the coast features of Alaska 
Territory. 

I In Coast Survey Ann. Rept. 18G7, pp. 187-320, 

, Washington, 1869, 4°. (Geological Survey.) 
I Vocabulary of the language of the natives of 

■ Kenai (about 300 words), alphabetically 
arranged by English entries (from Lisiausky), 
I pp. 293-298. 

Rejirinted as follows : 

Report of Assistant George Davidson 

relative to the coast features and re- 
sources of Ahiska territory. 

In 40th Congress, 2d session. House of Repre- 
sentatives, Ex. Doc. No. 177, Russian America, 
Message from the President of the United 
States, iu answer to a resolution of the House 



Davidson (G.) — Continued. 

of 19th of l)e('eiubei' last, transmitting corre 
siMuidence in relation to Russian America. 
[Washington, 1868. J Pp. 1-361, pt. 2, pp. 1-19, 8°. 
(Geoh)gical Survey.) 

Mr. D;ividson's report occupies pp. 219-361, 
aud contains, pp. 328-333, ;i vocabulary of tlie 
Kenay (from Lisiausky) of 300 words, alphabet- 
ically arranged by English entries. 

Reprinted as follows : 

United States coast survey. | Benja- 
min Peirce, superintendent. | Pacific 
coast. I Coast pilot of Alaska, | (first 
part,) I from southern boundary to 
Cook's inlet. | By | George Davidson, | 
assistant coast survey. | 1869. | 

Washington: | Government jirinting 
office I 1869. 

Title ver.so bliink 1 1. introduction pp. 3-4, 
text i)p. 5-192, appendices jij). 193-246, index pp. 
247-251, 80. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 21.5-221. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

Davis (William Watts Hart). El Gringo; 
I or, I New Mexico and her peojile. | 
By I W. W. H. Davis, | late Uuite<l 
States attorney. | 

New York: | Harper & brothers, 
publishers, | Franklin square. | 1857. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso cojiyright 1 1. ded- 
ication verso blank 1 1. preface verso blank 1 1. 
contents pp. vii-xii, text ii|i. 13-432, 12°. 

"Vocabulary of upward of sixty words in 
Navajo and English, "pp. 419-420, furnished by 
Captain H. L. Dodge and a young Indian. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Congress, 
Eames, Geological Survey, Pilling. 

Dawson (George Mercer). Geological 
and natural history survey of Canada. 
I Alfred R. C. Selwyn, C. M. G., LL. 
D., F. R. S., Director. | Report | on an 
exploration in the | Yukon district, N. 
W. T., I and | adjacent northern por- 
tion of I British Columbia. | 1887. | By 
I George M. Dawson, D. S., F. G. S. | 
[Coat of arms.] | Published by author- 
ity of ]).ailiament. | 

Montreal : | Dawson brothers. | 1888. 

In Geological and Nat. Hist. Survey of Can- 
ada, Aim. Rept. (new series), vol. 3, jtart I, 
report B, Montreal, 1889. Title as .above verso 
blank 1 1. letter of Ir.ansmittal verso blank 1 1. ' 
textpp. 5B-277B, 8°. 

Appendix II. Notes on the Indian tribes of 
the Yukon district and adjacent northern por- 
tion of British Columbia t]ip. 191B-213B), con- 
tains a general account of the languages of the 
region and "Short vocabulariea [about 100 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



25 



Dawson ((}. M.) — ( 'ontiiincd. 

words each] of tlu' 'lalil-laii, Ti-t.sho-t i-iia, ami 
Ta-fii.sli, obtained in 1SS7, " jip. 'JUHii-'JWI!. 

Cojiicn tiC'ii : < icologiial Siuvc.v. 

'I'lie aiipiiidi\ was issued sejiMiatcly as Inl 
lows : 

Notes (111 tlic Jiidiaii tiilics of llu- 

Yukon (lisfrict and adjacfiit northern 
portlDU of liritish Columbia. By 
Geornf M. Dawson, D. tS., F. G. S., 
Assistant Direetor, Geological Survey 
of Canada. (Reprinted (Voni the An- 
nual Re]tort of Geological .Survey of 
Canada, 1887.) 

No titk'jiaf;*'. luadin;;' as above; text l>li. 1- 
23, 8°. 

Liufjiiisties as under title uext above, ii;i. 18- 
23. 

Copien sein : filling. 

See Tolmie (W. F. ) and Dawson (G. 

M.) 

George Mercer D.iwson was born at Plctou, 
Nova Scotia, Angnst 1, 1849, and is the eldest 
8011 of Sir William Dawson, priiici]ial of 
McGill University, Montreal. He was edu- 
cated at McGill College and the IJoyal School 
of Mines; hold the Duke of Cornwall's schol- 
arship, given by the Prince of "Wales; and took 
the Edward Porbes medal in iialauntology and 
the Murchisou medal in geology. IIo was ap- 
pointed geologist and naturalist to Her 
Majesty's North American Boundary Conunis- 
sion iu 1873, and at the close of the commission's 
work, in 1875, he jtublished a report under the 
title of " Geology and Kesources of the Porty- 
Binth Parallel." In Julj-, 1875, he received an 
appointment on the geological survey of Can- 
ada. Prom 1875 to 1879 he was occupied in the 
geological survey and cxjdoration of British 
Columbia, and subseiiuently engaged in similar 
work both in the Northwest Territory and 
British Colujnliia. Dr. Dawson is llie author of 
numerous jiajiers on geology, natural history, 
and ethnology, published in the Canadian Nat- 
uralist, Quarterly Journal of the Geological 
Society, Tiansactions of the Iloyal Society of 
Canada, etc. Ho was iu 1887 selected to take 
charge of t he Yukon expedition. 

De Meiilen {Lieut. E.) Vocaliulary of 
the Kenay (Kai-ta-ua) language of 
Cook's Inlet. 

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the l!ureau of Ethnology. Ob- 
tained in 1870. 

Pecorded on one of the blank forms (no. 170) 
issued by the Smithsonian Institution, contain- 
ing the standard vocabulary of 211 words, equiv- 
alents of .ill of which are given iu the Kenay. 
D£n^: 

Bible lessons See Faraud (H. J.) 

Bible passages Grouard (E.) 

Catechi.sm Clut (J.) 

Catechism Morice (A. G.) 



D^ne — ('(Miliuueil. 

CatechisMi Seguin ( — ). 

i)iction;iry Morice {.\. G.) 

Dictionary I'etitol (K. P.S.J.) 

Grammar Morice (A. (J.) 

(irinnmatic comments AIoric(; (A. (J.) 

Grammatic treatise I'etitot (E. P. S. J.) 

Hymns Morice (A. G.) 

I'rav ei' book Morice (A. G.) 

Prayers Morice (A.G.) 

Primer Morice (A. (j.) 

Sermons Morice (A.G.) 

Songs Morice (A.G.) 

Text Morice (A.G.) 

Tribal names Morice (A.G.) 

A'ocabulary Petitot (E. P. S. J.) 

Woids Chareuccy (U. de). 
See also Tinne. 



Den^ Diudjie. See Dene. 

Dictionary: 
D6n6 
I)6n6 
Keuai 
Loucheux 
Montaguais 
Montagnais 
Nava,io 



See Morice (A.G.) 
Petitot (E.P. S.J.) 
Padlott' (L.) 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 
Yegreville (V.T.) 
Matthews (W.) 
Peau de Li6vre Petitot (E. P. S. J.) 

Dobbs (Arthur). An | account | Of the 
Countries adjoining to | llud.son's bay, 
I in the | North-west Part of Auieriea: 
I containing | A Description of their 
Lakes and Rivers, the Nature of the | 
Soil and Cliiuates, and their Methods of 
Commerce, &c. | Shewing the Benefit 
to be made by settling Colonies, and | 
ojieuing a Trade iu these Parts; where- 
by the French w ill be | dejjrived in a 
gr(^at Measure of their TraHick in Furs, 
and I tlieCommnnicatioul)etween{,"an- 
adaand Mississi})pi be cut ofl'. | ^Yith | 
An Abstract of Cai)tain Middleton's 
Journal, and 0])ser\ ations upon | his 
]>('haviour during his Yoyage, and since 
his Return. | To which are added, | I. 
A Letter from Bartholomew de Fonte, 
I Vice- Admiral of Peru and Mexico; | 
givingan Account of his Voyage from | 
liiina iu Peru, to prevent, or seize upon 
I any Ships that should attempt to find 
I a North-Avest Passage to the South 
Sea. I II. An Abstract of all the Discov- 
eries I which have been jiublish'd of the 
Islands I and Countries iu and adjoin- 
ing to the I Great AYestern Ocean, be- 
tween Ame- I rica. India, and China, &c. 
pointing | out the Advantages that may 
be made, | if a short Passage should be 
found thro' | Hudson's Streight to that 



^6 



BIBLIOGKArHY OF THE 



Dobbs (A.) — Continued. 

Ocean. | III. Tlie lliulson's Bay Com- 
pany's Charter. | IV. The Standard of 
Trade in those | Parts of America; with 
an Account | of the Exiiorts and Profits 
made an- | nually hy tlie Hudson's Bay 
Company. | V. Vocahuhiries of the Lan- 
guages of se- I vcral Indian Nations 
adjoining to Hud- | son's Bay. ] The 
whole intended to shew the great Proh- 
ahility of a North-west | Passage, so 
long desired; and which (if discovered) 
would he of the | highest Advantage 
to these Kingdoms, | By Arthur Dobhs, 
Esq; I 

London : | Printed for .1. Robinson, at 
the Golden Lion in Ludgate-Street. | 
MDCCXLIV [1744]. 

Title, verso blank 1 1. " To the king " pp. i-ii, 
folded iu.ap, text pp. 1-211, 4°. 

Thompson (E.), A short vocabulary of tlie 
language npoken among the Northern Indians, 
pp. 206-211. 

Copies seen: Astor, l?oston Athenneiim, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, (icological Survey, 
Lenox, Trumbull. 

Stevens' Nuggets, no. 906, prices a copy 10«.6(7. 
A copy at the Field sale, no. 538, brought $2.5(». 
Priced by Quaritch, no. 11650, II. 5s., large 
paper. At the Murphy sale, no. 804, a copy 
brought $3.25. Priced by Quaritch, no. 28278, 
11. 4«. 
Dodge {Ca])t. H. L.) See Davis (W.W. 

H.) 
Dog Rib: 

Hymns See Bompas (W. C.) 

Lord's pr.ayer Bonqtas {W. C.) 

Numerals Tolniie (W. F.) and Daw- 

son (G. M.) 
Prayers Bompas (W. C.) 

Primer J'.onipas (W. C.) 

Proper n.ames Catliu (G.) 

Ten commandments Bompas (W. C.) 
Text Clut (J.) 

Vocabulary Bancroft ( H. H . ) 

Vocabulary Biisehmanu (J. C. E.) 

Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 

Vocabulary Lefroy (J. H.) 

Vocabulary Morgan (L. H.) 

Vocabulary Murray (— ). 

Vocabulary O'Brien {—). 

Vocabulary Richardson (J.) 

Vocabulary Whipple (A. TT.) 

Words Daa (L. K.) 

Words Ellis (R.) 

Words Tolmie ( W.F.) and Daw- 

son (G. M.) 

Dog Rib primer. See Bompas (W. C.) 

Domenech {Ahhe Emanuel Henri Dieu- 

doun6). Seven years' residence | in the 

great | deserts of North America | hy 

the I ahb6 Em. Domeuech | Apostolical 



Domenech (E. H. D.) — Continued. 
Missionary: Canon of Montpellier: 
Meuiber of the Pontifical Academy 
Tiberiua, | and of the Geographical and 
Etlmographical Societies of France, «fec. 
I Illustrated with fifty-eight w^oodcuts 
hy A. Joliet, three | plates of ancient 
Indian music, and a nuip showing the 
actual situation of | the Indian tribes 
and the country dcscrilied by the author 
I In Two Volumes | Vol. I [-II]. | 

London | Longman, Green, Longman, 
and Roberts | 1860. | The right of trans- 
lation is reserved. 

Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank 
1 1. dedication pp. v-vi, preface pp. vii-xiii, con- 
tents pj). xv-xxi, list of illustrations pp. xxiii- 
xxiv, text pp. 1-445; half-title verso printers 1 
1. title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-xii, text 
pp. 1-465, colophon p. [466], map, plates, 8°. 

List of Indian tribes of North America, vol. 
1, pp. 440-445.— Vocabularies, etc. vol. 2, pp. 164- 
189, contain 84 words of the Navajo. 

Copies seen : Astor, Boston Athenreum. Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, AYatkin.son. 

At tlie Field sale a copy,no. 550, brought $2.37, 
and at the Pinart sale, no. 328, 6 fr. Chu'ke & 
CO. 1886, no. 5415, price a copy $5. 

Emanuel Henri Dieudonue Domenech, French 
author, was born in Lyons, Franco, November 4, 
1825; died in France in June, 1886. He became 
a priest in the Roman Catholic cliurch, and was 
sent as a missionary to Texas and Mexico. Dur- 
ing Maximilian's residence in America, Dome- 
nech acted as private chaplain to the emperor, 
and he was also almoner to the French army 
during its occupation of Mexico. On his return 
to France he was made honorary canon of 
Montpellier. His "Manuscrit pictographique 
Americain, pr6ced6 d'une notice sur I'ideo- 
graphie des Peanx Rouges" (1860) was pub- 
lished by the French government, with a fac- 
simile of a manuscript in the library of the Paris 
arsenal, relating, as lie claimed, to the American 
Indians; but the German orientalist, Julius 
Petzholdt, declared that it consisted only of 
scribbling and iucohereiit illustrations of a local 
German dialect. Domenech maintained the 
authenticity of the manuscript in a pamiihlet 
entitled "La v6rite sur le livre des sauvages" 
(1861), w^hich drew forth a reply from Petzholdt, 
translated into French under the title of " Lo 
livre des sauvages an point de vue de la civili- 
sation fran§aise" (Brussels, 1861). During the 
latter part of his life he produced several works 
])ertaining to religion and ancient history. — 
Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 

Dorsey {Rer. James Owen). Indians of 
Siletz reservation, Oregon. By J. Ow^en 
Dorsey. 

In American Anthropologist, vol. 2, pp. 55-61, 
Washington, 1889, %°. (Pilling.) 

Grammatic notes and examples of the Atha- 
pascan, p. 5C.~Kinship terms, p. 58. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



27 



Dorsey (J. O.) — Conliiiutd. 

Tli« f^oiitllc- systciii n\' (!if Silct/ 

tribes. 

Id Joiiniitl of Amoi-icaii Folk-Loro, vol.3, pji. 
227-237, Ho.stdii and Now York, 1890, 8°. (Pil- 
ling;.) 

List of Upiicr Coquillc villiigcs (32), witli 
En;ilisli (k-linitioiis, \). 232.— Atliapascaus norlli 
of Koj;n(^ Kivor (22 names of villages with inoaii- 
iiigs), pp. 232-233.— Chasta Costa villages (33), 
with iiu;:iiiiiigs, p. 234.— Atliup:iseaii villages 
(21) south of Rogue River, pp. 235-230. — Atha- 
])asean villages in northwest California, pp. 230- 
237. 

[Vocabulary of words and plirasos 

in the dialect of the Chasta Costa or 
Ci'-sta kqwQ'-Htil Indians who lived on 
the Roo-no Riva-r or on ono of its 
brancht's, Oregon.] 

Manuscript, 13 pp. 4'=, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Agency, Oregon, Seiitenihcr and Octo- 
ber, 1884, with tlie assistance of Oovernnient 
George or T\it(p''-6-Si1, and two other Indians of 
the trilje. Recorded in a copy of Powell's Intro- 
duction to the Study of Indian L.ingnages, sec- 
ond edition, pp. 77-79,97. 122, 131, 182-184, 192- 
193, 19G, 228. 

Of the schedules given in the work no. 1 is 
fiUed and no.s. 2, 8, 12, 14. 18, 24, 25, and 30 are 
p.artly filled. 

[Words, ])hrasoM, and sentences in 

the language of the Chetco (Tce'-ti- 
!^un-ne') formerly of Chetco River, 
Oregon.] 

Manuscript, 32 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnologj-. Collected at the .SiletK 
Indian Agency, Oregon, September, 1884, with 
the assistance of Baldwin Fairchild, a Chetco. 
Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to 
the Study of Indian Languages, second edition, 
pp. 77-'228 and 7 extra leaves at the end, many of 
the pages being left blank. 

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2, 
and 30 are filled ; nos. 3, 5, 7, 8, 12, 18, 24, 25, and 
27 are partly filled ; and the remaining numbers 
are blank. The nnuiunbered leaves at the end 
contain a list of the parts of the body in great 
detail, dress and ornaments, the conjugation of 
a number of verbs, a table of classifiers, and 
pronouns. The total number of entries is 480. 

[Vocabnlarj' of words and phrases 

in the language of the l)a-ku-be t6'-de, 
formerly living on Api>legate Creek, 
Oregon.] 

Manuscript, 9 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz 
Agency, Oregon, October, 1884, with the assist- 
ance of Rogue River John, a Ta-kel-ma, whose 
mother was a Dil-ku-bfi to'-de. Recorded in a 
copy of I'owell's Introduction to the Study of 
Indian Languages.second edition, pp. 77-79, 184, 
196, 228, and 3 unuumhered pages at the end. 



Dorsey (.1. O.) — Continued. 

Of the Hchedules given in the work no. 30 is 
tilled and nos. 1, 2, 18, and 25 are jiartly tilled: 
The final unnumbered jiages at the end give the 
l)arts of the body in detail. 

[Vocabulary of words and j)hrases in 

the Kwa-ta'-mi or .Sixes diahut of the 
Tft'([\ve-t'a'!^ftn-ne', formerly living on 
.Sixes Creek, Oregon.] 

Manuscript, 23 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Etiinologj-. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Agency, Oregon, August-October, 1884, 
with the assistance of Jake Rooney and Jake 
Stuart. Recorded in a co|)y of Powell's Intro- 
duction to the Study of Indian Languages, sec- 
ond edition, pp. 77-78, 82, 97-102. 109-112. 115-110, 
190,200-207, 210,220, 228, and three unnumbered 
pages at the end. 

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2, 
3, 8, 12, 25, 27, 28, and 30 are partly filled, the 
remainder heiug blank. The entries sum up a 
total of 350. The three pages at the end contain 
a number of partial verbal con.j ligations. 

[V^ocaVmlary of words and phrase.s of 

the Mi'-kwu-nn' :jun-ne' tribe or gens, 
formerly living on the Lower Rogue 
River, Oi'cgon.] 

Manuscript, 10 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Agency, Oregon, October, 1884, with the 
assistance of "William Simpson, a native. 
Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to 
the Study of Indian Languages, second edition, 
pp. 76-81, 97, 196, 220, 228, and 8 unnumbered 
pages at the end. 

Of the schedules nos. 1, 2, 8, and 30 are partly 
filled; the unnumbered pages at the end con- 
tain an extended list of tlie parts of the body, 
pronouns, nouns used as classifiers, partial 
conjugati(m of a number of verbs, etc. 

[Words, phrases, and sentences in the 

language of the Nar-t&n-ne'-5.ftu-n6' 
gens.] 

Manuscript, 75 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Agency, Oregon, October, 1884, with the 
assistance of Alex Ross, chief of the gens, and 
a full-blood. Recorded in a copy of Powell's 
Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages, 
second edition, pp. 77-228, and 5 unnumbered 
leaves at the end, a number of the pages being 
left blank. 

Of the lists of words given in this work 
schedules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 10. 12, 13, 15. 18, and 30 are 
completely filled and .schedules 6, 7. 9, 14, 17, 22, 
and 24 partly filled. The extra leaves at the 
end contain the x'arts of the body in great de- 
tail, a list of pronouns, verbal classifiers, cor- 
relatives, and the con,iugation of a number of 
verbs. There are 1,345 entries in all. 

[Vocabulary of the Qa'-am-o'te-ne', 

formerly living at the mouth of Smith 
River, California.] 



28 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Dorsey (J. O.) — Continued. 

Manuscript, 7 pp. 4°, in the library of tlin 
Bureau of Etliiiolojiy. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Eeservalimi, Griffon, Sept., 1884, with 
the assistance of Smith liivcr Jolm. Recorded 
in a copy of Powell's lutroducliou to the Study 
of Indian Lanijua^cs, second edition, pp. 77-78, 
82, 122-123, 182, 184, tlu! remaining pages of the 
work being left blank. 

Of the schedules given in the work uos. 1, 2, 
and 18 are partly tilled. The total entries amount 
to 57. 

[A vocabtilary of words and phrases 

in tlie dialect of the Tal'-t'dc-t'&n tft'- 
de, or Galiee Creek Indians Avho 
formerly lived in Josephine County, 
Oregon, 30 miles north of Kerby.] 

Manuscript, 10 i)p. 4°, in the library of tlie 
Bureau of Ethnok)gy. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Agency, Oregon, October, 1884, with the 
a.ssistanco of Tael'-tun or Galiee Creek Jim 
and Peter Muggins. Recorded in a copy of 
Powell's Introduction to the Study of Indian 
Languages, second edition, pp. 77-228 and 2 extra 
leaves at the end, many of the pages being left 
blank. 

Of the schedules given in the work none is 
completely filled, and nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 12, 18, 24, 
and 30 are but partly filled. The 2 leaves at the 
end contain the parts of the body in great 
detail, a few possessive pronouns, and the con- 
jugations in brief of the verbs to desire and to 
know. The entries as a whole number 254. 

[WordS; sentences, and grammatical 

material in the Tu-tu'tftn-ne', or Tu'-tu 
language (dialect of several villages.)] 

Manuscript, 155 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Reserv.ation, Oregon, August-October, 
1884, with tlio assistance of twelve members of 
the Tu'tu ti'ibe. Recorded in a copy of Powell's 
Introduction to the Study of Iiulian Languages, 
second edition, pp. 76-86, 88-89, 95-103, 106, 108- 
129, 131-147, 149-155, 162-173, 180-185, 188-199, 
206-213, 220, 228, and 46 unnumbered pages at 
the end, with many intercalated iiage.s passim. 

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2, 3, 
8, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 22, 23, 25, and 30 are filled ; 
nos. 4, 5, 0, 7, 9, 10, 17, 19, 21, 24, 26, 27, and 28 are 
partly filled, and nos. 11,20, and 29 are blank. 
The total entries number 3,902, besides a text 
with interlinear and free translation. 

Vocabulary of the Upper Coquille 

or Mi-ci-qwilt-me tftn-ng. 

Manuscript, 38 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Siletz 
Indian Agency, Oregon, August-October, 1884, 
with the assistance of Coquille Thompson and 
Coquille Solomon. Recorded in a copy of 
Powell's Introduction to the Study of Indian 
Languages, second edition, pp. 77, 81,84, 88-89, 
96^98, 100-103, 100-111, 128-129, 132-136, 183-184, 
192-198, 228, and 4 unnumbered leaves at the end. 



Dor.sey (.1. O.) — Continued. 

Of the schedules given in the work nos. 1, 2, 
18, 24, and 30 are filled, and nos. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12, 
13, 14, 16, 17,22, and 25 are partly filled; tlie 
remaining numbers are Ijlank. There is a total 
of 745 entries. 

A vocalntlary of the Yu'-ki-tc6 or 

Yu'-ki-tce' tiln-ue dialect spoken by 
the Indians formerly living on I^uclire 
Creek, Oregon. 

Manuscript, 11. 4°, written on one side only, 
in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. C(d- 
lected at the Siletz Indian Agency, Oregon, 
September, 1884, with the assistance of James 
"Warner, sr., who could speak a little English. 

Tlie entries niunljcr 236, and are arranginl in 
the order of the schedules given in Powell's In- 
troduction to the Study of Indian Languages, 
second edition. 

James Owen Dorsey was born in Baltimore, 
Md., in 1848. He attended the Central High 
School (now the City College) in 1862 and 1863, 
taking the classical course. Illness caused him 
to abandon his studies when a member of tho 
second year class. In a counting room from 1864 
to 1866. Taught from September, 1860, to Juno, 
1807. Entered the preparatory department of 
the Theological Seminary of Virginia in Sep- 
tember, 1867, and the junior class of tlie semi- 
nary in September, 1869. Was ordained a deacon 
of the Protestant Episcopal Churcli in tlio 
United States by the bishop of Virginia, Easter 
day, 1871. Entered upon his work among tlie 
Ponca Indians, in Dakota Territory, in May of 
that year. Had an attack of scarlet fever in 
April, 1872, and one of typho-malarial fever in 
July, 1873. Owing to this illness he was 
obliged to give up the mission work in August, 
1873, soon alter he had learned to talk to the 
Indians without an interpreter. He returned to 
Maryland and eug.aged in parish work till July, 
1878, when, under the direction of Maj. J. W. 
Powell, he went to the Omaha reservation in 
Nebraska in order to increa.se his stock of lin- 
guistic material. On the organization of tho 
Bureau of Ethnology, in 1879, ho was tr;xns- 
ferred thereto, an<l from that time he has been 
engaged continuously in linguistic and socio- 
logic work for tho Bureau. He remained amimg 
the Omaha till April, 1880. when he returned to 
Washington. Since then ho has made .several 
trills to Indian reservations for scientific pur- 
poses, not only to tho.se occupied by tribes of 
the Siouan family, but also to the Siletz reser. 
vation, in Oregon. At the last place, which he 
visited in 1884, he obtained vocabularies, gram- 
matic notes, etc., of languages spoken by In- 
dians of the Athapascan, Kusan, Takiluian, 
and Yakonan stocks. The reports of his otiice 
and field work will be found in the annual 
reports of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

Drake (Samuel Gardiner). The | Abo- 
riginal races | of | North America; | 
comprising | biographical sketches of 



ATHAPASCAN LA\(;UA(;KS. 



213 



Drake (S. G.) — C'oiiliuiU'd. 

••iiiiiiciit iiidividualK, | iiiul | an liistor- 
iciil iircount of tlio diH'crfut tiilwH, | 
iroiii I tlio iirst diHcovery of the conti- 
nent I to I the present jxTiod | witli a 
dissertation on their | Oriifin, Anti(i- 
uities. Manners and Cnstonis, illustra- 
tive, narratives and anecdotes, | and a 
I copious analytical index | by Samuel 
G. Drake. Fifteenth edition, | revised, 
with valuable additions, | by Prof. II. 
L.Williams. | [Quotation, six lines.] | 

New York. | Hiirst & company, pub- 
lishers. I 122 NassaTi Street. [18«2.] 

Title vorso cDiiyri^jlit 1 1. preface i>ii.:!-4, con- 
tents \^^. 5-8, Tiulian tribes anil nations ])]i. 9-11), 
h:ilCtitlever.-<() blank 1 1. text pp. 19-707, index 
I)]). 768-787, 8^. 

Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of tlio 
Paeitie states and territories, p]). 748-7()3. 

('opies seen : Astor, Congress, Wisconsin His- 
torical Soeiety. 

Clarlvi' A lo. 1888, no. 0377, price a copy $3. 

Duflot de Mofras (Eugene). Explora- 
tion I du territoire | de I'Or^gou, | des 
Californies | ct de la mer Vcrmeille, \ 
ex(5cut6e pendant les anuses 1840, 1841 
ct 1842, I par M. Duflot de Mofras, 
I Attache h, la Legation de Fraiice h 
Mexico; | ouvrage public par ordre du 
r«»i, I sous les auspices de M. le marc- 
chal Soult, due de Dalmatic, | President 
du Conseil, | et de M. le miuistre des 
affaires (5traug^^es. | Tome premier 
[-second]. | 

Paris, I Arthiis Bertrand, dditenr, | 
libraire de la Soci6td de geographic, | 
Rue Hautefeuille, u» 23. | 1844. 

2 vols. : half-title ver.so printers 1 1. title verso 
blank 1 1. diilicatiou verso blank 1 1. avant- 
propos p]). vii-xii, avertissenieut vor.so note 1 1. 
nota verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-518, table des 
cliapitres pp. 519-521, table des cartes pp. 523- 



Duflot de Mofras (E.) — Conlinucd. 

524; lialf-title verso jirinters 1 1. title v.tso blank 
1 l.text pp. I-.IOO, tattle des eliapitns iip.,-,01- 
504, tabic des cartes pp. 505-500, table analytiqne 
etc. ])p. 507-514, 8". 

Numerals 1-10 of a number of American lan- 
guages, among them the Umi)nua, vol. 2, ji. 401. 

Copies neen : Astor, Uancroft, Hoston .\tlie- 
na'um, British Museum, Congress, Geological 
Survey. 

DufosBe(E.) Americana | Ciitalogue de 
livres | relatifs Jl rAmeri(iue | Europe, 
Asie,Afrique | et Ocdauie | [&c. thirty- 
four lines] I 

Librairie ancienne et moderne de E. 
Dufossd I 27, rue GudiK'gaud, 27 | pri-s 
le Pont-ncuf | Paris [1887] 

Printed cover as above, no inside title, table 
des divisicma 1 1. text pjt. 175-422, S''\ 

Contains, passim, titles of works in various 
Athapa.scan languages. 

Copies Keen : p]ames. Pilling. 

This series of catalogues was begun in 1876. 

Dugaii (LicKt. T. B.) Numerals [1-10] 
of the White ISIountain Apache. 

In Allen (U. T.), Keport of an expedition to 
the Copper, Tanand and K6yukuk rivers, p. 
135, Washington, 1887, 8°. 

Reprinted in other articles by Allen (II. T.), 
q.v. 

Dunbar: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. John B. Dunbar, 
Bloomfield, X. J. 

Duncan (David). American races. Com- 
I)iled and abstracted by Professor Dun- 
can, M. A. 

Forms Part 6 of Spencer (H.), Descriptive 
.sociology, Loudon, 1878, folio. (Congress.) 

Under the heading " Language," pp. 40-12, 
there are given comments and extracts from 
various authors ujtou native tribes, including 
examples of the Cliipiiewyan. 

.Some copies have the imprint Xew York, D. 
Appleton &. CO. [n. d.] (Powell.) 



E. 



Eatnes: This word following a title or within 
parent hese.s after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Wilberfiu'co Eames, 
Brooklyn, X. Y. 

Eaton (C'apf. .T. H.) Voc.ibtilary of tin- 
language of the Navajo of New Mexico. 
By Capt. J. H. Eaton, IT. S. A. 

In Schoolcraft (H. K.), Indian Tribes, vol.4, 
pp. 416-431, Philadelphia, 18.'.4, 4\ 

A vocabulary of 300 words and the numerals 
1-100,000. 



Elliot (ZfCKf. William G.) See Bourke 

(J.G.) 

Ellis (Robert). On | numerals | as signs 
of primeval unity | among mankind. | 
By I Robert Ellis, B. I)., | late fellow of 
St. .John's college, Cambridge. | 

London: | Triibner A- co.,.")7 A 5i1Lnd- 
gatc hill. I 187;^$. | All rights reserved. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso printer 
I 1. contents pp. i-iii, text pp. 1-94, 8°. 



30 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Ellis (R.) — Continued. 

Nunicrals and other words in Atna1i,p. 52; 
Chepowyan, pp. 42, 4,'J, 54 ; Keiiay ( Atliaba.skan), 
p. 88; Slave (Great Slave Lake), pp. 5,10,11; 
Tahlewah (California), pp. 5, 10,24; Takulli, pp. 
8, 1 1, 54 ; Tlatskanai, p. 88. 

Oopiex aeen : Ean\es. 

Pernvia Scytliica. | The | Quichua 

language of Peru: | its | di'vivation 
from central Asia with the American | 
languages in general, and with the 
Turanian | and Iberian languages of 
the old world, | including | the Basque, 
the Lycian, and the Pre-Aryan | lan- 
guage of Etruria. | By | Robert Ellis, 
B.l)., I author of " The Asiatic affinities 
of the old Italians ", and late fellow | of 
St. John's college, Cambridge. | [Quo- 
tation, three lines.] | 

London: | Triibuer & co., 57 & 59, 
Ludgato hill. | 1875. | All rights re- 
served. 

Title ver.so printer 1 1. preface pp. iii-vii, con- 
tents pp. ix-xi, errata p. [xii], text pp. 1-219, 8°. 

Words in Atna, pp. 78, 81. 85, 105, 117, 131 ; 
Athabaakan, p. 120; Apatsli, pp. 105, 123; 
Chepewyan, pp. 62, 81, 96, 99; Dog-Rib, p. 127; 
Hoopali, p. 78 ; Kenay, pp. .56, 78, 91, 104, 106. 117 ; 
Kut.shin, pp. 104, 106; Navabo,pp. 63, 68, 83, 104, 
105, 106, 107, 120, 122, 130, 134; Pinalero, p. 85; 
Slave, p. 105; Takulli, pp. 51, 54, 61,78, 91, 105. 
127; Tlat.skanai, pp. 83, 85; TJnikwa, pp. 81.83, 
89, 104, 120. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, "Wat- 
kinson. 

Etruscan numerals. | By | Robert 

Ellis, B. D., I late fellow of St. John's 
college, Cambridge. | 

London: | Triibner ct co., 57 & .59, 
Ludgate hill. | 187fi. | (All Rights 
Reserved.) | Price Two Shillings and 
Sixpence. 

Cover title as above, inside title (as above, 
omitting the la.st two lines) verso i)rinter 1 1. 
remarks on pronunciation verso erratum and 
addendum 1 1. text pp. 1-52, S'^. 

A few ntunerals and words in Atnah, pp. 9, 
13; Iloopah, p. 9. Remarks and criticisms on 
Dr. J. H. Trumbull's es.say on numerals in In- 
dian languages, pp. 12-13, note. 

Copies seen : Eames. 



Ellis (R.) — Continued. 

Sources! of the] Etruscnn and Basque 

I languages. | By | Robert Ellis, B. D., 

I late fellow of St. John's college, 

Cambridge. | 
London : | Triibner & co., Ludgate 

hill. I 1886. I (All rights reserved.) 

Title verso printers 1 1. prefatory notice verso 
blank 1 1. contents pi>. v vii, remarks on pro- 
nunciation ]>. [viii], text pj). 1-166, 8°. 

A few numerals and words in Atnah, pp.13, 
17; Hoopah, p. 9. 

Copies seen : Eames. 

Erman (Georg Adolph). Ethnographische 
Wahrnehmungen und Erfnhrungen an 
den Kiisten des Berings-Meeres von A. 
Erman. 

In Zeit.schrift fiir Ethnologie, vol. 2 (1870), 
pp. 295-307, 309-393; vol. 3 (1871), pp. 149-175, 
205-219, Berlin [n.d.].8°. 

Numerals 1-200 and a few words of the Ttynai 
Oder Kenaizi, vol. 3, p. 216. 

Ettunetle choh . . . Takudh. See 
M'Donald (R.) 

Ettunetle tutthng . . . Takudh, See 
MDonald (R.) 

Everette (Will E.) [Words, phrases, and 
sentences in the langu.age of theTu-tu- 
t6-ne and nine confederated tribes of 
Siletz River, Oregon.] 

Mauu8cri{)t, 158 pp. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected December, 
1882. Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduc- 
tion to the Study of Indian Languages, second 
edition. " Transliterated at the request of the 
Director of the Bureau of Ethnology from vol. 
22 of [Everettc's] Indian Languages of North 
America, into the ' Bureau alphabet ' at Wash- 
ington, July 1, 1883, iind at Fort Simcoe, Wash- 
ington Ty., July 23, 1883. Completed August 
20. 1883." 

Almost every word, phrase, and sentence 
given in the 30 schedules of tlu' "Introduction " 
has its equivalent given in Tu-tu-t6-ne, and 
nearly every schedule has explanatory notes. 
On the blank pages following the schedules Mr. 
Everette has given the phonetic alphabet with 
notes and explanations. 

Ewbank (Thomas). Sec Whipple (A. 
W.), Ewbauk (T. ), and Turner (W.W.) 



F. 



Fairchild (Baldwin). See Dorsey (J. O.) 

Faraone. See Apache. 

Faraud (Mgr. Henry J.) Dix-huit ans | 
chcz les Sauvages | ^'oyage8 et mis- 
sions I de M''''' Henry Faraud | evcijiie 
d'Auemour, vicaire apostolique de Mac- 



Faraud (H. J.) — Continued. 

kensie, | dans I'extreme nord de I'Ame- 
rique Britanni(iu(< | d'apres les docu- 
ments de MerPEveque d'Anemour | par 
I Fernand-Michel | membre de la So- 
ciote Eduenne | xVvec la biographic et 
le portrait de Mgr Faraud | 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



31 



Faraiid ( If. J.) — Coiitiiiucd. 

Li)ir;urio catlioliqiic df I'l'vissc friTes [ 
(nouvclle lUiiisDii) | ]\cj;is Kutlrti ct ('"', 
tiuccesscars | Paris | 3S, riio Saiiit-Stil- 
picc. i Uruxellos | ]ilaco Saint ('-(Judiilc, 
4. I 186)5 I Droits dc traduction ot dc rc- 
prodnction rdservos. 

ILilf-title verso blank 1 1. ixirtrail 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface j>]>. vii-xvi, text iij). 
1-447, table jip. 449-456, 8°. 

Tribus sauvages, pp. ;!:i;!-3S3, contains names 
of tribes, with nieaninss, scattered tlir<)uj;li. 

Copicf seen : A.stor, British Museum, Shea. 

Dix-huit ans | ebez | los Sauvages | 

Voyages ot niis,sious | dans I'oxtriMne 
nord de rAm(^i'i(ino IJi-itannicpif | 
d'apres les docnmonts de Mgr Homy 
Farand | Evoi^no [«fcc. one line] | par 
Fernand-Michel | [Design] | 

Noiivello Maisou Perisso Freros de 
Paris I Librairie Catlioliqne ot C'lassi- 
que I [&.C. five lines] | 1870 | Droits de 
traduction et de reproduction reserves. 

Printed cover, title 1 1. pp. i-xix, 1-364, 12°. 

Linguistics, as in earlier edition titled next 
above, pp. 260-312. 

Copic* seen : British Mu.soum. 

Abridgment of the bible in Deu6 

Tcbippewayan, by Mgr. Faraud, Vicar 
Ajiostolique of Mackenzie. (*) 

Ln a letter from Father T^niile Pctitot, dated 
from Mareuil, France, April 24, 1889, he tells me 
that among the manuscripts left by him at his 
last residence, St. Kaiihael des Tchippewayans, 
Saskatchewan, was a copy, written by liiniself, 
of the above-named work. See Grouard (E.) 

Farrar (i?er. Frederic William). Families 
of speech: | four lectures | delivered 
before | the Royal institution of Great 
Britiiin | In March 1809 | by the | rev. 
Frederic \V. Farrar, :M. A., F. R. S. ( 
late fellow of Trinity college l&c four 
lines.] I Published liy re(iuest. | 

London r | Longmans, Green, and co. 
I 1870. 

List of works verso blank 1 1. half-title verso 
printers 11. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. preface pp. ix-x, contents pp. xi-xiii, 
list of illustrations p. xiv, text pp. 1-187, table 
of the chief allophylian languages p. [188], 
index pp. 189-192, two tables and two maps, 12=. 

A few words in Tlatskanai, p. 178. 

Copies seen: Boston Athenauim, Congress, 
Eames. 

Families of Speech : | Four Lectures 

I delivered before | the Royal Institu- 
tion of Great Britain | In March 18(i'J. 
I By the I Rev. Frederic W. Farrar, D. 



Farrar (F. \V.) —Continued. 

])., F. U. S. I Lat.^ F.ll..\v |iVc. three 
lines.] I New edition. | 

London: | Longmans, (Jreen, ».V Co. | 
187;J. I All rights reserved, 
p. i xi, 1 I. 1 142, 111'. 

Copies seen: Britisli Museum. 

Language and languages. | Being | 

"Chapters on language" | and | " Fam- 
ilies of speech." I By the | n^v. Frederic 
W. Farrar, 1). I). F. R. S. | late fellow 
[&.C. three lines.] | New edition. | 

Loniion : | Longmans, (ireen, and co. 
I 1878. I (All riglits reserved.) 

Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank 
1 1. preface, (November 15, 1877) versrfqimtations 
1 1. half-title (Chapters on language) verso dedi- 
cation 1 1. ])reface. to the first edition (August, 
1805) pp. ix-xii, list of illustrations ver.so blank 
1 1. syno]isis pp. xiii-xx, text pp. l-2.")6, books 
consulted pi>. 257-260, half-title (Families of 
speech, etc.) verso dedication 1 1. preface to the 
second edition (August, 1873) verso blank 1 1. 
contents pp. 265-267, text pp. 209-403, table of 
languages p. [404], index pp. 405-411, verso 
printers, two maps and two tables, 12°. 

A few Tlatskanai words, pp. 396-397. 

Copies seen : Astor. 

Language and languages. | Being | 

"Cha})ter8 on language" | and | "Fam- 
ilies of speech." | By the | rev. Frederic 
W. Farrar, D. D. F. R. S. | late fellow 
[&c. three lines.] | New edition. | 

London : | Longmans, Green, and co. 
I 1887. I (All rights reserved.) 

Half-title verso printers 1 1. title verso blank 
1 1. preface (November 15, 1877) verso quotations 
1 1. half-title (Chapters on language) verso dedi- 
cation 1 I. preface to the first edition (August, 
1805) pp. ix-xii, synopsis pp. xiii-xx, text pp. 1- 
256, books consulted pp. 257-260, half-title (Fam- 
ilies of speech, etc.) ver.so dedication 1 1. preface 
to the seccuid editioTi (.Vugust, 1873) verso list 
of illusti'ations 1 1. contents i)p. 265-267, text pp. 
209-403, table of languages p. [404], index pp. 
405—411, verso printers, two maps, and two 
tallies, 12°. 

Linguistics as inider the next preceding title, 
pp. 396, 397. 

Copies seen : Eamea. 

Faulmaun (Karl). Illustrirte IGeschichte 
der Schrift | Populiir-Wissenschaftlicho 
Darstellung | der | Entstehung der 
Schrift I der | Sprache und der Zahlen 
Isowiedcr | Sehriltsysteme allerVolker 
der Erde | von ( Karl Faulmann | Pro- 
fessor der Stenographic [Ac. two lines.] 
|Mit 15Tafeln in Farben- undTondruck 
I und vielon in den Text gedruckten 



32 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Faulmann (K.) — ContiiuuMl. 

Schriftzeichen uiul Schrifti)r<)boii. | 
[Priuter's ornanuMit.J | 

Wieii. Pest. Lei pzi-i'. | A. Hartlel)eir.s 
Verlag. | 1880. | Alio Kcclitc voii)cbal- 
tcu. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title vejso priuters 
1 1. preface pp. v-x, eouteiits pp. .Ki-xvi, text })p. 
1-632, 8°. 

Sehrift der Tliine-Iniliaiiei', p. 231. 

Copies 116671 : Astor, Briti.sli Miitseuui, Wat- 
kiiison. 

Featherman (A.) Social history | of the 
I races of luaiikiiid. | First cUvisiou : | 
Nigritiaiis[-Tliir(l division: | Aoiico- 
Maranouiaas]. | By | A.Fctitlienuau. | 
[Two lines quotation.] | 

London: | Triibiier & co., Liidj^atc 
Hill. I 1885[-89]. ! (All rights reserved.) 

3 vol.s. 8^. 

A ifeneral discussion of a nunilier of North 
American families occur.s in vol . 3, anionj^ them : 
the Apaches (pp. 184-192), including, on p. 1K8, 
ii brief sketch of their grammar, with a few 
examples, among thenj the verb to drink; Nav- 
ajos, pp. 193-200 ; and Tacullcs, pj). 378-381. 

Copies seen : Congress. 

Field (Thomas Warren). An essay | 
towards an | Indian l)ibliography. | 
Being a | catalogue of books, | relating 
to the I history, antiquities, hingiiages, 
customs, religion, | wtirs, literature, 
and origin of the | American Indians, | 
iu the library of | Thomas W. Field. ( 
With bibliograpliical and historical 
notes, and | synopses of the contents of 
some of I the works least known. | 

New York: | Scribuer, Armstrong, 
and CO. | 1873. 

Title verso printers 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, text 
pp. 1-430, 8°. 

Titles and descriptions of works in or relating 
to Athapascan languages jia.ssini. 

Copies seen : Congress, Eamcs, PiUiug. 



Field (T. W.) — Continued. 

At the Field .sale, no. 688,acopy brought $4.25 ; 
attheMenzies sale, no. 718, a "half crushed, red 
levant morocco, gilt top, uncut copy,' brought 
$.3.:'iO. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, 18 fr.; by Quar- 
itcli, no. 11996, 15s.; at the Piuart sale, no. 308, 
it brought 17 fr. ; at the Murphy sale, no. 949, 
$4.50. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30224, 1?. 

Catalogue | of the | library | belong- 
ing to I Mr. Thomas W. Field. | To be 
sold at auction, | by | Bangs, Merwin 
& CO., I May 24th, 1875. and following 
days. I 

New York. | 1875. 

Cover title 22 lines, title as above verso blank 
1 1. notice etc. pp. iii-viii, text jip. 1-376, list of 
prices pj). 377-393, suj)plement i>p. 1-59, 8°. Com- 
piled by Joseph Sabin, mainly from Mr. Field's 
Kssay, title of wliich is given abov(\ 

Contains titles of a number of works in 
variou.s Athapascan languages. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, 
Eames. 

At the Squier sale, no. 1178, an uncut copy 
brought $1.25. 
Four gospels . . . Slave language. 

See Bompas (W. C.) 
Friese ( I'rof. Valentine). See Arny ( W. 

F. M.) 
Froebel (Julius). AuvS Amerika. | Er- 
fahrungen Keisen nnd Stiidien | von | 
Julius P^oebel. | Erster [-Zweiter] 
Band. | Zweite wohlfeile Ausgabe. | 

Leipzig I Dut'schc Buchhaudlung. 
[18.58.] 

2 vols. 12^. 

A short Mescalero-Apache vocabulary, vol. 
2, ]). 103. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, British Museum. 

First edition, Leipzig, 1857-185S, 2 vols. 8''. (-) 

There is an English editiim of this work, 
London, Bentlej', 1859, 8'^, which does not con- 
tain the vocabulary. (Astor, Bancroft, Boston 
Atlu'meuni, British Museum, Congress.) 

Sabin's Dictionai y. no. 25993, titles an edition 
Bruxelles, 1861, 3 vols. 12°. 



G. 



Gabelentz (Hans Georg Conor von der). 
Die Spraeliwissenschaft, | ilire Aufga- 
bcu, Methoden | und | bisherigen 
Ergobnissc. | Von | Georg von der 
Gabelentz. | [Vignette.] | 

Leipzig, I T. O. Weigel nachfolger | 
(Chr. Herm. Tauchnitz). | 1891. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. Vorwort pp. iii-vii, Inhalts-Verzeich- 
niss pp. viii-xx, text pp. 1-406, Kegister pp. 
467-502, Berichtigungen p. 502, 8°. 



Gabelentz (H. G. C.) — Continued. 

Uriel discussion and a few examples of Ath- 
apascan, i>. 402. 

Copies seen : Gatschet. 

Galice Creek Jim. See Dorsey (J. O.) 

Gallatin (Albert). A synopsis of the 
Indian tribes Avithin the United States 
east of the Rocky Motintaiiis, and in the 
Brit ish anil Russian ])ossessions in North 
America. By the Hon, Albert Gallatin- 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



33 



Gallatin (A.) — Continupd. 

In American Antiquarian Sue. Trans. (Ar- 
chfpologia Ainpricana), vol. 2, i)p. 1-122. Cam- 
bridse, 1836, 8°. 

Snl)(liviaion,s by geo>;rapliic liniit.s ol' the 
Kinai, jip. 14-10; oftho Athapascas, i)i). 16-20. — 
Indian languages, with granimatieal exami)lea 
of the Cl)epi)eyan, p. 170. — Grammatical 
notices, Atliapascas, ]ip. 21.')-2iri. — Chei>i)eyan 
con.jiigations, ji. 269.- ("(iinparative viicaliiihiry 
of 180 words of tlic Kinai (from Ivcsanotf in 
Krnsenstern), Tacullie (from Harincm), (^lieji- 
peyan (from M'Kenzie), j)]). 307-:i67.— Vocah- 
lllnry of 44 words of tlie Siis.sec (from Umfre- 
ville), ]). ;!74. — Vocabulary of 13 words of tlic 
Atuah or Chin, p. 378. 

Hale's Indians of" lutrlh-wi'st Anicr- 

icii,an(l vocabttlaries of North America; 
with an introduction. By Albert Gal- 
latin. 

In American Etlj. Soc. Trans, vol. 2, pp. xxiii- 
clxxxviii, 1-130, New York, 1848, 8'=. 

Urief referen(;p to the Athapascas, their liab- 
itat, etc., p. ci. — The TalikaliTTmkwa family 
(general di.scussion), x>p. 9-10. — Vocabulary of 
180 words of the Tahculi (from Anderson). i)p. 
78-82.— Vocabulary of 60 words of tlie Kenai 
(fnuu Kesanotf), jip. 99-101.— Vocabulary of the 
Cheppeyan, Tlatskani, and Umkwa (.W words 
and numerals 1-10 each), p. 105. 

Table of generic Indian families of 

langnage.s. 

In Schoolcraft (IT. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3, 
pp. 397-402, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. 

Includes the Athapascans, p. 401. 

Albert Gallatin was born in Geneva, Switzer- 
land, January 29, 1761, and died in Astoria, L. I., 
August 12, 1849. He was descended from an an- 
(^ient patrician family of Geneva, whost' name had 
long been hoiu>rably connected with tlie history 
of .Switzerland. Voung Albert had been baji- 
tized by the name of Abraham Alfonso Albert. 
In 1773 he was sent to a boarding school, and a 
year later entered the University of Geneva, 
where he was graduated in 1779. He sailed from 
L'Orient late in May, 1780, and reached Boston 
onJuly 14. He entered Congress on December 7, 
1795, and continued a member of that body until 
liis appointment as Secretary of the Treasury In 
1801. which office he held continuously unt.ill813. 
His services were rewarded with the appoint- 
ment of minister to France in February, 1815; 
he entered on the duties of this office in Janu- 
ary, 1816. In 1826, at the solicitation of President 
Adams, he accepted the appointment of envoy 
extraordinary to Great Britain. On his return to 
the United States he settled in New York City, 
where, from 1831 till 1839, he was president of the 
National Bank of New York. In 1842 he was 
associated in the establishmentof the American 
Ethnological Society, becoming its first presi- 
dent, and in 1843 he was elected to hold a simi- 
lar office in the New York Historical Society, an 
honor which was annually conferred on him 
until his death. — Appleton's Cyclop, of Am.Biog. 

ATH 3 



Garrioch {Rev. Alfred Campbell). The 
gospel according to | St. Mark, | trans- 
lated into the | Beaver Indian lan- 
guage I l)y I the rev. A. C. Garrioch, | 
missionary of the Church missionary 
society. | 

London: | British and Foreign F5ible 
Society. | IWfi 

Title verso blank 1 1. text entirely in the Bea- 
ver language (roman characters) pp. 3-79, colo- 
jdion J). (80). 16°. 

Copies xci'ii : liritish and Foreign Hibli- So- 
ciety. Kames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

Issued also in syllaldc characters as fcillows: 

[One line Ryllabic characters.] | The 

gospel I according to | St. Mark. | 
Translated liy the | Rev. Alfred C. 
Garrioch, | missionary of the Church 
missionary society, | into the | lan- 
guage (»f the Beaver Indians, | of the 
diocese of Athabasca. | [Seal of the 
S.P.C. K.] I 

London: | Society for j)roiiir>ting 
christian knowledge, | Xorthiimljer- 
land avenue. Charing cross, W. C. 
[1880.] 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 l.sylla- 
barium verso blank 1 I. sujiplementary syllaba- 
rium verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in syllabic 
chaiMcters) pp. 1-47, sq. 16°. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

Manual of deA'otion | in the | Beaver 

Indian language. | By the | Rev. Alfred 
C. Garrioch, | missionaryof the Church 
missionary society. | [Seal of the S. P. 
C. K.] I 

Londcni : | Society for promoting 
christian knowledge, | Northumber- 
land avenue. Charing cross, W. C. | 
1886. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. sylla- 
barium ver.so blank 1 1. supplementary syllaba- 
rium verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabic characters, 
with some headings in English and Latin) pp. 
1-87. 16°. 

Order for morning prayer, i>p. 1-23. — Order 
for evening prayer, pp. 24-39. — Prayers, etc., 
pp. 40-52.— Watts's first catechism, pp. 53-57.— 
Grace, ten commandments, prayers, etc., pp. 
57-62. — Hymns, pp. 63-74. — Selections from 
scripture, pp. 75-87. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

See Bompas (W. C.) for other editions of this 
work. 

A I Vocabulary | of the | -Beaver 

Indian Language- | consisting of | Part 
I Beaver-Engli.sh | Part II English- 



34 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



(3^aJ.^ioch (A. C.) — Continued. 

Beaver-Cree- | By the Rev. A. C. Gar- 
rioch I Mis.sionary of the | Church Mis- 
eiouaiy Society- | 

Society for Promoting Christian 
Knowledge. [ London. Northumberland 
Avenue.! Cyclostyled by | E. S. Brewer. 
I Printed by M''* Garrioch [1885] 

Title verso blank 1 1. text (on one side of the 
leaf only) 11. 1-138, 4°. 

Part I Beaver-English (alphabetically ar- 
ranged by Beaver words in double columns), 11. 
1-6-1.— Part II English and Beavor [sic] (and 
Cree] (alphabetically arranged by English 
■words, in triple coluuina), 11.65-138. 

Copies neen : Eauics, Pilling, Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge. 

The original manuscript of this work is in 
the possession of its authoi\ Fifty copies of the 
work were printed tVom the copy made with the 
cyclostyle by Mr. Brewer, an eini>loye of the 
society. 

Mr. Garrioch, of St. Xavier's Missioij, Fort 
Dunvegan, Peace River, was born in St. Paul's 
Parish, Ped Kiver Settlement, or Manitoba, Feb. 
10, 1848, and is of Scotch and English parentage. 
He was for three years a student at St. John's 
College, Winnipeg, and in 1874 was engaged as 
schoolmaster by Bishop Bonipas for the Churcii 
Missionary Society. The winter of 1875-'76 he 
spent in study with the bishop at Fort Simp- 
son, McKenzie River, and was admitted to dea- 
con's orders, and in the autumn of 1876 he 
established a Church Missionary Society station 
at Fort Termilion under the name of Unjaga 
Mission. Mr. Garrioch subsequently visited 
Canada and England, where he saw his trans- 
latious printed; but in the spring of 1886 he 
returned to mission work among the Beavers of 
Peace River, but at Pnnvegan instead of Ter- 
milion. 
Gatschet: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Albert S. Gatschet, 
Washington, D. C. 

Gatschet (Albert Samuel). Zwolf 
Spracheu | aus dem | Slidwesten Nord- 
amerikas | (Pueblos- und Apache- 
Muudarten; Tonto,Tonkawa, | Digger, 
Utah.) I Wortverzeichnisse | heraus- 
gegebeu, erliiutert und mit einer Eiu- 
leituug liber Ban, | Begriffsbildung 
und locale Gruppirung der amerikan- 
ischeu I Sprachen ver.sehen | von | 
Albert S. Gatschet. | [Vignette.] | 

Weimar | Hermann Bohlau | 1876. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso note 
1 1. Vorwort pp. iii-iv, luhalt ]). v, Eiuleitung 
pp. 1-3, Lautbezeichnuug p. 4, Literatur pp. 5- 
6, text pp. 7-148, illustrations pp. 149-150, large 



Gatschet (A. S.) — Continued. 

Die Sprachen des Siidwestens (pp. 37-86) con- 
tains Apache and Kavajo examples on pp. 39, 
40, 52, 55, 59, 62; general discussion of the 
Apache, linguistic divisions, etc., with com- 
parison of Apache and Navajo words witli those 
of the Zufii, Kiowa, Comanche, and Shoshone, 
pp. 62-69; Tinne (Apache, Navajo, Hoopa, 
and Tiiculli) words, p. 79.— Sammlung von Wor- 
tern und Satzcn (pp. 87-91) contains a short 
Apache vocabulary and one of the Navajo, ]). 
88; an Apache vocabulary (from White and 
Henry), p. 88-89. — Auswahl von Satzeu aus den 
Spr;icben dcr Tehuas, Apaches, Toukawas und 
Aconias (j>ii. 91-95) contains 20 phrases in 
Apache (from Loew).— Worttabellen der zwijlf 
Sprachen und Dialecte (pp. 97-115) contains a 
vocabulary of 200 words of the Apache (from 
Loew), Niivajo (from Loew), and Apache (from 
White). — Anmcrkungen zu den Worttabellen 
(pp. 117-138) contains comments upon the vari- 
ous vocabularies.— Zahlwiirter (pj). 130-143) con- 
tains the numerals 1-10 of the Niivajo (from 
Eaton) and Hoopa (from Schoolcraft). 

Copies seen : Astor, Briuton, British Museum, 
Fames, Gatschet, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Indian languages of the Pacific 

■states and territories. 

In Magazine of American History, vol. 1, 
pp. 145-171, New York, 1877, 4°. (Congress.) 

A general discussion, with examples passim. 
The Tinne family, with its linguistic divisions, 
the Hoopa, Rogue River, and Umpqua, is 
treated ou pp. 165-166. 

Issued separately as follows: 

Indian languages | of the | Pacific 

states and territories | by | Alltert S. 
Gatschet | Reprinted from March Num- 
ber of The Magazine of American His- 
tory. 

[New York, 1877.] 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 145-171, 4''. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Wellesley. 

Re]irinled in the following: 

Beach (W.W.), Indian Miscellany, pp. 416- 
447, Allcmy, 1877.8°. 

Drake (S. G.), Al)original Races of North 
America, pp. 748-763, New Tork [1880], 8°. 

A later article, with the same title, appeared 
in the April, 1882, number of the same peri- 
odical, and was also issued separately. Tb con- 
tains no Athapascan linguistics. 

IT. S. geographical surveys west of 

the one hundredth meridian, 1st Lieut. 
Geo. M. Wheeler, Corps of Engineers, 
U. S. Army, in Charge. Appendix., 
Linguistics. Prefaced by a classification, 
of western Indian languages. By Albert. 
S. Gatschet. 

In Wheeler (G. M.), Report upon U.S. Geo- 
graphical .Surveys, vol. 7, pp. 399-485, "^^^/f^hing-, 
ton, 1879, 4°, """' ' 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



35 



Gatschet (A. S.) — Coiuiiiufd. 

Areas and dialeots of tin- .sc\cn liii^ui»ti<; 
stocks (pp. 406-421), fiiiljra<M'H Mik Tinn6, pj). 
406-408.— (Jeueral reuiark.s, i)p. 467-485. 

Gilbert ((}. K.), Vocabulary of tho Arivaipa, 
j)p. 424-465. 

Loew (O.), Vocalmlary (if tlu' .\ rival pa, pji. 
468-469. 

Vocalmlary of till' Navajo, pp. 124-465, 

469. 

Yarrow (II. ('.), \oi:iliulai> of lli.' .licarilla. 
pp. 424-465, 469-470. 

Apathe-Tiiiii^ l;ni<fn;ioc. | Dijilt'ct of 

thi'Na-isha baud. | (■ollcctodat Kiowii, 
Apache aud Coinauche Agency, | Ana- 
darko, Ind. Territory, | in Nov. and 
Dec. 1884 | by | Albert S. Gatschet. 

Mami.script, pp. 1-74, sm. 4", in the liV)rary of 
the lUircau of Kthnolof^y. 

Consists of words, phrases, and short texts 
with interlinear translation into English. 

Lipan, | a diak'-ct of the Apache- 

Tiuu^- family | collected at | Fort 
Griffin, Texas, (Shackleford county), 
from Apache John, a Mexican | and 
Lonis, a scont. | By Albert S. Gatschet 
I September, 1884. 

Manuscript, pp. 1-69, sni. 4°, in tlie library of 
the Bureau of Ethnolofiy. 

Consists of word.s, phra,se8, aud sentences, 
tribal and clan names, and short storie.s, all 
accompanied by an English translation. 

This manuscript has been partially copied by 
Mr. Gatschet into a copy of Powell's Introduc- 
tion to the Study of Indian Languages, second 
edition. 

Term.s, i)hrase.s and sentences | from 

Apache dialects | gathered from varions 
informants | by | Albert S. Gatschet. 

Manuscript, pp. 3-19, sm. 4°, in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. 

Tribal names aud other terms of the Chiraca- 
hua Apaches, obtained fi'om delegates visiting 
Washington, Feb. 12, 1881, pp. 5-6. — Short 
vocabulary of the Tsigakinii dialect, pp. 7-8. — 
Sentences and words in the NAvajo dialect, 
obtained from F. H. Cushing. 1882, pj). 9-12.— 
Nilvajo terms obtained from the interpreter of 
a N4vajo delegation present in Washington in 
March, 1885, pp. 14-16. — Some words of Jicarilla 
Apache, from Eskie, an Apache in Washington, 
Jan. 1884, pp. 18-19. 

Vocabulary of the Navajo langnage. 

Manuscript, 2 leaves, folio (a blank book), 
in possession of its compiler. Obtained from 
Mr. Frank H. Cushing in 1884. 

Consists of 10 words aud 50 phrases. 

[Words, phrases, .and sentences in 

the Umpkwa language.] 

Manuscript, 22 11. 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in a copj- of 



G-atschet (.V.S.) — C'onliinicd. 

Introduction to tlie Study of Indian Languages, 
tirst t^diliou. (Collected at (rrande Kondo 
-Vgoncy. Oregon, in 1877. 

[\\'ords, phnises, aii<l sentences in 

tlu^ languages of the I'inal Apache.] 

^Llnus(^i]^t, )ip. ii-108, siu. 4 \ in j)ossession 
of ils coiniiiler. Colb'cted IVom Xa-ki, an 
.\pai lie whose Kngllsli name is Kobt. Mclntosli, 
a student at Hampton, \'a., In August, 188;i. 

Contains al.so a number of te.Kts with inter- 
llniar Hiiglisb translation. 

.Vlberf Samuel (Jatschet was born in St. Beat- 
enberg, in the. IJernese Oberland, Switzerland, 
October It, 18:t2. His propiedeiitii' education wa.s 
ac(iuired in the lyceums of Neuchatel (184;!-]845) 
and of Berue (1846-18,52), after which he followed 
courses in the universit ies of Borne and Berlin 
(18.52-1858). His studies had for their object tho 
ancient world in all its ))hases of religion, his- 
tory, language, aud art, and thereby his atten- 
tion was at an early day directed to philologic 
researches. In 1865 he began the publication of 
a series of brief monographs on the local ety- 
mology of his country, entitled "Ortsetymolo- 
gische Forschuugcn aus der Schweiz " (1865- 
1867). In 1867 he spent several months in London 
]>ursuing auti(iuarian studies in the British 
Mii.seum. In 1868 he settled in New York and 
■ became a contributor to various domestic and 
foreign i)eriodi<als. mainly on scientific sub- 
jects. Drifting into a more attentive study of 
the American Indians, he luiblished several 
compositicms upon their languages, the most 
important of which is "Zwolf Sprachen aus 
dem Siidwesteii Nordamerikas,' Weimar, 1876. 
This led to his appointment to the position 
of ethnologist in the United States Geological 
Survey, under Maj.John W. Powell, in March, 
1877, when he removed to Washington, and first 
CTuployed him.self in arranging the linguistic 
manuscripts of the Smithsonian Institution, 
now the property of the Bureau of Ethnology, 
which forms a part of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion. Mr. Gatschet has ever since been actively 
connected with that bureau. To iucrease its 
linguistic collections and to extend his own 
studies of the Indian languages, he has made 
extensive trips of linguistic and ethnologic ex- 
ploration among thi^ Indians of North America. 
After returning from a six months' sojourn 
among the Klamaths and Kalapuyas of Oregon, 
settled on both sides of the Cascade Range, he 
visited the Kataba in South Carolina and the 
Cha'hta aud Shetimasha of Louisiana in 
1881-'82, the Kayowe, Comanche, Apache, Tat- 
tassee, Caddo, Naktche, Modoc, and other tribes 
in the Indian Territory, the Toukawo and 
Lipans. in Texas, and the Atakapa Indians of 
Louisiana in 1884-'85. In 1886 he saw the 
Tlaskaltecsat Saltillo, Mexico, a remnant of tho 
Nahiia rai-e, brought there about 1575 from 
AnahiuK', and was the first to discover the 
atiinity of the Biloxi language with the Siouau 
family. He also committed to writing the 
Tuui;^ka or Touica language of Louisiana, never 



36 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Gatschet (A. S.) — Continued. 

before investigated, and forming a linguistic 
family of itself. Excursions to other parts of 
the country brought to his knowledge other 
Indian languages, the Tuskarora, Caughna- 
waga, Penobscot, and Karankawa. 

Mr. Gatschet has written an extensive report 
embodying his researches among the Klamatli 
Lake and Modoc Indians of Oregon, which 
forms Vol. II of " Contrilmtions to North 
American Ethnology." It is in two parts, 
which aggregate 1, 528 pages. Among the tribes 
and languages discussed by him in separate 
l)ublications are the Tiinucuij (Florida), Toii- 
kawe (Texas), Yuma (California, Arizona, Mex- 
ico), ChumCto (California), Beothuk (New- 
foundland), Creek and Hitchiti (Alabama). His 
numerous publications are scattered through 
magazines and government reports, some being 
contained in the Proceedings of the American 
Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. 

General discussion: 



Ahtinn6 


See Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


Apache 


Adelung (.J. C.) and Vater 




(J. S.) 


Apache 


Bancroft (H. H.) 


Apache 


Berghaus (H.) 


Apache 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


Apache 


CreiiKmy (.T. ('.) 


Apache 


J6han (L. F.) 


Apache 


Orozco y Berra (M.) 


Apache 


Pimentel (F.) 


Apache 


Smart (C.) 


Apache 


White (.1. B.) 


Athapascan 


Bastian(P.W. A.) 


Athapascan 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


Athapascan 


Canii)bell (J.) 


Athapascan 


(;abclculz(H. G. C.) 


Athapascan 


Keanc(A.H.) 


Athapascan 


Scouh'r (J.) 


Athapascan 


Trumbull (J. H.) 


Chippewyau 


Adelung (J. C.) and Vater 




(J. S.) 


Chippewyan 


Duncan (D.) 


Chippewyan 


TachA (A. A.) 


Hupa 


Gatschet (A. S.) 


Hupa 


Gibbs (G.) 


Hupa 


Powers (S.) 


Inkalik 


Busclunann (J. C. E.) 


Kenai 


Adelung (J. C.) and Vater 




(J.S.) 


Kenai 


Balbi(A.) 


Kenai 


Bancroft (H. H.) 


Kenai 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


Kutchin 


Bancroft (H.H.) 


Nabiltse 


Gibbs (G.) 


Navajo 


Adelung (J. C.) and Vater 




(J. S.) 


Navajo 


Bancroft (H. H.) 


Navajo 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


Sursee 


Balbi (A.) 


TaouUi 


Balbi (A.) 


Taculli 


Bancroft (H.H.) 


Tahlewah 


(iiblis (G.) 


Tinne 


Bancroft (H.H.) 


Tinn6 


Bompas (W. C.) 



General discussion — Continued. 



SeeBrinton (B. G.) 
Faulmann (K.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gat.schet (A. S.) 



Tinn6 

Tinn6 

Tukudh 

TJmpkwa 

TTmpkwa 
Gentes: 

Apache See Bourke (J. G.) 

Navajo Matthews (W.) 

Taculli Hale (H.) 

Upmkwa Hale (H.) 

Geographic names : 

Athapascan See Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 
Geological Survey : These words following a title 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of the United States 
Geological Survey. Washington, D. C. 

Gibbs (George). Observations on some of 
tlic Indian Dialects of Northern Cali- 
fornia. By G. Gibbs. 

In Schoolcraft (U. R), Indian Tribes, vol. 3, 
pp. 120-42:5, Philadelphia, 185.3, 4°. 

Includes brief remarks on the Hoopah, Tahle- 
wah, and Nabiltse. 

Vocabularies of Indian Languages 

ill northwest California. By George 
Gibbs, esq. 

In Schoolcraft (H.H.), Indian Tribes, vol.3, 
pp. 428-445, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. 

Among these vocabularies are one of the 
Hoopah and one of the Tahlewah, pp. 440-445. 

Notes on the Tinneh or Chepewyan 

Indians of British and Russian Amer- 
ica. Communicated by George Gibbs. 

In the Smithsonian Inst. Annual Report for 
1866, pp. 303-327. Washington, 1867, 8'=. (Pil- 
ling.) 

The Loucheux Indinns (pp. 311-320). based 
upon communications tVom W. L. Hardesty, of 
the Hudsim's Bay Co., contains a number of 
Louclieux words on p. 315. 

Issued separately also, without change. 
(Fames, Pilling.) 

Vocabularies of the | Alekwa | Arra 

Arra & | Ho-pa | of the Klamath and 
Trinity Rivers | Northern California | 
Collected in 1852 | by | George Gibbs. 

Manuscript, 26 unnumbered leaves, -written 
on one side only, folio, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Arranged alphabetically by English words in 
four columns, the English column containing 
about 700 words, the other languages from 300 
to 500 words each, the Ho-pa (which is the only 
one belonging to tlie Athapascan family) being 
the most incomplete. 

There are in the same library two partial 
coi>ies (180 words each) of the Hopa, made by 
Dr. Giblis. including only the words given in 
the early issues of the Smithsonian luatitutiou 
"standard vocabulary." 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGEB. 



37 



Gibbs ((i. ) — ('out ill lied. 

A'ocaliularvot'tlio Niihiltsc hiugiuigo. 

MamiHiriiit, 1 Iraf, 4 ', iii tlio library of the 
Hiiii^iui of Etliiiol()y,s . 

Coiitaiiis about lOii wonls. 

Vocabiilaiy oltlic \Vill()|>:ili (diiilcM-t 

of the Tahfiilly Athaliasca I. 

MaiiiLscrijit, 6 uniiiiuibfn- 1 leaves, folio, in 
tlie lilirarv of tlie Hiiieaii of Ktlinolojjy. Col- 
leeteil ■from an Indian at S. S. Ford's, Feb. 
1856. •• 

Inelniles fbe 180 words jjiiven in the standard 
scbednle issiiod by the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion and about 20 words in addition. 

George (Jibbs, the son of (.'ol. (ieor;L;o (iibbs, 
was born on the 17th of Jiih , 1815, at Sunswick, 
Limjf Island, near the xillage of Halletts (Jove, 
now known as Astoria. At seventeen h(^ was 
taken to Europe, where he remained t wo years. 
On bis return from Europe he eommeneiMl the 
reading of law, and in 18:!8 took his degree 
of bachelor of law at Harvard University. In 
1848 Mr. (ribbs went overland from St. Louis to 
Oregon and establishtMl himself at ('olumbia. 
In 1854 lie received the apiiointinent of collector 
of the port of Astoria, which he held during ^Ir. 
Fillmore's administration. Later he I'emoved 
fnmi Oregon to Washington Territory, and set- 
tled upon a ranch a few miles from Fort Steila- 
coom. Here he bad his headiiuarters for several 
years, devoting himself to the study of the In- 
dian languages and to the collei-tionof vocabu- 
laries and traditions of the northwestoni tribes. 
During a great part of the time he was attached 
to the United States Government Commission 
in laying the boundary, as the geologist and l)ot- 
anist of the expedition. He was also attached 
as geologist to the survey of a railroad route to 
the Pacific, under Major Stevens. In 1857 he 
was appointed to the northwest Itoundary sur- 
vey under Mr. Archibald Caini)bell. as commis- 
sioner. In 1860 Mr. Gibbs returned to Xew 
York, and in 1861 was on duty in Washington 
in guarding the Capitol. Later be resided in 
Washiugtcm, being mainly employed in the 
Hudson Bay Claims Commission, to which he 
was secretary. He was also engaged in the 
arrangement of a large mass of manuscript 
bearing upon the ethnology and philology of the 
American Indians. His services were avaib'd 
of by the Smithsonian Institution to superin- 
tend its labors in this tield, and to bis energy and 
conf[)lete knowledge of the subject it greatly 
owes it.s success in this branch of the service. 
The valuable and laborious .service which he 
rendered to the Institution was entirely gratu- 
itous, and in his death that establishment as 
well as the cau.se of science lost an anient friend 
and important contributor to its advancement. 
In 1871 Mr. Gibbs luarried his cousin. Miss 
Mary K. Gibbs, of I^^ewport, R. I., and removed 
to New Haven, where he died on the 9th of 
April, 1873. ' 

Gilbert (Grove Karl ). Vocabulary of the 
Arivaipa language. 



Gilbert ((i. K.) — Coiitlimed. 

In Wheeler (d. M.j, Report upon U. S. fjeog. 
Surveys, vol. 7, pp. fJI-Hiij, Washington, 1879,4'^. 
Collectc.dat (.'ampGiant. .\rizona, December, 
1S7I It contains -Jll words. 

Gilbert (— ) ami Rivingtou (~). S]i(Hi- 
lueus I of the I Ijaugiiaoes of all Na- 
tions, I ami tlic I oriental ami foreign 
types I now in use in | the printing 
ofiices I of I (Hlhert »fc liivington, | 
limited. | [Eleven line.s (iiiotationfi.] | 

London: | 52, St. John's scjiiare, 
Olorkenwell, E. C. | 1«S(!. 

Printed cover as above, no inside title, con- 
tents pp. :t-4, text pii. 5-66, 16 '. 

St. John iii, 10, in Slave <d' Mackenzie liiver 
(syllabii' and roman), )). 58; Tinno or Chepe- 
wyan of Hudson Hay (syllabic;), p. 62; Tnkudh 
of Voukon Kiver, |). 64. 

The s.i-called Tiunij specimen in roman char- 
acters on p. 6! is really Chippewa. 

Copies neen : Fames, Pilling. 

Gospel aeeordiug to .Saint John 

Tinnc> language. See Kirkby ( W. W.) 

Gospel of St. Mark translated into the 
Slaves languages See Reeve (\V. D. ) 

Gospel of St. Matthew translated into the 
Slave language. See Reeve (W. I).) 

Gospels of the four evangelists . . . 
in the lauguage of the Chipewyan In- 
dians. See Kirkby ( W. W.) 

Government George. See Dorsey (J. O.) 

Grammar: 

See Morice (A. G.) 
Legotf (L.) 
Vcigrcville (V. T.) 
Matthews (W.) 



Dene 

Moutagnais 

Moutaguais 

Nava.jo 
Cx-rammatic comments 

Apache Sei 

Apache 

Apache 

Athapascan 

Athapascan 

Athapascan 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyau 

D^nci 

Kenai 

Kenai 

Loucheux 

Nava.jo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Peau de Li^vre 

Siirsee 

Taculli 

Tlatskenai 

Umpkwa 
Grammatic treatise: 

Apache 

Apache 



Featherman (A.) 
MullcT (F.) 
White (J. 15.) 
l>or.sey (J. O.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
(jiasscrie (R. de la). 
G;jllatin (A.) 
Grandin ( — ). 
Morice ( A. G.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Radlofr(L.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Featherman (A.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Miiller (F.) 

See Bancroft (H. H.) 
Cremouy (J. C.) 



38 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OV THE 



Graniniatic treatise — Continued. 
Chippowyiin See Bancroft (H. H.) 
D6n6 Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 

Loiichoux PctitDt, (E. r. S.J.) 

Moutagiiai.s IVtitot (E. E. S. J.) 

Peau lie Lu-vn- Putitol (E. E. S. J.i 

G-randin {/iishop — ). .Some forms of 
the Cliipewyan verh. 

Mauu.scri))t, 4 hhuiiuiImmimI leave.s, written 
on oue side only, folio, in the library of tho 
Bureau of Ethuolojjy. 

Contaiu.s the indicative present, future, aud 
past of tlie veib.s to eat, to walk, and to look. 

Thi.s manu.seiii>t is a eopy made by Dr. Goo. 
Gibbw. 

Grasserie (Riioul cic la), l^jtudes de 
graniniaire coraparee. | De la conju- 
gaison objective | par | Raoul de la 
Grasserie, | docteur en droit, jugc an 
tribunal de Renue,s, | meinltre de la 
societe de lingnistique de Paris. | (Ex- 
trait des Memoires de la Society de 
lino-uistique. t. VI. 4^' fascicule.) | [De- 
sign.] I 

Paris. I Iinprimerie nationale. | M 
DCCC LXXXVIII [1888]. 

Priuted cover as above, half-title reverse 
blank 1 1. title as al)ove rever.se blank 1 l.text 
pp. 5-39, 8°. 

In chapter 3 the conjugation "objective 
polysyuthStique" is illustrated by examples 
from a number of American languages, amcmg 
them the Athapascan. 

Copies seen : Gatschet, Powell. 

fitudes I de | grammaire compar^e | 

Des relations graminaticales | couside- 
r6es dans leur concept et dans lenr ex- 
pression I on de la | catogorie des cas | 
par I Raoul de laGras.serie | docteur en 



Grasserie (K. de la,)— Contiuued. 
droit I Juge an Tribunal de Reuucs | 
Menil)ri' de la 8oci6te do Liuguisti(|ue 
de Paris. | 

Paris I dean Maisonneuve, (>diteiir | 
2.5, quai Voltaire, | 25 | 1890 

Printed cover as above, half-title verso Idank 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-344, contents pp. '.U^^- 

;i.">i, .s^. 

Examples from several North American lan- 
guages are made use of by the author ; Nahuatl, 
Dakota, Otliouii, Maya, Quiche, Totonaque, 
Tcherokess, Algonquin, Tarasque, Esquimau, 
Iroquois, Athapaske, Chiapau6que, Sahai)tin, 
Tchinuk, Choctaw, pp. 17, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 
84, 129-132, 133, 177, 325-326, 394, 395. 

Copies seen : Gatschet. 
Grouard {rire I5mile). Abridgment of 
the l)ible in the Dene Tchiiipewyau 
language, syllabic cliaracters. (*) 

In a letter from the Re\-. iSmile Petitot, dated 
from Mareuil, France, Apr. 24, 1889, he tells me 
that among the manuscripts left by him at his 
last residence, St. Raphael des Tchei)pewayan8, 
Saskatechewan, was a copy of the above work. 
AVhether the original was in manuscript or in 
jirinted form he failed to inform me. In answer 
to further inquiries on the subject, Father 
Petitot wrote me under date of June 1, 1891: 
" Referring to your questions, I reiterate that 
the abridgmaut (kf tiie bible, a copy of which 
was left by me at St. Raphael Mission, is the 
work of Mgr. Farauil [q. v.], made while he was 
a simple missionary at Athabasca, befiu-e my 
arrival in the missions of the far north in 1862. 
The sanu^ work was printed in Indian chaiac-' 
ters by Pere Grouard at Lao la Biclie in 1878-'79,. 
as well as a new and more complete edition 
of tlie Deue-Tchippewyau prayer book, another 
intended for the Dendjie, a third intended for 
the Cree. " 



H. 



Haines (Elijah Middlebroolv). The ] 
American Indian | (Uh-uish-in-na-ba). 
I The Whole Subject Complete in One 
Volume I Illustrated with Numerous 
Appropriate Engravings. | By Elijah 
M. Haines. | [Design.] | 

Chicago : | the Mas-sin-na-gan com- 
pany, I 1888. 

Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. preface 
pp. vii-viii, contents and list of illustrations 
pp. 9-22, test pp. 23-821, large 8°. 

Chapter vi, Indian tribes, pp. 121-171, gives 
special lists and a general alphabetic list of 
the tribes of North America, derivations of 
tribal names being sometimes given. — Numer- 
als 1-102 of the Navajo (from Catlin), p. 443 ; of 
the Apache, pp. 444-445. — Numerals 1-10 of tho 



Haines (E. M.) — Continued. 

Chippewyan (four sets, one " from a German 
interpreter," one " from McKenzie," one " from 
a woman, a native of Churchill," and oue 
" from a (!hippewyau"), p. 450. 

Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Pilling. 

Haldenian (Samuel Stehman). Analytic 
ortliography : | an | investigation of 
the sounds of the voice, | and their | 
alphiibetic notation; | including | the 
■ mecliauism of speech, | and its bearing 
upon I etymology. | By | S. S. Halde- 
man, A.M., [professor m Delaware 
college; | member [&c. six lines.] | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippiucott&co. 
I London: Triibner ife co. Paris: Ben- 



A'l'ITAI'ASCAX I.ANGUAOES. 



39 



Haldeman (S. S. ) — ( 'diii imifd. 

jainiii I)ii|>r;tl. | Hrrlin: I^'crd. I (liiiini- 
h'V. I !«()(). 

HiiU'-litli^ •■ 'rifvtlyaii prize essay" verso 
bliiiik 1 1. title \i-rtii) blaiilv I 1. preliicc \>i>. v-vi, 
ctiiiteuts pp. vii-viii, slip i)f iidilitional coirec- 
tiinjs, text pp. 5-147, eorriMticiiis and additions 
p. 14H, 4^. 

Niiiiii'ral.s 1 lOolthc Apaclir, p. 1 lU. 

Vupien neen : Hostoii Atln'ii;iMiiii, Uritisli Mu- 
seum, Hiii-eaii «r EthnolojiN , Kaiiics. Tiiniibull. 

First printed in Amorieau I'liilosopli. Soc. 
Trans, new series, vol. 11. (*) 

Samuel i^telimau Haldeman, naturalist, was 
born iu Lot iist drove, Lancaster County, Pa., 
Aujiust 12, 1812; died inCliiekies, l'a.,Sej)tembi'r 
10, 1880. lie was edueated at a elassieal seliool 
in Harrisburfi, and tlieu spent two years in 
Diekinsou (>)lleii;e. In ISiiO Heury I). Rogers, 
having been aiipointed state geologist of Kew 
Jersey, sent for Mr. Haldeman, who had been 
his i>upil at Diekinson, to assist him. A year 
later, on the reorganization of the Pennsylvania 
geological .-survey-, Haldeman was transferred 
to his own state, and was actively engaged on 
the survey until 1842. He made extensive 
researches among Indian dialects, aud also iu 
Penusylvauia Dutch, besides investigations iu 
the English, Chinese, and other languages. — Ap- 
pleton's Gyclop. of Am. Biuij. 

Hale (Horatio). Uuited States | explor- 
iug expedition. | Duriug the years | 
1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | Uuder the 
commaud of | Charles AVilkes, U. S. N. 
I Vol. VI. I Ethnography aud phihjl- 
ogy. I By I Horatio Hale, | philologist 
of the expedition. | 

Philadelphia : | printed by C. Sher- 
man. I 1846. 

Half-title ''United States exploring expedi- 
tion, by authority of Congress " verso blank 1 1. 
title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vii, alpha- 
bet pp. ix-xii, half-title ver.so blank 1 1. text pi». 
3-666, map, 4°. 

General remarks on the Tahkali-Umkwa 
family, iiududing a list of elans, i»p. 201-204. — 
Vocabularies of the Tlatskanai (Tlatskanai ami 
Kwalhioqua) and Umkwa (Umj»<iua), lines B, 
C, pp. .'•>70-629. 

Anderson (A. C), Vocabulary of the Tahkali 
(Carriers), line A, pp. . '570-629. 

Copies seen .- Astor, Hritish Museum, Con- 
gi'ess, Lenox, Trumbull. 

At the Squier sale, no. 446, a copy brought 
$13; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, half maroon 
morocco, top edge gilt, $13. 

Issued also with the following title: 

United States | exploring expedi- 
tion. I During the years | 1838, 1839, 
1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command 
of I Charles Wilkes, U. S. N. | Ethnog- 



Hale ( II. ) - ('niitiiiiie<l. 

r;ipliy :iii<l jiliilology. | |{y j 'Jlfi.M-Atio 
llalc, I |>liilu]()nist of (lie <!XiKi(iition. | 

l'liil;i(l<'l|>lii:i: { Le;i :in(l IV:iti('li;tni. 
I ISKI. 

ll:iir I ille ' rnit«d States oxi)lor-ing expedi- 
liou ' \ ei'.sii Idank 1 1. title verso blank 1 I. con- 
tents pp. v-vii. alphabet pp. i.x-xli, half-title 
verso blank I 1. lext pp. 3-666, map, 4'-'. 

Mngulstic coutouts as under titlt, next above. 

Ciipies see)i : Eamos, Lenox. 

Was America peopled from Polynesia? 

In Congr6s Int. des Anit-ricanistes, Compte- 
rendu, 7th session, pp. 37.0-387, Berlin, 1890, 8°. 

Table of the ]>runouns /, thou,we (hic), we 
(exe.), ye, and they in tin; languagcH of Polynesia 
and of western Ameri(^a, pi>. 386-387, includes 
tlie Tinne. 

Issued separalely ;is follows: 

Was America peopled from Poly- 
nesia? I A study in comparative Philol- 
ogy. I By I Horatio Hale. | From tiio 
Proceedings of the Int(^rnational Con- 
gress of Americanists | at Berlin, in 
October 1888. | 

Berlin 1S90. | Printed by H. S. Her- 
mann. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-1.''), 8°. 

Pronouns in the languages of Polynesia and 
of western Anierica, including the Tiime, p. 14. 

Copies seen : Pilling, Wellesley. 

Horatio H;ile, ethnologist, born in Newport, 
N. H., May 3, 1817, was gr;uluated at Harvard iu 
1837,and was appointed iu the same ye;ir jihilol- 
ogist to the United States exploring expedition 
uuder Cajjt. Charles Wilkes. In this capacity 
he studied a large number of tlie languages of 
the Pacific islands, as well as of North and 
South America, Australia, and Africa, aud also 
investigated the history, traditions, and customs 
of the tribes speaking those languages. The 
results of his intiuiries are given in his " Eth- 
nography aud Phihdogy' (Philadelphia, 1846), 
which forms the seventh volume of the expedi- 
tion reports. He has published numerous 
memoirs on authropology^ and ethnolog\', is a 
member of many learned societies both iu 
Europe and in America, aud iu 1886 was vice 
president of the American Association for the 
Advancement of Science, presiding over the 
section of anthropology. — Appletoii's Cyclop, of 
A til. Biog. 

Hamilton (Alexander S. ) Vocabulary 
of the Haynarger. 

Manuscript, .'> unnumbered le;ives, folio, 
written on both sides the sheets, in the library 
of the Bure;ui of Ethnology. Sent to the Smith- 
sonian Institution by its compiler from Crescent 
City, Cal., Nov., 13:')6. Recorded on one of the 
Smithsonian forms of 180 words, with an added 
leaf the whole aomprisiug about 220 words aud 
phrases. 



40 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Hamilton (A. S.) — Contiuued. 

The same library ban two copies of the orig- 
inal manuscript, made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. 
Hare Indians. See Peau de Li6vre. 
Harmon (Daniel Williams). A | journal 
I of I voyages aud travels | in the | 
interiour of North America, | between 
the 47th and 58tli degree.s of north lati- 
tude, extend- iug from Montreal nearly 
to the Pacific ocean, a distance | of 
about 5,000 miles, including an account 
of the prin- | cipal occurrences, during 
a residence of nineteen | years, in differ- 
ent parts of the country. I To which are 
added, ) a concise description of the face 
of the country, its inhabitants, | their 
manners, custom.s, laws, religion, etc. 
aud cousidera- \ ble specimens of the two 
languages, most extensively | spoken; 
together with an account of the jjrinci- 
I pal animals, to be found in the forests 
and I prairies of this extensive region. 
I Illustrated by a map of the country. 
I By Daniel Williams Harmon, | a 
partner in the north west company. | 
Andover: | jiriuted by Flagg aud 
Gould. I 1820. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. portrait 1 1. title 
verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-xxiii, text 
pp. 25-432, map, 8°. 

A specimen of the Tacully or Carrier longue 
(a vocabulary of 280 words), i)p. 40:i-412.— The 
numerical terms of the Tacullies (1-1000), p. 413. 

Extracts from the linguistic portion of this 
volume are given by many authors. 

Copies seen : Astor, B.incroft, Boston Athe- 
naeum, British Museum, Congress, Dunbar, 
Eames, Geological Survey. 

At the Field sale, no. 908, a half-morocco copj' 
brought $3. .50; at the Briulcy sale, no. 4685, 
$5.25; at the Murphy sale, no. 1146, $2.25. 

Harvard: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Harvard University, 
Cambridge, Mass. 

Haynarger. See Henagi. 

Hazeu {(i-eii. William Babcock). Vocab- 
ulary of the Indians of Applegate 
creek (Na-bilt-se). 

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, 
written on one side only, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Forwarded by its com- 
piler to Dr. Geo. Gibbs, from Ft. Yamhill, Ore- 
gon, Jan. 10, 1857. 

Recorded on one of the Smitlisonian forms of 
180 words, all the blank spaces being tilled. 

William Babcock Hazen, soldier, born in 
West Hartford, Vt., September 27, 1830, died 



Hazen (W. B.) — Continued. 

in Washington, D. C, J.aunary 16, 1887. He 
was a descendant of Moses Hazen. His 
parents removed to Ohio in 1833. William was 
graduated at the IT. S. Military Academy in 
1855, and after serving against the Indians in 
California and Oregon joined the 8th Infantry 
in Texas in 1857. He commanded successfully 
in five engagements, until, in December, 1859, he 
was severely wounded in a personal encounter 
with the Comanclies. He was appointed 
assistant ])rofessor of infantry tactics at the 
U. S. Military Academy in February, 1861, 1st 
lieutenant, April 6, and jtromoted captain on 
May 14. In the autumn of 1861 he raised the 
41st Ohio volunteers, of which he became 
colonel on Oct. 29, 186] . He was ai)pointed brig- 
adier-general of volunteers Nov. 29, 1862. He 
assaulted aud captured Fort McAllister, Doc. 
13, 1864, for which service he was promoted a 
major-general of volunteers the same day. He 
was in ('ommand of the 15th army corps from 
May 19 till Aug. 1, 1865. A t the end of the war 
he had received all the brevets in the regular 
army >ip to major-general. He was made 
colonel of the 38th infantry in 18Q6; was in 
France during the Franco-Prussian war, and 
was IT. S. military attache at Vienna during the 
Russo-Turkish war. In the interval between 
those two visits, while stationed at Fort Buford, 
Dak., he made charges of fraud against post- 
traders, which resulted in revelations that were 
<lamaging to Secretary Belknap. On Dec. 8, 
1880, he succeeded Gen. Albert J. Meyer as chief 
signal-officer, with the rank of brigadier-gen- 
eral.— Apyfe<on'* Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 

Hearne (Samuel). A | journey | from | 
Prince of Wales's Fort in Hudson's 
Bay, I to I the northern ocean. | Under- 
taken I by order of the Hudson's Bay 
company, | for the discovery | of cop- 
per mines, a northwest passage, &c. | 
In the Years 1769, 1770, 1771, & 1772. | 
By .Samuel Hearne. | 

London : | Printed for A. Strahan and 
T. Cadell : | And Sold by T. Cadell 
Juu. aud W. Davies, (Successors to | 
Mr. Cadell,) in the Strand. | 1795. 

Folded map, title verso blank 1 1. dedication 
pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-x, contents pp. xi-xix, 
errata p. [xx], introduction pp. xxi-xliv, folded 
plate, text pp. 1-458, list of books verso direc- 
tions to the binder 1 1. seven other maps and 
plates, 4°. 

A number of Athapascan terms and jiroper 
names passim. 

"To conclude, I cannot sufficiently regret 
the loss of a considerable Yocabulary of the 
Northern Indian Language, containing sixteen 
folio ])ages, which was lent to the late Mr. 
Hutchins, then Corresponding Secretary to the 
Company, to copy for Captain Duncan, when he 
went on discoveries to Hudson's Bay in the 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



41 



Hearne (S. ) - CoiitiiiiKd, 

\ iMi- 1)111' IIkiusmikI si-vin liiiiiilnil iiml iiiiii t.\ . 
liul, Mr. IliitchiiiHi (lyiiijr s<»ni al'trf, Hits Vocal)- 
iiliir.v was takiii away witli tlie rest of his 
oll'i'.cts, and can not now lie rucoveretl ; ami nieni- 
oi'v, at this time, will by no moans serve to 
ii'placc it "—Preface. 
Copies seen : Lenox. 

A I Jouniey | from | I'riiice of 

\\:iles'8 fort, I ill Hudson'.s hay, | to | 
the Nortlunn Ocean. | Uudertaken | 
by order of the Hudsou's bay compauy. 
I For the discovery of | copper miues, 
a north west passage, &c. \ In the 
Years 1769, 1770, 1771, & 1772. | By 
Sanmt'l Ilearne. | 

Dublin : | ]irinted lor V. Hyrne, No. 
10^, and J. Rice, No. Ill, | (irafton- 
street. | 1796. 

Halt' title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. (kilication pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-x, contents 
xi-xxv, introduction ])p. xxvii-1, text jip. 1-459, 
directions to the binder p. [4C0], maps, plate.s, 
8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

f'opies seen . Geological Survey. 

Henagi : 

N'ocabulary 
Vocabiilarv 



See Anderson (A. C.) 
Hamilton (A. S.) 



Hoffman iltr. Waller .lames). Vocabn- 

hiry of tll(^ .Iicarilla .\|ia<lie language. 

Manii.script, 2 II. 4 ', in (he library of the 

Hureaii of Kthnolojiy. CoUectcd at WashinfT- 

ton, D. C, in 1S80, 

Consists of .'>() words ami several songs set to 
music. 
Hoopa. See Hupa 

Howse (.loseph). Vocabularies of cer- 
tain North American languages. By 
T [J?] Howse, Ksq. 

In Philological Soc. [of London], I'roc. vol.4, 
pp. 191-2U(), London, ISfiO, 8°. (Congress.) 

Vocabulary (words, phrases, and sentences) 
of the Cliipewyan (1), Chipewyan (2), Beaver 
(1), Beaver.(2), and SiUanni of New Caledonia, 
pp. 191-I'.i;i. 

Hubbard {Dr. — ). Vocabulary of the 
Lofoten or Tiitatamys (from Dr. Hub- 
bard's Notes, 1856. ) 

In Ta> lor (A. S.). I iidianology of California, 
in California Fanner, vol. 13, no. IC. June 8, 
1860. (Powell.) 

List of rancherias and clans (lit) of the Toto- 
ten, and vocabulary of til words. 
Hudson Bay: 



Henry (Dr. Charles C.) Vocabulary of 
the Apachcc language. 

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol.5, 
pp. 57S-580, Philadelphia, 1855, 4<^. 

The vocabulary, con.sisting of about 400 
words, pp. 578-587.— Numerals 1-10000000, pp. 
587-589. 

Collected in New Mexico in 1853. 

Herdesty (W. L.) [Terms of relation- 
ship (tf the Kutchin or Louchieux, col- 
lected by AV. L. Heidesty, Fort Liard, 
Hudson's Bay Ty.] 

In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity 
and affinity of the human family, pp. 293-382, 
lines 67, Washington, 1871, 4°. 

See Ross (R. B.) 

Higgius (N. S.) Notes on the Apache 
tribes inhabiting the territory of 
Arizona. 

Manu.script, pp. 1-30. folio, in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. 
Transmitted by its author to. tlie Smithsonian 
Institution, April 21, 186C. 

On pp. 1-2 is given a list of the names of the 
Apat'he tribes with comments thereon. Pp. 3- 
22 contain a general discussion of these In- 
dians, their number, physical constitution, 
picture writing, dress, etc. Pp. 23-29 contain 
a vocabulary of about 100 words and jihrases 
arranged by classes. 



Bible passages 
Vocabulary 

^'ocabulal•y 
Hupa: 

General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabiilars' 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

"\V ords 

Words 
Hymn book: 

Chippewyan 

Slave 

Slave 

Tukndh 
Hymns : 

Beaver 

Beaver 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Chipjiewyau 

Detie 



See British. 

Adelung (J. C.) and 

Vatej- {,1. S.) 
Wliii.ple (A.W.) 

Gat.scbet (A. S.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Powers (S.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Gat.scbet (A. S.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) and 

Dawson (G. M.) 
Anderson (A.C.) 
Azpell (T. F.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
P.iischinaun (J.C. E.) 
Crook (G.) 
Curtin (J.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Powers (S.) 
Turner (W. W.) 
Whipple (A.W.) 
Ellis (R.) 
(Jatschet (A. S.) 
Latham (R. G.) 



See Kirkby (W. W.) 
H,vmns. 

Kirkby (W.W.) 
M'DonakKR.) 

See Bompas (W. C.) 
Garrioch (A. C.) 
Bomi>as (W. C.) 
Kirkby (W.W.) 
Kirkby (W. W.) 
Bompas ( W. C.) 
Morice (A. G.) 



and 



42 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Hymns — Coutimud. 

Dog Rib See Boiupa.s (\V. < •) 
Moutagnais Logoti (L ) 

Montagnais Penault (CO.) 

Slave Reeve (W. D.) 

Tukiulb M'I)..iial(l {li.\ 

Hymns | in the | Tt'iuii <n- Slavi lan- 
guage I of the I In<lian.s of Mackenzie 
river, | iu the | north-west territory of 
Canada. | [Seal of the S. P. C. K.J | 



Hymns — ('tmtiuued. 

[London :] Society for ])romoting 
christian knowledge, | Northumber- 
land a\enue, Charing cross, W. C. 
[ISl'tO.] 

Tille verso blauk 1 1. text in the Tenni lan- 
giiagi' (l.'i4 liynnis with English headings) pp. 
1-118, 1 1. recto blank verso printers, 16°. Pos- 
sibly by Rev. W. 1). Reeve or Bishop Bompas. 

Ciipies seen : Eaiues, Pilling. 



I-J. 



Inkalik : 

(Jeueral discussion See P.iisclimann (J. C. E.) 
Vocabulary I'.aucrort (IT. H.) 

Vocabulary I!iis( liniaiin (J. t". E.) 

Vocabulary Dall (W. H.) 

Vocabulary Schott (W.) 

Vocabulary Zagoskiu (L. A.) 

Words Buschniaun (J. ('. E.) 

Inkalit-Kenai. Sec Kenai. 

Isbester (J. A.) On a short vocabulary 
of the Loucheux language. By J. A. 
Isl)ester. 

In Philological Soc. jof London] Proc. \(il. 4, 
pp. 184-185, Loudon, 18r)0, 8°. 

Vocabulary ('i') words) of the Loucheux, to 
which are added forconi])ai'ison a few words (14) 
of the Kenay, p. 18,'). 

James {Dr. Edwin). A | narrative | of 
I the captivity and adventures | of | 
Jolin Tanner, | (IT. S. interju'cter at the 
Sant de Ste. Marie, ) | during | thirty 
years residence among the Indians | 
in the | interior of North America. | 
Prepared for the ])ress | by Edwin 
James, M. D. | Editor of an Account of 
Major Long's Ex])edition from Pitts- 
burgh I to the Kocky Mountains. | 

New- York: | G. & C. A- H. Carvill, 
108 Broadway. | 1830. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copjTight 1 1. in- 
troductory chapter jip. 3-21, text pp. 23-426, 8°. 

Numerals 1-10 of the Chippewyan (from a 
German interpreter), a second set (fromMcKen- 
zie), and a third (fiom a woman, a native of 
Churchill), pp. 324-333. 

Copies seen: Boston Athenffium, Brinton, 
Congress, Dunbar, Eames, Lenox, Trumbull. 

At the Field sale,no. 1113, a half-morocco copy 
brought .$3.63; at tlu^ S(iuier sale, no. 552, a 
similar copy, $3.38. Priced by Leclere, 1878, no. 
1020, 35 frs. The Murphy copy, no. 2449, half 
green calf, brought $3.50. 

Reissued as follows : 

A I narrative | of | the captivity and 

adventures | of | John Tanner, | (U. S. 
interpreter at the Sant de Ste. Marie, ) | 



James (E.) — Continued. 

during | thirty years residence among 
the Indians | in the | interior of North 
America. | Prepared for the press | by 
EdAvin James, M. I). | Editor of an Ac- 
count of Major Long's Expedition from 
Pittsburgh | to the Rocky Mountains. | 

Loudon : | Baldwin & Cradock, Pa- 
ternoster Row. I Thomas Ward,84 High 
Holborn. | 1830. 

Pp. 1-426, ])ortrait, 8°. The American edition 
witli a new title-])age only. 

Copies seen : Astor, Trumbull. 

Clarke, 1886, no. 6652, prices a cojiv in boards 
$5. 

Sabin's Dictionary, no. 35685, titles an edition 
in German, Leipzig, 1840, 8°, .lud one in French, 
Paris, 18,55, 2 vols. 8°. 

Edwin James, geologist, born in Weybridge, 
Vt., August 27. 1797, died in Burlington, Iowa, 
October 28, 1861. He was graduated at Middle- 
bury College in 1816, and then spent three years 
in Albany, where he studied medicine with his 
brotlicr, Dr. Daniel James, botany with Dr. 
John Torry, and geolog\- uiuler Prof. Amos 
Eaton. In 1820 ho was appointed botanist and 
geologist to the exploring expedition of Maj. 
Sanuiel H. Long, and was actively engaged in 
field work during that year. For two years fol- 
lowing he was occupied in compiling and pre- 
paring for the press the report of the "Expedi- 
tion to the Ro(;ky Mountains, 1818-19" (2 vols, 
with atlas, Philadclidiiaaud London, 1823). He 
then received the appointment of surgeon in 
tlie U. S. Army, and for six years was stationed 
. at frontier outposts. In 1830 he resigned his 
commission and returned to Albany. In 1834 
he again went west, and in 1830 settled in the 
vicinity of Burlington, Iowa. — Appleton'g 
Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 

Jehan (Louis-Fran(;ois). Troisicuie et 
deruiere | Encyclopedic th6ologique, | 
[&c. twenty-four lines] | publiee | par 
M. I'abb^ Migne | [&c. six lines.] | 
Tome trente-quatrieme. | Dictionnaire 
de liuguistique. | Tome unique. ( Prix: 
7 francs. | 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



43 



Jehan (L. V.) — ('out iiimd. 

S'lminimc (^t sc \<'ii(i (lit/ ,1. r. Mi^iK", 
('•(litnii, I iiiix Miclici s cil li(>li(|iic>, h'lic 
d'Aiiihois*;, iiii Petit-Miiiit roaj^c, | Hai- 
riciT (riMifcr <lt^ Paris. | lsr>S. 

,Si'co)nl title: Dictiouiiaiii' ] <U' | liii^ni.stujiie 
I ft I lie pliiloloyie loiiipaivi'. | Hisloire tie 
ttiiitt's IfM laugiies iiittrlfs ft vivaiitt's. | on | 
traite cimiiiK-t tritliunit)gra])liii', | einbransaut | 
I'l'xanitm tiitiinit? ties systt'iiit's ct tlf tinitfs It's 
tiiu'stit)iis i|iii sc rattatlifiit 1 a I'oriyiiif ft a la 
tiliatitm ilf« laiif;uf.s, a lour fssf iiff orf^aniiiiif 
I ft a Ifiiis rapports avft^ I'liistoire dt-s races 
Imiiiaiufs, do leurs uiijjratioiis, ftr. | Prt'fe<16 
tluii I Essai sur If rt*>lf tin lau<;age dans I'f vtilii- 
tioutlf riiitfllijjeiiff liimiaiiif. | ParL.-F. Jfliaii 
(tie Saint-Clavifii), | Meinbre de la Soci6te gtjo- 
logitiiio til) Fraiiee, do rAt^atloiuie royale dos 
stMenees tie Turin, etc. | [Qiiotatu)n, three 
liue.s.] I Piibliti | par M. 1' Alibi' Mijiue, | t'diteiir 
do la Bibliotboiiiie iiuiversfUe tin clergf, | on | 
des coiirs eoniplots siir ehatiiie bralie he tie la 
seionee eeeloslastiqne. | Tome iiuiiiuf . | I'rix : 
7 fraiii's. I 

STiuprinie et so veutl chez J. -P. Migiif, 
etliteiir, | aux ateliers eatlioliiiiif.s, Riio d'Ain- 
boise, ail Petit-Moiitrt)iij;f, | Parrifere d'eufer 
de Paris. | 1858. 

Outside title 1 1. titles as above '2 11. itilumiis 
(two to a pa^f ) 0-144S, lar.nf S^\ 

Copiex xeeii : liritisli Mn.sfniii, Shea. 

A later edition as follows: 

'rroisieiiie ct deruieie | Kucycloitedie 

I theolooique, | ou troisieme et der- 
iiiere | seiie de dit'tioiinairi^s sur toutes 
le.s parties ilc la scicuft' relioit'iise, | 
offrant en frauyais, et ptir ordro alplia- 
b^tique, | la plus clairc, la plus facile, 
liii plus commode, la phis variee | et la 
plus compli'te des theologies: | [«&c. 
seventeen lines] | publieeiparM. l'abl»6 
Migne. | [&c. six lines.] | Tome trente- 
qnatrieme. | Dictionnaire de lingwis- 
tique. I Tome nniqnc. Prix : 8 francs. | 
S'imprime et sc vend chcz .F.-P. 
Migne, editeur, | aiix ateliers catbo- 
liques, rue d'Amboise,20,au Petit-Mont- 
rouge, I autrefois Barriere d'eufer de 
Paris, maiuteuaut dans Paris. | 1864 



Jehan ( L. !•'.) — ('t)iit iinitil 

Secundtitle : Dictionnaire | (li< | lintiiiislii|iif | 
ft I tlf phiioli(;;ii<conipart''f. | Histoirf. df ttiiitfs 
Ifs lanK'iit's niortfs ft vivantes, | tin | traiti'iconi. 
plcl triiiioniofiraiihif, | fnibrassant | rexanieu 
criliiino ties systt-uies et tie toutes li;s i|nestious 
•jui se rattaeheiit | a I'origiue et a la titiatiuu 
dos langnes, alourosseneoorganiijue | t^taleurs 
rai)i)orts avee I'liistoiro des races linmaiiies, do 
lenrs migrations, etc. | Prt3e6tle d'un | Essai snr 
le ri")lo tin langage tlans revolution de lintelli- 
gouce humaine. i Par K.F. Ji^'han (tie Saint- 
Claviou), I Membro do la SociettJ geologiiine tie 
France, de rAcatl6niie rtjyalo dos sciences do 
Turin, etc. | (Qntitation, three lines.) | Pulilit^ | 
par M. lalibtS Migne, | iklitourdelaBibliothotiuo 
nniversellodu clerg6, | ou | des cours ciimplets 
surchaiiiiebranchodf la sciouco eccl6sia8tiiine. 
I Tome unique. | Prix: 7 francs. | 

S'iinprime et se vend chez J. -P. Migne, edi- 
tenr, | aux ateliers eatholiques, rue d'Amboise, 
20, an. Petit-Mtintrouge, | autrefois Parri6ro 
d'eufer do Piu-is, iii:iintenaiit tlans Paris. | 1864 

First title vtnso "avis important " 1 1. secouil 
title vorso imnter 1 1. introduct ion numbered by 
columns 9-208, text in doulile ctilumns 20;i-12yO, 
notes adtlitionnelles columns 1249-14:i4, table 
ties mati6res columns 14:ir!-1448, largo 8°. 

Tableau polygltitte des langiies tie la region 
.illeghanitiue (Ameritjne du Ntirtl). cttlumns 
24^-248, comprises a comparative vocabulary of 
twenty-six words in thirty-tive languages, of 
which lines 34 ,"iiid 'i'> are Cliepiiewyaii (Che])- 
jit^wyan jiropre) and Tacouillie or Carrier. — Ta- 
bleau tie reucliaiuenieiit geograpliiiiue des 
langues amfiricaines et asiatitjues, columns 290- 
299, contains a few words iuKinai.— The article 
Apaches, column 308, contains general I'emarks 
on the tribal divisions. — Tableau polyglotte ties 
langues de lacoteoccidentale tie rAnK'ritiuetlu 
Nord, columns 445— 448, comprises a comparative 
vocabulary of twenty-six words in twelve 
languages, of which Hue 12 is KimiV or 
Kinaitze. — Leiinappe. ou Chippaways- Dela- 
ware ou AlgoiKiuinoMohegane, columns 790- 
824, contains in columns 804 and 805 remarks t)n 
the languages of the Cheppewyan propre antl 
Tacoullies.— Tableau polyglotte de la region 
Missouri-Ctdombienue, columns 899-900, com- 
prises a comparative vocabulary of twenty-six 
words ill ten languages, of which lines 1 and 3 
are Suasee and Atnah. 

Copies seen : Eames. 
Jicarilla Apache. See Apache. 



K. 



SeeDall("W.H.) 
Dall (W. H.) 

'tiye dittlissc. See 



Kaiyuhkhotana: 
Numerals 
Vocabulary 

Katolik Deneya 
Legoff (L.) 

Kautz {(Icii. August Valentine). Vocab- 
ulary of the Indian language of the 
Toutouteu tribe. 



Kautz (A. V.) — Coutinued. 

Manuscript, 2 unuumberetl leaves, folio, 
written ou both .sides, in the library of the 
Biiri?au of Ethnology. Transmitted tt> Dr. Goo. 
Gibhs by its comiiiler, from Fort Oxford, 
Oregon Territory, June 19, 1855. 

The vocabulary is in double column.s, English 
antl Toutouten, autl contains about 200 words. 

In the same library is a short vocabulary 
(about 70 words) of the same language by the 



44 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Kautz ( A. V. ) — Coutimu'd. 

tlieii Lieut. Kiiutz, which tuutuius a few wiird.s 
not iu the ioniser vocabulary. Tliere are also in 
the same library two copies, by Di-. Goo. Gibbs, 
of the Ioniser vocabulary. 

'August Valentine K;iutz, soldier, boni in 
Ispringeu, Badeu, (rermauy, •Ian. T), 1828. His 
parents emigrated to this country in 1828, and 
settled in Brown County, Ohio, in 1832. The 
son served as a private in the lat regiment of 
Ohio volunteers iu tiie Mexican war, and on his 
discharge was appointed to the United States 
Military Academy, where he was graduated iu 
1852 and assigned t(jthe-ltli infantry. Ileserved 
in Oregon and Washington Territory till thi' 
civil war, and in the Rogue River wars itf 
1853-'5.5, and wa.s wounded in the latter, and in 
the Indian war on Puget Sound in 185G, iu 
which he was also wounded. In 1855 lie was 
promoted 1st lieutenant, and in 1857 commended 
for gallantry by Gen. Scott. In 1859-GO he 
traveled in Europe. He was appointed captain 
in the Gth U. S. cavalry iu 18C1, and serv ed with 
the regiment from its organization througli the 
peninsular ('ampaign of 18.)2, commanding it 
during the seven days uutil Just before South 
Mountain, when he was appointed colonel of 
the 2d Ohio cavalry. He took part in tlie 
capture of Montioello, Ky., May 1, 186;i, and on 
June 9 was brevetted major for commanding in 
an action near tliere. He was engaged in the 
pursuit and capture of John Morgan, in .Inly, 
18ii!, preventing him from crossing tlie Ohio, 
and afterward serveil as chief of cavalry of tlie 
2id corps. On May 7, 1804, lie was niiide briga- 
dier-general of voluuteer.s and as.signed to the 
command of the cavalry division of tlie army 
of the James. He entered Petersburg with his 
small cavalry command on June il, 1861, fur 
which attiick he was brevetted lieuteuaut- 
colouel, and he led the advance of the Wilson 
raid, whii'h cut the roads leading into Richinond 
from the south, for more than forty days. On 
Oct. 28, 18G4, he was brevetted niajorgeiieral of 
vcdunteers, and in jiLirch, 18G5, was assigned to 
the command of a division of coloreil troops, 
which he marched into Richmond on April 
3. He was brevetted colonel in the regular 
service for gallant and meritorious service 
in action on the Darby town road, Virginia, 
October 7, 1864. Also brigadier and mLijor 
general for gallant and meritorious services in 
the field during the war, Mar. 13, 1865. Gen. 
Kautz was appointed lieutenant-colonel of the 
34th infantry in 1866, transferred to the 15th in 
1869, and coinmiuuled the regiaieut on the New 
Mexican frontier till 1874. He organized several 
successful expeditions against the Mescalero 
Ap.iches, who hid fled froai their reservation in 
1864, and in 1870-'71 succeeded in establishing 
the tribe on tlieir reservation, where they have 
since remained. In June, 1874, he was pro- 
moted colonel of the 8th infantry, and in 1875 
was placed in command of the department of 
Arizona. He served in California from 1878 till 
1886, and is now (1887) iu Nebr.iska.— Ap;jie- 
toil's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 



Keane ( Augustus H. ) Etlmog laphy and 
]tliilolooy of America. By A. H. Keoue. 

In Bates (H. W.), Central America, the West 
Indies, etc. p]). 443-561, London, 1878, 8°. 

General scheme of American races and lan- 
guages (pp. 460-497) includes a list of the 
branches of the Athabasiau or Tiuuey family 
divided into languages and dialects, pp. 403- 
465.— Alphabetical list of all known American 
tribes and languages, pp. 498-561. 

Reprinted in the 1882 and 18S5 editions of the 
same work and on the same pages. 



Kenai : 
Dictionary Set 

General discussion 

General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Gramniati(! comments 
Grammati(' comments 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Tribal names 
Triljal names 
Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
A'ocabulary 
"S'ocabulary 
S'ocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
^'ocabular3- 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocibulary 
Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 



Radlotf (L.) 
Adelung (J. C.) and 

Vater (J. S.) 
Balbi (A.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
RadIoft(L.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Ellis (R.) 
Erman (G. A.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Adelung (J. C.) and 

Vater (J. S.) 
Baer (K. E. von). 
Balbi (A.) 
Bancroft (H.H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Dull (W. H.) 
Davidoff(G. I.) 
Davi<lson (G.) 
De Meuleu (E.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
J61ian (L. F.) 
Krusenstern (xV. J.von). 
Latham (R. G.) 
Lisiansky (U.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Staffeief (V.) ami Pet- 

rotr(I.) 
AVowodsky ( — ). 
Bu.schmann (J.C.E.) 
Daa(L. K.) 

Ellis (R.) 
Jehan (L. F.) 

Latham (R. G.) 

Pott (A. F.) 
Schomburgk (R. H.) 
Wilson (D.) 



Kennicott (Robert). Kotch-a-Kutcliiu 
vocabulary. Words tVoiu the language 
of the Kotch-a-Kutchiu — the lutliaus 
of Yukon River, at the mouth of Por- 
cupine River, in northern Alaska. 

In Whymper (F.), Travel and adventure in 
Alaska, pp. 322-328, London, 1868, 8°. 

Consists of 175 words and phrases and the 
numerals 1-30. 

This vocabulary also appears in the reprint 
of Whymper, N. V., 1869, 8^, pp. 345-350, and in 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



45 



Kennicott (R.) — Continued. 

tlu' same. N. V., 1871, S^, samo imgos. It is alsi) 
printiMl in Wliyinpcr's !irti<'l<< ou Russian 
America, in Etli. Soc. of London, Trans., vol. 7, 
pp. 183-18.0, London, 1869, 8^. Issued also V)y 
tlie Smithsonian Institution, as follows: 

Kntch-a'-kutcliin. | Words from tln^ 

Ijmfinaojoofthei Kntcli-a'-Ki\t('liin' — the 
Indiiiiis of Yonkon river, at the mouth 
of the I Poreu]iiiie river, in Knssian 
AnuM'iea.. — Kennicott. 

[\Vasliin<jton. I), ('.: .'Smithsonian 
Institution. !««»?] 

Notitle pace, headin^only, toxtll. I-.')i)rinlecl 
on one side only, folio. 

Contains about 200 words. 

C'opiex seen: IJiireati of Etlmoloi'y. Kanies, 
Pillin};. 

The original manascrii)t of this vocahulary 
is in the library of "the Bureau of -Ethnology, 
Washington, I). C, 5 11. folio; also a copy by 
Dr. (ieo. fJibbs, 5\l. folio, from which the printed 
copy was set iil>. 

[Vocabulary of the] Slave Indians, 

Tenne. 

[Washington, D. C. : Smitlisonian 
Institution. 1869?] 

Ni> title-iiage, heading only, text 11. tilli 
]irinted on one side only; contains about L'OO 
words. 

"Slave Indians of Liard River, near Fort 
Liard. They call themselves A che-t6-e-tin.'-ne, 
as distinguished from the otlier Teniu^. 
'Aclie-to-e-tin'ni is ' People of the biw lands,' 
or ' People living out of the wind.' ' 

Copies Keen. : Eames, Pilling. 

The original manuscript of this vocabulary 
is in the library of the Uureiu of Ethnology. 

[Biogra]>hy of Robert Kennicott 

and extracts from his jonruiil.] 

In Chicago Academy of Sciences, Tran.s.vol. 
1, part 2, pp, 1.33-224, Chicago, 1869, 8°. (Geo- 
logical SiU'vey.) 

Numerous Athapascan terms, proper names, 
etc. passim. 

[Terms of relationships of the Slave 

Lake Indians (Ach^otinne),Fort Liard, 
Mackenzie river district, Hudson's 
bay ty.] 

In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity 
and affinity of the human family, ji]). 293-382 
lines 64, Washington, 1S71. 4'^. 

The schedules were tilled in March, l.'^fiO. 

Vocabulary of the Chipewyan of 

Slave I.iake. 

Manuscrii)f, 6 unnuml)ered leaves, folio, in 
the library of tlie IJureau of Ethnology. Col- 
lected in 1862. Contains about 160 words. 

There is in the same library a copy of this 
vocabuhiry, 6 11. tolio, with corrected spelling, 
made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. 



Kennicott (R.) — Continued. 

Vocabulary of the Hare Indians, of 

Fort (iood Hope, Mackenzie River. 

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Ol- 
lected in 1862. 

("(uitains about 17.'j words. 

There is in the same library a cojiy of this 
vo(;rbnl:nv iniiile by the compiler (6 11. folio), 
ami anotlicr with corrected spelhng by Dr. 
Geo. Gibbs, also 6 II. folio. 

Vocabulary of the Naliawny Indians 

of the mountains west of Fort Liard. 

Manuscri]>t, 6 niniumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the Hure;iu of Ethnology. Col- 
lected in 1862. 

Contains about 150 worils. 

There is in the same library a copy of this 
vocal)ulniy, i! 11. fdJKi made by its compiler. 

Vocabiiiaiy of IlieTsuhtyuh (Beaver 

People) — Beaver Indians of Peace 
Ri\'er west of Ltiko Athtiliasca; and of 
the Thekenneli (People of the Rocks) 
Siccanies of the Mountains, south of 
Fort Liard. 

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col- 
lected in 1862. 

Contains about 17.') words cni-h 

In the s.ime libraiy is a copy of this manu- 
script, inaile liy Mr. Kiiiiiicott, 6 II folio. 

Kirkby (Rcr. William West). Hymns 
and prayers: | for tlie | Private Devo- 
tions I of the I Slave Indians of M' Keii- 
zie's river. | By rev. W. W. Kirkby. | 

New York: | Kcuiiie, Shea «.t Lind- 
say. I ISIil'. 

Title verso blank I 1 alphabet (syllabary | p. 
1, text (ill syllabic characters with headings in 
English) i)p. 2-16, 12'. /'A small tract, the 
beginning of our work. —Kirkby. 

Easy words, pp. 2-3. — Morning service, pp.3- 
5. — Evening service, pp. 5-7.— Sunday service, 
pp. 8-10. — Watts's catechism, pp. 10-13 — Ten 
commandments, pp. 14-16. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Trumbull. 

A manual | of | devotion and in- 
struction I for the I Slave Indiiius of 
M'Kenzie river, | by | the rev. W. W. 
Kirkby. | [Seal of the "C. M. S." for 
"the diocese of Rupert's land."] | 

[London:] Printed by W. M. Watts. 
I SO, (iray's inn road. [186-"?] 

Title as above p. 1, ti'xt in roman characters 
with headings in English pp. 2-65, 16^. 

Hymns, pp. 2-22 (page 2! blank). — Tlio 
apostles' creed, p. 21.- The general <'onfession, 
1>. '25.— Prayer of St. Chrysostoni, prayer for a 
child, p. 26.— The Lord's prayer, the benedic- 



46 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Kirkby ( W. W. ) — Continued. 

tiou, p. 27.— Sunday morning prayer, p. 28.— 
Sunday evening, p. 29. — Morning prayev,p. 30.— 
Evening prayev, p. 31.— Morning collect, p. 32.— 
Evening collect, p. 33.— The decalogue, pp. 34- 
36 — Catecliism, pp. 37-43.— Of God, p. 44.— Of 
sin, p. 45. — Of providence, p. 40.— Of redemp- 
tion, p. 47.— The Lord's day, p. 48. — The Lord's 
book, p. 49.— Of heaven, j). 50.— Of hell, p. 51.— 
The Saviour, p. 52.— The Cliri.stian, p. 53.— The 
way to heaven, p. 54.— The Judgment, p. 55.— 
The creation, p. 56. — The fall, p. 57.— Tlie recov- 
ery, p. 58.— Tlie deluge, p. 59.— Birth of Christ, 
p. 60.— BapU.sniof ("hrisi, p.61.— Lifeof Chri.st, 
p. 62. — Death of (,'hrist, p. 63.— Kesurrectiou of 
(lirisf, p. 64.— Ascension of CJhrist. p. 65; end- 
ing with colophon, " 'W. M. Watts, 80, Gray's- 
Inn Koad." 

Cojnesseeii : Kanics, Pilling. 

A mauuiil | of | devotion and iu- 

.stvnetioii | for the | Slave Indians of 
M'Keuzie River. | By | Kev. W. W. 
Kirkby. | 

Loudon: | printed l.y W. M. Watts | 
28, Whitefriars .street, eity. [1870?] 

Title verso blank 1 1. the alphabet [sylla- 
bary) p. 3, text (in syllabic characters with head- 
ings in English) pp. 4-76,. 18°. 

Easy words, ]). 4. — Difficult words, p. 5. — 
Hymns, pp. 6-27.— Apostles' creed and other 
prayers, pp. 28-37. — Decalogue, pp. 38-40. — Cat- 
echism, pp. 41-49.— Scripture le.ssons, pp. 50-76. 

Copies seen, : Church Missionary Society, 
Eanies, Pilling. 

A manual | of | devotion and in- 
struction I for the I Slave Indians of 
McKeuzie River, | by rev. W. W. 
Kirkby. | [Seal of the " C. M. S." for 
"the diocese of Rupert's land".] With 
the approliation of | the lord bishop of 
the diocese. 

[Loiulon: Cliurcli missionary society 
1871?] 

Title-page verso alphabet [syllabary] 1 1. text 
(in syllabic charactei's with headings in Eng- 
lish) pp. 3-86, 24°. 

Easy words, p. 3. — Difficult words, p. 4. — 
Sunday morning service, pp. 5-12. — Sunday 
evening service, pp. 13-20.— Daily morning 
service, pp. 21-28. — Daily evening service, pp. 
29-41. -The alphabet, p. 43.— Prayers, etc., pp. 
44_78.— Catechi.sm. pp. 79-86. 

Cojncs seen : American Tract Society, British 
Museum, Pilling, Trumbull. 

Manual | of | devotion aiul instruc- 
tion, I in th(^ I Chipewyau language, | 
for the I Indians of Chiircliill. | By the 
rev. W.W. Kirkby. | 

Loudon : | Church missionary house, 
I Salisbury S(iuare. [1872?] 



Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued. 

Title verso blank 1 1. alphabet [syllabary] p. 
3, text (in syllabic characters with headings in 
English) pp. 4-113, picture of "The bible of the 
world " 1 1. 18°. 

" The sanui as the preceding [London. 1871 .'] 
tiansliterated into the Chipewyau dialect, as 
spoken at Churchill, 3,000 miles from M''Keu- 
zie's Rivtrr. ' — Kirlhtj. 

Difficult words, p. 4. — Numerals 1-20, ]>. 5. — 
Address, p. 6. — Hymns, jip. 7-29. — Prayers for 
children, creed, etc., pp. 30-36. — Private morn- 
ing devotions, i)p. 37-39. — Private evening devo- 
tions, pp. 40-42.— Family morning devotions, 
•pp. 43-46.— Family evening devotions, pp. 47- 
50. — Public morning service, pp. 51-60. — Public 
evening service, pp. 61-60. — Scripture lessons, 
pp. 67-96. — Catechism, ])p. 97-109. — Ibirial 
service, pp. 110-113. 

Copien Keen; British Museum, Church Mis- 
sionary Society, Eames, Pilling. 

JMaiiual I of I devotion and instnxc- 

tiou I ill tiic I Chi])ewyan language. | 
I'or the I Iiuliausof Churchill. | By the 
rev. W. W. Kirkby. | 

London: | Society for promoting 
christiiiu knowledge, | 77, Great Queen 
Street, Lincoln's-Inn-Fields. [187-?] 

Title verso syllabarium 1 1. text (in syllabic 
characters with English headings) pp. 3-148, 
18°. 

Difficult words, p. 3.— Numerals 1-20, j). 4.— 
Address, p. 5.— Hymns (1-30), pp. 6-41. — The 
creed, Lords prayer, and benediction, pp. 42- 
43. —Decalogue, jip. 44-46. — Prayers for children, 
p. 47. — Private morning devotions, pp. 48-50. — 
Private evening devotions, pp. 51-53. — Family 
morning devotions, pp. 54-57.— Family evening 
devotions, jip. 58-61. — Public morning service, 
l»p. 02-73.— Public evening service, pp. 74-80. — 
Public baptismal service, pp. 81-84. — Service 
for lioly (!ommuniiin, etc.. jip. 85-91.— Marriage 
service, pp. 92-94. — Burial service, p)). 95-97. — 
Scripture lessons, pp. 98-139. — Catechism, jip. 
140-148. 

('iipies seen : I'illiug, Society for Promoting 
Christian Knowledge. 

[ ] The g<»8pel | according to | Saint 

John. I Translated into the Tinue lau- 
gitage. I [Three lines syllabic charac- 
ters.] I 

London : | British and foreign bible 
society. | 1870. 

Colophon: W. M. Watts. 80, Gray's Inn Road. 

The transliteration of the three lines in sylla- 
bic characters on the title-page is: News good | 
saint John by | Big river Indians language in. 

Title ver.so blank 1 1. alphabet [i. e. syllabary] 
verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabic characters with 
chapter headings in English) pp. 3-93, 10''. 

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bibli- Soci- 
ety, Church Missionary Society, National 
Museum, Wellesley. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



47 



Kirkby (W. W.) — ('onliimcd. 

[ ] Natsiui k;i<.tlicf iiakc knidi | 

.Jesus Clirist | l)i' koiidc 7icz<i | Saint 
Mark | ckaoiifc adiklcs | 'riimc vatic 
kt'si. I 

Loiiddii : I 1S7I. 

Trnnt.liitiiiii : Our Imil our savior i Ji'.siis 
Cliri.st i his news u.iimI | SmiiiI Mai-k I liy linii 
writU'ii I Indian ton.Linc acionlm^' In. 

'ritlc verso jn'intcrs 1 1. lixl in llu' riiiiii' 
laujtiiajic (ronian clKii-aclcrs) ii|). j-(i4, IS \ 

Copien nceii: Britisli and l""ortij;n ISililo Soci 
et.v, W.'llcslcv. 

[ ] St. Mark. 

Colophon: [London.] W. M. Watts, 
80, (iray"s Inn Koad. 

No titl('-i)agi', licadinyonly ; ti-\t in I he 'I'iniLi- 
laugnagf (entirely in syllal)ie eliarac tcrs, witli 
chapter headings in English) |i|). l-(i(i. IS \ 

Tlie dialect is thati simken by the Indians of 
Ft. Simpson. 

Copii'S iveit : ISrilish and foreign Uilile Soei- 
ety, Krilish Musrinii. Wellcsley. 

[ ] Tilt! gosixds I of I tlic foiuevani^ud- 

ists, I St. MattU()\v, St.Mark, S(. I,ukc, 
I and St. J(din. | Translated inio tlie 
languaji'c | ot'| Tlic ('iiipcwyan Indians 
I of I uortli-west Ann-rica. | 

Loudon: | printed for the Britisli and 
foreign bible society. | 1S78. 

Title verso ])rintersete. 1 1. syllabarinin verso 
blank 1 1. text (entirely in syilabie iliaracters) 
pp. 5-344, 16°. 

Matthew, i»p. 5-100.— Mark, pp. 101-161.— 
Luke, pp. 162-268.— John, pp. 260-344. 

Cojiiex tteen : British and roreign Bible Soci- 
ety, British Museum, Eanies, Pilling. 

[Three liin-s syilabie (diaracters.] | 

The new testauient. | Translated into 
I the Chipewyau language, | by the | 
ven. arehdeaciMi Kirklty. | 

London: | ])rinted for tlu' | liiitisli 
and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic- 
toria Street, E. C. | 188 L 

Title verso printers 1 1. Chijiewyan syllaba- 
rium venso blank 1 1. text (entirely iu syllabic 
characters) pp. 7-396, 12°. 

Matthew, pi). 7-56. — Mark, pp. 56-87. — Luke, 
pp. 87-141.— John, pp. 141-179.— Acts-Kevela- 
tion, pp. 180-396. 

Copies seen : Eanies, Pilling. 

Portions | of the | bo(di of comunni 

prayer, | Hymns, Ac, | in the | Chip- 
ewyan language. | By archdeacon 
Kirkby. | 

Printed at the request of | the bi.shoj) 
of Rupert's laud, | by the | Society for 
promoting phristiau knowledge, I 77, 



Kirkby i \V. \V.) —Continued. 

(■real Queen Street, Lini(dn's-Inn- 
Fields, London. [187!)!'] 
~ Tith^ verso alphabet [syllabary 1 I 1 text (in 
syllabic characters with English headings) pp. 
3-li).-), colo]>hon !> 1 196], HP. 

Morning prayer, iip. 3-18.— Evening ])rayer. 
l>p. 1!)-3I. -I.ilany, pp. 32-10. -Prayers. pi>.41- 
l!t. Holy iiiiiiiiuinion. elc. pp.^iO SO. Hymns. 
|>|i. SI i:;s. .Scri|>lure lessons, |)|.. i:;!l-lSI.- 
Calechisin, ]ip. 182-192. Mnsic for bynins. pp. 
193-195. 

Cnpiesiiecn: Britisli Mn.seTiin Pilling, Society 
for Pi-oniotiiig ("hristian Knowledge. 

See Kirkby (\V. AV ) and Bompas (W (' ) 
below for an edition of tliis work adapted for 
the useof fll«^ Slavi Indians. 

[One liii,. syll.-ibic cliaracters. ] | 

Tort ions | (d" tlie | book of common 
prayer, | and | ailminiHtration of the 
sacraments, | ami otlu'r rites and cere- 
monies of llie (hiircli, I According to 
the use of tlie Church of England. | 
Translated into Mie language | of the | 
Cliipiwyaii Iiidi.iiisof N.W.America, 
I by the I veil. arcli(h'acon Kirkby. | 
[Sc.il of tJK' S. r. C. k'.] I 

Society for prmnoting christiau 
knowledge, | Nortlmmberland Avenue, 
Charing Cross, London. | 1881. 

Title verso printers 1 1. alphabet [syllabary] 
verso blank 1 1. text (in syllabic characters 
with headings partly in syllabic, characters 
and partly iu English aud Latin) pp. .5-160, 16^^. 

Prayers, etc., pp. 5-86— The order of the ad- 
ministration of the Lord's siiiiper, or holy 
communion, pp. 87-106.— The ministration f)f 
public baptism of infants, ])p. 106-112. — The 
ministration of baptism to such as are of riper 
years, pp. 113-121.— A catechism, j)p. 123-131.— 
The order of confirmation, jip. 131-135. — The 
form of solemnization of matrimony. i)p. 135- 
142.— The visitation of the sick, pp. 142-147.— 
The order for thi^ burial of the dead, pp. 148- 
156. — The churching of women, i)p. 157-160. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

Hymns, | prayers and instruction, | 

in the | Chipewyan language. | By the 
I ven. archdeacon Kirkby. | [Seal of 
the S. P. C. K.] I 

Society for promoting christian 
knowledge, | Northumberland Avenue, 
Charing Cross, Loudon. | 1881. 

Title ver.so blank 1 1. text (in syllabic char 
acters with English headin.gs) pp. 3-91, colo- 
phon p. [02], 16^. 

nymusindouble columns, ])p. 3-36 _ Prayers, 
p[). 37-62. — Lessons, ]>i). 1)3-91. 

Copies seen : Eames, Society for Promoting 
Christian Knowledge, 



48 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Kirkby (W. W.) — Continued. 

See Bompas (W. C.) 

and Bompas (W. C.) Portions | of 

the I book of common prayer, | Hymns, 
&c., I in tlie I Cliipewyan language. | 
By archdeacon Kirkby. | Adapted for 
the nm of | the Slavi Indians | by the 
I right reverend W. C. Bompas, D. D., 
I bishop of Athabasca. | 

Printed by the | Society for pro- 
moting cliristian knowledge, | 77, 
Great Queen Street, Lincohi's-Inu- 
Fields, London. [1879?] 

Title ver.>^o syllaViarium 1 1. text (in .syllabic 
character.s with headings in English) jtp. :i-175, 
colophon p. [176], 16°. 

Morning prayer, pp. 3-1.').— Evening prayer, 
pj). 16-26 —The litauy, pp. 27-34.— Prayers, pp. 
35_42. — Holy commnnion, etc., pp. 43-68.— 
Hymns, pp. 60-123.— Scrijiture lessons, pji. 124- 
16.5.— C.atecliisni, pp. 166-175. 

Cojiies seen : British Museum, Eanies, Pilling, 
Society for Promoting Cliristian Knowledge. 

See Kirkby ("W. W.) above for title of the 
original edition of tlii.s work. 

Issued also in roman characters as follow.s: 

Portions of tlie | book of com- 
mon praj'er, | hymns, etc., | in the | 
Chipewyan language. | By archdea- 
con Kirkby. | Adapted for the use of 
the Slavi Indians | liy the | right rev. 
W. C. Bompas, D.D., | Inshop of Atha- 
basca. I 

London : | Socii^ty for promoting 
christian knowledge; | Northumber- 
land avenue. Charing cross. [l.S82?] 

Title verso .syllaharium in roman 1 1. text 
(entirely in roman characters) pp. 3-175, 16°. 

Morning jirayer, pp. 3-15. — Evening prayer, 
pp. 16-26.— The litany, pp. 27-34.— Prayers, pp. 
.35-42. — Service for holy communion, etc., pp. 
43-68. — Hymns, pp. 69-123. — Scripture lessons, 
pp. 124-165.— Catechism, pj.. 166-175. 

Copies seen .- Eamcs, Pilling, Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

See title next aljove for the same work in 
syllabic characters. 

Part of the | book of common 

jirayer, | and administration of | the 
sacraments, | and other | rites and 
ceremonies of the church, | according 
to the use of | The Church of England; 
I translated into the language of the 
I Chipewyan Indians of the queen's 
dominion | of Canada | by the | ven. 
archdeacon W. W. Kirkby, D. D. | 
Adapted to the use of the Tenni Indians 
of I Mackenzie river | by the | right rev. 



Kirkby (W. W.) Bompas (W. C.)— Ct'd. 
W. C. Bompas, D. D., | bishop of Mack- 
enzie river. | [Seal of the S. P. C. K.] | 

Londou : | Society for promoting 
christian knowledge, Northumberland 
avenue. Charing cross, W. C. | 1891. 

Title as above verso blank 1 1. contents verso 
blank 1 l.text (mo.stly in Chipewyan, roman 
characters, with headings and instructions iu 
EnglLsh) pp. 1-276. 16°. 

Moining prayer, pp. 1-13. — Evening jn-ayer, 
PI). 14-23. — The creed of St. Athanasius (in 
English). ■ i.p. 23-26.— The litany, i)p. 26-32.- 
Prayers and thanksgivings upon several occa- 
.sions, pp. 33-41.— The collects, epistles, and 
gospels, pp. 42-187. — Holy communion, pji. 188- 
208.— Baptism of infant.s, pp. 209-221.— Bai)tism 
of such as are of riper years, pp. 222-229. — Cat- 
echism, pp. 230-236. —Confirmation, pj). 236- 
2.38. — Solemnization of matrimony, ]>p. 239- 
247.— Visitation and communion of the sick, 
lip. 248-258. — Burial of the dead, pp. 259-266.— 
Th(^ churching of women (or tlie thanksgiving 
of women after childbirth), pp, 206-269. — A com- 
minatiou, or denouncing of (Jod's anger and 
jtidgments against sinners (jiartly in English 
and jiartly in Chipewyan). p]). 269-276. _ 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

I havenotbeenvery successful in ascertaining 
the dates of the works by Arelideacon Kirkby, 
who writes me concerning them a.s follows : 
" Being printed, for the most part, in England, 
with no one to correct the proofs, many errors 
(■rejit in, and in some cases two or three editions 
had to be printed before we conld get them 
even approximately correct. In this way the 
same book was jirinted two or three times, 
which would give to it so many dates." 

William "W. Kirkby was horn at Ham- 
ford, I<incolnshire, in 1827, and received his 
earlier ediu'ation at ii grammar school. When 
about 18 .veans old he went to the dio<esan 
school at Litchtield to ])re])are for the duties 
of a teacher, which he desired to become. His 
stay at Liti'hfield was very happy, and after 
two years his friend, the Rev. C. C. Layard, rec- 
tor of Mayfleld, Staffordshire, offered him the 
niastershipof the village national school, which 
Mr. Kirkby accepted. Whilst there a strong 
desire to enter the mission field came into his 
mind, and he offered his services to the secre- 
■ tary of the church missionary society. The 
oti'er was accepted, and in the spring of 1851 
Mr. Kirkby entered St. John's C(dlege, London, 
to jirepare for his new duties. In May, 1852, a 
sudden call came for a teacher to go at once to 
Red River, and the committee selected Mr. 
Ki rkby for the post. He had not yet completed 
his studies, but on the 6th of June of that year 
embarked on the Hudson Bay Company '.s ship, 
taking his bride of a few days with him, for 
Red River. The voya.ge was made in .safety, 
and t he young couple reached their destination 
the 12th of 0<!tober, and iu a few days after- 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUA(!P:S. 



49 



Kirkby (W. W.) — (^''»'itinii<'<l- 

wards lie rntcrod iiimiii liis diitiis. On tliii 24tli 
of I)c(<'iiiI)or, 1854, Mr. Kirkby wan onlainid to 
the niiiii.sfrv l>y tli<i Ki^lit Kovcrcnd Pavid 
Aiidcrsciii, 1). 1)., the first l.isliop of Kiiix-rt's 
Land, and at on<e took toinporary chart;*' "'' ^l- 
Andrew's ehiurh and jiarish. 

In 1852 Mr. Kirkl>y was ajiiiointcd to the 
mission of Red River, nrrivin>; tliero in the 
autemn of that year. His dnties wero to take, 
charfje of a model training .sehool and to su- 
perintend the work of education in the colony, 
in those parishes belonginj; to the church 
missionary society. Sliortly afterwards Mr. 
Kirkby, in addition to hi.s other duties, was 
appointed assistant minister of St. Andrews, 
then the largest parish in the settlement, ami 
continued there fo\ir years. In the nmaiiwhile 
the church had spread northwards and west- 
wards to P^iirford, Cumberland, La(' la Rouge, 
and the English River, 700 miles from Red 
River, and then at a single bound it went into 
the great McKenzio Valley. Archdeacon Hun- 
ter went thither on an exploratory tour in 1858, 
and the. next year the bishop ai)i)ointed Mr. 
Kirkby to take charge of the work. He at onc(^ 
proceeded there, and made Fort Simpson his 
headquarters. This fort stands in latitude <i2 ' 
N., longitiule 121° W., at the confluence of the 
Liard and Sliive rivers. He began his work 
with much encouragement and hope. The first 
care was the language, and then the erection of 
suitable buildings for church and scluxd pur- 
poses. These latter were soon supplied by the 
kindness ami liberality of the Hudson Bay 
Company's officers, who took an interest in the 
work. In the summer of 18(!2 Mr. Kirkby 
re.solved to carry the gospel within the Arctic 
Circle, and if possible into Alaska. Securing 
a good canoe and two reliable Indians he .set off, 
following the ice down the McKen/.ie to Peel 
River Fort, the last trading post of the com- 
pany and a great rendezvous of the Indians. 
After a short stay here he left his canoe and, 
accom])anied by two guides, set out to walk 
over the mountains. Up and down they went, 
over several ridges rising from 700 to 2,800 feet, 
and at last, by a sudden descent of 1,000 feet 
into the valley, he reached La Pierre's hou.se 
and another of the Fur Company's forts. Here 
Mr. Kirkby remained until theltoth of June, in- 
structing the Indians and learning theTukndh 
language, a kindred one to the Tinne. He then 
embarked in the company's boat on the Rat 
River, and then down the Porcupine River, a 
tributary of the Yukon. Two miles above the 
confluence of these Fort Yukon stands. This 
journey occupied three months, and at the close 
of it Mr. Kirkby writes ; " I have traveled over 
at least 3,000 miles; have been honored of (lod 
to carry the gospel far within the Arctic Circle 
and to a people who had never heard it before." 
The work at the Yukon was then given to the 
Rev. R. Milkmaid and Mr. Kirkby devoti-d his 
time at Fort Simpson to the language. He trans- 
lated two of the gospels and completed a little 

ath 4 



Kirkby ( W. W.) — CoiitiniKMl. 

numual containing i)r.ayers, hymns, catechi.sm. 
and sliort bible lessons, such as the Indians 
could readily understand. He also collected 
materials for a giammar and vocabulary for the 
use of others. The ac<iuisition of the language 
was thus rendered easier for future mission- 
aries who might enter the field. In IKC.t) Mr. 
Kirkby, having been seventeen years in the 
ti<'ld, went to Knglaiid to place his children at 
•school. I'pon his return to the country, in 
1870, he was ap]ioiiited to York Faitory, Hud- 
son Ray, that he might meet the Cbiju'wyans 
of f'hurcliill. Here he laborol for nine years, 
and then retired from tlie mission to make a 
home for his children iivt he civilized world ; and 
this he has done, being now stationed at the 
village of Rye, near Ni^w Vork. 
Klatskenai. See Tlatskenai. 
Koltschane : 

Tribal names See Latham (R. G.) 

Vocabulary Raer (K. E. von). 

Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) 

Vocabulary Buschmann (J. C. E.) 

Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 

Kovar {Dr. Emil). Uclx-r tlie Bedftituuo; 
(lea posscssivischeii rroiiomeii fiir die 
Ausdnick,swei.se dcs siil»Ktantivi,schpn 
.attributes. 

In Zeitschrift fiir Volkerpsychologie und 
Sprachwissensehaft. vol. 16, \<j>. ;!86-:{94, Berlin, 
1886. (*) 

Examples in a number of American lan- 
guages, among them the Athapascan, p. 'i90. 

Title from Prof. A. F. Chamberlain, froracopy 
in the library of Toronto L^^niversity. 

Krusenstern (Adam Jobaiin voa). Wor- 
ter-Sammlungen | aiis deu Spraclieu 
I einiger Volker | des | o.stlieheii 
Asiens | tmd | der Nordwest-Kiiste vou 
Aiuerika. | Bekannt gcinacht | von | A. 
,T. V. Kruseusteru | Capitaiii der Rii.s- 
si.scli kaiserlicbeu Mariue. | 

St Petersburg. | Gedruekt in der 
Druckerey der Admiralitiit | 1813. 

Title verso note 1 I. Vorbericht pp. i-xi, half 
title verso blank 1 I. text pp. 1-68, Druckfebler 
verso blank I I. 4°. 

Wortersararaluug aus der Sprache der Kinai 
(from Dawidoff, ResanotI', and Lisiansky), pp. 
57-68. 

Copies neen : Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, )?rit- 
ish Museum, Eames, Pilling. Trumbull, "Wat 
kiuson, Wellesley. 
Kutchin. Vocabulary of the Hong Kut- 
chiu lauguage. 

Manuscript, 4 unnumliered leav(\s, folio, 
written on one side only ; in the lit>rary of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Contains about 130 wonls, entered on one of 
the .Smithsonian fonns of the standard vocabu- 
lary. 



50 



BIBLIOGKAPHY OF TlIK 



Kutcbin : 

Gpiicral dis(MiHsion Seo Bancroft (H. H.) 

Numerals I'.iisclimrtiiii (J. (3. E.) 

Numerals I)all(AV.H.) 

Kelationshii>s li.idesty (W. L.) 

Tribal iiaiiii's I.atliain (K. (1.) 

Voeabulary r.aneroft (11. TI.) 

Vocabulary Husclimanii (J.U. E.) 

Vocabulary Hall (W. II.) 

Vocabulary Kcnnicotf (Tf.) 

Vocabulary Kutcbiii. 

Vocabularj' Morf^au (L. 11.) 

Vocabulary Murray (A. II.) 



Kutchiii — Coil tin 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocal)ulary 
Words 
Words 

Kwalhiokwa : 

Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 



R-(l. 



• r.titol (K. F. S. J.) 
lU.cliriy:(F. L.O.) 
KosH(i;. B.) 
Wbymiicr (F.) 
Daa (L. K.) 
Elli.s ill.) 



Ilaucrolt (II. II.) 
Buschmaiin (J. C E.) 
Hal.' (H.) 
Latbaui (K. G.) 



L. 



L. J. C. et M. I. Titles of aiionymons 
works l»<'j;iiiiiiii,ij: with these h'tters are 
eutcred in tliis hililiogBHi)liy uiuUt 
the next I'ollowiug word of title. 

Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscelhmeoua 
contributions to the cthno5j;rai)hy of 
North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. 

lu Pbilological Soc. [of London], Proc. vol. 2, 
pp. 31-50 [Londou], 18-16, ,S°. (Congress.) 

Table of words showing affinities between 
the Ahneuium and a number of other Amer- 
ican languages, auiong them the Kenay, pp. '.i'2- 
34. 
On the languages of the Oregon ter- 
ritory. By R. G. Latham. M. I). Read 
before the Society on the 11th Decem- 
ber, 1841. 

In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour, vol.], 
pp. 154-166. Edinburgh, [1848], 8°. (Congress.) 

A t.ible of 10 Sussee words showing miscel- 
laneous affinities with a number of other Amer- 
ican languages, among them the Kenay, Taculli, 
and Cliipowyan, pp. 160-161. 

On the ethnography of Russian 

America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. Read 
before the Society 19th February, 1845. 
In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1, 
pp. 182-191, Edinburgh [1848], S-^. (Congress.) 

General discussion upon the classification of 
the languages of the above-named region, and a 
list of the vocabularies which have been 
printed. Reference is made to the Kenay, 
Atnah, and Inkalite. 

The I natural history | of | the vari- 
eties of man. | By | Robert Gordon 
Latham, M. D., F. R. S., | late fellow of 
King's college, Cambridge ; | one of the 
vice-presidents of the Ethnological soci- 
ety, London; | corresponding member 
to the Ethnological society, | New 
York, etc. | [Monogram in shield.] | 

London : | John Van ^'oorst, Pater- 
noster row. I M,\)/X'CL [1850]. 



Iiatham (R. G.) — Continued. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso printer; 
1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface j))). vii \i. 
bibliography pji. xiii-xv, explanation of plnlcs 
verso blank 1 1. contents ])]». xix-xxviii, text 
pp. 1-566, index p]). 5()7-574, list of works by Dr. 
Latham verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

Division F, American Mongoli<bv (jip. 'J87- 
460), includes : Comparative vocabulai'y (:ia 
words) of the Loiu'heux and Kenay, pp. 207- 
298; conmients on the northern Alhabaskans, 
pp. 302-308; comparative voeabulary of the 
Chippewyan, Tlatskanai, and Umkwa (60 
words), jip. 308-310; of the Beaver and Chippe- 
wyan (50 words and i)hrases), pp. 370, 371. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, 
Eames. 

The I ethnology | of | the British 

colonies | and | dependencies. | By | R. 
G. Latham, M. D., F. R. S., | corre- 
sponding nunnber to the Ethnological 
society. New York. | etc. etc [Mono- 
gram in shield.] | 

London: | John Van ^'oorst, Pater- 
noster row. I M. DCCC. LI [1851J. 

Title verso printers 1 1. contents ]i]). \-vi, 
preface verso blank 1 1. text ii[>. 1-264. list of 
works by Dr. Latham etc. 1 1. 10^. 

Chapter vi, Dependencies in America (pp. 
224-264), contains a list of the divisions and 
subdivisions of the Athabaskans, pp. 224-227. 

Copies seen : Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames. 

The I native races | of | the Russia u 

empire. | By | R. G. Latham, M. 1)., F. 
R. S., &c., I author of [&c. two lines.] 
I With a large coloured map, | Taken 
from that of the Imperial Geographical 
Society of St. Petersburg, | and other 
illustrations. | 

London: | Hippolyte Bailliere, 219, 
Regent street; | and 290, Broadway, 
New York, U. S. | Paris: J. P.. I'.ail- 
liere, ruellaiitefetiille. Madriil: Bailly 
Bailliere, calle del i'rincii)e. | 1854. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



51 



Latham (R. (i.) — Cniiliniicil. 

l<'roiitiH])i('(c 1 l.titld verso l)laiik 1 l.iKitiic 
vnrso blank 1 1. cimtcntt* pp. v-viii, larKt; map, 
li'xt pp. 1-;U0. IL' . 

Tlic trilx's of Kiis.sian .\nirriia (pp. "JX'.l -'.17) 
contains a liricfaccoiiiil ol llir linguist ic allin 
itifH <>l' tlie variouH divisions, iMcliiilin;; I lie 
AtliabaHkans, pp. ■J!I1--J!U. 

Vopieii xeeit : liunau of l';tliiiolo;:y. Congress, 
Kaincs. 

Oil the l-;ii|o;ii:in'cs of New Galif'or- 

ui.i. I'.y ll.C-. I.atliiun, M. 1). 

In I'liilolotjical Soc. |of LoiulonJ, I'roc.vol. G, 
pp. 72-H(i, Loudon, IH.jt, 8°. (Cou;;rcs.s.) 

Coniinontsiipoi) the .Vthabascans, pp. 74-7."). — 
A few words of Jloopuli, Navajo, and Jicorilla, 
p.K'i. 

On the laiiniia.Lje.s of NoitliiTii, 

WcstiTii, ami Ci'iitral Aimrica. l>y K. 
(J. Lathaiii, M. 1). (Kcad May tbo 'Jtli.) 

In I'iiilologiual Soc. (of London], Trans. I85(i, 
jil>. 37-11."), London [18.')7], 8^^ (Conj^ru.s.s.) 

Tlu! Atlia!)a.sian Gro'ii (pp. G5-70) contains 
lists of tribal divisions of the TakiiUi, p. 00; 
Kutshin, p. 07; Kenai, p. 07; .Vtna, jip. 07-08; 
Koltsliani. Fgak-nts, .Vtua, p. 08. (iencral dis- 
cussion of tlu) Atliabaskan, i>p. 08-70.— Com- 
parative vocabulary of tins Navalio and .\ patch 
(27 words), pp. 90-97.— Table of words sbowint; 
affinities between tlie .several Pueblo lan;{uagcs 
and the Navahoand Jiconlla, \t]>. 99, 100. 

0])n«(iila. I Essays | cliicHy | jiliilo- 

logical and ethnojjirapliical | by | Ifoli- 
ert Gordon Latham, | M. A., M. D., F. 
R. S., etc. I late fellow of Kinj;.s colleffo, 
Caiiibridj^c, late professor of Enj^lisli | 
ill L'^uiversity college, London, late 
assistant physician | at the Middlesex 
hos]>ital. I 

Williams iS: Norgatc, | 11 Henrietta 
street, Covent garden, London | and | 
20 Sonth Frederick street, Edinburgh. 
I Leipzig, R. Hartniann. | 1860. 

Title verso jirinter 1 1. preface jip. iii-iv, con- 
tents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda and lor- 
rigcnda pp. 378-418, 8°. 

A reprint of a number of pajjcrs read before 
the ethnologicid and philological societies of 
London. 

Addenda and corrigenda (18.59) (pi>. 378-418) 
contains: Conijiarative voeabuhiry of the 'Snv- 
alio and Pinaleno, p. 385: of the Beaver Indi:ins 
and Cliip]iewyan, p. 413. 

Copies aeen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton. 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress. Kanies. Pilling, 
AVatkiuson. 

At the Squier s;de a iireseiitation eojiy, no. 
639, lirought $:i.37. The Miir|)liy eoj.y, no. I4:i8. 
sold for .fl. 

Elements | of | (•()iiiii;ir;it i\c jibilol- 

ogy. I Hy I R.t;. L:itb;im, .\L A.. .M. 1).. 
F. R. 8., Ac, I bite, i\-Ui>\\ of King's 



Latham ( R. (;.)—( 'out i nurd, 
college, ('ambri<lge; and bite professor 
of Englisli I in University college, Lon- 
(b>n. I 

London: | Walton ;iiid .Maberly, | 
U|)[»er (iower stnel, and Ivy bine, 
l';iternoster row; | Longman, (Jreeii, 
Longman, R<d)erts, and (Jreen, | Pater- 
noster row. I \m2. I Tlie Right of 
Transbition is Resei'ved. 

Halllille verso printers 1 1. title ver.so blank 
1 1. dedieal ion verso bhmk 1 1. preface' ])p. vii-xi, 
contents ]>ii. xiii-.\x, tabular viewof hinguages 
and ilialectspp. xxi-xxviii, cliiefiiuthoritiespp. 
\xix-.\xxii, errata verso Ijlank 1 1. text pp. 1- 
7.'i'J, addenda and corrigenda j>p. 7.')3-7.')7, index 
pp. 7.').S-774, list of works by Dr. Latham verso 
blank 1 1.8°. 

Chai)ter Iv, Languages of America, The Es- 
kimo, The AthabHskan dialects [etc.) (pp. 384- 
103), contains: Divisions of the Takulli, p. 388; 
of the Kutshin wilh English di'finitions, p. 
389. — Atliabaskan trib;d names with nieannigs, 
I>. 390. — Compjiralive voc,il)ulary (3.3 words) of 
the Kenay, ICutshin, Slave, and Dog-rib, pp. 
390.391; of the Chepewyan and Takulli (47 
words), pp. 391-392; of the Ugalents, Atna, 
and Kolstshani. j)]). 392-393 ; of the Tlatskauai, 
Kw.iliokwa, and Uinkwa (30 words), p. 391; of 
tlie Navaho, Apatsh, and Pin;ileno (27 words), 
pp. 394-395; of the lloojiah and Jecorilla (12 
words), p. 395. 

Gu2ileii seen : Astor, Britisli Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames, AVatkinson. 

Robert (lordon Latham, the eldest son of the 
liev. ■rhom;is L;ith;tm, was born in the vicarage 
of Billingsboroiigh, Lincolnshire, March 24, 
1812. In 1819 he wascntered at Eton. Two years 
afterwards lie was admitted on the founda- 
tion, and in 1829 wcait to Kings, where ho took 
liis fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was 
Ills first passion and his last, though for botany 
h(! li;id a very strong taste. He died March 9, 
1888. — Theodore Wattn iit The Athciiwuin, March 
17, ISSS. 

Leclerc (Charles). Hildiotheca | ameri- 
cana | Catalogue niisonm; | d'une tres- 
precieuse | collection de liv^res aneiens 
I et modernes | sur I'Amerique et les 
Philippines | Classes par ordre aljiha- 
bctique de uoms d'Auteurs. | Rcdig6 
par Ch. Leclerc. | [Di'sign.] | 

Paris I Mai.souneuve & C''- | 1.5, f[uai 
Voltaire | M. D. CCC. LXVII [1867] 

Cover title as above, half-title ver.so details of 
Silica 1 1. titli' as above verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. v-vii, cjitalogiie pp. 1-4U7, .S^J. 

Includes titles of :i number of works contain- 
ing iiKitcrial rehiting lo the .\tliap;iscan lan- 
guages. 

Cnjjiex Keen : {.'lUigress. Kaiiies. Pilling. 

At the Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought 



52 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Leclerc ( ('. ) — Continued. 

10s. ; at the Squier sale, no. 651, ,$1.50. Leelero, 
1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr. and Maisonneuve, in 
1889, 4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought 
$2.75. 

Bibliotlieca | aniericana | Histoire, 

geographie, | voyagos, arch6ologie et 
linguistique | des | deux Ani(^riqne.s | 
et I de,s iles Philippines | r^dig^e | Par 
Ch. Leclerc | [Design] | 

Paris I Maisonneuve et C'<", libraires- 
^diteurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25. | 1878 

Cover title as above, half-title ver.so blank 1 
1. title as above verso bhuik 1 1. avant-propos 
pp. i-xvii, table de.s divisions pp. xviii-xx, cata- 
logue pp. 1-043, suppU'iinent pp. 645-694, index 
pp. 695-7.37, colophon verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

The linguistic part of this volume occupies 
pp. 537-643; it is arranged under names of lan- 
guages and contains titles of books relating to 
the following: Languesamericainesen general, 
pp. 537-550; Apaclie, p. 5.53; Athapasca.p. 554; 
Den6, pp. 578-579. 

Copies seen : Boston Atlienreura, Congress, 
Eames, Harvard, Pilling. 

Priced by Qu.aritcli, no. 12172, 12«. ; another 
copy, no. 12173, large paper, II. Is. Leclerc's 
Supplement, 1881, no. 2831, prices it 15 fr., and 
no. 2832, a copy on Holland paper, .30 fr. A large- 
paper copy is priced liy Quaritcli, no. 30230, 12*. 
Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr. 

[ ]Bibliotheca | araericaua | Histoire, 

geographic, | voyages, archeologie et 
linguistique | des | deux Ameriques | 
Supplement | N" I [-2]. Novembre 1881 
I [Design.] | 

Paris I Maisonneuve &. C'", libraires- 
^diteurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25 | 1881 
[-1887] 

2 parts: cover title as above, title as above 
verso blank 1 1. advertisement 1 1. text pp. 1- 
102, colophon verso blank 1 1. ; printed cover, 
title ditt'ering somewhat from the above (verso 
blank) 1 1. text pp. 3-127, 8°. 

These supplements have no separate section 
devoted to works relating to American lan- 
guages, but titles of works containing material 
relating to Athapascan languages appear 
passim. 

Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Pilling. 

Maisonneuve, in 1889, prices each of the two 
supplements 3 fr. 

[ ] Catalogue | des | livres de fonds 

I et en nombre | Histoire,Archeologie, 
I Ethnographie et Linguistique de 
I'Europe, | de I'Asle, de I'Afrique, | de 
I'Ameriqueet del'Oceanie. [ [Design.] | 
Paris I Maisonneuve freres et Ch. 
Leclerc, (^diteurs | 25, quai Voltaire — 
quai Malaquais, 5 | (Ancienne maison 
Th. Barrois) | 1885 [-1888-1889] 



Leclerc (C.) — Continued. 

3 parts : printed cover aa above verso can- 
tents, title as above verso note 1 1. advertisement 
verso blank 1 1. table verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1- 
153 ; printed cover differing slightly from above, 
verso contents, title like printed cover versonote 
1 1. text pp. 3-161, contents p. [162]; printed 
cover, title verso notice 1 1. text pp. 3-170, table 
1 1., 8°. 

Contain titles of a number of American lin- 
guistic works, among them a few Athapascan. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

There were issues for 1878 and 1887 also. 
(Eames.) 

Lefroy (iS^/r John Henry). A Vocabulary 
of Chepewyan and Dog-Rib Words. 

In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expe- 
dition, vol. 2, pp. 400-iO2, London, 1851, 8^. 

A vocabulary of 45 words in each of the above- 
named languages. The first was collected at 
Great Slave Lake from an interpreter, the sec- 
ond from Nanette, ,an interpreter at Fort Simp- 
son, both in 1844. 

Reprinted in the later editions of the same 
work, for titles of which see Richardson (J.) 
Legends: 

Chippewyan See Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Loucheux Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Peau de Li6vre Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Slave Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 

[Legoff {Rev. Laurent).] Promissiones 
Domini Nostri Jesu Christi factae B. 
Marg. M. Alacoque. | D^gay^ Margrit 
Mari bepade ekkoredyain, Jesus | 
ttahoneltto denCa hourzhzi, tta yed- 
ziyd I padasauoudelui wal^ssi, Don 
aueltte sin : Addi : 

[Dayton, Ohio: Philip A. Kemper. 
1888. ] 

A siaall card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as 
above and containing twelve "Promises of Our 
Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary," in the Mon- 
tagnais language, on the verso of which is a 
colored picture of the sacred heart with in- 
s ription, in English, below. Mr. Kemper has 
pulilished the same Promises on similar cards 
in many languages. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, "Wellcsley. 

Cours I d'instructious | en | langue 

montaguaise | par | le rev. pere Legoff, 
Ptre I oblat de Marie immaculee | 

Montreal | imprimerie J. Fournier, 
162, rue Montcalm | 1889 

Cover title as above, letter to pere LegotF 
from t Vital J. Ev. de St-Albert O.M.I, (dated 
from Ho a la Crosse, le 26 septembre 1887, ap- 
proving the work) recto blank 1 1. title as above 
verso blank 1 I. text (in roman characters witli 
some special characters, headings in French) 
■ ]ii>. 3-444, table des matiSres i>p. i-v, errata p. 
[vi],8o. 

Sj'mbole des apotres, Myst^re de la ste-tri- 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



53 



Legoff (Ij.) — Cimtiiiin'd. 

iiit(-, cri-iitioii, t'ti-. (iiiHtiiirtiiiiiH 1 17), |>[>. ^i- 
22!!.— IX'calogiie (■48~5t)), pp. 229-263. — Vurtus 
th.'oIojraU'.s (.')7-r)!)), pp. 2(i:i-274.— Siir l;i pri6n> 
(«lMi7), pp. 274-307. — (iraudcs veritcs (G8-81), 
pp. ;i07-;i70. — SeriiHdi.s detaches ou de circoii- 
•UaiKM^ (H2-100), pi>. 371-144. 

Cdpieg seen : I'linau of Kthiiolo^y, Kuiiu's, 
(Jlats.rUet. I'illinir, Welle.sley. 

Grauiiiiiiiie | do la | lanj^iu^ monta- 

guaisn I i)ar | Ic rev. pere Laureut 
Legort', i)tie I oblat de Marie imma- 
eul.5e I 

Montreal | 50, rue Cotte, 50 | 18XK 

Cover title as aliove, half-title verso hlaiik 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. bishop's ap- 
proval verso blank 1 1. dedication vmso blank 1 
I. introduetiou pp. 9-24, text pp. 2r)-:!42, table of 
contents pp. 343-351, errata verso blank 1 1. 
folding table of verbs between pp. 110-111, 8°. 

General remarks couceruing the Montagnais 
and their language, pp. 9-13. — Montagnais 
alphabet and words, pp. 13-24. — Of the article 
and other determinatives, pp. 25-28.— Xoun or 
substantive, i)p. 29-14.— Pronouns, pp. 45-63.— 
Adverbs, pi). 64-86. — Prepositions and postposi- 
tions, pp. 87-9.'>. — Conjunctions, pp. 96-98. — In- 
terjections, pp. 99-101. — Adjectives, pp. 103- 
117.— Verbs, pp. 118-326.— Terms of relation- 
ship, pp. 327-331.— Names of i)arts of the body, 
pp. 331-336. — Names of parts of the bodies of 
ti.shes and birds, pjt. 336-337. — Sentences, the 
most commonly emidoyed in conversation, (ip. 
338-342. 

Copies seen : Hiireau of Ktbuology, Eames, 
Pilling, Wellesley. 

Reviewed by Gatschet (A. S.), in the Amer- 
ican Antiquarian, vol. 11, p. 389, Nov., 1889. 
(Pilling.) 

Histoire | de | Faucieu testament | 

racoutdeau.N; Montagnais | par | le rav. 
pere Laurent Legott', ptre | oblat de 
Marie imniaculee | 

Montreal | 50, rue Cotte, 50 | 1889 

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. bishop's ap- 
proval verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. text in roman characters pp. 7-200, table of 
contents pp. 201-214, errata 1 p. 8'^. 

The text consists of thirty-three chapters, 
carrying the bible uarrativo from the creatiim 
of the world to the time of Jesus Christ. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnnlogy, Eaiues, 
Pilling, Wellesley. 

Katolik I Deueyti ' tiye dittlisse | 

Livre de prieres | en langue monta- 
guaise | Par le Kev. Pere Legott", O. M. I. 
[Two lines Latin; two lines Monta- 
gnais] I [Oblate seal] | 

Montreal | C. O. Beauchemin & tils, 
Libraires-Iniprimeiirs, | 256 et 258 rue 
Saiul-Paul. | 1890 | [Two lines Mon- 
tagnais] 



Legoff (L.) — (!oii till lied. 

('over title as alMi\i-. liilc :is almvi- vctsd ap- 
probation of I \il:il .1 Craiidin <). M. I. 
Eveque (111 St .\lbirl I 1. alphabi-l (in roman 
characters) p. 3, .systeme alpliabetiiint; monta- 
gnais [syllabary], pp. 4-.5, text (romau charac- 
ters, witli a few special ones; headings in 
French) pp. 7-398, table pp. 399-404, 16°. 

Anc'iennes priferes du matin et du .soir, j)p. 7- 
16. — Priores corrigees, jip. 17-36. - Manitire 
d'administrer le bapteme, pp. 37-46. —La sainte 
niesse, pp. 47-78.— ClK^niu de la croix, jip. 79- 
108. — Devotions, etc. ]ip. 109-126. — Catechisme, 
pp. 127-189. — Appendice au catechisme, pp. 190- 
222.— Cautiques, pp. 223-394.— Hymn set to 
music, pp. 395-398. 

Copies seen : Eames.datschet, Pilling, Welles- 
ley. 

Livrt; | de prieres | en langu(^ nion- 

tagnaise | [One line syllabic charac- 
ters] I Par le R^v. Pere Legoff', O. M. 
I. I [Two lines French ; two lines sylla- 
bic characters] | 

Montreal. | C. O. Beauchemin tfe Ills, 
Libraires-Iniprimeiirs, | 256 et 258 rue 
Saint-Paul. | 1890 | [Two Vuh-h syllabic 
characters ] 

Cover title as above, title verso approbation 
of t Vital J. Grandiu O. M. I. Eveque de St- 
Albert 1 1. romau alphabet p. 3, systeme alpha- 
betiquo montagnais [syllabary] pp. 4-5, text (in 
syllabic characters, with French headings) pp. 
7-433, table pp. 435-140, 16°. 

Contents as uuder the next previous title ex- 
cept that there is no "appendice" to the cate- 
chism, and the four pages of music are omitted. 

Copies seen : Eames, Gatschet, Pilling, Welles- 
ley. 

P6re Legott' was born at Landeda, diocese of 
Quimper, Fiuist^re. He pursued his classical 
St lulies at the college of Lesneven, and his theo- 
logical studies partly at the Semiuarj' of Quim- 
per, partly at Aiitun, at tlie scliolastica'te of the 
congregation of the Virgin Mary, to which he 
belongs. Ordained a priest ©n the 26th of May, 
1866, he immediately received instructions and 
left France for xVmerica the 5th of the following 
July. He arrived at St. Boniface on the 14th of 
October, and was sent from there to St. Jo.seph, 
near Pembina, where he remained until the 
21st of May, 1867. On his return to St. Boni- 
face he re(5eived orders to go to the mission of 
St. Peter, ou Lake Caribou, where he arrived 
the 4th of October, remaining until the 15th of 
June, 1870, wheu he left for the lie a la Crosse, 
where he arrived at the end of July. There he 
remained until July. 1881, during which time 
he composed the books titled above. His health 
failing, he jjroceeded to St. Boniface, where 
he received medical treatment for nine mouths. 
In May, 1882, he started for his mission, reach- 
ing there July 15, where he has since remained, 
except during the time spent in Monti'eal while 
his books were going through the press. 



54 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Lenox: Tliis wonl following ut it Ir or uilliin ininn 
thest^.s ■,U'^^■\• :i iiofc imlicatr.s lli.il ;i (dpy of llir 
ivoiTi rol'crnMl t<i Ii:im Iktm hcco liy I lir cDHiiiilci- 
ill tho Lenox Lilirary, New \'oik Cily. 

Lesley (.I()si']ili rctcr). < )n tlir iiisciisihlc 
orudiitiou ol" \\()r<ls, ))y ,T. J'. Ijcslcy. 

Ill Anieric^au Pliilosojili. Soc. "Pi-oc vol. 7, ])]>. 
129-ir.5, 1'liiladrlpliia, ISCl. S\ ((kiiit;.ioss.) 
Contains a IV\\ words in Cliijipi-wyan. 

Lessons and praycis | in tlu> | Teuni or 
Slavi ]aiij>uaij;(' | of t!ii' ] Indians of 
Mackomzie river, | in llic | north- west 
territory of Canada. | [Seal of tiic S. 
P. C. K.-] I 

[London:] Society for promoting' 
christian lvUowled<;e, j Northumberland 
avenue, Charing cross, W. C [1S90.] 

Title verso 1)lank 1 1. Icxt iji tlic Tenni lan- 
guage with Knglisli li.'adings ])]). 3-81, 10^ 
Possibly by Rev. W. D. Uccv c, or I'.isliop Bom- 
pas . 

Lessons (1 Gfi), yip. Ji-OCi. - Family jirayers, pp. 
07-76. -Tiivale prayers. ]ip. 7li-Sl. 

Cdpien Kccii : ICanies, Pilling. 
Lipan : 



Lord's ](rayer 
Lords prayer 
Lord's ])ra yer 
\'ocabulary 
Word.s 



See P.aneron (IT. II.) 
Coleeeion. 
Pinientel (F.) 
Oatseliet (A.S.) 
P.(dlaert ( W.) 



/incaHCKlii (lOPlii). [Lisiansky (C(ij)i. 
Urey).] IlyTeiiiociiilc | iiocpiT. cnlira b^ | 
1803. 4. 5. II 1806 lo.iaxi., | no noDo.iliiiilo | 
cro iiMno|)aTopri;ai'o uciiriocTBa | A.iOKCan.jpa 
Ileiutarn, | na i.-opaoii; | Ileirl;, | iii^i> iia'ia.n.c 
TBOMi I 'Moiii i;;iniiranii('iii('naiiTa, ni.nrl; 
Kaniiiaiia | 1-ro pa "ra ii KaBi.iPpa | lOpin 
.lucfincK'iri. I ^laciB n('pBa)i[-BTopafi]. | 

CaHKTirTepriypri, m. Tiinorpa'i'in (). 4ppx- 
ciepa, I 1812. 

Translation. — Voyage | around tliiMV(nld | in 
the year.s 180:i, 4, 5 and 1800, ! by order of | his 
imijerial majesty | Alexander I, | on the ship i 
Neva, I under command | of captainliouteuant 
of the navy, now captain | of the 1st rank and 
kuiglit I Urey Lisiansky. | Vol l\~U]. | 

St. Petersburg, in thi' printiug-oflice of Th. 
Drechsler, | 1812. 

2 vols. 8°. 

Vocabulary (about 500 words) of the lan- 
guages of the northwestern parts of America, 
Russian-Kadiak-Keuai, vol. 2, pp. 151-181. 

Copii's sreii : liritisli Museum, t'ongress. 

A 1 voyage round tlie Avorld, | in | 

the years 1803, 4, 5, & 6; | i»erforiued | 
by order of his imperial majesty | Alex- 
ander the First, emperor of Russia, I in 
I the ship Neva, | by | Urey Lisiansky, 



Lisiansky ( F. ) — ContinuiMl. 

I caplaiii in the Russian navy, and | 
Uuighl olthe orders of St. (ieorge and 
St. \ ladiuuT. I 

London : | l^riuted for John Booth, 
Duke street, I'ortland place; and | 
Longman, llurst, Rees,Ornie, »& Brown, 
Paternosti'r row; | by S. Hamilton, 
Weybridge, Surrey. | 1814. 

Pp. i-xxi, 1 1. pp. 1-388, maps, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under next previims 
title, pp.320-:!37. 

r'«2»V.«vr,')i ; Astor, P.ostdu Athena-um, Jlrit- 
isli iMuseum, Congress. 

A eoiiy at the Pinart sale, no. l.'!7L', brought 
.^> Ir. 

These vocabularies reprinted in Davidson 
((!.), Report relative to * * ' Alaska, in Coast 
Survey, Ann. Rept. 1807, pp. 293-298, Washing- 
ton, 1809, 4°; again in Davidson (G.), Report 
rehitiveto - ' * Ala.ska, in Ex. Doe. 77, 40th 
Cong., 2il sess., pp. 328-333; and again in 
Davidson (G.), in Coast Survey, Coast Pilot of 
Alaska, ])p. 215-221, Washington, 1809. 8°. For 
extracts see Schott (W.) ; Zagoskin (L. A.); 
Zelenoi (S. .1.) 

Locw (Dr. Oscar). Vocabulary of the 
Apache and of the Niivajo. 

In G-atschet (A. S.), Zvviilf Sprachen .aiis 
de.ni Siidwesten Nordanierikas, pp. 98-115, 
AVeimar, 1870, 8°. 

Contains about 400 words each. Scattered 
tlirougliout the s.ame work are many phrases, 
remarks on gramniatic coiistriietion, etc., all 
from Dr. Loews manuscripts. 

Yoealinlary of the Arivaijia lan- 
guage. 

In Wheeler (G. M.), Report vipon U. S. Geog. 
Survey, vol. 7, pp. 424-405, 409, Washington, 
1879, 4°. 

Contains 211 words in the tirst divisirm and 
80 words and sentences in the second. Collected 
in Arizona, September, 1879. 

Vocabulary of the Nftvajo langnage. 

In Wheeler (G. M.), Reports upon IT. S. Geog. 
Survey, vol. 7, pp. 424-405, 409, Washington. 
1879, 4'^. 

Contains 217 words in the first division and 20 
additional words and sentences in the second. 
Collected in N(nv Mexico, June, 1873. 

Lord's. The Lord's Prayer | In one hun- 
dred and thirty-one tongues. I Contaiu- 
ingall the principal lariguages | spoken 
I in Europe, Asia, Africa, and America. | 

London: | St. Paul's Publishing Com- 
]>auy, I 12, Paternoster S(iuare. [n.d.] 

I'itle verso blank 1 1. preface (signed F. Pin- 
eott. tclliiw of llu' Royal Asiatic Society) pp. 
1-2, cuuteiits iii>.::-4, text pp. 5-02, 12°. ■ 

Lord's ])rayer in the Cliippewyan or Tiiin6 
(ronian an.d syllabic), p. 01. 

Copies reen : Church Missionary Society. 



ATirAPASfAN LAXfirAOF.R. 



55 



Lord's prayer : 

('liiii](c\v\ Mil Sii 

( 'liipjiiw ,\ .III 

' 'lii|i)ir\\ yaii 

( 'lii|ili(\vv:iii 

( 'lii|il)r\v\ MM 

( 'Iii|i|ii'W\\ an 

Ito-liih 

I,i|i:ill 

I.i,.,., 

Upan 

Slavo 

Sl:iV(> 

Slav.' 

SlaM' 

Tillllr 

'riikii.Ui 

'I'liUiidli 
Lototcn. Sci^ Tututen. 
Loucheux : 

Uii-f ioiiarv Si^c 

( i rainmal ic ((mimciits 

(■raiiiiiiatii' Irfatist' 

Lc-cnils 

Urlaliimships 

Son-s 

Tixt 

Vi)c.ibularv 

\'oralnilarv 

\'ii( almlary 

V.iral.nlary 

W.inls 

AV.inls 

W.ir.ls 



Aposdiliil.'s (S.) 
I!, luhnlt/ (C.F.) 
Koiiipas (\V. ('.) 
Kirkl.y (W. W.) 
I,..rir.s. 
K-ist (IJ.) 
l!oiiil)as (W. AY.) 
liaiicroCt (H.II.) 
Colcrciiin. 
Viincntcl (V.) 
iScrgliolIz ((!.!■'.) 
Kiilvby (W.W.) 
Kecvo (W.D.) 
Rost (11.) 
I'omiias ( \V. C.) 
r.ouiiKW (\V. ('.) 
Ko.st (li.) 



Petilot (K. r. S. J.) 
Miiller (F.^ 
lVtito(.(E. F.S.J.) 
lVtUot(K.r.S..J.) 
:\rors:m (L. 11.) 
I'rlitot (E. F.S..T.) 
Froniis.sioues. 
r>an.nirt(n.TI.) 
I'.MsoIiiiiaiin (J. C E.I 
Isbosicr (.T. A.) 
I.atliaiii (li. C.) • 
Daa (L. K.) 

ciiibso;.) 

Petit. it, (E. F.S.J.) 



Lubbock (^/r .John). The | origin of 
civilisation | and the | jirimitive con- 
(lilion of iiiirn. | Mental and social con- 
dition of sa\agcs. I By j .sir .Tolm Lub- 
l.ocl<, r.ari., M. P., F. K. S. | author 

[»V-c. two lilll'.S.l I 

liondoii : I liongiiian.s, ( iri'cii, and co. 

I INTO. 

Ilalt-tilli- \ .-ISO ]iriiif.M-s 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. 
Iille \.r^ii blank 1 1. jircrace ]>]). v-viii, ooii- 
t.iils |i. i\, lisl .li' illii.strafioii.^ p]). xi-xii, li.st 
lit' ]iiiii(ipal w.iiks ((iiotcj ji]). xiii-xvi, text 
II]). l-:!2:5, appendix pp. 32."")-;iG2, note.<» pp. 3fi3- 
■Itir), index pp. ;!G7-380, four otlier plates, 8^. 

A few words in Talikali, Tlalskanai, an.l 
Athabascan, p. 288. 

Copies .well: Asfor, IJritisb ^ruseuni, C.ni- 
gfress, Eanies. 

The I origin of civilisation | and the 

I prinulivc condition of inau. | ^lontal 
and social conilitioii of savages. | By | 
sir .lolm Lnliliock, liart., M. P., F. R. S. 
I Author [».V<-. two lines.] | 

New \ Ork : | 1>. Ajjpleton and coui- 
l.any, | IK), '.H' »V 04 (iraud street. | 
1870. 



Lubbock (J. ) — Contiuued. 

Half lifl.- v.Ts.) blank 1 1. Ii .ml ispi.-..> I 1. 
tille\ers<> blank 1 I. prefaie to I lie Aiiieii. an 
idiliiin Jiji. iii-i\', jn'eface J)p. v-viii, eonlents 
JI. ix, ilbistralions pp. xi-xii, list of prinei])al 
works (|ii(itfd jip. xiii-xvi, text ]>p. 1-323, ap- 
jiendix )ii>. 32r)-:!02, notes pp. 3G.3-3(l.''i, index pp. 
3f.7-380, four oilier plates, 12^. 

Linjjni.stics as nnder titb? next above, p. 288. 

('(ijdes seen ; Pilling. 

The I origin of civilis.-ition | .iiid the 

I [iriiiiit i\o.condition of man. | M.iital 

;ind isii.ial condition ofsa\agcs. | By | 

sir. 1. dm LMl.l«K-k,Burt.,M. P., F. R. S. 

I Author [Ac. two lines.] | .Second 

edit ion \\ ith aildit ions. | 

i-ondon: | I.oiignnuis, (i rccn. and co. 
I LSTO. 
Pp. i-xvi, 1-426, 8°. 

Linguistics as under titles above, p. 327. 
Copies seen : British Musemii. 

The I origin of civilisation | and the 

I primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. [ By | 
sir . I. dm Lubbock, Bari., M. P., F. R. 
S. I Ai.<- Chancellor [& <•• tln'ee lines.] 
I Third edition, willi nuuu riuis ,iddi- 
tions. I 

J.,ondon : | I^ongmans, (Jreeu. aiul co. 
I 1875. 
Linguistics as nnil.r titb's above, iip. 416- 
417. 

Copies seen: Lritisli Aluseiini. 

The I origin of civilisation | and the 

I primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of sa\'ages. | By | 
Sir John Lubbock, Bart. M. P. F. R. S. 
I D.C.L. LL.D. I President [&c. five 
lines.] I Fourth edition, with numerous 
additions. | 

London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 
I 1882. 

Half-title verso list of works "by tlie same 
•■nithor " 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title vcnso ]irinter8 
1 1. preface pp. v-viii, coutcnt.s jip. ix-xiii, 
illustrations pii. xv-xvi, list of tlie principal 
works quoted pp. xvii-xx, text iiji. 1-480, apjien- 
dix pp. 481-524, notes pp. .'>2.'!>-r>33. index pji. 035- 
548, live otlior idates. 8°. 

Lingui.stics as under titles aliove, p. 427. 
Copies seen: Eamcs. 

The I origin of civilisation | and the 

I primitiv<^ condition of man | Mental 
and social condition of savages | By | 
sir John Lublnxk, l.art. | M. P., F. R. 
S., D.C.L., LL.D. I Author [Ac four 
lines] I Fifth Edition, with numeroud 
Additions I 



56 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Lubbock (J.) — Coutinned. 

Loudou I Lougmaus, Green, iiu<l co | 
1880 I All rights re.serve<l 

Half-title vc.tso printers 1 1. froutispieee 1 1. 
title verso blank 1 1. preface (dated February, 
1870) pp. vii-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, illustration.s 
pp. xvii-xviii, li.st of principal works quoted 
pp. xix-xxiii, text pp. f-486, appendix pp. 487- 
529, notes pp. 531-539, index pp. 541-554, list of 
■works by the same author verso blank 1 1. live 
other plates, 8°. 

Linguistics as under titles above, p. 432. 

Copies seen : Eanies. 

Lucy-Fossarieu (M. P. de). Extrait | du 
eonipte rendu st^nograjjhique | du 
Cougres internatioual | des sciences 
etlinograpbiques, | tenu a Paris du 15 
au 17 juillet 1878. | Les langues indi- 
eniies | de la Californie. | fitude de 
philologie etbnographique, | par M. P. 
de Lucy-Fossarieu, | membre du con- 
seil central de I'lustitution ethnogra- 
pliique, I laur6at de la Soci4t6 anidri- 
caine de France. | [Design.] ] 

Paris. I Imprimerie nationale. | M 
DCCC LXXXI[1881]. 

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 1 
1. title as aboveverso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-55, 8°. 

Vocabulary of the Loloten orTutataniys, pp. 
20, 24, 28, 32, 30, 40, 44, 48, 52, 54. 

Cojnes seen : Briuton, Pilling. 

Lude'wig (Hermann Ernst). The | liter- 
ature I of I American aboriginal lan- 
guages. I By I Hermann E. Ludewig. | 
With additions and corrections | by 
professor Wm. W. Turner. | Edited by 
Nicolas Triibner. | 

London : | Triibner and co., 60, Pater- 
noster row. I MDCCCLVIII [1858]. 

Half-title " Triiljner's bibliotheca glottica I" 
verso blank 1 1. title as above verso printer 1 1. 
preface pp. v-viii, contents verso blank 1 1. ed- 
itor's advertisement pp. ix-xii, biographical 
memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory bibliograph- 
ical notices pp. xv-xxiv, text pp. 1-209, ad- 
denda PI). 210-246, index pp. 247-256, errata pp. 
257-258, 8°. An-anged alphabetically by lan- 
guages. Addenda by Wm. W. Turner and 
Nicolas Trubner, pp. 210-246. 

Contains a list of grammars and vocabularies, 
and among others of the following peoples : 

American languages generallj-, pp. xv-xxiv ; 
Apaches, pp. 8, 211 ; Athapascan, pp. 14, 211 ; 
Atnah, pp. 15, 212; Beaver, p. 18; Chepewyan, 
pp. 35-36, 215-216; Dogrib, p. 66; Hoo-pah, p. 82; 
Hudson's Bay, pp. 83-84, 223 ; Kinai, pp. 92-93, 
225; Koltschanes, p. 96; Kutchin, Loucheux, 
pp.99, 226; Lipan, p.J226; Navajos, pp. 132-133, 
233; Piualenos, p. 150; Sicannis, p. 175; Sussee, 
p. 178; TacuUiea, pp. 178-179,240; Tah-lewah, p. 



Ludewig (H. E.)^ Continued. 

]7!t; Ti.orillas (.Jicarillas), p. 180, 241 ; Tlats- 
kanai, p. 189; Umpqua, pji. 195, 244. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, 
Eames, I'illing. 

At the Fischer sale. no. 990, a copy brought 
5«. M. ; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63 ; at the 
•Squiersale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906, 
$2.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. 
The Pinart co^ty, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and the 
Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. 

Br. Ludewig has himself so fully detailed the 
l)lan and purport of this work that little more 
remains for me to add beyond the mere state- 
ment of the origin of my connection with the 
publication, and the mention of such additions 
for which I am alone responsible, and which, 
during its jirogress through the i)ress, have 
gradually accumulated to about one-sixth of 
the whole. This is but an act of justice to the 
memory of Dr. Ludewig; because at the time of 
his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172 
pages were printed off, and these constitute the 
only portion of the work which liad the benefit 
of his valuable personal and final revision. 

Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay in 
New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. 
Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he, 
like myself, had been making bibliographical 
memoranda for years of all books which serve 
to illustrate the history of spoken langu.ige. As 
a first section of a more extended work on the lit 
erary history of language generallj', he had pre- 
pared a bibliographical memoir of the remains of 
the aboriginal languages of America. The man- 
uscript had been deposited by him in the library 
of the Ethnological Society at New York, but 
at my request he at once most kindly jjlaced it 
at my disposal, stipulating only that it should 
be printed in Europe, under my personal super- 
intendence. 

Upon my return to England, I lost no time in 
carrying out the trust thus confided to me, in- 
tending then to confine myself simply to pro- 
ducing a correct copy of my friend's manuscript. 
But it soon became obvious that the transcript 
had been hastily made, and but for the valu- 
able assistance of literary friends, both in this 
country and in America, the work would prob- 
ably have been abandoned. Mj' thanks are more 
particularly due to Mr. E.G. Squier, and to Prof. 
William W. Turner, of Washington, by whoso 
considerate and valuable cooperation many dif- 
ficulties were cleared away and my editorial 
labors greatly lightened. This encouraged me 
to spare neither personal labor nor expense in 
the attempt to render the work as perfect as 
possible; with what success must be left to 
the judgment of those who can fairly appreciate 
the labors of a pioneer in any new field of liter- 
ary research. — Editor's advertisement. 

Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in this 
country [England], was held in considerable 
esteem as a jurist, both in Germany and the 
United States of America. Born at Dresden in 
1809, with but little exception he continued to 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



57 



Lude'wig (H. K. ) — C'ont iniicd. 

iisiilc in his iijtiv(> lily iiiilil 1S14, wlicii lir 
i'iiii;ii:it<il 111 America; liul, tlK)ii;;li in IidHi 
cdimtiics ln' practiced law as a jinifcssidn, liis 
bent was t!io study of literary history, whiidi 
was evidenced by his " Livre des Aua, Essai 
de Catalogue Manuel, " pulilislied at his own 
cost in 1837, and by his " Bibllothekonoiuie," 
which apjjcared a few years later. 

But, even whilst thusengaged, he delighted in 
investigating tlie rise and progress of the land 
of his subseipient adoption, and liis rivsearciies 
into the vexed (jncstion of the origin of tbi' 
peopling of America gained him the higlu'st 
consideration, on both sides of the Atlantic, as 
a man of original and inquiring mind. He was 
a contributor to Naumann's ' Serapasuni;" and 
amongst the chief of his contributions to that 
Journal may be mentioned those on "American 
Libraries," on the "Aids to American Bibliog- 
raphy," and on the " Book Trade of the United 
States of America." In 1846appeared his "Lit- 
erature of American Local History," a work of 
much importance and which required no small 
amount of labor and per.severance, owing to 
the necessity of consulting the many and widely 
scattered materials, which had to be sought 
out from apparently the most unlikely channels. 

These studies formed a natural induction to 
the present work on " The Literature of Ameri- 
can Aboriginal Languages," which occupied 
his leisure concurrently with the others, and the 
printing of which was commenced in August, 
18,00, but which he did not live to see launched 
upon the world ; for at the date of his death, on 
the 12th of December following, only 17'2 pages 
were in type. It had been a labor of love with 
him for years; aud if ever author were mindful 



Iiiidewig (H. K.) — ^ Oi)iitiimc<l. 

of I he ,11111 inn pniiiatur inainittin, lie w;i.^ when 
lie deposited liis iiiaiiuscript in the library of the 
.\iiierie;in Kt liiiologie:il Society, dithdeut him- 
self as to its merits and value on a siibjt^ot of 
such jiaramouut interest. He had satisfied him- 
self that in due time the reward of his patient 
industry might be the ]irodnction of some more 
extended national work on the subject, and 
with this he was contented ; for it was a dis- 
tinguishing feature in his character, notwirh- 
standing his great and varied knowledge aud 
brilli;int aeiiiiirements, to disregard his own 
toil, even amounting to drudgery if needful, if 
he could in any way assist iu the ]ironiulgatiou 
of literature and science. 

Dr. Ludewig was a corresjionding member of 
many of the most distinguished European and 
American literary societies, aud few men were 
held in greater consideration by scholars both 
in Anu^rica and Germany, as will readily be 
acknowledged should his voluminous corre- 
spondence ever see the light. In iiri\ ate life he 
was distinguished by the best qualities which 
endear a man's memory to those who survive 
him: he was a kind and atfectionate husband 
and a sincere friend. Always accessible and 
ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied 
to him for advice upon matters appertaining to 
literature, his loss will long be felt by a most 
extended circle of friends, and in him Gennany 
mourns one of the best representatives of her 
learned men iu America, a genuine type of a 
class in which, with singular felicity, to genius 
of the highest order is combini'd a painstaking 
and plodding perseverance but seldom met 
with beyond the coutines of " the Father- 
laud." — lUoyraphic nifttioir. 



M. 



McDonald (liev. Robert). [Terms of 
relationship of tlie Tukiithe, collected 
by R. McDonald, esq., a factor of the 
couii)auy, Peel River Fort, Hudson's 
Kay Territory, June, 1865.] 

Iu Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity 
and athnity of the human family, pp. 293-382, 
lines 68, Washington, 1871, 4°. 
A selection | from the | book of com- 
mon prayer, | according to the use of 
the I United Church of England and 
Ireland. | Translated into | Tukudh, | 
by the rev. R. M'Donald, | missionary 
of the Church missiouary society. | 
[Seal of the S. P. C. K.] | 

London : | Society for Promoting 
Christian Know ledge, | 77, Great Queen 
street, Liucolu's-iun-fields; | 4, Royal 
exchange; and 48, Piccadilly. | 1873. 

Title verso printers 1 1. text with headings in 
English pp. 1-123, 18°. 

Order formomiug prayer, pp. 1-9.— Order for 



McDonald (R.) — Continued. 

evening prayer, pp. 10-18. — Prayers, pp. 19- 
20. — Order of the administration of the Lord's 
supper, pp. 20-53. — Bapti.sm of infants, pp. 54- 
66; of adults, iiji. 66-78. — Solemnization of mat- 
rimony, pp. 79-93. — Burial of the dead, pp. 94- 
104.— Chilig [hymns, nos. i-xxx], pp. 105-123. 

Copies seen : Church Missionary Society, 
Eames, Pilling, Society for Promoting Christian 
Knowledge. 

[ ] Nuwheh kiikwudhud ,lesus Christ 

I vih kwundiik nir/.i | Matthew, Mark, 
Luke, John | ha rsiotitiuyokhai kirre 
I kwitinyithutluth kwikit. | John 
rsiotitinyoo vih etuuetle | tig ha j 
Tukudh tsha zit | thleteteitazya. | 
London, | 1874. 

Colophon : London : jirinted by "Wm. Clowes 
and sous, Stamford street | aud Charing cross. 
Littral trandatUm. — Our lord Jesus Christ I 
the gospel of I Matthew, Mark, Luke, John | 
by them written | epistle first ot \ John written 
byhiui I into the { Tukudh t.iugue | translated. 



58 



BTBLTOrxRAPIIY OF THE 



McDonald (Til..) — rmitinnod. 

'lill.'ver.solilMiik 1 l.text(\viUi cbaplcr iilics 
ill Englisli) PI). :!-'J(i7. 12°. 

Matthew, pp. ;!-75.— Marlv, jip. 7<>-l'2i.— liiilo', 
pp. 122-199.— John, pp. 199-257.— Episth-s cil' 
John i-iii, pp. 257-267. 

Copies seen : Eaiiies, Pilling, Wollp.slcy. 

Ettnnetle clioh | kwunduk | nynk- 

wnn tveltsej. | Rov. M. Ostervald, | 
kirklie. | Vcu. avcluleacon McDonald, 
I kirklie thleteteitazya Takndh tsba 
zit. I [Seal of the S. P. C. K.] | 

London: | Society for promoting 
christian knowlcdj^e, Northnniberland 
avenne, Charing' cross, W. C. [1885. J 

Title vcr.so blank 1 1. text (OHtorwaltVn 
abridgment of the liistciiy of the bible; with 
the exception of chapter titles in English, en- 
tirely in the Taluulh language) pp. 3-23, 16°. 

Copies seen : Eaiiies, Pilling, Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

p:ttnnetle | tntthng enjit gichin- 

chik I ako | sakranieut rsikotitinyoo | 
ako chizi | thlelchil untmde ako kindi 
I kwnnttlntritili | Inolaiid thlelchil | 
tungittiym kwikit. | 'I'akndh tsha 
zit tlileteteitazya | vcn. archdeacon 
McDonald, D. D., | kirkhc^ | [Seal of 
the S. P. C. K.] I 

London : | Society for promoting 
christian knowledge, Nortlmmberlaud 
avenue, Charing cross, W. C. [1885.] 

English title : Book of common prayer |_and 
I administration of the sacraments, | and other 
j rites and ceremonies of the church | accord- 
ing to the use of the | church of England. 1 
(The Preface and Tables are printed in Eng- 
lish, and the Epistles | and Gosjiils are not in- 
serted, except those taken from the Old | Tes- 
tament, which are given at the end. The 
Psalter, the Form \ of Prayer to be used at Sea, 
the Ordination Ser\'ice, and the | Articles of 
Religion are omitted from this Edition.) | 
Translated into the Takudh tongue | by | ven. 
archdeacon McDonald, I). D. | [Seal of the 
S.P.C.K.] I 

London: | Society for jiromotiiig christian 
knowledge, | Northuinberlaud avenue. Charing 
cross, W.C. [1885.] 

Takudh title verso 1. 1 recto blank, English 
title recto 1. 2 verso blank, preface, concerning 
the service of the church, of ceremonies, etc. 2 
11. Ijroper lessons etc. 4 11. tables and rules 4 11. 
text (with the exception of a few headings in 
English, entirely in the Takudh language) pp. 
1-221,16°. 

Copies seen: Eames. Pilling, Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowledge, Wellesley. 

Some copies ditl'er in title-page and collation, 
as follows : 



McDonald (R.) — CoutinncMl. 

I'>ttimetle | tntthug enjit gi<lii inli ik 

I ako I sakraiMeut rsikotitinyoo | ako 
chizi I thlelchil nntiude ako kindi | 
kwnnttlntritli | Ingland thlelcliil | 
tungittiyinkwikit. | (The Epistles and 
Gospels are not inserted.) | Takndh 
tsha zit tlileteteitazya | ven. arch<l(;a- 
con McDonald, D. D., | kirkhe. | [Seal 
of the S. P. C. K.] I 

London: | Society for promoting 
ciiristian knowledge, '■ Northnniberland 
avciuie, Charing cross, W. C. [1885.] 

F,n<jlish title: Book of common prayer | 
and I administration of the sacraments | and 
otluir I rites and ceremonies of the cliurch | 
according to the use of the | Church of Eng- 
land. I (The Preface and Tables are printed in 
English, and (he Epistles and Gospels are not 
inserted, except those taken from the Old | 
Testament, which are given at tlio end.) | 
Translated into the Takudh tongue | by | ven. 
archdeacon McDonald, D. D. | [Seal of the 
S. P. C. K.] I 

London : | Society for iiromoting christian 
knowledge, | Northumberland avenue, Cliaring 
cross, AV. C. [1885.] 

Takudh title verso 1. 1 recto blank, English 
title recto 1. 2 verso blank, text (with the exc(>p- 
tion of a few headings in English, entirely in 
the Takudh language) pp. 1-221, lO'. 

Tlie jirefaco and tables mentioned on the 
English title-page are omitted from the only 
copj- 1 have seen. 

Copies seen .- Pilling. 

Ochikthud ettnnetle trootshid, | 

ako I ettnnetle chohtrorziochikthnd | 
ettnnetle | ako | thlukwinadhun ket- 
chid trorzi kali | dr. Watts, | kirkhe. | 
Thletr<3teitazya | archdeacon McDon- 
ald, D. D., I kirkhe. | 

London : I jirinted Ijy the Religions 
tract society. | 1885. 

Title verso bl.aiik 1 1. text (entirely in the 
Takudh language) pp. 3-17, 16°. 

Catechism, pp. 3-8. — Old Testament jias- 
sages, ]ip. 9-13. — New Testameut passages, ]ip. 
14-17. 

Copies seen : I'illing. 

[ ] Tnkndh hymns. 

[London : Society for promoting 
christian knowledge. 1885.] 

Col«phon : Printed by William Clowes and 
sons, limited, London and Beccles. 

No title-page or heading, title above from 
outside cover, syllabarium pp. i-iv, text (en- 
tirely in the Tukudh lajiguage) pp. 1-74, 16°. 

Chilig [hymns, nos. i-lxxvi], pi). 1-58. — 
Doxologies. nos. i-iv, p. 59.— Canticles, pp. 60- 
65. — Catechism, pp. 66-74. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



59 



McDonald (R.) — Conl iiiiu'd. 

r.7/i(i- .scf/i ; Kaiiios, I'illini:, Smif'ty lor rri)- 
iiiiiliiii; <'liriNti:in Know loilj;c, Wi'llcsK-y. 
A later edition, witli titic^pa;;!', as follow.s: 

Cliilii); I Tiikiidh tsliali zit. | Hyiiiiis 

I ill Takiidh l.'uiftiia.irc. | Composed aud 
translated | by tli«^ | vcii. .irclideacon 
McDonald, 1). IX | [Seal of tlio S. P. ('. 
K.] I 

London: ] Society for promotini^ 
cliristi.'in lvni)\vledi;-e. North nnilierland 
avenue, Chaiinii cross, W.C. | ISnO. 

<■<,!, ipliini : J'rinteil l>y AVillinni Cliiwes ami 
sons, liLiiited, | London and I>ee(l<'s. 

'I'itle on cover "Takudli liyinns. "inside title 
as above verso Idaiik 1 1. syllaliaiiiini \>\t. iii-vi, 
text (entirely in the Takudli lany;ua<;e) pp. 1-80, 
(•(dophon p. [<10], Ki'. The textual matter of 
}i)i. 1-.")S of this edition aitrees page for pafte 
with those j)aj:('s in tins edition titled next 
ahove; thonL;h tin- mailer has been entirely 
resit. 1 think. 

Chilis [liyum.s, nos. 1-941, pp. 1-73. — Doxol- 
oLiies, uos. i iv, p. 74. ^Canticles, pj). 75-80. — 
Oeliikthntetunetle [catechism], pp. 81-89. 

Ckipit'S ieen : JCamus, Pillinj;. 

Zzchkkoonjit <jicliiuchik | nekwazzi 

ttrin ihtblog kciijit | ako gicliincliik | 
ttriii kittekookwichiltsliei kenjit kali. 
I Hp. Oxendcn vut snn kwut sut |. 
tlileteteitazya | diizi oieliincliik kali | 
tikyiiicliikuut ako triiiyunnut cujit. | 
Cliutnill kenjit iiicliiucliik ttliul, | ako 
I cliniikyo rsotitinyt>o eujit gicliincliik, 
I archdeacon McDonald. | Kirkhc. | 
[ScaloftlieS. P. C. K.] | 

London: | Society for promoting; 
christian knowledge. Northuniberlaud 
avenue, Charing cross, W. C. [1885.] 

Title verao blank 1 1. text (Oxenden's family 
praj-ers, entirely in the Tukudh lanjiuage, with 
the exception of :i IV'W phrases in English) pp. 
•l-r)!). Hi'. 

Oupies seen: Eanies. Pillinn', Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Knowleiljn\ Wellesley. 

— — David vi psalinnut. | 'I'akudh tsha 
zit tlileteteitazya | veu. archdeacon 
M'Donald, D. 1). | kirklie. | [Seal of 
the S. P. C. K.] I 

Winnipeg, Man. : | IMiuIed hy Robt. 
D. Richardson | for the | Society for 
Promoting Christian Knowledg<', | 
Loudon. I 188(5. 

Title verso Ijlauk 1 1. text (with the exception 
of headings in English and J^atin, entirely in 
the Takudh language) pp. l-li'if), l(i^'. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, .Society for Pro- 
moting Christian Ivnowledge, Wellesley. 



McDonald (R.) — Couliumd. 

The I new testanieul | of | our lord 

and sa\ioui' | .Jesus ( 'jirisi . I iausi;ilcd 
into Takudh l)y | \eii. archdeacon 
McDonald, D.D. | 

Loud(ui : I |uiuled for tlic iSritish 
and foreign bilile society. | ISSt). 

Title verso blank 1 1. text (with chapter di'S- 
igiialioiis in English) pp. J-j"l>, Ki'^. 

.Maltliew, pp. 5-70. — Mark. pp. 77-122. — Luke, 
pp. 1L':!-'J00.— John, pp. 2U0-'J.")7.— Acts. pp. 250- 
iCi!!. -Epistles, pp. :!3.'!-5:i7.— Itevelatiori. i>p. ."iSft- 
57(>. 

dopiesseen: Eanies, IMllinir. \Vellesley. 

On p.ago 251 of his work entitled "Tlic In- 
dians," Toronto, 1889, llov. John McLean coin- 
iiientson asyllabary by Arehdeaeon AleDonahl 
as follows : 

"Several years ago the yenerable .Vrcluh^a- 
con AIcDoiiald, whose mission is on the Yukon 
and who for a term of years ilwelt one milo 
within the Arctic Circle, invented a very elab- 
orate syllabary, which heajiplicd tot he Tukudh 
language, one of the family of the Hyperborean 
languages. The syllabary consisted of 400 syl- 
lables, which, when thoroughly memorized, 
enabled the Tukndh Indians to reatl their own 
language with perfect ease. Having tran.slated 
the New Testament and Prayer Book, he 
utilized his syllabic system, and so accurate 
was its eonstr\iction thai in four months the 
natives could read the Woril of (jod. Gre.it 
beuetit.stlowed to the people from this invention, 
as they speedily learned the truths of morality 
and religion for themselves.' 

Having never seen any ])ublication in the 
Tukndh language printed in what is usually 
termed a syllabary, my interest was aroused, 
and under date of :March 9, 18S9, I wj'ote ilr. 
McLean for such further particulars ius lie 
might l)e able to furnish. Under date of Alarch 
28 he replied as follows : 

"My statement is based upon the following: 
The archdeacon was in Winnipeg three or four 
years ago and was intervieweil by a reporter 
of the Manitoba Free Press. The report ofth.it 
iuter\iew was a long one, which I have jire- 
served in my scrapbook. In this report is the 
following : 'A syllabary has been made of the 
syllables made use of in the language. While 
the. .syllabh'S of the Cree language number only 
about 32, tlie, syllabary requii'ed for the Tukudh 
contains about 500 syllables ; and this, notwith- 
standing the appixreut difficulty, some of the 
Indians have learned in a fortnight. These 
sj'llables are written out in Koiuan letters. 
Some of the more intelligent have learned to 
read the gospels fairly within three months.' 
I have an interview held with the arcluh'acoii'a 
brother, and several references to the aichdea- 
con in letters which he wrote himself and were 
printed in the newspapers; also letters and 
notes of travel by Hudson Bay Company's 
officers. This, however, is the only reference 



60 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



McDonald (K.) — Contiiini^d. 

U) the .syllabary; but, as it was so explicit, I 
felt that surely there could be uo doubt con 
cerning it. Should you find it to be incorrect 1 
would feel obliged if you would kindly let me 
know, a.s I am verydesirou.s of being accurate " 

Under date of Augu.st 6, 1890, Mr. McLean 
again wrote me, as follows: 

' ' When first I read the account of Archdeacon 
McDonald's syllabary I was under the impres- 
sion that it was composed of cliaracters similar 
to the Evans characters, in the Tukudh lan- 
guage. I am not now of that opinion. I think 
he must arrange the Ilomau characters iu the 
form of a syllabary and by this means teach 
the Indians to read rapidly. " 

In his letter was inclosed a clipping from the 
Regiiia Leader of July 8, 1890, published at 
Regiua, Assiniboia, N. "W. T., reading as fol- 
lows: 

" Over one year ago a famous American eth- 
nologist wrote to the Rev. Dr. McLean, Moose 
Jaw, calling in question some statements made 
by him in his book on The Indians of Canada, 
relating to the existence of a syllabary of the 
Takudh language. Dr. McLean replied that he 
hatl excellent authority for his statement, but 
that he would write at once to Dr. R. McDonahl, 
of Peel River, inventor of the syllabary, and 
learn particulars. As Dr. McDonald's mission 
house for a time was one mile within the Arctic 
Circle it was expected that it would take two 
years to receive a reply to the letter. An an- 
swer has just been received, within thirteen 
months, and a copy of the syllabary, the con- 
tents of the letter corroborating Dr. McLean's 
statements in his book 'The Indians of Can- 
ada,' and in his latest work, just published, 
' James Evans, Inventor of the Syllabic Sys- 
tem of the Cree Language.' The following is 
a copy of the letter : 

" 'St. Matthew's, 
•"Peel River, Ja/ruac;/ 2i', '90. 
^* 'The Rev. John McLean: 

" ' Dear Sir : I send you a copy of the sylla- 
bary referred to. You will observe that very 
few of the rows after the first page are com- 
plete, simply through want of sjiace. This will 
show that there is no exaggeration. As to the 
time taken in learning to read in the Takudh 
tongue by means of the syllabary, instead of 
exaggerating, the fact i.s it is understated rather 
than otherwise iu some cases; for instance, 
there is one that learnt the syllabary in three 
days and to read the gospels in about a month. 
I may say that I do not claim great credit for 
the invention of the syllabary. It was sug- 
gested by Evans's syllabic characters. 
" 'With high consideration, 

" 'Yours respectfully, 

"R. McDonald, D. D., 

" 'Archdeacon. ' 

Mr. McLean was correct as to the make-up of 
the syllabary. In the " Tukudh Hymns, "titled 
above, the " syllabarium' is given in the pre- 
limiaary pages and consists simply of combi- 



McDonald (R.) — Continued. 

nations of two, three, four, and five Roman 
characters, such as ba, be, bi, zoo, zoo, zei, 
ziii, zit, Dhoo, Dhou, Dhei, Kdlia, Tdhoo, 
Kthou, etc. 

i'or a lengthy description and afac-simile of 
the Evans syllabary referred to, see the liib- 
liography of the Algonquian Languages, pp. 
180 et geq. 

McElroy (Patrick D.) Comparative 
vocabulary of the English and Jica- 
rilla Ajjache languages. Compiled at 
Cimarron, Colfax County, New Mexico. 
By Patrick D. McElroy. 1875. 

Manuscript, 14 unnumbered loaves, 4"^, in the 
library of the Bureau of Ethnology, Washing- 
ton, D.C. 

The first 5 11. of this manuscrijit consist of a 
letter from the author, iu which lie includes a 
"Vocabulary of numerals as far as seven 
thousand.' The succeeding 9 11. comprise the 
"Comparative vocabulary" issued by the 
Smithsonian In.stitution to collectors, known as 
"Blank no. 170,' containing 211 words (in Eng- 
lish, Spanish, French, and Latin), of which 
equivalents wei-e desired, nearly all of which 
Mr. McElroy has given. 

Under the title on the first page is the fol- 
lowing certificate : 

' ' The within was prepared by P. D. McElroy, 
interpreter at the Cimarron Indian Ageucj', 
New Mexico, and has been tested and found to 

be correct. 

"Alexr. G. Irvine, 

" U. S. Indian Agent. 
"W. F. M. Arny, 
•'{7. S. Indian Agent, Ntiv Mexico." 

Mcintosh (Robert). See Gatschet (A. 
S.) : 

Mackenzie (.S'i'r Alexander). Voyages | 
from I Montreal, | on the river St. 
Laurence, | through the | continent of 
North America, | to the | Frozen and 
Pacific oceans; | In the Years 1789 and 
1793. I With a preliminary account | of 
the ri,se, progress, and i>resent state of 
I the fur trade | of that country. | Illus- 
trated with maps. | By Alexander 
Mackenzie, esq. | 

London: | printed for T. Cadell, jun. 
and W. Davies, Strand; Cobbett and 
Morgan, | Pall-mall ; and W. Creech, at 
Edinburgh. | By R. Noble, Old-Bailey. 
I M. DCCC. I [1801]. 
Half-title verso blank 1 1. portrait 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. iii-viii, general history of the fur 
trade etc. pp. i-cxxxii, text pp. 1-412, errata 1 1. 
',i maps, 4°. 

Some account of the Cbepewyan Indians (pp. 



ATHAPASCAN LANr,UAGER. 



Gl 



Mackenzie (A.) — ('(inlhiiKMl. 

cxvi-cxxxii) incliules " Kxaiiijtlo.s of tho (Ilit'ii- 
owyaii ton^iio," a vocalmlary of 140 words ami 
jilirast^s, pp. ('xxix-cxxxii. — Voi'abiilary ('Jl 
words) of Mie Najfailer or Chin Indian.s, and of 
the Atiiali or Carrier Indians, jip. 257-i;.'i.S., Tho 
Atnali ;:ivcn lu-rc is Salishan, not Athajiascan. 
Ciipirt xi'ei) : Asfor, Baniroft. JJritisli Mu- 
seuni, Conj;ress, Diiiihar, Eaiiics, (roolof^ical 
Survey, TriiinhiiU, Wafkinson. 

Stevens's Nnygets, no. 177.3, priced a copy lO.f. 
6'i. At tho PM.sclier sale, no. lOOG, it broujiht .'is-. ; 
another copy, no. 2.'j:!2, 2s. 6rf.; at tho Field sale, 
no. I447, $i.:i8; at the S(iuicr .sale, no. 7u9, $\.r>2: 
at tho Murpliv sale, no. 1548, !l!2.2.>. Priced liy 
Quaritcli, no. 12206. 7.v. 6rf. ; no. 28!).'):{, a lialf- 
rn.ssia copy, II. ; Clarke & co. 188G, no. 4040, 
$.').50; Stevens, 1887, W.7.S. 6rf. 

Voyao^t's I from | Montreal, | on tlic 

rixcr St. Ijaurcnce, | throujuli the | 
continent of North America, | to the | 
Frozen and Pacific oceans : | in the year.s 
1789 and 1793. ( With a preliminary 
account of | the rise, progress, an<l pres- 
ent state of I the fur trade | of | that 
conntry. | Illustrated with a map. | P)y 
Alexander Mackenzie, Esq. | First 
American edition. | 

New- York: | printed and sold by (J. 
F. Hopkins, at Washington's head, No. 
118, Pearl-street. | 1802. 

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication vorso blank 
1 1. preface to the London edition pp. v-viii, 
text pp. 1-2!MJ, map, 8^. 

Linguistics as in the edition of 1801 tith-d 
ni xt above, pp. 91-94, 271. 

Copies seen : Aator, Boston AtheniBuni. 

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 

river St. Laurence, | through the | 
continent of North America, | to tho | 
Frozen and Pacific oceans; |in the years 
1789 and 1793. | With a prelinn"nary 
account | ofthe rise, progress, and pres- 
ent state I of I the fur trade | of that 
country. | Illustrated with | a general 
map ofthe country. | By sir Alexander 
^lackenzie. | 

Philadelphia: | published by John 
Morgan. | R. Carr, printer. | 1802. 

2 vols, in one: half-title verso blank 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. pref. 
ace pp. i-viii, text pp. i-cxxvi. 1-U.3: ll.j-'J92, 
map, 9P. 

Linguistics as in the London iMlitiim of ISdi 
titled above, pp. cxili-cxxvi. 210. 

Gopie.1 seen : Ge(dogical Survey 

Some copies have on tho title-page tlie 
words : " Illustrated with a general map of the 
country and a jiortrait of the author." ' C) 

At the Field sale, a copy, no. 1448, brought 
$2.62. 



Mackenzie (.V.) — ^('ontiMued. 

Voyages I d'Ah^x.'^'^'" Mackenzie; | 

dans rinterieur | de | PAmerique Sep- 
tentrionalc, | Fails en 1789, 1792 et 
17!)3; I Lel."^, de Montreal an fort Chi- 
l>iouyan et fi ];i mer (}laciale; | Le 2.'"", 
du fort Chipiouyan jusqu'aux bords dc 
roei'.iii I pacili((U(\ I Prc'icddf^s d'un 'i'a- 
l)lean historif[ue et politi<£Uc sur | le 
commerce des p(;lletcries, dans le Ca- 
nada. I Traduits <le PAiiglais, | Par .1. 
Castdra, | Avec des Notes et un Itiu<»- 
raire, tires en partie des | pa])iers du 
vice-arniral Bougainville. | Tome Pre- 
mier [-III). I 

Paris, I Dentil. Iiii])rirnciir-Lil>iaire, 
Palais du Trilninal, | galeries de bois, 
n."210. I An X.— 1802. 

3 vols, maps, 8^. 

Linguistics as in the first edition titled al)0ve, 
vol. 1, pp. 304-310, vol. 3, p. 20. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 25.33, .a copy brought 
1«. Priced by Gaguon, Quebec, 1888, .$3. 

For title of an extract from this edition see 
under date of 1807 below. 

Alexander Mackenzii''s Esq. | Keisen 

I von I Montreal durcli Nordwestanieri- 
ka I uach dem | Eismeer und der Siid- 
See I ill deu Jahren 1789 uud 1793. | 
Nebst I eiuer Geschiclite des Pelzlian- 
dels in Canada. | Aus dem Englischeu. 
I Mit einerallgemeinen Karte und dem 
Kild- I nisse des Verfassers. | 

Berlin nnd Hamburg. | 1802. 

Pp. Wx, 11-408, map, 8'. 

Linguistics as under titles above, pp. 133-135, 
3C5. 

Copies seen : British Museum. 

• Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 

river St. Laurence, | through the ( 
continent of North America, | to the | 
Frozen and Pacific oceans ; | In the 
Years 1789 and 1793. | With a prelim- 
inary account 1 of tho rise, progress, 
and present state of | the fur trade | of 
that countr,v. | AVith original notes by 
Bougainville, and Volney, | Membersof 
the French senate. | Illustrated with 
maps. 1 By Alexander Mackenzie, esq. 
I Vol. I [-II]. I 

London: | printed for T. Cadell, jim. 
anil W. Davies, Strand; | Cobbett and 
Morgan, Pall-mall; ami W. Creech, | at 
Edinl)urgli. | By R.Noble, Old-bailey. 
M. DCCC.II [1802]. 

2 vols, in one: lialf-title verso blank 1 1. title 



62 



BIBLIOliKATHY OF THE 



Mackenzie (A.) — ('oiitiiimMl. 

verso blank 1 1. (1cilic:iti(i!i verso blank 1 1. jiref- 
ace i)p. vii-xiv, text m>. 1-284. contents pi). 285- 
290; half-title verso blank 1 1. titlo (varying 
Sdiiiewiiat in imnctiiation from that of vol. 1) 
verso blank 1 1. text pj). 5-310 (wroiii^ly iium' 
liered 210), notes pp. :51 1-312, appendix pp. 313- 
325. contents lip. 32G-332, maiJS, 8°. 

I/ingiiistic contents as in tlie tirst edition 
tilled above, vol. 1, pp. 158-102, vol.2, pp. 148- 

un. 

Copies Sfcn : C'()n;;ress, (Icological Survey. 
Clarke & co. 188(), priceil a cojiy, no. 4050, $3.50. 

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 

river St. Laurence, | through the | 
continent of North-America, | to the | 
Frozen and Pacific oceans : in the years 
1789 and 17'J3. | With a Preliminary 
Account of I the rise, • i)rogre.ss, and 
i)reseut stale of tlie | fur trade | of that 
country. | Illustrated with a map. | By 
Alexander Mackenzie, esq. | Tliird 
American edition. | 

New- York: | published by Evert 
Uuyckinek, Itooksclhu'. Lewis Nichols, 
printer. | 1803. 

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 
1 1. ])roface pp. v-viii, text pp. 9-137, 16^. 

Linguistic continits as in previous editions 
titled above, pp. 110, 314. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Tableau | historiquo et ])olitique | 

du coumierce des pelleteries | dans le 
('auada, depuis l(i08 jusqu'a nos jours. 
I Contenant beaiu-oup de details sur 
l(^s nations sau- | vages qui I'habitent, 
et sur les viistes contrces qui y | sont 
contigties ; | Avec un Vocabulaire de la 
languo de plusieurs peuples de ces | 
vastes contrees. | Par Alexandre Mac- 
kenzie. I Traduit de I'Anglais, | par J. 
Cast6ra. | Orn6 du portrait de I'auteur. | 
Paris, I Dentu,Imprim.-Lib.'''',ruedu 
Pout-de-Lody, n." 3. | M. D. CCC. VII 
[1807]. 

Half-title 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1- 
310, table des matieres 1 uununilx^red page, S°. 
An extract from vol. 1 of the Paris edition of 
1802, titled above. 

Linguistic contents as in previous editions, 
pp. 304-310. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Leelerc, 1867, sold a copy, no. 920, for 4 fr. ; 
priced by him, 1878, no. 750, 20 fr. 

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 

river St. Laurence, | througii tlie | 
continent of North America, | to the | 
Frozen and Pacific oceans; | in tlie 
years 1780 and 1708. | Willi a preliiai- 



Mackenzie (A.) — f'ouliimed. 

nary account | of tin; rise, progress, and 
present state | of | tlie fur trade | of 
that country. | Illustrated with maps 
and a portrait of the; author. | By sir 
Alexander Mackenzie. | Vol. I[-II]. | 

New-York : | published by W. 15. Gil- 
ley. I 1811. 

2 vols. : 3 p. 11. pp. i-viii. i cxxvi, 1-113; 1 1. 
pp. 11.5-392.8''. 

Linguistic contents as under previous titles, 
vol. 1, pp. cxxiii-cxxvi, 247. 

Copies seen : Congress. 

Sir Alexander Mackenzie, explor<>r, born in 
Inverness, Scotland, about 1755; died in Dal- 
liousie, Scotland, March 12, 1820. In his youth 
he emigrated to Canada. In June, 1789, he set 
out on his esi)edition. At the western end of 
(ircat Slave Lake he entered .a river, to which 
he gave his name, and explored it until .July 12, 
when he reached the Arctic Ocean. He then 
returned toFort Chippewyan, where he arrived 
on September 27. In October, 1792. he under- 
took a more hazardous expedition to the west- 
ern coast of Xorth America, and succeeded in 
reaching Cape Menzies, on the P.acilic Ocean. He 
n^turncd to England in 1801 and was knighted 
the following yca.r. —Applcton's Cyclop, of Am. 
Bio<j. 
M'Lean (John). Notes | of a | twenty- 
five years' service | in the | Hudson's 
bay territory. | By John M'Lean. | In 
two V(dumes. | Vol. I[-II]. | 

London : Richard Boiitley, new Bur- 
liiigtou street, | Publisher in Ordinary 
to Her Majesty. | 1849. 

2 \iils. : half-title verso printer 1 1. title verso 
blank 1 1. preface (dated l.st March, 1849) pp. v- 
viii, contents pp. ix-xii. text pp. 13-308; title 
verso printer 1 1. contents ]>]). iii-vii, text pp. 9- 
328, 12^. 

Vocabulaiy of tlie priuci]ial Indian dialects 
in use among the tribes in tlie Hudson's J5ay 
Territory, Sauteu, or Ogibois, Cree, Beaver 
Indian, and Chippewayan, in jiarallel columns, 
about 130 words each, vol. 2, pp. 323-328. 

Copies seen : Astor, Boston Athemcum, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Eames, National Mu- 
seum. 

At the Field sale, no. 1450, a half-morocco copy, 
uncut, brought $3.75; at the Murphy sale, no. 
1558, a defective copy, .$1.50. 

McLean (/I'cr. John). American Indian 
literature. 

In Canadian Methodist Mag. vol.21, ji]). 450- 
463, Toronto, 1885, 8°. (Pilling.) 

A general account of the subject, including 
references to a number of writers and works on 
the Athapascan. 

Indian languages and literature in 

Manitoba, North-west Tt^'ritories and 
British Columbia. 



ATiiAPAscAx lan(;l'ac;i:s. 



do 



McLean (.1. ) — Coiil iiincil. 

In(':iii:iili.iM iiisl il lit.', I'ldc. Iliir.I sl■^i(•^,. vol. 

:., ]•!>. i;i."> 'jis. 'rniciiiio. isss, n •. 

( 'diilMiiis ( I ) lisl ol' l;iiiL;iiiij;c.s in MniiiliiliM, 
KccwmI ill. ail I Xnilliwcst 'J'orfiloi-ics; ('J) Ian- 
;iiiai;i'.s in llrili.sii ('(iliinil>ia ; and (-i) tln^ Ian- 
jina.u<'h III' \\ liirli vuia'iiilaiiis anil ;:raMiinais 
liavi' lici'ii ]inlili.sln'd, tlic autliiii s anil jilarr of 
imliiicalicin. llir latter i'OHtainin'4 a niniibiT iil' 
nl'iTini IS |m I 111' .Vtliajiascan. 

— ■■ — The 1 iidin IIS I ( lieir 111,1 liners ;iii(l eiis- 
tniiis. I !;> I Joliii MelA-.aii, M. A.,1Mi. 1). 
|(L'nl.iii K'lisMer.) | With Eij,ditecii 
l'ull-ii:i,i;-e I iliistratidns. | 

Tofoiito: I Williaiu Bri,i;-i;s, 78 A- 80 
Kill,!;- streiit east. | C. W. C'oatcM, Mon- 
treal. S.F.Hiiestis, Halifax. | 1880. 

Front isi)iece 1 1. title \ersii eepx riixlil nutiee 
1 1, dedication verso Man k I 1. pn lace |ip. vii- 
\ iii, rnntentspp. ix-x, list, of illiislrat iun.s verso 
lilank 1 1. text pp. 13-351, r». 

Cliaiiter vii. Indian laniriiages and literature, 
jip. 235-258. Thi.s consists first of a notice of the 
(levelopnienf of Indian langnaj^esfroiii pictiire- 
■writing tluoiii;li ideograiiliie symbols to jilio- 
netii; sif;ns classilied in alphaliets. Tlieii the 
field of literature in ireiieral devoted to the 
Iiidi.'ins is scanned, ennineratini; works of 
sjieeial interest to the student nl' philnlii.u\'. 
conunencing on p. 241. This iniliidcs titles of 
works in a number of American languages, 
among thein the Tukudli. Indian syllabics 
(Tukndh, Chei-okee, Cree), pp. 251-253. 

Copies seen : Eanies, Pilling, Powell. 

IJev. John 'McLean was born in Kilmarnoeh. 
Ayrshire, Scotland, Oct. 30, 1852; came to Can- 
ada in 1873, and was graduated B. A, from \'ic- 
toria TTiiiversily, Col)ourg, Ontario. Some years 
afterward his alma mater conferred on him the 
degre(!of M. A. In 1874 he entered the ministry 
of the :^rcthodisf church. In 1880, at Hamilton. 
Oiitariii. ho was ordained for special work 
aniniig the Ulackfoot Indians, leaving iiv June 
of the same year for Fort MacLeod, Northwest 
Territory, accompanied by his wife. At this 
point were gathered about 700 Blood Indians, 
which number was subseijuently increased by 
the arrival of Bloods and Blackfeet from Mon- 
tana to 3,500. Mr, McLean settled upon the 
reserve set apart for these Indians and dili- 
gently set to work to master their language, 
history, etc., and on the.sc subjects he has jmb- 
lished a number of articles in the magazines 
and society publications. At the request of the 
anthropological committee of the British Asso- 
ciation for the Advancement of Science, Dr. 
McLean has for several years prepared notes on 
the language, customs, and traditions of the 
Hlackfoot ConfederHcy, and the results of this 
labor are partly given in one of the reports of 
Ibe rommittcc .Vlthough biirdciied with the 
hiborsof a missioiuiry. he funnil lime tojirepare 
a post graduate course in hislmy ami lii.-.k Ibe 
degneof Pli O. at the Weslrv.ui rnivcrsitv. 



McLean (J.) —('out in mi I. 

Bloomingtiin, 111., in 1888. ]i(!sides the articles 
which have apjieared under his own name. Dr. 
McI/ian has writlen extensively for the press 
under Ibe ikhii dc. jihiiiic of Uobin Uustler. He, 
isnow(l''ebruary, 18!)2) stationed at Moo.se.Taw, 
Northwest 'I'crritory. having left the Indian 
work ill July, 1880. He has for several years 
biiii in-i)iector of schools, and is now a meni()er 
111 Ihr board of educalion and nf the board of 
ixaininirs foi- llic N'nilbwesI Tcirilory. 

M'Muiray (.\le.\aiiiler 11.) See Murray 

(A. II.) 
M'Pherson (.Miirdocli ). N'oialmlaiy of 
the Chejx'wyaii laiifj^tia^c. 

In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expedi- 
tioii, vol. 2, ](]). :!.'<2-385, London, 185T, 8''. 

Contains alnnil loo w oi'ds and I he numerals 
1-300. 

Reprinted in tlie later eilit imi.-i of tlnsanie 
work ; see Richardson (J ) 

M'Pherson ( .l/;-.v. .Miinloch). Sec Rich- 
ardson (.} .) 

Maisonneuve. This word followin^ a title or in 
eluded within parentheses after a note indicates 
that a coi)y of the work referred to has been 
seen by the com|)iler in the bookstore of Mai- 
sonneuve et Cie., I'aris, Fianee. 

Manual of devotion in the Heaver Indian 
dialect. See Bompas { W. C. ) 

Massachusetts Historical Society : These words 
following a title or within parentheses after a 
note indicate that a eojiy of the work referred 
to has been seen liy llie compiler in the library 
of that society, Bosti.n, Mass. 

Matthews ( />»•. Washinf;:ton). A ])art of 
the Navajo's mythology. By W. Mat- 
thews. 

In American Antiiiuarian, \ ol. .".. ]ip. 207-224, 
Chicago, 1883, 8o. (Bureau of Kthmdogy.) 

Contains many Navajo terms and names of 
niytliic per,sonages passitn. 

Issued^separately as follows: 

A Part of till) Navajos' Mythology. | 

Hy W. Matthews. | From the American 
Autiqnarian for Ajiril, 1883. 
[Chicago: 1883.] 

Half-title on cover as above, no inside title; 
text pp. 1-18, 8o_ 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen : Pilling. 

[ ] A niglit witli the Navajos. By 

Zay Elini. 

In Forest and Stream, vol. 2:!. ipji. 2,S2-2,''3. 
New York, Nov. G, 1881 lolm. (]"'Ure;ui of Eth 
iiology.) 

Contains a number of Navajo words with 
meanings jxn'siin. 



64 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Matthews (W.) — Continued. 

Mythic dry-paiu tings of the Nav- 

ajos. By Dr. W. Matthews. 

In Americiin Naturalist, vol. 19, pp. 931-939, 
riiiladclphia, 1885, S'^. (Consress.) 

Contains a number of Navaijo terms and 
proper names pasgbn. 

Tilt- origin of the Utes. A Navajo 

myth. 

In American .^ntifinarian, vol.7, ])p. 271-274, 
Chicago, 1885, 8'=. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 
A number of Navajo words and phrases. 

Navajo names for phuits. By Dr. W. 

Matthews, U. S. A. 

In American Naturalist, vol. 20, pji. 767-777, 
Philadelphia, 1886, 8^. (Pilling.) 

Miiny Navajjo words with English meanings 
and explanations. 

.Some deities nnd demons of the 

Navajos. By Dr. W. Matthews, U. S. 
Army. 

In Amerii'an Naturalist, vol. 20. jip. 841-830. 
Philadelphia, 1886, 8'^. 

A number of Nava,io words and names of 
mythic personages, jiansim. 
The mountain ehant: a Navajo cere- 
mony. By Dr. Washington Matthews, 
U. S. A. 

In Bureau of Ethmdogy, Fiftli Ann. Rept. 
pp. 379-467, Washington, 1887, royal 8°. (Pil- 
Mng.) 

Original texts and translations of songs, pp. 
455-467, contain twenty-two songs and prayers 
with literal and free translations into Eng- 
lish.— Numerous Navajo terms, including local 
and mythic names, pasxim. 

Issued separately, with title-page, as follows : 

The I mountain chant | a Navajo 

ceremony | by | Dr. Washington Mat- 
thews, U. S. A. I Extract from the fifth 
annual report of the Bureau of etlinol- 
'»J?y I [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing 
office I 1888 

Cover title as above, half-title verSo blank 1 
1. no in.side title, contents pp. 381-382, illustra- 
tions p. 383, text pp. 385-467, royal 8^. One 
hundred copies issued. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen .- Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

The prayer of a Navajo shaman. By 

Dr. Washington Matthews, U. S. A., 
Army medical museum. 

In Anu-rican Anthropologist, vol. 1, j)p. 149- 
170. Washington, 1888, 8^. (Pilling.) 

The prayer in English (in 55 paragraphs), 
with interlinear translation iu Nav;i.jo, pp. 1.">1- 
103.— Glossary (127 words), alphabetic by Nav 
,ajo words, pp. 165-170. 

Issued separately, with title-page, as f(dlows : 



Matthews (W. ) — Continued. 

The prayer | of | a Navajo shaman. 

I By I Dr. Washington Matthews, | U. 
S. army. | From the American Anthro- 
pologist, Vol. I, No. 2, April, 1888. 

AVa8hingt(m, D. C: | .Tiuld A-. D<t- 
weiler, printers. | 1888. 

Cover title as above, title as abovc^ verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 5-26, plate, 8^. 

Linguistics as under title next above, i)p. 7- 
19,21-26. 

Copiet seen : Pilling. 

Navajo gambling songs. By Dr. 

Washington Matthews, U. S. army. 

In American Anthropologist, vol.2, pp. 1-19, 
Washington, 1889, 8^5. (Pilling.) 

Contains twenty one short songs in Navajo, 
each followed by translation and notes. 

Issued .separately, also, without change, 
(Pilling.) 

Noqoilpi, tlie gambler: a Navajo 

myth. 

In Journal of American Folk -Lore, vol. 2. pp. 
89-94, Bostim and New York, 1889, 8^. (Pilling.) 

A number of Navajo terms, passim. 

Issued separately, also, without change. 
(Pilling.) 

The gentile system of the Navajo 

Indians. 

In Journal of American Folk-Lore, vol. 3, j)p. 
89-110, Boston and New York, 1890, 8<'. (Pilling.) 

List of the Navajo gentes (51), with meanings 
in English, pp. 103-104. — I'hratries of the Nav- 
ajos (from Tall Chanter, and a second list from 
Capt. Bourke), p. 109.— Many Navajo terms 
passim. 

Issued .separiitely, with title-jiage, as follows : 

The gentile system | of | the Navajo 

Indians | by | Washington Matthews, 
M. D., LL. D. I major and surgeon, 
United States army | Delivered as a 
Lecture before the Anthropological | 
Society, Washington, D. C 

[Boston and New York: 1890.] 
Half-title on cover as above, no inside title; 
text pp. 89-110, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen : Pilling. 

[Texts, grammar, iind dictionary of 

the Navajo language.] (*) 

Manuscript. Dr. Matthews, who is now 
(1892) stationed at Ft. Wingate, N. M., is col- 
lecting material for a monograph on the Navajo 
Indians. Concerning the linguistic portion he 
wrote me under date of Sejitember 22, 1891, as 
follows: 

"My work on the Nav.ajo language is grow- 
ing, but it is in such a chaotic state as yet that 
I can not give you a very satisfactory account 
of it. I have, I think, graiiimatic material to 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



65 



MatthewB (W.) — ('oiitiimcd. 

lill 201) or 2.'i() printed ([iiart" i)iiL,'cs, and f liavo 
alxml, 10,000 wonl.s in my (lirtionary. My col- 
lection of texts and triiislations -soni;«, 
prayciM, niytlm, ritnals.ctc.—wonlil f'orinafiood- 
si/.i'd volnnii) of tlicnisclvcs. It will take f iiiic 
nnd Icirturc to luit tlicin in sliaiir, liowcvcv." 

Dr. '\Vasliini;ton ^fattlicws was liorn in Kil- 
liiicy, a siil)nrl> of Dublin, Ireland, July 17, 
lK4;i. His luotlier dyin;;, liis father cniiKrated 
to America wliilo Im was yet in liis infancy, 
and, after extensivo travel in America, settled 
first in Wisecm.sin, tlu'u a t<-rritorv, atid later 
in Iowa. He was graduated in medicine. at the 
medical department of the State Univer.sitJS' of 
Iowa in tliesprin;,; of 1864, and in 1S88 received 
the ixmocary decree of LL.D. from the same 
nniver.sity in recognition of his philologii; 
studies. In l««t li<^ entered the United States 
service as an actinj; a.ssistant surjjeon, and 
served as such until the close of the war. In 
tlio summer r)f 18C,5 ho again entered thciiiili 
tary service and has continued theiein until 
the present time, having been commissioned 
major and surgeon July 10, 1889 His service 
has carried him over all the States and Terri- 
tories west of the ^tississipiii and brought him 
into contact with a ma,jority of the tribes of 
that extensive region. His tirst si'rioiis study 
of the Indians began when he ascended the 
Uj>p(U' ^Missouri in 18C5. In tin; autumn of that 
year he went to Fort IJerthold, Dakota, where 
he came in contact with Arickareos, Hidatsas, 
and ^landaus. Ho resided, with some inter- 
ruptions, in the neighborhood of these three 
tribes for about six years, and gave special 
attention to their languages and etlinogra])hy. 
Ill the winter of 1870-'71 his manus('rii)ts and 
notes on these tribes h.ad assumed extensive 
proportions; but on tlu^ 'JXth of January, 1871, 
his quarters at Fort T.uford were destroyed by 
Are, and all his notes and manuscripts, with a 
valuable collection of books of early travtd and 
exploration on the upper Missouri, were con- 
sumed. In 1872 he went east, and in 1873 pub- 
lished the Onimmar and Dictionary of the 
Language of the Ilidatsa. From 'New York he 
went to ("alifornia, jirepared a second edition 
of his work, under the title of Kthnography 
and riiilology of the Ilidatsa Indians, which 
was issued from the Government Printing 
Office in 1877, and si>ent some five years in the 
more ninioto jtarts of California and on cam- 
paigns against hostile Indians, in the (bourse of 
which he traveled extensively through Neviwla, 
Oregon, Idaho, and Washington, and met many 
wild tribes whose languages and customs he 
noted. In 1880 ho went to New Mexico, wlien^ 
he began to study the Xava.jo Indians. In 1881 
ho went to "Washington, I). C, and remained 
there on duty in the Army Medical Museum 
until May, 1890. From Washington he made 
two excursions into the Southwest in the pur- 
suit of arcba'ologie and ethnographic investi- 
gations—one in the interest of tho Bureau of 
Ethnology, the other in the interest of the 

ATH 5 



Matthevrs (W.) — (.'oiitiniKMl. 

Ilemcfiiway Southwestern Archa'logi<'al P'xpe- 
dition. AVhile in the Army Medical Museum 
his time was largely devoted to somatological 
studies, particular attention being given to the 
large collection of crania and other human 
bones in the nuiseuni, and he has written »n 
extitnsive illustrated monograjdi on 'The 
Human IJonesof the Hemcnway Collection," 
which is y(!t uniiiiblishe<L In 1890 he returned 
to New Mexico, where he still remains. 

Mescalero Apache. Sei- Apache. 

Midnooski. .See Ahtinne. 

Milhau (/>»/■. John J.) VocHbiilary <.f )li.' 
rmpqtiti Valley iieople, Oref^oii. 

Manuscript, 'i unnumbered leaves, folio, 
written on both sides; in tin; library of the 
Hureau of Kthnology. Collected during No- 
vemb(!r, 18.56. Keeorded on one of the Smith- 
sonian blanks of 170 words, eijuivalents of the 
whole number being given. 

In the sanu! library are two cojdes of this 
vocabulary, both by Dr. (ieo. Gibbs, in one of 
which (where he designates the language as 
Hewut) he follows Dr. Milhau'a spelling, in I lie 
other he uses an alphabetic notation of his own. 
A third copy is in tlu; same library, m.ide by 
Dr. Roehrig for comparison with the AVillopab 
vocabulary of Dr. Gibbs. 
Mimbreno Apache. See Apache. 
Montagnais : 

I'.ible history See lA!gott"(L.) 
Catechism Legoff ( I... ) 

Catechism Pcrrault (C. O.) 

Catechism Vdgreville (V. T.) 

Dictionary Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Dictionary V6gr6villc (Y. T.) 

Grammar Legoff ( L . ) 

Grammar Yegreville (Y. T.) 

Grammatic treatise Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 
Hymns Legoff ( L . ) 

Hymns Pcrrault (C. O.) 

Prayer book Legoff (L.) 

Prayer book Pcrrault (C. O.) 

Sermons Legoff (L.) 

Songs Y6gr6ville(Y. T.) 

Syllabary Pcrrault (CO.) 

Ten commandments Legotf (L.) 
Text Legoff (L.) 

Tribal names I'etitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Vocabulary Adam (L.) 

Words Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 

See also Athapascan ; Chippewyan ; Tinn6. 
Morgan (Lewis Henry). .Smithsonian 
Contributions to Knowledge. | 218 | 
Systems | of | consanguinity and aflfin- 
ity I of the | human family. | By | 
Lewis H. Morgan. | 

Washington city: | i>ublished by the 
Smithsonian institution. | 1871. 

Cijlf>2>hon : I'ublished by tho Smithsonian in- 
stitution, I Washington cit}-, | June, 1870. 



66 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Morgan (L. H.) — Continued. 

Title on cover as above, inside title ditleriiig 
from above in imprint verso blank 1 1. adver- 
tisement p. iii verso blank, preface pp. v-ix 
verso blank, contents pp. xi-xii, text pj). 1-383, 
index pp. 585-.''>90, 14 plates, 4°. 

Also forms vol. 17 of Smithsonian Contribu- 
tions to Knowledge. Sucli issues have no cover 
title, but the general title of the series and 6 
other prel. 11. preceding the inside title. 

Chapter v. System of relationship of the 
Ganowanian family continued. Athapasco- 
Apache and other nations (pp. 230-253) includes 
the following : A short comparative voeabtilary 
(23 words) of the Slave Lake ludiaiis (from 
Kennicott), Beaver Indians (from Kennicott), 
Chepewyan, Dog Rib, and Kutchin (the three 
latter from Richardson), p. 232. 

System of consanguinity and aflinity of the 
Ganowanian family (pp. 291-382) includes the 
following, collected by Mr. Morgan : Hare In- 
dians (Tii-na'tin-ue), lines 65; Red Knives 
(Tal-sote'-e-nii), lines GO. 

Also the following: 

Herdesty (W. L.), Relatiimships of the Kut- 
chin or Loucheux, lines 67. 

Kennicott (R.), Relation8hii)s of the Slave 
Lake Indians, lines 64. 

McDonald (R.). Relationshii)s of the Tu-kfi- 
the, lines 68. 

- Copies seen : Astor, British Musum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, Trum- 
bull. 

At the Squier sale, no. 889, a copy sold for 
$5.50. Quaritch, no. 12425,* priced a coi^y il. 

Lewis H. Morgan was born in Aurora, Cayuga 
County, N. T., i^ovember 21, 1818. He was 
graduated by Union College, Schenectady, in the 
class of 1840. Returning from college to Aurora, 
Mr. Morgan Joined a secret society composed of 
the young men of the village and known as the 
Grand Order of the Iroquois. This had a great 
influence iipon his future career and studies. 
The order was instituted for sport and amuse- 
ment, but its organization was modeled on the 
governmental system of the Six Nations ; and, 
chiefly under Mr. Morgan's direction and lead- 
ership, the objects of the order were extended, 
if not entirely changed, and its jiurposes 
improved. To become better acquainted with 
the social polity of the Indians, yomig Morgan 
visited the aborigines remaining in New York, 
a mere remnant, but yet retaining to a great 
extent their ancient laws and customs ; and he 
went so far as to be adopted as a member by the 
Senecas. Before the council of the order, in 
the years 1844, 1845, and 1846, he read a series of 
papers on the Iroquois, which were published 
under the nom de plume of " Skenandoah." 
Mr. Morgan died in Rochester, N. Y., Decem- 
ber 17, 1881. 

[Morice {Pere Adrien Gabriel).] The 
New ( Methodical, Easy and Comi)lete 
I Dene syllabary. 
[Stuart's Lake uiission, B. C. 1890.] 



Morice (A. G.) — Continued. 

2 separate leaves, verso of the first one 
blank, 8°. 

On the first leaf is given tlie syllabary with 
explanatory notes ; the second presents " Some 
of the Advantages of the New Syllabary." See 
the fac-similes on the three following pages. 
Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, \Vellesley. 

[ ] A New I Improved & Easy Alpha- 
bet or Hyllabary | .suggested to the 
" Cherokee nation " | By a Friend | and 
earnest sympathizer. | 

Stuart's Lake Mission Print No. 9. 
[1890.] 

1 leaf, verso blank, 8^^. 

" The sounds and orthography of the above 
are those of the Cherokee Aljihabet such as 
reproduced in Pilling's Iroquoian Bibliography. 
Should thej' bo incomplete or defective, the new 
Syllabary can easily be completed or corrected 
out of the Den6 Alphabet, from which it is 
extracted." 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

[ ] Preces | Post privatam Missam 

recitanda'. | [One line syllabic charac- 
ters.] 

[Stuart's Lake mission, B. C. 1890.] 

1 leaf, verso blank, 8°. 

A prayer in the D6ne language, syllabic 
characters, followed by a ])rayer in Latin, roman 
characters. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

[Two lines syllabic characters.] | 

[Picture of the virgin and child.] | 
[Three lines syllabic characters.] 

[Stuart's Lake mission, B. C. 1890.] 

Transliteration : Pe tcestloes oetsotneU^h | 
Jezi Kli hwoeztli 6t hwotsoen | 

Hwol 1890t nahwotizoet | Nakraztli C4 | pel 
Molis wyinla. 

Translation : "With paper one-learns | Jesus 
Christ was-born then since | 

With-it 1890 times it-annually-revolved 
[year] I Stuart's-Lake there | father Morice 
made-it. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in the 
D6n6 language and in syllabic characters) pp. 
3-32, sq. 16°. See the fac-simile of the title- 
page on p. 70 of this bibliography. 

The tirst book printed in these characters. 
It is a sort of primer containing spelling and 
elementary reading lessons. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, AVellesley. 

— — [Two lines syllabic characters.] | 

[Oblate seal.] | [Three lines syllabic 

characters.] 

[Stuart's Lake mission, B. C. 1890.] 
Transliteration : Luskateshisyaz keiska-z. | 

Jezi Kli hwtt'ztli et hwotsten | [Seal.] | 

llwo 1890t nahwotiziet | Nakraztli 6t | pel 

Molis oeytnla. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



67 



The New 

Methodical, Easy and Complete 
DENE SYLLABARY. 



With A (E E r U 

ACE&c. <] [>[>[> A V ^^one 

H < > > > A V ^ 

K < > > > A V " 

R < > ]> > A V II 

W < > > > A V 

Hw ^ > > ^ /j^ V 

TB(l)CDIi3nU r 
Th a D D D Q 
T G D D D Q a 

PBcnaDBDfid ^ 
(1) 

KG, KrE333mUU ' 

X, Kb a B B B m DO ^ 

K, Kr S B B B CQ Ctl 



N 
M 



V 

(2) 

c J J) J n u '- 



With A (E E r U 

Y Q 9 9 9 Q lD»Zone 

Q G^ ^9 10 i9 Q S 

Q a y9 \9 y9 9 6 



L 


c 





Q 


9 


Q 


CI 


1 


Tl 


c 


D 


!D 


D 


Q 


u 




r 


G 

















\j 


Tf 


a 


D 


J3 


B 


Q 


a 




Tf 


c 


3 


Q 


B 


C2 


a 


(3) 


Z 


c 





3 


3 


n 


u 


z z 


Tz Dz 


G 


O 


Q 


3 


Q 





(4) 


S 


e 


3 


3 


3 


m 


w 


8 S 


Sh 


a 


B 


B 


3 


ffl 


m 


S 


Ch 


a 


B 


3 


3 


ffl 


m 




Ts 


s 


3 


3 


3 


m 


03 




Ts 


s 


B 


3 


3 


QP 


CO 




Hiatus 




- ^ 


ccessoriei 





:*= 





^.VPL^iV/iT0i27 NOTES. 

(1) These letters are not differentiated in Dene. (2) - is the nasal n. (3) 2 
is the French y. (4) s is phonetically intermediate between $ and s. 

The vowels as in Italian, except ce as the e in Fr. je, te. — The r of Kr, Kr 
is hardly perceptible, n, jy are very guttural. R is the result of uvular vibra- 
tions. Kh, Th =k+h, t-\-h. Q almost = ty. /^ is a peculiarly sibilant I. The 
dot accompanying consonants represents the exploding sound (rendered by { in- 
corporated in the signs). -■" is prefixed to proper names, and o is suffixed to 
syllables the vowel of which it is necessary to render long. The rest as in Engl. 



68 15IBLIUGKAPHY OF TILE 

SOME OF THE 

Advantages of the New Syllabary. 



I. — The direction of the curve or angle of each sign infallibly deiermims 
the natu're of the vowel added to the fundamental consonant of each syllable, 
and this direction is always perceived without the least eftbrt of the mind. In 
the Cree Alphabet such as given in Petitot's Grammairei'aisonnee, this direc- 
tion ou which depends the vowel of the syllable is either difficult to discern or 
governed by no fixed rules. Thus, in that Syllabary, ^ points to the right, 
t:^ to the left, ^ upwards, ^-^ downwards, though the consonants expressed by 
these differently turned signs are all in connection with the same vowel a. Hen- 
ce confusion — with co-relative difficulty — for the mind of the pupil. 

II. — All the cognate sounds are rendered in tlie new syllables by similarly 
formed characters the general shape of which denotes the phonetic group to 
which they belong, while their intrinsic modifications determine the nature of 
the particular sound they represent. Thus the dentals are expressed by a single 
curve; the gutturals by a double curve; the soft sibilants by a curve with un- 
dulating extremities; the hard sibilants by a double curve with like extrem- 
ities, etc. Therefore our 30 sets of letters are practically reduced to 9, viz.: 
<3CC[£CQCC£- So that the pupil who has become familiar 
with these 9 signs may almost be said to have mastered the whole Alphabet; 
for another good point in its favor is that 

III. — The modifications of each fundamental character take place internally 
and in conformity with logical and therefore easily learnt rules. To illustrate 
this remark, we will refer to the sign g. The student who already possesses 
the aforesaid 9 principal signs will recognize it at sight — through its double 
undulating curve — as a hard sibilant which, being affected by no modification, 
must be given the primary hissing sound Sa. Let us now insert therein the 
perpendicular line which, when used as an internal accretion to a sign, corres- 
ponds to the h of the Roman Alphabet (as in < hra, < hioa, Q tha, Q kha), 
and we obtain g sha. Should we cross the end of its horizontal line, we will 
thereby add a t to that sign which will then become g tsha-ov cha. In li- 
ke manner, g may be changed into g tsa which in its turn is liable to be 
transformed into Q tsa. C ^, etc. may also become Q, S, etc. — This 
logic and consequent flicility are sadly Avanting in the old Syllabary which is 
made up of disconnected signs many of Avhich are ditferentiated only by addi- 
tional and ^j^i^'niaZ smaller signs (/i-^ '^ '1^ /^ bi tz>c c<^ //<] <•) 
most of which are also used as non-syllabic letters, and as such sometimes ha- 
ve in that same Alphabet a meaning quite different from that which is attribu- 



ATHAl'ASCAN LANCJUAGIKS. 69 

ted to them wlien tlicy arc considered as mere accessories. This arbitrary- 
change of value joined to the fact that these modifying signs sometimes pre- 
cede, sometimes follow, the main character must unavoidably confuse the mind 
of the beginner and render the acquisition of reading unnecessarily diOicult. 

IV. — In our system, all the small signs (except o which, as its form indica- 
tes, is zero when alone) are consonants without vowel, and in no instance is any 
of them dsed in another capacity They have always the same value, and tlio 
method and logic which we have noticed in the formation of the main or syl- 
labic signs have also presided to the composition of those which are merely 
consonantal. Thus the non-syllabic gutturals are expressed by vertical lines 
(\ / v); the nasals by semicircles () c ^), &c. Note also the transformation of 
S into s, sh; z into 2, zh orj, etc. through the insertion of the 1 or modifying 
h of the large characters. — The old Alphabet not only lacks this method and 
resulting eimplicity, but it would seem as if its inventor had purposedly con- 
trived to render its acquisition unduly difficult to the white student by giving 
to s the value of I, to z that of g, to h that of/, etc. 

v. — The new Syllabary is complete, while it is universally conceded that 
the Creo Alphabet lacks about half a dozen sets of syllabic signs which are in- 
dispensable in such delicate languages as the Dene. Those v/ho know the num- 
berless and most ridiculous contresens this scarcity leads to need no other rea- 
son to reject the whole system as practically worthless. Besides, in connection 
with none of its signs is there any provision for such important vowel sounds 
as those of os (French e mud) and u (00, Fr. cu). Yet in several dialects (E 
characterizes the present tense and e the past, while the distinction between 
and u is no less essential. 

VI.— Lastly, we claim for our Syllabary a greater synthesis which renders 
the writing shorter and, by avoiding the accumulation of non-syllabic signs, 
makes the reading easier. For instance, the Chippewayan woid intan-chare 
"leaf" which with the old syllables cannot be v/ritten without three consecu- 
tive small signs (AnC'^'E-S) is simply I>)G-S>> with tho new system. 

In conclusion, we may be permitted to state as illustrative of the practical 
•worth of the new S^dlabary that through it Indians of common intelligence 
have learnt to read in one week's leasurely study before they had any Primer 
or printed matter of any kind to help them on. We even know of a young 
man who performed the feat in the space of two evenings. 



70 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 




B3'Q >zD I>-^ AB> 




At 1 8 9 T C A 3 O 



CSzD O^ 



B « '^ 8 > > C •- 



^ uiVbitji vj <Bi wi vi vi «n in ni* (T^tr^ts'^vrfT'^ts'^.is'^ts^isri^Ci 



FAC-SIMILE or THE TITLE-PAGE OF MORICE'S DENE PRIMER. 



ATHAPASCAN LANUUAGKS. 



71 



/^ DEDB^Q"' Bl>83Z' /^^2>^ 



B3!2) >'', K) Or AB> 




/l^u 1890T C A 3D 



-C87-E) ^^ 




FAC-SIMILE OF THE TITLE-PAGE OF MORICE'S DENE CATECHISM. 



72 



BIBLIOGSIAPHY OF THE 



Morice (A. G.) — CoutinntMl. 

Translation : The-lktle-cateehism drawnon 
(written). I JosiisClirist wasborn then since | 
[Seal.] I 

"With-it 1890-time.s it-annually-revolved | 
Stuart'.sLake there | fatlierMorice made-it. 

Title a.s above ver.«io blank 1 1. text (entirely 
in the Dene language and in syllabic charac- 
ters) pp. 3-18, sq. 16'^. See tlie fac-siniile of the 
title-page on p. 71 of this bibliography. 

Copies ieen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

Some copies of this catechism differ in colla- 
tion : Title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 41- 
56. The author informs me that an edition of 
500 of tliese was printinl "to form part of a 
' Recueil de I'rieres ' which I am not yet pre- 
pared to publish." (Eames, Pilling, Shea.) 

The western D6u6s — their manners 

and customs. By the Rev. Father A. 
G. Morice, O. M. I., Stuart's Lake, B. C. 

In Canadian Inst. Proc. third series, vol. 7 
(whole no. vol. 25), pp. 100-17-1, Toronto, 1890, 8'^. 
(Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling, Wellesley.) 

Classification of the Den6 tribes, p. 113.— 
D6n6 songs with music, 156-157.— Apologue 
(thre« lines) in the language of the Carrier In- 
dians ("written with the new signs" with 
interlinear tran.sliteratiou and followed by 
English translation), p. 106. — Remarks on the 
language of the westerm Dtines, pp. 166-167. 

The D^n<5 languages. Considefed in 

Themselves and Incidentally in their 
Relations to Non -American Idioms. 
By the Rev. Father A. G. Morice, O. M. I. 

In Canadian Inst. Trans, vol. 1, pp. 170-212. 
Toronto, 1891, 8'^. (Pilling.) 

Introduction, pp. 170-171. — Phonetics and 
graphic signs (pp. 172-175) includes " the Hew 
methodical easy and complete Dene syllabary," 
p. 175. — General characteristics of the Dene 
languages, pp. 176-181. — The nouns; tlieir vari- 
eties and iutliictions, pp. 181-184.— The adjec- 
tive.s and the pronouns, pp. 185-180. — The sim- 
ple or primary verbs, pp. 180-105. — The com- 
po.site verbs, pp. 195-200. — Varieties of verbs, 
pp. 200-204.— Miscellaneous notes, pp. 204-212. 

Issued .separately with half-title (The Dene 
languages), on the verso of which begins the 
text, paged as in the original article, 170-212. 
(Eames, Gatschet. Pilling, Powell.) 

It has also been translated into French and 
is in course of publication in the Missions de la 
Congregation des Missionnaires Oblats de 
Marie Immaculee, Paris. 

Le I petit catechisme | al'usase | des 

sauvagos porteurs | Texte & Traduc- 
tion avec Notes | snivi des | prieres du 
matin | et du soir | Par le R. P. Morice. 
O. M. J. I [Two lines quotation] | 
Mission | du lac Stuart | 1891 

Colophon : Typographic de la Mission du Lac 
Stuart. Mo. 10. 



Morice (A. G.) — Continued. 

Half-title (Le Petit Catechisme et prierea) 
ver.so blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. 
avertissementpp. 5-6, text (Carrier and French, 
usually on facing pages) pp. 8-143, (half-titles at 
pp. 7, 51 and 95). table des niatieres p. 144, sq. 
16°. 

On each page of the work are given foot-notes 
explanatory of peculiarities in the Carrier text 
and of till! translation. 

Catechism, pp. 7-40.— Prayers for the morn- 
ing, pp. 52-69. — Prayer for the evening, jip. 70- 
73. — Divers prayers (pp. 74-93): Prayer on 
arising, p. 74. — Prayer on retiring, p. 75.— The 
mysteries of the rosary, pp. 76-79. — Salve, 
Regina, p. 80. — PrayertoSt. Joseph, pp. 81-83.— 
Prayer for the dead, p. 84.— Acts for the bene- 
diction of the holy sacrament, pp. 85-93, verso a 
note in French by the author. — Canti<iues (pji. 
9S-143) ; To the sacred eucharist, pp. 96-103.— 
To the Ilrily Sjiirit, ]>. 104.— To the Holy Virgin, 
pp. 105-112.— To St. Jo.seph, pp. 11,3-115.— To 
the Holy Angels, pp. 116-117. — For various 
occasions, pp. 118-143. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Powell. 

[Tcestl(T>s-Nahwoelnfek, or Carrier 

Review. 

Stuart's L.ako, 1891.] 

Pp. 9-32, 8^. 

An eight-page periodical, ])riuted entirely in 
the Den6 syllabic ch.iracters invented by P6re 
Morice. At this writing (J.anu.ary, 1892) but 
three numbers have been issued — those for 
October, November, and December, 1891. No. 1 
begins with page 9, the preceding pages being 
held, I presume, for the preliminary matter 
relating to the volume. 

The contents .are of a varied nature — the first 
number, for example, containing: Indian or 
local names, p. 9. — News from below [i. e. from 
the colonized portion of British Columbia], p. 
9.— News from the New World, p. 10; from the 
Old World, p. 10.— Scripture text, p. 11.— Life 
of St. Athanasius, p. 11. — Bible questions and 
.answers, p. 12. — Letter from tlie bishop, p. 12. — 
A picture and its explan.ition, p. 13. — Concern- 
ing the Review, p. 13.— A story, pp. 14-15. — 
Hymns, p. 15.— U.seful information, etc., p. 16. 

Copies seen: Pilling, Powell. 

[ ] Dictionuaire | de la Langue | 

Chilkohtine. j Mission | du lac William. 
I Avril 1884. ( " ) 

Manuscript; title verso l)l.ank 1 1. text pp. 
1-170, double columns, 8'^. 

Contains about 5,000 words, wliicli need 
rearrangement and retr.anscription. It has 
been prepared for ])ublication as far as the let- 
ter F. 

[ ] Pe I Kuti-Nitsil-in | pcegenni | g6 

yats^lthik. [1884.] (') 

Literal translation : With I Above-Chief 
[God] 1 his-word | after one-speaks. 
Manuscript; pp. 1-42, 12^. 
Contains 5 sermons in Chilkohtin. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



73 



Morice (A. a.) — Coiitimicd. 

Dic.tiduiiairt' | Dps Vcilics | ])o la 

Lan<;uc rortciir | par | lo H. P. A. (i. 

Mori<e,0. M. I. | Mission ilu lac Stuiirt 

I 18S7-1S . . (*) 

Mamisriiiil ; title vc^i'so ami followiiif; It-af 

lilaiik. text 1)]). 1-12H. (Idiible roliniiii, small 4^^. 

A-f' only tiiiislicil. 

[ ] Grainiiiairf | Dcs I'artit-s conjii- 

jfiiblcs till Discoiirs | <U' la Ijanj^uc 
Port.Mir. 18S7. (*) 

Mainiscript ;])i). l-9(!, tloublf coliunii,l)r<iail8°. 
Coiitaiiis lour chapters, sululivideil into 19 
articles ami 1H2 rules. 

[ ] Manuel | Du Sauvage | contenant 

I Prieres, lustructious, Cantiques | Et 
Catt^chisme. | Mission du Lac 8tnart | 

188S. (*) 

Manuscript ; title verso blank, text pp. 1-120, 
l(i°, in the Carrier language. 

Contains: I'art I. Morning anil evening 
prayers, examination of conscience, a<'ts before 
an<l after coinninnion, acts ami hynni for the 
benediction ami divers miscellaneous pray er.s. — 
Part II. Instructions on confession and com- 
munion ami the reception of sacraments gener- 
ally. — Part III. 4;") hymns, all original. — Part 
TV. The short catechism of Christian doctrine. 

[ ] Yakrp.stapc t(Pstlops ra aetata liok- 

wttMi nats(idiw(i'ln(ok. [1889.] (*) 

Literal translation: Skyon sits [God] his- 
p.aper after old-time about one-narrates. 

Manuscript: pp. l-Sij, 12". being a free trans- 
lation and adajitatiou of the book of Genesis, 
in the Carrier dialect. 

Dent- roots | By the Rev. Father A. 

G. Moiicc, O. M. L [1890.] (*) 

Manuscript; 30 pages, folio. 

Introduction. i:i pp.— Vocabulary of 370 Eng- 
lish words which are roots in D6n6, with their 
eiinivalents in 17 or 18 Dene dialects, 17 pp. 

Les Evangiles | Pour tons les 

Dimanches | Et | Fetes d'ohligation | 
De I'Aun^e ] Traduits | Par le R. P. A. 
G. Morice, O. M. I. | Mission dn Lae 
Stuart I 1890. (*) 

Manu.script; title verso blank 1 I. text 7.'! 
pages, note-]iaper size. 

Contains the sel(>ctions from the gospels read 
in Roman Cathidic churches on .all Sundays 
.and feasts of obligation through the whole 
year, translated into tin' Carrier language. 

[ ] Twelve | Stories of adventure | in 

Carrier. 1890. (*) 

Manuscript ; fiO pages, note-paper size, being 
tr.inslations and .adaptations of the most thrill- 
ing stories found in English periodicals and 
destined by the transhator for publication in a 
projected monthly review in the new syllables. 
See page 70 for title of the Keview. 



Morice (A. (J.) — (lontimwd. 

[ ]T\vel\c I Short Li vcs of I he Saints. 

1891. {*) 

Maniisci'ipl ; 20 pages, 4'. 

[Words, jdirases, and sentences in 

the Dene language. 1891.] (*) 

Manuscrii)t in |iossession of its author. « lio 
has |)rei>ared it for the use of the llureau of 
ICthnology. Ilecorded in a. copy of Powell's 
Introduction to the study of Indian languages. 

Granunar | of | The Carrier Lan- 
guage I With Notes | On Local Peciil- 
iariti(!8 and Idiotisnis | ]>yRev. A.(i. 
Morice, O.M.I. (*) 

Manusc,rii)t. 7.3 pages, bro.ad fP, begun in 
February, 1891, and yet unfinished; in posses- 
sion of its .author, who tells nu^ he lia.s reached 
the chapter on the pronoun. 

Are the Carrier Sociology and 

Mythology indigenous or exotic f (*) 

Manuscript, 30 pages folio, recently prepared 
by its author for jniblication in the Tran.sac- 
tious of the Royal Swdety of Canada. 

Contents: Introductory — Ethnological — 
Sociological — Carrier sociology exotic; general 
arguments— Carrier sociology exotic; i)roved 
by facts— Carrier mythology p.artially exotic- 
Creation myths. 

The manuscripts titled above arc in the 
possession of their author, who has kindly 
furnished me information concerning them, as 
al.so the notes from which I have compiled the 
following biographic notice: 

Father Alorice was born on \\\b 27th of 
August, l,t.")9, .at .Saint-Mars-sur-Cidmont, 
France. After the usual elementary studies at 
the Christian Brothers' school at Oisseau, 
where his family had removed, ho was sent, 
when 13 years of age, to the Ecclesiastical 
Cidlege at Mayenne, with a view to prepare 
himself for the ])riestliood. Feeling called to 
the foreign missions, he subsefjuently joined 
the Order of the Oblales of Mary Immaculate 
(O.M.I.) and m.ade his final vows therein in 
October, 1K79. While still studying theology 
and being as yet in minor orders, the famous 
decrees of 18.S0 commanded tlie dis]>ersion of the 
members of such religious orders as had not 
the official sanction of the French Government. 
Previous to the execution of these decrees he 
wiis sent by his superiors to British Columbia, 
where he arrived on the 2Gt h of Julj-, 1880. At 
the completion of his theological studies .and 
after he h.ad learned a little of the English lan- 
guiige he was promoted to the priesthood. July 
2, 1882, and given charge of the Chilkotin In- 
dians, whose bmguage he immediately pro- 
cei-ded to learn. After two years of study he 
found himself .able to jireach to them without 
the aid of an interiu'cter. In 1885 he was sent to 
his present station, Stuart's Lake, where he 
repeated — but with less difficulty, owing to tho 
grammatical attinity of the two languages — his 
linguistic studies in the dialect of the Carrier. 



74 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Miiller (Friedrich). (Jruudriss | dev \ 
Sprachwieaenschaft | vmi | D''. Fried- 
ricliMuller | Professor[&c. three lines.] 
1 I. Baad | I. Abtlieiliiug. | Einleituug- 
in die .Sprachwissenscliat't[-IV. Band. 
I I. Abtbeilung. | Naclitrageznm Grund- 
rissansdenJahren | 1877-1887]. | 

Wienl876[-1888]. Alfred Holder | K. 
K.Universitats-Bucbkilndler. | Rotlien- 
tburmstrasse 15. 

4 vols. (vol. 1 in 2 part-s, vol. 2 originally in 4 
divisions, vol. 3 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 4 
part 1 all publisbed), each part and division 
with an outside title and two inside titles, 8°. 

Vol. 2, part 1, which includes the American 
languages, was originally issued in two divi- 
sions, each with the IVdlowing special title: 

Die Spraclien | der | schlichthaarigeu Rassen 
I von 1 D^ Friedrich Miiller | Professor [&c. 
eight lines.] | I. Ahthoiliing. | Die Sprachen der 
australischen, der hyperboreischen | und der 
amerikanischen Rasse. | 

Wien 1879[-1882]. I Alfred Holder | K. K. 
Hof- und Universitats-Buchhiindler | Rothen- 
thurmstrasse 15. 

Die Sprachen der amerikanischen Rassen; 
Allgeuieiner Charakter dieser Sprachen (in- 
cluding some Athapascan examples), vol. 2, 
first p.art, second division (1882), pp. 181-183.— 



Miiller (F.) — Gontinned. 

Die S])nichen der Athapasken- (Tinne-) und 
Kinai-Stiimme, pp. 184-192, treats of sounds, 
roots, nouns, adjectives, pronouns, verbs, and 
numerals, making use of examples from the 
Tscliiiipewyan, Peau de li6vre, Loucheux, 
Tabkali, 'riafskanaijUmkwa, Apatshe, Navajo, 
Hu]ia. and ICinai. 

Copies xi'i'ii : Astor. Britisli Museum, I'.ureau 
of Ethnology, Plames, Watkinson. 

Murray (.\lexander H.) A^ocabnlary of 
the Kutehin of the Yukon or Kutcbi- 
Kntclii, drawn up by Mr. M'Murray 
[sie] ; to wliieli tbe Chepewyau .syno- 
nyms were added by Mr. M'Pherson. 

In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expedi- 
tion, vol. 2, pj). 382-385, London, 1851, S°. 

A list of about 100 words and the numerals 
1-300. 

Reprinted in tbe later editions of tbe same 
work ; see Richardson (J.) 

Golleotion of words having a similar 

sound ami sioniboation in tbe Kutcliiii 
and Dog-rib langnages. 

In Richardson (J.), Arctic searching expe- 
dition, vid. 1, pp. 399-100, London, 1851, 8°. 

A vocabulary of 22 words. 

Reprinted in the later editions of tlie same 
work; see Richardson (J.) 



I 



N. 



Nabiltse : 

General discussion 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 
Nagailer: 

Vocabiilarv 



See Gibbs (G.) 

Anderson (A. C.) 
Dorsey (J. O.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Hazen (W.B.) 

See Adelung (J.C.) and 

Vater (J. S.) 

Mackenzie (A.) 



Vocabulary 

Nahawny. See Nehawni. 

National Museum : Tliese words following a 
title or within jiarentbeses after a note indicate 
that a copy of the work referred to has been 
seen by the compiler in tbe library of that insti- 
tution, "Washington, D. C. 

Natsun kaothet . . . Saint Mark . . . 
Tinn6. Sec Kirkby (W. W.) 

Navajo : 

Dictionary See Matthews (W.) 

General discussion Adelung (J. C.) and 



General discussion 
General discussion 
Gentes 
Grammar 



Vater (J. S.) 
Bancroft (H.H.) 
Buscbmann (J. C. E. 
Matthews (W.) 
:Matthews (W.) 



Grammatic comments Featherman (A.) 

Grammatic comments Miiller (F.) 

Grammatic comments "Wilson (E. F.) 

Numerals Beadle (J. H.) 

Numerals Gatschet (A. S.) 

Numerals Haine8(E. M) 



Navajo — Continued. 

Niunerals See 

Prayer 

Propel- names 

Proper names 

Pro])er names 

Relationsbiiis 

Songs 

Text 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabul.iry 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vo(tabulai'y 

Vo(tabulary 

Vocab\ilary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

A'ocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary^ 

Vocabulary 

Vocabvilary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocaliulary 

Vocabularv 



Tolmie (W. ¥.) and 

Dawson ((J. M.) 
Matthews (W.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Matthews (\V.) 
Smithsonian. 
Packard (R. L.) 
Matthews (\V.) 
Matthews (\V.) 
Arny (W. F. M.) 
Bancroft (H.H.) 
Beadle (J. H.) 
Busclimann (J. C. E.) 
Gushing (F. 11.) 
Davis (\V. "W. H.) 
Domenecli (E. II. D.) 
Eaton (J. H.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Loew (().) 
Matthews (W.) 
Nichols (A. S.) 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 
Pino (P. B.) 
Powell (J. "W.) 
Schoolcraft (11. R.) 
Shaw (J. M.) 
Simpson (J. H.) 
Thompson (A. H.) 
Turner (W.W.) 
Whipple (A. W.) 
Whipple (W. D.) 
Willard(C.N.) 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



75 



Navajo — 


Cont 


inuod. 


Vocalml 


aiy 


S.-r Wilson (E. F.) 


WoTiU 




ISarreiro (A.) 


Wonlrt 




I)rta(L. K.) 


Wor.lfl 




Kllis (R.) 


WorUs 




(latsrlict (A. S.) 


Wonls 




Latham (H.d.) 


Wonla 




Mattb.ws(W.) 


Words 




Tolnii.i (\V. F.) 
Dawson (G. M.) 


Words 




Wilson (D.) 


Nehawni : 






Vocabulary 


SeeKennicott (R.) 


Vocabularj- 


Roe,lirij,'(F.L. O.) 


Vooabu 


ary 


Ross (R. B.) 



and 



New Iinprovetl & Eany alpliabet. See 
Morice (A. G.) 

New Methodiral . . . Dene sylla- 
bary. See Morice (A. G.) 

Nichols (A. Sidney). Voeahnlary of the 
Navajo lanjj^nage. 

Maniisfript. 10 \iunnml(i>ri'd loaves, 4°, in the 
library of the Bureau of Kthnoloiry. Collected 
in New Mexico. 1867-1808. 

Recorded on one of the blank forms (no. 170) 
of the Smithsonian Institution, issued to col- 
lectors, and contalninjr 'ill words. Of these, 
equivalents are given in aliout 180 cases. 

Northern Indians. See Athapascan. 

Nulato Inkalik. See Inkalik. 

Numerals: 

Ahtiunfe See Allen (H. T.) 

Aht.inn6 Dall(\V. H.) 

Ahtiun6 Ellis (R.) 

Apache Allen (H.T.) 

Apache Bancroft (H. H.) 

Apache Creniony (J. (".) 

Apache Dugan (T. B.) 

Apache Gatschet (A. S.) 

Apache Haines (E.M.) 

Ai)ache Haldeman (S. S.) 

Apache Miiller (F.) 

Apache Pimentel (F.) 

Apache Tolinie (W. F.) and Daw- 

.s(m (G. M.) 

Chippewyan Buschmann (.T. C. E.) 

Chippewyan (Jlassical. 

Chippewyan Ellis (II.) 

Chippewyan Haines (E.M.) 

Chippewyan James (E.) 



Numerals — Continued. 

Chii.pewyan .See Kirkby (W. W.) 
(;hipi)ewyan 



(Miipiiewyan 
(Iliippewyan 



Hupa 
Hupa 
Hupa 
Hupa 

Kaiyuhkhol.'ina 

Kenai 

Kenai 

Kenai 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Loucheux 

Naviijo 

NaVtyo 

Navajo 

Navjvjo 

Navajo 

Peau de Lievre 

Slave 

Siissee 

Taculli 

TacuUi 

Taculli 

Taculli 

Taculli 

Tahlewah 
Tahlewah 
Tahlewah 

Tinn6 

Tlatskenai 

Tlatskenai 

TJgalenzen 

TJmpkwa 

TJmpkwa 

Urapkwa 

Tjnakhotana 

Wailakki 

Wailakki 



Miiller (F.) 

I'ott (A. F.) 

Tcdmie (W. F.; and Daw- 
.sou (G. M.) 

Tolmie (AV. F.) and Daw 
son (G.M.) 

Bancroft (II. H.) 

Gatschet (A.S.) 

Miiller (F.) 

T.dmie (\y. F.) and Daw- 
son (G.M.) 

Dall (W. H.) 

Ellis (R.) 

Kriiian (G. A.) 

Miiller (F.) 

Itiischmaini (J. C. E.) 

Dall (W. H.) 

Miiller (F.) 

Beadle (J. H.) 

Gatschet (A.S.) 

Haines (E.M.) 

Miiller (F.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw 
son (G.M.) 

Muller (F.) 

Ellis (R.) 

Sullivan (J. W.) 

Ellis (R.) 

Harmon (D. W.) 

Miiller (F.) 

Pott (A. F.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 
son (G.M.) 

Bancroft (H. H.) 

Ellis (R.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) and Davi- 
son (G.M.) 

Campbell (J.) 

Ellis (R.) 

Muller (F.) 

Dall(W.H.) 

Duflot do Mofras (E.) 

Miiller (F.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 
son (G.M.) 

DalKW.H.) 

Bancroft (H. H.) 

Tolmie (W.F.) and Daw- 
sou (G.M.) 



NuTW^heh knkwa<lhn<l Jesu8 Christ 
Tiikndh. See McDonald ( R. ) 



0. 



O'Brian ( — ). A Voeahnlary of Fort 
Simji^ou Dog-Rib, by Mr. O'Brian. of 
the Hudson'.s Bay Company. 

In Richardson (J.). Arctic searching exjiedi- 
tion. vol. 2, p. 398, London, 18.-.1, 8o. 

Contains about 75 words. 

Rejirinted in the later editiims of the same 
work: see Richardson (.1.) 

Voeabnlary of the language of a 

tribe dwelling near the soiirees of the 



O'Brian ( — ) — Contintied. 

River of the Mountains, and known to 
thevoyager.s by tlie name of "Mauvais 
Monde," and of the Dog-rib dialect, 
drawn up by Mr. O'Brian, of tlie Hud- 
son's Bay Comi)any's service. 

In Richardson (J.). Arctic searching expe- 
dition. v<d. -1. pl>. 3!»9-40U. Lond<m. IS.'il. 8^. 
Contains about 50 words in each dialect. 



76 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



O'Briaii ( — ) — Continued. 

Reprinted in the later editionM iiC the same 
work; see Richardson (.T.) 

Ochikthud cttnnt'tle [Tukuilh]. | Set- 
McDonald (R.) 

Orozco y Berra (Manuel). Geografiade 
las leu<;juas | y | carta etnogrfifica | de 
Mexico I precedidas de un ensayo de 
clasificacion de las uiisuias leuguas | y 
de apuutes para las inniigraciones de 
las tribus | por el lie. | Manuel Orozco 
y Bei'ra | [Five lines quotation] | [De- 
sign.] I 

Mexico I impreuta de J. M. Audrade 
y F. Escalante | [C]alle de Tiburcio 
uuni. 19 I 1864 

Half-title verso bliink 1 1. title verso Wank 1 
1. rtedicatif)n verso lilank 1 1. introdiiction pp. 
vii-xiv, half-title (]niinera parte) verso blank 1 
1. text pp. 3-387, index pj). 389-392, map, folio. 

Chapter viii, Familia apaclio o yavipai, pp. 
40-41, refer.s to the Yunian. — Section viii of 
chapter xii, Familia apache, p. 59, refers both 
to the Athapascan and Ynman. — Chapter xxv, 
Apaches, jip. 3G8-387, is a general di.scn.ssiou on 
the geographic distrilintion of these peoples 
.Tnd includes the Toutos, Cliiricagnis, Gilenos, 
Mimlirerios, Faraones, Mcscaleros, Llaneros, 
lji])anes, Navajos, Chcniegne [Shoshonean], 
Ynta [Shoshonean], Muca Oraive [Shosho- 
nean], and the Toboso ("lengna perdida"). 

'Copies seen : Bancroft, Boston Athenieum. 
Bostcm Public, Brinton, British Museum, Con- 
gres.s. Fames, Watkinson. 



Our Forest Children. | V(d. 1, No. 1. 
Shingwauk Home. Feliruary, 1887 
[-Vol. IV. Xo. 6. Septenilier, 1890]. 

Fdited by Rev. E. F. AVilson and published 
monthly at the Sliingwauk nome, Sault Ste. 
iNfarie, Ontario; sm. 4°. No. 10 of vol. 1 is a 
" ChristTiias number."' In 1888 a "Summer 
number'" a])i)eared, no. 4 of vid. 2; also a 
'• Christmas number," "no. 10" of V(d. 2, 
idthough thi^ next issue is numbered 10 also. 
Thesis sjiecial issues are larger than the regular 
ones, and illustrated. The regular issues con- 
sisted of 2 11. or 4 pp. each iintil no. 3 of vol. :{ 
(for June, 1889), when the periodical was made a 
Ki-page illustrated monthly. The first seven 
n umbers of vol. 1 were in size about 6 by 9 
inches and were unpaged ; with no. 8 the size 
was increased to about 8 by 10 inches, and the 
](ages numbered, each issue being paged inde- 
])endently (l-4)untilthebeginningofvol.2, from 
which a single pagination continues (exceitting 
nos. 4 and 111) to no. 1 of vol. 3 (pp. 1-48), the 
next no. being jiaged .')-8. No. 3 of" vol. 3 (Jiuie, 
1889) begins a new series and a new and con- 
tinuo\is pagination (pp. 1-25G), each issue since 
then having 10 pp. 4°, and being provided with 
a cover. The last issue — that for Se])teniber, 
1890 — says: "As has already been announced, 
this is the Last issue of 'Our Forest Children.' 
Next mojith, October, will api)ear the first num- 
ber ol" the ' Canadian Indian.' " [q-v.^ 

Reeve (W.IJ.), The Chii)ewy.an Indians, vol. 
2, pp. fl-7. 

"Wilson (E. F.), The Sar.see Indiiins, vol. 3, 
]ip. 97^102. 

The Navajo Indians. a-o1. 3, pj). 113-117. 

Copies seen: Fames. Filling, AVellesley. 



Palliser (Capf. John). Exploration. — 
British North America. | The. | journals, 
detailed reports, and observations | rel- 
ative to I the exploration, | by captain 
Palliser, | of | that jxution of British 
North America, | whicli, | in latitude, 
lies between the British boundary line 
anil the | height ol' laud or watershed of 
the northern | or frozen ocean respec- 
tively, I and I in longitude, between 
the western shore of lake SuperifU" and 
I the Pacific ocean, | During the Years 
1857, 1858, 1859, and 1800. | Presente<l to 
both Houses of Parliament by Conuuauil 
of Her Majesty, | 19th May 1863. | 
[English arms.] | 

London : | printed by George Edward 
Eyre and William Spottiswoode, | print- 
ers to the rpieen's most excellent maj- 
esty. I For her majesty's stationery of- 
fice. I 1863. I (Price 3«.6</. ) 



Palliser (J.) — Continued. 

I'riuled cover as above, title as above 
(omitting the price) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
3-325. colophon 1 p. folio. 

Sullivan (J. W.). Vocabularies of the North- 
west Indians, pp. 207-216. 

Copies seen : Jioston AthoniBum, Geological 
Survey. 

I'ri<-ed by Dufoss^, Paris, 1887, no. 24911, 12 fr. 

Packard (Robert Lawrence). Terms of re- 
lationship used by the Navfijo Indians, 
Manuscript, 4 leaves, folio, in the libi-ary of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the 
Nav.a.jo Reservation, New Mexico, in 1881. Tliis 
manuscript has been corrected and supph- 
menied by Dr. "Washington Matthews. Foit 
AViiigate, N. Mex. 

Palmer (Dr. Edward). Vocabuhiry of 
the Pinella and Ariva Apache language. 
Manuscript; 5 unnumbered i>ages, 4", in the 
library <if the Bureau of Etlmology. It bears 
the .Smith soniau Institution receiiJt stamp of 
Dec. 24, 18G7. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



77 



Palmer ( K.) — -Conl iiiiicd. 

CoiitMiliH till' IKO words addlitcd l).v I li<' .Siiiilli- 
sdiiiMii liisliliitioii ;is a .staiidiinl vm-altiiliiiv. 
Ariiiii^ii'd lour colmnii.s to tlio ]i;i,m', two of 
Enjilish and two of Ai>a<-lic. 

Tlii'fn in a copy ol' tlii.s voi abiilar.y in tin- 
same library, Tuado by its compiler; C uuiiuiii- 
bcred leaves, folio, written on one side only. 
Pean de Li6vre : 

Dictionary So 

Gramniatic <:onimc>n(s 
tirannnatic treatise 
Le.'cnds 



Kehil ionships 

Text 

A'ocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

Words 



Tetitot (K. F. S.J.) 
Miiller (F-) 
Telitot(K. F.S.J.) 
lVtitot(K. F.S.J.) 
Morgan (L. II.) 
I'romissiones. 
nCenuicott (U.) 
retitot(K. F.S.J.) 
Koebrig(F. L. O.) 
Cliarencey(C.F.n.a. 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 



[Perrault (Cliailcs ()vi<le).] L. J, C. & 
M. J. I Priorcs, | Caiitiqiu-s | et Cato- 
chisnio I en | langiic Moiitagiiaiso oil 
Chiju'weyaii. | [One line syllabic char- 
acters.] I [Oblate seal.] | 

Montreal: | Iniprinierie de Lonis Per- 
rault. I 1857. (*) 

Title verso approbation of t Alexandre, Eve- 
(|ue do St. Boniface, (). M. I. 1 1. text pp. 3-144, 
18'. 

Prayers, etc., p)). 3-46. — Syllabary, \t. 47. — 
Canti(iues (22). pp.4'J-9'2.— Catechism.pp.93-144. 

Title from Dr. J. H. Trumbull from copy in 
liis possession. Iteferriny to the note under the 
next succeeding title, descriptive of the addi- 
tion of pp. 145-lSO, he says: "My copy is iu 
the original binding, fresh and unused, and is 
evidently complete as issued." 

[ ] L. J. C. & M. J. I Prieres, | can- 

tiqiieset catecliisme | enlangiie | Mon- 
tagnaise ou Chipeweyan. | [One line 
syllabic characters.] | [Oblate seal.] | 

Montr<5al : | iniprimerie de Lonis Per- 
rault et compagnie. | 1865. 

Title verso approbation of t Alexandre 
Eveque do St. Boniface, O.M.I. 1 1. " quelques 
notes " signed Chs. Ovido Perrault pp. i-xi, 
text in syllabic characters with French head- 
ings in italics pp. 3-174, table des cantiques 
. (alternate lines Montaguais iu syllabic charac- 
ters and French in italics) pp. 175-179, 18°. Sig- 
natures alternately in twelves and sixes. Sec 
the fac-similo of the syllabary, p. 78. 

In the preliminary "'notes " the author in- 
cludes a letter, "A Me8sieur.s les Redacteur.s 
cTu Pays, " which contains the alphabet [.sylla- 
bary], p. iv, and an " exeraple " of the charac- 
ters with transliteration and translation into 
French, p. v. Also a "Lettre de Monseigueur 
Faraud, Eveque d'Anemour, a Chs. O. Per- 
rault, Ecr., Avocat de Montr6al," pp. vii-x, 
.giving examples and explanations of the syl- 
labic characters ' ' que nous employons jiour les 
langiies sauvages." 



Perrault (('. O.) — ^('(nitiimtd. 

Prayers, ])|). 1-17.- AVay of the cross, pj). 18- 
40.— Al])habet (syllabary], ]i. 41.— Hymns (noa. 
1-38), PI). 43-117.— Catechi.sme, pp. 119-174. 

Cojncs ec'i'ii : Eann's, (VCallaghan, Pilling, 
Shea. 

The copies of this work belonging to Mr. 
Wilberforee Fames aiul myself differ from the 
other two. They lack the six preliminary 
leaves jiaged i-xi; and foUowing i)age 179 are 
pages 145-180 (signatures 9 in twehc, and 10 in 
six). Page 145 is headed ■' Ex]dications de 
quelques Inuiges ]iroi)res a I'instruction des 
Montaguais." embracing hymns nos. 1-13 in 
syllabic cliaracters.witli he;ulingsin French, in 
italics. These copies are in tht; original bind- 
ing and seem to he as issued from the ])ress. 
It is i)robable that tlie copies of this kind are 
of the earlier i.ssue. The first sheet is com- 
plete ; the title-leaf is coniu'ctcd with leaf paged 
23-24 ; the second leaf with leaf }>aged 21-22, «fcc. 
The Explications appear to have been iiriutedas 
a sui)plemeut to t lu' edition of 1857. Tlu/ cojiies 
left over were bound up with the edition of 
1805. Subsequently,! presume, th<! six leavea 
containing tlie nucl'iues notcswvw inserted and 
the book issued without the Explications. 

A similar cojiy was priced by Diifosse in De- 
cember, 1889 (no. 36739), 10 fr.; and :inother In 
June, 1890 (no. 40911), at the same ligure. 

Petitot {Pb-e lOiuile Fortune Stanislas 
Josei>li). Etude sur la nation nionta- 
guaise par le R. P. Petitot de la Con- 
gregation des Oblats de Marie Iniina- 

cul^e. 

Iu Les Missions Catholiques, vol. 1, pp. 129- 
216; vol. 2, pp. 1-64, Lyon, 1868-1869, folio. 
(Pilling.) 

List of names of divisions of the Athapascan 
family, with Engli.sh signification, vol. 1, p. 
136. — Langue moutagnaise (general discussion), 
pp. 159-160.— List of words showing affinities 
in various Athapascan languages, pp. 215-216. — 
Names of the months iu Loiicheux, Pcau de 
Lievre, and Montaguais, vol. 2, p. 48.— Many 
Athapascan words, phrases, and sentences 
pa^si^n. 

Issued sejiarately : Paris, A. Hennuyer et fils, 
Paris, 1868, 63 pp. 12°. (*) 

Den^ Diudjies. 

In Congres Int. des Americanistes, Compte- 
rendu, premiere session, vol. 2, pp. 13-37, Xancy 
et Paris, 1875, 8°. (Eames, Pilling.) 

Comparisonof D6ne-Dindjieterms with those 
of various other lauguages, pp. 13-15. — Com- 
parative table Navajo, Dene (different dialects), 
and Dindjie, pp. 20-21. 

Outils en pierre et en os du Mac- 

Kenzie (ccrcle polaire arctique). 

In Materiaux pour I'histoire primitive et 
naturelle de I'homme, pp. 3C8— 105, Toulouse, 
1875, so. (Pilling.) 

Contains a number of Chix>pewyan and Eski- 
mauan names of implements passim. 



78 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



41 

ALPHABET. 



<a 


Ve 


Ai 


t>o 


"■D-^'A 


<^an 


^7en 


A in 


^on 


•ea 


<ba 


Vbe 


Abi 


>bo 


'S'r' 


Cda 


(Jde 


ridi 


Ddo 


>UDd' 


bka 


q ke 


pki 


dko 


^■DcT 


a la 


TJle 


Jlli . 


bio 


<cbV 


|__ma 


Pme 


(~^mi 


_J mo 


'L'r-' 


CLna 


Une 


(Jni 


_Qno 


+ VUQ.+ 


u^ 


r^re 


pri 


Jro 


"A-Cl 


^ sa 


Sse 


r^si 


r^ so 


• cro-'r' 


>ya 


4 ye 


^yi 


^yo 


• '^<-*n 


^za 


io?«.. 


CMa 


^zo 


^Sr-^P 


^cha 


UJche 


mchi 


3cho 


hC>Uh 


(_^ tha 


Othe 


pthi 


Jtho 


t<]'L><< 


t[^ dha 


/Odhe 


/p'dlii 


#^Jdho 


•V'^O 


C tta 


IJtte 


n'tti 


D'tto 


• VV'^fY> 


C' ttha 


U tthe 


QttM 


3ttho 




^C ^'a 


<Ut<e 


<ntd 


QUO 





FAC-SIMILE OF THE SYLLABARY FROM PERRAULT'S MONTAGNAIS 
PRAYER-BOOK OF 1865, 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



79 



Petitot (E. F. S. J.) — < 'oiitiinifd. 

J)icti()Tniiiirc | dc l;i | liinyuc Dciir- 

Diiiiljid I dialoftes | Montiiguiiis <»ii 
(niii)]i6wayan, Poanx d« Tiir-xrc^ ct 
l.oiiclu'ux I ri'iifciiiiaiit v\v dutrc | iiii 
j;rand iioiiilni' dt' tcniics proprcts a st'|>l 
aiitrrs dialcctcs dc hi iiiAiiit' langtic | 
pn'icedc I d'tiiic iii(>ii(tjjra])liie deH Dent'- 
I)iii(lji(> I (rune ^raimiiaircs I't dc ta- 
lilcaiix .synoi»ti(ine,s dcs coiijujiaisoiis | 
par I Ic R. P. K. Petitot | Missioiiiiairc- 
Olilat dc jNIaric Imiiiaciilo'c, Otiticier 
d'Acadciiiic, Mcinl)ro corn'spondaiit dc 
rAcadciiiio de Nauoy, | dc la Soci6t6 
d'Aiitliropologic ct Mcmbrc hoiioraiie 
dc la S()ci(5t6 dc Pliilologic de Paris. | 
[Two liiK^s quotation.] | [Design.] | 

Paris I I'.rncst Loronx, cditeur | 
IHn-airc dcs socict(5s Asiatiques dc 
I'aris, dc Calcutta, dc New-Haven 
(fitats-Unis), dc Shanghai (Chine) | dc 
rficolo des laugucs Oricntales vivantcs, 
de la Soeiote jdiilologique, etc. | 28, 
iu(! Poiiaparte, 2S | Maisonneuvc, quai 
Voltaire, lo \ San Francisco, A.-L. Ban- 
croft and C". I 1876 

Cover title as above, omitting the desigu, 
aud with the addition of five lines at the he- 
ginning (Biblioth6q>ie | de | linguistique et 
d\'thnograi)hioaniericaines | Publieepar Alph. 
L. I'inart | Volume II), half-title verso notes 1 
1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. preface pp.vii-ix, avant-propos 
pp. xi-xviii, monographie des Deue-Dindjie 
pp. xix-xxvi, essai sur I'origiue des Dene- 
Dindjie pp. xxvii-xlv, abreviations p. [xlvi], 
precis de grammaire comparee des trois princi- 
paux dialectes Deue-Dindjie pp. xlvii-lxxxv, 
errata pp. Ixxxvii-lxxxviii, text pp. 1-367, colo- 
phon p. [368], 5 fohh'd tables, 4°. 

Comparative grammar of the Mont.agnais, 
Pcaux-de-lievre, and Louclieux, jip. xlvii- 
lxxxv. — Dictionary of the Dene-Diudjie in four 
columns, French, Montagnais, Poaux-de-lievre, 
and Loucheux, arranged alphabetically by 
French words, pp. 1-367.— Tableau general des 
verbes Montagnais, folded table no. 1. — Suite 
des conjugaisons des verbes Montagnais, folded 
table no. 2. — Tableau general des verbes Peaux 
de Lievre, folded table no. [3]. — Tableau ge- 
neral des verbes Loucheux, folded table no. 
1 [4]. — Verbes Loucheux^ desinences irr^gu- 
lieres, folded table no. 2 [5]. 

Copies xeeii : Astor, Bancroft, ("ongress, 
Pilling, Wellesley. 

Fifty copies were issued " sur papier de Hol- 
lando extra," at 175 fr. ; 150 copies " sur papier 
fort,"at]25 fr.; and 150 copies "sur papier ordi- 
nau'e," for the use of the Mackenzie mission. 

Monographic | dcs | Dene-Diudjie | 

par I le r. p. E. Petitot | Missiounaire- 
Oblat de Maric-Immaculecj Officici' 



Petitot ( E. F. S. J.) — Continued. 

(rA(ad<'iiiie, I Mc^nibre eorrespondant 
•It! rAcadeniie dc Nancy, | de la Soci6t<j 
d'Authropologi(! | ct Mcnihrt^ houoraire 
d(! la Socicte <h'. Pliilologic ct tl'Eth- 
nograplli»^ de Paris. | 

Paris I Ernest J.,er()iix, editeiir | li- 
1)raired(!lasocict^ Asiati(inedc I'aris, | 
de I'ccole des laiign«'S oricntales vi- 
vantcs ct des soci<^tds Asiati(iues dc 
Calcutta, I de Ncw-IIavcn (Etats- 
Unis), dc Shanghai (Chine) | '2X, rue 
Bonai»artc, 28 | 187() 

(Jover title as above, half-title verso ]uinter 
1 1. title as almve verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-109, 
list of i)ublications 1 1. 8°. 

General discussion on language, ]i]i. 1-G. — 
(ieneral discussion of the Athapascan lan- 
guages (pp. 7-22) includes a sliort <oiu])arative 
vocabulary, French, Latin, Montagnais, Peaux 
deLi6vre, and Loucheux. p. 16. — A c(Uu]>arativo 
vocabulary of the Xabajo, Dene (d(^ divers dia- 
lectes) and Dindiie, P- 22. — Comi)arativc 
vocabulary of the Wakish (Tetes-Plates) and 
Yukultas (Totes-Longues), p. 104.— Compara- 
tive vocabulary of the languages of tlie Ilaidas 
(Kollouches, lies Charlottes), Tonguaa (Kol- 
louches, Alaska), Yukultas (Tetes-Longues, 
Colonibie l)ritanni(iue), AVakish (Tetes-Plates, 
Oregon), Dnaiue (Atnans, Alaska), Dindjie 
(Mackenzie), and Dene (Territoire du No.-O.), 
p. 105. — Also scattered phrases .and terms with 
significations. 

Copies seen : Astor, Brinton, Fames, Pilling. 

Six 16gcndes ain^ricaines identifices a 

I'histoire de Moisc ct du peuplc hebreu. 

In Les Missions Catholiques, vol. 10, pii. 476-624, 

vol. 11, pp. 1-lCO, Lyon, 1878-79, folio. (Pilling.) 

A legend from each of the following peoples: 
Chippewyan, Peaux de Lievre, Loucheux, Sixi- 
caques ou Pieds-noirs, Chaktas, Tzendales. in 
all of whicli native words occur patmhii. 

De Foriginc asiati(|ue des Iiuliens 

de rAmerique arctique. Par le R. P. 
£mile Petitot, O. M. I. Missionnaire au 
Mackenzie, officier d'Academie, etc. 

In Les Missions Catholiques, vol. 12, pp. 529- 
611, Lyon, 1879, folio. (Pilling, Wellesley.) 

Many Athapascan terms ;>a«S!»i. 

De I'origiue asiatique dcs ludieus de 

rAiueriquc arctitjitc. 

In Societe Philologique, Actes, vol. 12, jqi. 39- 
76, Alen(;on, 1883, 8'=. 

Une version de la legende nationale de la 
femme au nu'tal . . . cliez les Denes (par- 
allel columns French aud Dene), pp. 41-46. 

On the Athabasca District of the 

Canadian North-west Territory. By 
the Rev. finiilc Petitot. 

In Poyal Geog. Soc. I'roc. vol. 5, pji. 033-055, 
Loudon, 1883, S°. (Pilling.) 

Contains a numberof geographic, tribal, and 
personal names. 



80 



BlBLTOGKArHY OF THE 



Petitot (E. F. 8. J.) — Continuca. 

Do lii foniiatiou dii liiugajjje; mots 

formes ])ar Ic; rcdonbleiiR'nt dc raciiies 
h6t6rogt'iios, <^uoique dc sigiiiiication 
syiiouymc, c'cst-a-dirc i)ar reiteration 
copulative. 

In Association frarnjiiise i)our ra\iiucriiiciit 
cles sciences, coniiiti'-rcniUi, 12th session (llouen, 
1883), pp. G97-701, Taris, 1884, S°. (Geological 
Survey, Pillinir.) 

Contains examiiles in a niniiber of North 
American languages, among them tlie Den6 
Atnan, and Uiudjie. 

La femuie ati serpent. Legoude des 

Dene Cbippewayaus. 

In Mclusine, Keviic do Mythologie, littera- 
ture populaire, traditions ct nsages, vol. 2, ]n>. 
1, columns 10-21, Paris, April 5, 1884, 4<=. 
(Gatsehet.) 

The legend is first given in French, with the 
"Teste original du conte cbippewayan" fol- 
lowing. 

On the Athajiasca district of the 

Canadian Nortli-west Territory. By the 
Rev. Emile Petitot. 

In Montreal Nat. Hist. Soc. llecord of Xat. 
Hist, anil Geology, pp. 27-o.'!, :Moutreal, 1884, 4^. 

Contains numerous names of rivers, lakes, 
etc., in Chijipewyan. 

Keprinted with the same title in: Montreal 
Kat. Hist . Soc. Canadian llecord of Science, vol- 
1, pp. 27-52, ISIontreal, 1884, So. 

This latter magazine took the place of the 
Kecord of Natural History and Geology above 
mentioned, only one number of that serial hav- 
ing been issued. 

Parallele des eotittinies et des croy- 

auces de la famille Caraibo-Esquimunde 
arec celles des penples Altaiques et 
Pnnitptes. 

In Association fran5aise pour I'avancement 
des sciences, comiite-rendii, 12th session (Itotien, 
1883), pp. C86-697, Paris, 1884, 8°. (Geological 
Survey, Pilling.) 

A number of Dene words with French mean- 
ings ^a»«ijft. 

Melanges amcricains. Vocabulaire 

pieganiAV. Deuxieme dialecto des Nin- 
nax on Pieds-Noirs. liecneilli i)ar 
fimile F. S. Petitot. 

In Societe Philologiiine, Actes, vol. 14, pp. 
170-198, Alen§on, 1885, 8°. 

Petit vocabulaire Sarcis, pp. 195-198. 

Traditions indienues | du | Canada 

nord-ouest | par ] fimile Petitot ! ancien 
missiounaire | [Design] | 

Paris I Maisonneitve freres et Cb. 
Leclerc | 25, (luai Voltaire, 2 [5] | 1886 

I Tons droits reserves 

Colophon : Acbeve d'imprimer le 19 Aofit 
J.886 I par G. Jacob imprimeur a Orleans | pour 



Petitot (E. F. S. J.) — Continued. 

Maisonneuve freres | et Charles Leclerc | li- 
braires editeurs | a Paris 

Half-title of tlie series (Lcs | litteraturea po- 
pulaircs | tome xxiii) verso blank 1 l.titleof the 
seriesverso blank 1 1. half-title verso blank 1 1. 
title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. introduction jip. i-xvii, remarque p. 
[xviii], text pp. 1-507, index et concordance pp. 
309-514, table desmatieres pp. 515-521, ouvrages 
du memo auteur 1 1. colophon verso blank 1 1. 
list of the series verso blank 1 1. 16°. Forms 
vol. 23 of "Les litleratiircs popnlairesde toutea 
les nations.' 

Deuxieme jiartie. Legendes et traditions 
des Dindjie ou Loucheux (pp. 13-102), besides 
many terms iiaisim, contains : Texte et trad\ic- 
tion litterale do la premiere legeude [inter 
linear], pp. 95-100. — H6ros et divlnit^s des 
Dind,jie, pp. 101-102. 

Troisieme i)artie, Legendes et traditions 
desI)en6Peaux-de-Li6vro (pp. 103-30C), besides 
many terms passim, includes : Texte et traduc- 
tion litterale [interlinear of a legend], pp. 302- 
303. — Liste des heros, des divinites et des 
monstres Peaux-de-Li6vre, pj). 304-306. 

Quatrieme jiartie, Legendes ct traditions 
des Dune,Flancs-dc-Chiens et Esclaves (pi>. 307- 
344), besides native terms 2^('^^"i< contains: 
Texte et traduction litterale de la premiere 
legeude, pp. 341-343. — Heros et divinites dea 
Flancs-de-ehiens, p. 344. 

Cinquieme partie, Legendes des D6n6 
Tchixipewayan (pp. 345-442), besides many 
native words xtttssim, incliules; Texte et tra- 
duction litteiale de la ])remiere legende, pp. 
437-440.— Heros et divinites des Dene Tchippe- 
wayan, pp. 441-442. 

Copies xecn : Bureau of Ethnology, Eamea, 
Gatsehet, Pilling, Powell. 

The original texts of these traditions, with 
literal translations, were subsequently pub- 
lished as follows : 

Traditions indienues | du | Canada 

nurd-onest | Textes originaux & tra- 
duction litt6rale | par Entile Petitot | 
Ancien Missiounaire, Otbcier d'Acad(S- 
mie, Meinbre de la | Societe de I'bilolo- 
gie, etc. I [Two lines quotation] | 

Alengon | E. Renaut-de Broise, Imp. 
et Litb. I Place d' Amies, 5. | 1888 

In Societe Philologique, Actes, vols. 16 it 17 
(half-title 1 1. title as above 1 1.) pp. 169-614, 
Alen^on, 1888, 8°. (Eamea, AVellesley.) 

The whole work is in double columns, 
French and the native language. 

Deuxieme partie, Traditions (1-10) des 
Dindjie ou Loucheux (Bas-Mackenzie, Ander- 
son et Montagnes-Eocheuses), pp. 175-253. 

Troisieme partie. Traditions (1-43) des Den6 
Peaiix-de-Lievre, pp. 255-414. — Observances et 
superstitions (1-17), pp. 415-447.— Contes et 
notions physi(iues (1-16), pp. 448-403. 

Quatri6me partie. Traditions (1-9) des Dun6 
des Flancs-dc-chieus, pp. 4C5-503. 



ATHAPASCAN LANCaiAGKS. 



81 



Petltot (K. F. S. .J.)— Coiitiiimd. 

(;iiii|iiicini' pailic, 'rnHlilimis (1 17)ilis Dine 
'ri'lii|i]M\v;i\ ;nis, ])]>. 50.")-ri«K. 

iHHllcd Hcpariitcly, illso, as follows: 

Traditions iiKliciiiirs | dii | (':in;iil;i 

nonl-oneHt | Tcxtcs (>ri;;iii;uix A tia- 
(Inctiou litti5r!ilc | jiiir | Kiiiilc I'etitot, 
I Aiicicii MissidiiUiUip, Ollicier d'Aca- 
d»5ini<', Mcniliri^ dcla | Socicto dolMiilo- 
lo<;io, etc. I [Two lines qiiotat ion] | 

Alenron | E. I{cninit-<1(5 Hroisc, Ini|). 
et Lith I Placod'Armes, 5. | 1887 

Cover title: Emilia Petitot I 'rraditioiis 
iudieniifs | dii | Canada nordoiicst | (lWi'J-l«8"i) 
I Textt's origiiiaux & traduction littcralti | 
[Two linos quotation] | 

Alcncj'on I E. Konaiit-do JJroisc, Imp. d I,i(li. 
I riaci' d'Annt-s, 5. | 1>*«8 

Cover title as above, hall'titUi verso |(rinl- 
ei»s 1 1. title as above verso " Extrail dii bulle- 
tiu" etc. 1 1. introduction ]>ii. i vi, I blank 1. text 
pp. 1-439, table des cliapitres j)).. 4tl-44fl, c(do- 
phon vcrao blank 1 1. 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under litle next above, 
pp. 7-85, 87-246, 247-279. 280 29.'i. 2'.l7-:i:i.'), :i37-420. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Etlinolojjy, Eanies, 
Gatacliet, rillinj;. 

The original nianuscrijit of tlii.s work lias 
title a.s follows : 

1862-1866 I TfxtcB orij,ananx et | 

tradnctious Litterales | des j Traditions 
et Legendes | des | liabitans dn iH)rd- 
onest I du C'anada | reeneillies et tra- 
dtiites I par | Eniilo Fortnne Stanislas 
Joseph I Petitot | Aneien [Ac two 
lines] 

Manuscript, pp. 1-321, folio, in tlie library of 
the Conito de Cliaren<;ey, Paris, France, under 
whose auspices the work was published. 

En route | jionr | la nu-r glaciale | 

par I fimile Petitot | Aneien niission- 
naire, Officier d'Aead^niie, | Lanreat 
dee Soci<5t6s de geojjrajdue de Paris et 
de Londres, | Mtnnbre de 2)liisienrs 
Soci«5t^8 savautes. | Onvrago acconi- 
pagn^- de gravnres d'apres les dessins 
de I'autenr. | [Two lines ([notation.] | 

Paris I Letonzeyet Ane, editenrs | 17, 
me dn Vienx-Coloinhier | [1888] | Tons 
droits reserves. 

Cover title as above, half-title verso list 
of works by the .same author 1 1. jmrtrait 1 1. 
title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication verso 
errata 1 1. introduction ])i>. 1-3. text ]>)). 5-304, 
list of engravings 1 p. 12'. 

A few Tchippewayan, Iroquois, and other 
terms and expressions passim. 

Copies seen : Bureau of PUhnology, Pilling. 

L.a femme anx nidtanx, l(?geiHle ua- 

tionale des Daiiites. 
ATH 6 



Petitot (K. F.S.J.) — Continned. 

Meanx, 1888, Margnerith-I)n4>r^, 
inij.r. C) 

24 |)|). IJ . Title from lh<^ same author's 
.1 iitiiiir till iiriind lac. des Kselaret. 

(^nin/e ans | sons le | e<?relt! ]Milairc 

I M.iekenzie, Anderson, Yonkon | par 
I l-'.mile Petitot I Aneien Missionnaire, 
OKIeicr d'.Veademie, | Lanreat dea 
Soei(^teH de(Jeographiede Londresetde 
Paris, I Meinbre de plnsienrs Societ«^8 
savantes!. | Ouvrago a<eomi)agne de 1^ 
gravnres do IT. Hlanehard | et d'nne 
carte d'Eriiard | d'ajnes les dessins de 
I'autenr | [Two lim^s (piotation] | 
[D.-sign] I 

Paris I E. Dentn, editenr | librairo 
de la Soeiete des gen.s de lettres | 3, 
Place de Valois, Palais-royal | 1889 | 
(Tons droits r<58erv^s.) 

Cover title dill'ering somewhat from above, 
lialf-title verso list of works by the same 
authiu- 1 1. continuation of list verao frontis- 
piece 1 I. title as ifljove verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. introduction pj). xi-xvi, 
contents pp. xvii-xxi. list of illust rations verso 
blank 1 1, text \t]>. 1-322, errata verso blank 1 1. 
ma|), 12'. 

Xanies of the sixteen seasons, or divisions of 
the year, in the Peau-de-Li^vre, language, p. 
87. — XanM's of the lifteen lunar mouths in the 
Pean-de-Lievre language, p. 88.— Specimen of 
I>indji6 songs, -with tran.slation, ji. 187. — 
Words, .sentences, and names of geographic 
features in Esijuimau.x, Dind.jie, and Peau-de- 
Lievre or Dene, passim, esi)ecially on pp. 15, 
19.34, 169.180, 188.189.213. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Gatschet, 
Pilling. 

Accord I des | mythologies | dans la 

I cosmogouie des iJanites arctiipn's | 
par I Entile Petitot, Pretre ex-niission- 
naire et explor.-itenr aretiqne | [Five 
lines quotation] | [Device] | 

Paris I Eniile Honillon, (^ditenr | 67, 
rne Kichelien, 67 | 1890 

Printed <;over nearly like above, half-title 
verso works by the same author 1 1. title as 
above versf) blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. introduction \>\t. i-xiii, text pp. 1-452, notes 
pp. 45.3— J62, authors cited pp. 483-168. index pp. 
469-488, table of contents pp. 489-490, errata 
and omissa pp. 491-493, 12°. 

Many Dene-Dindjie words jtassim. — Cosmo- 
gonic table of the Mexicans, p. 460. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Gatschet, Pilling. 

Origine Asiatiijue | ties P^s(iniinanx 

I Nonvelle £tnde ethnographiqne | 
Par Emile Petitot I Ex-Missioimaire et 



82 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Petitot (E. F. S. J. ) — Continuod. 

Exi)lorjiteiir iircticiue, Cure do Mareuil- 
Ifs-Moaux (S.-ct-M.) | [Two lines quo- 
tation] I [Vi-j;uette,] | 

Rouen | iinprinierie <le Esp^rance 
Caguiard | Rues Jeanne-Dare, 88, et 
des Basnage, 5 | 1890. 

C<>ver titler as above, title as above (verso 
"Extrait ilu Bulletin de la Soci6te normande 
rti* Geographie") 1 1. text pp. 3-33, sm. 4°. 

On pp. 25-33 are given tables of words show- 
ing similarities between the words of various 
languages of the Old and Xew "World. Among 
the North American languages a number of 
examples are given from the Uindjie, Peau- 
de-Lievre, Ingalik, Slave, Tchippewyau, and 
Apache. 

Copicx geen : Bureau of Ethnology, Pilling. 

Autour du grand lac | des Esclaves 

I par I Emile Petitot | ancien missiou- 
uaireetexplorateur aretiijue | Ouvrage 
aceoinpagn6 de graviires et d'une carte 
par I'auteur | [Two lines quotation] | 
[Design] | 

Paris I Nouvelle librairie parisienne 
I Albert Saviue, <^diteur | 12, rue des 
Pyramides, 12 | 1891 | Tons droits r^- 
sevvfs. 

Cover title : fimile Petitot [ Autour | du 
grand lac | des | Escdaves | Ouvrage accom- 
pagne do gravures et d'une carte par I'auteur 
I [Two lines quotation] | [Design] | 

Paris I Xouvelle librairie parisienne | Albert 
Savine, editeur | 12, rue des Pyramides, 12 | 
Tons droits reserves. 

Cover title, ouvragesd'Emile Petitot pp. i-iv, 
errata pp. v-vi, half-title verso portrait of the 
author 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. xi-xiii, 
text pp. 1-358, notes pp. 359-364, table des 
mati6res pp. 365-369, tables des gravures verso 
blank 1 1. map, 12°. 

Les Tchippewayans (pp. 1-180), besides many 
native terms 2^<i^^<^n- contains, on pp. 97-111, a 
general account of the Athapascan and their 
divisions. — Les Flancs-de-chiens, pp. 183-314, 
contains many native terms imssim. — Les 
Esclaves, pp. 315-358, includes many native 
terms passim. — Nomenclature des peuplades 
Danites, pp. 360-363. 
Copies seen : Pilling. 

Contparative vocabulary of several 

Athapascan languages. 

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the 
library of the B\ireau of Ethnology. Kecorded 
at Fort Good Hope, McKenzie River, in the 
sumuuT of 1805. 

Entered on one of the Smithsonian forms (no. 
170) of 211 words. The first page is headed 
Famille Montagnaise on Dene (Chippewaya- 
nanok des Creos) ; 3" Nation : Esclaves — Tribu 
de3 Peaux dt) Li^vre, The blank pages arc 



Petitot (E. F. 8. J.) —Continued. 

ruled in four columns, headed respectively 
" dcmi-tribu des Kat'a-gottine (tleuve McKen- 
zie)"; "dcmi-tril)u des Yeta-gottine (mon- 
tagnes-ro('heuses)" ; "demi-tribu des Katcho- 
gottiue (limite des bois au N. E. de Good- 
Hope)"; "demi-tribu des Nnea-gottine (limite 
des bois au S. E. de Anderson)". 

The scliedule in the first column is completely 
filled, there are scarcely any words in the sec- 
ond, the third is one-fourth filled, and in the 
fourth about three-fourths of the words are 
given. 

Notes on the Montagnais or Chippe- 

wayaiis. By Father Petitot. 

Manuscript, 3 unnumbered pages, 4°, in (lie 
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Iteceived 
at the SiiiitliNonian Institution, Oct. 11, 1865. 

This m;»terial, wliicli is in French, opens on 
the first page with an account of the Monta- 
gnais, their habitat, and division into nations 
and tribes. The second and third pages con- 
tain a short vocabulary of words (pdre, mere, 
enfant, etc.) with pronominal prefixes. 

Comparative vocabulary of several 

Dene langtiages. 

Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°, in the 
library of the Bureau of P^thnology. Recorded 
at Fort Norman-Franklins, Great Bear Lake, 
Jan. 11, 1869. 

Entered on one of the Smithsonian forms (no. 
170) of 211 words, to which a score of words have 
been added by Father Petitot. The blank pages 
of the form have been ruled in four columns, 
headed respectively ; 

Dene (homo) Chippayauanok (de8_ Crees), 
Chippewyans (des Anglais), Montagnais (dea 
Fran^ais) ; Dene (homo) Kkayttchane othue 
(des Chippewyan), Hare Indians (des Anglais), 
Peaux de Lievre (des Fran9ais) ; Dimljie (homo) 
Delikewi (des Peaux de Lievre), Kutchin (de 
Richardson), Loucheux (des Fran^ais) ; Innok 
(sing.) Innoit (phn-. homo) "Wiyaskimew (dea 
Crees), Otzelna, Ennahke (des Den^s), Hoskys 
(des Anglais), Esquimaux (des Franijais). 

[Manuscripts in the Athapascan 

languages.] (*) 

In response to a request for a list, with de- 
tailed description, of his unpublished manu- 
scripts, Father Petitot wrote me from Mareuil- 
les-Meaux, France, April 24, 1889 : 

My linguistic manuscripts still in my hands 
are as follows : 

A Dene (Peau-de Li6vre)-French vocabulary, 
not comprising verbs. This I had not time to 
finish while at the mission. 

A work on the D6nii (Peau-de-Li^vre) roots, 
in alphabetic order. 

A work on the formation of language byjux- 
taposition of roots synonymous but heteroge- 
neous. This subject I treated ca.sually at the 
Rouen meeting of tlie French Association for 
the Advancement of Science, Aug. 23, 1883. 

A book of prayers for the use of the Indians 
among whom I worked. It comprises Catholic 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



83 



Petltot (E. F. 8. J. ) — (;<m( iiincd. 

prayers ill K8<iuiiiiiiu;Miil \)i;i\v (IViiii-do-Li^vn-) 
by myself; Diiidjie by li. T. ScKiii"; Dene 
(Tcliippowyaii), by Ai-ebbisliop Tarbe; and 
Dane eastor liy 11. J'. J. (Jlut, now bi.slioi) of 
Erindel. 

An Ks(iuiniaii Teliiglit catechism. 

T was oblig<^d lo b^ave at my hist, rcsicbncc, 
St. Ka|(bael, Saskatcbi wan, 75 leajjues nertb ef 
J't. Titt, several niannseripts by niy.selC, anions; 
them the fellowinj;: 

A complete course of instructions and ser- 
mons in the D<^n»S I't^au-de-Liiivre, and many 
instriuitions in Dene 'I'ehippewyan. 

A copy, written by myself, of the abridj;ment- 
of the bihle in l)en6 Tchipi)ewyan, by Myr. 
Faraud, vicar apostolic of Mackenzie. 

Chauts indiens <lii Canada | Nord- 

Oue.st I reeiieillis, clas.s6s et iiotas par 
I Emile I'otitot | protro missionnairo 
ail Matkcuzic | d<- 1862 h 1882. | Otlert 
i\ la .Smith.soiiiau Institution | avi-c Ics 
honiinages respectueux | de Tauteur | 
Eiuile Petitot ptre | car6 do Mai-euil- 
les-Meaux | (S. & M.) | 1889. 

Manuscript, 7 by 11 inches in size; title as 
above verso table 1 1. songs with musical notes 
pp. 1-16; in the library of the compiler of this 
bibliography. 

Cree songs, p. 1. — Dene Tcbipiiewayan songs, 
pp. 2-3. — Ddne Esdave songs, pp. 3-5. — Dune 
Fl.ancs-de-Chien .songs, pp. 6-7. — D6n6Peau-de- 
Li^vre songs, pp. 7-10. — Dindjie or Loucheux 
songs, pp. 11-15. — Esquimaux Tchiglit songs, 
pp. 15-16. 

finiile Fortune Stanislas .losepli Petitot was 
born, December 3, 1838, at Grancey-le-CliAtean, 
department of Cote-d'Or, Burgundy, France. 
His studies were pursued at Marseilles, first at 
the Institution St. Louis, and later at the 
higher seminary of Mar.seilles, which he entered 
ill 1857. He was made deacon at Grenoble, and 
priest at Marseilles March 15, 1862. A few 
days thereafter he went to England and sailed 
for America. At Montreal he found Mon- 
seigneur Tach6, bishop of St. Boniface, with 
"whom he set out for the Northwest, where he 
was continuously engaged in missionary work 
among the Indians and Eskimos until 1874, 
when he returned to France to supervise the 
publication of some of his works on linguistics 
and geography. In 1876 he returned to the 
missions and spent another period of nearlj- six 
years in the Korthwest. In 1882 he once more 
returned to his native country, where he has 
since remained. In 1886 he was appointed to 
the curacy of Mareuil, near Meaux^ which he 
still retains. The many years be s]>ent in the 
inhospitable Northwest were busy and eventful 
ones, and afi'orded an opportunity for gi'o- 
graphic, linguistic, and ethnologic observations 
and studies such as few have eigoyed. He was 
the first missiouary to visit Great Boar Lake, 
which he did for the first time in 1866. He went 



Petitot (E. F. S. ,J.) — C'onlinii.-.l. 

on foot from tJood IIop(f to I'rovidttice twice, 
and made many titurs in winter of forty or fifty 
days' length cm siiowsbo<-s. He was the first 
missionary to the Eskimos of the Northwest, 
luiving visit^rd them in 186.-., at the mouth of 
the Anderson, again in 18()8 at the mouth of 
the Mackenzie, and in 1870 and again in 1877 at 
Fort Mcl'lu'rson on I'eel Kivir. In 1S70 his 
travels extended into Alaska. In 1878 illness 
caused him to return south. He went on foot 
to Atliabaska, whence lu^ passed to the Saskat- 
chewan in a bark. In 1879 he established the 
mission of St. Kapliael, at Angling Lake, for 
the Chiiipewyans of that region; there he 
remained until his final departure for France ia 
January, 1882. 

For an account of his linguistic work among 
the Eskimauan and Algonquian tribes, see the 
bibliographies of those families. 

Petroff (Ivan). See Staffel (V.) and 
Petrofif (I. ) 

Pilling: This word following a title or within pa- 
rentheses after a note indicates that a coi>y of 
the work referred to is in the possession of the 
compiler of this bibliograjihy. 

Pilling (James Constantine). Smithson- 
ian institution— Bureau of ethnology | 
J.W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of 
a I bibliography | of | the languages | 
of the I North American Indians | by ( 
James Constantino Pilling | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing 
t.ffice I 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. W, 
Powell p. iii, preface pp. v-viii, introdiiction pp. 
ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of li- 
braries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii- 
xxxviii, list of fac-simih-s jip. xxxix-xl, text pp. 
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, 
index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, 
plates, 4°. 

Arranged alpliabetically by name of author, 
translator, or first word of title. One hundred 
and ten copies printed, ten of 1 hem on one side 
of the sheet only. 

Some queer American characters. 

By James C. Pilling. 

In the Analostan Magazine, vol. 1, pp. 58-67, 
Washington, 1891, 4°. 

Contains an account of the various hiero- 
glyphs, alphabets, and syllabaries in use among 
the Indians, with a number of fac-simile.s, 
anumg them one (reduced) of the title-page of 
Father Morice's Dene primer. 

Pimentel (Franciisco). Ciiadro descrip- 
tivo y comparativo | do las | leuguas 
iudigenas de Mexico | por | D. Fran- 
cisco Pimentel | socio do uumero | de 
la Sociedad Mexican a do geografia y 



84 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Pimentel (F.)— CoutimuHl. 
estadistica. | [Two lines (^notation.] | 
Tomo primero[-segundo]. I [Dosij^n.] | 
M6xico I impreuta de Audrade y 
Escalaute | calle de Tiburcio numero 
19. I 1862 [-1865]. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
blank 1 1. introduction i)i).v-lii, lialf- titles versos 
blank 2 11. text pp. 5-539, index verso blank 1 1. : 
half-title vorso works " del mismo autor" 1 1. 
title verso blank 1 1. advertenciapp. v-vi, half- 
title verso blank 1 l.text pp. 3-427, note verso 
blank 1 1. index verso blank 1 1.8'. 

Lord's i)rayer in the Lipan (los Apaches son 
una nacion bilrbara«iue recorren las provincias 
del Norte de Mexico), vol. 2, p. 251. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Boston Atbeuaeuin, 
British Museum, Congress, Eames, Watkinson. 

Cuadro descriptive y comparatiA'o | 

de las I lenguas indigenas de M6xico, | 

tratado de filologia mexicaua, | por | 
Francisco Pimentel | mieinbrodevarias 

I sociedades cientiticas y literarias de 
M<5xico, I Eiiropa y Estados Unidos de 
America. ] (8egiinda edicionunica com- 
pleta. ) I Tomo Primero[-Tercero]. | 

Mexico. I Tipogratia de Isidoro 
Epstein | Calle de Nuevo-Mexico N". 6. 

I 1874 [-1875]. 

3 vols. : printed cover nearly as above, half 
title verso notices 1 1. title as al)ove verso blank 

1 1. prologo pp. iii-xvi, text pp. 1-422, erratas 
verso blank 1 1. indict' i)p. 425—120, printed 
notices on liack cover; printed cover, half-title 
verso "obras del niisnio autor" 1 1. title (1875) 
verso blank 1 1. text i>p. 5-468, erratas verso 
blank 1 1. indice pp. 471-472, notice on back 
cover; printed cover, half-title verso "obras 
del mismo autor '" 1 1. title (1875) verso blank 1 
1. text pp. 5-565, erratas pp. 567-568, indice pj). 
569-570, copyright notice verso blank 1 1. notice 
on back cover, 8'^. 

El Apache, vol. 3, pp. 483-524, contains a 
general account of the Apache languages and 
dialects, including a comparative vocabulary in 
Spanish, Apache, and Othoiui (pp. 486-488), a 
vocabulary of the Apache Mexicano with 
Spanish definitions (pi>. 512-514), the Apache 
numerals 1-2000 (pp. 515-516), a comparison of 
forty words in eight Apache dialects, viz, 
Apache norte-americano, Ajiacbe mexicano, 
Mimbreno (Copper mine), Pinaleno, Navajo, 
XicarilVa (Faraon), Lii)an, and Mescalero (pp. 
516-521), and the Lord's pray('r in Lipan (p. 522). 
Copies seen : Eames. Pilling. 
Pinaleno Apache. Sec Apache. 

Pinart (Alphouse L.) Alpb. Pinait | 
Sur I les Atuabs Extiait de laEevne de 
Philologie et d'Etlinograpbie, \\° 2. \ 
Paris I Ernest Leronx, editenr | 
libraire des societcs Asiatiijues de 



Pinart (A. L.) — Continued. 

Paris, de Calcutta, de New- Haven | 
(fitats-Unis), de Sliangbai (Chine) | 
28, rue Bonaparte, 28 | 1875 

Cover title as above, no inside title; text pp. 
1-8, 8°. 

The dialect treated is tlio Atnaxthynne. 
General remarks, pp. 1-3. — Vocabulary of 275 
words and phrases, alphabetically arranged by 
Atnaxthynne words, pp. 3-8. 

Coj)ies seen : Pilling. 

Vocabulary of the Atnab lan- 
guage. (*) 

Manuscript, 90 pp. folio, in possession of its 
author. Russian and Atnah. Collected at 
Kadiak in 1872. May or may not belong to the 
Athapascan family of languages. 

Some years ago, in response to a re(iuest of 
mine for a list of the manuscript linguistic 
nmterial collected by him, Mr. Pinart wrote mo 
as fidlows: 

" I have collected, during my fifteen years of 
traveling, vocabularies, texts, songs, etc., gen- 
eral linguistic materials in the following lan- 
guages or dialects. It is impossible at present 
to give you the number of pages, etc., as most 
of it is to be found among my note-books, and 
has not been put in shape as yet." 

Among the languages mentioned by Mr. 
I'inai't were tlie Tlalskenai, Chiracahua 
Ai)aclie, and White Mountain Apache. 

Pino (Pedro Bautista). Exposicion | 
Sucinta y Seucilla | de la Provincial] del 
I Nuevo Mexico: | becha ] por su dipn- 
tado en C6rtcs | Don Pedro Baptista 
Pino, I con arreglo a. sus instrucciones. j 
Cadiz : ] lutpreuta del Estado-Mayor- 
General. | Ano de 1812. (*) 

51P1..80. 

" Uel Nabajoe," ten words and i>h rases, pp. 
40-41 . 

Title from the late Br. J. G. Shea, from copy 
in his possession. 

Noticias | bistoricas y estadisticas 

I de la ant igua provincia del | Nuevo- 
Mexico, I i)resentadas por su diputado 
en cortes | D. Pedro Bautista Pino, | 
en Cadiz en ano de 1812. | Adicionadas 
por el Lie. D. Antonio Barreiro en | 
1839; y ultiiuamente anotadas ]»or el 
Lie. I Don Jos6 AgustindeEscudero, | 
jiara la comisiou de estadistica militar 
I de la I republica Mexicana. | [Five 
lines quotation.] | 

Mt^xico. I Impreuta de Lara, calle de 
la Palma num 4. | 1849. 

Title vei'so blank 1 I. dedication pp. i-iv, text 
pp. 1-98, indice 2 11. map, sm. 4°. 

Del Navajoe, pp. 85-86, containsa short vocab- 
ulary (ten words) with definitions in Sjtanish. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Congress, Shea. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGITACJES. 



85 



Pope {^faj. F. L.) Vocaltulary of words 
from the Siccany liiuj^iia,i;c. 

Maiuiatnipt, pp. l-K!, 4 , in tin' lilir.ir.N i>r 
tho I'.mvau of Ktlinolo^iv. CkIIc.U.I in im):>. 

ConliiiiiH about '2><{\ worilsaiid plirasi's, in tlio 
hand writ iuij of Dr. Ol-o. Oilibs. Tlio wIkm-c- 
aWoiit.s of tho original I do not know. On tlic, 
first page is the following note : 

" Tho tribe known as tho Siccannies inhabit 
tlit^ tract of (iountry lying to tho northwest of 
Lake Tatla, in British Colnnibia, and their lan- 
guage is nearly tho same as that .spoken by the 
Connonaglis, or Xahonies, of tlie Upper Sti- 
kine." 

Pott (August Frioilrif'h). I)io | quinaro 
iiiiil vigesimalo | Zalilmotliode | boi 
Volkerii allor WelttlKulc. | N(d).st aiis- 
fiiliiliclKn'eu i'xM-iiii'rkiiugiMi | iihtir dici 
Ziihlwiirtcr Iud(),o('niiaiiis('li('ii iStaiiiiiies 
I uud eiiicm Auhaugt^ iilicr Fiiioonia- 
mi'u. I You I Ur.Auon.stFriedricli Pott, 
I onl. Prof. l&c. four linos.] | 

Halle, I C.A. Sclnvetsehke uiid Sohn, 
I 1X47. 
Cover title nearly as above, title as above 
ver.so blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. dedi- 
catory notice 1 1. preface ])p. vii-viii, text jip. 
1-304, 8°. 

Many North American langnages are repre- 
sented by nnnierals, finger names, etc., among 
them the Chippowyan (from Mackenzie) and 
Taconllies (Carrier), p. (if). 

Copies xeen : Astor, Boston Tulilic, British 
Musenm, Eames, Watkinson. 

Doppcluiig I (Reduplikation, Gemi- 
nation) als I eiiios dor wichtig.sten Bil- 
dung.s.mittel der 8i)rac'lie, | Ixdeiiolitet 
I aiis Sprachen aller Weltthcnle (lurch 
I Aug. Fri(Mlr. Pott, Dr. | Prof, tier 
AUgemeineu Spracliwiss. an cler Univ. 
zu Halle [&c. two liut^s.] | 

Lemgo & Dotmold, | im Verlag(^ der 
Meyer'schon Hof buchliandlung 1S82. 

Cover title a.s above, title as above verso quo- 
tation 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-vi, 
text pp. 1-304, list of bottks on verso of back 
cover, 8°. 

Contains examples of reduplicaticni in manj' 
North American languages, among them the 
Atlia])ascau, p. 37 ; Atnah, p. 42 ; Kenai, pp. 42, 
54, 120 : Tahculi, pp. 42, 62 ; Tlatskauai, p. 41, and 
TTnikwa, pp. 37. 42. 

Copiex seen : Astor, British Mu.seum, Eames. 

Einleituug iu die allgemeiue Sprach- 

wis.sensrliaft. 

In Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine 
Sprachwisseuschaft, vol. 1, jip. 1-08, 320-354; 
vol. 2, pp. 54-ll.">. 209-2.">l: vol. 3. pp. 110-120, 
249-275; Supp., pp. 1-193; vol. 4, i)p. 07-00; vol. 
5, pp. 3-18, Leipzig, 1884-1887. and Heilbronn, 
1889, large 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 



Pott (A. F.) — CoiiMiHied. 

'rhelili-r;itureof .Vmeric;in linguistics, vol. 4, 
l)p. 07 -'.10. Tliis portion Wiis ]>ublished after Mr. 
Potfs .le:ith. wliicli occurred July T), 1887. The 
general ediliir of the Zeitschritt, Mr. Techmer. 
states in :i noli- th;it Pott's jiaper is continued 
from t he manuscripts wliicli he left, and that it is 
to close with the huiguages of Austnilia. In the 
section of American linguistics ])ublication.s in 
all tliem<)reimi)ortanl stoi;k8 of Xortli America 
are numtioned, with brief characterization. 

Powell; Tliis word fcdlowing a title or within 
p:u-enthescs after a note indic:ites tlmt a co])y of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in tint lilirary of Major .1. \V. Powell, 
Washington, !).('. 

Powell (Maj. .loim Wesley). Indian lin- 
guistic liunilit^s of America norlh of 
Mexico. J}y J. W. Powell 

In Bureau of Ethnology, Seventh Annual 
Report, PI). 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8\ 

Athai)as(^au family, witli a list of synonyms 
and princijial tribes, derivation of the n:une, 
habitat, etc., p]). .')l TiO. 

Issued sei)aratidy as follows : 

Indian lingui.stic families of America 

I north of Mexico | By | J. W. Powell | 
Extract from the seventh annual report 
of the Bureau of ethnology [Vignette] 
Washington | Government i)rintiug 
office I 1891. 

Cover title as above, noinsi<Ietitlc. half title p. 
1, contents pp. 3-0, text pp. 7-142, map, royal 8-^. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling, Powell. 
[Vocabulary of the Navajo language.] 

Manuscript, 8 11. fcdio, written on one side 
only. Collected at Fort Deliiince, New .Mexico, 
in 1870. In possession of its :uitbor. 

('ont;iins aliout 100 words and the numerals . 
1-1000. 

Powers (Stephen). The northern Cali- 
fornia Indians. 

In Overland Monthly, vol. 8, i>p. 32">-333, 425- 
435, .530-539; vol. 9, pp. 1;55-1G4, 305-313,498-507, 
April-December, 1872. Continued under the 
titleof " The California Indians." no. 7to no. 13, 
vol.10, pp. 322-333, 535-545; vol.11, pp. 105-116; 
vol. 12, pp. 21-31, 412-424, 530-:540; vol. 13, pp. 
542-550. April, June, and August, 1873; Janu- 
ary, May, June, and December, 1874. S;in Fran- 
cisco, 1872-1874,8°. (Eames.) 

The lirst series consists of six articles, scat- 
tered through whichare ;i few nativeternis. Ar- 
ticle no. iv,vol. 9,pp. 155-164, relates to the Hoopa 
orHoopaw Indians, and contains, (mi)p. 157-1.58, 
some remarks on the II<H>pa hmguage, a speci- 
men of its vocabulary, and outlines of grammar. 

Vocabularies of the Wailakki and 

Hupa langnages. 

Manuscript, 6 uunumbevd leaves, written on 



86 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Powers (B.) — Continued. 

one side only, folio, in the library oC the lluniiu 
of Ethnology. 

Each of these vooabularie.s confain.s the 211 
wonLs adopted by theSniith.sonian Institution on 
one of its later blanks as a standard voeabuhiiy . 



Prayer book: 




Beaver 


See Bompas (W. C.) 


Beaver 


Garrioch (A. C.) 


D6n6 


Morice (A. G.) 


Chippewyan 


Kirkby (W. W.) 


Chippewyan 


Kirkby {\V. \V.) 




Bonipas (W. C.) 


Montagnais 


Legoff (L.) 


Montagnais 


Perranlt (C. O.) 


Slave 


Kirkby (W. W.) 


Slave 


Lessons. 


Slave 


P.eeve (W. D.) 


Tnkudh 


McDonald (E.) 


Prayers : 




Heaver 


See Bonipas (W. C.) 


Cliippewyan 


Bonipas (W.C.) 


Chippewyan 


Tuttle(C.R.) 


Dt>n6 


Morice (A.G.) 


Dog Rib 


Bompas (W. C.) 


Navajo 


Matthews (W.) 


Preces post. 


])rivatam [Deu6]. 



See 

Morice (A. G.) 
Prichard (James Cowles). Researches | 
into tlie I physical history | of | maii- 
kiiid. I By | James Cowles Prichard, 
M. D. F.R. S. M.R.I. A. | correspond- 
ing member [&c. three lines.] | Third 
edition. ] Vol.1 [-V]. 1 

Loudon: \ Sherwood, Gilbert, and 
Piper, I Paternoster row; | and J. and 
A. Arch, I Cornhill. \ 1836[-1847]. 

5 vols. 8'^. The words " Third edition,' which 
are contained ou the titles of vols. 1-4 (dated 
respectively 18:!6, 1837, 1841, 1844), are not on the 
title of vol. 5. Vol. 3 was originally issued with a 
title numbered " Vol. III.— Part I." This title 
was afterward canceled, and a new one (num- 
bered " Vol. ni.") substituted in its place. Vol. 
1 was reissued with a new title containing the 
words "Fourth edition" and bearing the im- 
print "London: I Sherwood, Gilbert, and Piper, 
I Paternoster row. | 1841." (Astor) ; and again 
"Fourth edition. | Vol.1. | London: | Houl.ston 
and Stoneman, | 65, Paternoster row. | 1851." 
(Congress.) According to Sabiu's Dictionary 
(no. 65477, note), vol. 2 al.so appeared in a 
"Fourth edition," with the latter imprint. 
These several issues ditfer only in the insertion 
of new titles in the places of the original titles. 
Of the Languages of the Nations inhabiting 
the Western Coast of North America (pp. 438- 
441) contains on p. 440 a short comparative 
vocabulary of the Esquimaux, Kinai, and Ugal- 

jachmutzi. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Boston AthenaMim, 

Congress, Eames. 

The earlier editions, London, 1813, 8°, and 
London, 1826, 2 vols., 8°, contain no Athapascan 
material. 



Prieres, cautifini's et catechisme en 
lanone montagnaise. See Perrault (C. 
O.) 
Primer: 

Beaver 

Chippewyan 

D6n6 

Dog Kib 

Tinne 

Tukudli 



See Bompas (W. C.) 
Bompas (AV. C.) 
Morice (A.G.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 

Proniissione.s rv>miiii Nostri .Jesn Cliristi 
factai^ Pi. Mar<;'. M. Alacoqne. | Nie/jwc-- 
kakwadhet .lesnkri dakay Marj^nerite 
I Marie Alacocpie put kudjozji, fchcen- 
tink'et I chidzji ttset siekiiiidhcri 
kwendjcet kiidjidhi/.ji. 

[Dayton. Ohio: Pliili]) A. Kemper. 
1890.] 

A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as 
above and containing twelve "Promises of ((ur 
Lord to Hlcssed jSIargaret Mary " in the 
Louclieux langu.age, ou the verso of whicli is a 
colored picture of the sacred heart, with in- 
scription in Englisli lielow. 

Mr. Kemper lias published the same "prom- 
ises" on similar cards in many languages. 

Clopii's seen : Eanies. Pilling, AVellesley. 

Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesn Christi 
factae B. Marg. M. Alacoqne. I Na' ett- 
seukago wer Jesnkri dekay<^ Margneri te 
I Marie Alacoqne pa kndezi; mdnik'e 
sedz<5e | ttsen sok6y6niwen knpa 
ktidezi. 

[Dayton, Ohio: Pliilip A. Kemper. 
1890.]" 

A small card, 3 l)y 5 inches in size, headed as 
above and containing twelve "Promises of 
Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary" in the 
Peau de Lievre language, on the verso of 
whicli is a colored picture of the sacred heart 
witli inscription in Latin behiw. 

Mr. Kemper has ))ublislied tlie same " pnmi- 
ises" on similar cards in many languages. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, yrellesley. 

Promissiones domiui nostri [Mon- 
tagnais] . See Legoff (L. ) 

Proper names: 

See Catlin (G.) 

Cremony (J. C.) 



Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Athapascan 
Athapascan 
Dog Rib 
Chipjiewyan 
Nava^io 
Nav:i,)o 
Naviijo 
Taculli 
Umjjkwa 
Psalm book : 
Tukudh 



AVhite(J.B.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Matthews (W.) 
Smithsonian. 
Anderson (A.C.) 
Stanley (J.M.) 

See McDonald (R.) 



ATHAPAS( AN I> AN( ! rA( J KS. 



S7 



Q. 



h 



Quaritch: Tliis word f'ollDWins a title or iiicliiilcd 
within ]):iiciilliiscs alter a note indicaten tliat 
ji fopy of the work I'c^tVjrred to lias been him'ii 
by the eoiiiidler in the bookstore of ISernai'd 
Quaritch. London, En^. 

Quaritch (liciiiard). A orciiorul | cfita- 
loLfiic of hoolvs, I otVcrcd to flic ])nl>lic 
at till' al'lixtMl ]»ricf,s | by | I'cniiii'd 
Qtiaiitcli. I 

London: | If) riccadilly. | 18S0. 

Title verso printers I 1. preface (dated July, 
ISHO) jip. iii-iv, table of contents pp. v-x, cata- 
loijue p)). 1-2100, general index pp. 2107-2liflr), S'^. 
Tneliides the parts issued with the numbers :i09 
XIO, from July. 1877, to Novi'mber, 1S79. 

Americaii languages, pp. 1201 120!), contains 
titles of a few woi'ks (;ontainini; material 
reliitini; to the Athapascan lanKuages. 

Gopieg aeen .- Bureau of Etlinolosy. Congress, 
Eames. 

Cataloo-ne | of hooks ou tlic | history, 

frooojraphy, | and of ( the phih>h)<fy | of 
I America, Australasia, Asia, Africa. | 
I. llistorical o^(>oo;raphy,voya_a;es, and | 
travels. | II. History, ethnology, and 
philolojfy I of America. | III. History, 
topoora])hy, and etlinolofjy | of Asia, 
Polynesia, and Africa. ' Offered for Cash 
at the affixed net prices by | Bernard 
Quaritch. | 

London : | 15 Piccadilly, June 1885 to 
October 1886. | 1886. 

Title verso contents 1 1. catalogue pp. 2747- 
^102, index pp. i-lxii, 8°. Lettered on the back: 

QfARITCH'S I GENERAL | C.\TALOGrE | PAKT Xll. 
I VOYAaES I AND | TRAVELS | AMERICANA | AND | 

ORIENTALIA I LONDON 1886. This volume com- 
prises nos. 362-364 (June, July, and August, 
18S.J) of the paper-covered sei'ie.s,with the addi- 
ti(m of ,a special title and a general index. 
American languages, pp. 3021-3042, contains 



Quaritch (I?.) — Continued. 

titles of books relating to the .Vthapascan l:in- 
guages. 

The complete " deneral Catnlngue,'" of which 
the above' is a jiart, coniiu'ises 15 volumes bound 
in red cloth, paged consecutively 1-4000. ICacli 
volume has its own special tilleand indi'X. with 
thetitlcof Hie seriesanil the numberof the part 
lettered ou I lie baiU. 11 was originally issued 
as nos. 332-37.'> of thts Jiaper-covered series, from 
November, 1880. to August. 1887, at whicli date 
the publication was discontinued. 

Copies seen : Karnes. 

A large ])aper edition as follow s : 

A ijeneral | catalo.onc of boo]<s | o)'- 

fered to the jniblic at the afiixed jirices. 
I by I Bernard Quaritch | V(d. I[-VI] | 

London: | 15 Piccadilly, | 1887. 

G vols, royal 8^. An index vcdiime was an- 
nounced, but it has not yit (March. 1Sil2) ap- 
peared. 

American languages, iis uudci the ]ireceding 
title, v(d. ,5, ])p. :«111-:!012. 

Copies acen : Lenox. 

This edititm was ])ublisliiMl at !.">/. for the set. 
including the seventh or index volunie. 

No. 86. London, December, 1887. | A 

rono-h list | of | vahnible and rare 
boidvs, I conipiisino- | the choicest ]ior- 
tionsof Various Libraries, | and many 
very cheap works of every class of Lit- 
erature, I at greatly reduced ])riees, | 
ottered l)y | Bernard Quaritch, 15, Pic- 
cadilly, W. 

Printed cover (with title: 'The mi.scellane- 
ous and the niusiciil libniry of Mr. AVilliam 
Chappell," etc.). eatiilogue with lieailiiiir as 
above, pp. 1-128, S'^. 

American languages, ]>]>. l-i:!, cont:iins titles 
of a few works giving information relating to 
the Athapascan languages. 

Copies seen : Eames. Pilling. 



R. 



Radloff (Leopold). Einio-c i<ritische 
i?emerkungen iiber Hrn. Buschniitnn's 
Behandlnuo- der Kiniii-Sprache; von 
Leopold Radloff. 

In Academic Imp. des Sciences, Mehuiges 
ru.sscs, vol. 3, pp. 364-399, St. Petersburg, 1857, 
8°. (Eanu-s.) 

The grammatical sketch of the Kinai in this 
article is extracted from the Morks of Lisi- 
iinsky, Resanow. Dawydow. and Wrangell. 

At tluM'udof the article is tlienote: (Aus 
dem Bull, hist.-phil., T. xiv. No. 17, 18. 19). 



Radloff (L.) — Continued. 

M^moires | de | rAeadi^mie imp^- 

riale des scieuees de St.-Petersbonrg, 
VII- st^rie. | Tome XXI, N"8. | Leojudd 
Ix;idlott"s I Wihterbuih der Kinai- 
Sprache | heransgegeben | von | A. 
Scdiiefner. | (Lu le 5 mars 1874.) | 

St.-Pdtersbourg, 1871. | Connnission- 
iiiiires de I'Academie Imi>eriale des 
sciences: |a St.-P^ter.sbourg: ] MM. 
Eggers et C''', H. SchmitzdortV, I J. 



88 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Radloff (L.) — CoutinmHl. 

I.ssakof et Tcliorkessof; | a Riga: | M. 
N. Kymmel; | a Odessa: | M. A. F.. 
Kecliribardslii; | a Leipzig: | M. Leo- 
pold Voss. I Prix: 40 Kop.=13 Ngr. 

Cover title as above, title as above veisu 
notices 1 1. preface (by A. Schiefuer) pp. i-x, 
text pp. 1-33, 4°. 

Brief graminatic sketch, with sonjjs, pp. i- 
X. — Gerinan-Kiuai ilictionary (double col- 
niuiis), pp. 1-32.— Numerals, 1-1000, pp. 32-33. 

CopifS seen : British Museum, Congress, 
Kames, IMlliug. 
Reeve {Archdeacon W. D.) The | lord'.s 
prayer, apostles' ereed, | Ac | in the | 
Slavi language. , Coiiipilcd | by the 
rev. AV. D. Reeve. | 

London : | Church niissionary house, 
" I Salisbury square. | 1881 

Title ve^o printers 1 1. half-title (" Syllaba- 
rium") p. [3] the verso p. [4] giving the sylla- 
bai-y, " Syllabarium" in romau characters 
p. 15], text (alternate pages syllabic and roman 
characters) pp. 6-11, 16°. 

Christ's love (hymn) in syllabic characters, 
p. 6; same in roman. p. 7.— Tlie Lord's pr.ayer, 
ten coniniaiidnients in brief, syllabic, p. 8; same 
in roman, p. 9.— The apostles' creed, and a 
prayer, syllabic, p. 10; same in roman, p. 11. 

Copies seen : Chundi Missionary Society, 
Eames, Pilling. 
The Chipevvyan Indians. 

In Our Eorest Chihlren, vol. 2, pp. C-7, Shiug- 
wank Home [Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario], April 
1S8S, 4-. 

Contains a lis* of Chipewyan tribes .and 
twenty-nine Cliipewyan words and short .sen- 
tences with English meanings. 

See Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. 

D.), in the Addenda. 

The index entries under Bible, page 8, refer- 
ring to tliis autlior .'ire incorrect; they should 
re.id "Bompas (AV. ('.) and Keeve (W. D.)" 
Titles of the works r.tern-d to will he found in 
the Addeiida. 

See Hymns. 

See Lessons. 

Eelationships: 
Apache 
Apache 
Athapascan 
Kutchin 
Louclienx 
Navajo 

Peau de Lievre 
Slave 
Slave 
Tnkndh 
Tukudh 



See Morgan (L. H.) 
White (J. B.) 
Dorsey (.T. O.) 
Herdesty (W.L.) 
:Morgan (L. H.) 
Packard (R. L.) 
Morgan (L. H.) 
Kennicott (R.) 
Morgan (L. H.) 
McDonald (R.) 
Morgan (L. II.) 



Richardson (.Sir John). Arctic | search- 
ing expedition: | a | journal of a boat- 



Richardson (J.) — Continued. 

voyage | through Rupert's land to the 
Arctic sea, | in .search of | the discovery 
ships under command of | sir John 
Franklin. | With an appendix on tlie 
physical geography of North AInt^ric:l. 
I Bysir.Iohu Richardson, C.B.,F.R.S. | 
inspector of naval hospitals and fleets, 
I etc. etc. etc. | In two volunu^s. | V(d. 
I[-1I]. I Published by authority. | 

London: | L(uigman, Brown, Green, 
and Longmans. | 1851. 

2 vols. : frontispiece 1 1. title verso notice ;uid 
printers 1 1. contents pp. iii-viii, text pp. 1^13 
verso printers, eight other pl.ates; frontispiece 
1 1. title ver.so printers 1 1. contents pp. iii-vii, 
text pp. 1-1.')7. appendix pp. 159-402, explanation 
of l)l:itts i& u pp. 403-416. postscript )iii. 417- 
426. folded map, 8°. 

Chap. xii.Ou the Kutchin or Louclieux, vol. 
1, pp. 377-113. contains a number of tril>;il names 
witli Englisli meanings.— Chapter xiii. Of the 
'Tinne or Chepewy.ans, vol. 2. pp. 1-32, contain.s 
a number of trilial ]i.ames with definitions. — 
V(»cabulary of the Chepewy,in of Atliab.isca 
(about 330 words ami phrases collected from 
Mrs. Mcl'herson), vol. 2, pp. 387-395.— Dog-ril> 
vocabulary (32 words, collected by Sir John 
Richanlson at Ft. Confidence), vol. 2, pp. 395- 
390.— Dog-rib vocabulary (00 words collected by 
an officer of the Hudson Bay Co. at Ft. Simp- 
s<m), vol. 2, ]). 397. 

Contains also the following: 

Lefroy (J. H.), Vocabulary of Cliepewyan and 
Dog-rib words, vol. 2, pp. 400-402. 

McPherson (M.). Vocabulary of the Cliepe- 
wyan, V(d. 2. pp. 382-385. 

Murray (A. H.). Comparative vocabulary of 
the Kutchin and Dog-rib. vol. 1, pp. 399-400. 

A'ocabulary of the Kutchin of the 

Yukon, vol. 2, pp. 382-385. 

O'Brian (— ), Vocabulary of Fort Simpson 
Dog-rib. vol. 2. p. 398. 

Voi-abulary of the Mauvais Monde and 

of 1hi> Dog-rib of tlie River of tlie Mountain, 
vol.2, pp. 397-400. 

Copiex seen : Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
iiiPum, British Museum, Congress. E.imes. Geo- 
logical Surve.v. Trumbull. 

Arctic I searching expedition : | a | 

journal of a boat-voyage through Ru- 
pert's I land and the Arctic sea, | in 
search of the discovery ships under 
command of | sir .John Franklin. [ With 
an appendix on the i)liysical geogra- | 
l)hy of North America. | By sir John 
Richardson, C. B., F. R. S., | inspector 
of naval hospitals and fleets, | etc., etc., 
etc. I 

>;t'\v York: | Harper and brothers, 
luiblishers, | 82 Cliff street. \ 1852. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



89 



Richardson (J.) — ContiniKMl. 

I'illr viiHK lihiiik 1 1. nnilciils )»]>. v~\i. tixl 
pp. ]:!-:!:!(;, ap])i-iiilix J>p. Il.!7 r>l(i, iMlviTlisiMiirnls 
pp. 1-0, l-;i, :( miiiinnlM'n'il j>p. iS . 

Liuffiiistics as in the. orijciiiiil •■tliliou tillcil 
11. xt alM.v.', i>p. 2f.2-277, 4-J'i-4i:!, rm-iMi. 

I'lipirs Ki'fii : Ifaivaid. (Iili. A. W. (irci'ly, 
Wasliiii^it.m. 1). C. 

Arrtic I scarchiiijj cxixMlilioii : | ii | 

joiiniiil of ;i l»oiit-\(>yii<;(' tlir<Mij>h Jiu- 
licrt'.s I 1;iih1 :iih1 tliti Arctic ,scu, | in 
Kcuri'ii (tl' the discovery «liij)s under 
coiiiniand of | sir Jolm Friinklin. | Witli 
.•III a|i|M'ii(lix on the ]>hysical <fe<»frra- | 
]ihy oi' Nortii Aincrii^u. | By sir John 
Kitliardsoii, ('. 1?., V. M. S., ins]iect(>r of 
na\al hosjiitals ami llects. | etc., etc., 
etc. I 

New York: | Ilai-jicr .ami lirothers, 
pnhlishcrs, | :]29 &. 331 Vvav] street, 
I'^iaiiklin .square. | 1854. (*) 

.■.If) |.p. S\ Title IVoiii ftfu. A. W. Groely. 

Field's salo (^ataloj^uc, no. li)71, inwilioiis !Ui 
pditioii, Ni'W Voi'k, HariMr i; ]'.i(.tln-rs, 1.S.50, .^>lf) 
VP. 1-^. 

Rivington ( — ). See G-ilbert ( — ) .ind 
Riviugton ( — ). 

Roehrig (F. L. O.) [A comparative 
voc.ilinlai'v of the Chepcwyan (accord- 
iiif^ to K. Ii. Ros.s), the Chipewyan 
(according to Kennicott), the Shive 
Indians (accordiuj^ to Kennicott), the 
Hare Indians of Fort Good Hope 
(accordinj;' to Kennicott), and the Hare 
Indians of (ireat Hear Lake (ac(K)rdin,i;' 
to I'et-itot), with remarks on each l>y 
F. L. ( ). Roelirij,^ .lannary 1."), 1874.] 

Maini.sci-i|»t, 22 nnnmiilMM'od le.avcs, 4'', in 
tin- library oftlm Bureau nf Ktlinolojry. 

Till' viK'almlaries, 180 words eacli (cojiicd 
from nianiiscriiits at that time in llie lilirary 
of the Smithsonian Institution), .are in iiarallel 
eolmiiiis and (leeiipy it leaves. These aie fol- 
lowed liy I'A p.ages of " remarks," each vocah- 
nlarv l.eini; treated of separately. 

[A comparative vocabulary of the 

hmgiiages of the Kntchin tribes, ein- 
bracinu; the Kut-cha-kut-chin (accord- 
inij to Ilerdesty); the Kut-cha-kut- 
ihin (according to Kenni<H>tt's nianu- 
script), and theKiit-cha-knt-cliin (from 
a i»rinted copy of Kennicott), with 
remarks by V. L. O. Roelirig. .lainiary 
15, 1^<71.] 

Maiiiiseriiit, 17 unmimltered leaves, 4"'. in (lie 
library of tlie ]?i\reaii of Etlinoloji'V. 

Tlie tlirei- \oeal>ularies, of ISO words eaeh 
(copied fioMi maniiseripis then in the liln-ar.\ of 
the Smitlisonian lu.stitiition), are in jiarallel 



Roehrig (F. L. O.) — Continued. 

eolnmns, oceiijiy the first !t leaves, and are frd- 
lowed hy Dr. Koehrifj'.s remarks, 8 1)., in whieli 
lie treats of each vocahiihiry se]>aratel\ . 

[A comparative vocabuhiry of the 

Nahawncy, or Indians of the mountains 
northwest of Fort Liard (according to 
Kennicott), and of the Nehawney of 
Nchawney River (according to R. IJ. 
Ross), Avith n^marks liy V. L. O. 
Roehrig. February, 1874]. 

Mannsrri|)t, 14 nniinmliered pages, 4'\ in the 
libr.'iry of the I'.iireaii of Klhnology. 

The voeabnlaries, eonsisting of IKQ words 
eaeh (eo])ie<l IVoiii niaiiusiiipts then in llie 
lii.rary of the Sniithsonian Institution), are in 
parallel eoluinns, followed hy a third column 
headed "remarks," wliieh are comparatively 
few in number; they occupy ]>aj;es. Follow- 
ing these are 5 ]>ages, containing two sets of 
"remarks," also by I'rof. Roelirig, two pages of 
which refer to the voi^aliulary of Kennicott and 
three to that of Itoss. 

[A comparative xocabnlary of tlie 

Tahcnlii (according to Anderson, in 
Hah'-'s exphning w.\peditioii) and of 
tlie Kenai (from the governor of Rus- 
sian America), with lemarks by F. L. 
O. Roehrig. February, 1874.] 

Manuscript, 14 unnumbered Jiages, in the 
library of the Bureau of Ethmdogy. 

The vocabularies (the first of ISO words, the 
second of 60) are in jiarallel columns and oc- 
ciijiy 10 jiages. These are followed by 4 pages 
containing two sets of "I'emarks," the first 
three pages relating to the vocabulary of Ander- 
.son and one to that last mentioned in tlie title. 

[A comparativt^ vocabulary of the 

Tfong-kutchin (with the original 
s])cllingof th«! anonymous vocabulary), 
the Natsit kntchin (according to R. B. 
Ross), and another Kntchin dialect 
(not sjieci tied ; according to R. B. Ro.ss), 
with remarks by F. L. O. Roehrig. 
August 17, 1874.] 

Manuscript, 15 niiniimliered leaves, 4'^, in 
the library of the Bureau of Etliuidogy. 

The vocabularies, 180 w»rds eaeli (copied 
from manuscripts then in tli<' library of tin- 
Smithsonian Institution), are in jiarallel col- 
umns, occupying 9 leaves, followed by the 
remarks, by Dr. Roehrig, eacli set of word.s 
being treated of separately. 

[A comparative vocabulary of the 

Sikani and Beaver Indians, enibraciug 
the Si-kan-i (according to R. R. Ross) ; 
the Si-kan-i (according to V. L. Pope) ; 
the Sikani of the mountains south of 
Fort Liard; and the Beaver Indians of 
Peace River west of Lake Athabasca 



90 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Roehrig (F. L. O.) — Cnntimi.'d. 

(adcordinn-to KeiniicH)tt) ; with remarks 
by F. L. O. R()ollri,i,^ August 20, 1874.] 
Manuscript, 16 unuiimberpil leaves, 4°, in 
tLe library ot tlie lUireau of Ethnology. 
» The vocabularies, 180 words eacli (copied from 
maiiuscriiits then in the library of tlie Smitli- 
sonian Institution), are in parallel columns and 
occupy 9 leaves ; these are followed by 7 leaves 
containing remarks on eacli by Dr. Roelu-ig. 

"Wliile in chariie of the philologic collections 
made by thc^ Siiiitlisonian InstitutionDr.Gibbs 
was accustomed to refer tlie material relating 
to the several lingui.stic families to specialists 
throughout the country, in order that he might 
have the benefit of their knowledge of the sub- 
ject. In purs)iance of this policy Prof. Rix^lirig 
was called upon for assistance, and the col- 
lections relating to a number of families in the 
north west wei'eseut to him foi- criticism, among 
them the Athapascan. 

The various m.anuscripts noted above under 
the head of " Ilemarks " are the result of this 
plan. 
Rogue River: 

Vocabulary See Earnhardt (W. II.) 

Vocaliulary Dorsey (J. O.) 

Tril)al names Dorsey (J. O.) 

Rogue Ri \ cr ,Jolin. Seo Dorsey (J. O. ) 

Rooney (Juke). >Sec Dorsey (J.O.) 

Ross (Alexander). See Dorsey (J. O.) 

Ross (R. B.) VocabuLiry of the purt^ 
Ch»pewyau,or language of the Cariboo- 
eaters and Ycllowknives. 

Manuscript. C unnumbered leaves, written 
on one side only, folio, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Recorded ou one of the "standard vocabu- 
lary" forms ot the Smithsonian Institution, con- 
taining 180 words, equivalents of all of which 
are given. The manuscript is in the hand- 
writing of Dr. Geo. Gibbs. 

Vo(uibulary of the Kutcha Kutchiii, 

Yukon River. 

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, 
written on one side only, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Procured from Mr. 
Herdesty, who had resided among these 
Indians about ten years. 

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion's standard vocabulary forms of 180 words, 
equivalents of nearly all of which are given. 
The handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs. 

Vocabulary of the Natsit Kutchin 

(Strong Men) language. 

Manuscript, 6 unniunbered leaves, folio, 
written <m one side only, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Pro(!ured tVom an Indian 
who h.ad been several years in the Hudson Bay 
Company's servi(^e. 

Recorded on one of the forms of the Smith- 



Ross (R. B.) — Continued. 

souian Institution's standard vocabulary of 180 
words, nearly all the blanks being filled. Tho 
handwriting is that of Dr. GiV)bs. 

Vocabulary of the Nehaunay of 

Nehaunay River. 

Manuscript, 6 unniunbered leaves, folio, 
written on one side only, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected from a mem- 
ber of one of the tribes residing in the moun- 
tainous country between iIk^ Linnl and Mac- 
kenzie rivers. 

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion's standard vocabulary forms of 180 words, 
eq iiivalents of nearly ;ill of wliicli :irc given. 
The manuscript is in tin- linmlw riling of Dr. 
Gildjs. 

Vocabulary of the Si-kan'-i lan- 
guage. 

Manuscript, uiiiiiimbered leaves, Avritteii on 
one side only, folio, in flic library of th<' liurcau 
of Ethnology. 

Recorded ou one of flic .Smithsonian forms of 
180 words, equivalents of all ol' which are given. 

Vocabulary of a dialect of the Tin- 

nean language. 

Manuscript, 6 unnumbered leaves, folio, 
written ou one sidi^ only, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Recorded on one of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion's forms of a st.Tndard vocabulary of 180 
words, equivalents of nearly all of them being 
given. The handwriting is that of Dr. Gibbs. 

Ro.st (Reinhold). The | lord's prayer | 
In Three Hundred Languages ) coni- 
prisin g the | leading languages and 
their princii)al dialects | throughout 
the world | with the places where 
spoken | With a preface by Reinhold 
Rost, I CLE., LL.D., PH.D. | 

London | Gilbert and Rivington | 
Limited | St. John's house;, Clerkenwell, 
E. C. I 1891 I (All rights reserved) | 

Title verso quotations 1 1. preface 2 11. con- 
tents 1 1. text pp. 1-88, 4°. 

The Lord's jirayer in .a number of American 
languages, among them theCliippewyaii (sylla- 
bic), p. 14 ; Chippewyan or Tinne (roman), p. 14 ; 
Slave-Indian (I'oman), p. 75; Slave-Indian (syl- 
labic), p. 75; Tukudh, p. 84. 

Copies seen : Eames. 

The I lord's prayer | In Thr(;e Hun- 
dred Languagt?s | comprising the | 
leading langnagi^s and their principal 
dialects | throughout the world | Avith 
the places where spoken | With a pref- 
ace by Reinhold Rost, | C. I. P]., LL.D., 
PH. D. I Second editi(m | 
London | Gilbert and Riviugtou | 



ATHAPASCAN LANGlJAdKS. 



01 



Rost (R.) — Colli iiiiicd. 

Limiti'd I St. Joliii'sh(ms(',Clt^rl«Mi\v<'ll, 
E. C. I 1X91 I (All rights reserved) | 

Titli^ \i Tsi) (|iii>t;iticiiis 1 1. ]>rcrii(r 2 ll.cdii 
tt^iits 1 1.1. 'Vt 1.]). 1-SS, 4 '. 

Liiiuni.stic. roiilcMits aHuiidci'tilUiiioxtubdvti. 

('iipifs .seen : I'illiii;;. 



Ruby (Charles). Vocaliularv <>l' ilie 
C'hirii<:almii-Ai»:iciu^ l;mj;ii:me. 

Mimiisi-ript, I! imiiiiiiil(crc(l Imivis, liilio, 
wiitlrii on niic .side, only, in the lil)r;iiy of llio 
l'.iin^;iu ol' Ktlmolojiy. UiM-onli-d, Si^pt., l«H(i, 
wit li tlic^ aMsisfiincc ol'^Iickry I''ii'i'. infci)in'- 
ter. 



s. 



Sabin (.l()se)>li). A | dictionary | of | 
Hooks rel.it iiij;' to Aiiieriea. | from its 
discovery to tlie present time. | Hy 
Josejili Sal)in. | Volume I[-XIX]. | 
[Three lines (| notation.] | 

New-Vork : | .rose]th S.iliin, St Nassau 
street. I 1S(;S[-1S!»1]. 

lit vols. S^. Still in course of ])iibliciitioii. 
Parts cxv-cxvi, now in pri\ss (Miinili, 1802), 
have rcaclieil flic, entry "Sniitli," anil will com- 
nicncc vol. 20. Now edited by .Mr. Wilberforcc 
Eaincs. 

('ontains titles of many boidvs in and relatinj; 
to tli(^ Athapascan languages. 

Oupiea seen : Congress, Eame.s, Geological 
Survey, Lenox. 

See Field (T.W.) 

St. Mark [in the Tinne laugiiajjfe]. See 
Kirkby ( W. W. ) 

Sayce (Archihald Henry). Introdnctiou 
to the I science of language. | By ( A. 
H. Sayce, | dt^pnty professor of compar- 
ative philology in the university of 
Oxford. I In twovcdumes. | Vol. I[-II]. 
I [Design.] I 

Loudon: | C. Kegaii Paul & eo., 1, 
Paternoster siprare. | 1880. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
quotationand notice 1 1. preface pp. v-viii, table 
of contents ver.so blank 1 1. text pp. 1-441, colo- 
phon verso blank 11.: half-title verso blank 1 1. 
title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of 
contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-352, selected 
list of works pj). 353-363. index pp. 3G.5-421, 12°. 
A few Hoopah and Navaho words, with ex- 
planations, vol. 1, p. 121. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Etlmology,Eaiues. 

Schomburgk (Sir Robert Herman). Con- 
tril)utions to the I'hilological Ethnog- 
raphy of South America. By Sir R. H. 
Schomburgk. 

In Philological Soc. [of London] Proc. vid. 3, 
pp. 22S-237, London, 1848, S^. 

Affinity of words in the Guinau with othej- 
languages and dialects in America, pp. 236-237, 
contains, among others, examples in Atuah. 

A vocabulary of the Maiangkong 

language [South America]. 

In Philologic:il .Soc. [of London] Proc. vol.4, 
pp. 217-222. Loudon, 1850, 8°. 



Schomburgk (R. H.) — Cmil iimed. 

Confaitis the word for sun in tin- languages 
of the Ghippewyan, Kinai, and "Tribes of the 
northwest coast of America." 

llobert Ilerman Schomburgk, a (ierman ex- 
phu'cr, was boi-n in Freiburg on fli<" ITnslriith, 
Prussia, June 4, 1804: died in Scliiineberg. ne;ir 
JSerlin, March 11, 18()."). lie enlered c iiiwniiTii:il 
life, and in 182(> came to the rniled Sl;iles, 
where, after working as a clerk in Hoston and 
Pliihideljihia, be became a partm-r in l.'^JS in ;i 
tobacco manufactory at llichinonil. \':\. The 
factory was burned and Schomburgk was 
ruined. After unsucces.sfnl venluies in the 
West Indices and ('eiifral .VHieric;!. lie wi-nt to 
the island of Anegada. one of tin- Niigiu 
groii]), where he undertook tw m.ike a survey of 
the coast. Although he did not ]>ossess the 
si)ecial knowledge that is reiinired lor such a 
woi'k. he performed it well, and his rcpoits pro- 
cured him in 1834. from the Crcographical Soci- 
ety of London and some botanists, means to 
explore the interior of Biitish (Juiana, which 
was then entirely unknown. After a thoi-ough 
exi)loration during 1833-1839, he went to London 
in the summer of 1839 with valuable collections 
of animals and plants, mostly new species. 
Schomburgk sailed again from London fur 
(leorgetown in Pecembei-, 1840, as iire*;iil<iit of 
a commission to detcj-uiine the boundary line 
between British Guiana and Brazil. :ind to 
make further geographical and ethnologic;il 
observations. He was joined there by liis 
brother, Moritz Richard. On their return to 
London in June, 1844, Schomburgk i)rescnted a 
report of his journey to the Geographical 
Society, for which the queen knighted him in 
1845. After a few luonths' rest he was given 
an ai)i)ointment in the colonial department 
and sent to make researches upon the idioms of 
the aborigines of South America. In 1S48 lie 
read before the Biitish Associatiiui a pa])er in 
which he proposed an alphabetical system for 
the Indian dialects. — Appleton's Cyclop, of A»i. 
Biog. 

Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe). Historical 
I and I statistical information, | re- 
specting the I history, condition ;ind 
prospects | of the | In<lian tribes of the 
United States: | collected and prepared 
under the direction | of the | bureau of 
Indian atfairs, | ])er act of Congress of 
March 3d, 1847, | by Henry R. School- 



92 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued, 
craft, LL.D. | Illustrated by S. East- 
man, capt. U. S. A. I Published by Au- 
thority of Congress. I PartI[-VI]. I 

Philadelphia: ] Lippiucott, Grambo & 
company, | (successors to Grigg, Elliot 
& CO.) I 1851[-1857]. 

Engraved title: |Eiij;i-aving.] | Historical | 
and I statistifal intorniatioii | respectiiiji' the | 
history, tonditiou and iirr)s]i('cts | oC tlu^ | In- 
dian tribes of tli(^ ITnitcd States ; Collfcled and 
prei)aicd under tlie | direction of tlie liureau of 
Indian affairs per act of Congress | of MareliS'''' 
1^47, I 1)\ Henry R. Schoolcraft L. L. D. 1 Illus- 
trated liy I S. Eastman, capt. II. S. army. | [Coat 
of arms.) | l»nldished by autliority of Congress. 
I I'.irt I[ VI]. I 

Philadelphia: I Lippincott, (Irambo & co. 

6 vols. 4°. Beginning witli vol. 2 the word.s 
"Historical and .statistical" are left otT the 
title-pages, both engraved and printed. Siibse- 
qiiently (1S.^>;!) vol. 1 was also issued with the 
abridged title beginning " Information respect- 
ing the history, condition, and prospects of the 
Indian tribes," making it uniform with tlie 
other parts. 

Two editions with these title-pages were pub- 
lished by the same house, one on thinner and 
.somewhat .smaller paper, of which but vols. 1-5 
were issued. 

Part I, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological re- 
searches, respecting I the red man of America) 
verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso 
blank 1 1. printed title as above verso blank 1 1. 
introductory documents pp. iii-vi, preface pp. 
vii-x, list of plates pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xiii- 
xviii, text pp. 13 ;i'J4, appendix pp. 525-5G8, 
plates, colored litliographs anil mai)s numbered 
1-76. 

Part u, 1852. Half-title (as in p.irt 1) verso 
blank 1 1. engraved title (Information re.specting 
the history condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
blank 1 1. printed title (Information respecting 
the history, condition and iirospecls, etc.) ver.so 
printers 1 1. dedi<'ation verso blank 1 1. introduc- 
tory document pp. vii-xiv,contents p)>. xv-xxii, 
list of plates \>\t. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608, 
plates and maps numbered 1-29, ,11-78, .and 2 
plates exliiljiting the Cherokee alphabet and its 
application. 

Part m, 1853. Half-title (as in part i) verso 
blank 11. engraved title (as in partil)verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part ii) verso printers 1 1. 
third report pp. v-viii, list of divisions p. ix, 
contents pp. xi-xv, list of plates pp. xvii-xviii, 
text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 1-21, 
25-45. 

Part IV, 1854. Half-title (as in part i) verso 
blank 1 1. engraved title (as in part U) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in p.art u) verso Idank 1 1. 
dedication pp. v-vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list 
of divisions p. xi, contents pp. xiii-xxiii, list of 
plates pp. xxv-xsvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and 
maps numbered 1-42. 



Schoolcraft (II. R.) — Continued. 

Pai't v, l.'^.V). Half-title (as in part i) verso 
blank 1 1. engraved title (as in part ll) verso 
blank 1 1. printed title (as in part ll) ver.so blank 
1 1. dedication pp. vii-viii, fifth report pp. ix-xi i, 
list of divisions p. xiii, syjiop.sis of general 
contents of vols. l-v pp. xv-xvi, contents ))p. 
xvii-xxii, list of plates j)]). xxiii-xxiv, text \^\i. 
25-625, appendix pp. 027-712, plates and maps 
numbered 1-8, 10-36. 

Part VI. 1857. Half-title (General history | id' 
the ( Nortli American Indians) verso blank 1 1. 
portrait 1 1, printed title (History | of th(v Inilian 
tribes of the United States: | their ] ])reseiit 
condition and prospects, | and a sketch of tlieir 
I ancient status. | Published by order of Con- 
gress, ! under the direction of the Department of 
theiiiterior — Indian bureau. | P>y | Henry Ro\\e 
Schoidcraft. LL. I). | Member [&c. six lines.] | 
"With Illustrations liy Eminent Artists. ] In one 
v<dunie. | Part vi. of the series. | Philadelphia: 
I J. P.. Lippiucott &, CO. I 1857.) verso Idank 1 1. 
in.scription verso blank 1 I. letter to the Presi- 
dent jip. vii-viii. report pp. ix-x, preface pp. xi- 
xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxvi, list of plates i)p. 
xxvii-xxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-7.5U, 
fifty-seven plates, partly sele<'ted from tlie 
other volum(>s, and three tables. 

Eaton (J. H.). Vocabulary of tlie Navajo, 
vol.4, pp. 410-131. 

Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indiailwtami- 
lies of hiuguiiges, vol. 3, pp. 397-402. 

Gibbs (<!.), Observations on some of the 
Indian dialects of northern (California, vol 3, 
pp. 420-423. 

Vocabularies of Indian languages in 

northwest California, vol.3, ]>p. 428-445. 

Henry (C. C.), Vocabulary of the Apache, 
vol. 5, jip. 578-589. 

Copies aeen : Astor. Bancroft, Boston Atlie- 
naMim, British Museum, Congress, Eanies, 
National Museum, Powell. .Shea, Trumbull. 

At the FischiTsale, no. 1.581, Quaritcli liought 
a copy for U. lO.s. Tlie Field copy, no. 2075, scdd 
for $72; the Menzies copy, no. 1705, for $132; the 
Squier copy, no. 1214, $120; no. 2032, $60; the 
Ramirez copy,no. 773 (5 v(ds.), 5i.5x. ; tln^ Piuart 
copy, no. 828 (5 vols, in 4), 208 fr. ; the Murphy 
copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no. 
30017, lo;. 10s.; by Clarke & co. 1886, $65; by 
Qn.aritch, inl888,15J. 

Reissued with title-pages as follows : 

- — Archives i of | Aboriginal Knowledge. 
1 Containing all tlie | Original Papers 
laid before Congress | respecting the | 
History, Anticinities, Language, Eth- 
nology, Pictogriijdiy, | Rites, Supersti- 
tions, and Mythology, | of the j Indian 
Tribesof the United States | by j Henry 
R. Schoolcraft, LL. D. | With Illustra- 
tions. I Ouienduu ih ieu muzzinyegun 
un. — Algonquin. | In six volumes. | 
Volume I [-VI]. | 



ATHArAK( AN LANGUAGES. 



93 



Schoolcraft (II. 1\.) — ('fmtiiiiird. 

I'liiliHli'lpliia: | J. I?. l.iiJpimott A 
Co. I lS(iO. 

Engraved title, : Infoiiiiation | rcHpectin;; tlui 
I Hi.Htory. Coiiflition and Prosiio^ts | of tlit^ | 
IiKlian Tiil>c« i)( \.\w UiiitcMl States: | ColliMtod 
and pn-jiari'd nn<U',r the, | ISurcaii of Indian 
Affairs | By H«>niy R. Schoolcraft L. L. I). | 
M(Mn: Koyal (Jeo. Society, London. Royal An- 
ti(|Uarian SiK'icty. Copenliajicn. Etlinolo;;iral 
Society, Paris, \c. &c. | Illustrated l)y | Cap.' 
S. Kiistnian, U. S..V.and(>tIi(^rcniincntartists. j 
[Vijjnctte.] I Puldished by authority of Con- 
gress. I 

Philadoljdiia: | .1. H. T>ii>pineott & Co. 

(i vols, maps and jdates. 4". 

This edition a;;iees in the text papi for pane 
with the original titled ahove, and contains in 
addition an index to each volume. 

Copien xeen : Conjrress. 

Partially reprinted, with tilh) as follow.s: 

[ J The I Iiidiiiu tiilM'.s|ofthe|Uiute<l 

States: I their | lii.stoiy, antiquities, 
customs, religion, arts, laiionage, | tra- 
ditions, oral legends, and myths. | Ed- 
ited by I FraninsiS. Drake. | Illustrated 
with one hundred tine engravings on 
steel. ] In t\A'o voliuncs. | V(d. I[-IIJ. j 
Philadelphia: | .J. B. Lippincott &, 
CO. I London: 16 Southampton street, 
Covent Garden. | IXSl. 

2 vols.: portrait 1 1. title ver.so copyright 1 1. 
preface pp. 3-5, contents i)p. 7-8, list of plates 
pp. !) 10. introduction j)p. 11-24, text pp. 25-4.58: 
frontispiece 1 1. title ver.so copyright I 1. con- 
tents pp. :)-6. list of plates p. 7, text pi>. 9-44."), 
index i>p. 447-4.').">, jdates, 4'. 

" In the following pages theattenii)t has been 
made to place before, the public in a convenient 
and accessil)le form the results of the life-long 
labors in the Held of aboriginal research of the 
late Henry R. Schoolcraft.' 

Cha])ter 11, Language, literature, and pic;- 
tograiihy, vol. 1. pp. 47-63, contains general 
remarks on the Indian languages. 

Copies neen : ('ongress. 

Pri<cd by Clarke \-. co. 1886, no. 6376, .f 25. 

Henry K"We Schoolcraft, ethmdogist, l)orn in 
IWatervliet! Albany county. N. Y., March 28, 
1793; died in Washington, D. C, December 10, 
1864. Was educated at Middlel>nry C(dlege, 
Vermont, and at Union, where ho pursued the 
studies of chemistry and mineralogy. In 
1817 '18 he traveled in Missouri and Arkansas, 
and returned with a large collection of geolog- 
ical and niineralogical sjx'cimens. In 1820 h(^ 
was appointed geidogist to (Jen. Lewis Cass's 
exploring expediticm to Lake .Superior and the 
headwaters of Mississippi River. He was seci-e- 
tary of a conuni.ssion to treat with the Indians 
atChicago, and, after a.jonrney through Illinois 
and along AV abash and Miami rivers, was in 
1822 uppoiuted Indian agent for the tribes of 



Schoolcraft (H. Iv.) — Continued. 

the lake region, (-stablishing himself at Sanit 
.Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mackinaw, 
where, in 1823, he married .lane .lohnston, 
granddaughter of WabooJ(!eg, a noted Ojibway 
chief, who had received her ediuation in 
Euro)ie. In 1H2K lie founded the Michigan his- 
torical society, ami in 1831 the -Mgic society. 
From 1828 till 1832 he was a nn^mber of the ter- 
ritorial legislature of Michigan. In 1832heledji 
government expedition, which followed the Mis- 
sissijtpi River uj) to its .sonrct^ in Itasca Lake. 
In 1836 he negotiated a treaty with the Indians 
on tht< ujiper lakes for the cession to the United 
States of 16,000,000 a<Tes of their lands. He 
was then appointed acting superintendent of 
Indian affairs, and in IS.'iOehief disbu7'si7ig:igent 
for the nortliern di']>artmenl. On his ictuiii 
from Europe in 1842 he made a tour throu;;h 
w«!stern Virginia, Ohio, and Canada. He was 
ai>pointed by the New Yoik lei;islatnre in 184.'i 
acommissionerto take the census of the Indians 
in the State, and collect information concerning 
the .Six Nation.s. After thi) i)erformance of 
this task. Congress authorized him, on March 3, 
1847, to obtain through the Indian bureau 
reports relating to all the Indian tribes of tlie 
country, and to collate and edit tlie information. 
In this work he spent the remaining years of 
his lU'r. Through his intlnence many laws 
were enacted for the ])rotection and benefit of 
the Indians. Nniuerou.s scientific societies in 
the United .States and ?!iiroi)c elecleil liim to 
membership, and the University of (tcneva 
gave him the degree of LL.D. in 1846. Ht; was 
the author of nnmerotis poems, le(:ture8, and 
rejiorts on Indian subjects, besides thirty-one 
larger works. Two of his lectures before the 
.VIgi<- society at netroit on the •'(irammatii-al 
Conslruction of the Indian Langua^;es " were 
translated into French by I'eter S. Duponceau, 
and gained for their author a gold medal fiom 
the French institute. . . . 

To the five vol times of Indian researches <'om- 
piled under the direct ion of the war dei)artnient 
he added a sixth, containing t he post -Columbian 
history of the Indians and of their relations 
with Europeans (Philadelidiia. 18.')7). Ht^ had 
(•(dlected material for two additiitnal vcdumes, 
but the government suddenly suspended the 
)iublicali<m of the work. — Appleton'i Cyclop, of 
A m. Bioij. 

Schott (W.) lleher ethnographische 
Ergebnisse der Sagoskinschen Reise, 
von W. Schott. 

InErinan(A.), Archiv fiir wissenschaflliche 
Kuude von Riissland, vol. 7, pp. 480-512, Berlin, 
1H49, 8'5. 

Vocabuliiry of the Inkilik and Inkalit-Ingel- 
mut (from Zagoskin), pp. 481-487. 

Scouler {Dr. John). Ob.servations on 
the indigenous tribes of tlie X. W. 
coast of America, liy John Scouler, 
M.D., F.L. S., &.C. 



94 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Scouler (J.) — Continued. 

Ill lloyal Gdog. Soo. of London, Jour., vol. 11, 
1)|). 215-2.il, London. 1841,8^. (Geological Sur- 
vey.) 

Vocabnlai-v of tlic liuipiiiia: .s]ioUcn on the 
lliver UniiMiua, about lOOwoidn (oVitaiued from 
Dr. Tolmie), pp. 237-241. 

On the Indian tiilies inhabiting the 

north-west coast of America. By John 
Sconh'r, M. D..F. L. S. Communicated | 
l)y the Ethn<dogical Society. I 

In Kdiiilturgli New Pliilosopli. Jour. vol. 41, ' 
1)1.. 168-192, Edinliurgli, 1846, 8°. j 

lucluile.s a brief discussion of tlie Atliapas- | 
eaus, pp. 170-171. 

Keprinted in Etlmological So<'. of London, 
Jour. vol. 1. pp. 228-2.i2, London [1848], 8°. (Con- 
gress.) Linguistics as above, pp. 230-231. 

Seguiii (R. P.) Catechism in theDindji6 
hmejuage. (*) 

Manust lipt in possession of Father Euiile 
Petitot. iIareuilles-]Meanx, Frani'e, wlio has 
kindly furnished nio the above title. See 
Petitot (P:. F.S.J.) 
Sentences: 

Ahtinno See Allen (H. T.) 

Apaeho Bancroft (H. H.) 

Ap.acho AVhite (J. B.) 

Athapascan Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Tinuo Campbell (J.) 

Sermons: 
I>i>n6 

Montagnais 
Taeulli 



Sikani : 

Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
AVords 



See Bu8chnuinn(J.C.E.) 
Howse (J.) 
Pope (F. L.) 
R(»ehrig (F. L. t).) 
Ross (R. P..) 
Uaa (L. K.) 



See Morice (A. G.) 
Legoff(L.) 
Morice ( A. G.) 

J. M.) Vocabulary of the 
;uage. 

4^, in the library of the 



Shaw (livv. 
Navajo bin 

Manuscript, pp. 1 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Recorded on a form compileil by H. R. School- 
craft, containing 350 English words and the 
uunieral.s 1-30, 40, 50, 00, etc. Equivalents of 
most of these are given. 

Shea : This word following a title or within paren- 
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to was seen by the compiler in 
the library of the late Dr. J. G. Shea, Elizabeth, 
N.J. 

Sherwood ( Lieut. W. L. ) Vocabulary of 
the Sierra Blaiua and Coyotero dialect 
of the Apaches, with notes. 

Manuscript, 7 unnumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

The first leaf of the manuscript, written on 
both sides, is devoted to remarks c<meeining 
the negatives, pronouns, method of counting, 
and as to the alphabet used. The remaining 
leaves, written on one side only, contain the 
vocabulary (about 275 words) arranged in four 
columns to the page, two of English and two 
of the Apache. There is no indication of place 
or date of record. 

Sierra Blanca Apache. See Apache. 



Simpson { Lien t . James Hervey). Jotirnal 
of a military reconnaissance from Santa 
Fc, New Mexico, to the Navajo country, 
made with the troops under the com- 
mand of Brevet Lieutenant Colonel 
John M. AVashington, diief of the itth 
military deitartment, and governor of 
New Mexico, in 1849, by James H. Simp- 
sou, A. M., Fir.st Lieutenant Corjis of 
Topographical Engineers. 

In Reports of Secretary of War: Seiiale ex. 
doc. No. 64. 3lMt Cong., 1st .sess., pp. 50-168, 
Washingtim, 18.'')0, 8°. (Fames, Pilling.) 

A comparative vocabulary of woids in the 
languages of the Pueblo or civilized Indians of 
New Mexico and of the wild tribes inhabiting 
its borders, pj). 140-143, includes 40 words of the 
Navajo (no. 7). obtained by Lieut. Simpson from 
a friendly Navajo chief, by name Tus-caho- 
gont-le (Mexican nauu' Sandoval), and 35 words 
of the Ticorilla, a branch of tlie Apaches (no. 
8), obtained by Lieut. Simpson from an Apache 
Indian, a pri.soner in the guard-house at Santa 
Fe. 

Journal | of a | military recounais- 

sauce, I from | Santa Fe, New Mexico, 
I to the I Navajo country, | made with 
the I troops under command of lirevet 
lieutenant colonel John | M. Washing- 
ton, chief of ninth military department, 
I and governor of Ncav Mexico, in 1H49. 
I By I James H. Simpson, A. M., | first 
lieutenant corps of topograjihical 
engineers. | 

Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo 
and CO., | successors to Grigg, Elliot 
and CO. | 1852. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. cor- 
resjiondence pp. 3-7, text pp. 9-138, list of plates 
pp. 139-140, map, plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under next preceding 
title, pp. 128-130. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British Mu- 
seum, Fames, Trumbull. 

James Hervey Simpson, soldier, born in New 
Jersey March 9, 1813, died in St. Paul. Minn., 
M.arch 2, 1883. He was graduated at the IT. S. 
military academy in 1832. and assigned to the 
artillery. During the Florida war he was aide 
to Gen. Abraham Eustis. He was made first 
lieutenant in the corps of topographical engi- 
neers on July 7, 1838, engaged in surveying tba 
uort hern lakes and the western plains ; was pro- 



A'IMIArASCAN LANGUAGES. 



95 



Simpson (J. II.) — <'""liiiii.(l. 

niiitid <'a)itaiii(>n Mari'li :i, lH5li; served as cliicr 
t()Ii(iKiai)Iiical ("iiKiticcr with tlir aiiiiy in Ttali, 
and in isr)!)(^xi)l(irc<l a ni'W route IVoni Salt LaUo 
City to tin* rai'itic^ roast, thi' ii'iMirts iif wliich 
lie was hnsy in iiiciiaiing till tbc ln'iiinniiii; "f 
the civil wai-. He scivcd as cliief to|M);:iaiilii(al 
eiijriniM'i- of the Dciiartnicnt of the Sln^nandoali, 
was promoted niii,ior on Ang. ti, 1801, was nuide 
oolouel of the 4th New Jor.sey volnnteeis on 
Anj:. 12, 181)1, and took part in the peninsular 
eani])aij;n, lieing engaged at West Point and at 
Caines Mills, where ho was taken inisoner. 
After his exchange in August, 1HG2, luM-esigned 
his volunteer eoniniission in order to act as chief 
topograpliiial engineer, and afterward as chief 
engineer of the departnu'nt of the Ohio, where 
he was enii>loyed in making and rejiairing lail- 
roads and erecting temiiorary fortitications. lie 
was promoted lieutenant-colonel of engiiUM'rs 
on dnne 1, 18G:i, had general charg(( o( fortifica- 
tions in Kentucky from tliat time till the close 
of the war, washrovctted colonel and brigadier- 
general in ^farch. 18G.J, and was chief engineer 
of the interior department, having charg<' of 
the insiiection of th<! Tuion Pacific railroad till 
1807. He afterward superinfendi'd defensive 
works at Key West, Moliile, and other places, 
surveys of rivers and harbors, the inii)rove- 
ment of navigation in the. Mississipj)i and other 
western rivers, and the construction of hridgi's 
at Little Rock, Ark., St. Louis, Mo., Clinton, 
Iowa, and other places. Gen. Simi)son was the 
author of " Shortest Route to California across 
the(5reat Basin of Utah " (Philadeli)hia. 180!l) 
and "Essay on Coronado's March in Search of 
the Seven Cities of Cibola" (18011).— .1m'''''«"'s 
Ci/clop. of Am. Jiiog. 

Simpson (Williiim). Soc Dorsey (.1. < ). ) 

Slave: 

I'.ible, four gospels See Bompas ( \V. C.) 

15il)le, Matthew Reeve (AV. D.) 

Bible, :\Iark Reeve (W.J).) 

Bible i>assages British. 

Bililc ])assages (lilberf iV Rivingfon. 

Catechism Kirkby (W. W.) 

Hymn book Hymns. 

Hymn book Kirkby (W. W.) 

Hymns Reeve (W. D.) 

Legends Petitot {K. F. S. J.) 

Lord's ])rayer Bergholtz (G. F.) 

Lord's prayer Kirkby (W. W.) 

Lords prayer Reeve (W. D.) 

Lord's prayer Rost (It.) 

Numerals Ellis (R.) 

Prayer book Kirkby ( W. W.) 

Prayer l>ook Lessons. 

Prayer book Reeve (W. I).) 

Ri'hitionships Kennicott (R.) 

Relati(mships Morgan (L. H.) 

Sinigs Petitot (E. F. S. .T.) 
Ten commandraeuts Kirkby (W. W.) 
Ten connnaudmeTits Reeve (W. D.) 

Vocabulary KcnnicotI (B.) 

Vocabulary Kirkby (W. W .) 

Vocabulary Latham (R, G.) 



Slave — ('(iiitiimtd. 

Vocabulary See Morgan ( L. H.) 

Vocabulary Boehrig ( F. L. O.) 

Words Ellis (B.) 

Slavi. Sci- Slave. 

Smart {i'apl. Charlcsj. Aotes on the 
" Toiito" Ai):i(h<'s. \\y Charles Smart, 
l»rev('t captain and awsistant snrj^fon 
U. S. Army, Fort McDowell, Arizona. 

In Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Rept. for 1807, jip. 
417-41!), Washington, 1808, 8o. (PiUing.) 

Preceding the aitidcis this note: "A i)artial 
vocabulary of the language accompanied the 
original, whicdi will appear elsewhere. ' I pre- 
sume tlui following is nu-ant : 

Vocilmlary of tlicCoyoteio Apaches, 

with notes. 

Mannscrijit, :t unnumbered leaves, folio, in 
the library of the Burenu of Ethnology. ('<d- 
lected Sept. K!, 180(>. at Fort McDowell, Ariz. 
Contains 17:! words. 

Thi^i-e is in the same library ;i copy of this 
uuinuscript. ncoiib il on om* of the standard 
vocabulary forms (if the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion. 11. folio. 

Smith K'iver .loliii. See Dorsey (.1. O.) 

Smithsonian Institution: These words f(dlowing 
a title or included within ])arentheses after a 
note indicate that a co|py of tbc work referred 
to has been seen by the coni|)llcr in the library 
of that inslifution, Washington. 1). (". 

Smithsonian Institntion. Sniith.soniau 
miseellaneoiis collections. '2\& \ Photo- 
jjjraphic ]>ortrait.s | of | North American 
Indians | in the oallery of the | Smith- 
sonian institntion. | [Seal of the insti- 
tntion.] I 

Washington: | Smithsonian institii- 

ti(.n. I 1867. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text ])]). :{-42, ^°. 
Xami's of persons of a number of tribes of 
American Indians, with definitions, among 
them the Navajo. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology. Pilling, 
Smithsonian Institiiticm. 

Some copies are itriutedon oni' side of the leaf 
only. (Bureau of Ethnology, Fames, Smithson- 
ian Institntion.) 
Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge: 
These words following a title or included within 
parentheses after a note indicate that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of that institution. London, 
England. 
Solomon (('o(iiiille). See Dorsey (J. O.) 
Songs : 

ChippewyMn S.e Petitot (E. F. S..J.) 
Dene Mori<'e(A.t;.) 

Loucheux Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Montagnais Vegreville (V. T.) 

Navajo Matthews (W.) 

Slave Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 



96 



BIBLIOGRAniY OF THE 



Staffeief (Vladimir) aud Petroff (I.) 
[Words, phrases, aud sentences iu the 
hiuj^uage of the Kaukiiua or Kankii- 
uats Kogtaua, on the shores of Cook 
Ink^t, south of Nortli Foreland.] 

Manuscript, pp. 77-227, 4°, in the. library of 
the Bureau of Etliuology, Wasliington, D. ('. 
Eeconled in a copy of Powell's Introduction to 
the Study of Indian Lansuajios, second edition, 
most of the schedules of which, except thost! 
relating to relationships, are almost completely 
tilled. There are several thousand entries, in a 
clear and distinct handwriting. 

The alphabet adopted by the Bureau of Eth- 
nology has been followed. 

Stanley (J. M.) Portraits | of | North 
American Indians, | with sketches of 
scenery, etc., | i)ainted hy | J.M.Stan- 
ley. I Deposited with | the Smith- 
sonian iiistitntiou, | [Seal of the insti- 
tution.] I 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion. I December, 1(S.52. 

Printed cover as above, title as above verso 
printers 1 1. preface verso contents 1 1. text pp. 
5-72, index pp. 73-76, go. 

Forms Smithsonian Institution Miscellaneous 
Collpctions, 53 ; also part of vol. 2 of the same 
.series, Washington, 1K02. 

Contains the names of personages of many 
Indian tribes of the United States, to a number 
of which is added the English signification. 
Among the people represented are the Ump- 
qiias, p. 59. 

Copien seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Geological Siu"vey, Pilling, Powell, Smithsonian 
Institution. 

Steiger(E.) Steiger's | bihliotheca glot- 
tiea, I part first. | A catalogue of | Dic- 
tionaries, Granmiars, Readers, Exposi- 
tors, etc. I of mostly inodern languages 
I spoken iu all parts of the earth. | 
except of I English, French, German, 
and Spanish. [ First division: ' Abenaki 
to Hebrew. | 

E. Steiger, | 22 & 24 Frankfort Street, 
I New York. [1874.] 

Half-titleon cover, titleasabr)ve verso printer 
I 1. notice dated Sept. 1874 verso blank 1 1. 
text pp. 1-40, advertisements 2 11. colophon on 
back cover, 12°. 

Titles of works in Athapascan, p. 14.. 

The second division of the first part was not 
jmblished. Part second is on the English lan- 
guage and part third on the German language. 

In his notice thec(nnpiler states : " This com- 



Steiger (E.) — t'outiuucd. 

pilation must not be ii'garded as an alleniptat a 
complett^ linguistic bibliography, but sob'ly as 
a bookseller's catalogue for biisim'ss (inrposes, 
with special regard to the study of pliilology in 
America." 

Coplcti *•('('« ; Eames. Pilling. 

Stuart (Jake). See Dorsey (J. O.) 

Sullivan (John W.) Indian tribes and 
vocabularies. 

In Palliser (J.), .louriial, detailed rejiorts 
. . . Britisli North America, i>p. 19!»-216, 
London, 186:i. folio. 

Vocabulary (words and phrases) and nuiinr.ils 
1-200 of the Sursee Indians, pp. 208-210. 
Sursee : 

General discussion See Balbi (A.) 
Graniniatic comments Wilson (K. F.) 
Numerals Sullivan (.1. W.) 

Vocabulary Balbi (A.) 

Vocabulary Bamrrott (H. H.) 

Vocabulary Buschmann (.I.C.E.) 

Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 

Vocabulary J6haii(L. F.) 

Vocabulary Latham (R.G.) 

Vocabulary Petitot (Fj. F. S. J.) 

Vocabulary Sullivan (J. W.) 

Vocabulary Uinfreville (E.) 

Vocabulary AVilson (E. F.) 

Words Adelung (J. 0.) and 1 

Vater(J.S.) 
Sussee. See Sursee. 

Syllabarium [for the Chippewyan lan- 
guage]. 

[Loudon: Society for promoting 
christian knowledge. 188- ?] 

1 sheet, 25 by 20 inches, with heailing as 
above, verso blank. 

The first division contains in one i'(dumn the 
roman consonants : w, b, ch, d, g, k, kl, 1, m. n, s, 
sh, t. th, tth, tz, y. The second division con- 
tains in four columns tlui syllaliic charai'ters 
for the same, each colniiin headed by its 
respet^tive vowel termination, a, e. i, o. The 
third division contains the additional marks, 
contractions, and final consonants, in syllabii; 
and I'oman characters. 

Tliis syllabarium is nearly identical with 
that in Kirkby's Chipewyan gospels of 187,S, 
the only variation being in the third division, 
which contains two additional marks or con- 
tractions. 

Gnpics neen : Eames, Pilling. 
Syllabary ; 

Athapascan See Morice (.V. G.) 

Chippewyan Syllabarium. 

Chippewyan Tut tie (C. R.) 

Montagnais Perrault (C. O.) 



ATIFArASCAN LAXCTACJEhi. 



97 



T. 



Tache (M'Ji- Alcx;milr«' Aiituiiic). 
Es(HUs,so I snr l<i | iioid-oiu^stde I'Auic- 
ri(ine | jiar | M,ht. Tju'Ik', Kv(*'(ine tie St. 
Honilace, ISCX. | 

M<)iiti'<'al I typo^iaiiliit", du Noiivcaii 
iiioiidf I 2;?. nic- St. Viiicriit. I 1869 

Carer title : Es<iiii.s.s«- | .siir lo | ii()rtl-ou»'.st dt^ 
r.\iii<'ii(iiie I i>;ir I ^If;r. Ta(li6, fiveciiin dc St. 
JJoiiifiUO, 1868. I 

ISIoiitrfal: I Charles Payi'ltf, Liljrairt'-Kdi- 
tciir I Kiic St. Paul, Ko. 250. | 1800 

Ciivif title a.s above, title as above ver.so 
blank 1 l.text l.l).y-146,8^ 

A sliort accoimt ot the Faiiiille dcs 'I'schii) 
l)eweyaiis oil Monta^uai.s, pp. 8li-!)l. 

('"/»((■»• seen: Biili.sh Musi'iiiii, I'illiiii;, Shea. 

Sketili I ot" t\w I Nort!i-\vfst df 

America. | I>y Mjfv. Tacliu | J)i.sli<>|» of 
St. Boiiifacf, I 1S()S. I Translated from 
the French, by Captain D. K. Cameron, 
I Royal Artillery. | 

Montreal: | Printed Ity .)<diu Lovell 
St. Nicholas Street. | 1.S70. 

Pp. l-2ir., 8'^. 

Lin^^uistics as in the French eilition titled 
next above, p. 123. 

Copies seen: Quebec Historical Society. 

See Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

Alexandre Antoine Tache, Canadian R. C. 
archbishoi), born in Riviere du Loup, Canada, 
July 2'.'i, 1823, was ^^raduated at the college of 
St. Hyacinth and studied theology iu the Sem- 
inary of Montreal. He returned to St. Hya- 
cinth as jirofessor of mathematics, but. after 
teaching a few mouths, went to Montreal and 
became a monk of the Oblate order. Ho vol- 
unteered at once for missionary service among 
the Indians of the Red River, and reached St. 
Boniface on August 25, 1815. He was rai.sed to 
the priesthood on October 12 following. In July, 
18-lG, ho set out for lie .'i la Crosse, and, after 
spending a few months at this mission, he went 
to labor among the Indians that liveil around 
the lakes, several hundred miles to the north- 
west. Although only twenty-six years old, he 
was recommended for the post of coadjutor 
bishop of St. Boniface iu 1850. He was sum- 
moned to Franco by the superior of the Oblate 
Fathers and consecrated bishop on November 
23. 1851. After a visit to Rome be returned to 
Canada in February, 1852, and on September 10 
reached lie h. la Crosse, which he had deter- 
mined to make the center of his labors in the 
n«uthwest. He became bishop of St. Boniface 
June 7,1853. St. Boniface was erected into a 
metropolitan see on Sept. 22, 1871, and Bishop 
Tache was appointed archbishop. — Aiqileton's 
Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 
ATH 7 



Taculli. I Nocaliiilaiics of smni' of fjie 
Indian trihes (»C nortliwest America.] 

Manuscript, 2 \ kIh. S2 pp. lolio. Seen at the 
sale of the library of the late Mr. Oeo. I'.rinley, 
tluf sale catalogU(^ of which says they cauui 
from the library of Dr. .Julin Pickering, lo 
whom, jirobably, they were presi-nted by Ml'. 
Duponceau. They we|-e iireseiiteil " to I'eter 
S. Dujiom'eau, Ksi]., with J. K. Townshend's 
res])ects. Fort Vancouver, Columbia River, 
.Sei>t ember, 1835." 

Among these is one of X\n- Carriei- or J'aculli 
Indiansot" New Caledonia, containing 342 words 
and iilirases. 

Taculli: 

Bible, Genesis See Moriei' (A. G.) 

General discussion Balbi (A.) 

General discussion Bancroft ( H. H.) 

Gentes HaIe(H.) 
(;ranmia(i(; commeiits ^liiller (F.) 

Numerals Ellis (R.) 

Numerals Harmon (D. W .) 

Numerals Pott (A. F.) 

Numerals Tolniie (W. F.) and 

Dawson (G. M.) 

Proper name.s Anderson (A. C.) 

Senuons • Morici! (A. G.) 

Text Morice(A. G.) 

Tribal names Latham (R. G.) 

Vocabulary Ander.son (A. C.) 

Vocabulary Balbi (A.) 

Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) 

Vocabulary B\ischmann(J.C. E.) 

Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 

Vocabulary Harmon (D. W.) 

Vocabulary Jehan (L. F.) 

Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. < ). ) 

Vocabulary Taculli. 

A'ocab\ilary T<dmie (\V. F.) and 

l)aw.s(m (G. M.) . 

Vocabulary Turner ( W. AV.) 

Vocabulary "Wliipple (A. W. ) 

Vocabulary Wilson (E.F.) 

Words Daa (L. K.) 

Words Ellis (R.) 

AVords Gatscbet (A.S.) 

Words Latham (K.G.) 

Words Lubbock (J.) 

Words Pott (A. F.) 

AVords Tolmie (AV. 1<\) and 

Dawaou (G. M.) 
Tahkali. See Taculli. 

Tahlewah: 

General discussion See Gibbs (G.) 

Numerals Bancroft (H. H.) 

Numerals Ellis (R.) 

Numerals Tolmie (AV. F.) and 

Dawson (G.M.) 

A'dcabulary Crook (GJ 

A'ocabulary Gibbs (G.) 

Takudh. See Tnkudh. 



98 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Ten coiumandments : 

Beaver 

Chippewyan 

<!liippewyan 

Dog Rib 

Moiitagnais 

Slave 

Slave 
Tenan Kutchin. 



See Garrioch (A. C.) 
liompns (W. C.) 
Kiilvby (W.W.) 
]5onipas (W. C.) 
LegoffiL.) 
Kiikby (VT. W.) 
Reeve (W.B.) 
Sec Kutchin. 



Tenana. See Kutchin. 
Tenana Inkalik. Sec Tnkalik. 

Ten Kate {Dr. Herman Frederick Car- 
vel), Jr. Reizeii en Ouderzoekiugeu | 
in I Noord-Amerika | van | D^. H. F. V. 
Ten Kate J^ | Met eeu kaart en twee 
nitttlaande platen. | 

Leiden, E. J. Brill. | 1885. 
Cover title as above, half-title rever.se blank 
1 1. title as above reverse blank 11.3 other prcl. 
II. pp. 1-464, errata 1 p. map, 2 plates, 8'^. 

Onder do Apaches (pp. 16,%-208) contains a 
short vocabulary on ]). 196, and a few words 
2)assi7n. 
Copies seen : Bureau of EtliNolosiy. 
Texts: 



Apache 

t"hipi)ew>au 

Uene 

Loucheux 

Montagnais 

Navajo 

Peau de Li^vro 

TacuUi 

Tnkudh 



See Bancroft (H.H.) 
Petitot(E. F. S.J. 
Morice (A. G.) 
Promissioues. 
Legofr(L.) 
• Mattliews (W.) 
Promissiones. 
Moric.>(A. G.) 
McDonald (K.) 



Thompson (Almon Harris). Vocabulary 
of the Navajo language. 

Manuscript, 5 11. 12°, and 8 11. 4°, iu the library 
of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

Contains about 275 words. 

Thompson (Coquille). See Dorsey (.1. 

O.) 
Thompson (Edward). A short vocabu- 
lary of the Langnage spoke among the 
Northern Indians inhabiting the North- 
west Part of Hudson's Bay, as it Avas 
taken at different times from the 
Mouths of Nabiaua and Zazana, two 
Indians, who were on board His 
Majesty's .Ship the Furnace in the year 
1742, by Edward Thompson, Surgeon 
of the said Ship. 

In i)obbs (A.), An account of the countries 
adjoining to Hudson's Bay, pp. 206-211, London, 
1744, 4°. 

About 280 words and i)hrase8 of the Chepe- 
wyan language. The main portion is alpha- 
betically arranged by English words, followed 
by " The Northern Indian "Way of Counting" 
and "The Parts belonging to a Man.'' 

Partly reprinted in Whipple (A. "W.), Explo- 
rations and Surveys, pp. 84-85, Washington, 
J855, 4°, 



Tinne. Vocabulary of the Tahko [or 
Tahko-Tiune] language. 

Manus(ri]it, 1 loaf folio, written on both 
sides, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Recorded on a printed foim containing 60 
English words, equivalents of all of which are c 
given in tlic Tahko. Probably by Dr. T<dmie. " 
Tinn^ : 

Bible, Mark SeeKirkby (W. W.) 

Bible, John Kirkby (TT. AT.) 

Bible iiassages American. 

Bibb- passages Bible Society. 

Bible passages Bompas (W. C.) 

Bible passages British. 

Bible passages Gilbert & Rivington. 

General di.scussion Bancroft (H.H.) 

General discussion Bompas (W. C.) 

General discussion Brinton (D. G.) 

General discussion Faiilniann (K.) 

Lord's prayer Ilonipas (W. C.) 

Nimieraks Cani|diell (J.) 

Primer Bonijtas (W. C.) 

Sentences Campbell (J.) 

Tribal names Dall ( W. H.) 

Tribal names Richardson (J.) 

Tribal names Tuttle (C. R.) 

Vocabulary Bompas (W. C.) 

Vocabulary Campbell (J.) 

Vocabulary Dawson (G. M.) 

Vocabulary Dorsey (J. O.) 

A'ocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 

Vocabulary Ross (R. B.) 

Vocabulary Tinn6. 

Vocabul.iry Tolmie(W.r.) 

Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 

son (G. M.) 

AV<n-ds Brinton (D. G.) 

"Words Crane (A.) 

"Words Gatschet (A. S.) 

"Words Hale (H.) 

See also Athapascan ; Chippewyan ; Den^; 
Montagnais. 

Tinne ])rinier. See Bompas (W. C.) 

Tlatskenai : 

Granunatic comments See Mliller (F.) 

Numerals Ellis (R.) 

Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.) 

Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) 

"S'ocabulary Buschmann (J.C.E.) 

Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 

Vocabulary Halo ( H . ) 

Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 

Vocabulary Turner ("W. "W.) 

"Words Daa(L. K.) 

Words Ellis (R.) 

"Words Farrar (F. W.) 

"Words Lubbock (J.) 

"Words Pott (A. F.) 

"Words "Wilson (D.) 

Tolmie (Z>r. William Eraser). Vocabu- 
lary of the Umpfjua; spoken on the 
Kiver Umpqua. 

In Scouler (J.), Observations on the indig- 
enous tribes, ifccin Royal Geog. Soc. Jotir. ypl. 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



99 



Tolmle (W. F.) — Continiuul. 

11, l)p.2:t7-i;41, L(>ii<l(.ii,1841,8''. ((><M)l.>Kic:ilSiir- 
voy.) 

(V)iitniii.s alHiiil 1(10 words. 

Vocaltiiliiry ol" tlii^ 'I'aliko 'FMiiiich 

ljin,niia,i;e. 

M;iiuis(^ri|)t, 1 lo:i(' folio, (10 words, in tlio 
library oC tllc^ Hdrcaii of KMiiiolosy. 

and Davwson (G. M.) Geological 

and n.itiiral history survey of Cauada. 

I Alfred R. C. Svhvyn, F. R. S., F. G. S., 
Director. | (Jomparativc, vocalmlarics 

I of tiic I Indian tribes | of | Hritisli 
(Johimbia, | with a im:ii> illnstrating 
distribution. | Hy | W. Frascr Tolniio, 

I Licentiate of the Faculty of Piiysi- 
cians and Surgeons, Glasgow. | And | 
Georg(» M. Dawson, D. S., A. S. R. M., F. 
G. S.,».\^.c. I [Coat of arms.] | Publish<>(l 
by authority of Parliament. | 

Montreal: | Dawson brothers. | 1881. 
Cover title nearly as above, title as abcno 
verso blauk I 1. letter of transmittal sii^ned by 
G. M. Dawson verso blank I 1. preface signed 
by G. M. Dawson pp. 5B-7B, introductory note 
signed by W. V. Tolmie pp. 9B-r2B, text pp. 
14B-131B, map, 8^. 

Comparative vocabulary, 225 words of five 
languages, among them the Tinue, Tshilkotin 
tribe (Dawson), Tinne, Nakoontloou sept (Tol- 
mie and Dawson), Tinue, TakuUi or Teheili 
tribe (Dawson), pp. C2b-7:!b. — Supplementary 
list of 162 words in Tshilkotin and Takulli, pp. 
74B-77B.— Ifotes on the Tinne, their habitat, 
and a partial list of Tinne septs or tribes, pp. 
122B-123B. — Comparative table of some words 
(28) in Tshimsiau, Haida, Thlinkit, and Tinne, 
p. 126b. — Comparative table of a few of the words 
(68) in the foregoing vocabularies (9 columns, 
the last of which, cimtaiuing a few words only, 
is the Tinne), p. 127b. — Comparison of a few 
words (4) in various Indian languages of North 
America (from various sources), among them 
the Navajo, Umkwa, Apache, Ghepcwyan, Dog- 
rib and Takulli, pp. 128b-129b. — Compari-son 
of numerals (1-4) pertaining to families from 
localities widely sep.arated — Tshilkotin, Ta- 
kulli, Navajo, Wailakki, Hupa, Tolowa, Chop- 
ewyan, Dogrib, Unikwa and Apache, p. 131b. 
Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
"William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inver- 
ness, Scotland, February 3, 1812. and died De- 
cember 8, 1886, after an illness of only three 
days, at his residence, Cloverdale, Victoria, B. 
C. He was educated at Glasgow University, 
where he gradu.ated in August. 1832. On Sep- 
tember 12 of the same year he accepted a posi- 
tion as surgeon and clerk with tlie Hudson's 
Bay Company, and left home for the Columbia 
River, arriving at Vancouver in the spring of 
1833. Vancouver was then the chief post of 
the Hudson's Bay Company on this coast. In 



Tolmie (W. F.) — Continued. 

1841 he visited his native land, but returneil in 

1842 overland via the ])lains and the (Joliiiiibia, 
and was placed in chargi^ of the llndson's Hay 
l>osts on Puget Sound, flti here took a promi- 
nent part, during the Indian war of 18.'i.'»-'.")0, in 
l>acifying the Indians. Being an excellent lin- 
guist he liad ac<iuired a knr)wledge of the native 
tongues, and was instrumental in bringing 
about pea(!o between the whites and the Indi- 
ans. He was api)oiiitedchief factor of the Hud- 
son's Bay Comp.iny in ISlj. remov(Ml to Van- 
couver Island in 18,")9, when he went into stock- 
raising, being the first to iulroduce thorough- 
bred stock into British Columbia; was a mem- 
ber of the local legislature two terms, until 
1878 ; was a member of the first board of educa- 
tion for several years, exercising a great influ- 
ence in educational matters; held many offices 
of trust, and was always a valued and respected 
citizen. 

Mr. T'olmio was known to ethnologists for 
his contributions to I he history and linguistics 
of the native races of llie AVcst Coast, and 
dated his interest in I'thnological matters from 
his contact with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited 
tlie West ('oast as an ethnologist to the "Wilkes 
(exploring expedition. Ho afterwards trans- 
mitted vocabularies of a number of the tribes 
to Dr. Scouler and to Mr. George Gibbs, some of 
wliich were published in Contributions to 
North American Ethnology. In 18K4 he pub- 
lished, in conjunction with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a 
nearly complete series of short vocabularies of 
the i)rincipal languages met with in British 
Columbia, and his name is to be found fre- 
quently quoted as an authority on the history 
of the Northwest Coast and its ethnology. 
He frequently contributed to the press upon 
public questions and events now historical. 

Tolowa. See Tahlewah. 
Tribal names : 

Ahtinne 

Apache 

Apache 

Ai>ache 

Apache 

Athapascan 

Athapascan 

Athapascan 

Chippewyan 

Coquille 

D6ne 

Kenai 

Kenai 

Koltschane 

Kutchin 

Montagnais 

Rogue River 

TacuUi 

Tinne 

Tinne 

Tinne 

ITgalenzen 



See Latham (R. (1.) 
Balbi (A.) 
Higgins (N. S.) 
J6han (L. F.) 
"White (.J. B.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Petitot(E. F.S.J.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Dorsey (J. O.) 
Morice (A. G.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Petitot(E. F.S.J.) 
Dorsey (J. O.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Dall(W. H.) 
Richardson (J.) 
Tuttle(C. R.) 
Latham (R. G.) 



Truax ( W. B. ) See Arny ( W. F. M. ) 



100 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Triibuer A- Co. A catalo,";!!!' | of | an 
cxteusive, r.ollcjctiou | of | valiialjlo urw 
and socoml-liaud books, | Eugli.sli aud 
foreign, | in | anti<iuiti<'s, arcliitcetuvc, 
l)ook.s of [Jiiuts, history, ] natural his- 
tory, and every otlier ))ninch of ancient 
I aud modern literature, but more par- 
tieuhirly rieb. in | books on languages, 
■on bibliograpby and (ju | Nortii and 
.South Ameriea. | On sale at the low 
prices altixetl | by | Triibuer & co., | 
<;0, Paternoster lvo\v, London. 

Colophon : Printtid by F. A. Ihoek- 
liaus, Leipzig, [bsr^i.] 

CoV(<r titlo iis ;il)ovi; vcisk coutciUs ('to. uo 
jusido title; text pp. 1-159, coloiiliiiii p. [1001, 8^. 

Amci'ic;uilaugii;ij;es, pp. -14 -17, tDiit.iiiiH litle.s 
and prices of a few work.s relating' to llio Atli- 
Jipasean lauguaj^es. 

C<ij)ifx nfOi : Biweait ipf Klhiioloj^y. 

-^ — A I catalogue | of | a large assem- 
blage of books, I appertaining to | lin- 
guistic literature, I (many of them very 
rare), | in the | Ancient aud Modern 
Languages. | [Design.] | 

Now on sale by Triibuer & co. | GO, 
Paternoster row, London. | 1860. | 
(Price Oue Shilling, whicli will be 
allowed to Purchasers.) 

Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 
1-100,8°. 

•'Amerieau laugua;;es," pp. 10-22, includes 
titles of a few works in Athai)ascau. 

Copies seen : Harvard. 

Registered for Transmission Abroad. 

I Triibuer's | American aud Oriental 
Literary Record. | A uK)uthly register 

I Of the most importaut Works pub- 
lished in North and South America, in | 
India, China, aud the British Colonies : 
with occasional Notes on German, | 
Dutch, Danish, French, Italian, Span- 
ish, Portuguese, and Russian Books. | 
No. l[-Nos. 145-6. Vol. XII. Nos. 11 & 
12]. March 16, 1SG5 [-December, 1879]. 
Price 6d. \ Subscrii»tion | i5s. i)er An- 
num, I Post Free. 

[London : Triibuer & co. 1865-1879.] 

12 vols, in 9, large 8°. No title-pages; head- 
ings only. No. 1 to nos. 2.^ & 2i (Marcli 30, 1867) 
are paged 1-424; no. 25 (May 15,1867) to no. 60 
(August 25, 1870) are paged 1-810. The number- 
ing by volumes l).'gins witli no. 61 (Soi>tember 
20, 1870),vvliicli i.s maiited vol. VI, no. 1. Vols. 
Vrio Xrr contain pp. l-ino'; 1-272; 1-204; 1-181; 
1-176; 1-152; 1-161. In a4dilion tlure is a 
.special number for Septeniljer, 1874 (pp. 1-72), 
and an extra uo. 128' for Oetoljer, 1877 (pp. 1-16) ; 



Triibuer »t Co. — Continued. 

alsosupplementaryandotlu^r leaves. ( "out iuued 
under tlie following title: 

TriU)ner's | American, European & Oriental 
I liitii-iiry Ticiord. | .V register of tlie most im- 
liortaiU works | iiublishedin | Nortli au<l Soutli 
A]iieriGa,India,Cliina, Europe, | and tlie British 
colonies. | With Occasional Notes on (Jerman, 
Uulch, D.uiisli, Freneb, Italian, Spanish, | Por- 
tuguese, Kussian. and llungari;in Literature. | 
New series. Vol. I[-IXJ. | Jaiiu;iry to Decem- 
ber, 1SSI)| -January to Deceml)er, 1888]. | 

Ijondon ; | Triiljuer & c6., 57 ;ind 59, Ludgato 
bill. [1880-1888.] 

vols, hirge 8 '. Including no. 147-8 to no. 
242, e;ich vohnne with a separjite title aud leaf 
of contents ;ind its own pagination. Continued 
as foUows: 

Triibuer's r(^cord, | a journal | iIcvoIcmI totlio 
I Literature of (be Kast, | with notes and lists 
of current | Ameriian, European and ("olonial 
Publications, j No. 243[-251]. Third series. 
Vol.1. l'iirtl[-Vol. II. Tart:!]. Price 2*-. 

[Loudon: Triil)uer & co. ]\I;ircb, 188!)-.Vpril, 
1891.] 

2 vols.: printed coviu's ;i-i above, no title- 
pages, large 8 J. Puljlislieil irregulaily. 

Titles of works in and relating to the At ha 
pascau languages are .scattered tbrongli tlui 
periodical, togctl)(^r with notes on the subji'ct. 
A list of "Works on tlie aborigiuiil languages of 
America," vol. 8 ((irst series), pp. 185-189, iu- 
cludes titles under the special heading of Atha- 
pask, 1). 186. 

Copies seen .- Eames. 

BibliothecaHispano-Ai'ierieana. | A 

i catalogue i of | Sptiuish books \ print (?d 
in I Me.\ico, Guatemala, Hondurtis, the 
Antilles, | Venezuela, Columbia, Ecua- 
dor, Peru, Cliili, I Uruguay, and the Ar- 
gentine Republie ; | and of | Portuguese 
books printed in Brazil. | Followed by a 
collection of | works on the aboriginal 
languages | of America. | 

On Sale at the affixed Prices, by — 
Triibuer & co., | 18 & 60, Paternoster 
London. | 1870. | Oue shilling and row, 
sixjieuce. 

Cover title as aljove verso contents I 1. no in- 
side title; catah)gue pp. 1-184, eoh)pbon verso 
;idvertisemcnts 1 1. 10°. 

AVorks on the aboriginal biuguages of Amer- 
ica, pp. 162-184. contains a list of Ijooks (alpha- 
betically arranged by languages) on this sub- 
ject, including the Athapascan. pi>. 168-169. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

A I catalogue | of | dictionaries and 

grammars | of the ; Principal Languages 
and l)ial(!cts | of tlie World. | For sale 
by I Triibuer A: co. | 

Loiulon: | Triibuer A: <<)., 8 &- 60 Pa- 
ternoster row. I 1872, 



ATTTAl'ASCAN LANnUAOES. 



101 



Tiiibner A- f'o. — Continued. 

rovir title :is ■•ibovi', title as almve verso 
jiriiidrs 1 1. iiotico roverso liliuik 1 1. oatalojiii^ 
])]!. l--lit, addenda and corrljreiida 1 1. advortise- 
ments verso blank 1 1. a list of works rclatinfi 
to the science of language etc. \i]t. 1-10, 8°. 

Contains a few titles of works relatiiiL.' ti> 
the Athajiascan languages, ]>. 0. 

Copies seen : Eanies, Pilling. 

A later edition as follows : 

Triibner's | catalogue | of | dictiona- 

ries au(l grammai's | of the | Princi])al 
Languages and Dialects of the World. | 
Second edition, | considerably enlarged 
and revise<l, witli an aljdiabetieal in- 
dex. I A guide for students and book- 
sellers. I [Monogram.] | 

London: | Triibner & co., 57 and 59, 
Ludgate hill. | 1882. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso list 
of catalogues 1 1. notice and jireface to the sec- 
ond edition p. iii, index pp. iv-viii, text pp. 
1-168, additions pp. 169-170, Triibner's Oriental 
& Linguistic Publications i)p. 1-95, 8^. 

Contains titles of works in American lan- 
guages (general), p. 3; Athapascan, p. 18; 
Kinai, p. 94. 

Copiea seen : Eames, Pilling. 

No. 1[-12]. January 1874[-May, 

1875]. I A catalogue | of | choice, rare, 
and curious books, | selected from the 
stock I of I Triibuer & Co., | 57 it 59, 
Ludgate hill, London. 

[London: Triibuer & eo. 1874-1875.] 

12 parts: no titles, headings only ; catalogue 
(paged continuously) pp. 1-192, large 8°. This 
series of catalogues was prepared bj- Mr. James 
George Stuart Burges Bohn. See Triibner's 
American, European, <f: Oriental Literary Rec- 
ord, new series, vol. 1, pp. 10-11 (February, 1880). 

Works on the aboriginal languages of Amer- 
ica, no. 8, pp. 113-118, including titles under the 
he.ading Atluapask, p. 115. 

Cojiies seen: Kames. 
Triibner (Nicolas), ff/i7or. SeeLudevrig 
(H.E.) 

Mr. Nicolas Tiiibner was born at Heidel- 
berg June .17, 1817. On being removed from 
.school, in 1832, as his father was unable to send 
him to a university, he was placed in the estab- 
lishment of Mr. Mohr, the luiiversity book- 
seller of his native town. Six or seven years 
later he entered the house of Yaudenhoeck & 
Kuiu'ccht, at Giittingen. In 1840 he moved to 
Hotliuan & Campe's, at Hamburg, and in 1842 
to 'Wilmann's, at Frankfort, who had a large 
foreign trade, especially with England. Here 
he met the late Mr. William Longman, who 
oU'ered hini a situation in tlu! Loudon house. 
This he accepted, and acc<n'(lingly went to 
England in 1843 as foreign corres])ouding clerk 
of Messrs. LongUKiu's. In IK,'')! Mr. Triilui.r 
started business ou his own aciuuut, and soon 



Triibner (N.) — Continued. 

ac(iuired a widely sjire.id reputation in the liter- 
ary world by his puhlications of oriental works, 
lie did nnudi for American bibliography, also 
for that of Australia, and was elected a member 
of several hsarned societies in the I'nited States. 
He died suddenly March 30, 1884. 

Trumbull: This word following a title or within 
liarenthesesafter anote indicates that acojiy of 
the work referred to li;is been seeii by the com- 
l)iler in the library of Dr. J. Hammond Trum- 
bull, Hartford, Conn. 

Trumbull (Dr. James Hannnond). On 
Numerals in American Indian Lan- 
guages, and the Indian Mode of Count- 
ing. By J. Hammond Trumbull, of 
Hartford, Coun. 

In Americ;in Philolog. Ass. Trans. 1874. iip. 
41-76, Hartford. 1875, 8°. 

Examples in Chepewyan, Xava.jo, and 
Apache. 

Issued separately, also, as follows : 

On I numerals | in American Indian 

languages, | and the | Indian mode of 
counting. | By .1. Hamnumd Trumbull, 
LL. D. I (From the Transactions of the 
Am. Philological Association, 1874.) | 

Hartford, Conn. | 1875. 

Half-title on cover, title as above verso blank 
1 1. text pp. 1-36, 8°. 

Contains numerals, witli comments thereon, 
in many American languages, among them a 
number of the Athapascan. 

Coiries Seen : Brinton, British Museum, 
Eames. Pilling, Powell, Trumbull. 

Priced by Quaritch, no. 12565, 7». 6rf. 
Indian languages of America. 

In Johnson's New Univer.sal Cyclopfedia, 
vol. 2, pp. 115.5-1161, New York, 1877, S°. 
(Biireau of Ethnology, Congress.) 

A general discussion of the subject, in- 
cluding comments on the Athapasciiu family. 

[ ] Catalogue | of the | American Li- 

■ brary | of the late | mr. George Briuley, 
I of Hartford, Conn. | Parti. | America 
in general | New France Canada etc. | 
the British colonies to 1776 | New Eng- 
land I [-Part IV. I Psalms and hynms 
music science and art [&c. ten lines] | 

Hartford | Press of the Case Lock- 
wood & Brainard Company | 1878 
[-1886] 

4 parts, 8°. Compiled by Dr. J. H. Trumbull. 
The tifth and last part is said to be in prepara- 
tion. 

Indian Languages: general treatises, and col- 
lections, part 3, pp. r2.'J-124; Northwest coast, 
1.. 141. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

.T:nues Ihiuimond Trumbull, Jihilidogist, was 
Ixu'n in Stouiugtou, Conn., December 20, 1821. 



102 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Trumbull ( J. H.) — Continued. 

He entered Tale in 1838, and though, owing to 
ill health, he was not graduated with his class, 
his name wjis enrolled among its members in 
1850, and he was given the degree of A. M. He 
settled in Hartford in 1847, and was assistant 
secretary of state in 1847-1852 and 1858-1861, and 
secretary in 1861-1864, also state librarian in 
1854. Soon after going to Hartford he joined the 
Connecticut Historical Society, was its corre- 
sponding secretary in 1849-1863, and was elected 
its president in 1863. He has been a trustee of 
the Watkinson free library of Hartford, and its 
librarian since 1863, and has been an officer of 
the Wadsworth atheuicum since 1864. Dr. Trum- 
bull was an original member of the American 
Philological Association in 1869, and its presi- 
dent in 1874-1875. Ho has been a member of tlie 
American Oriental Society since 1860 and the 
American Ethnological Society since 1867, and 
honorary member of many State historical soci- 
eties. In 1872 he was elected to the National 
Academy of Sciences. Since 1858 he has devoted 
special attention to the subject of the Indian 
languages of North America. He has prepared 
a dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot's 
Indian Bil)le, and is probal)ly the only Amer- 
ican scholar that is now able to read that work. 
In 1873 he was chosen lecturer on Indian lan- 
guages of North America at Tale, but loss of 
healtli and other labors soon compelled his res- 
ignation. The degree of LL. D. was conferred 
on him by Tale in 1871 and by Harvard in 1887, 
while Columbia gave him an L. H. D. in 1887. — 
Appleton^s Cyclop, of Am. Siog. 

Tukndh : 

Bible, New test. See McDonald (R.) 

Bible, gospels McDonald (R.) 

Bible, John i-iii, McDonald (R.) 

Bible history McDonald (R.) 

Bible passages American. 

Bible passages Bible Society. 

Bible passages Bompas (W. C.) 

Bible passages British. 

Bible passages Church. 

Bible passages Gilbert & Rivington. 

Catechism McDonald (R.) 
General discussion Bompas (W. C.) 

Hymn book McDonald (R.) 

Hymns McDonald (R.) 

Lord's prayer Bompas (W. C.) 

Lord's prayer Rost (R.) 

Prayer book McDonald (R.) 

Primer Bompas (W. C.) 

Psalm book McDonald (R.) 

RelaHonships McDonald (R.) 

Relationships Morgan (L. H.) 

Text McDonald (R.) 

Words Wilson (E. F.) 

Tukudh hymns. See McDonald (R.) 
Tukudh primer. See Bompas (W. C.) 
Turner (William Waildeu). [Comjjara- 

tive vocabulary of languages of the 

Athapascan family.] 



Turner (W. W.) —Continued. 

Manuscript, 12 unnumbered leaves, ■« ritten 
on botli sides, folio, in the library of the Bureau 
of Ethnology. 

The vocabulary contains 364 English words, 
equivalents of which are given in wliole or in 
part ill the following languages: Tacully or 
Carrier (from Harmon, p. 403), Tahkali (from 
Hale, p. 569), Tlatskanai (from Hale, p. 569), 
TTmkwa (from Hale, p. 569), TTnipqua (from 
Tolmie, in Royal Geog. Soc. Journal), Apache 
(from Bartlett, in Whipple), Pinal Lleno (from 
Whipple), Jicorilla (from Simpson), Navajo 
(from Simpson), Navajo (from Eaton, in Sihool- 
craft, vol. 4), Hoopah (from Gibbs, in School- 
craft, vol. 3). 

See Whipple (A. W.),, Ewbank 

(T.), and Turner (W. W.) 

William Waddeu Turner, philologist, born 
in London, England, October 23, 1810 ; died in 
Washington, D. C, November 29, 1859. He 
came to New Tork in 1818, and, after a public- 
school education, was apprenticed to the car- 
penter's trade, but subsequently became a 
printer. At the age of twenty-six he was master 
of the French, Latin, German, and Hebrew. 
Afterward he studied Arabic with Prof. Isaac 
Nordheinier, and they proposed to write 
together an Arabic grammar, but, receiving no 
encouragement, they jirepared instead A Crit- 
ical Grammar of the Hebrew Language (2 vols., 
New Tork, 1838) andChrestomathy : or A Gram- 
matical Anal.ysisof Selections from the Hebrew 
Scriptures, with an Exercise in Hebrew Compo- 
sition (1838) ; also a Hebrew and Chaldee Con- 
cordance to the Old Testament (1842). In order 
to superintend the printing ofthe.se books, Mr. 
Turner removed to New Haven, as the only 
sufficient supply of oriental type was to be 
found tliere and at Andi>ver. He was engaged 
in setting the type during the day, and spent 
his evenings in jirepariug tlie manuscript. On 
the completion of the works, Mr. Turner added 
to his linguistic attainments a knowledge of 
Sanskrit and most of the other chief Asiatic lan- 
guages, and later he turned his attention to the 
languages of the North American Indians. He 
edited a Vocabulary of the Jargon or Trade Lan- 
guage of Oregon (1853), and Grammar and Dic- 
tionary of the Toruba Language fl8.'')8), which 
was issued by the Suiithsouian Institution. In 
1842 he was elected professor of oriental litera- 
ture in Union theological seminary. New Tork 
city, and he continued in that office until 1852, 
when he was called to Washington by the com- 
missioner of pateuts to take charge of the 
lil)rary of that department. He was a member 
of the American oriental society •■ind secretary 
of the National institute for the promotion of 
science. Mr. Turner was considered in hisdaj' 
the most skillful proof-reader in the United 
States. In addition to the literary labors that 
have been already mentioned, he translated 
from the German Friedrich L. G. von Raumer's 
America and tlie American People (New Tork, 



ATHAPASCAN LANCIIIAUKS. 



103 



I 



Turner (W. W.) — f'ontinncd. 

ISlf)), :iiiil WMH iissdciadd with Dr. I'.J. K:iiif- 
iiiiiiiii ill llii' tniiisl;ili(.ii of the twilt'tli (!iriii;in 
edition of Fi rdiiiiiiid Ma«kcldcy's('iniii)riidimii 
of Mod.-ni Civil Law (I.oiidoii, lH4r>). H.' also 
liaiislalcd William Frciiiid'H Latin (it riiiaii 
Lfxiron lor ICtliaii A. A iidnw.s's Latin Knulisli 
Lfxicon (N<u York, isr.l), A inili-tun't: t'lielup. 

()/ A III. liilKJ. 

Tuttle (Cliarlcs H. ) ( )iii- lu.itli land : | 
lu'iuo' ;i I'ull ;ii'('oiiii(. of llic | ('.iiiailian 
lioi'th-west iiud Hudson's liay loiilr, | 
logeMit'V with | a narrative of tlic cx- 
licrienccsol" the Hudson's hay | rxpedi- 
tiou of 1884, I iucludiuo' | a description 
of the, climate, resources, and thecliar- 
acteristics of | the native inhabitants 
between the 50th parallel | and the 
Arctic circle. | By Cliarles K. 'I'uttle, | 
Of the Hudson's Bay P^xpedition [&e. 



Tuttle ((!. R. )—<'<•»' iiiiied. 

t wo lintis.] I Illustrated with .Ma)is and 
Enojra vinos. | 

Toronto: I ('. I'lacketl Ivoliinson, ;"> 
Jordan street. | lS,sr>. 

llalf-titli' (Our noi'tli land) vi-rso Idank 1 I, 
title V(»r.s<> cojtyviglit I 1. iiri'taci- jip. \- \ i, «ou- 
tents pp. vii-xiv, index lo illiistratioiis )>i>. xv- 
xvi, text ])l>. IT-r.Sl, aiipindix iip, r>s:i riS9, I wo 
maps, 8°. 

A])ostlcs' creed in ('liippewyaii, syllaliic 
cliarat'li^is, ]). KtL— Jjist of 'J'imu'li dialects, jtp. 
;iO()-;j()l.— Clyppowyan syllaliariimi. \>. :!70. 

Copies seen : Eanies, Pillinf;. 

Tututen ; 

Voeabulai'v 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 



Ander.son (A. I'.) 
Doisey (J. O.) 
Everette (W. K.) 
Hubbard (— ) 
Kaiitz (A.V.) 
Lucy-Foa.sarieu (M. P. de). 



u. 



tJgalenzen : 

Xium-ials See Dall (W. H.) 

Tribal names Latham (R. G.) 

Vocaliularj- Adeluug (J. C.) and Vater 

(J.S.) 
Vocabulary Baer (K. E. von). 

Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) 

VocaViulary Bii.scliiiiann (.J. C. E.) 

Vocabulary Dall (W. H.) 

Vocabulary Latham (R. (J.) 

Words J'uschmann (J. (!. E.) 

Words Daa(L. K.) 

tJluIuk Inkalik. See Inkalik. 
Unifreville (Edward). The | ])reseut 
state I of I Hudson's hay. | Coutaiuing 
a full deserii>tion of | that settlement, 
and the adjacent country; | and like- 
Avise of I the fur trade, | with liints for 
its improvement, &c. &e. | To whicli 
are added, | remarks and observations 
. made in the inland | parts, during a 
residence of near four years; | a speci- 
men of five Indian lanouages; and a | 
journal of a journey from Montreal to 
New- I York. | By Edward Umfrcville; 
I eleven years iu the service of the 
Hudson's bay com- | pauy, iind four 
years in the Canada | fur trade. | 

London : | printed for Charles Stalker, 
No. 4, Stationers- | court, Ludgatc^ 
-street. | MDCCXC[1790]. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title ver.so blank 1 
1. contents pp. i-vii, dedicatory remarks pp. 1-2, 
prefatory advert i.senieut pp. 3-10, text pj). 11- 
128, 133-230, list of books 1 1. plate and two 
folded tables, 8°. 



Unifreville (E.) — Continued. 

"A specimen of sundiy Indian languages 
spoken in the inland parts of Hud.sou's Bay 
between thatcoast and the coast of California," 
lieing a vocabuhuy of 44 words of several 
American languages, among them the Sussee, 
on folded sheet facing p. 202. 

Copies seen : Astor, Boston AtheuiPum, Brit- 
ish Musenni, Brown, Congress, Eaiues. Shea. 

Priced iu Stevens's Nuggets, no. 2722, 7s. 6d. 
At the Field sale, no. 2407, a copy brought $1.50 ; 
at the Squier sale, no. 1446, $LC3. Priced by 
Quaritch, no. 28280, 11. is. 

■ Eduard Unifreville | iiber | den ge- 

genwiirtigen Znstand | der | Hudsons- 
bay, I der dortigeu | Etablissemeuts | 
und ihres Handels, | nebst | einer Be- 
sehreibnng | des Iiuiern von Neu Wal- 
lis, I und einer | Reiso xon Montreal 
nach Neu York. | Aus dem Englischen. | 
Mit I einer eigenen ncuen Charte, einer 
kurzen Geographic | dieser Lander und 
mehreren Erliiuterungen | herausgege- 
ben I von | E. A. W. Zimmerman, | 
Hofrath und Professor in Braun- 
schweig. I 

Helmstadt, bey Fleckeisen. 1791. 

Title verso blank 1 1. introduction preface 
etc. pi>. iii-xxvi, text pp. 1-164, map, 8°. 
Vocabulary of the Sussee, p. 148. 
Copies seen : Brown, Harvard. 
Umpkwa : 

General discussion See Gallatin (A.) 
General discussion Gatschet (A.S.) 

Gentcs Halo (H.) 

Grammatic comments Miiller (F.) 



104 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Unipkwa — ('(iiitinncd. 



Numerals 
Nmnenils 

I'rnper names 

Vorabulary 

TocaVmlary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary- 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 



SeeDuHot dc Morra.s(K.) 
Tolmic (\V. r.) ami 

Dawson (O.M.) 
Stanley (J. M.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Barnliar.lt (W. H.) 
Busclimaun (J. O.K.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gatscliet (A.S.) 
irale (H.) 
Latliam (11. (1.) 
Milliau (J.J.) 



Unipkwa — Coutinned. 

Vocabulary See Scouler (J.) 

Vocabulary Tolniie (W.F.) 

Vocabulary Turner ( W. W.) 

Vocabulary W]iii)])le (A. W. 

Wonls Daa(L. K.) 

AVor.ls Ellis (R.) 

Words Pott (A. F.) 

Words Tolmie (W. F. 
Dawson (G. M 

tJnakhotana : 
Numerals 
\'ocal)ulary 
Vocabulary 



and 



See Dall (AV. H.) 
Bancroft (H. 
DalUW.H.) 



H.) 



V. 



Vater (X^r. Johann Severin). Lingnarnm 
totins orbis | Index | iilpliabeticns, | 
quarum | Ciranimaticae, Lexioa., | eol- 
lectifincs vo('al)ulormii | recensoiitnr, | 
patria si<;nificatnr, historia adnm- 
bratnr | a | Joanne Severino Vatero, | 
Theol. Doct. et Profess. Bibliotbecarin 
Re^:., Ord. | S. Wladimii-i equite. | 

Beroliui | lu officina libraria Fr. 
Nieolai. | MDCCCXV [1815]. 

Second title: Litteratnr | der | Grannnatikcii, 
Lexlca | nnd | Wiirtersanimlungen | aller 
Sprachen der Erde | nacli | aljdiabetischer Ord- 
nung der Spracben, | niit eiiicr | jicdriingten 
TTebersicbt | des Vaterlandes, der Scliicksale ] 
nnd Verwandtscliaft dei'.selben | von | Dr. 
Joliann Severin Vater, | Professor nnd Biblio- 
tliokar zu KJinigsberg des S. Wladimir- | Ol- 
dens Hitter. | 

Berlin | in der Nicolaisclien Biicbliandlnni;. 
I 181.'->. 

Latin title verso 1. 1 recto blank, German title 
recto 1. 2 verso blank, dedication verso blank 1 
1. address to tbe king 1 1. jneface pp. i-ii, to 
the reader jip. iii-iv, lialf-title verso blank 1 1. 
text pp. ;{-25i), 8". Alpliabetically arranged by 
names of languages, double columns, Germaii 
and Latin. 

Notices of works in Chepewy-in, jip. 42-43. 

Copies see)! : Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

A later edition in (rerniaii as follows: 

Litteratnr | der [ Grnnnnatiken, Lex- 

ika I nnd | WJhtt'rsannnlunj'en | aller 
Sprachen der Erde | von | Jolianu Se- 
verin Vater. | Zweite, vollig nnigear- 
beitete Ansgabe | von | B. Jiilg. | 

Berlin, If^lT. | In der Nieolaisehen 
Bnebliandlnng. 

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 
1 1. preface (signed B. Jiilg and dated 1 Decem- 
ber 1846) pp. v-x, titles of general works on tlie 
subject pp. xi-xii, text (alpliabel ically arranged 



Vater (J. S.) — Continncd. 

by names of languages) pp. l-4r)0, additions and 
corrections pp. 451-.')41, subject index pp. ,'>42- 
r>(i.'i, autlior index pji. r>G4-592, errata 2 11. 8'^. 

Notices of works in Atnali (Kinn-Indianer), 
])p. 38, 4.50; ^Vtnaer, p. 4M; ("hepewyan, pp. f>3, 
473; Inkiiliicliliiaten, pp. 407-498; Kinai 
(Ugaljasclimutzi), pp. 204, .'>04; Sussee (Snr.see), 
p. 385 ; Tacnllies, p. 389 ; Uiupqua, p. 427. 

Coynes seen : Congress, Eames, Harvard. 

Attln' Fiscliersale.no. 1710, acopy s(dd fori*. 

Vegreville (Ph-e Valentin Theodore). 
[Mannseri])tH relating to the Monta- 
gnais, Chip])ewyan or Den<5 lan- 
gtiage.] (*) 

In response to a request for a list of his 
papers relating to the Athiqiascan languages, 
Father V<^gr6ville, under date of Apr. 23, 189], 
furnished me the following: 

1. Monograph on the Dene-Dindji<5. Ethno- 
graphic notes. Points of resemblance or non- 
resemblance with the other nations, s.av.ige or 
civilized. 

2. Grammar of the Montagnais, Ctiipweyan, 
or Dene. This gr;imniar is composed of three 
parts: The first, after the prolegomena, treats 
of the noun, the adjective, the verb, etc., and 
of their diverse .accidences ; the second gives 
the .syntax; the third, or etymology, treats of 
the composition and deconi])osition of words. 
It .serves to abridge the dictionaries consider- 
ably. 

The taldes of verbs, though much less com- 
plicated thai) in the Assinuiboine and tlii^ Cree, 
are yet of consider.ible extent, for two reasons: 
First, because of the great number of para- 
digms ](roduced by the union of the jiersonal 
termination with the preceding afiix; and, 
second, the irregularity of the terminal root in 
the immense majiu-ity of the verbs, which I 
had to arrange in groups that divide and sub- 
divide. 

3. The iloutagnais-Freuch diction.ary, con- 
taining about 18,000 words, out of which one 
might form more than 100,00.') by me:ins of the 
rules hiid down in the grammar, third part. 



ATTTAPASrAN LAXOUACER. 



105 



Vegreville (A^ T.) — Coutinu.d. 

1, All llio iiintcrhil iioci'ssai'y for tln' coimiiii- 
siliiiii III' (lie Ki(uitli-M()iit;i;;ii:iis (lictioiiiin , 
\\ liicli « ill 111- :is lai'ni' as tlic iircccilinj;. 

.">. Si'viTal (itlii'i- woi-ks: Siinj;s, catc'cliisin, 
iiistriiftioiis, liist(>ri<- cpitoinc i>{ religion. 

II "ii-icvcs iiic to liavo to say that for tin' 
liriscul all my scimitiflc and literary work is 
sIojiikmI. a task more serious and nioni 
important is imposed iii)on mi'. ... I am 
tlie only ]iriest to ministei' at Fort Saskat- 
eliewan. wlieie I j;(> eveiy foitniyllit, a ills- 
tance of 22 niili's. ( »n tlii' intervening Sundays 
I am lU^ediMl at Hilmonti)n, wlieri> the pastor 
nnderstands only Knslish anil Freneh, and 
leaves to my eare tlii'ee-fonrths of his eon^re- 
f^ation, who speak Cree. I am the only mis. 
sionary wlio speaks the language of the Assin- 
nilioines, and I am oblijfiMl, once or t wire each 
year, to spend some weeks amonu; them, some 
4U miles from here. Vim will not he snrprl.seil, 
tlierefore, when 1 tell yuii that it is nearly two 
years sinee I have lia<l any time to devote to 
my manus<'ripts, and very little even to m\ enr- 
respondenee. 

Father Valentin Th^-odore Vejireville, mis- 
sionary, Oblate of ^fary Tmmai iilate, was horn 
at rhatres. Canton of l5vron, Department of 
Mayenne. France, September 17, 1S29. He made 
his stiuUes successively at fivron, Laval, Le 
JIans. and Marseilles, where he was ordained 
jiiiest in 18.'>2. Ho had alre;uly been nnide an 
(). M. I. religious, when, by way of Ha\'ro, Xew 
York, Montreal, Chicago, and St. Paul, he went 
to St. Boniface, then capital of all the North- 
west. He conimeuced to exercise the apostidic. 
ministry in that locality and the enviiinis 
among the lialf-breeds and ])eoi)les of divers 
nationalities (1852-18."):!) and prepared to pene- 
trate more deeply into the North. During 
1853-18," he gave his attention to the Monta- 
gnais (Tcliipeweyans) and to the Cris (Creos) of 
lie a la Crosse. The winti-rof 1857-"58hepas.sed 
again at St. Boniface. In 18.">S he returned to 
lie a la Crosse, leaving there in 18fi0 to found 
the mi.ssion of Lac Caribou, in tlie midst of the 
Alontagnais, and visiting thence t he (h-ees found 
farther to the .south. Returning south to St. 
Boniface, he went in 18fi.") to Lac la B.iche, 
whei'e he ministered to the Indians and mixed 
po|ndations speaking the Moutagnais ai^l 
Cree. In 1874 and ]87.'« he si-rved themissionof 
St. Joachim (Edmonton). In 1.S7."), 187G, and 
1877 he gave his attention to the Assiniboines 
and to the persons speaking ('ree and French 
of Lac Ste. Anne. lu 1.877 and 1878 he built X. 
D. de Lourdes (Fort Saskatchewan), and then 
returned to Lac Ste. Anne (1878-18,'f()). Inl88Uhe 
descended the Saskatschewan Kiver, stoi>ping 
at St. Laurent, whence he soon departed to 
establish successively the tVdlowing missions: 
St. Eugene (1880), St. Antoine de Padone 
(Batoche) (1881), Ste. Annein thetownof Prinei^ 
Albert (1882), St. Louis de Langevin (1883). The 
tirst half of the year 1885 found him going from 
one of these missions to another according mi 



Vegreville ( V. T. ) — Contiinnnl. 

Ills prcsiuce seemed re(|nireil in those times of 
(rouble .ind war. In the month of duly, 188.'., 
li(^ ascended again toward Kdmonlon, and as- 
sumed charge of (be Mission of SI. Chiislopher. 
XiiMierous visits in Ihe neigliboihood of the 
)(osts ilesignated above complete the lists of 
wiuidi^rings of tliis missionary. He is uow sta- 
tioned at St. Albert. Alberta. 



Vocabulary: 
Ahtinne 
Ahtinne 
Ahtinn6 
.\litinn6 
Ahtinn^"! 
Ahtinne 
Ahtinne 
Ahtinne 
Ahtinne 
Ahtinne 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apach(^ 
Ai)aclio 
Apache 
Apacho 
Ai)ache 
Apache 
Apacho 
Apache 
Apacho 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Ap.ache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
A]>:iche 
Ajiache 
Athapascan 
Athapascan 
Beaver 
Beaver 
Beaver 
Beaver 
Beaver 
Beaver 
15eaver 
Beaver 
Beaver 
Beaver 
Chijipewyau 

t.'hippewyan 
Chippewyan 
Chippewyan 



I Allen (II.T.) 
Baer (K. K. von). 
H.incroft (II. H.) 
P.uschmanii (.T.C. E.) 
Ball (W. H.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Jehan (L. F.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Pinart (A.L.) 
■Wraugell (F. von). 
Allen (H.T.) 
r.au<roft(II. n.) 
Bartlett (J. R.) 
P.ourke (J.G.) 
Ibischmann (.I.C. E.) 
Chai)in (G.) 
Cremony (J. C) 
Froebel (J.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Gilbert (G.K.) 
Henry (C. C.) 
Higgius (N. S.) 
Hoft'man (W.J.) 
Loew (().) 
McKlii)y(P.D.) 
Palmer (E.) 
Pimentel (F.) 
Ruby (C.) 
Schoolcraft (H. R.) 
Sherwood (W. L.) 
Sirap.son (J. H.) 
Smart (C.) 
Ten Kate (H. F. C.) 
Turner (W.W.) 
Whipple (A. TV.) 
White (J. li.) 
AVil.son (E. F.) 
Yarrow (H. C.) 
Atbap;iscan. 
l;an<roft(H. H.) 
Bancroft (H.H.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 
Buschmaiin (J. C. E.) 
G.arrioch (.\.C.) 
How.se (.J.) 
Kennieott(R.) 
Latham (R.G.) 
MLean (J.) 
Morgan (L. H.) 
Koehrig(F. L.O.) 
Adelung (J.t;.) and Yater 

(J.S.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
i:albi(.-V.) 
I'.aneroft (H. H.) 



106 



BIBLIOGRAPHY •F THE 



Vocabulary - 

Chippewyau 

Chlppewyaii 

Cbippewyau 

Cliippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Cliippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Cliippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Chijipewynn 

Chijipcwyan 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Chippewyan 

Coquille 

Coquille 

D6n6 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Dog Rib 

Hen«gi 

Henagi 

Hudson Bay 

Hudson Bay 

Hupa 

Hiipa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Hupa 

Inkalik 

Inkalik 

Inkalik 

Inkalik 

Inkalik 

Kaiyuhkhot; 

Kenai 

Keuai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Keuai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Keuai 



•Coutinufd. 
SeeBoiiipa.s (^y. C.) 

Biischniann (J.C. E.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Howse (J.) 
Jehan (L. F.) 
Kenniiott (R.) 
Lai ham (R. (i.) 
Lefioy (J. H.) 
Mackeu/ie (A.) 
M'Lean(J.) 
McPluTson (H.) 
Reeve (W.D.) 
Richardson (J.) 
Roehrig{F. L.O.) 
Ros8(R.B.) 
Thonii)80n (E.) 
Whipple ( A. W.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Abbott (G.H.) 
Dorsey (J.O.) 
Petitot(E. F.S.J.) 
Bancroft (H.H.) 
Buschiuanii (J. C. E.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
LetVoy (J.H.) 
Morgan (L. H.) 
Murray (A. H.) 
0'Brian(— ). 
Richardson (J.) 
Whipple (A. W.) 
Anderson (A. C) 
Hamilton (A. S.) 
Adelung (J. C.) and Vater 

(J.S.) 
Whipple (A. W.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Azpell (T. F.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Crook (G.) 
Curtin (J.) 
Gat8chet(A.S.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Powers (S.) 
Turner (W. W.) 
Whipple (A. W.) - 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Buschmann (J. C E.) 
Dall (W.H.) 
Schott (W.) 
Zagoskin (L.A.) 
na Dall (W. H.) 

Adelung (J. C.) and Vater 

(J.S.) 
Baer (K. E. von). 
Balbi (A.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Dall (W. H.) 
Davidott' (G. I.) 
Davidson (G.) 
De Meulen (E.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
J6hau (L. F.) 
Krusenstern (A. J.von). 



Vocabulary — 

Kenai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Kenai 
Kenai 

Keuai 

Koltschaue 

Koltschane 

Koltschano 

Koltschaue 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kutchin 

Kwalhiokwa 

Kwalhiokwa 

Kwalhiokwa 

Kwalhiokwa 

Lipau 

Loucheux 

Loucheux 

Loucheux 

Loucheux 

Montagnais 

Nabiltse 

Kabiltse 

Nabiltse 

Nabiltse 

Nagailer 

Nagailer 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Nava,jo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Nava^jo 

Navajo 

IC ivajo 

Nav;ijo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Nehawni 

Nehawni 



Coutinned. 

See Latham (R. G.) 
Lisiansky (U.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Roehng (F. L. O.) 
Staft'eief (V.) and Petroti" 

(I.) 
Wowodsky {— ). 
Baer (K. E. von). 
Bancroft (H.H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
P.ancroft{H. H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
DalKW.H.) 
Kennicott (R.) 
Kutchin. 
Morgan (L. H.) 
Murray (A. H.) 
Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Ro.ss (R. B.) 
Whymper(F.) 
Bancroft (H.H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Hale (H.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Bancroft (H.S.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Isbester (J. A.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Adam (L.) 
Ander.son (A. C.) 
Dorsey (J. O.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Hazen(W.B.) 
Adelung (J. C.) and Vater 

(J.S.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Arny (W.F. M.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beadle (J.H.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Gushing (F. H.) 
Davis (W.W. H.) 
Domenech (E. H. D.) 
Eaton (J. H.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Loew (O.) 
Matthews (W.) 
Nichols (A. S.) 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 
Pino (P.B.) 
Powell (J.W.) 
Schoolcraft (H. R.) 
Shaw (J.M.) 
Simpson (J. H.) 
Thom])son (A. H.) 
Turner (W.W.) 
Whipple (A. W.) 
Whipple ( W. D.) 
Willard(C.N.) 
Wilson (E.F.) 
Kennicott (R.) 
Roehrig (F. L.O.) 



i 



ATHAPASCAN T.ANCUAOES. 



107 



Vocabulary — 


Coiitiuiied. 


Vocabulary - 


- Continued. 


Ntiliawiii 


See Rt)ss (K. H.) 


Tinnt) 


SeoDorsey (J.O.) 


VfAu lU- Lievr 


; Ktiinitott (K.) 


'I'innt- 


Pinart (A.L.) 


I'fiiii tit) Lievi 


i> I'ctitdl (K. F.S.J.) 


Tinni's 


Rcss (R. P..) 


]\'im tlf Lievr 


Ki.t.liiij; (F.L.O.) 


Tinni' 


'I'innt\ 


Ki)<;iii' liivM' 


I'.ainl.anll (W.H.) 


Tinni' 


Tt)lmie (\V. F.) 


Kt)gmi Kiver 


Dtirsi-y (.r.O.) 


Tinnt) 


Tt)liiiie (W.F.) and Daw- 


Sikani 


ISiist'liniann (.1. (J. E.) 




son (G. M.) 


Sikaiii 


Howsc (,I.) 


Thilsktnai 


Antlerson (A. ('.) 


Sikaui 


Pope (F. L.) 


Tlatskcnai 


ISamroft (H.H.) 


Sikani 


Koehrij; (F. L.O.) 


'I'lalskcnai 


r.iist limann (.L C. E.) 


Sikani 


Ross (R. I!.) 


'I'latsktii.-ii 


<;alhiliii (.\.) 


Slave 


KfuuiiotI, (R.) 


Tlalskinai 


Hale (11.) 


Slave 


Kirkby (W. W.) 


Tlatskt-nai 


Latham (R. G.) 


Slave 


Latham (R. G.) 


Tlatskcnai 


Turner (\V. W.) 


Slave 


Morgan (L. H.) 


Tututen 


Anderson (A. C.) 


Slave 


Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 


Tntuteu 


Dorstiy (J. O.) 


Suvsee 


Balbi(A.) 


Tututen 


Everette (W. E.) 


Sursee 


Bancroft (H.H.) 


Tututen 


Hubbard (— ). 


Sursee 


Busclnnanu (J. C. E.) 


Tutjiteu 


Kautz (A.V.) 


Siii'.seo 


Gallatin (A.) 


Tututen 


Lncy-Fossarieu (^L P. tie). 


Sursee 


Jtjhan (L. F.) 


Ugalenzen 


Atlelung (J. C.) and Vater 


Sursee 


Latham (R. G.) 




(J.S.) 


Sursee 


Petitot (E.F. S.J.) 


Ugalenzen 


Miu'T (K. E. von). 


Sursee 


Sullivan (J. W.) 


Ugalenzen 


Bamroit (H.H.) 


Sursee 


Umfreville (E.) 


Ugalenzen 


Buschmann (J. ('. E.) 


Sursee 


Wilsou (E.F.) 


Ugalenzen 


Dall(W.H.) 


Taculli 


Auderstm (A. C.) 


Ugalenzen 


Latham (R. G.) 


Taculli 


BalbitA.) 


Um])kwa 


Ander.son (A. C.) 


Taculli 


Bancroft (H. H.) 


Umpkwa 


Bancroft (H.H.) 


Tatulli 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


Umpkwa 


Banihardt (W.H.) 


'I'aculli 


Gallatin (A.) 


Umpkwa 


Busdimanu (J. ('. E.) 


Taculli 


Harmon (1). W.) 


Umpkwa 


Gallatin (A.) 


Taculli 


J6ha» (L.F.) 


Umpkwa 


Gat.schet (A. S.) 


Taculli 


Roehrig (F. L.O.) 


Umjikwa 


Hale (H.) 


Taculli 


Taculli. 


X'nipkwa 


Latham (R.G.) 


Taculli 


Tolniie (W.F.) and Daw- 


Uiujikwa 


Milhau (J.J.) 




son (G. M.) 


Umpkwa 


Scouler (J.) 


Taculli 


Turner {W. W.) 


Umpkwa 


Tolmie (AV. F.) 


Taculli 


Whipple (A. W.) 


Uuii)kwa 


Turner (W.W.) 


Taculli 


Wilstm (E.F.) 


Umpkwa 


Whipple (A. W.) 


Talilewah 


Crook (G.) 


Unakhotana 


Bancroft (H.H.) 


Talilewali 


Gibbs (G.) 


Unakhotana 


Dall(W.H.) 


Tinne 


Bompas (W. C.) 


Wailakki 


Powers (S.) 


Tinnij 


Campbell (J.) 


Willopah 


Anderson (A. C.) 


Tiune 


Dawson (G. M.) 


Willopah 


GibLis (G.) 



w. 



Wailakki : 

Niunerals See Bancroft (H. H.) 

Numerals Tolmie (W. F.)antl Daw- 

son (G.M.) 
Vocabulary Powers (S.) 

Warner (James), sr. See Dorsey (J. O. ) 

Watkinson : This word following a title or within 
jiarentheses after a nt)te intlicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has beini seen by the com- 
piler in the Watkinson library, Hartford, Conn. 

Wellesley: This wortl following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred tt> has biien seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Wellesley college, Wel- 
lesley, Mass. 



Wentzel (W. F.) Letters to the Hon. 
Roderic, McKeuzie, 1807-1824. 

In Masson (L. R.), Les l)Ourgeois de la Com- 
pagnie du nord-ouest [part 2], pp. 67-153, Que- 
bec, 1889, sm. 4°. 

Vocabidary (260 words) of the Beaver lan- 
guage, pp. 97-104. 

"Wheeler (Capt. George Montague). 
[Seal.] I Engineer deiiartnient, II. S. 
army. | Report | upon | United States 
(Jeographical Surveys | westofthe one 
lumdredth meridian, | in charge of | 
capt. Geo. M. Wheeler, | Corps of en- 
gineers, U. S. army, | under the direc- 



108 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Wheeler (O. M.) — CoiiiiiiinMl. 

tiidi ol' I tlif cliit-r of t'lmiiicers, V. S. 
army. | Published l»y aiitliority of the 
honoi-ahlo tlu^ Secretary of war, | in 
accordaiu'c. Avitli acts of Congress of 
June 23, 1874, and Fe])riiary 15, 1875. 1 In 
seven volnnies and one sup])lenient, 
accompanied l»y f)ne | topographic and 
one gef)logic atlas. | Vol. I. — Geograph- 
ical report[-VII. — Archa'<dogy]. | 

Washington: | Government printing 
office. I 1889 [1875-188!).] 

7 vols, .and Ruii])li'iii«iit to vol. 3, 4°. 

The dates of the respective volumes .ire: I, 
1889; II, 1877; III, 1875; III. supplement, 1881; 
lY, 1877; Y, 1875; YI, 1878; A'll, 1879. 

Gatschet (A. S.), Apjicndix'. Linsuisties, vol. 
7, pp. 399-485. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Congress, 
Geological Survey, National Museum, Pilling, 
Tiumhull. 
Whipple (Aniicl Weeks). Ewbank (T.), 
and Turner (^\^ W.) Explorations 
and surveys for a railro;ul routes from 
the Mississippi river to tlie Pacific 
ocean. | War department. | Route near 
the thirty-fifth i^arallel, under tlie com- 
mand of lieut. A. W. Whipple, | topo- 
graphical engineers, in 1853 and 18.54. | 
Report I upon tlie Indian trihes, jhy | 
lieut. A. W. Whipide, Thomas Ewhank, 
esq., and prof. Win. W. Turner. | 

W.a.shington, I). C., | 1855. 

Title verso blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1 
1. illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 7-127, 
seven plates, 4°. Included in "Reports of ex- 
plor.atious and surveys for a railroad from the 
Mississippi river to the Pacific ocean," vol. 3, 
of wliieli it forms the third part; it was also 
issued sepiu'ately, without tlio plates. 

Chapter Y, A^ociibularies of Korth American 
Languages (collected by A. AY. Whip])le; clas- 
sified, with accompanying remarks, by AYm. W. 
Turner), jip. 54-103, contains, inider the heading 
Apiielie, par.allel vocibulaiies of the Nav.ijo 
and Pinal Lefio (225 words Civch, collected by 
Whipph'), pp. 81-83. — liemarks on the vocabu- 
laries (by Turner), pp. 83-85. — Comparative 
vocabulary of LTi words of Hudson's Bay (fnmi 
Dolibs). ('liepe\vy;ui (from Mackenzie), Dog- 
Bib (from liichardscm), T;u'ully (from II:n'iii(ni), 
Unikwa (from H.ale), lloopah (from School- 
craft), Navajo (from Sclioolcraft), and Apache 
(from B.artlett's manuscript), pp. 84-85. 

Cujdes seen : Bureau of Etlmology, E.ames, 
Pilling. 

At the sale of Prof. AN'.AY. Turner's library iu 
New York, May, 1800 (iios. 204-29G), eight copies 
of the separate edition wej'e sold. Mr. T. W. 
Pield's copy (no. 2523) sold in 1875 for $1.75. 

Amiel Weeks Wliip]jlc, soldier, born in (Jreen- 
■wich, Mass., iu 181K, died iu Washington, V. 



Whipple (A. W.) — Continued. 

('., May 7, 18(i3. He studied at Amherst; was 
gi'.aduated at the IT. S. military academy in 1S41 ; 
was engaged inuuediately afterward in llie 
hydrograi)hic surxcy of I'atnpsco lliver, ;iud in 
1842 in sur\cving llie approaches to New 
Orleans ;nid the harbor of Portsmouth, N. H. 
In 1844 he was detailed as .assistant astronomer 
upon the northeastern boundary survey, and in 
18J5 he was employed in determining the north- 
ern bouiuhiries of New York, ^■ermont, and 
New Hampshire. In 1849 he was ai)poiuted 
assistant astnmonur in the Mexican boundary 
commission, and in 1853 he had charge of the 
P.aciflc railroad survey along the 35th piirallel. 
In 185U he was appointed engineer for the soutli- 
ern lighthouse district and superintendent of 
the improvement of St. Clair fl.ats in St. Mary's 
river. At the opening of the civil war he at 
once applied for service in the field, ami was 
assigned as chief topographical engineer on tlie 
start' of Cen. Irvin McDinvi'W.—AppletoJij 
Cycliip. ()/ A III. ]ii(i(j. 

Whipple (Gc». William Denison). Vo- 
cabulary of the Navajo language by 
General William D. Whipjile, stationed 
at Fort Defiance, New Mexico. 

Manuscrii)t, 2 leaves, written on one side 
only, 4°, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy- 
Contains 40 words only. 
An ai)pended note s.ays: " Transmitted to 
Geo. Gibbs, from Louisville, Ky., by General 
Geo. H. Thomas, with a letter of transmittal 
d.ated March 5,1808.' 

White {Dr. John B.) Vocabulary of the 
[Coyotero] Apache. 

In Gatschet (A. S.), Zwolf .Sprachen aus dcni 
Siidwesten Nordamerikas, pp. 99-115, Weimar, 
1870, 8°. 

Ciuitains about 400 words. 

Cliissifu'd list of the preijosition.s, 

]trononns. tVc., of tlu^ Apache language. 
Manusi ripl,2 unnumVici'cd leaves, 4°, written 
on one side only, in the liliraiy of the liureau 
of Ethnology. 

Degrees of relationships in tlie Lan- 
guage of the A])ache tribe. 

Manuscrii)t, 2 unnumbered leaves, 4°,written 
on one side only, in the lilu-ary of the Bureau of 
Ethiudogy. 

Names (tf the ilitferent Indian tribes 

in Arizona, and the names by which 
they are called by the Apaches. 

Manuscri])t, 5 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written 
on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. 

Remarks on the general relations of 

the Apache language. 

Miinuscript, 7 unnumbered leaves, 4°, written 
on one side only, in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. 



i 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



109 



I 



White (.1. 1?.) — f'ontimu.I. 

Snifciiccs ill A]>iiclic, with ii clasnili- 

ciitioii of iiuni, women, auil cbildrcn, 

with the Apache uaiiics. 

Alaiiiiscrii>t, 'J5 i)aj;Ls, 12°, in tln^ lil>rarv "f 
tlu' lliiicaii (if Kt liiii)l(»fiv. litxordi'il iu a lilaiik 
bdiik. 

[Vocahiihiry of the Apacho and 

Toiito laiijiuagc, witli notes, l>y Dr. 
Jolni 15. Wliile.] 

."Maiiii«(ii|il, lip. 1 110, IJ , ill tliv liliiar.v iif 
the Riirt^aii nC KUmohi^v. 

Ki^conlt'd ill a blank UiMik. tin- lir.st i>aK<' "f 
\vliii:Il contains an abldcx iatioii of tlio above, 
title; ]>]». 2-3 are blank. Xotes, ji. 4. — Cnr- 
reney in use by tlio Apaebes, ]>. fi -Iinlian 
wearini; a|iiiari'l, p. 5. — Tontoe ninner.il.s, p. G. — 
Apacbe numerals, p. 7. — Voeabnlarv of tbe Tou- 
toe ;in(l .\paebe, alpbabetically airan<;e<l by 
Eii;;li.sli woid.s, pp. 8-8'.). — Tlic Tontoe words 
are on tlie outer margins of tbe ver.sos of tlie 
leaves, the inner niar<;in eoutaining riinnin^i 
notes and iiminieuts. Tbe. English words aro 
on tbe left-band margin of tlic reetos and tbe 
Aiiaclio words on tlio ri.ght-liand or outer mar- 
gin.— Tribal rclationsliips, jiji. 90-91.— Imple- 
ments of war, seasons of 1 be year, p. 92. — Pro- 
nouns, adverbs, and adjeetives, p. 'Si. — Anat- 
omy, pp. 94, 9G. — Sentences in Apacbe, pp.95, 
97._Tree.s, p. 98.— Animals.pp. 99-102. — Town.s, 
camps, &<■., ].p. 103-104.— Vegetables, p. lOJ.- 
jSIusical instrnnienls, ]>. 106. 

Tbese niannscrii)ts were collected by L)r. 
Wliitc wliilo serving as agency physician at t bo 
S.aii Carlos Indian reservation, Jfew ISIexico, 
from October, 1873, until November, 1875. 
White Mountain Apacbe. See Apache. 

Whymper (Fre(leri<k). Tiavel and ad- 
venture I ill the I territory of Ahiska, | 
formerly Russian America — now ceded 
to th«! I United States — and iu various 
other I }>arts td' the north Pacilie. | By 
Frederick Wliyinper. | [Design.] | 
Witli map and ilhistrations. | 

Loutlon: | .John Murray, AUieniarle 
street. | 18(iS. The right of Traushiticm 
is reserved. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso iirinters 
1 I. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii- 
ix, contents pp. xi-xix, list of illustrations p. 
[xx],text pp. 1-306, ajipendix pp. 307-331, nuiii, 
plates, 8°. 

Appendix X. Indian dialect.s of Northern 
Alaska (late Russian America), pp. 318-328, 
contains : Co-yukon vocabulary, words from 
the Co-yukon dialect, spoken (with slight vari- 
ations) on the Yukon Kiver for at least 500 
miles of its lower and middle cour.se (lugelele, 
a variety of same dialect), ]>|>. .320-321. 

Kennicott (K.),Kotcli-a-kutcl\iu vocabulary, 
pp. 322-328. 



"Whymper (l'\) — Continued. 

(hqncs scfn : Mo.stiin I'ulilic, lirilisb Miisi'um, 
Congress. 

.Vt tbe Field sale, cataloKUi- no. 2.'i3'.t, a copy 

lirougbt.t2.75. 

Travel and adventure. | in tlie | 

terriloiy of .Viaska, | formerly Kiissiau 
.\merica — now ceded to tlie | United 
States — and in various <dlier | jiarts of 
the north ra<-itic. | IJy I'rcderick 
Whymper. | [Desi.gn.J | \\ ilii ma]> and 
illustrations. | 

N(!wYork: | Harper A hrollicis, pub- 
lislicrs, I Franklin s(iu;uc. | 1S(!!). 

Fionlisiiiece 1 1. title verso lilank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. preface ))p. xi-xii, conti^nts 
pp. xiii-xviii, list of illustrations]), xix, textjip. 
21-332, ajiiiendix p]>. 333-353, map and plates, 
8°. 

Linguistics as in Loudon edit ion, jip. 341-350. 

Cojnes xecii : Bancroft, Boston .Vtheuieum, 
I'owell. 

Jicpiinliil 1.S71, p|>. xix,21-.3r)3, 8'. 

The French edition, Pari.s, 1871, 8' \ contains 
no Athai)a.scan material. (Pilling.) 

Russian America, or "Alaskii": the 

Natives of tlu! Youkon River and adja- 
cent country. l>y Frederick Wliyuiper, 
Esq. 

In Etbn(dogi(^al Soc. of London Trans, vol.7, 
jip. 167-185, London, 1869, 8°. 

Kutcli-a-kutchiu vocabulary, compiled liy 
the lato Major Kennicott, pp. 183-18.J. 

Willard (Celeste N.) Vocabulary of the 
Navajo language. 

Manuscript, 10 unnumbeied leaves, folio; in 
the library of tbe Bureau of Kthnology. (Col- 
lected in 1869. 

Recorded on one of the standard vocabulary 
forms, no. 170, of the Smithsonian Institution, 
containing 211 English words, eijuivalents of 
nearly all of which are given in the Navajo. 
Willopah : 

Vocabulary See Anderson (A.C.) 

Vocabulary Gilibs ((r.) 

Wilson (Dan itO). Prehistoric man | Re- 
searches into the origin of civilisation 
I in the old and the new world | By | 
Daniel Wilson, LL. D. | professor of 
history and English literature in Uiii- 
versity college, Toronto ; | authorofthe 
"Arclueology and ]ireliistoric. annals of 
Scotland,'' etc. | In two volumes. | 
Volume I [-II]. I 

Caml)ridg<^: | Macmillan and co., ( 
and 23. Henrietta street, Coveut gar- 
den, I London. | 1S62. | (The, right uf 
Translation is reserved.) 



110 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Wilson (D.) — Continued. 

2 vols. : Lalf-titlo vorso design 1 1. colored 
frontisjlieco 1 1. title verso printer 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. pr(fa<'(' pp.vii-xvi, contents pp. 
xvii-xviii, text jt]). 1-48K, plan; half title A-erso 
design 1 1. colored t"rontis])iece 1 1. title verso 
printer I 1. contents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-475, ap- 
l)endix pi>. 478-483, index pp. 485-499, verso 
advertisement, 8°. 

Word for "mother," in several American In- 
dian languages, including the Tlatskauai, Ka- 
vajo, and Kenay, vol. 1, p. 71. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Eames, Watkinson. 

Prehi8toric man | Researi'bt'S into 

tbe origin of civilisation | in tlie old 
and the new world | By | Daniel Wil- 
son, LL.U. I professor [&e. two lines.] 
I Second edition. | 

Loudon: | Macmillau audco. 1865. | 
(The right of Translation is reserved.) 

Half-title versodesign 1 1. colored frontispiece 
1 1. title verso printer 1 1. dedication verso blank 
1 1. contents pp. vii-xiii, colored plate 1 1. illus- 
trations pp. xv-xvi, preface (dated 29th April, 
18<i5) pp. xvii-xviii, i)reface to the first edition 
pp. xix-xxvi, half-title ver.so blank 1 1. text pp. 
1-622, index pp. 623-G35, 8°. 

Linguistics as under ])revious title, p. 59. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Eames. 

Prehistoric man | Researches into 

the Origiu of Civilisation | in the Old 
and the New World | By | Daniel Wil- 
son, LL. D., F. R. S. E. I professor [&c. 
two lines.] | Third edition, revised and 
eulai'ged, | with illustrations. | In two 
volumes. | Vol. I[-II]. | 

London: | Macmillau and Co. 1876. | 
(The right of Translation is reserved.) 

2 vols. : half-title verso design 1 1. colored 
frontispiece 1 1. title verso printers 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. preface (dated 18th Novem- 
ber, 1875^ pp. vii-viii, contents pp. ix-xiii, illus- 
trations pp. xiv-xv, text pp. 1-399; half-title 
verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-ix, illustrations 
pp. x-xi, text pp. 1-386, index pp. 387-401, works 
by the same author etc. 1 1. 8°. 

Linguistics as under previous titles, vol. 2, 
p. 373. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Eames, Har- 
vard . 
Wilson (Rev. Edward Francis). The 
Sarcec Indians. By Rev. E. F. Wilson- 

In Our Forest Children, vol. 3, no. 9 (new 
series no. 7), pp. 97-102, Shingwauk Home, On- 
tario, December, 1889, 4°. 

Grannnatical imtes, p. 101. — Vocabulary (112 
words and ])lirases), pji. 101-102. 

Mr. Wilson ackno\^ ledges his indebtedness 
to Rev. H. W. Gibbon Stockon, Church of Eng- 



"Wilson (E. F.) — Continued. 

land missionary to the Sarceea, for information 
and valuable notes. 

Report on the Sarcee Indians, hy the 

Rev. E. F. Wilson. 

In Fourth Report of the committee . . . 
api)ointed for the purpose of investigating 
. . languages ... of the North- Western 
Tribes of the Dominion of Canada; in British 
Ass. Adv. Sci. Re]K>rt of tlie lifty-eighth meet- 
ing, pp. 233-255, London, 1889,8°. 

Vocabulary (100 words and short sentences), 
English and Sarcee, ]i]). 249-252. — N<it(^s <m the 
language, pp. 252-253. F(dlowed by notes l)y 
Mr. H. Hale, pp. 253-255. 

Tlie committee report issued separately, 
without title-j)age, repaged 1-23. (Eames, 
Pilling.) 

[ ] An Indian history. 

[Sault >Ste. Marie, Ontario. 1889.] 
No title, heading ius above, pp. 1-15, 8°. A 
circular distributed for gathering information, 
linguistic and ethnologic, regarding any partic- 
ular tribe of Indians. On the first page the 
author says he is "trying to collect material 
with a view to publishing a short popular his- 
tory of some one hundred or so ot' the best 
known Indian tribes, together with a little in- 
sight into the vocabulary and grammatical 
structure of each of their languages." Page 
2, pronunciation ; pp. .3-7, words and sentences, 
three columns, the first Englisli. the second ex- 
amples from various Indifni languages, among 
them the Tukuth, Sar<-ee, and Apache; the 
third is left blank for filling in the i)articular 
language desired ; pp. 7-10, questions concern- 
ing language, with examples from several lan- 
guages; pp. 11-14, questions of history; p. 15, 
"A few particulars about the Indians." 
Copies seen .- Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

The Navajo Indians. By Rev. E. F. 

Wilson. 

In Our Forest f!hildren, vol. 3, no. 10 (new 
series no. 8), pp. 115-117, Shingwauk Home, 
Ontario, January, 1890, 4°. 

Grannnatical notes, p. 116 —Vocabulary (84 
words and phrases), pp. 116-117. 

A comparative vocabularj\ 

In Canadian Indian, vol. 1 (no. 4), pp. 104-107, 
Owen Sound, Ontario, January, 1891, 8°. 

A vocabulary of ten words in about 56 lan- 
guages, mostly North American, and including 
the Chipewyan, Takulli, Tukuth, Sarcee, 
Navajo, and Apache. 

Rev. Edward Francis Wilson, son of the late 
Eev. Daniel Wilson, Islington, prebendary of 
St. Paul's Cathedral, and grandson of Daniel 
AVilson, bishop of Cah^utta, was born in London 
December 7, 1844, and at the age of 17 left school 
and emigrated to Canada for the purpose of lead- 
ing an agricultural life; soon after his arrival 
he was led to take an interest in the Indians, 
and resolved to become a missionary. After two 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES. 



Ill 



Wilson (E. F.) — Continm^d. 

yoars of i(r('i)ara(it)ii, iiiucli of wliicli Hnu' was 
spi'iit aiiKiiii;' tlic Tiidiaiis, lii^ ictnriicd to Kiitt- 
laiiil, ami in DcccimIht, lS(i7, was ordained dea- 
con Shortly tliereat'ter it wasarraiifif'd tliat lie 
should return to Canada as a niissionary to the. 
Ojibway hidians, under llie ausiiii'es of the 
Clinrt'h Missionary Society, whi«li he did in 
July 18(>8. He has labored anioni; the Indians 
ever since, bnildingtwo homes— the Shinjiwank 
Home, at Saiilt Ste. Marie, and the Wawanosh 
Home, two miles from the former— and jirc- 
parinft linijnistic works. 

Wisconsin Historical Society: These words fid- 
lowin;; a title or within j)arentheses after a 
note indicate that a copy of thi< work referred 
to has been seen by the coni]iiler in Uw library 
of that institution, JMadisou, AVis. 

Woodruff {Dr. Cbiiiles E.) Daiiccs of 
the Hupa ludians. liy Dr. ChiuUs E. 
Woodruff, \J. S. A. 

In American Anthropolojiist, vol. b, |ip. 53- 
61, Washington, 1S9'2, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Hupa names of [four] dances, p. 55. 

Words : 

Ahtinne See Daa (L. K.) 

Ahtinne Ellis (K.) 

Ahtinne Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 

Ahtinne Pott(A. F.) 

Ahtinne Scliombiirgk (11. H.) 

Apache Bourke (J. (J.) 

Apache Daa(L. K.) 

Apache Ellis (R.) 

Apacho Gatschet (A. S.) 

Apache Latham (It. (r.) 

Apache Tolraie (W. F.) and Daw- 

.son (G.M.) 

Apache Wilson (E.F.) 

Athapascan Brintou (D. G.) 

Athapascan L)aa(L. K.) 

Athapascan Ellis (R.) 

Athapascan Hearne (S.) 

Athapascan Kovar (E.) 

Athapascan Lubbock (J.) 

Athapa.scan Pott (A. F.) 

Beaver Daa(L.K.) 

Chippewyan Charencey (C. F. H. G.) 

Chippewyan Ellis (R.) 

Chippewyan Latham (R. G.) 

Chippewyan Leslie (J. P.) 

Chippewyan Schomburgk (R. H.^ 

Chippewyan Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 
son (G.M.) 

D^ne Charencey (C. F. H. G.) 

Dog Rib Daa(L.K.) 

Dog Rib Ellis (R.) 

Dog Rib Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 
son (G. M.) 

Hupa Ellis (R.) 

Hupa Gatschet (A. S.) 

Hnpa Latham (R.G.) 

Inkalik Bu.schmann (J. C. E.) 

Kenai Buschmaun (J. C. E.) 

Kenai Daa (L. K.) 

Kenai Ellis (R.) 



Words — C^ontinned. 


Kenai 


See J6ban (L. F.) 


Kenai 


Latham (R.G.) 


Kenai 


Pott (A. F.) 


Kenai 


Schomburgk (R. H.) 


Kiiiai 


Wilson (D.) 


Kiilchin 


Daa (L.K.) 


Kuleliiu 


F.I lis (K.) 


Lijian 


liolla.rl (\V.) 


Lonelien.\ 


Daa (i:. K.) 


Louchenx 


Gildjs(G.) 


Loucheux 


Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 


Montagnais 


Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 


Nava,io 


Harreiro (A.) 


Navajo 


Daa (L. K.) 


Navajo 


Ellis (R.) 


Navajo 


Gatscliet (A.S.) 


Navajo 


Latham (R.» 


Naviyo 


Matthews (W.) 


Naviijo 


Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 




son (G.M.) 


Navajo 


Wilson (D.) 


Pean de Li6vn 


Charencey (C. F. H. G.) 


Peau de Lievn 


Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 


Sikaui 


Daa(L.K.) 


Slave 


Ellis (R.) 


Sursee 


Adelung (J. C. E.) and 




Vater (J. S.) 


Taeulli 


Daa (L. K.) 


Tacnlli 


Ellis (R.) 


Taeulli 


Gatschet (A. S.) 


Taeulli 


Latham (R. G.) 


Taeulli 


Lubbock (J.) 


Taeulli 


Pott (A. F.) 


Taeulli 


Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 




.sou (G.M.) 


Tinne 


ISriuton (D. G.) 


Tinn6 


Crane (A.) 


Tinne 


Gatschet (A.S.) 


Tinne 


Hale (H.) 


Tlatskenai 


Daa (L. K.) 


Tlatsljenai 


Ellis (R.) 


Tlatskenai 


Farrar (F. W.) 


Tlatskenai 


Lubbock (J.) 


Tlatskenai 


Pott (A. F.) 


Tlatskenai 


Wilson (D.) 


Tukudh 


Wilson (E. F.) 


Ugalenzen 


Buschmaun (J. C. E.) 


Ugalenzen 


Daa (L.K.) 


Umpkwa 


Daa(L.K.) 


TJmpkwa 


Ellis (R.) 


i ITmpkwa 


Pott (A. F.) 


1 Umjikwa 


Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 


1 


son (G.M.) 



Wowodsky (Gov. — ). Vocabulary of 
the [Kenai] language of Cook's Inlet 
Bay. 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, folio, written on Iwth 
sides, in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

Recorded on a blank form containing 60 Eng- 
lish words, equivalents of all of which are given 
in the Kenai. 

There is in the same library a copy of thig 
vocabulary, 2 11. folio, made by Dr. Gibbs. 



112 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Wrangell ( Jrf»Mir«/Ft'i(linau(l voii). Ob- 
servations recneillies par I'Aiuiral 
Wraugell siir les hal)itants des Cotes 
Nord-onest de rAin6riqne ; extraites dii 
russepar M.le priuce Emanuel Galitziu. 



Wrangell (F. vou) — Continued. 

In Noiivelles annales des voyages, vol. 1, 1853 
(vol. 137 of tlie collection), pp. 195-221, Paris, n. 
(1. 8'5. 

Short vocal)ulaiy of Die Mednovskic [Copper 
Islanders] and the Oiigalautsi, p. 199. 



X. Y. Z. 



Xicarilla Apache. See Apache. 
YarroAv {Dr. Henry Crdcy). Vocaltulary 
of the Jicarillia language. 

lu Wheeler (G. M.), Reports upon U. S. Geog. 
Surveys, vol. 7, pp. 424-465, 470, Washington, 
1879, 4°. 

Consists of 211 words in flu^ first division 
and six in the second. Colli'itcd at Tierra 
Amarilla, New Mexico, Sci)teniber, 1874. 

3Ar0CKHH7> (.leiiT. .liiBpeiniii A.iEKcliii). [Za- 
goskiii {LicKt. Laureiiti Alexie).] ITe- 
iiiexoAHaii oHiicb | 'lacrii pycciiiixh B.ia,vliniii | 
BT> AMepiiKli. I IIpoii.'tBe4eiiiia)i | .IciireiianroMb 
.1. JJarotKiiHUML I m, 1842, 1813 ii 1844 ro- 
4a xb. Cb MepKaTopcKoBi Ka|)Toio r])aBiipoBaMii()H) 
Ha Mtjii. — 4acTb ncpBafi[-BT(>pa(i]. | 

CatutTncTcpoyprb. | ne-iaTaiio b'- rmioipa'i'iii 
Kap.ia Kpaiia. | 1847[-1848]. 

Translation : Pedestrian exploration | of 
p.arts of the Russian possessions | in America. 
I Accomplished | by Lieutenant L. Zagoskin | 
in the years 1842, 18415 ami 1844. | With a Mer- 
cator's chart engraved on coi>i)e,r. | Part first 
[-second]. | St. Petersbiu-g. | I'rinted in the 
printing office of Karl Krai. | 1847[-18481. 

2 vols. : 1 p. 1. pp. 1-18:5 ; 1 p. 1. pp. 1-120, 1-15, 
1-45, 8'5. 

Vocabulary of the Inkilik and Inkalit Tugel- 
mut, vol. 2, appendix, pp. 17-20. — List of vil- 
lages, witli population statistics, vol. 2, appen- 
dix, jij). 39-41. — List of birds in Koikhiiagmiut 
and Inkilik, vol. 2, appendix, pi>. 42-43. 

Cojdfg seen: Bancroft, IJritisli Museum. 

The vocabularies are reprinted in Busch- 
mann (J. C. E.), Der athapa.skische Sprach- 
stanim, pp. 269-312. 

3E.lKU0ii (CeMeHbll.uiMT.) [Zelenoi (Semion 
Iliich)]. Hae.ie'ieaie U3i. 4HeBMiii;a .loiiicHi'HTa 
3aroCKiiHa, BejeHiiaro Bb BKCiie.uniiii, coBcp- 
uieHHOii iiMi no MaiepaKy c1>Bepo-3ana4noii 



3E.IEH0ii (<^ n.)— Continueii. 

AMcpiiKii. "linaiio Bb coopaiijii P. I'. 0. 8''" 
fliiBapfl 1847 ro4a. (CocTaB.icim 4. »I.i. C. II. 
3c.ieHbnii.) 

Translation: Extract from tlu^ diary of 
Lieutenant Zagoskin, ke|>t during a Journey 
made l)y him on tlie mainland of Northwest 
America. Read befoie tlie Kussian (ieographic 
Society, January 8, 1847. (Compiled l)y active 
member S. I. ZelenoV.) 

In Zapi.ski (et(;.). Journal of the Russian 
Geogi'aidiical- Society, vol. 2, jip. 135-202, with 
map, St. Petersburg, 18^.' S<^. 

Collection of words (150) of two Ttynai peo- 
ple (Inkalik and Inkalit), pp. 177-18L 

Issued separately also. Only the separate 
seen. (Yale College.) 

ll:iB.ie'ienic ii.rb 4HeBiiii a .n'lireiiaina 3aio- 

CKHIll, BlVlCHHai'O Bl> 3 KCIieAHUill, COlIcpillCH- 

Hoii iiML no MiTopHKy (•liii("po-:i:iiia4iioii 
AMopHKn. (t;ocTaB.ieno 4. M.i. C. H. 3(MeiibiMb.) 

In Russian Geographical Society Journal, 
vols. 1 and 2 (second edition), pp. 211-266, St. 
Petersburg, 1849, 8"=. 

Comparative vocabulary in parallel columns. 
Russian, Inkalik proper, and Inkalit, pp. 246- 
249. 

Anszug au.s deui Tagebuciie des 

Lieutenants Sagoskin iiber seine Expe- 
dition auf dcni festeu Lande des nord- 
westliclien Amerikas. 

In Denkschriften dor Russisclien Geogra- 
I)liischen Gcsellschaft zu St. Petersburg, Band 
1, Weimar, 1849, 8°. (A translation, from the 
Russian, of vols. 1 and 2 of the Memoirs of the 
Russian Geographical Society.) (*) 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
:!59-374. 

Tith^ from Bancroft's Native races. 

Zzehkkoeujitgichinchik [Tukudli]. See 
McDonald (R.) 



A D I ) E: N D A 



Apostolides (S.) Our lord's ])ray«M- | ii\ 
I Olid HiiiHlrt'il DililV'rciit Laiij^niigtis. | 
Compiled by .S. Apostolides. | [Text, 
from Acts ii. 8, two lines.] | Second 
edition. | 

London: | printed and imhlislied liy 
W. M. AVatts, I 80, Gray's-inii road. 
[1871.] 

Title verso notice of ciitiv 1 I. iinli'\ I 1. 
half-title vcr.so blank 1 1. text (printiil on one 
aide only) 11. 17-116, V2\ 

Lord's prayer in CUipewyaii (sj llaliic ili;ii- 
acter-s), 1. 32. 

Copies xeen : Eamea. 

Kor titl(^ of earlier edition, .see pajie 4 of tliis 
liil>liojfrai>liy. 

Berghaus (Dr. Heinricli). All^cmeiner 
I cthiioorapliischer Atlas | oder | Atlas 
der Volker-Kimde. | Eine Sammlung | 
voa neiinzehu Karteu, | aiif deueii die, 
iiiii die Mitte des uciiuzehiiteu Jahr- 
liiinderts statt tindende i f^eoojrapliisehe 
Verbreituuji^ allcr, nach ilirer Sprach- 
verwandtschaft <(eord- | neten, ViUker 
des Erdballs, nnd ihre Vertlieilnng iii 
die Rciche mid Staateii | der alttMi wie 
der ueiieu Welt al)jL:;el)ildet nnd versiun- 
licht worden ist. | Ein Versncli | von | 
D"^ Heinrich Berghaus. | 

Verlag vou Justus Perthes in (Jotha. 
I 1852. 

Title of tlie series (Di\ Heinricli Berf^haus' 
phy.sikalischer Atlas, etc.) verso 1. 1 recto blank, 
title as aljovo verso blank I 1. te.\t pp. l-(58, 19 
maps, folio. 

I. Die nordisclieu VoUier, 3. Athapa.scas, 
treats of the habitat, tril»al divisions, speech 
relations, etc., of tlie tSahissali-deinnihs, Ri- 
bei-Indianer, Daho-Deinnili, Idtscliahtawaht- 
Deinnih, Kautschu - Beinnihs, Tleingchali- 
Deinnihs, Tontsawliot-Deinnihs, Tahkali, 
Kauseiid - Deinnihs, Slouacus - Deiiinihs and 
Xoj^Mih■^s, pp. oii-Sl. — Map no. 17 is entitled 
" Ethno.;;raphisclie Karte von Nordanierika," 
'Niich Alb. Gallatin, A. von Humboldt, Cla- 
vijjero, Hervas, Hale, Isb(\ster, &c." 

Gopiei seen : Bureau of Klhuoloyy. 

ATII 8 



[Bonipas {liinhop William Carpenter).] 
The acts of the apostles. | Translated 
into the Teni (or Slave) language | of 
the Indians of Mackenzie river, | 
north-west Canada. | Hy | The right 
rev. the bishop | of Mackenzie river. | 

London : | Hritish and foreign bible 
society. | 1890. 

Title as above ver.so " The acts of the apos- 
tles in Teni" 1 l.text (entirely in Teni, reman 
characters) pp. 3-84, 16^^. 

Copies seen : Kanies, Pilliii};. 

For title of the four gospels in Slav6 (roman 
characters), by this author, see page 10 of this 
bibliograi)hy. 

[ ] The epistles [and re\elation]. | 

Translated into the Teni (or Slavi^) 
language | of the Indians of Mackenzie 
river, | north-west Canada. | By | The 
right rev. the bishop | of Mackenzie 
river. | 

London : | British and foreign bible 
society. | 1891. 

Title as above verso " Tlie epistles in Teni" 
1 1. text (entirely in Teni, romau characters) 
pp. 3-269, colophon p. [270], \(V. 

Romans, pji. 3-35. — I and II Corinthians, pp. 
36-89. — Galatians, pp. 90-101. — Ephesians, jtp. 
102-112. — Philippians, pp. 113-120. — Colossians, 
))p. 121-128.— I and II Thessalonians, jip. 129- 
140.-1 and II Timothy, pp. 141-157.— Titus, pp. 
158-161.— Philemon, pp. 162-163. -Hebrews, pp. 
164-187.— James, pp. 188-196.— I and II Peter, 
pp. 197-211.— I, II, and III John, pp. 212-224.— 
Jude, pp. 225-227.— Kevelation, pp. 228-269. 

Ciipies seen : Eames, Pilliii;;. 

[ and Reeve (W. 1).)] The | gospel 

of Ht. Matthew | tniuslated into the | 
Slave language | for | the Indians of 
north-west America. | In the Syllabic 
Character. | 

London:] printed for the British 
and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic- 
toria street. | 188(5. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in syllabic 
characters) pp. 1-80, 12°. Some copies were 
issued without the title-paf^e. 

113 



114 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



[Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. D.)]— 
Continvied. 

This gospel and tlie remaining portion of the 
new testament were translated by Bishop 
Bompas and transliterated into syllabic char- 
acters by Mr. Reeve. 

Copies seen : British and J'oreign Bible Soci- 
ety, Eames, Pilling, Wcllesley. 

[ ] The I gospel of St, Mark | 

translated into the | Slave language, | 
for I Indians of north-west America. | 
In the Syllabic Character. | 

London: | printed for the British 
and foreign bible society, | Qneen Vic- 
toria street. | 1886. 

Title verso blank 1 1. haU'-title (one line in 
syllabic characters and at bottom "Gospel of 
St. Mark") on the verso of which begins the 
text [p. 86] in syllabic characters followed by 
pp. 87-1.36, 12^ 

Copies seen : Brinton, frames, Pilling, "Welles- 
ley. 

[ ] The I gospel of St. Luke | 

translated into the | Slav6 language, | 
for I Indians of north-west America | 
In the Syllabic Character. | 

London : | jirintcd for the British and 
foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria 
street. | 1890. 

Title as above vorso printers 1 1. half-title 
("The Gospel of St. Luke, iu Slavi" and one 
line syllabic characters) verso beginning of 
text [p. 2], text entirely in syllabic characters 
pp. 2-92, 12°. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

[ ] The I gospel of St. John, | 

translated into the | Slave language, | 
for I Indians of north-west America. | 
In the Syllabic Character. | 

London : | printed for the British and 
foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria 
street. | 1890. 

Title as above verso printers 1 1. half-title 
("The Gospel of St. John, in Slavi" and one 
line syllabic characters) ver.so beginning of text 
[p. 2], text entirely in syllabic characters pp. 2- 
67, 12°. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

[ ] The I acts of the apostles, | 

and the epistles [and revelation], | 
translated into the | Teuui or Slave 
language, | for | Indians of Mackenzie 
river, north-west | Canada. | By the 
Right Rev. | the bishop of Mackenzie 
river. | In the Syllabic Character. | 

London: | printed for the British and 
foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria 
street. I 1891. 



[Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve (W. D.)]— 
Continued. 

Title as above ver.so printers 1 1. text (en- 
tirely in syllabic characters) pp. 1-U74. 12°. 

Acts, pp. 1-87.— Romans, pp. 88-123.— I and 

II Corinthians, pp. 124-182.— Galatiaiis, pj). I8:i- 
194. — Ephesians, pp. 195-206. — Philipjiians, jip. 
207-214. — Colossians, pp. 215-222.— I and II 
Thessalouians, pp. 223-235.-1 and II Timothy, 
pp. 236-253.— Titus, pp. 254-258,— Philemon, pp. 
259-260.— Hebrews, pp. 261 -=286. — James, i)p. 
287-296.-1 and II Peter, pp. 297-312.— I, II, and 

III John, pp. 313-326. — Jude, pp. 3',37,339,— 
Revelation, pp. 330-374. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

Brman (Georg Adolph), editor. Archiv | 
fiir I wissenschaftliche Knnde | von | 
Russland. | Herausgegcben | von | A, 
Erman. j Erster[-Fiinfundzwanzigster] 
Band. 1 1841 [-18(37]. | Mit dreiTafeln. | 

Berlin, | gedruckt und verlegt vou 
G. Reimer. [n. d.] 

25 vols. 8°. 

Schott (W.), Ueber ethnograpliische Ei-geb- 
nisse der Sagoskinschen Reise, vol.7, pp. 480- 
512. 

Copies seen : Congress. 
Hale (Horatio). Language as a test of 
Mental Capacity. By Horatio Hale, 
M. A. (Read May 26, 1891.) 

In Royal Soc. of Canada, Trans, and Proc. 
vol.9, pp. 77-112, Montreal, 1892 (?), 4°. 

A general discussion upon American and 
Australian languages. The Athapascan family 
is the most fully treated of the American 
tongues — the Dene Diudji6, Navajo, Tinne, 
and Hupa with many examples, comments 
upon primary roots, grammatic forms, etc. 
principally from Petitot. 

Issued separately as follows : 

Language as a test of mental capac- 
ity : I being an attem^it to demonstrate 
the I true basis of anthropology. | By 
Horatio Hale, M. A., F. R. S. C. | Hon- 
orary Member [&c. six lines.] | From 
the transactions of the Royal society 
of Canada, vol. ix, sec. ii, 1891. 

[Montreal. Dawson brothers. 1892?] 

Half-title on cover as above, no inside title, 
text pp. 77-112, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen : Pilling, Powell. 

Klaproth (Heinrich Julius von). See 
Merian (A. A. von) and Klaproth (H. 
J. von), on next page. 

McDonald (EetK Robert). Mosis | vit 
ettunettle ttyig | Genesis, Exodus, Le- 
vitikus. I Genesis ettunettle. | Arch- 
deacon McDonald, D. D., | kirkhe 
thleteteitazya. | 



ATHAPASCAN LANGUAGES, 



115 



MoDonald (K*.) — ContiiiiuMl. 

T^ondoji : | printed lor tlur British 
iiiul Ibrcigii bibli'. society. | 1S!H). 

Title (verso "An'hdcacoii Mel toimld's version 
of Genesis, Exotliis, Leviticus, in Tiikudli)" 1 1. 
text (entirely in Tnkudh, ronmn (characters) 
pp. 3-282, colophon p. [283] verso hlank, 16°. 

Genesis, pp. 3-113.— Exodus, \t\>. U4-211.— 
Leviticus, pp. 212-282. 

Copies tsee II: Eiiintis, I'illiufi'. 

Tho fourth iiiul fifth books of Moses, 

oiiUod I Nuiubors, and Donteroiiomy. | 
Moses vit ettiinetlo ttyif^ ako | ttuuk- 
thut nikciido | Tiio;\vitittittslu ;iko 
Deuterouomi kiitnihuyoo. | Tukudh 
ttsha zit .thleteteitazya. | 15y | aruh- 
deacou McDonald, D. D. | 

Loudon: | printed for the British 
and foreij^u bible society | 1891. 

Title (ver.so " Arcluleacou McDonald's version 
of Numbers, DtMiteronomy, in Tukudh") 1 1. 
loxt (entirely in Tukudh, roniau characters) 
pp. 3-iai, colophon 1). [192J, 16°. 

Kunibers, pp. 3-103. — Deuteronomy, pp. 104- 

191. 

Copies seen : Eanies, Pilliut;. 

Under date of Jan. 28, 1892, Mr. McDonald 
informs mo that he has sent to tlie British and 
Foreign Bible Socic^ty for publication the books 
of Joshua, Judges, Kuth, and Samuel I, in 
Tukudh. 
[ ] Syllabary [iu Tukudli]. 

[London: Society for promoting 
christian knowledge. 1886.] 

No title-page, heading only; text pp. 1-3, aq. 
16°. For description of this syllabary see pp. 
59-60 of this bibliography. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

Maisonneuve (J.) Catalogue | des | 
livres des fonds | et eu nombre | His- 
toire, Archeologie | Ethnographie et 
Liuguisti(iue de I'Europe | de I'Asie, 
de I'Afrique | do rAnierinue et de 
I'Oceanie | [Vignette] | 

Paris I J. Maisonneuve, libraire-ddi- 
teur I 2.5, <nuii Voltaire, 'J^^ \ (Ancienne 
Maison Tli. IJarrois) | 1892 

Cover title as above verso list of grammars, 
title as above verso note 1 1. text pp. 3-127, back 
cover verso list of catalogues, 8°. 

Linguistique g6nerale (including titles of a 
number of books referring to American lan- 
guages), pp. 30— 44. — Grammaires,Dictionnaires, 
Textes et Traductions (pp. 45-127) include titles 
of Avorks in Dene Diudjie, p. 72; Montaguais, 
p. 111. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

Mas.son (L. R.) Les | bourgeois | de la 
Compagnie | du uord-ouest | recits de 
voyages, lettres et rapports iu^dits 



Masson (L. K.) — Continued. 

relatifs | iiu nord-ouest cauadien | Pu- 
blics avec une | csquisse historiiiue | et 
des Annotations | par | L. K. Masson ( 
Prenii6re S6rie | [Monogram] | 

Qti6bec I de I'iraprimerie g^n^rale A. 
Cot(5 et C'« I 1889 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. introduction pp. iii-vi, contents pp. 
vii-ix, half-title (Kecits de voyage, lettres et 
rapports inedits relatifs au nord-ouest cana- 
dien) v(irso blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1 1. 
half-tith^ (Reminiscences by the honorable 
Koderic MciKenzie, being chiefly a synopsis of 
letters from Sir Alexander Mackenzie) verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 7-06, half title (Mr. W. F. 
Wentzel, Letters to the Hon. Koderic McKeu- 
zie, 1807-1824) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 69-153, 
half-title verso blank 1 1, text pp. 155-413, errata 
p. [414], announcement of second series verso 
blank 1 1. map, .sm. 4'-'. 

Wentzel {W. F.), Letters to the Hon. Roderio 
McKen/.ie, pp. 67-153. 

Copies seen : Major Edmund Mallet, Wiush- 
iugton, D. C. 

[Merian {Huron Amlieas Adolf von) 
and Klaproth (H. J. von).] Triparti- 
tvm I sev I de analogia lingvarvm li- 
bellvs [Continvatio I-III] | 

Typis Haykulianis divendeute Ca- 
role Beck I Viennae MDCCCXX[- 
MDCCCXXIII] [1820-1823] 

4 vols. : title verso quotation 1 1. prefatory 
notice verso quotation 1 1. text pp. 1-193, 1 
folded leaf of numerals verso blank ; Continva- 
tio I (1821), title verso quotation I 1. text pp. 
197-314, 1 folded leaf of numerals verso blank ; 
Continvatio II (1822), title verso quotation 1 1. 
text pp. 317-585, 3 unmunbered pages, one of 
which is on a folded leaf; Continvatio III 
(1823), title verso quotation 1 1. text pp. 589- 
807, 1 unnumbered page of numerals, oblong 
folio. 

The work is a comparative vocabulary in 
various languages of words having a similar 
sound and meaning. Each ouo of the four vol- 
umes is arranged under a separate alphabet, 
and with five coluraes to a page. The first 
column, headed Germ., contains words in Ger- 
man, Dutch, English, Danish, Swedish, etc. ; 
the second column, headed Slav., contains 
words in Slavonic, Russian, Polish, Bohemian, 
etc.; the third column, headed Oal., contains 
words in Latin, Greek, French, Italian, Span- 
ish, Welsh, Irish, Breton, etc. ; the fourth col- 
umn, headed Mixta, contains words in niiscel- 
laneous European, Asiatic, African, American, 
and Oceanic languages ; and the fifth column, 
headed Xotnlae, contains explanations. 

Among the American languages in which 
examples are given is the Kinai. 

Copies seen .- Eames: 



CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 



1744 


Atliapascan 


1744 


Cliippuwyan 


17ftO 


Sursee 


1791 


Surseo 


1795 


AtliMpaacan 


17'.>« 


Atliapascan 


1801 


Various 


1802 


Various 


1802 


Various 


1802 


Various 


1802 


Various 


1802 


Various 


180S 


^'arioHs 


1800-1817 


Various 


1807 


Various 


1810-1812 


Kenai 


1811 


Chii>pewyau 


1812 


Kenai 


1812 


Navajo 


1813 


Kenai 


1814 


Kenai 


1814 


Various 


1815 


Cbippewyau 


1820 


Taculli 


1820-1823 


Kenai 


1826 


Various 


1830 


Cliippewyan 


1830 


Chippewyau 


1832 


Navajo 


1835 


Taculli 


1836 


Various 


1836-1847 


Kenai 


1830 


Various 


1840 


1 


1841 


Tinn6 


1841 


Unipkwa 


1841 


l^nipkwa 


1841-1847 


Inkalik 


1844 


Umpkwa 


1844 


Various 


1846 


Athapascan 


1840 


Kenai 


184C 


Taculli 


1846 


Various 


1840 


Various 


1847 


Athapascan 


1847 


('hip])ewyan, 


1847 


Inkalik 


1847-1848 


Inkalik 


1848 


Alitiune 


1848 


Athapascan 


1848 


Taculli 



Tacullv 



Vocabiilarv 

V^ocabulary 

Vo(.:abulary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

Words 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 

Vocabularies 
Vocabulary 
Numerals 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary- 
Vocabularies 
Uibliograpliy 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Words 
Various 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Various 
Vocabulary 
Vocabularies 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Numerals 

Vocabularies 

General discussion 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Various 

Various 

liibliographic 

Numerals 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

(ieiu-ral discussion 

Vocabulary 



l)ol)b8 (A.) 

Tlioiupson (K.) 

Uml'revillo (K.) 

Umfroville (E.) 

ilearne (S.) 

Hearno (S.) 

McKenzie (A.) 

McKenzio (A.) 

McKenzie (A.) 

McKenzie (A.) 

McKenzie (A.) 

McKenzie (A.) 

McKenzie (A.) 

Adelung (J. C.) and Vater 

(J. S.) 
McKenzie (A-) 
Davidoff (G. I.) 
Classical. 
Lisiansky (U.) 
Pino (P. B.) 

Krusenstern (A. J. von). 
Lisiansky (U.) 
McKenzie (A.) 
Vater (J. S.) 
Harmon (U. W.) 
Merian (A. A. von). 
Balbi (A.) 
James (E.) 
James (E.) 
Bareiro (A.) 
Taculli. 
Gallatiu (A.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Baer (K. E. von). 
James (E.), note. 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Erman (G. A.) 
Duflot dii Molras (E.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Anderson (A. C) 
Hale (H.) 
Hale (H.) 
Vater (J. S.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Zeleuoi (S. I.) 
Zagoskin (L.) 
Schomburgk (R. H.) 
Latham (K. G.) 
Anderson (A. C), note. 
117 



118 



CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 



1848 


Various 


Various 


Gailatin (A.) 


1849 


Chippowyan 


Vocabulary 


McLean (J.) 


1849 


Inkalik 


Vocabulary 


Schott (W.) 


1849 


Inkalik 


Vocabulary 


Zelenoi (S. I.) 


1849 


Inkalik 


Vocabulary 


Zeleuoi (S. I.) 


1849 


Navajo 


Words 


Pino (P. B.) 


1850 


Chippewyan, Kenai 


Words 


Scbomburgk (R. H.) 


1850 


Loucheux 


Vocabulary 


Isbester (J. A.) 


1850 


Navajo, Apache 


Vocabularies 


Simpson (J. H.) 


1850 


Various 


Comparative vocabularies 


Latham (R. G.) 


1850 


Various 


Vocabularies 


IIowso (J.) 


1851 


Apaclie 


General discussion 


Berghaus (H.) 


1851 


Apacho 


Vocabulary 


Bartlett(J.R.) 


1851 


Atliapascau 


Tribal names 


Latham (R. G.) 


1851 


Chippewyau 


Vocabulary 


MsPherson (M.) 


1851 


Chippewyan, Dog Rib 


Vocabularies 


Lefroy (J. H.) 


1851 


Dog Rib 


Vocabulary 


O'Brian (— ). 


1851 


Dog Rib 


Vocabulary 


O'Brian (— ). 


1851 


Kutchin 


Vocabulary 


Murray (A. H.) 


1851 


Kutchin, Dog Rib 


Vocabularies 


Murray (A. H.) 


1851 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Richardson (J.) 


1851-1857 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) 


1852 


Hupa 


Vocaluilary 


Gibbs (G.) 


1852 


Navajo, Apache 


Vocabularies 


Siuipson (J. H.) 


1852 


Umpkwa 


Personal names 


Stanley (J. M.) 


1852 


Various 


General discussion 


Berghaus (H.) 


1852 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Richardson (J.) 


185S 


Athapascan 


Tribal names 


Gallatin (A.) 


1853 


Hupa, Tabhlewali 


Vocabularies 


Gibbs (G.) 


1853 


Various 


General discussion 


Gibbs (G.) 


1853 


Various 


Words 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


1853 


Various 


AVords 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


1854 


Athapascan 


Tribal names 


Latliam (R. Vt.) 


1854 


Midnoosky 


Vocabulary 


Wraugell (F. von). 


1854 


Navajo 


Vocabulary, numerals 


Eaton (J. H.) 


1854 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Richardson (J.) 


1854 


Various 


Words 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


1854 


Various 


Words 


Latham (R. G.) 


1855 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Bartlett (J. R.) 


1855 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Henry (C. C.) 


1855 


Athapascan 


Comparative vocabularies 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


1855 


Tutiiten 


Vocabulary 


Kautz (A. V.) 


1855 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Whipple (A. W.) 


1855 


'( 


« 


James (E.), note. 


1856 


Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Triibner & Co. 


1856 


Henagi 


Vocabulary 


Hamilton (A. S.) 


1856 


Umpqua 


Vocabulary 


Milhau (J. J.) 


1856 


Various 


Various 


Latham (R. G.) 


1856 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


1856 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Bu.schmann (J. C. E.) 


1856 


"Various 


Vocabularies 


Richard.son (J.), note. 


1856 


Willopah 


Vocabulary 


Gibbs (G.) 


1857 


Kenai 


Grammatic treatise 


Radlofl' (L.) 


1857 


Montaguais 


Prayer book 


Perrault (C. 0.) 


1857 


Nabiitsc 


Vocabulary 


Hazen (W. B.) 


1857 


Nava^jo 


Vocabulary 


Davis (W. H.) 


1857 


Various 


Words 


Daa (L. K.) 


1857-1858 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Froebel (J.), note. 


1858 


Athapascan 


Bibliography 


Ludewig (H. E.) 


1858 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Froebel (J.) 


1858 


Athapascan 


Concordai^ce 


Anderson (A. C.) 


1858 


Coquille 


Vocabulary 


Abbott (G. H.) 


1858 


Variovis 


Vocabularies 


J6ban (L. F.) 


1859 


Athapascan 


General discussion 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


1859 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Barnhardt (W. H.) 


1859 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Buschmann (J. (£. E.) 



CHIiONOLOCUC INDEX. 



119 



1859 


Various 


\'oialiulariis 




IKf)-? 


Athnpascaii 


C'onipaiati vo vo(al(ulari( 




iKr>-- .' 


Hiipa 


Vocahulary 




ISf)-? 


Nabiltsc 


Vocabulary 




185- I 


Navajo 


Vocabulary 




185- ? 


Tahlewah 


Vocabulary 




ISKO 


Apa(h(» 


Numerals 




1800 


Athapascau 


BiblioKraiihic 




18G0 


Atliaitascaii 


Various 




18G() 


Lipaii 


Lord's i)rayer 




18f)(l 


Naviijo 


Vocabulary 




1860? 


Tiiiiu'i 


Scri]>ture jiaasagc 




1800 


'rutiitoii 


Vocabulary 




IKGO 


Various 


Coiniiarativc \ ocaliularic 


•s 


1860 


Various 


Vocabularies 




1860 


Various 


Vocabularies 




1860 


Various 


Vocabuhiries 




18C1 


Apache 


Vocabulary 




1861 


Atliajiascan 


Various 




1861 


Cliippcwyau 


Won Is 




lSfi2 


J?cavor 


Vocabulary 




1862 


Cliippcwyau 


Vocabulaiy 




1862 


Neliawui 


Vocabulary 




1862 


Pcau do Li^vro 


Vocabulary 




1862 


Slavo 


Prayci- book 




1862 


Various 


Various 




1862 


Various 


Words 




1862 


Various 


Words 




1862-1865 


Lipau 


Lord's prayer 




1862-1860 


\'ai-ious 


Legends 




ISO.'S 


Apaclio 


Vocabulary 




ISO:! 


Apatbo 


Vocabulary 




1863 


Cliippewyaii 


\'ocabiilary 




1863 


Sursee 


Vocaluilary 




1863 


TacuUi 


General discussion 




1863 


Various 


Various 




1863 


Various 


Various 




1S64 


Various 


General discussion 




1864 


Various 


Vocabularies 




1S65 


Montaj^nais 


General discussion 




1865 


Montagnais 


Prayer book 




1865 


Sikaiii 


Vocabulary 




1865 


Various 


Comparative vocabularic 


s 


1805 


Various 


Words 




1K05-1879 


AthapasKaa 


Bibliographic 




1S66 


Aijaclie 


Vocabulary 




1866 


Apaclie 


Vocabulary 




1866 


Athapascan 


Tribal names 




ISO 7 


Apache 


Vocabulary 




1867 


Apache 


Vocabulary 




1807 


AthapaBcau 


Bibliographic 




1807 


Loucheux 


Words 




1807 


Xavaji) 


Personal names 




1867-1808 


Na\i»,i(. 


Vocaljulary 




1HB8 


Apache 


General discussion 




1868 


Apache 


Numerals 




1868 


Inkalik 


Vocabulary 




1868 


Kenai 


Vocabulary 




1868 


Kutchin 


Voc^abulary 




1868 


Navajo 


Vocabulary 




1868 


Tiunc 


Scripture passage 




1S68-1891 


Athapascan 


Bibliographic 




180S-1809 


Athapascan, Montagnais 


Various 




1S«« 


Athapascan 


Words 




1869 


Chippowyan 


General discussion 




1869 


(Miippcwyan 


Lord s prayer 





lluschnianii (J. ('. E.) 

'I'lirncr (\V. \V.) 

Crook (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Shaw (J. M.) 

Crook (G.) 

Haldcnian (S. S.) 

Triibncr & (Jo. 

Huschuiaun (.1. C. K.) 

Colicciou. 

Douii iicch (E. II. I).) 

I'ridsli and Foreign. 

Hubbard (-). 

Latham (K. G.) 

Bu.schniann (J. C. E.) 

Buschmanu (J. C. E.) 

Schoolcraft (H. It.) 

Eroebel (J.), note. 

Buschmanu (J. ('. E.) 

Lesley (J. P.) 

Kennii^ott (R.) 

Kenui<-ott (R.) 

Keiinicott (U.) 

Kenuicott (K.) 

Kirkby (W. \V.) 

Latham (R. G.) 

Pott (A. K.) 

Wilson (D.) 

Pimentel (F.) 

Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 
Cremony (J. C.) 

Cremouy (J. C.) 

I'alli.sou (J.) 

Sullivan (J. W.) 

Ander.son (A. C.) 

Busclnuann (J. C. E.) 
Buschmanu (J. C. E.) 
Orozco y Berra (M.) 
Jeban (L. F.) 
Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 
Perrault (C. O.) 
Pop.^ (F. L.) 
P.-titot (E. F. S. J.) 
Wilson (D.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Higgins (N. S.) 
Smart ((;.) 
Faraud (H. J.) 
Chapin (G.) 
Palmer (E.) 
Leclerc (C.) 
Gibbs (C}.) 
Smithsonian. 
Niclifds (A. S 
Smart (C.) 

Cremony (J C.) ■' 

AVhimper (F.) 
Davidson (G.) 
Kenuicott (R.) 
Whipple (W. D.) 
British and Foreign. 
Sabin (J.) 

Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 
Kenuicott (R.) 
Tachf- (A. A.) 
Apostolides (S.) 



120 



CHRONOLOGIC INDEX, 



1869 

1860 

1869 

1869 

1869 

1869 

1869? 

1869 

1869 

1869? 

18&-? 

186- ? 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870? 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1870 

1831 

1871 

1871 

1871 

1871? 

1871 

1871 

1871 

1871 

1871-1872 

1872 

1872 

1872 

1872? 

1872-1874 

1873 

187:5 

1873? 

1873 

1873 

1873 

1873-1875 

1873-1875 

1873-1875 

1873-1875 

1873-1875 

1873-1875 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874 

1874-1875 



D6n6 
Inkalit 
Keiiai 
Keiiai 
Kntchin 
Kutcliin 
Kutchln 
Kutchin 
Navajo 
Slave 

Cblppewyan 
Slave 

Athapascan 
Athapascan 
Chippewyan 
Hiipa 
Ivenai 
Navajo 
Navajo 
Slave 
Tinne 
Tlatskenai 
Various 
Varions 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Chippewyan 
liipan 
Kutchin 
Kutchin 
Slave 
Slave 
Tukudh 
Various 
Various 
Kenai 
Ahtinn6 
Athapascan 
Athapascan 
Chippewyan 
Hupa 

Atha])ascau 
Navajo 
■ Navajo 
Tlatskenai 
Tukudh 
Various 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache 
Apache, Tonto 
Atliapas<'an: 
Kenai 
Kutchin 
Kutchim 
NavajO' 
Nehawni 
Sikani', Beaver 
Taculli, Kenaii 
Tinn<i 
Tukudlr 
Various 
Apache, Lipaiui 



Comparative vociiliularles 

Voialiulary 

Vocaliukary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Graiumatic comments 

Prayer book 

15iblio!;rai)liic 

Tribal names 

General discussion 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Prayer book 

St. Jolin 

Words 

Vocabularies, numerals 

Vocabularies, numerals 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Lord's ])rayer 

Words 

Relationships 

Vocabulary 

Prayer book 

Relationships 

Relationships 

Proper names 

Relationships 

Numerals 

Vocabulary 

Bibliograpliic 

Words 

Prayer book 

Vocabulary 

Bibliographic 

Vocabulary, numerals 

Vocabulary, uiunerals 

Words 

Prayer book 

Numerals 

General discussion 

Grammatic notes 

Relationships 

Sentenees 

Tribal names 

Vocabularies 

Bibliographic 

Grammai', dictionary 

Comparative vocabularies 

Comparative vocabularies 

Vocabulary 

Comparative vocabularies 

Comparative vocabularies 

Comparative vocabularies 

St. Mark 

Four gospels 

Comparati ve vocabularies 

Vocabularies, Lord'sprayer 



Petitot (E. F. S. ,T.) 
Whimper (F.) 
Davidson ((!.) 
Davidson (G.) 
Kennicott (R.), note. 
Kennicott (R.), note. 
Kennicott (R.) 
Whimper (F.) 
Willard (C. N.) 
Kennicott (R.) 
Grandiu ( — ). 
Kirkby (W. AV.) 
Ti'iibner & Co. 
Faraud (II. J.) 
Tache (A. A.) 
Azpell (T. F.) 
DeMeulen (E.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Thompson (A. H.) 
Kirkby (W. W.) 
Kirkby (W. W.) 
Farrar (F. W.) 
D.ill (\V. H.) 
Dall (W. H.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Lubbock (.T.) 
Apostolides (S.) 
Bollaert (W.) 
Herdesty (W. L.) 
Kejinicott (R.), note. 
Kirkby (W. W.) 
Kennicott (R.) 
McDonald (R.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Morgan (L. H.) 
Erman (G. A.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Bastian (P. W. A.) 
Kirkby (W. AV.) 
Powers (S.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Beadle (J. H.) 
Beadle (J. H.) 
Farrar (F. W.) 
McDonald (R.) 
Ellis (R.) 
White (J. B.) 
White (J. B.) 
V^^hite (J. B.) 
White (J. B.) 
White (J. B.) 
White (J. B.) 
Steiger (E.) 
Radlotf (L.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Amy (W. F. M.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Kirkby (W. W.) 
McDonald (R.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Pimeutel (F.) 



CHRONOLOfilC INDEX. 



121 



1874-1875 Athapascan 


Hildiograpliic 


Triibiicr S: Co. 




1874- 


1876 Various 


N'arious 


liaucnitl (II. II.) 




1874- 


1876 Various 


\'arious 


I'.MUcn.fl (H. H.) 




1H75 


Alitiun6 


Vocal)ulary 


I'iuart (A. L.) 




1875 


Apacho 


Vocabulary 


McKlroy (P. I).) 




& 1875 


Athapascan 


liil.liographi.' 


Field (T. W.) 




y 1875 


Chippewyun 


Words 


I'.-tit^.l (K. F. S. ,1.) 




1875 


D6ne, Naviijo 


Vocabularies 


IVlitot (K. F. S. .1.) 




1875 


Tinn6 


Scrii>ture ])assage 


British and Foreign. 




1875 


Various 


Words 


Ellis (It.) 




1875 


Various 


Words 


Lubbock (J.) 




1876 


Ahtinn^', Hupa 


Numerals 


Ellis (K.) 




1876 


Apacho 


Vocabulary 


White (J. B.) 




1876 


Apache, Navajo 


Vocabularies 


Loew (0.) 




1876 


Athapascan 


Monograph 


P.-tilot (E. F. S. J.) 




1876 


Chippewyan 


General disi'ussion 


Auder.son (A. (.'.) 




; 1876 


D6u6 


Did ionary, grammar 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 




1876 J 


Tinn<^ 


Scrii)ture passage 


Bilile Society. 




18761 


Tinn6 


Scripture passage 


British and Foreign. 




1876 


Tiiiu6 


Scripture: passage 


American. 




1876 


Various 


Various 


Gatschct (.\. S.) 




I 1876 


Various 


Words 


Wil.Hond).) 




1877 


Athapascan 


General discussion 


Beach (W. \Y.) 




1877 


Athapascan 


General discussion 


TrumluiU (J. H.) 




1877 


Hupa 


Vocabulary 


Powers (S.) 




1877 


Tinn6 


Tribal names 


Gatschet (A. S.) 




1877 


Tinn6 


Tribal names 


Gat.schet (A. S.) 




1877 


Umpkwa 


Vocaluilary 


Gat.schet (A. S.) 




1877- 


1878 Athapascan 


General discussion 


Miiller (F.) 




*" 1H7H 


Athapascan 


Bibliography 


Leclerc (C.) 




1878 


Athapascan 


General discu.ssion 


Bates (H. W.) 




1878 


Atliapascan 


General discussion 


Keane (A. H.) 




1878 


Chippewyan 


Four gospels 


Kirkby (W. W.) 




1878 


Chippewyan 


(Jeneral discussion 


IJuncau (D.) 




1878 


Chippewyan 


General discussion 


Duncan (D.), note. 




1878 


Montagu ais 


Gramniatic treatise 


Adam (L.) 




1878 


Montagnais 


Grannnatic treatise 


Adam (L.) 




1878 


Tinn6 


Scripture passage 


British and Foreign. 




1878 


Tlatskenai 


Words 


Farrar (F. W.) 




1878' 


Tukudh, Chippe-wyan 


Lord's prayer 


Bible Society. 




1878' 


Tukudh, Chippewyan 


Lord's prayer 


B ilde Society, note. 




1878 


Tukudh, Chippewyan 


Lord's prayer 


Bitde So<'iety, note. 




1878- 


1886 Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Trumbull (J. H.) 




1878- 


1879 Various 


Legends 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 




1879 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Gilbert (G. K.) 




1879 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Loew (0.) 




1879 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Yarrow (H. C.) 




1879 


Apache, Navajo 


Vocabularies 


Gat.schet (A. S.) 




1879 


Athapascan 


Words 


Campbell (J.) 




1879 


Athapascan 


Words 


Campbell (J.) 




1879 


Atliapascan 


Words 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 




1879 


Chippewyan 


Prayer book 


Kirkby (W. W.) 




1879 


Navajo 


Vocabulary 


Loew (0.) 




1879 


Slave 


Prayer book 


Kirkby (W. W.) and 
(W. C.) 


Bompas 


1879 


Tinn6 


Scripture passage 


American, note. 




187- 


Beaver 


Primer 


Bompas (W. C.) 




187- 


Chippewyan 


Baptismal card 


Church Miss. Soc. 




187- 


Chippewyan 


Baptismal card 


Church Miss. Soc. 




187- 


Chippewyan 


Prayer hook 


Kirkby (W. W.) 




187- 


f Chippewyan 


Primer 


B(mipas (W. C.) 




187- 


' D6n6 


Bible texts 


Grouard (E.) 




187- 


' Dog Rih 


Primer 


Bompas (W. C.) 




187- 


» Tinn6 


Primer 


Bompas (W. C.) 




187- 


» Tukudh 


Primer 


Bompas (W. C.) 




1880 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Hoffman (W. J.) 





122 



CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 



1 



1880 


Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Quaritch (B.) 


1880 


Beaver 


Pi'ayer ))ook 


Bompas (W. C.) 


1880 


Hupa, Navajo 


Words 


Sayce (A. H.) 


1880 


Tinn6 


General discussion 


Faulmann (K.) 


1880 


Tinne 


Words 


Campbell (J.) 


1881 


Chlppewyan 


Hymn liook 


Kirkby (W. W.) 


1881 


Cliippewyan 


New Testament 


Kirkby (W. W.) 


1881 


Chlppewyan 


Prayer hook 


Kirkby (W. W.) 


1881 


Navajo 


Relationships 


Packard (R. L.) 


1881 


Navajo, Apache 


Vocabularies 


Gatschet (A. S.) 


1881 


Slave 


Prayer book 


Reeve (W. D.) 


1881 


Tinn6 


Scripture passage 


Church Miss. Gleaner. 


1881 


Tinn6 


Vocabulary 


Campbell (J.) 


1881 


Tututen 


Vocabulary 


Lucy-Fossarieu (N. P. de). 


1881- 


-1887 Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Leclerc (C.) 


1882 


Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Trubner & Co. 


1882 


Athapascan 


General discussion 


Bates (H. W.) 


1882 


Athapascan 


General discussion 


Keane (A. H.), note. 


1882 


Athapascan 


Tribal names 


Drake (S. G.) 


1882 


Montagnais, Peau de Lievre Words 


Charencey (C. F. H. G. de) 


1882 


Montaguais, Peau de Lievre Worils 


Charencey (C F. H. G. de). 


1882 


Slave 


Prayer book 


Kirkby (W. W.) and Bompas 
(W.C.) 


1882 


Tmn6 


Scripture passage 


British and Foreign. 


1882 


Tlnn6 


Vocabulary 


Campbell (J.) 


1882 


Tututen 


Vocabulary 


Everette (W. E.) 


1882 


Various 


Various 


Bancroft (H. H.) 


1882 


Various 


Words 


Lubbock (J.) 


1883 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Gatschet (A. S.) 


1883 


Athapascan 


Words 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 


1883 


Athapascan 


Words 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 


1883 


D6n6 


Text 


Petitot (E.F. S.J.) 


1883 


Navajo 


Words 


Matthews (W.) 


1883 


Navajo 


Words 


Matthews (W.) 


1883 


Slave 


Tour gospels 


Bompas (W. C.) 


1884 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Gatschet (S.) 


1884 


Athapascan 


General discussion 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) 


1884 


Athapascan 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Athapascan 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Athapascan 


Vocabulary 


• Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Athapascan 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Athax)a8cau 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Chilkotin 


Dictionary 


Morice (A. G.) 


1884 


Chilkotin 


Sermons 


Morice (A. G.) 


1884 


Chippewyan 


Text 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 


1884 


Chippewyan 


Words 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 


1884 


Chippewyan, Slave 


Lord's prayer 


Bergholtz (G. F.) 


1884 


Coquille 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Den6 


Words 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 


1884 


Lipan 


Vocabulary 


Gatschet (A. S.) 


1884 


Navajo 


Words 


Matthews (W.) 


1884 


Nava^jo 


Vocabulary 


Gatschet (A. S.) 


1884 


Rogue River 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J . 0.) 


1884 


Tinn6 


Scripture passage 


American, note. 


1884 


Tinn6 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Tinn6 


Vocabulary, numerals 


Campbell (J.) 


1884 


Tinn6 


Vocabulary, numerals 


Campbell (J.) 


1884 


Tututen 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


Various 


Vocabularies 


Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson 

(G. M.) 


1884 


Yukitc6 


Vocabulary 


Dorsey (J. 0.) 


1884 


-1889 Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Pott (A. F.) 


1886 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Ten Kate (H. F. C.) 


1885 


Apathascan 


Bibliographic 


McLean (J.) 


1885 


Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Pilling (J. C.) 


1885 


Athapascan 


General discussion 


Bates (H. W.) 



CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 



123 



1885 


Atliapasoau 


Ceneral di.scussion 


Keane (A. 11.), iiotr. 


1885 


n.^aver 


Vocabulary 


(Jarriocli (A. C.) 


1885 


C'hippdwyaii 


Syllahi<^s 


T«ttle(C. 11.) 


1885 


NaTajo 


Words 


Maltliews (W.) 


1885 


Navajo 


Words 


Matthews (W.) 


1885 


Siirsee 


Vocabulary 


Petitot (E. r. S. .I.t 


1885 


Tinue 


General discussion 


Dall (W.il.) 


1885 


Tiiiiic, Tiikudli 


Lord's ])rayer 


Auicricau. 


1885 


Ti 11116, Tukiitlli 


Scripture passage 


Aiiicricau, note. 


1885 


Tukiulh 


Hyuiu book 


McDouald (l:.) 


1885 


Tiikiulli 


Prayer book 


McDonald (It.) 


1885 


Tiikii.lh 


Prayer hook 


McDouahl (li.) 


1885 


Tiikudli 


Trtuit 


McDouald (K.) 


1885 


Tukiulh 


Tract 


McDouahl (It.) 


1885 


Tuku.Ui 


Tract 


McDouahl (K.) 


1885 


Varioii.s 


Scripture passages 


British. 


1885 


Various 


Scrijiture passages 


ISritish. 


1885 


Various 


Scripturi' passages 


P.ritish. 


1885 


Various 


Scripture passages 


Briti.sh. 


1885-1888 


Various 


Various 


Peatherman (A.) 


1885-1889 


Atliapascan 


Bibliographic 


Leclerc (C.) 


1H86 


Alitinn6, Hupa 


Numerals 


Ellis (R.) 


1886 


Apache 


Vocabulary 


Ruby (C.) 


188G 


Apacho 


Words 


Bourke (J. G.) 


1886 


Athapascau 


Bibliographic 


Quaritch (B.) 


1886 


Athapascan 


Words 


Kovar (E.) 


1886 


Beaver 


Prayer book 


Garrioch (A. C.) 


1886 


Beaver 


St. Mark 


Garrioch (A. C.) 


1886 


Beaver 


St. Mark 


Garrioch (A. C.) 


1886 


Navajo 


Words 


Matthews (W.) 


1886 


Navajo 


Words 


Matthews (W.) 


1886 


Slave 


Mark 


Bompas (W. C) and Reeve 
(W. D.) 


1886 


Slave 


Matthew 


Bompas (W. (J.) and Reeve 
(W. D.) 


1886 


Tinn6 


General discus.siou 


DalKW.H.) 


1886 


Tukudh 


New testament 


McDouald (R.) 


1886 


Tukuilh 


Psalms 


McDouald (R.) 


1886 


Various 


Legends 


Petitot (E.P.S.J.) 


1886 


Various 


Scripture passages 


British and Foreign, note. 


1886 


Various 


Scripture passages 


Gilbert <fc Rivington. 


1887 


Apache 


Numerals 


Dugau (T. B.) 


1887 


Athapascau 


Bibliographic 


Dufoss6 (E.) 


1887 


Athapascau 


Bibliographic 


Qnaritch (B.) 


1887 


Athapascan 


Bibliographic 


Quaritch (B.) 


1887 


Carrier 


Grammar 


Morice (A. G.) 


1887 


Midnoosky 


Various 


Allen (H. T.) 


1887 


Navajo 


Songs, iirayers 


Matthews (W.) 


1887 


Tlatskenai 


Words 


Farrar (F. W.) 


1887 


Various 


Legends 


Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 


1887-1890 


Chippewyan, Sursee 


Vocabularies 


Our. 


1887-1891 


Carrier 


Dictionary 


Morice (A. G.) 


1888 


Athapa.scan 


Bibliographic 


McLean (J.) 


1888 


Athapascau 


Grammatic comments 


Grasserie (B. de la). 


1888 


Carrier 


Prayer book 


Morice (A. G.) 


1888 


Cliippewyan 


Vocabulary 


Reeve (W. D.) 


1888 


Cliippewyan 


Words 


Petitot (E.r. S.J.) 


1888 


Chippewyan 


Words 


Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 


1888.' 


Montaj;nais 


Text 


Glut (J.) 


1888 


Montagnais 


Text 


Legoff(L.) 


1888 


Navajo 


Songs, prayers 


Matthews (W.) 


1888 


Nav^yo 


Vocabulary, prayers 


Matthews (W.) 


.1888 


Navajjo 


Vocabulary, prayers 


Matthews (W.) 


1888 


Tinn6 


Words 


Brinto-u (D. G.) 


1888 


Tiuu6 


Words 


Briutou (D.G.) 


1888 


Tinue, Tukudh 


Scripture passages 


American, note. 



124 



CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 



1888 

1888 

1888 

1888 

1888 

1888 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

1889 

188 

188 

188 

188 

188 

188 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 

1890 



Tinue. Tukudh 

Various 

Vurioua 

Various 

Various 

Various 

Atbapascan 

Athapascan 

Beaver 

Carrier 

D6n6 

Hupjt 

Midiiooaky 

Mitluooaky 

Moutagnais 

Moutaguais 

Moutagnais 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Suraee 

Sursee 

Tiune, Tuku.Ui 

Various 

Various 

Various 

Various 

Various 

Apaclie 

Chipjiewyan 

D6iie 

D6ue 

Navajo 

Tinn6 

Apache 

Apache 

Apache 

Atliayiascan 

(Carrier 

Carrier 

Chippewyan 

Dene 

D6n6 

D6u6 

D6ue 

Deu6 

D6ue 

D^u6 

D^n6 

Loucheux 

Moutagnais 

Moutagnais 

Navajo 

Navajo 

Peau de Li^vro 

Shive 

Shive 



1890 


Tinn6 


1890 


Tinu6 


1890 


Tiun6 


1890 


Tinu6 


1890 


Tiuue 


1890 


Tinn6 


1890 


Tinne 


1890 


Tukirdli 



Scripture passages 

Legends 

Scripture passages 

Various 

Vocal)ularies 

Vocabularies 

Bibliographic 

(Jrainmalic notes 

Vocabulary 

Genesis 

Bibliographic 

A'ocahulary 

Various 

Various 

Bible history 

Graumiar 

Instructions 

Songs 

Songs 

Grammatic notes 

Vocabulary 

Scripture passages 

Songs 

Scripture passages 

Various 

Words 

Words 

Vocabulary 

Syllabary 

Roots 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Words 

Gentes 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Bible texts 

Stories 

Vocabulary 

Catechism 

General discussion 

Prayer 

Primer 

Roots 

Syllabary 

Syllabary 

Words 

Text 

Prayer book 

Prayer book 

Gentes 

Vocabulary 

Text 

John 

Luke 

Acts 

Hymn book 
Prayer book 
Pronouns 
Pronouns 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Geneses, etc. 



Borapas (W. C.) 

Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 

British and Foreign. 

Haines (E.M.) 

Daw.son (G. M.) 

Dawson (G. M.) 

McLean (J.) 

Borsey (J. O.) 

Masson (L. R.) 

Morie© (A. G.) 

Pilling (J. C.) 

Curtin (J.) 

AUen (H. T.) 

Allen (H.T.) 

LegotrtL.) 

Legoflf (L.) 

Legofl'(L.) 

Matthews (W.) 

Matthews (W.) 

Wilson (E. S.) 

Wilson (E.F.) 

American. 

Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 

British and Foreign. 

Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 

Lubbock (J.) 

Wilson (E.F.) 

Bourke (J. G.) 

Syllabariuni. 

Petitot (E. F. S. J.), note. 

Petitot (E. F.S.J.),note. 

Gushing (F. H.) 

Crane (A.) 

Bourke (J. G.) 

Bourke (J. G.) 

Bourke (J. G.) 

Grasserie (R. de la). 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Bompas (W. C.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 

Promissiones. 

Legoti'(L.) 

Legotr (L.) 

Matthews (W.) 

Wilson (E. F.) 

Promissiones. 

Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve 

(AV. D.) 
Bompas (W. C.) and Reeve 

(W. D.) 
Bompas (W. C.) 
Hymns. 
Lessons. 
Hale (H.) 
Hale (H.) 
Bcmipas (W. C.) 
Brintou (D. G.) 
McDonald (R.) 



CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 



125 



1890 


TnkiMlh 


1890 


Tukiulli 


1890 


Various 


1890 


Various 


1890 


Various 


1801 


Atliapascaii 


1891 


Atliapascau 


1891 


Atliapasf'au 


1891 


Atliapascau 


1891 


Carri(<r 


1891 


Carrier 


1891 


Carrier 


1891 


Carrier 


1801 


Carrier 


1891 


D^ii6 


1891 


D6n6 


1891 


Dfein'i L)iu«l,ji( 


1891 


Montaj^nais 


1891 


Moutaguai.s 


1891 


MontajinaiH 


1891 


Montagnais 


1891 


Montagnais 


1891 


Navajo 


1891 


Tinue 


]891 


Tiuuo 


1891 


Tinuti 


1891 


Various 


1891 


Various 


1891 


Various 


1891 


Various 


1891 


Various 


1892 


Various 


1892 


Various 


1892 


Various 


IS- 


Apadie 


IS— 


Athapascan 


18— 


Chippowyau 


IS- 


Chipi>e\vyau 


IS— 


D6ne 


IS- 


Deii6 


IS— 


Den6 


IS- 


Kenai 


IS— 


Kutcbin 


IS- 


Kutchiu 


IS- 


Kutchiu 


IS- 


Nehawui 


IS— 


Sikani 


IS- 


Tinno 


IS- 


Tiune 


?18- 


Tinn6 



XuimIhis, lie. 

Hymn liook 

Scripture i>ii88ages 

Vi^at;(^ uanu's 

Words 

Oeneral discussiiMi 

Tril)al divisions 

Tribal divisions 

Words 

Cate<!bisiu 

General discussion 

(iranimar 

Periodical 

Text 

Graniinalic troatiso 

Vocabulary 

General discussion 

CatecbisMi 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Grammar 

Religious instructions 

Grammar, dictionary 

Acts, etc. 

Epistles 
Prayer book 

Comparative vocabularies 
( 'omparati ve vocabularies 
General discussion 
Lord's prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Bibliographic 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary- 
Lord's prayer 
Vocabulary 
Bible 
Catechism 
Catechism 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
St. Mark 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 



McDonald (U.) 

McDmiahl (K.) 

British and Foreign, note. 

Dorsey (J. ().) 

Petitot(K. F.S.J.) 

Brinton (I). G.) 

Powell (J. W.) 

Powell (J. W.) 

Gabelentz (II. tj. C. von der). 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morico (A. G.) 

Morico (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Morico (A. G.) 

Morice (A. G.) 

Moric(^ (A. G.) 

Vegreville (V. '1'.), note. 

V6grevilhi (V. T.), note. 

Vegreville (V. T.), note. 

Vegreville (V. T.), note. 

VegreviUe (V. T.), note. 

Vegreville (V. T.), note. 

Matthews (W.) 

Bomi)as (W. C.) and Kceve 

(W. D.) 
Bompas (\V. C.) 
Kirkby (AV. W.) and liompas 

(W.C.) 
Canadian. 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Petitot (E. F.S.J.) 
Rest (K.) 
Rost (R.) 
Mai.sonueuvo (T.) 
Hah^ (H.) 
Halo (IT.) 
Sherwood (W.L.) 
Athapascan. 
Lord's. 
Ross (R.B.) 
Faraud (H.J.) 
Glut (J.) 
Seguin (R. P.) 
Wowodsky ( — ). 
Kutcliin. 
Ross (11. 1',.) 
Ross (R. B.) 
Ross (R. B.) 
Ross(R. B.) 
Kirkby (W.W.) 
Ross (R. B.) 
Tinn6. 



SMITHSONIAN I \ S I I f I ! I I (> .\ 

!?irUIOAir OK KIMINOLOIJY: .1. W. I'OWKM., DlUKCroK 



IUllL10(jiUArilY 



Of TIIK 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES 



(INCLUDJJ^a THE CJJINOOK JAIidON) 



15 V 



JAMES CONSTANTINi: PnM.TNa 




WASHI NGTON 

GOVERN M EN r PK1NTIN(; OKKKIK 
181)3 



I 



LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 



Sinitlisonian iii.stitutioii — Bureau of etlinolosy- Catalogue of lin- 
guistic iiiaiiuscripts in the li])iai'y of the Hiiieau of ethnology. By 
.lames 0. I'illiiig. 

[n Bureau of ethnology first annuiil report; half-title as above p. 55;}, text pp. 
.f-MiVoTT, Washington, 1881, royal 8'. 
Issued separately with cover title as follows: 

Catalogue | of | linguistie inanuseripts | in the | library of the Bureau 
of ethnology | by | James C. Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual 
report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | [Vignette] | 

Washington | (Joverunient i)rinting oltiee | 1881 

Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title as under entry next above p. 553, 
text p)). 555-577, royal 8°. One hundred oojiies issued. 

Smithsonian institution — Bureau of ethnology | J.W.Powell director 
I Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the | Xorth 
American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distributed only 
to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice (signed J. \V. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4, 1884) 
pp. v-viii, introduction pp. ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries re- 
ferred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxviii, list of fiic-siiniles pp. xsxix-sl, text pp. 
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 
1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or 
first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of 
the sheet only. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology : J.W.Powell, director 
I Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constantine 
Pining I [Vignette] | 
Washington | (lovernment printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (April 20, 1887) pp. iii-v, 
text pp. 1-109, chronologic index pp. 111-11(5, 8 fac-similes, 8. An edition of 100 copies 
issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology : J. W. Powell, director 
I Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Constantine 
Pilling I [Vignette] | 
Washington | Government printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (September 1, 1887)pp. 
iii-v, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8"^. An edition of 100 copies issued 
in royal 8^. 

in 



tV LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES, BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 

Smitbsoman institution | Bureau of etlinology: J. W. Powell, director 
I Bibliography | oftlie | Iro(i[uoian languages | by | James Con stan tine 
Pilling I [Vignette] | 
Washington | Government printing office | 1888 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (December 15, 1888) 
pp. iii-vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 fac- 
similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology : J. W.Powell, director 
I Bibliography | of the | Muskhogean languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1889 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (May 15, 1889) pp. iii-v, 
text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 105-114, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in 
royal 8°. 

Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot's Indian bible | and | on his other 
translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts | 
Extract from a " Bibliography of the Algonquian languages " | 
[Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1890 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. text pji. 1-58, 21 fac-similes, 
royal 8°. Forms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algonqnian languages, title 
of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology : J. W. Powell, director 
I Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 
Washington | Government printing office | 1891 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (June 1, 1891) pp. iii-iv, 
introduction p. v, index of languages i^p. vii-viii, list of fac-similes pp. ix-x, text 
pp. 1-549, addenda pp. .551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614, 82 fac-similes, 8^^. An 
edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology : J. W.Powell, director 
I Bibliography | of the | Athapascan languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pining | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1892 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistic bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology ]»p. iii-iv, preface (June 15, 1892) pp. 
v-vii, introduction p. ix, index of languages pp. xi-xii, list of fac-similes ]». xiii, 
text pp. 1-112, addenda i>p. 113-115, chronologic index pji. 117-125, 4 fac-similes, 8^^. 
An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. 



I 



PREFACE 



Tlie designation given tlie family of languages trented of in this 
bibliography is based upon the name ol" a tiibe living near the moutli 
of the Columbia Kiver, from whom a vocabulary was obtained by 
Gabriel Franchere, of the Paciftc Fur Comi)any, about 1812, and pub- 
lished in his ''Eelation'" in 1820, under the name Chinouque ou 
Tchinouk. This vocabulary, consisting of thirty-three words, thirteen 
numerals, and eleven phrases, is given by Gallatin in his " Synopsis"'* 
with the spelling of the name anglicized to Chinook ; and, though based 
upon the speech of but a single tribe, it was ado])ted by him as the 
name of a family of languages. 

The family includes a number of tribes whose habitat, to quote from 
Major Powell,^ "extended from the mouth of the river up its course for 
some 200 miles, or to The Dalles. According to Lewis and Clarke, our 
best authorities on the pristine home of this family, most of their vil- 
lages were on the banks of the river, chiefly upon the northern bank, 
though they probably claimed the land upon either bank for several 
miles back. Their villages also extended on the Pacific coast north- 
ward nearly to the northern extension of Shoalwater Bay, and to the 
south to about Tilamook Head, some 20 miles from the mouth of the 
Columbia." 

As will be seen by reference to the list of tribal names given on a 
subsequent page, the number of languages embraced within the family 
is small; and the amount of material recorded under "Chinook'' will 
be found to more than equal that given under the names of all the other 
divisions of the family combined. 

As a matter of fact, but little, comparatively, has been done in the 
collection of linguistic material relating to this family, a fact all the 
more surprising when it is considered that they have been long in 
contact with the whites. There has been no grammar of the language 
published, and until lately none has been compiled; there is but one 
printed dictionary — that of Gibbs — and the vocabularies are neither 
great in length nor wide in scoj)e. There is hope of a better state of 

' Relation d'un voyage a la c6te nord-ouest de I'Am^rique Septentrionale dans les 
ann<5es 1810, 1811, 1812, 1813 et 1814. Montreal, 1820. 

-Synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States east of the Rocky Monn- 
tains.and in the British and Russian possessions in North America. Cambridge, 1836. 

^Indian linguistic families of America, north of Mexico. Washington, 1891. • 

V 



VI PREFACE. 

aifairs, liowever; for Dr. Franz Boas, the latest aucl most thorough 
worker iu the Chinookan field, has his grammar, dictionary, and texts 
in an advanced state of preparation for publication by the Bureau of 
Ethnology. His material, collected during 1890 and 1891, was gathered 
none too soon, for, as will be seen by the extract from the introduction 
to his legends, which he has kindly permitted me to make and which 
is given on page 7 of this paper, the opportunity for so doing would 
soon have passed. 

It needs bat a glance through the accompanying pages to show the 
preponderance of material, both published and in manuscript, relating 
to the Jargon over that of the Chinookan languages i)roper, a j^repon- 
derance so great that, were it proper to speak of the Jargon as an 
American language, a change of title to this bibliography would be 
necessary. Made up as it is from several Indian tongues, the Chinookan, 
Salishan, Wakashan, and Shahaptian principally, and from at least 
two others, the English and the French, the Chinook Jargon might 
witli almost equal propriety have been included in a bibliography of 
any one of the other native languages entering into its composition. It 
is made a part of the Chinookan primarily because of its name and 
secondarOy from the fact that that family has contributed a much greater 
number of words to its vocabulary than has any one of the others. 

Under various authors herein — Blanchet, Demers, Gibbs, Hale, 
Le Jeune, and others — will be found brief notes relating to the Jargon, 
trade language, or international idiom, as it is variously called; and 
the following succinct account of its origin from Dr. George Gibbs,^ 
the first to attempt its comprehensive study, completes its history: 

The origin of tliis Jargon, a conventional language similar to the Lingua Franca 
of the Mediterranean, the Negro-English-Dutch of Surinam, the Pigeon English of 
China, and several other mixed tongues, dates back to the fur droguers of the last 
century. Those mariners, whose enterprise in the fifteen years preceding 1800 
explored the intricacies of the northwest coast of America, picked up at tlieir gen- 
eral rendezvous, Nootka Sound, various native words useful in barter, and thence 
transplanted them, with additions from the Euglish, to the shores of Oregvm. Even 
beforetheirday, the coasting trade and warlilce expeditions of the northern tribes, 
themselves a seafaring race, had opened up a partial understanding of each other's 
speech; forwheu, iu 1792, Vaucouver's officeis visited Gray's Harbor they fouud that 
the natives, though speaking a difi'erent language, understood many words of the 
Nootka. 

On the arrival of Lewis and Clarke at the mouth of the Columbia, in 1806, the 
new language, from the sentences given by them, had evidently attained some form. 
It was with the arrival of Astor's party, however, that the .Jargon received its prin- 
cipal imjjulse. Many more words of Englisli were then brought in, and for the first 
time the French, or rather the Canadian and Missouri patois of the French, was 
introduced. The principal seat of the company being at Astoria, not only a large 
addition of Chinook words was made, but a considerable number w;is taken from 
the Chihalis, who immediately bordered that tribe on the north, each owning a 
portion of Shoahvater Bay. The words adopted from the several languages were, 



Dictionary of the ('hiiiook .(ari;(m. \\ ashinglon, 1803. 



PREFACE. VII 

naturally (Miougli, ihoso most easily uttoi'ed by all, except, of course, that objects 
new to the natives Ibiind their names in French or Enj^lish, and such niodilications 
were ma<le in pronunciation as suited toiij^ucs accustomed to diflerent sounds. Thus 
Ihe ifutturals of the Indians were softene<l or dropped and the/ and r of the English 
and French, to them unpronounceable, w<!rc modified into p and I. (irammatical 
forma were reduced to tluiir simplest expression and variations in mood and tense 
conveyed only by adverlts or liy the context. The language continued to receive 
additicms and assumed a more distinct and settled meaning under the Northwest 
and Hudson's Bay Companies, who succeeded Astor's party, as well as through the 
American settlers in Oregon. Its advantage was soon perceived by the Indians, and 
the Jargon became to some extent a means of communication between natives of 
ditferent 8i)eech as well as between them and the whites. It was even used as such 
between Americans and Canadians. It was at first most in vogue upon the Lower 
Columbia and the Willamette, whence it spread to Puget Sound and with the 
exttiusion of trade found its way far up the coast, as well as the Columbia and 
Eraser rivers; and there are now few tribes between the 42d and 57th parallels of 
latitude in which there are not to be found interpreters througli its medium. Its 
juevalence and easy acquisition, while of vast convenience to traders and settlers, 
has tended greatly fo hinder the accjuirement of the original Indian languages; so 
much So that, except by a few missionaries and pioneers, hardly one of them is 
spoken or understood by white men in all Oregon and Washingtcm Territory. Not- 
withstanding its apparent poverty in number of words and the absence of grammat- 
ical forms, it possesses much more flexibility and power of expression than might be 
imagined and really serves almost every purpose of ordinary intercourse. 

The number of words constituting the Jargon proper has been variously stated. 
Many formerly employed have become in great measure obsolete, while others have 
been locally introduced. Thus, at The Dalles of the Columbia, various terms are 
coiumon which would not be intelligible at Astoria or on Puget Souud. In making 
the following selection, I have included all those which, on reference to a number 
of vocalnilaries, I have fouud current at any of these places, rejecting on the other 
hand such as individuals partially acciuainted with the native languages have 
employed for their own convenience. The total number falls a little short of live 
hundred words. 

This iuternational idiom, as it is called by Mr. Hale, is yet a live 
language, and, though lapsing into disuse — being superseded by the 
English — in the land of its birth, is gradually extending along the 
northwest coast, adding to its vocabulary as it travels, until it has 
become the means of intertribal communication between the Indians 
s[)eaking different languages and between them and the white dwellers 
in British Columbia and portions of Alaska. Indee<l, there seems 
to be almost a revival of the early interest shown in it, if we may judge 
from the amount of manuscript material relating to it now being made 
ready to put into print. 

One of the most curious and interesting of all the curious attempts 
which have been made to instruct and benefit the Indians by means of 
written characters, is that knowu as the Kandoops Wawa, a periodical 
described herein at some length under the name of its founder, Pere 
Le Jeune. Written in an internaticnial language, " S(^t up" in steno- 
graphic characters, and printed on a mimeograph by its inventor, 
editor, reporter, printer, and publisher all in one, this little weekly 
seems to leave nothing in the way of novelty to be desired. The account 



VlII PREFACE. 

of the reverend father's metliods and purposes, quoted on page 48 from 
one of his papers, will well repay perusal. 

The present volume embraces 270 titular entries, of which 229 reiate 
to printed books and articles and 41 to manuscripts. Of these, 253 
have been seen and described by the compiler (222 of the prints and 31 
of the manuscripts), leaving 17 as derived from outside sources (7 of the 
prints and 10 manuscripts). Of those unseen by the writer, titles and 
descriptions have been received in all cases from persons who have 
actually seen the works and described them for him. 

So far as possible, direct comparison has been made with the works 
themselves during the proof-reading. For this purpose, besides his 
own books, the writer has had access to those in the libraries of Con- 
gress, the Bureau of Ethnology, the Smithsonian Institution, George- 
town University, and to several private collections in the city of Wash- 
ington. Mr. Wilberforce Eames has compared the titles of works con- 
tained in his own library and in the Lenox, and recourse has been had 
to a number of librarians throughout the couutry for tracings, photo- 
graphs, etc. 

I am indebted to the Director of the Bureau, Major Powell, for the 
unabated interest shown in my bibliographic work, for the opportu- 
nities he has afforded me to prosecute it under the most favorable cir- 
cumstances, and for his continued advice and counsel. 

Many items of interest have been furnished me by Dr. Franz Boas ; 
the Eev. Myron Eells, Union City, Wash. ; Mr. John K. Gill, Portland, 
Oregon; Hon. Horatio Hale, Clinton, Ontario; Father Le Jeune, Kam- 
loops, B.C. ; Maj. Edmond Mallet, Washington,D.C.; Father St. Onge, 
Troy, N. T., and Dr. T.S.Bulmer, Cedar City, Utah. It gives me pleas- 
ure to make record of my obligations to these gentlemen. 




WASHiNaTON, D. C, March 10, 1893. 



INTRODUCTION 



In tlio coin])ilation of this catiilofi'iie the aim has been to include every- 
tliing, printed or in iiiaimscript, relating to the Chiiiookaii language 
and to the Chinook jargon — books, pamphlets, articles in nnigaziiu^s, 
tracts, serials, etc., and su(;li reviews and announcements of publications 
as seemed worthy of notice. 

The dictionary ])lan has been followed to its extreme limit, the subject 
and tribal indexes, references to libraries, etc., being included in one 
alphabetic series. The primary arrangement is alphabetic by authors, 
trauvslators of works into the native languages being treated as authors. 
Under each author the arrangement is, first, printed works, and second, 
manuscripts, each group being given chronologically; and in the case 
of printed books each work is followed through its various editions 
before the next in chronologic order is taken up. 

Anonymously printed works are entered under the name of the author, 
when known, and under the first word of the title, not an article or 
preposition, when not known. A cross-reference is given from the first 
words of anonymous titles when entered under an author and from the 
first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or 
not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under 
the dialect to which they refer when he is not known. 

Each author's name, with histitle, etc., is entered in full but once, i. e., 
in its alphabetic order; every other mention of him is by surname and 
initials only. 

All titular matter, including cross-references thereto, is in brevier, all 
collations, descriptions, notes, and index matter in nonpareil. 

In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the 
spelling of proper names used in the particular work itself has been 
followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers is 
given. In the index entries of the tribal names the com^jiler has adopted 
that si^elling which seemed to him the best. 

As a general rule initial capitals have been used in titular matter in 
only two cases: first, for proper names, and, second, when the word 
actually appears on the title-page with an initial capital and with the 
remainder in small capitals or lower-case letters. In giving titles in the 
German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have been 
respected. 

In those comparatively few cases of works not seen by the compiler 
the fact is stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, 
and in either case the authority is usually given. 



i 



1 



INDEX OV LANGUAGHS. 



Cascade 1 o 

Catlilascoii VA 

Cliinook ]() 

Chinook jargon KJ 

Clakama 18 

Clatsop 1<S 

Nilialoth 56 

Waliaikau 74 

Wai)i)o 74 

Wasko 74 

Watlala 74 



LIST OF FACSIMILES 



Pago. 

Title-page of Le Jeune's Kamloops Wawa 47 

Title-page of Le Jeune's Jargon Hymn Book 50 

Title-page of Le Jeune's Jargon Primer . . . , 52 

:jaii 



HIBLlOCKAIIfY OF THl: CHINOOKAX LANGUAGES. 



By James C. Pilling. 



(An asterisk within parentheBCH iiidirates thai flic roniiiilcr lins Reeii iii> ropy of the work referred to.) 



A. 



Allen {Mii>8 A. ,1.) Tin yearH in 
Oregon. | Travels and adventures | nt' 
I doctor E. White and lady | west of 
the Rocky Jiiountains ; | with | inci- 
dents of two sea voyages via Sandwich 
I Islands around Cape Horn ; | contain- 
ing also a I brief history of the mis- 
sions and settlements of the country — 
origin of | the provisional govern- 
ment — number aud customs of the 
Indians — | incidents witnessed while 
traversing and residing in tlie | terri- 
tory — description of the soil, produc- 
tion and I climate of the country. | 
Compiled by miss A. J. Allen. | 

Ithaca, N. Y. ; | Mack, Andrus & co. 
printers. | 1848. 

Title verao copyright (1848) 1 1. introduction 
pp. v-vi, contentspp. vii-xvi, text pp. 17-399, 8'. 

A few Chinook .jargon sentences (from Lee 
and Frost, Ton years in Oregon), pp. 395-396. 

Copies seen : Boston AtheniBum. 

A later edition with title page a.s follows : 

Ten years | iu | Oregon. | Travels 

and adventures | of | doct<)r E. White 
and lady, | west of the Rocky moun- 
tains; I with I incidents of two sea 
voyages via Sandwich | Islands around 
Cape Horn; | containing, also, a | brief 
history of the missions and settlement 
of the country — or- | igin of the provi- 
sional government— number and cus- 
ttims of I the Indians— incidents wit- 
nessed while traversing | aud residing 
in the territory — description of | the 
soil production and climate. | Compiled 
by miss A. J. Allen. | 

Ithaca, N. Y. : | press of Andrus, 
Ganutlett & Co. | 1850. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. r-vi, 
contents pp. vii-xvi, text pp. 17-430, 12°. 



Allen (A. .7.) — Continued. 

Linguistic coiitentsaw undertitlenext ahove, 
pp. 395-:ii)6 . 

Copies seen : A.itor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Dunbar. 

A later edition witli tillepage as follows: 

Thrilling adventures, | travels and 

explorations | of | doctor P^lijah White, 

I among the ( Rocky mountains | and 
iu the I far west. | With | incidents of 
two sea voyages via Sand- | wich 
Islands around Cape Horn; | contain- 
ing also a brief history of the missions 
and settlement of the country | — 
origin of the provisional governments 
of the western | territories — number 
and customs of the Indians — incidents 
witnessed while traversing and re- | 
siding in th<' territories — description of 

I the soil, productions and climate. ' 
Compiled by miss A. J. Allen. | 
New York : | J. W. Yale. | 1859. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, 
contents pp. vii-xvi, text pp. 17-430. 12^. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 39.5-396. 

Cojiies seen : Bancroft, Congress. 

Anderson (Alexander Caulfield). Price 
one dollar and fifty cents. | Hand-book 
I aud I map | to | the gold region | of 
I Frazer's aud Thompson's rivers, | 
with I table of distances. | By Alexan- 
der C. Anderson, | late chief trader 
Hudson bay CO. 's service. | To which is 
appeuded | Chinook Jargon — language 
used etc., etc. | 

Published by .1. .1. Lecount. | San 
Francisco. | Entered [&c. two lines.] 
[1858.] 

Cover title, text pp. 1-31. map, 32^. 
Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon, pp. 25-31. 

1 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Anderson (A. C.) — Con tinned. 

In the only fopy of this -work I have s^en, 
Mr. Anderson has appended a manuscript note 
as follows: " This vocabulary, procured by the 
publisher from some one in S. F.. is a miserable 
aflFair, and was appended without my knowl- 
edge. A. c. A." 

Copien seen : Bancroft. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook language. 

Manuscript, 14 pages folio; in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. Forwarded to Dr. 
Geo. Gibbs, Nov. 7, 1857. 

Contains about 200 words and plirases. 

Armstrong (A. N.) Oregon : | comprising 
a I l)rief history and full description | 
of the territories of | Oregon and Wash- 
ington, I embracing the | cities, towns, 
rivers, bays, | harbors, coasts, moun- 
tains, valleys, | prairies and plains; 
together with remarks | upon the social 
position, productions, resources, and | 
prospects of the country, a dissertation 
upon I the climate, and a full descrip- 
tion of I the Indian tribes of the Pacific 
I slope, their manners, etc. | Inter- 
spersed with I incidents of travel and 
adventure. | By A. N. Armstrong, | for 



Armstrong (A. N.) — Continued. 

three years a government surveyor m 
Oregon. | 

Chicago: | published by Chas. Scott 
& CO. I 18.J7. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. copy of correspond- 
enccpp. iii-iv, index pp. v-vi. textpp. 7-147, 12^. 
Chinook Jargon vocabulary (75 words and 
nuTiierals 1-10. 20, 100, 1000), pp. 145-146. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenteum, Con- 
gress. 
Aster ; This word foUowinga title or within paren- 
theses after a note indicates that a copy of tlie 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
in tlie Astor LiVirary, iS'ew York City. 
Authorities : 

See Dufosse (K.) 
Eclls (M.) 
Field (T.W.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Leclcrc (C.) 
Ludewig (H.E.) 
Pilling (J. C.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Quaritch (B.) 
Sabiii (J.) 
Steigcr (E.) 
Triibuer tV co. 
Trumbull (.T. H.) 
Vater (.J. S.) 



B. 



Bancroft : This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by tlie com- 
piler in the library of Mr. H. H. Bancroft, .San 
Francisco, Cal. 

Bancroft (^Hubert Howe). The | native 
races | of | the Pacific states | of | North 
America. | By | Hubert Howe Bancroft. 
1 Volume I. I Wild tribes [-V. | Prim- 
itive history]. | 

New York : | D. Appletou and com- 
pany. I 1874 [-1876]. 

5 vols, maps and plates, 8°. Vol. I. "Wild 
tribes; II. Civilized nations; III. Myths and 
languages; IV Antiquities; V. Primitive his- 
tory. 

Some copies of vol. 1 are dated 1875. (Eames, 
Lenox.) 

About one-third of vol. 3 of this work is 
devoted to the languages of the west coast. 

Brief reference to the Chinook Jargon and 
its derivation, pp. 556-557. — Classification of the 
aboriginal languages of the Pacific states (pp. 
562-573) includes the Chinook, p. 565.— "The 
Chinook language" (pp. 626-629) includes a gen' 
eral discussion, pp. 626-628; Personal pronouns 
in theWatlala dialect, p. 628; Conjugation of 
the verbs to be cold and to kill, pp. 628-629.— 
Short comparative vocabulary of the Columbian 



Bancroft (H. H.) — Continued. 

and Mexican tongues includes seven words of 
tlie "Waiilatpu, Molale, AVatlala, Chinook. 
Calapooya, Aztec, and Sonora, p. 631. — The 
Chinook Jargon (pp. 631-635) includes a gen- 
eral discussion, pp. 631-634 : Lord's prayer with 
interlinear English translation, p. 635. 

Copies seen : Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, British 
Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, George- 
town, Powell. 

Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 49, 150 fr. Bought 
by (Juaritch at the Ramirez sale, no. 957. for 5j!. 
15*. and priced by him, no. 29917, 5/. 

The I native races | of | the Pacific 

states I of I North America. | By | Hu- 
bert Howe Bancroft. | Volume I. | Wild 
tril)es[-V. | Primitive history]. | 

Author's Copy. | San Francisco. 1874 
[-1876]. 

5 vols. 8^. Similar, except on title-page, to 
previous edition. One hundred copies issued. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, British Museum, Con- 
gress. 

In addition to the above the work has been 
issued witli the imprint of Longmans, London ; 
Maisonneuve, Paris; and Brockhaus, Leipzig; 
none of which have I seen. 
The works | of | Hubert Howe Ban- 
croft. I Volume I[-V]. | The native 



f 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



Bancroft (i\. H.) — ContiiuH'il. 
races. | Vol. I. Wild (ril)e8[-V. Primi- 
tive history]. | 

San Francisco: | A. L. Haticroft it 
company, publishers. | 1882. 

5 vols. H'^, Tills scries will iiichide tl\c His- 
tory of Central America. History of Mexico, 
etc., oacli with its own .system of numbpriiiR, 
and also immbcrcd consfM^utivoly ia tl;e scries. 

Of these works there have been published 
vols. l-;i9. The opcnin;^ paragraph of v<d. 30 
gives the following information : "This voluino 
closes the narrative portion of my historical 
series; there yet remains to be eomideted the 
biogra])hi<al sectiim.' ' 

Copiet fceii : tJancroft, British Museum, 
Jiureau of Ethnology, Congres.s. 
Bates (Henry Walton). Stanford's | coni- 
pendinin of geography and travel | 
Itased on Hellwahl's ' Die Erde und ilire 
Volker' Central America | the West In- 
dies I and I Sonth America | Edited and 
extended | By H. W. Bates. | assistant- 
secretary of the Royal geographical so- 
ciety; I author of 'The naturalist oti 
the river Amazons' | With | ethnolog- 
ical appendix hy A. H. Keane, B. A. | 
Maps and illnstration.s | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, S. W. I 1878 

Half-title verso blank I 1. frontispiece 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. 
vii-.Kvi, list of illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of 
maps p. six, te.Kt pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443- 
561, index pp. 563-571, maps and plates, 8°. 

Keane ( A. H.), Ethnography and jihilology 
of America, pp. 443-561. 

Copien seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Eames, Geological Survey. Xational Mu.seum. 
Stanford's | Compendium of geogra- 
phy and travel | based on Helhvald's 
'Die Erde und ilire Volker' | Central 
America ' the West Indies | and | Soutli 
America | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, | Author of [&c. two lines] 
I With I ethnological appendix by A. 
H. Keane, M. A. J. | Maps and illustra- 
tions I Second and revised edition | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, S. W. I 1882 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of 
illustrations ])p. xvii-xviii, list of mai>8 p. xix. 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps and plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp.443-,-)61. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Harvard. 
■- Stanford's | compendium of geogra- 
phy and travel | based on Helhvald's 



Bates (H. W.) — Continued. 

' |)ie Erde und ihre Vrdker' | Central 
America | the West Indies | and Sonth 
America | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, I assistant-secretary[A-c.two 
lines] I With | ethnological appendix 
by A. H. Keane, M. A. I. | Maps and 
illustrations | Third edition | 

London | Edwar<l Stanford, 55, (Shar- 
ing cross, S. W\ I 1885 

Collation and contents as in sp(;ond edition, 
titl(( and deseripl ion of which are given above. 

Copies seen: <Ie(ih)gical Survey. 

Beach (William Wallace). Tlie | Indian 
iniscellany ; containing Papers on the 
History, Anfi(iuities, Arts, Languages, 
Religions, Traditions and Superstitious 
I of I the .American aborigines; I with | 
Descriptions of their Domestic Life, 
Manners, Customs. | Traits, Amuse- 
ments and Exploits; I travels .md ad- 
ventures in tlie Indian country ; | Inci- 
dents of Border Warfare ; Missionary 
Relatioiis, etc. | Edited by W. W. 
Beach. | 

Albany: | J. Muusell, 82 State street. 
I 1877. 

Title verso blank 1 I. dedication verso blank 
1 1. advertisement verso blank 1 1, contents pp. 
vii-viii, text pp. 9-477, err.ata p. 478. index pp. 
479-490, 8'. 

Gat,schet (A S.), Indian languages of the 
Pacific states and territories. |)p. 416-447. 

Copies seen : Astor, Hrinton, British Mviseum, 
Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, George- 
town, Massachusetts Historical Society, 
Pilling, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

Priced by Leclerc, 1878 catalogue, no. 2663, 20 
fr, ; the Murphy copy, no. 197, brought $1.25; 
priced by Clarke & co. 1886 catalogue, no. 6271, 
$3.50. and by Littlefield, Xov. 1887, no. 50, $4. 

Belden {Lieut. (Teorge P.) [Vocal)ulary 
of the Chinook Jargon.] 

Manuscript, pp. 1-44, 12^, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. Re- 
corded in a blank book. 

Explanatory, p. 1. — Vocabulary, alphabet- 
ically arranged by English words, pp. 2-37. — 
Numerals 1-10, 20, 30. 100, 1000, p. 38.— Explana- 
tory notes, pp. 39-44. 

A copy of the manuscript titled as follows: 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jjirgon. | 

Collected by | Lieut. G. P. Belden. | 
Arranged by | J. Curtin. 

Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
1-53, sm. 4°: in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. Recorded in a blank book. 

The material is the same as in the original, 
but more systematically arranged, and tha 
spelling is changed to more modem usage. 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Berghaus (Dr. Heinrich). Allgemeiiipr 
I ethnographisclior Atlas | odor | Atlas 
fler Volker-Kundc. | Eiue Sammhmg | 
von neiinzt'lin Kartell, | auf denendie, 
iim die Mitte des iieiiuzehnteu Jahr- 
hmiderts statt tiiidende geograpliisclie 
Verhreituiig aller, iiaeli ihrer Sprach- 
veiwandtschaft geord- | neten, Volkor 
des Erdballs, und ihre Vertheilung in 
die Reiche nnd Staaten | der alten Avie 
der neiien Welt aligcbildet nnd versiun- 
lioht worden ist. | Ein Versuch | von | 
D' Heinrich Berglians. | 

Yerlag von Jnstns Perthes iiiGotha. 
I 1852. 

Title of tlip series (Dr. ITeinricli Berghaus' 
pliysikaliseher Atlas, etc.) versol. 1 recto blank, 
title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, 19 
maps, folio. 

No. 17. " Oregon- Volkcr'' treats of the hab- 
itat and linguistic relations of tlie peoples of 
that region, among others the Tshinuk and its 
dialects, p. b6. — Map u<i. 17 is entitled: "Ethno- 
graphische Karte von Nordamerika ' ' '"Nach 
Alb. Gallatin, A. von Humboldt, Clavigero, 
Hervas, Hale, Isbester, Scv." 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnology. 

Bergholtz (Gustaf Fredrik). The Lord's 
Prayer | in the | Principal Languages, 
Dialects and | Versions of the World, | 
printed in | Type and Vernaculars of 
the I Different Nations, | compiled and 
published by | G. F. Bergholtz. j 
Chicago, Illinois, | 1884. 
Title verso copyright 1 1. contents pp. .3-7, 
preface p. 9, text pp. 11-200. 12=^. 

The Lord's prayer in a number of American 
languages, among them the Chinook, p. 36. 
Copies seen : Congress. 
Bible history : 



Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Bible stories: 

Chinook Jargon 



See Le Jeune(J. M. R.) 
St.Onge(L.N.) 

See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 



[Blanchet (Bt. Ber. Francis Norbert).] 
A Complete Dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon (English-Chinook and Chinook- 
English) ; to which are added numerous 
Conversations, thereby enabling any 
person to speak the Chinook correctly. 
Third edition, published by S. J. 
M'Cormick. 

Portland, O. T. 1856. (*) 

24 pp. 24°. Title from Triibner's Bibliograph- 
ical Guide to Aineiican Literature (1859), p. 249. 
I put this and following titles under this 
author's name upon information furnished by 
Mr. J. K. Gill, the compiler of the editions sub- 
sequent to the seventh, 



Blanchet (F. N. ) — Continued. 

[ ] A Comjilete Dictionary of tho 

Chinook Jargon. English-Chinook, and 
Chinook-Englisli. To which is added 
numerous conversations, &c. Third 
edition. 

Portland, Oregon: published by S. 
J. McCorinick. [1862?] (*) 

24 pp. 24°. The above title, oniittiug the 
date, is from Gibbs's Dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon, Avhere he says: "Several editions of 
this work have been published; the last which 
I have seen, in 1802." 

[ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 
gon, I to which is added | numerous 
conversations, | thereby enabling any 
person to | speak Chinook correctly. ( 
Fourth Edition. | 

Portland. Oregon: | published by S. 
J. McCormick. | Franklin book store, 
Front-st. | 1868. 

Cover title as above, inside title as above 
verso name of printer 1 1. i)reface and rules for 
pronunciation p. [3], text pp. 4-21. 18°. 

Vocabulary, part I. — English and Chinook 
(alphabetically arranged, double columns), pji. 

4-13 Numerals 1-1000. p. 13.— Vocabulary, 

part I. [sic]- -Chinook and English (alphabet- 
ically arranged, double columns), pp. 14-18.— 
Conversations (English and Chinook, parallel 
columns), pp. 19-21. 

Copies seen : Eames. 

[ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 
gon, I to which is added | Numerous 
Conversations, | thereby enabling any 
person to | speak Ckinook correctly. | 
Sixth edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | published by S. 
J. M'Cormick, 19 First st. | Franklin 
bookstore. [1873?] 

Cover title as above verso advertisement, 
title as above verso preface and rule for pro- 
nunciation 1 1. text pp. 3-24, 24°. 

Vocabulary. Part first. English-Chinook, 
(alphabetically arranged, double columns), pp. 
3-15. — Numerals, p. 15. — Part second. Chinook 
and English (alphabetically arranged, double 
columns), pp. 16-21. — Conversations, English- 
Chinook, pp. 22-24. — Lord's prayer in Jargon, 
with interlinear English translation, p. 24. 

Copies seen : Ford. 

[ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 
gon I to which is added | numerous 
conversations, | thereby enabling any 
person | to speak Chinook correctly. | 
Sixth edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | F. L. McCor- 
mick, publisher. 63 First street. | 1878. 

Title verso preface 1 1 text pp. 3-26, 24°, 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



PI., a-io.- 

17-23.— Con- 
pp. 24-26.— 



Blanchet (F. N.) — ( 'out iiuicd 

Kiii;Iisli('liiini((k voc.ilmlarv. 
Cliiiiook-Knulisli vocabiil:irV: pji 
\<ir.satioiis in Kiiglisli-fMiinook 
Lord's prayer in .Iary;<>n, p. 26. 

Copies xeeit : liantrroft. 

[ ] Dictionary | of the | Cliiuook Jar- 
gon, I to which i.s aiMod | numerous 
conversations, | thereby euabliny :iny 
person | to sjjeak Chinook correctly. | 
Seventh edition. | 

I'orthind, Oregon. | F. L. McC'ormick, 
juildisher, 91 .Second street. | 1879. 

Cover title as above, title as atiove verso pref- 
ace 1 1. text pp. 3-26, 24°. 

Englisli-Chiuook voeal)ularv, pp. 3-16.— 
Cliin()ok-Eii<i:lish vocabnlary, pp. 17-23.— Con- 
versations in Enjilisli-Cliinook, ])p. 24-20.— 
Lord's jirayerin Jargon, p. 20. 

Copies seen: Congress, (iporgetmvii, Welles 
ley. 

For later editions, see Grill (J. K.) 

[Writings in the Chinook Jargon.] 

In the prefaee to the Chinook Uietionarv, 
&c., by Father Demers and others, is a state- 
ment eimcerning the origin of the Chinook 
Jargon and those who have written therein, 
from which I make the following extract: 

" The Chinook Jargon was invented by the 
Hudson Bay Com])any traders, who were mostly 
French-Canadians. Having to trade with the 
nimierons tribes inhabiting the conntries west 
of the Kocky Mountains, it was necessary to 
have a language understood by all. Hence the 
idea of composing the Chinook Jargon. Foi't 
Vancouver being the principal post, the traders 
of the twenty-nine forts belonging to the com- 
pany, on the western slope, and the Indians 
fi'om every part of that inuuense country, had 
to come to Vancouver for the trading season. 
They used to learn the Chinook [Jargon], and 
then teach it to others. In this manner, it 
became universally known. 

"The two first missionaries to Oregon, Eev. 
F. N. Blanchet, V. G.. and his worthy com- 
])anion. Rev. Mod. Demers, arrived from Canada 
to \'aucou\er, on the 24th of November, 1838. 
They had to instruct numerous tribes of 
Indians, and the wives and chihb'en of thf 
whites, who spoke only the Cliinook. The two 
missionaries set to work to learn it, and in a 
few weeks Father Demers had mastered it, 
ami began to preach. 

•' He composed a vocabulary which was very 
useful to other missionaries. He conii>osed 
several canticles which the Indians learned and 
sang with taste and delight. Ho also translated 
all the Christian prayers in the same language. 

"Such is the origin of the Chinook Jargon, 
which enabled the two tirst missionaries in the 
country to do a great deal of good among the 
Indians and half-breeds. The invention of the 
Catholic Ladder, in April, 1839, by Very Rev. 
Blanchet, and its [oral] explanation in Chinook, 



Blanchet (F. \.) — (Jontinued. 

had a marvelous success, and gave the Cat holic 
missionaries a great superiority and jireiMUider- 
ance niucb envied by the missionaries belong- 
ing to other denominations. 

" Father Denii-rs. afterwards IMshop of Van- 
couver's Island, ha.s now gout! to enjoy the 
reward of his great labours and apostolic zeal. 
It would be too bad to lose his dictn.nary au.l 
otln^r Chinook works. So .\rclibislio]» Blan- 
(diet, who has himself made a comi.endinm of 
the('liristian Doctrineinthesamelanuuage, has 
had thi^ good inspiration to get the whole j.ub- 
lislied with his corrections and additions." — St. 
Oiiye. ill Demers' Chinook Dictionary . 

Referring to the Catholic Ladder, " and its 
explanation in Chinook," mentioned in the 
above extract, Father St. Onge writes me as 
follows: "The Catholic Ladder, of which I 
sent you a copy, Avas, as you suggest, published 
by Father Lacombe; but it is only an embel- 
lished edition of the Ladder invented by Arch- 
bishop Blau<'het, in April, 1839. The andi- 
bishop never jirinted auj' Chinook explanation 
of it, ami in my preface to the Chinook Diction- 
ary the word aral should liave been inserted." 

See Demers (M.), Blanchet (F. N.) 

ami St. Onge (L.N.) 

Bishop Blanchet Wiis born at St. Pierre, 
Riviere-duSud, Quebec, Canada, September 5, 
1795: was educated in the Petit Seminaire, 
Quebec, and was ordained July 18, 1819, by 
Archbishop Ph'ssis. In 1811 the Pacific Fur 
Company established a trading post, called 
Astoria, at the mouth of the Ctdumbia River. 
After came the Hudson's Bay Compiiny, em- 
phiying many Canadians, most of who:u were 
Catholics. Many of them settled and inter- 
m.arried with the Indians of tlie territory, and 
with these tbei-e was a demand for Catholic 
priests and Catholic worship. 

Application was first made to the Rt. Rev. 
J. K. Provencher, Bishop of Juliopolie (Red 
River). The demand for Catholic; priests was 
earnestly indorsed by Sir George Simpson, 
governor of the Hudson Bay Company, 
writing from the British capital (1838). He 
applied to the Mi. Rev. Jo.seph .Signay, then 
Archbishop of Quebec. At once, in April, 
1838, Bishop Signay instructed two of his 
missionaries, the Very Rev. F. X. Blanchet and 
the Rev. Modesto Demers, to take charge of the 
mission "situ;tted between the Pacific Ocean 
.and the Rocky Mountains " — a mighty charge 
for two men; but the men were .apo.stles. and, 
therefore, as full of jtractical zeal as of prac- 
tical faith. Father Blanchet w.as vicar-general, 
with Father Demers as assistant. 

The journey of the devoted missionaries to 
their new mission was a long and most laborious 
one, familiar enough inearlyC:itholic American 
history, though almost iniom|)rehensible to us 
, in these days of ra])id and easy transit. They 
labored on their route, baptizing and confirming 
in t he faith many Indians, who, at various 
forts, thronged touieet the long looked-for t/acik 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Blaiichet (F. N.) — Continued. 

gowns. Their (lestiuation was Fort Vaucouver, 
which they reached Xovcmhcr 114, 1838. 

Vaucouver waa at this time the principal fort 
of the Hudson liay Company, and this the 
missionaries made tlieir headquarters wliile for 
four years they toiled unaided up and down 
the wide domain of their mission. The letters 
of the fathers describing tlieir work and sur- 
roundings are full of interest and afford valu- 
able material for history. They learned the 
Indian tongue and taught the natives the sim- 
ple prayers and doctrines of the church in their 
own language; Father Demers attending more 
to tlie Indians, and Father Blanchet to the 
Canadians. 

"With the rapid growth of the missions the 
Holy See, at the request of the Bishops of 
Quebec and Baltimore, erected Oregon into a 
vicariate-apostolic (December 1, 1843), appoint- 
ing Father Blanchet its vicar-apostolic. The 
papal briefs arrived on N'itvember4, and Father 
Blanchet, setting out for Canada, received liis 
consecratitm in Montreal at the hands of the 
Archbisho]) of Quebec. Thence be went to 
Rome, which he reached in Januai-y, 1846, anil 
set before the Pope the great wants of his 
vicariate. 

At his intercession, in July, 1846, after the 
accession of Pius IX., tho vicariate of Oregon 
was erected into an ecclesiastical province, 
with the three sees of Oregon City, Walla 
"Walla (now "Wallula), and Vancouver's Island. 
The Rt. Rev. F. N. Blanihot was appointed to 
Oregon City; the Rt. Rev. A. M. A. Blanchet, 
liis brother, to Walla Walla, and the Rt. Rev. 
M. Demers to Vancouver Island. The neces- 
sity of this division may be judged from the 
result of the missionaries' labors at the end of 
1844. Most of tho Indian tribes of the Sound, 
Caledonia, and several of the Rocky Mountains 
and ol' Lower Oregon, had been won over to the 
faith. Nine missions had been founded— five 
in Lower Oregon and four at the Rocky Moun- 
tains. Eleven churches and chajiels had been 
erected— live in Lower Oregim. two in Cale- 
donia, and fourat the Rocky Mountains. There 
were two educaticmal establislunents— one for 
hoys and the other for girls. There were fifteen 
priests, secular and regular, besides the sisters. 
These figures nuvy not look large to-day, but 
they were large at the time, and of great signif- 
ican(-e ill a lapidly populating and growing 
region. 

Meanwhile the archbishop of Oregon City 
had been very active abroad in aid of his new 
province and its dioceses. He sought help on 
all sides, and returned in August, i847, accom- 
pauietl by a colony of twenty j>ersous. compris- 
ing seven sist('rs of Notre Uame de Xamnr, 
three Jesuit fathers, three lay brothers, five 
secular ])riests, two deacons, and one cleric. 

lu 1855 the archbishop started for South 
America to collect for his nee<ly diocese. He 
traversed Chile, Bolivia, and Peru, returning in 
1857 after a successful expedition. Two years 
later ho depax'ted for Canada, returuiui; the 



Blanchet ( F. N.) — Contiuu*'i7. 

same year with twelve sisters of the Holy 
Names of Jesus and Mary for Portland, two 
Sisters of St. Ann for Victoria, some others for 
Vancouver, and three priests. 

In 186G the archbishop attended the second 
Plenary Council of Baltimore, and, ever wat<-h- 
fiil for the cares of his dioi^ese, returned with 
one priest and eight sisters. On J uly 18, 1869, 
he celebrated the fiftieth anniversary ot liis 
ordination to the priesthood, and four months 
later left for Rome to assist at the Vatican 
council, where he met his early brother mis- 
sionaries. He returned to Portland in 1870. 

On July 1, 1870, Archbishop Seghers, the 
coatljutor, arrived at Portland, and was received 
by the venerable founder of the diocese, sur- 
rounded by his clergy and faithful flock. In a 
few words of touching simplicity and sweetness 
the aged prelate received and welcomed his 
youthful colaborei- to the field where he had 
planted and sowed and reaped so well. After 
initiating Arehbisho)) Seghers into the work of 
the diocese, the venerable man chose whollv to 
retire from the scene of his active labors, and 
published his farewell pastoral on the 27th day 
of February, 18^1.— 2fallel. 

Boas (Dr. Franz). Chinook [Jargon] 
sougs. 

In Journal of Am. Folk-lore, vol. 1, pp. 220- 
226, Boston and New York, 1888, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Thirty-eight songs, one verse each, with 
Luglish translation, pp. 221-224. —Three songs 
with musi(^ p. 225.— One song in Chinook, 
except the last line, which is in Tlingit, j). 225.— 
Glossary of Chinook words (74), alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 225-226. 

Nott'.s on the Chinook htnguage. By 

Franz Boas. 

In American Anthropologist, vol. 6, pp. 55-63, 
Washington, 1893. 8°. (Pilling.) 

Tribal divisions, p. 55.— Characters used to 
render the sounds of the ( 'hinook language, pp. 
.-,.-)-56.— Discussion of the language, p. 57.— 
(lenders, with ex.-imples, pp. 57-58.— Plurals, 
with examples, pp. 58-59.— Cases, with exam- 
ples, pp. 59-60.— Numerals, p. 60.— Verbs, pp. 
00-62.— Word composition, pp. 62-63. 

[Myths, legends, and texts in the 

Chinookan languages.] 

M.anu.scripts, four note books, sm. 4° ; in tne 
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

Note book no. 1. Texts, etc., in the Chinook 
dialect :Cikla, a creation myth, p. 1 ;Ckulkulotl, 
the salmon spear, p. 15; The panther and the 
stick, p. 26.— Wasko text : Coyote anu eagle, p. 
32. — Clackamas text, p. 33.— Katiainat texts: 
Ak'asqenaqena, p. 34; The flooa, p. 48; Tiape- 
qoqot, p. 54. — CUatsop vocabulary, pi>. 68-91. 

Note book no. 2. Explanation of Chinook 
texts, pp. 1-19. — Sentences and vocabulary, 
ChiuKok dialect, pp. 19-33.— Explanation of 
Katlamat texts, p]). 33-57. — (Jlaekamas vocabu- 
lary, pp. 1 11. — Wasko vocabulary, pp. l-ll. 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



Boas ( F.) — ContiiiiKil. 

Nulc, book no. :;. Chinook texts with iiilt-i 
liiiciir IniiishitioiiH left-liaiid pa^'i-s. j;raiiiinali<- 
ami Icxii-o^iniphir cxiihiiialioiirt on rijjht-lianil ^ 
jmgcs: ('iklu.<oM<lnik-<l. y.'M; Okiihini. J) '-tH: I 
Kntsq. )». 58; Criiw an<l eaj^lc \>. 7ll: Thr ( liilil of . 
till- W.Mt Win.l. II. 75; Caq.itl, )). 105: Tlii^ [ 
salmon. ]i. li:j; (iiMtoui.s rctVirin^ to war. |>. ; 
145; "NVar between the Kwileyiit ami Clat.top, | 
p. 14C ; The first visit of a ship. j). l.">0 : I'he sea \ 
lion hunters, p. 155: Itaven and sull, p. 1"'>: The 
skunk. ].. 174: Hliiejav and his si.ster go visit 
in^ (1). p. 1811: Marriage, p. lit:i: Blue.jay and 
rohin. p. 197: Maniav'e, eontinued. \>. '.'Ol ; blue 
jay and his sister (2). p. 2u;i: IMiii-jay and his 
sister (3), j). '214; Souls and Shamans, p. 228; I 
Adoleseeneeof girls, j). 262: Birth. ]>. 207; Death , 
and sickness, p. 269; Whaling, p. 282; Tlie elk ' 
hunter, 1). 288; The eoyote and the salmon, p. 
295; Potlatch, p.3i:!; Citla'unatlq, p.318; The 
erane. p. 331.— Katlamat texts. Visit to the 
sun, p. 31; The r.ieroon. p. 40; Coyote and 
badger, p. .55: Panther anil lynx. p. 08; Enio- ■ 
goah-k.i>.76; The seal. ji. 87; Visit to the world I 
of 1 he souls, p. 92 ; Tlgu'lak. ]>. 98 ; Tlie mink. p. j 
103; Kobin and salmon berry, p. 119; Panther [ 
andowl. 1). 131: The eoyote. p. 146: The famine, 
p. 151. 

Note book no. 4. Chinook explanations of 
texts, pp. 1-19. — Notes on Chinook dialect from 
^ the explanations of the Katlani.t texts, pp. 19- 
32.— Kallaiiietexplanafionsof texts. i>p. 33-48.— 
Katlania; taken from explanations of Chinook 
texts. i>p. 4H .54. 

Sinie the above was nut in type I have seen 
a jiorlion of tliis material in a more advanced 
atatt: of jireparation for the jiress. It still 
requires about one hundred pages to make it 
complete. It is headed as follows : 

Chinook Texts | Told by Cbailes 

Cnltee; | Recorded and ri;iiisliited | liy 
I Ffuuz lioart. 

Manuscript. 11. i-iv, 1-252 folio, written on 
one siile only : in possession of its author. 

Introduction, 11. i-ii.— [Sounds of] letters, 11. 
iii-iv.— Cikla, their myth, with literal inter- 
linear translation into Knglisli, 11. 1-13; a free 
Knglish translation. 11. 14-20. — Okula'm. her 
niytli. with literal interlinear translation into 
Knglish, 11. 21-33; a free Knglish tran.slation. 11. 
r{4-42. — Anektiyo'leniiy, her myth, with inter 
linear Knglish translation. 11. 43-.59; Knglish 
translation. II. .59-70.— The salmon, his myth, 
with interlinear Knglish translation, 11. 72-90; 
Knglish translation. 11. 91-102.— Raven and gull, 
their myth, with interlinear Knglish translati<m, 
11. 104-lOG: Hnsilisli translation. 11. 107 108.— 
Coyote, his myth, with interlinear Knglish 
translatioii.il. 109-119; Knglish translation, 11. 
119-123.— The crane, his myth, witli intt-rlinear 
Knglish tr.inslation.il. 125-128; Knglish trans- 
lation, II. 129 lao.— Knstiy. his myth, with inter- 
linear Knglish translation.il. 131-137; English 
transhition. 11. 137-142. — The crow, his story, 
with interlinear English translation. 11. 143-145: 



Boas ( F.) — Cofitiiiiied. 

Knglish translation, 11. 145-147.— Caxas, his 
iiiytli.with interliniar Knglish translation, 11. 
I4H 1.52; Knglish translation, 1.52-155.— Stikna, 
her myth, with interlim-ar Knglish translation, 
II. 156-164: Knglish translation. II. 104-168.— The 
skunk, hisstory, withlnterlinear Knglishtrans- 
latiou,ll. 169-172: Knglishtranslalion.il. 172-173. 
—Kobin. their myth, and Hluejass. with inter- 
linear Knglish translation. 11. 175-177; Knglish 
tran.slation. 11. 178 179.--Iiluejay and loi. their 
myth (1). with interlinear Knglish translation, II. 
180-186: Knglish tran.slation. 11. 186-190.— The 
same (2). 11. 191-19<t. 199-202.— The same (3). U. 
20:i-215 (11. 209-214 missing).— LI. 210-2.35 miss- 
ing. — The soul, with interlinear Knglish transla- 
tion. 11. 236-247 ; English translation 11. 248-2.52. 
At the close of each myth will appear explan- 
atory notes. 

I copy the following notes from the Intro- 
duction : 

The following texts were collected in the 
sumniersof ]890and 1891. While studying the 
Salishaii languages of Washington and Oregon 
I lieaid that the dialects of the Lower Chinook 
were on the v<-rge of disap|iearing: that only a 
few individuals of the once powerful trilies of 
theClatsoj) and Chinook survived who remem- 
bered their languages. This fac-t determined 
me to make an eflVirt to collect what little 
remained of these languages. I first went to 
Clatsop, where a small band of Indians is 
l<M-ated near Seaside. Clafnop County. Oregon. 
Although a iiumher of them belonged to the 
Clatsop tribe, they had all a<loi>ted the Xehelim 
language, a dialect of the S;ilisli:in Till.iniook. 
This change of language was brought about by 
frequent intermarriages with the Xehelim. I 
found one middle-aged man and two old women 
who still remembered the Clatso]> language, 
but I found it impossible to obtain morethan a 
vi>cabulary and a few sentences. The man had 
forgotten too great a ])art of the language, while 
the women were not able to gras]) what I 
wanted. They claimed to have forgotten their 
myths and traditions, and could not or would 
not give me any connected texts. One (dd 
Clatsop woman, who had been married to a Mr. 
Smith, was too sick t<i be seen and died soon 
after my visit. The few reiuaining Clatsop 
had totally forgotten the hi.story of their tribe 
and even maintaine<l that no allied dialect was 
spoken north of Columbia River and on Shoal- 
water Bay. They assured me that the whole 
country was occujiied by the Chihalis, another 
.Salishan tribe. They told me, however, that a 
few of their relations, who still continued to 
speak Clatsop, lived on Shoalwater Bay among 
the Chihalis. I went to search for these people 
and found them located at Bay Center, Pacific 
County Washington. They proved to be the 
last survivors of the Chinook, who at one time 
occupied the greater jiart of Shoalwater Bay 
and the northern bank of Columbia River as 
f;ir :is drey's Harbor. The tribe has ailopted 
the Chihalis language in the same way in which 



8 



BIBLIOGRAPHi^ OF THE 



Boas (F.) — Continued. 

tLe Clatsop have adopted the Neheliin. The, 
ouly one.s who si>okt' Chinook were Joseph 
Cultce and Katharine. While I was nuahle to 
ohtain anything from the latter, Cultee proved 
to he a veritable storehouse of information. His 
wife is a Chihalis and he speaks now-a-days 
exclusively Chihalis, which is also the language 
of his cliildrcn. He has lived for a long time 
in Katlamat. hi.s mother's town, and speaks for 
this reason the Katlamat dialect as well as the 
Chinook dialect. He uses tliis dialect in con- 
versing witli Samson, a Katlamat Indian, who 
is also located at J5ay Center. Until a few 
years ago lie spoke Cliinocdi with one of his 
relations, while he uses it now only when con- 
versing witli Katharine, who lives a few miles 
from Bay Center. 

Possibly tliis Chinook is to a certain extent 
mixed with Katlamat expressions, hut from a 
close study of the material I have reached the 
conclusion tliat it is. on the whole, pure and 
trustworthy. 

1 have also obtained from Cultee a series of 
Kallamal (exts, whicli I believe are not quite 
as good as the Chinook test, but nevertheless 
give a good insight into the dift'erencet of the 
two dialects. It may he possibl.! to obtain 
material on this dialect from other sources. 

My work of translating and explaining the 
texts was greatly facilitated by Cnltee's remark- 
able intelligence. After he had once grasped 
what I wanted he explained to me the gram- 
matical structure of the sentences by means of 
examples and (Oucidated the sense of difhcult 
periods. This work was tlie more ditiicult as 
we cou\er.-^ed only by means of the Chinook 
Jargon. 

The following jiages contain nothing Imt the 
texts with notes and translations. The grara- 
marand dictionary of the language will contain 
acompari.son of all the dialectsof the Chinookan 
stock. I have translated the first two texts 
almost verbatim, while in the latter texts I only- 
endeavored to render the sense accurately, for 
which purposes short sentences have been 
inserted, others omitted. 

[Grammar and dictionary of the 

Cliinook language. Uy Dr. Franz 
Boas.] (*) 

Manuseri])t, in ])Ossession of its author, who 
is ])rei)aring it for publication. See note above. 

See Bulmer (T. 8.) 

Franz Boas was born in Miuden, We.stphalia, 
Germany, July 9,1858. From 1877 to 1882 he 
attended the universities of Heidelberg, Bonn, 
and Kiel. The year 1882 he spent in Berlin 
preparing for an Arctic voyage, and sailed 
June, 1883, to Cumberland Sound, Baftin Land, 
traveling in that regi<m until September, 1881, 
returning via St. Johns, Newfoundland, to New 
York. The winter of 188-1-1885 he spent in 
Washington, jireparing the results of his 
journey for publication and in studying in the 



Boas (F.) — C'ontiuued. 

National Museum. From 1885 to 1886 Dr. Boas 
was an assistant in the Royal Ethnographical 
Museum of Berlin, and Decent of Geography at 
the 1 ' niversity of Berlin. In the winter of 1885- 
1886 he journeyed to British Columbia under 
the auspices of the British Association for the 
Advancement of Science, for the purpose of 
studying the Indians. During 1886-1888 Dr. 
Boas was assistant editor of " Science,'' in New 
York, and from 1888 to 1892 Decent of Anthro 
jiology at t'lark University, Worcester, Mass. 
During these years he made repeated journeys 
to the Pacitic coast with the object of contin- 
uing his researches among the Indians. In 1891 
Kiel gave him the degree of Ph. D. 

Dr. Boas's ])rincipal writings are: Batiin 
Land, Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1885; The Central 
Eskimo (in the Cth Annual Report of the 
Bureau of Ethnology) ; Reports to the British 
Association foi-tbe Advancement of Science on 
the Indians of Brili.sh Columbia, 1888-1892; 
Volkssagen aus Briti.sch Columbien, Verli. der 
(ies. fiir Anthropologic, Ethnologie und I'rge- 
schichte in Berlin, 1891. 

Bolduc : This word ftdlowing a title or within 
])arentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by tlie 
compiler in the library of Rev. J.-B. Z. Bolduc, 
Quebec, Canada. 

Bolduc (I'cre Jean-Baptiste Zacarie). 
Mission | do la | Colombie. | Lettre et 
journal | do | Mr. .J.-B. Z. Bolduc, | niis- 
siounaire de la Colombie. | [Picture of 
a church.] | 

Quebec : | de I'imprimerie de J.-B. 
Frechette, \)hi\', \ imprimeur-libraire, 
No. 13, rue Lanumragne. [1843.] 

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-95, 16'^. The 
larger part of tlie edition of thi.s work was 
burned in the i)rinting ottice. and it is, in con- 
sequence, very s<-arce. 

Lord's i)rayer in Tchinonc Jargon with inter- 
linear French translation, p. 94. — Quelquesmots 
[14], Fi-ench, Tidiinoucs [.Targon] et Sneomus, 
p. 95. 

Copies seen : Bolduc, Mallet, Well&sley. 

Boston Athenaeum : These words following a title 
or within parentheses aftera note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of tliat institution, 
Boston, Mass. 

Boston Public: These words following a title or 
within jiarentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of tlie work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in that library, Boston, Mass. 

Boulet (/?<;('. Jean-Ba])ti.ste), editor. See 
Youth's Companion. 

Brinton: This word following a title or within 
I»arentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referied to lias been seen by the com- 
pilei- in the library of Dr. D. G. Brinton, Phila- 
delphia, Pa. 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



I 



Briiiton {l>r. Daniel (iarrisoii)- T'k' 1:'ii- 
giiaj^c of iiala'olitliic. man. 

In Aiiicricaii I'liilosoph. Soc. I'rov. vol. 2.'), ]t]>. 
212-L".','^. I'liilatleliihia, 1HH8, gC'. 

Tt'iiiKS lor /, tliiiK, iiiun, diiriniti/, ill Chiiinok, 
P.21G. 

IsHUeil separately as lollows: 

The lan<>iiagc |. of | pala-olithic inau. 

I Ky I Ituiiicl (J. liiiiiton, M. D., | Pro- 
I'essoi' of Anifiiiaii Linouistics and Ai- 
cluBology in tlie l'ni\tr.sity of Pennsyl- 
vania. I Read before the American Pliil- 
osoiihical Society, | Octobers, l!S^i8. | 

Pressof MiicCalhiA co., | Nos. 237-M 
Dock Street, I'hiladelphia. | 1S«8. 

Cover title as above, til leas abovi' vt-rso blank 
1 1. text pp. 3-l(i, »-->. 

Linguistic conTents as iimler title next 
above, p. 7. 

Cojiifs seen : Kanies, Pilling. 

This article n^printed in the following: 

— Essay.s t)f tin Americanist. | I. Eth- 
noloo;ic and Archieologic. | II. Mythol- 
ogy and Folk Lore. | III. (iraphic Sys- 
tems and Literature. | IV. Linguistic. 
I Hy I DaniclG. Brinton, A.M.,M.D., | 
Professor [&c. nine lines.] | 

Philadelphia: | Porter A- ("oates. | 
1890. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface ]ip. iii-i\-, 
contents ]>]i. v-xii, text \>\t. 17-467, index of 
authors and authorities pp. 469-474, index of 
subjeits pi>. 475-489, 8'^. A collected reprint of 
some of Dr. Briuton's more important essays. 

The earliest form of hnman speech as revealed 
by American tongues (read before the American 
Philosophical Society in 1885 and jiublished in 
their i>roceedings under the title of " The lan- 
guage of )ialieolitliic man "'), jip. :!90-4r.9. 

Linguistic contents as nnder titles next 
above, |i. 401. 

Copies seen : llureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

The American Race : | A Linguistic 

Classification and Ethnographic | De- 
8(^ription of the Native Tribes of | 
North and South America. | By | Daniel 
(}. Brinton, A.M., M.D., | Professor [Ac. 
ten lines.] | 

New York: | N. D. C. Hodges. Pub- 
lisher, I 17 Lafayette Place. | 18P1. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. ix-xii, contents \^\>. 
xiii-xvi, text pp. ]7-r!:V2, linguistic appendix pi>. 
333-.364, additions and corrections ])p. 36,'i-368, 
index of authors pp. 369-373, index of subjects 
pp. 374-392, 8^. 

A brief discussion of the north Pacific coast 
stocks (pp, 103-117) iii.ludes a listof the divi- 
sions of the Chinook linguistic stock, p. 108. 



Brinton (D. (i.) — C<ui tinned. 

Copieif neen : Bureau of Ktlinology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

DanieKlarrison Brinton, ethnologist, bom in 
Chester County, Pa., May 13, 1837. lie was 
graduated at Vale in 18.'')8 and at the .letl'erson 
Medical ("ollege in 1801, after which he spent a 
year iu Eurojie in study .and in ti'avel. On his 
return ho entered the army, in .\ugnst, 1862. a.s 
acting assistant surgeon. In February of the 
following year he was commissioned surgeon 
and served as snrgeoninchief of the second 
ili vision, eleventli corps. He was present at the 
batth's of (Muincellorsville. Cet tx sburg, and 
other- engageiueuls, and was ajipointed medical 
director of his corjis in ()ct(d)er, 1863. In conse- 
ipicnce of a sunstroke re<'eived soon after the 
battle of (iettysburg ho was disnualified for 
.active service, and in the autumn of that year he 
became superintendent of hospitals at (^uiucy 
and Springtiehl, 111., until August, 1865, when, 
the dvil war having closed, he was brevetted 
lieutenant iidonel and ilis<'harged. He then 
settled in Philadelphia, where he became editor 
of " The Medical and Surgical Reporter, '' and 
also of the quarterly "Compendium of Medical 
Science." Dr. Brinton has likewise been a 
(M)nstant contributor to other medical. journals, 
(diietly on (lucstions of public medicine and 
hygiene, and has edited several volnme.s on 
therai)entics and diagnosis, esjictially the itoi>- 
ular series known as "Xapheyss Modern Ther- 
apeutics," which has ]iassed through many 
editions. In the medical controversies of the 
day, he has always taken the positiiui that med- 
ical science should bo based on the results of 
clinical observation rather than on physiologi<al 
experiments. He has become prominent as a 
student and a writer on American ethnology, 
his work in this direction beginning while he 
wasastudent in college. The winterof 18.56-'57, 
s))ent in Florida, supplied him with material for. 
his lirst published book on the subject. In 18.84 
he was a])pointed professor of etliuology and 
archaeology in the Academy of Natural Sciences, 
Philadelphia, For some years he has been pres- 
ident of the Kumisniatic and Antitiuarian Soci- 
ety of Philadelphia, and in 1886 he w.as elected 
vice-jiresident of the American Associatiou for 
the Advancement of Science, to preside over 
the section on anthropology. During the same 
year he was .awarded the medal of the " Soci6te 
Americaine do France" for his " numerous and 
learned works on Ameriian ethnohigy, " being 
the first niitive of the United .States that has 
been so honored. In 1885 the American pub- 
lishers of the •• Iconograjihic Encyclopa-dia ' 
requested him to (Mlit the first volume, to con- 
tribute to it the articles on " Anthropology" 
and " Ethnology,' and to revise that on " Eth- 
iiograliy,"by Profea.sorGerland, of Strpasburg. 
He also contributed to the second volume of the 
same work an essay on the " Prehistoric Archie- 
ology of botli Hemispheres," Dr. Brinton has 
established a library and publishing house of 
alioriginal American literature, for the purpose 



10 



BIBLIOGEAPHV OF THE 



Brintoii (1). G.) — ('oiitiimed. 

of placiug witliiii the reach of schohirs authen- 
tic materials for the study of the hiiiguages anil 
culture of the native races of America. Each , 
work is the production of nalive minds and is 
printed in the original. Tlie series, most of 
whiili were edited hy I'r. Brintun himself, 
includes •' The Maya Chronicles" ( IMiilad(l])hia, 
1882); 'The Irocjuois Book of Kites " (1883) ; 
"The (iiiegiience: A Comedy iJallet in the 
Kahuatl Spanish Dialect of Nicaragua" (1883); 
"A Migration Legend of the f'reek Indians "' 
(1884) ; '• TheLenape and TheirLegends" ( 1885) : 
"The Annal.s of the Cakehi.iuels " (188.>). 
["Ancient Xahuatl Poetry" (1887); "Rig 
Yeda Americanus (189(i).J Besides publishing 
numerous papers, he has contrihuted valuable 
reports on his examination of mounds, shell- 
heaps, rock in.scriiitions, and other antiquities. 
He is the author of " The rioridiau Peninsula : 
Its Literary History, Indian Tribes, and Antiq- 
uities" (Philadelphia, 1859); "The Myths of 
the Kew 'World : A Treatise ou the Symbolism 
and Mythology of the Ked llace of America" 
(New York. 1868) ; " The Iteligious Sentiment: 
A Coutributi(m to the Science and Philosophy 
of Keligion" (1870) "American Hero Myths: 
A Study in the Native Religions of t lie "Western 
Continent" (Philadeliihia. 1882): "Aboriginal 
American Authors aiul their Productions, 
E.specially those in the Native Languages ' 
(1883); and "A Grammar of the Cakehicjuel 
Language of Guatemala" OHi<'4).—Appleto)rg 
Cyclop, of A m. Biog. 

British iluseum : These words following a title or 
within parentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of the work referred to has been .seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution. 
Loudon. Eiig. 

Bulmer (Dr. 'J'lidiiia.s Saiulersou). Chi- 
nook Jargon I graimiiar aud diftionary 
I compiled by | T. S. Bulmer, M.D., 
C. M., F. S. A., London, | Surgeou- 
AccoucLenr. Royal College of Sui- 
geous, England. | .Antlior of [&C. four 
lines.] (*) 

Manuscript in possession of its author, Cedar 
City, Utah, who fuiuished me the above tran- 
script of the title-page, and who wiites me, 
October, 1891, conceraing it as follows : " I shall 
issue it on Hall's typewriter, and then dupli- 
cate copies with another special machine, and 
use various types on the machine, testing the 
uses of each. . . . Fifty ]>ages will lie 
devoted to the origin of the language from all 
sources. Examples of hymns from various 
languages will be given. 

Climook Jargon language. | Part II. 

I [Two lines Chinook Jargon.] | To be 
completed in IX parts. | compiled by | 
T.S. Bulmer, M. D., CM., F. S. A. Sc. 
A., London. | Ably assisted by | Rev'd 
M. Eells, D. D., and Rev'd Pere N. L. 



Buhner (T. S.) — Continued. 

St. Ougc, (formerly missionary to the 
I Vakama Indians). 

Manusi-ript ; title as above verso blank 1 1. 
text 11. 1-124, 4°. In possession of Dr. Bulmer. 

Preface in English, 11. 1-3; in Jargon, with 
interlinear English translation, 11. 4-12.— 
Eulogy of the Chinook .Jargon, in English, 11. 
13-15; in Jargon (with interlinear tr:inslatiou 
into EnglislO by :Slr. Eells, 11. 10-19.- The 
Chinook Jargon (general remarks, with inter- 
linear English translation). 11. 20-22.— Special 
notes on the Chinook. 11. 23-21. —Bibliograpliy 
of the Chinook Jargon, 11. 24rt-24;/.— Origin of 
certain Indian words, 1. 25. — Remarks ou ouo- 
matopteia, 11. 20-27.— Rise and progress of the 
writtenlauguage of the Chinook Jargon, 1.28. — 
Changes in the language, with vocabulary, 11. 
28-35, — Some words in Takaiua, with a resem- 
blance to the J:iigon,ll. 30-4(1.— Words in the 
Niskwalli having some resemblance to the 
Chinook Jargtni.l. 41. — Some words from the 
Creel. 42. — A list of verb.s found iu the Jar- 
gon, alphabetically arranged, 1, 42. — Adverbs, 
jirepositious, conjunctions, and interjections, 
11,51-54,— List of the princip;il adjectives, 11.55- 
■-,()._( Irammatical construction of tlie (Miiuook 
Jargon, 11. 01-03. — Comparison of languages (20 
words and phrases) iu Tlaoquatch and Xootka, 
with tlie Ctdumbian and Cliinook, 11. C!i-64. — 
Cree woidsin the Jargon, 11, 0.'')-74, — Ontheiiosi- 
tion of words, 1. 75. — Remarks on t he t rauslation 
of abstract words, 11. 76-79.— The alpliabet, 11. 
80-8.">. — Partial list of compound words, alpha- 
betically arranged, 11. 80-92.- Inflections, 11. 93- 
96— .Vdjectives. 11. 90-98.— Generiil rules on 
lenses, 11. 98-112. — Personal jtionouus, 11, 113- 
122,— Numerals. 11. 123-124, 

The Chee-Chinook language | or | 

Chinook Jargon. In | IX | parts. | Part 
III. I English-Chinook dicticmary. ( 
Fir.st edition. | By T. 8. Bulmer, ably 
a.ssisted by \ the Revd. M. Eells, D.D., 
& the Revd Pere 8aiut Ouge, both 
missiimaries to the Indians in "Wash- 
ington & Oregon states. 

.Mauuscript; title verso blank. 1 1, preface 
verso blank 1 1. special note for readers verso 
blank 1 1. "memos to guide the reaitei-" 2 11. text 
alidi.abetically arranged by English words 11. 
1-189, written on one sideonly, folio. In pos.ses- 
siou of its author, who kindly loaned it to me 
for examination. In his "memos" the author 
gives a list of letters used to indicate the origin 
of the respective words C, .V, i, E, F, C'h. Yak., 
Chinook, Nootka, Indian, English, French, Chi- 
lialis, and Yakama; and a second list of i)er- 
sons from whom the words were obtained and 
localities in wliiih they were used. 

■In my selection of the term CheeChinook 
I merely intend to convey to students that it 
has its principal origin iu the Old or Original 
Chinook Language; and although it contains 
mauv other Indian words, as well as French 



OHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



11 



Buhner (T. S.) — C<)iitiiiiu'<l. 

and Kiifjlisli. yi't itcHiiKi forth fVoiii its inotlier 
as an liyl>i'i<l, and as such lias been bri'il and 
nonrislicd as a nursling from the panmt stem. 
I thiTftore dfsit;u<it<' it ncheeoruew Chinook — 
the word clu'e heinj; a .rar-iou word for littfhi, 
just null', llfir." 

[ ] ("liiiiuok Jarjiim dirtidiiary. l^ait 

III. Chiuook-Kii'^lisli. 

Manusf.riiit ; 121 leaves, folio, wriiteii ou ono" 
aidt^ only, intersiiersed with •10 blank leaves 
insiTted for additions and eorreetions. In 
possession of its antlior. 

Tlie dictionary occupies 106 leaves, and many 
of the words are followed by their e(iui\aUnts 
in the lan}iuai;es from which they an' derived, 
anil the authority therefor. Following the 
dii'tionary arc thi' following: Original Indian 
names of town-sites, rivers, mountains, etc., iu 
the western parts of the State of Washington: 
Skokoinish, 'J 11.; Cheniakum, Lower Chihalis, 
Uuwamish, 1 1. ; Chinook, 2 11. ; luiseellaneous, 2 
11. — Names of various places in the Klamath 
anil Modoc countries, 3 11. — Campin<;- places 
and other localities around the Upper Klamath 
Lake, oil. 

[ ] Ap2>endix to Biiliner's Cbiiiook 

Jaro'on cpiaiiimar and dictiouary. 

Manuscript, 11. 1-70,4°, iu possession of its 
author. 

(Jeneral phrase.s, as literal as possible, 
Chinook and English, 11. C-20. — Detached sen- 
tences, 11. 27-29.— Prayer in Kuglisli, 11. 30-:il; 
same iu Jargon. 11. 32-33. — "History "in Kug- 
lisli, 11. 34-3G; same in Jargon (by Mr. Eells), 
with interlinear English translation, 11. 37-43. — 
An address, in Englisli, 11. 44-46; same in Jar- 
gon, with interlinear English tran.slation, 11. 47- 
53. — A sermon in Englisli, 11. 54-.^"); .same in 
■largon, with interlinear English translation. 11. 
56-61. — Address in Jargon to the Indians of 
Piiget Sound, by Mr. Eells, with interlinear 
English translation, 11. 02-66.— Addre.ss 'On 
Man," iu English, 1. 67; same in Jargon, with 
interlinear English translation, 11. 68-70. 

[ J Part II I of I Bulmer's Appendix | 

to the Cliee-Chiuook | Graumiar and 
IJiotioiiary. 

Manuscript, 37 11. 4°, in possession of its 
author. 

Form of marriage. 11. 2-3. — Solemnization of 
the marriage service, 11. 4-10. These two articles 
are in Jargon, with interlinear English transla- 
tion. — Address, in English, 11. 11-12; the same 
in Jargon, with interlinear Phiglish translation, 
11. 13-17. — " From Addison," in Jargon, with 
interlinear English tran.slation, 11. 18-19.— An 
oration iu English, 1. 20 : the same in Twaua by 
Mr. Eells, with interlinear English translation, 
11. 21-22.— A Twana tradition, by Mv. Eells, 
with interlinear English translation. 1. 23; the 
same in English, 11. 24-25. — Legends iu Jargon, 
by I'ere I.. X. St. Onge, with interlinear English 
translation, 11. 26-57. 



Buhner ('1\ S.) — Coiitiuutsd. 

[ ] S|)('<ial Kciciitilic notes. 

Manuscript, 11. 1-77,4', in possession of its 
author. 

General remarks on Indian languages, 11. 1- 
3. — Origin of languages, 11. 4-11.-- Scientitic 
notes on the European and Asiatic languages, 
11. 12-35. — American Indian hinguagos, 11. 35- 
63. includes remarks upon and examples iu the 
Iroquois, Cherokee. Sahajitin. Algonkin, 
Nahuatl, Shoshone, Cree, Sioux, and Jargon.— 
List of words in the Chinook .Jargon the .same 
as in Nitlakapamuk, 11. 64-67. — Sclisli numerals 
1-18, 1. 65.— List of tribes of Alaska and its 
neighborhood, 1. 66.— Twana verbs, 1. 67.— Nisk- 
wally verbs, 1. 68.— Clallam verbs. 1. 09. — Re- 
marks on the Yakama. H. 70-77. 

[ ] The Christian prayers | iu Chi- 
nook [Jaro;onJ. 

Manuscript; 61 11. 4°, iu t lie possession of its 
author. 

Prayers in Chinook Jargon. 11. 1-5. — Lessons 
l-17inChinoiili.largiiu, with Englisli lieadiugs, 
11. 6-23. — List of special words ado])ted by 
Fathers Blaucbet and Demers in i-onuoction 
with the Service of the mass, 11.24-25. — Trans- 
lation of the Cliinook ju'ayers into English, 11. 
26-38. — Copy of a sermon preached by Itev. Ur. 
Eells to the Indians at Walla- Walla, with inter- 
linear English translation, 11. 39-46. "Of the 
97 words used, 46 are of Chinook origin, 17 
Xootka, 3 Selish, 23 English. 2 Jargou, and in 
French. — Artiides of faith of the Congrega- 
tional church at Skokoiuish, Washington, in 
the Jargon with interliucar English translation, 
11.47-52. — Oration in Chinook Jargon with in- 
terlinear English translation, 11. 53-54. — Prayers 
to Cod in English lihmk v.rse. 11. 55-56: the 
same in Jargou with interlinear English trans- 
lation, 11. 57-61. 

[Hymus, .songs, etc., in the (.'hiuook 

Jargon and other languages.] 

Manuscript; no title-page; text 77 leaves, 
4*^, in posse.ssion of its author. 

Songs, 1. 1.— Song with music, 11. 2-3.— School 
songs by Mr. Eells, 11. 4-5. — Song.s from Dr. 
Boas, 11. 6-12.— Hymus by Mr. Eells, 11. 13-32. 
All the above are in Jargon -with English 
translations. — Hymns in Niskwalli by Mr. 
Eells. 1. 33. — Hymns in Jargon by Pere St. 
Onge, 11. 34-45. — Hymn in Takama, by Pere St. 
Onge. 11. 45-46 ; the same in English, 11. 57-64.— 
Yakama prose song by Father Pandosy, with 
French translation, 11. 05-69. — Hymns in .largon 
by Mr. Eells, 11. 70-71. — Hymn iu Yakama with 
interlinear English translation, 11. 72-73.— Song 
in English, 1. 74 ; same in Siwash. 11. 75-77. 

[The Lord's prayer in various Indian 

languages.] 

Manuscript; no title-page; text 24 unnum- 
bered leaves, written on one .side only, 4'^. 

The Lord's prayer in Chinook Jargon, 1. 1: in 
Yakama, » 1. 2; iu Micniac, 1. 3.— Ave Maria in 
Micmac, 1. 3. ^Lord's jirayerin Penobscot. 1. 4; 



12 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Bulmer (T. S. ) — Coutiuuetl. 

in Mareschite, 1. 5; in Passamaq noddy (two ver- 
sions) 1.5; Mifmac (ancient), 1. G; Montagnais, 
1, 6; Abenaki, 11. 0-7; pure Mareschite, 1. 7; 
Snoboniisli,l. 7; Niskwalli, 1. 8; Clallam,* 1.9; 
Twana,*1.10; Sioux, 1.11; Flathead,* 1. 12; Cas- 
cade, * 1. 12 ; Tlallam, 1. W ; Huron, 1. 13 ; Black- 
toot, 1. 13; Abenaki. 1. 14 ; Choctaw, 1. 14; Ottawa, 
1.14; Assiniboiue, 1. ].'); Seneca, 1.15; Caujrhna- 
waga, 1. 15; other Micmac, 1. 16; Totonac, 1. Ifi; 
Cora, 1. 16 ; Mistek, * 1. 17 ; Maya, ' 1. 17 ; Algon- 
quin, * 1. 22.— Hymn in Snohomish, 11. 23-24. 

Those prayers marked with an asterisk are 
accompanied by an interlinear English trans- 
lation. 

The compiler of this paper informs me it is 
his intention to add one liundred other versions 
of the Lord's prayer, from the Californian and 
Mexican languages. 

In addition to the above papers, Dr. ]5uliner is 
also the autlior of a number of articles appear- 
ing in Father Le Jeune's Kamloopg Waira, q. v. 

I am indebted to Dr. Bulmer for the notes 
upon which is based the following account: 

Thomas Sanderson Bulmer was born in 1834, in 
Yorkshire, England. He was educated at Pres- 
ton grammar school, Stoke.sley, and at Newton 
under Brow, was advanced under Rev. C. Cator 
and Lord Beresford's son at Stokesley, and 
afterwards was admitted a pupil of the York 
and Ripon diocesan college. He was appointed 
principal of Doucaster union agricultural 
schools, but soon after emigrated to New York. 
There he took charge, as head master, of Gen- 
eral Hamilton's free school. Thence he went 
to Upper ('anada and was appointed one of the 
professors in L'Assomption Jesuit College. 
From tliere he went to Rush Medical College 
and Lind University, Chicago; thence to the 
ficole Nonnale, ^lontreal ; thence to Toronto 
University, medical de])artment. Later he con- 
tinued his studies in the ^ficole de Medecine 
and McGill University, Montreal, and gradu- 
ated in medicine at Yictoria I'uiversity. In 
1868 he cro.ssed to London, whence he proceeded 
to New Zealand, and was appointed superin- 
teiulent of quarantine at "Wellington. In Tas- 
mania and Australia he held similar positions. 
His health failing, he went to Egypt, and later 
returned to England. The English climate not 
agreeing with him, he took a tour of the Med- 
iterranean ports. Returning to London, the 
Russian grijjpe attacked him. and he was 
warned to seek a new climate. He returned to 
Montreal, en route for the Rocky Mountains, 
where he sought Indian society for a consider- 
able time. rintUug winter disasti'ous to him, 
he proceeded to Utah in search of health. For 
the last two years he has been engaged in 
writing up his Chinook books, as well as com- 
pleting his Egyptian Rites and Ceremonies, in 
which he has been assisted by English Egyp- 
tologists. Dr. Bulmer is a member of several 
societies in England and Americaand the author 
of a number of works on medical and scientific 
subjects. 



Bureau of Etlinology: These words following a 
title or within jiaren theses after a note indicate 
that a copy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of the Biireau of 
Ethnology, Washington, D. C. 

Buschtnann (Joliauu Carl Eduard). 
Die Volker mid 8praclien Neii-Mex- 
iko'a und der Westseite des britischea 
Nordanierika's, dargestellt von Hiu. 
Buschmaim. 

In Kiinigliche Akad. der ATiss. zu Berlin, 
Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1857, pp. 209-414, 
Berlin, 1858, 4°. 

A few words of Chinook and Cathlascon 
(from Scouler), pp. 373-374. — Vocabulary of sev- 
eral Iiulian languages compared with the 
pseudo-Chinook (Cathlascon?) from Scouler, 
pp. 375-378. 

Issued separately witli title-page as follows : 

Die Viilker uud Spiacheii | Neii- 

Mexioo's I und | der Westseite | des | 
britischen Nordanierika's | dargestellt 
I von I Job. Carl Ed. Bnsebmanu. | Aus 
den Abbandlungen der konigl. Akade- 
luie der Wissenscbaften | zu Berlin 
1857. I 

Berlin | gedruckt in der Bucbdruek- 
ereider kchiigl. Akademie | der Wissen- 
scbaften I 1858. I In Commission bei F. 
Diimmler's Verlags-Bncbbandluug. 

Cover title as al)ove, title as above verso 
notice 1 1. text pp. 209-404, Inhalts-tJbersicht 
pp. 405-413, Verbesserungen p. 414, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies Keen : Astor, Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Trumbull. 

The copy at the Fischer sale, catalogue no. 
270, brought 14s.; at the Field sale, catalogue 
no. 235, 75 cents; priced by Leclerc, 1878 no. 
3012, 12 fr. and by Triibner, 1882, 15*. 

Die Spuren der aztekiscbeu Spracbe 

iui nordlicbcn Mexico und boberen 
amerikaniscben Norden. Zugleicb eiue 
Musterung der Volker uud Spracben des 
nordlicben Mexico's und der Westseite 
Nordanierika's von Guadalaxara an bis 
zum Eismeer. Yon Job. Carl Ed. Buscb- 
nianu. 

In Kiinigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin. Ab- 
handlungen aus dem Jahre ]8.')4, zweiter Supp.- 
Band. i)p. 1-819 (forms the whole volume), Ber- 
lin. 1859,4°. 

List of words in the Waiilatpa, Molele, Wat- 
lala, two dialects of the Chinook, and Calapuya, 
pp. C20-625.— Supplementary vocabulary of the 
Chinuk and Calapuya (from Parker, Scouler, 
Rafluesque, and Gallatin), pp. 625-626.— Lord's 
prayer in Chinook (from Dutlot de Mofras),p. 
626. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



13 



Buschmanii (.F.C. {].) — (Nditiiiued. 

Die I Spiireiidcraztokisrlicn S))r;iclie 

I ini nordliclieii Mexico | rnid iKlhoron 
amerikaiiisrlK'ii Nordon. | ZiiKleicli | 
eiiif Musteriin;;; dor WUker mid Spra- 
clien I di'8 U("trdliclu'ii Moxico'.s | iind 
derWestscitcNoi'daniciika'N | voiiCiiia- 
dnhixara an bis ziiin lOismccr. | Voii | 
Joli. Carl Ed. IJiiscIiiiiJinn. | 

]5t'rliii. I Gedrnckt ill dor Hiichdrnck- 
ci'cidi iKdiiigl. Akademio | derWiisscn- 
scliiifU'ii. I 1859. 

Half title verso l.lank 1 1. Kcnoral title of the 
scries verso l>lank 1 1. litle as above verso lilaiik 
1 1. abfjekiirtze luhalta -Ubersicht pp. vii-xii, 



Buschmanii (J. C'. E.) — Contimied. 

text j>p. l-7Ki, Kinleitiin}; in <las geoKraiiliisehe 
Ive;;ister jij). 714 TlK, ;;eo<;rai)liis(lii' Kejjister 
pp. TlK 81,'). veniiisclite Naili\veismi;;en pp. 816- 
818, VerbessiM'iiiiKCii, p. 81!), 4 '. 

Linguistic con tents ;i.s under title next above. 

Oojnes seen : Astor. Brinton. Kanie.s, Maiaon- 
neiive, rilling, Qiiaritcb, SiiiitbHonian, Trum- 
bull. 

Published at 20 Marks. .\n uncut Iialf-nio. 
rocco cojiy was sold at tlio Fischer sale, cata- 
logue no. 269, toQiiaritch, for '21. lis.; the latter 
prices two copies, catalogue no. 12.')52, one 'M. 2s. 
the other 2/. 10«. ; the Pinart copy, catalogue no. 
178. l)rouglit 9 fr. ; Koehler, catalogue no. 440, 
prices it Hi il. 50 pf. ; priced again bj'Quaritch, 
no. 30037, n. 



c. 



See Lee (D.) and Frost (.T. H.) 
Lee ( D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Youtli's. 
Lee(D.) and Frost (J. H.) 



Cascade: 

Hymns 

Sentences 

Lord's prayer 

Prayer 
Calechism : 

Chinook Jargon Sec Dcmers (M.) et al. 
Cathlascon : 

See Buscbinanu (J. C. E.) 
Scouler (J.) 



Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

AVords 

Words 



Tolniie (W. F.) 
Buschmanu (J. C. E.) 
Latham (R. G.) 

Catlin (George). A descriptive cata- 
logue I of I Catliii's Indian collection, 
I containing | portraits, land.scapes, 
costumes, &c., | und | representations 
of the manners and customs | of the | 
North American Indians. | Collected 
and painted entirely by Mr. Catlin, 
during eight yeai's' travel amongst | 
forty-eight tribes, mostly speaking 
different languages. | Also | opinions of 
the jiress in England, France, and the 
United States. | 

London: | published by the author, | 
at his Indian collection, No. 6. Water- 
loo place. I 1848. 

Title verso names of printers 1 l.note and 
certificates pp. 3-7, text pp. 8-92, S'^. 

Proper names of a number of individuals in 
various North American languages, among 
them .1 few of the Chinook. 

Copies seen : Harvard, Wellesley. 

Priced by Maisoniieuve & co. in 1880, 2 fr. 

The descriptive catalogue is reprinted in the 
various editionsof Catlin's Notes of eight years' 
travel and residence in Europe, for titles of 
whieh see below. 

North and Sonth American Indians. 

I Catalogue | descriptive and instruc- 



Catliii (G.) — Continued, 
five I of I Catlin's | Indian Cartoons. ( 
Portraits, types, and customs [.sic]. | 
6()() paintings in oil, | with | 20,000 full 
length figures | illustrating their vari- 
ous games, religious ceremonies, and 
I other customs, | and | 27 canvas 
paintings | of | Lasalle's discoveries. | 
Ne'w" York: | Baker & Godwin, Print- 
ers, I Printing-house sqtiare, | 1871. 

Abridged title ou cover, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. remarks verso note 1 1. text pp. 5-92, 
certificates pp. 93-99, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as in edition of 1848, 
titled next above. 

Copies seen : Astor, Congress, Eames, AVel- 
lesley, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

TheCatlin Indian collection, contain- 
ing jiortraits, landscapes, costumes, 
&c.,and representations of the numners 
and customs of the North American 
Indians. Presented to the Smithsonian 
Institution by Mrs. Thomas Harrison, 
of Philadelphia, in 1879. A descriptive 
catalogue. By George Catlin, the artist. 

TnRhees( W.J.), Visitor's guide to the Smith- 
sonian Institution and United States National 
lluseum, in Washington, pp. 70-89, Washing- 
ton, 1887.8^. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
p. 76. 

Copies seen : I'illing, I'owcll. 

Part V. The George Catlin Indian 

gallery in the National Museum (Smith- 
sonian Institution), with memoir and 
statistics. By Thomas Donaldson. 

In Annual Report of the Board of Regents of 
the Smithsonian Institution * * ■ July, 
1885, part 2 (half-title 1 1. pp. i-vii, 3-939), Wash- 
ington. 1886, 8°. 



14 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Catlin (G.) — Continued. 

Ppscriptive cataloj;ii<* "f Indian portraits 
(pp. 13-230) iiiiludos tin- Cliinook. p. 99. 

Issued separately, with title-page as follows: 

The I George Catlin Indian gallery | 

in the | U. S. National Museum {(Smith- 
sonian Institution), | Avith | memoir 
and statistics. | By | Thomas Donald- 
son. I From the Smiths<mian report for 
1885. I 

Washinutoii : | (^overnmtnt printing 
office. I 1^87. 

Title verso Wank 1 1. contents pp. i-iii, illus- 
trations pp. v-vii, text pp. 3-915, index pp. 917- 
939, 8°. 

Linguistic content.s as under titlenextaliove. 

Copies seen : Eaines, Pilling, Smithsonian. 

Issued also with title-page as follows : 

Tlie I George Catlin | Indian gal- 
lery, I in the | U. 8. National Museum, 
I (Smithsonian In.stitution.) | With 
memoir and statistics. | By Thomas 
Donaldson. | 

Washington, D. C. | W. H. Lowder- 
milk A: Co. I 1888. 

Title verso blank 1 1. contents pi>. i-iii, illus- 
trations pp. v-vii, text pp. 3-915. index jip. 917- 
939, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Cojiics seen : Lowderinilk. 

Catlin's notes | of | eight years" 

travels and residence ( In Europe. | 
with his I North American Indian col- 
lection: I with anecdotes and incidents 
of the travels and adventures of three 
I ditierent parties of American Indians 
whom he introduced | to the courts of | 
England, France and Belgium. | In two 
volumes octavo. | Vol. I [-11]. | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

New-York: | Burgess, Stringer &co., 
222 Broadway. | 1818. 

2 vols. : half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
copyright 1 1. preface ])ji. v-ix, contents pp. xi- 
xvi, text pp. l-29(); half-title verso blank 1 1. 
title verso copyright 1 1. contents pp. v-xii, text 
pp. 1-325, appendix pp. 327-336, 8°. 

A descriptive cat.ilogue of Catlin's Indian 
collection (vol. 1, i)p. 248-296) includes proper 
nan>es in a number of Indian languages, among 
them a few of the Chinook, p. 264. 

Copies seen : Uureau of Ethnology. Powell. 
"Watkinson. 

At the Fischer sale a copy, no. 350, brought 
2«. ; the Field copy, no. 305, sold for $2.50. 

Catlin's notes | of | eight years' 

traAels and residence | In Europe, | 
with his I North American Indian col- 
lection: I with anecdotes and incidents 



Catlin ((4.) — Continued, 
of the travels and adventures of three 
I dift'crent ])arties of American Indians 
whom he introduced | to the courts of | 
England, France, and Belgium. | In two 
volumes octavo. | Vol. I[-II]. | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

New York: | puVdi.shcd by the author. 
I To l)e had at all the bookstores. | 1818. 

2 vols.: pp. i-xvi, 1-296; i-xii. 1-336; plates, 
8=. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen : Congress. 

Catlin's notes | of | eight years' 

travels and residence | in Europe, | 
with his I North American Indian col- 
lection. I With I anecdotes and inci- 
dents of the travels and adventures of 
I three different jtarties of American 
Indians whom he | introduced to the 
courts of I England, France, and Bel- 
gium. 1 In two volumes, octavo. | Vol. 
I[-II]. I With numerous illustrations, 
I Second edition. | 

London: | published by the author, | 
at his Indian collection. No. 6, Water- 
loo place. I 1818. 

2 vols. : half-title verso blank 1 1. frontispiece 
1 I. title verso names of printers 1 1. preface pp- 
v-ix. contents ]ip. xi-xvi. text pp. 1-202. appen- 
dix pp. 2(13-247. catalogue pp. 248-296; half-title 
verso l)lank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 
1. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-325, appendix 
pp. 327-336. plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: British Museum. Congress. 
Lenox, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

Some copies, otherwise as above, have ''Third 
edition' (Congress); others " Fourth edition '' 
(Bureau of Ethnology, Lenox), both with the 
same date. 

Adventures | of the | Ojibhewayand 

loway Indians | in | England, France, 
and Belgium ; | being notes of | eight 
years' travels and residence in Europe | 
with his I North American Indian col- 
lection, I by Geo. Catlin. | In two vol- 
umes. I Vol. I [-II]. I With numerous 
Engravings. | Third edition. | 

London: | puldished by the author, | 
at his Indian collection, no. 6, Water- 
loo place. I 1852. 

2 vols. : half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
blank 1 1. preface pp. v-ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
text pp. 1-296; half-title verso blank 1 1. title 
ver.so names of printers 1 1. contents pp. v-xii, 
text pp. 1-325, appendices pp. 327-336, 8°. 

A reprint of Xotes of eight years' travels in 
Europe. 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



15 



Catlin (G.) — ('ontiniicd. 

r.iriK'iistii; roiitents an under titles above. 

Copies seen: Astor, fSostoii Atlieiia'um. I>ii- 
reau iif KthiioloKy, Wiseoiisiii Historical Soci- 
ety. 

(reorge (Jalliii, iiainter, born in Wilkcsliarre, 
T*a.. in 17!)(i. died in Jersey (Mty, X. -T., I)e<eni- 
l>er2:i, 1K72. Tlestudied lawat Litchtield. Conn., 
l)nt after a few years' practice went to I'liila- 
delpliia and turned his attention to drawinj; 
and i)ainting. As an artist he was entirely self- 
taught. In 1832 he went to the Far West and 
spent eight years among the Indian.s of Y(dlow- 
stone River, Indian Territory, Arkansas, and 
Florida, painting a unique series of Indian por- 
traits and pictures, which attracted niucli atten- 
tion on their exhibition both in this country 
and in Kurope. Among these were 47(1 full- 
length portraits and a large number of pictures 
illu.strative of Indian life and customs, most of 
which are now preserved in the Xatir)nal 
Mnseum. Washington. In 1852-18.'J7 Mr. Catlin 
traveled in South and Central America, after 
which he lived in Europe nntil 1871, when he 
returned to the Ignited States. One hundred 
and twenty-six of his drawings illustrative of 
Indian life were at the Philadelphia exposition 
of 187H. — Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 

Chaltin {Rev. W. C. ) See Gill (J. K. ) 
Chamberlain (Alexander Francis). 
Word.s of Algonkian origin [in the 
Chinook Jargon]. 

In Science, vol. 18. p]>. 260-261, New Tork, 
1891, 4^^. (rilling.) 

A li.st of words found in the .largon vocabu- 
laries of Winthrop. Gibbs, and Hale, which are 
of Algonquian origin. 

The Eskimo race and language. 

Their origin and relations. By A. F. 
Chamberlain, B. A. 

In Canadian Inst. Proc. third series, vol. 6, 
pp. 261-337. Toronto, 1889, 8^. 

Comparative Kskimo and Indian vocabu- 
laries (pp. 318-322) contain a number of Chinook 
and Watlala words (from Tolmie and Dawson, 
and from Hale), pp. 318-320. 

Notes on the Chinook Jargon a,s 

s])oken in the Kootenay District, South 
Eastern British ColumV»ia, by A. F. 
Chamberlain, M. A. Ph. D. 

Manuscript, 7 iuinuml)ered pages, written on 
one side only ; in possession of its author, who 
has kindly sent it to me for inspection. 

A vocabulary of 150 Jargon words. 

Alexander Francis Chamberlain was born 
at Kenniughall, Norfolk, England. .Jan. 12, 1865, 
and came to New Tork with his parents in 
1870, removing with them to Canada in 1874. 
He matriculated from the Collegiate Institute, 
I'eterboro, Ontario, into the l^niversity of 
Toronto, in 1882, from which institution ho 
graduated with honors in modern languages and 
ethnology in 1886. From 1887 to 1890 he was 



Chamberlain ( .\. F.) — ( ontinned. 

fr^Uow in modern languages in I'niversity Col- 
lege. Tonmto. and in 1889 received the degree 
of M. A. from his alma mater. In 1890 he was 
ajtjtointed fellow in anthropology in Clark I'ni- 
versity. Worcester, Mass., where hi' occupied 
himself with studies in the .Mgonquian lan- 
guages and the physical anthropology of Amer- 
ica. In .lune, 1890, lie went to British Colum- 
bia, where, until the following Oct<jlier, he was 
engaged in studying the Kootenay Indians 
under the anspii^'s of the British Association 
lor the Advancement of Science. A summary 
of the results of these investigations appears 
in the proceedings of the association for 1892. 
.\ dictionary and grammar of the Kootenay 
language, together with a collection of texts of 
myths, are also lieiiig proceeded with. In 1892 
Mr. Chamberlain received from Clark Univer- 
sity the degree of Ph. D. in anthropology, his 
thesis being : ' ' The Language of the Mississa- 
gas of Skugog : A contribution to the Linguis- 
tics of the Algonkian Tribes of Canada," em- 
bodying the results of his investigations of 
tliese Indians. 

Mr. Chamlierlain. whose attention was, early 
in life, directed to pliilologic and ethnologic 
studies, has contributed to the scientific jour- 
nals of America, from time to time, articles on 
sub.jei'ts connected with linguistics and folk- 
lore, especially of the Algonquian tribes. He 
has also been engaged in the study of the 
Low-German and French Canatlian dialects, 
the results of which will shortly appear. Mr. 
Chamberlain is a member of several of the 
learned societies of .\merica and Canatla and 
fellow of the American Association for the 
Advancement of Science. 

In 1892 he was appointed lecturer in anthro- 
iwlogy at Clark rniversity. 
Charencey (Comte Charles Felix Hya- 
cintho Gonhier de). [Review ofj An 
international idiom, a manual of the 
Oregon trade languages or Chinook 
Jargon, liy Mr. Horatio Hale. 

In Le Museon, vol. 10, pp. 273-274. Louvain. 
1891.8^. 

Chase (Pliny Earle). On the radical 
significance of numerals. 

In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 10, pp. 
18-23, Philadelphia, 1869, 8^. 

Examples in several Indian languages, 

among them the Chinook Jargon (from Gibbs). 

Chinook. The Chinook Jargon, and 

English and French equivalent forms. 

In the Steamer Bulletin, San Francisco, June 
21, 1858. (*) 

Contains an unarranged vocabulary of 354 
words and phrases. 

Title and note from Gibbs's Dictionary of the 
Chinook Jargon. 

For notice of a reprint see Hazlitt (W. C.) 
Chinook [.Jargon] dictionary. See 
Cooues (S. F.) 



16 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Chinook. [Vocaliixlaries of some of the 
Indian languages of northwest Amer- 
ica.] 

Manuscript, 2 vols. 82 pajre.s folio. Bought 
fortbe Library of Cougrt'ss, Washington, r>. C, 
at the sale of tlu' library of the late Mr. Geo. 
Briulcy, the catiilogue of which says they came 
"from tht' library of Dr. John Pickering, to 
whom, probalily, they were presented by Mr. 
Duponceau. They were presented to Peter S. 
Diiponceau. (^sl|., with .T. K. Townshend'.s 
respects. Fort Vancouver, Columbia River, 
Septpnil)er, 18:55.'" 

Contains linguistic Tuaterial relating to a 
number of thi^ peoples in the vicinity of Puget 
Sound, amongst them a Chinook vocabulary of 
194 words and ))hrases, and a Chinook Jargon 
vocabulary, "used as the means of communica- 
tion between the Indians and whites on Colum- 
Ilia River," of ItO words. 

Chinook : 

See Bates (H. W.) 

Donieuech (E. H. D.) 



Classification 

Cla-ssification 

Classification 

Classification 

Classiflcati<ni 

Classification 

Classification 

Classification 

Classification 

Classification 

Classification 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

General discussion 

General discussion 

(General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

Geographic names 

Grammar 

Grammatic comments Gallatin (A.) 

Gramraatic comments Hale (H.) 

Grammatic treatise Boas (F.) 

Grammatic treatise 

Hymns 



(iairdner ( — ) 
(lallatin (A.) 
Keane (A. H.) 
Jehan (L. F\) 
Latham (K. G.) 
Priest (J.) 
Powell (J. AV.) 
Raflncsque (C. S.) 
Sayce (A.H.) 
Boas (F.) 
Gibbs ((}.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beach (W. W.) 
Berghaus (H.) 
Brintou (D. G.) 
Duncan (D.) 
KfWn (M.) 
Feathermau (A.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Hale (H.) 
Sproat (G.M.) 
Whymi>er (F.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Boas (F.) 



Hymns 

Legends 

Lords prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Prayers 

Proper names 

Proper names 

Sentences 

bongs 



Miiller (F.) 
Blanchet (F.N.) 
Tate (CM.) 
Boas (F.) 
Bergholtz (G. F.) 
Diiflot de Mofras (E. 
Boas (F.) 

Durtot de Mofras (E. 
Eells (M.) 
Haldeman (S. S.) 
Ross (A.) 
Blanchet (F.N.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Stanley (J. M.) 
Franchere (G.) 
Boas (F.) 



Chinook — ( 'ontiniied. 

Songs See Eells (M.) 

Texts 

Tribal names 

Tribal names 

Tril)al names 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 



Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Douglass (J.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.( 
Chinook. 



Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
A^ocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocaljulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vo(^abulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 



Domenech (E. H. D.) 
Dunn (J.) 
Franchere (G.) 
(fallatin(A.) 
Hale (H.) 
Knipe (C.) 
Montgomerie (J.E.) 
Pinart (A.L.) 
Priest (J.) 
Raflnesque (C. S.) 
Ross (A.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Shortess (R.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Tolmie (\V. F.) and 

Dawson (G. il.) 
'Wabass (AA'. G.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Brintou (!).(;.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Chamberlaiu (A. F.) 
Daa (L. K.) 
Grasserie (R. de la). 
Haines (E. M.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Platzmaun (J.) 
Pott (A.r.) 
Smith (S. B.) 
Tylor (E. B.) 
Youth's. 



Vocabulary 

AVords 

AA'^orda 

AVords 

Words 

Words 

Words 

AVords 

Words 

Words 

Words 

AVords 

AVords 

Words 
Chinook Jargon. 

In American Homes, illustrated, vol. 4, pp. 
338-339, Chicago, 187.!, 8\ (Lenox.) 

Contains specimens of a dialogue and the 
Lord's prayer with English word for word 
translation. 
Chinook Jargon : 

Bible history See Durieu (1'.) 

Bible history St. (^nge (L. N.) 

Bible stories Le Jeuue (J. M. R.) 

Catechism Demers (M.) et al. 

Dictionary (3d ed. 1856) Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (3d ed. 1862 .') Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (4th ed. 1868) Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (6th ed. 1873 .') Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (6th ed. 1878) Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (7th ed. 1879) Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (Mss. 1891) Bulmer(T. S.) 
Dictionary (1891) Coones (S. F.) 

Dictionary (1871) Demers (M.) ff ai. 

Dictionary (1862) Dictionary, 

Dictionary (1865) Dictionary. 

Dictionary (1871 >.) Dictionary. 

Dictionary (1873) Dictionary. 

Dictionary (1877?) Dictionary. 

Dictionary (1883) Dictionary. 

Dictionary (1887) Dictionary, 



OHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



17 



Chinook Jargon — Coutiiiiud. 



Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionarv 



(Msa, 
(Mss. 



(1887) 
(1889) 
(188B) 
(1802) 
189:t) 
1X84) 



Dicllonary (\Vasli.,18G3) 

Dictionary (N. Y.,18C:i,8o) 

Dictionary (N. Y.,18();{,4'>) 
Dictionary (iltli cd. 1882) 

Dictionary (10th od. 1884) 

Dictionary (lltli cd. 1X87) 

Dictionary (12111 ed. 1889) 

Dictionary (13th cd. 1891) 



(18X0) 
(1858) 
(1890) 
(1872) 
(1886) 
(1892) 
(185.'!) 
(1888) 
(Mss. 189;i) 
(1865) 
(1889) 
(18611) 



Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionarv 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

Dictionary 

(rcncral discussion 

(jcncral discussion 

( icncral discussion 

(iciicral discussion 

( icneral discussion 

(Jcncral discussion 

(rcneral discussion 

(Jencral discussion 

General discussion 

General discussion 

(leueral discussion 

General discussion 

(Tcneral discussion 

General discussion 

Grammar 

(Trammatic coniiueuts 

(jrammatic comments 

Grammatic comments 

Granimatii' treatise 

Grammatic treatise 

Hymn book 

Hymn book 

Hymns 

Hymns 

Hymus 

Hymns 

Hymus 

Hymns 

Hymus 

Legends 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

Lord's prayer 

CHIN 



Dictionarj'. 

Diitiouary. 

Duricu (P.) 

Durieu (P.) 

Eclls(M.) 

Kvcrcltc (W. E.) 

Gibbs ((J.) 

Gibbs (<;.) 

Gil>bs (G.) 

(iill (J.K.) 

Gill (J.K.) 

(iill (J.K.) 

(iill (J.K.) 

(iill (J. K.) 

(iood (J. B.) 

(iuide. 

Hale (H.) 

Lan^\-eiu (H. L.) 

LeJeune(J. M. K.) 

LeJeune(J. M. R.) 

Lionnet ( — ) 

Probsch (T. VT.) 

St.Onge (L. X.) 

Stuart ((J.) 

Tate (CM.) 

Vocabulary. 
Bancn.ft (H. H.) 
Bea.'b (W. W.) 
Clouuh (J. C.) 
Drake (S.G.) 
Eells (M.) 
(iatschet (A. S.) 
Haines (p:. M.) 
Hale (H.) 
NicolKE.H.) 
Reade (J.) 
Sproat (G. M.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Western. 
AVilsou (D.) 
Bulmer (T. S.) 
Crane (A.) 
Eells (M.) 
Hale (H.) 
Demers (M.) et al. 
Hale (H.) 
Eells (M.) 
Le Jeune(J. M. R.) 
Bulmer (f. S.) 
Demers (M.)c? al. 
Everette(W. E.) 
Eells (M.) 
Hale (H.) 
Maeleod (X. D.) 
St.Onge (L.N.) 
St. Ouge (L.N.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Bolduc(J. B. Z.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Chinook. 
Dictionary. 
Eells (M.) 
Everette(W. E.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gill (J.K.) 



Chinook Jargon - 
Lord's prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Numerals 
Xuuiorals 
Niunerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Periodical 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Primer 
Review 
Review 
Review 
Review 
Review 
Sermons 
Sermons 
Sermons 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Songs 
Songs 

Ten commandmeuts 
Text 
Text 
Text 
Text 

Vocaltulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
\'ocabiilary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
A'ocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabularv 



-Coiitiuiied. 

Good (J.B.) 
See Hale (H.) 
Marietti (P.) 
Nicoll (K. ;■'.) 
Cox (R.) 
Dictionary. 
GilKJ.K.) 
Good (J.B.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Hale (H.) 
Hazlitt (W. C.) 
Montgomerie(J.E.) 
Nicoll (E.H.) 
Palmer (J.) 
Parker (S.) 
Richardson (.\. D.) 
Stuart (<;.) 
Swan (J.G.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Bulmer (T. S.) 
Demers (M.) et al. 
Tate (CM.) 
Le Jeune(J. M. R.) 
Charencey ( H. de). 
Crane (A.) 
Leland(C. (}.) . 
Reade (J.) 
Western. 
Eells (M.) 
Hale (H.) 
New. 

Allen (A.) ' 
Chinook. 
Dictionary. 
Eells (M.) 
Green (J. S.) 
Hale(H.) 
Leland (C. G.) 
Mactie (M.) 
Macdonald(D.G. F.) 
Stuart (G.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Crane (A.) 
Everette (W. E.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Demers (M.) et al, 
Dictionary. 
Eells (M.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Armstrong (A.N.) 
Belden (G. P.) 
Bolduc (J. B. Z.) 
Chamberlain(A.F,) 
Chinook. 
Cox (R.) 
Dictionary. 
Eells (M.) 
Everette (W. E.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
(ijbbs (G.) 
(luide. 

Haines (E. M.) 
Hale (H.) 
Hazlitt (W. C.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R. ) 



-2 



18 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Chinook Jargon 

Vocabulary 
Vocabnlary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
"Words 
Words 
"Words 
"Words 
"Words 
"Words 
"Words 
"Words 
"Words 
Clakama: 

Proper names 

Sentences 

Vocabulary 
Classification: 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Clatsop: 

Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 

Vocabulary 



- Continued. 
See Lionnet ( — ) 

Macdonald"(D.G.F.) j 
Palmer (J.) ! 

Parker (S.) ' 

Richardson (A. II.) : 
Koss (A.) ! 

Schoolcraft (H. K.) 
Scouler(J.) 
Sproat(G.M.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Vocabulary. 
"Wiuthrop (T.) 
Chanil>erlain (A.F.) 
Chase (P. E.) 
Crane (A.) 
Eells (M.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Leland (C. G.) 
Norris (P. "W.) 
Tylor (E. B.) 
"Wilson (D.) 

See Stanley (J. M.) 
Gatschet(A. S.) 
Gatscliet(A. S.) 

See Bates (H.W.) 

Domenech (E. H. D.) 
Gairdner (— ) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Jehan (L. F.) 
Keaue (A.H.) 
Latham (R.G.) 
Priest (J.) 
Powell (J. AV.) 
Rafinesque (C. S.) 
Sayce (A.H.) 

See Emmons (G. F.) 
Hale (H.) 
Lee (D.) and Frost 

(J.H.) 
Semple (J. E.) 



Clough (James Cresswell). On | the 
exi.stence | of | mixed languages | 
being | an examination of the funda- 
mental axioms of the | foreign school of 
modern philology, more | especially as 
applied to the P^uglish | Prize Essay | 
hy I James Cresswell Clough | fellow of 
the Royal historical society | member 
of the English dialect society ; assistant 
at Hudderstield college | late modern 
master at Liverpool college | [Greek 
quotation, one line] | 

Loudon I Longmans, Green, and co | 
1876 I All rights reserved 

Hiilf-title verso names of printers 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface p. [v], statements etc. 
p. [vi], contents pp. [vii]-viii, text pp. 1-125, 
postscript p. [126], 8^. 



Clough (J. C. ) — Continued. 

Some account of the Chinook Jargon, with 
specimen words (from "Wilson's Prehistoric 
ma)))' pp. 7-9. 

Copies seoi: Eanies. 

Comolete Chinook Jargon. See Probsch 

(T.'W.) 
Complete dictionary of the Chinook Jar- 

gim. (18.56-1862.) 8ee Blanchet (F. N.) 
Complete dictionary of the Chinook 

Jargon. (1882.) See Gill (J. K.) 

Congress: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that acopyof 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the Library of Congress, Washington, 
U.C. 

[Coones (S. F.)] Dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon | as spoken on | Puget 
sound and the northwest, | with | 
original Indian names for pi'ominent 
places I and localities with their mean- 
ings, I historical sketch, etc. | 

Published by | Lowmau & Hanford 
staticmery & jirintiug co., | Seattle, 
Wash. [1891.] 

Cover title : Chinook Dictionary I and | orig- 
inal Indian names | of | western "Washington. 
I [Picture.] | 

Lowman it Hanford | stationery & \ print- 
ing company. [1891.] 

Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pi>. 
[3-4], p. 5 blank, key to pronunciation p. [6], 
numerals p. [7], text pp. 9-38, 24-^. 

Numerals, p. [7]. — Chinook-English diction- 
ary alphabetically arranged, pp. 9-32.— English 
conversation and interrogatories, answered in 
Chinook, pp. 33-34.— Tlie oath, p. 34. 
Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 
Cornell : This word following a title or within 
])ari'ntheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has Iteen seen by the com- 
piler, belonging to the library of that uni- 
versity, Ithaca, N. Y. 
Cox (Ross). Adventures | on the | 
Columbia river, | including | the narra- 
tive of a residence | of six years on the 
western side of | the Rocky mountains, 
1 among | various tribes of Indians | 
hitherto unknown : | together with | a 
journey across the American continent. 
I By Ross Cox. | In two volumes. | 
Vol. I[-II]. I 

London: | Henry Colburu and Rich- 
ard Bentley, | New Burlington street. | 
1831. 

2 vols. : title verso name of printer 1 1. dedi- 
cation verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-ix, intro- 
duction pp. xi-xx, contents of vol. 1 pp. xxi- 
xxiv. text pp. 1-388; title verso name of printer 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



19 



Cox (R. ) — Continuefl. 

I 1. contonls pp. v-viii ; text pp. l-;!0.'!, apiicnilix 
pp. 395-4(10. S'^. 

Niim(M-iil.s 1-12, 20, and ;i .slioit voiiilnilary (7 
words and 3 phrases) in Chiiioidi Jargon, vol. 2, 
p. 134. 

Copies gceii : Astor, Uoston Atlu'iiii-uiii, I'.rit- 
isli Museum. Congress. 

Sarin's Dictionary, no. 17267, mentions a 
"second edition, London, 18.32. 8"^". 

Tlie I (!(>luinl)i;i rivc^r; | or, | .sconos 

iiiid iiilvoiitiire.s | during | a rosidciicu^ 
of six years on tlic western | side of the 
Kocky mountain.^ | anionj;' | various 
tribes of Indians | hitlierto unknown; 
I togctlier witli | a journey ac'ross the 
Anieriean coutiuent. | Hy Koss ('o.\. | 
In two volumes. | Vol. If-II]. | Third 
edition. | 

London : | Henry Col))urn and Kich- 
ard Bentley. | New Burlington street. 
I 1832. 

2 vols.: title verso nanu's of i)rinters 1 1. 
dedieation verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, 
introduction pp. vii-xvi, contents pj). xvii-xx. 
text pp. 1-333; title verso names of printers 1 1. 
contents pp. iii-vi, text pp. 1-350, 8^. 

Linguistic contents as under title next 
above, vol. 2, pp. 117-118. 

Cojneg seen : Greely. 

Adventures | on the | Columlna 

river, | including | the narrative of a 
residence | of six years on tlie western 
side of I the Rocky mountains, | among 
I various tribes of Indians | hitherto 
unknown: | together with | a jonrney 
across the American continent. | By 
Ross Cox. I 

New York : | printed and published 
by J. & J. Harper, 82 Clift'-street. | And 
sold by the priucij^al booksellers 
throughout the United >States. ( 1832. 

Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, intro- 
duction pp. vii-x, contents jtp. xi-xv, text pp. 
25-331, appendix pp. 333-335, S''-\ 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 225-226. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Congress, Harvard, 
Mallet, Pilling. 

Crane (Agnes). The Chinook Jargon. 

In the Brighton Herald, no. 4883, p. 4, 
Brighton, England, July 12, 1890, folio. (Pilling.) 

A review of Hale (H.), Manual of the Oregon 
trade language. It occupies a column and a 
half of the Herald and contains a number «f 
Jargon words with their derivations, a brief 



Crane (A.) — ('ontinned. 

outline of i)lioncti<;s and grammar of the lan- 
guage, and one verse of a song, with English 
translation. 

Curtin (.leremiali). [Words, phrases, 
and sentences in tiie Wasko language.] 

Manuscript, j)]). 77-228, 4^, in tlu! library of 
the Bureau of Klhnology. Recorded at Warm 
Spring, Oregon, in 1884. in a copy of Powell's 
Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages, 
second edition. The Bureau alphabet is used. 

Of the sclu^dules, nos. 1-4, 6-8. 16, 18-29 are 
well filled ; nos. .'>, 10. 12-14, and 17 partially soj 
and nos. 9. II, l."). and 30 have no entries. 

.leremiali Curtin was born h\ Milwaukee, 
Wis., about 1835. He had little ediuation in 
childhood, but at the age of twenty or twenty- 
one prepared himself to enter Phillips Kxeter 
Academy, made, «^xtraordinary progress, and 
soon entered Harvard tJoUoge, whore he was 
graduated in 1803. By this time he had become 
noted among his classmates and acquaintances 
for hi.s wonderful facility asalingiiist. Onleav- 
ing colh^ge he had accjuired a good knowledge 
of French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, 
Roumanian, Dutch. Danish, Swedish, Icelandic, 
Gothic, Oerman, and Kiiinish, besides Greek and 
Latin. He had also made considerable progress 
in Hebrew, Persian, and Sanskrit, and was 
beginning to si)eak Russian. 'Wh>)n Admiral 
Lissofsky's fleet visited this country, in 1864, 
Curtin became acquainted with the officers and 
accompanied the expedition on its return to 
Russia. In St. Petersburg he obtained employ- 
ment as a translator of p(dyglot telegraphic 
dispatches, but he was presently appointed by 
Mr. Seward to the office of secrt-tary of the 
United States legation, and he held this place 
till 1868. During this period he became familiar 
with the P(dish, Bohemian, Lithuanian, 
Lettish, and Hungarian languages, and made a 
beginning in Turkish. From 1868 till 1877 he 
traveled in eastern Europe and in Asia, appar- 
ently in the service of the Russian government. 
In 1873, at the celebration at Prague of the 500th 
anniversary of the liirth of John Huss, he 
deliv(!red the oration, speaking with great elo- 
quence in the Bohemian language. During his 
travels in the Danube country he learned to 
speak Slavonian, Croatian, Servian, and Bulga- 
rian. He lived for some time in the Caucasus, 
where he learned Mingrclian, Abkasian, and 
Armenian. At the beginning of the Riisso- 
Turkish war in 1877, he left the Russian domin- 
ions, and, after a year in London, returned t-) 
his native country. Since then he has been 
studying the languages of the American 
Indians and has made valuable researches 
under the auspices of Maj. -lohn W. Powell and 
the Bureau of Ethnology. He i.s said to bo 
acquainted with more than fifty languages. — 
Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 



20 



BIBLIOGKAFHY OF THE 



D. 



Daa (Ludwig Kristonson). On the affin- j 
ities between the languages of the 
northern tribes of the ohl and new con- 
tinents. By Lewis Kr. Daa, Esq., of 
Christiania, Norway. (Read December 
the 20th.) 

In Philological Soc. [of Louilou] Trans. 1856, 
pp. 251-294, London [1857], 8'\ (Congress.) 

Comparative tables showing affinities be- 
tween Asiatic and American languages, pp. 
264-285. contain words Irom many Xorth Amer- 
ican languages, among them a few of the 
Tschinut. 
Dawson {Dr. George Mercer). See 
Tolniie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M. ) 

George Mercer Dawson was Ijorn at Pictou, 
Nova Scotia, .\ugust 1, 1849, and is the eldest son 
of Sir "William Dawson, principal of McGill 
University, Montreal. He was educated at 
M.Gill College and the Royal School of Mines; 
held the Duke of Corn wall's scholarship, given 
by the Prince of Wales; and took the Edward 
Forbes medal in paheontology and the Mur- 
chison medal in geology. He was appointed 
geologist and naturalist to HerMajesty's North 
American Boundary Commission in 1873, and 
atthecloseof theconmiission's work, in 1875, he 
published a report under the title of " (Jeology 
and Resources of tlie Forty-ninth Parallel.' In 
July, 1875, he received an appointment on the 
geological survey of Canada. From 1875 to 1879 
he was occupied in the geological survey and 
exploration of British Columbia, and subse- 
quently engaged in simihir work both in the 
Northwest Territory and British Columbia. Dr. 
Dawson is the author of numerous papers on 
geology, natural history, and ethnology, pub- 
lished in the Canadian Naturalist, Quarterly 
Journalof the Geological Society, Transactions 
of the Royal Society of Canada, etc. He was in 
1887 selected to take charge of the Yukon expe- 
dition. 

Definitio Dogmatis . . . Jargon 
Tchinook. See Detners (M.l 

De Horsey (Lieut. Algernon Frederick 
Rons). See Montgomerie (J. E.) and 
De Horsey (A. F. R.) 

[Demers {Bishop Modeste).] Definitio 
Dogmatis Immaculati© Conceptionis 
BeatissimsB Virgiuis Mariie | a SS. D. 
N. Pio PP. IX. 

Second heading : Eadoni in earn Lin- 
guani translata f[u;e vulgo Jargon 
Tchinook | dicitur, (iu;eque obtinet in 
tota Oregonensi Provincia; | anctore 
Episcopo Vanconverien.si.s Insuhe. 

Colophon : Tyjiis JoanuisMariieShea, 
Neo Eboracensis. [I860?] 

Notitlepage, headingsonly ; text 1 leaf verso 
blank. 12°. 



Demers (M.) — Continued. 

The dogma is first given in Latin, followed 
by the translation into the Chinook Jargon. 
Cojiics seen : Georgetown. Pilling. 

Blanchet (F. N.) and St. Onge (L. 

N.) J. M. J. I Chinook [Jargon] | 
Dictionary, Catechism. | prayers and 
liymns. | Composed in 1838 & 1830 by 
I rt, rev. Mode.ste Demers. | Revi.siHl, 
corrected and com}ih'ted. | in 1867 by 
I most rev. P\ N. Blanchet. 1 Withmod- 
ifications and additions by | Rev. L. N. 
St. Onge Missionary | among the Yaka- 
mas and other Indian Tribes. | 

Montreal. | 1871. 

Cover title : The | missionary's companion | 
on the I Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | [Three lines 
of s<Tipture — Mat. xsiii. 19.] 

Cover title, frontispiece verso blank 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. plate 1 1. iireface (by Father 
St. Onge. unsigned) pp. 7-9. text iip. 9-65. ad- 
denda p. 66, table [of contents] p. 67, errata j). 
68. 16^. 

Short account of the origin of the Cliinook 
Jargon.pp. 7-8.— Rules of the language, pp. 9- 
10.— Of the nouns, pp. 11-12.— Orthography, p. 
12. — Chinook [Jargon] dictionary (pp. 1.j-.'!2) in 
double columns, underthe following heads, each 
ali>habetically arranged by Jargon words: 
Nouns, pp. l'-5-22; Adjectives, pp. 23-25; Num- 
bers, pp. 25-26 ; Pronouns, p. 26 ; Verbs, pp. 26- 
29; Adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and 
interjections, pp. 30-31.— Appendix, pp. 31-32.— 
The Christian prayers in Chinook [Jargon], 
pp. 33-38. — Hymns (in Jargon with French 
headings), pp. 39-16. — Catechism (in Jargon 
witli English headings), pp. 47-65.— Addenda [a 
short vocabulary], p. 66. 

'• The Chinook Jargon was invented by the 
Hudson Bay Company traders, who were 
mostly Frencli Canadians. Having to trade with 
the numerous tribes inhabiting the countries 
west of the Rocky Mountains, it was neces.sary 
j to have a language under.-^tood by .ill. Hence, 
the idea of composing the Chinook Jargon. 
Fort Vancouver being the principal post, the 
tnidersof the twenty-nine forts belonging to 
tl\c coiiipany, on the western slope, and the 
Indians from every part of that immen.se 
country, had to come to Vancouver for the 
trading season. They used to learn the Chinook 
and then teach it to others. In this manner it 
became universally known. 

'■ The two first missionaries to Oregon, Rev. 
F.N. Blanchet, V.G.. and his worthy compan- 
iim. Rev. Mod. Demers. arrived from Canada to 
Vancouver on the 24th of November, 1838. They 
had to instruct numerous tribes of Indians, 
•ind the wives and cliildren of the whites, who 
spoke only the Chinook. The two missionaries 
set to work to learn it, and in a few weeks 
Father Demers had mastered it and began to 
preach 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



21 



Demers (M.) — Continued. 

" lit'. coiupDsi'il ii vocaUiiliiry uiiicli was very 
useful t<> otlii^r iiiissiouarios. lie coiupit.st-il sev- 
eral cantieles, whicli the Indiiiiis Iciirued auil 
Many Willi lastt^ ami ilelitiht. lie alsi) translated 
all tlie('hi-iijtiau prayers in the same language. 

•' Sueli is thti xrigin «>(' the Chinook . I argon, 
which euahletl the twolirst missionaries in the 
ettuntry to do a great deal of good anung the 
Indians and halt'hriMids. The invt'niion id' the 
Catholie Ladder, in April, 18:i'.», by Very Rev. 
lUauehet, aud its [oral] explanation iutJhinooU, 
hail a marvelous suioess and gave the {'atholie 
missionaries agreat superiority ami preponder- 
anee miudi envied by the missiouaries belong- 
ing to other denominations. 

■ Father Ueniers, afterwards Hishop of \'an 
eonvers Island, has now gone to enjoy the 
reward of his great labours and apostolie zeal. 
It would be too bad to lose his Dictionary and 
other (Jhiuook works. So, Archbishop Wan- 
chet. who has himself made a eompendium of 
the Christian doi-trine in the same language, has 
had the good inspiration to get the whole pub- 
lished with his corrections aud additions." — 
I'refaee by Father St. Oiuje. 

(Joncerniug the preparation and publication 
of this work, Father St. Onge writes me as fol- 
lows : 

■ liisbop Demers's littlf book, which was 
corrected by Archbishop HIanchet, was never 
printed. The archbishop gave nie the manu- 
sci'ipt, which I arranged. I made the spelling 
uniform and overhauled it completely. I was 
in the hospital at Montreal at the time, where 
my bishop had sent me because of ill health. 
When 1 got a little stronger, time being hard 
to pass, I procured a small press, went to work 
aud printed this Chinook book and the Yakania 
catechism. It was hard work for an invalid, 
and I made the dictionary as short as i)os8ibIi'. 

'• 'I'he ('atholic Ladder, of which 1 send you 
a copy, was, as you suggest, published by 
Father Lacomhe; but it is only an embellished 
edition of the Ladder invented by Archbishop 
Klanchet in April, 1839. The archbishop 
never printed any Chinook explanation of it, 
and in my preface to the Chinook Dictionary 
the word oral should have lieeu included. 

Copies seen : Eames, I'illiiig, Trumbull, 
Wellesley. 

Alodeste Demers, E. C. bishop, boin in Can- 
ada, died in Vancouver's Islaiul in 1871. He 
went to the Northwest Territory in 1838 and 
was engaged in missionary duty among the 
Indian!» until 1847, when he was consecrated 
bishop of Vancouver's Island. — Appleton's 
Vycloji. of Am. Biog. 

Dickinson (— ). See Everette (\V. E.) 

Dictionary | of | Indian Tongues | con- 
taining most of the words und tenu.s | 
used in the | Tsinipsean, Hydab, & 
Chinook, ' with their lueaning or equiv- 
alent I in the | Euglisii Language. | 



Dictionary — ( 'ontinned. 

l*ul>iished by Hii)beu &. Carswell, | 
Vietoria, V. I. | Printed at the office of 
tb<^ Daily Chronirde, | (Joverinnent 
Street. | 1862. (^) 

Title 1 I. text l>p. 1-l.j, IC^. 

Ilydah vocabulary, pp. 1-3. — Tsinipsean 
vocabulary, grammatic notes and phrases, \>\i. 
3-10. — Chinook .Jargon, pp. 11-1.">. 

Title from Dr. Fran/, I'.oas from copy in his 
posscs.^iou. 

Dictionary | ol" | Indian tongues, | con- 
taining I Most of the Words and 'IVnns 
I used in the | Tsliimjisean, Ilydah, and 
Chinook, witli their meaning or eijniv- 
aient | in the | English laugnage. | 

Published by | Hibbeu A Carswell, 
I Victoria, V. 1. | Printrd at the Brit- 
ish colonist office. | ISO."). 

Cover title verso advertisement, no inside 
title, text pp. 1-14, sq. l(i '. 

Chinook Jargon-English vocabulary, double 
columns, i>p. 1—1. — Chinook examples (phrases 
and sentences), p. .").^ Hydah-Knglish vocabu- 
lary, double columns, \i\k 0-7. — Knglish-Tshim- 
shean [sic\ vocabulary, verbal conjugations, 
])hrases and sentences, double columns, pp. 8- 
14. 

Copies seen : Astor, Fames. 

Dictionary. A | dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade 
Language, | Of thf Nortli Pacific Coast. 
I [Picture of an Indian.] | 

Published by T.N. Hibben &. Co., | 
Victoria, B. C. | Colonist iirint — Vic- 
toria, B.C. [1871f] 

Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 
1-29, advertisement on back cover, 8- . 

Chinook-English, pp. 1-18.— Engli.sh-Chinook, 
pp. 19-29. — Lord's prayer in .Jargon with inter- 
linear English translation, p. 29. 

Copies seen : Kancrofl. Cornell, Fames, Trum- 
bull, Wellesley. 

For the most part a reprint, with omissions, of 
Gribbs (C!.), Dictionary of the Chimiok .Jargon. 

Keprinted in: British Columbia; Report of 
the Hon. H. L. Langvein, ('. B. Ministerof Pub- 
lic Works, pp. 161-182, Ottawa, 1872, 8^. 
((ieorgctown.) 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook .Jargon, | 
or, I Indian Trade Language | of the 
I mnth Pacific coast. | 

Victoria, B. C. : | T. N. Ilibbeu & 
CO., ])ublishei'8, | Goverinnt^nt street. 
[1877 f] 

Cover title : Dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the 
I north PaciCc coast. | [Picture.] | 

Victoria, B. C. : | Published by T. X. Hibben 
& Co.. I Government Street. [1877?] 



22 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Dictionary — Coiitimifd. 

Ciivertitle, title verso lopyiight notice (1877) 
ami uame of printer 1 1. text pp. 5-Xi, 8°. 

Part I. Chiuook-Kuglisli, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 5-23.— Part 11. English Chinook, 
double column.'!, alphabetically arranged, pp. 
23-33. — Lord's i)rayer in Jargon, with inter- 
linear English translation, p. 33. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

Dictionary | of tho | Chinook Jargon, | 
or I Indian Tradi- Langnagt' | of the | 
north Pacilic coast. | 

Victoria, B. C. | T.N. Hibben & Co., 
publishers, I Government Street. | 1883. 

Cover title: New Edition. | Dictionary | of 
the I Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Lan- 
guage I of the I north Pacific coast. | [Pic- 
ture.] I 

Victoria. B. C. : | Published by T. N. Hibben 
& Co. I Government street. [1883.] 

Cover title, title verso copyright notice (1877) 
and name of ]irinter 1 1. text pp. 5-35, 8^. 

Parti. Chinook Engli.sh. pp. 5-24 — Part II. 
English Chinook, pp. 24-34. — Lord's prayer 
in Jai'gon with English interlinear translation, 
p. 35. 

Ciipies ieen : Pilling. 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or I Indian Trade Language | of the | 
north Pacilic coast. | 

Victoria, B. C. | T. N. Hibbeu & eo., 
Publishers, ; Government Street. | 1887. 

<;'oiYC fi7(?: NewEditi(ni. | Dictionary | of the 
I Chinook Jargon, | or 1 Indian Trade Language 
I of the I north Pacilic coast. 1 [Picture.] | 

Victoria, 15. C. : | Published by T. N. Hibben 
&. Co. I Government street. [1887.] 

Cover title verso advertisement, title verso 
copyright notice (1887) a7id name of printer 1 1. 
text pp. 3-33, 8^. 

Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 3-21.— Part II. English-Chinook, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 22-32. — Lord's 
prayer in Jargon with interlinear English 
translation, p. 33. 

Copies seen ; Ford. 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or I Indian Trade Language | of the | 
north Pacilic coast. | 

Victoria, B. C. | B. C. stationery co., 
Publishers, | Government Street, 1887. 

Cover title: Dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Langu.age | of the 
I north Pacific coast. | New edition. | 

B. C. stationery co.. Publishers, | Govern- 
ment Street, | Victoria, B. C. | 1887. 

Cover title, title verso copyright notice (1877, 
by T. N. Hibben) and name of printer 1 I. text 
pp. 3-33, 8^. 

Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 3-21. — Part II. English-Chinook, 
double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 



Dictionary — Continued. 

22-32. — Lord's prayer in Jargon, with inter- 
linear English translation, p. 33. 
Cojiies seen : Pilling. 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or I Indian Trade Lauguage, | of the | 
north Pacific toast. | [Vignette.] | 

Victoria. B. C. | T. N. Hil)ben [&] 
CO., Publishers. | Government Street, | 
1889. 

Cover title: New Edition. | Dictionary | of 
the I Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Lan- 
guage I of the I north Pacific coast. ] [Picture.] | 

Victoria, B. C. \ Published by T. N. Hibbeu 
& CO. I Government street. [1889.] 

Cover title, title verso copyright (1877) and 
name of printer 1 1. text pp. 3-32, 8'^. 

Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 3-21.— Part II. English-Chinook, 
alplialietically arranged, double columns, pp. 
21-32.— Lord's prayer in Jargon with interlin- 
ear English translation, p. 32. 

Copies seen : Pilling, 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | 
or I Indian trade language | now in 
general use on | the north-west coast. 
I Adapted for general business. | 

Olympia. W. T. | T. G. Lowe & co., 
pulilishers and stationers. | 1873. | 
Printed at the Courier job rooms, 
Olympia. W. T. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-32, 12^. 
Part I. Chinook-English.pp. 1-20.— Part II. 
English-Chinook, pp. 21-32. 
Copies seen : Bancroft. 
Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 

(1868-1879.) See Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 

(1891.) See Coones (S. F.) 
Dictionary of the Chinook .Jargon. 

(1S8L'-1887.) See Gill (J. K.) 
Dictionary of the Chinook . . . trade 
lauguage. See Probsch (T. W.) 



Dictionary : 




Chinook 


See Boas (F.) 


Chinook 


Gibbs (G.) 


'• Jargon 


(3d ed. 185C) Blauchet (F. N.) 


" Jargon 


(3d ed. 18G2 !) Blauchet (F. N.) 


" Jargon 


(4th ed. 1868) Blanchet (F. N.) 


" Jargon 


(Cth ed. 1873?) Blanchet (F. N.) 


" Jargon 


(6th ed. 1878) Blandiet (F. N.) 


" .Jargon 


(7th ed. 1879) Blanchet (F. N.) 


" Jargon 


(Mss. 1891) Bulmer(T. S.) 


•' Jargon 


(1891) Coones (S. F.) 


• • Jargon 


(1871) Demers(M.)f<aJ 


•' Jargon 


(1862) Dictionary. 


'• .Jargon 


(b^^C'i) Dictionary. 


" Jargon 


(1871?) Dictionary. 


• Jargon 


(1873) Dictionary. 


■' .Jargon 


(1877?) Dictionary. 



rilTXOOKAN LAN(;UAGES. 



23 



Dictionary — CJoiitiiiiud. 

Cliinoolv -Continued. 

" Jargon {iHH'.i) Dictionaiy. 

" Jargon (I8K7) I)i<tionai\ . 

" Jargon (1887) Dictionary. 

" Jargon (1889) Dictionary. 

" Jargon (1880) Durieud'.) 

■ Jargon (18!)2) Duritjii (P.) 

• J.irgon (Mss. 189:i) KcIIm (M.) 

■ Jargon (Mss. 1884) Kverottc (\V. K.) 
'• Jargon (Wash., 180:!) Cihl.H (O.t 

• Jargon (N. Y., 1863,8°) Gibbw (G.) 
■■ Jargon (N. Y., 186:i,4°) (iibbs (G.) 
" Jargon (9tb i-.l. 1882) 
•' Jargon (lOth ed. 1884) 
" Jargon (lltli ed. 1887) 

• Jargon (12th ed. 1889) 

• Jargon (i:!th ed. 1891) 



Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
.r argon 
Jargon 
Jariron 



(1880) 
(18,58) 
(1890) 
(1872) 
(1886) 
(1892) 
(1853) 
(1888) 
{'Sins. 189:i) 
(1865) 
(1889) 
(1860) 



Gill (J. K.) 
(aUtJ. K.) 
Gill (J. K.) 
GilKJ.K.) 
Gill (J. K.) 
Good (J. H.) 
(luide. 
flale(n.) 
Langvein (H. L.) 
LeJeuue(J.M.R.) 
LeJeune(J. M. K.) 
Lionnet (— ) 
Probsdi (T. W.) 
St. Onge (L. X.) 
Stuart (G.) 
Tate (CM.) 
Vocabulary. 



Domeiiech (.Ji<fc«;'Emauuel Henri Dicii- 
(I011116). Seven years' residence | in the 
f>reat deserts of North America hy the 
I abbeEm. Domenecli | Apostolical Mi.s- 
sionary : Canon of Montpellier : Mem- 
ber of tlie Pontifical Academy Tiberina, 
I and of the Geooraphical and Ethno- 
graphical Societies of France, &c. | 
Illustrated with fifty-eight woodcuts by 
A. Joliet, three plates of ancient Indian 
music, and a map showing the actual 
situation of | the Indian tribes and the 
country described by the author. | In 
Two Volumes | Vol.I[-II]. | 

Loudon I Longman, Green, Longman, 
and Roberts | 18(50 | The riglit of trans- 
lation is reserved. 

2 vol.s. : lialf-title verso names of printers 1 1. 
title ver.so blank 1 1. dedication pp. v-vi, preface 
pp. vii-xiii. content.s pp. xv-xxi. list of illus- 
trations pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 1^45; half-title 
verso names of printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. contents ])i). v-xii. text p]i. 1-46.^, colophon 
p. [400], map, jtlates, 8°. 

List of Indian tribes of North America, vol. 
1, pp. 44U-445.— Vocabularies, etc. vol. 2. pj). 104- 
189, contain 84 words of the Cliinook. 

C'opien seen : Astor, Boston Athenieum, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Watkinson. 

At the Field sale a copy, no. 550, brought .$2.37, 
aud at the Pinart sale, no. 328, fr. Clarke & 
CO. 1880, no. 5415. price a copy $5. 



Domenech (E. II. 1).) — Continued. 

I':iiianiiel Henri Dieudonne Donienecli, French 
antlior, was born in Lyons. France, Xovember4, 
1825; (lied in Fran<;e in .lune. 1886. He became 
a priest in the iJoman Catholic church, and was 
sent as a missionary to Texas and Mexico. Dur- 
ing Maximilian's residence in America, IJonie- 
nech acted as private cliaplain to the emi>pror, 
and lie was also .almoner to the French army 
dui'ingits occupation of ^Mexico. On his return 
to France he was miuh' lionorary canon of Mont- 
pellier. His"Mauuscrit pictograpliiijueamferi- 
cain. jirecede d'une notice sur I'ideographiedes 
Peaux Kouges'' (1800) was published by the 
Frencli governnu-iit. with a facsimile of a man- 
uscrijit in tlie library of the Paris arsenal, 
relating, as lie claimed, to the American Indians; 
but tlie German orientalist, Julius Petzholdt, 
declared that it consisted only of scribbling and 
incoherent illustrations of a local (ierman dia- 
lect. Donienecli maintained the authenticity of 
the manuscript in a pamphlet entitled " La 
verite sur le livre des sauvages " (1801), which 
drew forth a rejdy from Pet zhohlt. translated 
into French under the title of "Le livre des 
sauvages an point de yue de la civilisation 
fran9aise'' (I'russels, 1861). During the Latter 
part of his lifeJie produced several works per- 
taining to religion and ancient history. — Apple- 
toivs Cyclop, of Aui. Biog. 

Douglass (iS'ir James). Private papers | 
of Sir James Douglass. | Second series. 

Manuscript, pi>. 1-36, folio ; in the Bancroft 
Library. San Francisco, Cal. 

Contains lists of native tribes from Puget 
Sound northward to Cross Sound, Alaska, 
with traders' and native tribal names, grouped 
according to languages, pp. 7-33. Between pp. 
33 and 34 are 14 blank jjages. 

This manuscript was copied from the orig- 
inal papers in Sir James's possession : in Indian 
names the copyist has nnivei'sally substituted 
an initial It for the initial K. 

Drake (Samuel Gardner). The | Aborig- 
inal races | of | North America; | com- 
prising I biographical sketches of emi- 
nent individuals. | and | an historical 
account of the difterent tribes, | from 
I the first discovery of the continent | 
to I the present period | with a disser- 
tation on their | Origin, Antiquities, 
Manners and Customs. | illustrative 
narratives aud anecdotes, | and a | 
copious analytical iudi-x | by Samuel 
G.Drake. Fifteenth edition, | revised, 
with valuable additions. | by Prof. II. 
L.Williams. | [Quotation, six lines.] | 
New York. | Hurst & company, pub- 
lisliers. | 122 Nassau Street. [1882.] 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. 3^, 
(■ontents pp. 5-8, Indian tribes and nations pp. 



24 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Drake (>S. G. ) — Coutiiiued. 

9-16, half-title vei'so blank 1 1. text pp. 19-767, 
index pp. 768-787,8='. 

G-atschet (A. S.), Indian language.s of the 
J'aciiic States, pp. 748-763. 

Copies geen : A.stor, Congress, ^N'i.^courtiii 
Historical Society. 

Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6377, price a copy $3. 

Duflot de Mofras (Eugene). Exploration 
I (in territoire | de I'Oregou, | (lea Cali- 
foinies | et de la mer Vermeille, | ex6- 
cntee pendant les aun^es 1840, 1841 et 
1842, I par | M. Duflot de Mofras, | At- 
tacb6 h la legation de France a Mexico ; 
I onvrageimbli^par ordreduroi, | .sous 
les auspices de M. le mai't^clial Soult, 
due de Dalmatie, ' President du ( 'ouweil, 
I et de M. le ministre ties aftaires 
6ti-augferes. Tome premier [-second]. | 

Paris, I Arthus Bertrand, ^diteur, | 
libraire de la .Soci6t^ de g(5ographie, | 
Rne Hautefeuille, n" 23. | 1844. 

2 vols. : frontispiece 1 1. half-title verso names 
of printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. avant-propos pp. vii-xii, aver- 
tissenient verso note 1 l.nota verso blank 1 1. 
text pp. 1-518, table des chapitres pp. 519-521, 
table des cartes pp. 523-524; half-title verso 
names of printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 1-500, table des chapitres pi>. 501-504, table 
descartespp. 505-50G, tablealphabetiqne etana- 
lytique des matieres pp. 507-514, 8°. atlas folio. 

Chapitre xiii, Philologie, diversites de lan- 
gues, etc. (vol. 2. pp. 387-484), includes the 
Lord's prayer in langue Tchinouk dii Kio Co- 
lombia, p. 390 ; numerals 1-10 of the Tchinooks, 
p. 401 . 

Copies seen : Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
nienni, British Museum, Congress, Geological 
Survey. 

Dufosse (E.) Americana | Catalogue de 
livres | velatifs a I'Am^rique | Europe, 
Asie, Afri(j^ue | etOc^anie | [&c.thirty- 
fonr lines] | 

Librairie ancienne et moderne de E. 
Dnfoss(3 ( 27, rue Gut^negaud, 27 | pres 
le Pont-ueuf | Paris [1887] 

Cover title as above, no inside title, table des 
divisions 1 1. text pp. 175-422, 8°. 

Contains, passim, titles of a few works 
relating to the Chinookan languages. 

Copies seen : Eanies, Pilling. 

This series of catalogues was begun in 1876. 
Dunbar: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. John B. Dunbar, 
Bloomfleld, N. J., which is now dispersed. 

Duncan (David). American races. Com- 
piled and abstracted by Professor Dun- 
can, M. A. 



Duncan (D.) — Continued. 

Forms Part 6 of Spencer (H.), Descriptive 
sociology, London, 1878, folio. (Congress.) 

Under the heading " Language," pp. 40-12, 
there are given comments and extracts from 
various iiuthors upon native tribes, including 
examples of the Chinook, p. 42. 

Some copies have the imprint : New York, D. 
Appleton &. CO. [n. d.] (Powell.) 

Dunn (Jobu). History | of | tbe Oregon 
territory | and Britisb North-American 
I fur trade ; | with | an account | of the 
habits and customs of the principal 
native | tribes on the northern conti- 
nent. I By John Dunn, | late of the 
Hudson's bay company; | eight years 
a resident in the | country. | 

Limdou : | Edwards and Hughes, Ave 
Maria lane. | 1844. 

Title ver.so name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-359, map, 
8°. 

A vocabulary (32 words and 9 phrases) of the 
language of the Chinook tribe, p. 359. 

Copies seen .- Britisli Museum, Congress. 

There is an edition of this work : Pliiladel- 
phia, Zeiber & co , 1845, whicli does not contain 
the vocabulary. (Boston Athenaeum, British 
Museum. Harvard.) 

Reprinted, omitting the linguistics, in 
Smith's Weekly Volume, vol. 1, pp. 382-416, 
Philadelphia, 1845, 4°. (Mallet.) 

History | of | the Oregon territory | 

and British North- American j fur trade ; 
I with I an account | of the habits and 
customs of the principal luitive | tribes 
on the northern continent. | By John 
Dunn, I late of the Hudson bay com- 
p.any, | eight years a resident in the 
country. | Second edition. | 

London: | Edwards and Hughe.s,Ave- 
Maria lane. | 184G. 

Title verso name of printer 1 1. jireface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-viii. text pp. 1-359, map, 
8°. 

Liugiiistiir contents asunder title next above, 
p. 359. 

Copies seen : Astor. 

[Durieu {Bishop Paul).] Bible history 
I containing the most | remarkable 
events | of the | old and new testa- 
ment. I To which is added a compen- 
dium of I church history. | For the use 
of the Catholic schools | in the United 
States. I By | right rev. Richard Gil- 
mour, D. D., | Bishop of Cleveland. 
[Translated into tbe Chinook Jargon 
by right rev. Paul Durieu, Bishop of 
British Columbia.] | [Vignette.] | 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAOKft. 



25 



Durieu (P.) — Continued. 

New- York, Ciucinuati, ;in<l Chiciigo: 
I Hpuzijfcr brothers, | printers to the 
holy iipostolic see. [n. <1.] [Kiinih)opH, 
B.C.: 1893.] 

Frontisiiieoe verso 1. 1 recto blank, title verso 
letter from INijie LeoXIlI uud eopyrifilit notice 
(1809) 1 1. " iipiirobatioiis to JJi.shoji (iiliuoiir's 
bible liistory " :i 11. preliiee \)p. v-vi, text in 
Knglisli, p)). 7-.')6+, in Chinook J.irgon, steno- 
o-rapliic cliaractirs, pp. 1-00+, 12^. In course 
ot" )mblicafion, anil will i-ontain liSO jjages in 
Knglisli and about 400 in Jargon. 

This work is an outcome ot' tlie lailerprise 
of Father L<- Jeune, of Kamlooiis. I'.ritisli 
( 'iduiiibin, wild lias t rauscribed Hi.sliop Durieii'.s 
Jai-gon translation of the bilile history into the 
characters adopted by him for teaching his 
Indian charges to f eart and write ; a description 
of whieli will be found in this bibliography 
under his name. Ilis notes have been reiiro- 
duced by him, with the aid of tlie mimeograph, 
on sheets the size of those in the edition of tln^ 
bible history in English, with which they have 
been iuterleaveil. When finished it will be 
issued in an edition of 200, that number of 
copies of the edition in English having been 
furnished by Fatlier St. Onge, of Troy, X. Y. 
dopies Kccn : Pilling. 

I have in my library a copy of each of two 
editions of a -'Chinook Vocabulary," with 
iraprintsof 1886and 1892, on the respective title 
pages of which ajipears the name of Hishop 
Durieu. These I had placed under his name, 



Durieu (P.) — Continued. 

but in a letter to me, dated November 10, 1892, 
the bishop modestly disclaims their authorship, 
wlii(ii lie attributes to Father .T. M. K. 
Ia- .leiine, under whose name, with aci'ompa 
nyiiig explanations, (he\ uill 1m- fmind in tliis 
bibliogiaphy. 

See Le Jeune (.1. M. U.) 

The Rev. A. (i. Morice, of Stuart s Lake 
Mission, British (/olumbia, a famous Athapas- 
can scholar, has kindly furnished met lie fol- 
lowing brief account of this writer: 

" liishop I'aiil Durieu was born at St. I'al-de- 
Mous, in thiMliocese of I'uy, France, Di-cember 
:!, 18:!0. .Vfter his couise in classics he entered 
the novitiate of the Oblates at Xotre Dame de 
ro/.ier in 1847 and made his religious jirofession 
in 1849. lie was ordained jiriest at Marseilles 
March 11, 18.')4, and was sent to the missions of 
Oregon, where he occupied, siu-cessively, sev- 
eral posts. At the breaking out of the rebellion 
among the Yakania Indians he had to leave for 
the Jesuit mission at Sjiokane. He was after- 
wards sent to Victoria and then to Okanagan 
by bis superiors. Thence he was sent as 
superiorof the Fort Rupert Mission, and when, 
on June 2, 187">, lie was a])iiointed coadjutor 
bishop of British Columbia, In- was superiorof 
St. Charles House at New Westminster. Ou 
June 3, 1890, he succeeded Bishop L. Y. D'Her- 
bainez as vicar apostolii' of British C<dumbia. 

" He understands but does not speak several 
Salishan dialects, and he is especially noted for 
his un([ualitied su(!ce-is among the Indians." 



E. 



Eames: This word followingatitleor within par- 
entheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Wilberforce Emihi^s. 
New York City. 

Eells: This word following a title or within jiari'U- 
theses after a note indiiates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been loaned to me for 
collation and description by Rev. Myron Ki'lls. 
Union City, Mason County, Washington. 

Eells (/iVr. Myrou). How languages grow. 

In the Advance, Marcli 2:') and July 8, lH7r., 
Cliicago, 187.'j, folio. ( ) 

Relates wholly to the ('hinook Jargon. 
Title and note furnished by Mr. Eells. 

Art. IV. The Twau.i Indians of the 

Skokomish reservation. Hy Rev. M. 
Ktdhs, Mis.sionary among these Indian.s. 

In Hayden(F. V.>, Bulletin, vol. '.i, pp. r>7~114, 
Washington, 1877, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Four songs in Chinook, with English trans 
latious, pp. 91-92. 

Issued .separately with cover title as follows : 

Axithoi's edition. | Department of 

the interior. | United States geological 



Eells (M.) — Continued. 

and geographical .survey. | F. V. Hay- 
den, U. S. (Jeologist-in-Charge. | The | 
Twana ludian.s | of the | Skokomish 
reservation in Washington territory. | 
By I rev. M. Eells, | missionary among 
these Indians. | Extracted from the 
l)ulletiu of the survey, Vol. Ill, No. 1. ( 

Washington, April 9. 1877. 

Cover title as alxive. no inside title, text jip. 
,57-114. 8^. 

Linguistic contents .as under title nextabove. 

Copies seen: Brinton, Eames, National 
Museum, Pilling. 

Hymns | in the | Chinook Jargon 

Language | com})iled l>y | rev. M. 
Eels[.>((c], I Missionary of the American 
Missionary As.sociation. | [Vignette.] | 

Portland. Oregon : | puhlishinghouse 
(.f Geo. H. Himes. | 1878. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
copyright notice (1878) 1 1. note p. 3, text pp. 4- 
30. sq. 16°. 

Hymns (alternate pages Jargon, with Eng- 
lish headings, and English translation), pp. 4- 



26 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Eells 0[.) — Contiimotl. 

■J7. — I.onVs praycv, with interlinear Knsjlisli 
trauslatiou, pji. 'JS-'J!>.— lilossini; before meals, 
with interlinear Kuglish translation, p. 30. 

Co/tu-s si-i'ii : Uiiubar, Eanies. (reorgetown, 
IMllMisr.Wellesley. 

Hymns | in the | liiiii()ok-f-.Taroon-|- 

l.auiruaije I ooiupilfd by | ivv. if. 
Et'lls I Mi.-<.-<iou:iryot'the Aiiiorioan Mis- 
sionary Association. Sooond edition. | 
Revised and Enlarged. | 

Portland. Oregon : | Davitl Steel, sni'- 
eessor to Himes the printer, | 169-171 
Second Street, | 1X89. 

Covertitle as above vei-so note, title as above 
verso oopyriglit notice (IST8 and lv>^89) 1 1. note 
p. S, text pp. 4-10. .s<i. lC-\ 

Hymns (alternate pages Jargon, with Eng- 
lish headings ami English translation), pp. 4- 
:il.— Hymn in tlie Twana or Skokomish lan- 
guage, p. ;il!: English translation, p. ;i3. — Hymn 
in the (."lallam language, p. :U: Englisli trans- 
lation, p. ;!.■>. — Hymn in the Xisiiually language, 
p. oO: Euglish translation, p. ;'>7.— Medley in 
four languages (Jargon. Skokomish. Clallam, 
and Euglish). p. ;{6; English translation. \>. 37. — 
Lord's prayer in .largou, with int*'rlinear Eug- 
lish translation, pp. 3S-X9. ^Blessing before 
meals, in Jargon, with interlinear Euglish 
ti-an.slation, p. 40. 

Copifs seen : Eames. Pilling, Wellesley. 

The Twana langnage of AVashingtou 

territory. By rev. M. Eells. 

In -Vmeriean Antiquarian, vol. 3. pp. 296-303. 
Oliieago. It^SO-lj*;?!. 8"\ (Bnivau of Ethnology.) 

A graminatie treatise upon several Indian 
languages of Washington Territory, among 
them the fhinook Jargon, p. 303. 
The Chinook Jargon. 

In the Seattle A\'eekly Post-Intelligencer, 
vol. 1. no. ."vj. p. 4, column S, Seattle, AYashingtou 
Ty.. September 29. 1882. (Pilling.) 

Explains the origin of "that miserable 
Cliinook," defends it as a useful intertribal 
language and for intei-eonrse between the 
Indians and white men. gives the derivation of 
sevenil wonls of the language and some gram- 
mat io notes. 

History of | Indian missions | on the 

Paoitie coast. ( Oregon. Washington 
and Idaho. | By | rev. Myron Eells. | 
Missionary of the American Missionary 
Association. | With | an introduction 
I by I rev. G. H. Atkinson. D.D. | 

Philadelphia : the American Sunday- 
school nnion. | 1122 Ohestnnt Street. | 
10 Hilile honse, New York. [1882.] 

Frontispiece, title vei-so copyright (1882) 11. 
dedication vei-so blank I 1. contents pp. v-vi. 
intriHluciion by ('.. H. Atkinson pp. vii-xi. pref- 
ace (dated iVtobiT ISSJi jio. xiii-xvi, text i>p. 
17 270. 12^\ 



Eells (^^[."i — C'ontiimed. 

t'hai))er v. Literature, science, education 
morals, and religion (pp. 202-226). contains a 
short list of books, papers, and manuscripts 
ivlating to the Indians of the nnrthwest coast, 
among them the Cliinook and Ohinoidi Jargon, 
pp. 203-207, 209-211. 

Cojtit'n si'i'i): Congress. Pilling. 

Ten years | of | missionary Avork | 

among the Indians | at | Skokomish, 
Wa.shington territory. | 1874-1884. | Hy 
Rev. M. Eells. | Missionary of the 
American ilissionarv Association. | 

Boston: | Congregational Snnday- 
School Publishing Society, | Congrega- 
tional hon.se. I Corner Beacou and^om- 
erset Streets. [1886.] 

Half-title (Ten years at Skokomish) verso 
blank I 1. frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyi-ight 
(1880) and names of printers 1 1. preface 1 i. 
iledication verso note 1 1. content-s pp. vii-x. 
introduction pp. U-13. text pp. 15-271, 12~^. 

Hymn (three verses) in Chintxik Jargon, 
with Euglish tnmslation. pp. 248-249. — Speci- 
men lines of a Jargon hymn. pp. 253-254. 

<\>l>ii't: st'fii : Congress, Pilling. 

Indians of Puget Sound. (Sixth 

paper.) Measuring and valuing. 

In American Antiquarian, vol. 10. p. 174-178, 
Chicago. 1888, 8=. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 

Xunjerals, and remarks concerning the 
niuueral syst«>m of quiti' a number of the lan- 
guages of Washington Territory, among them 
the Chinook. 

The precetling articles of the series, all of 
which appeared in the American Antiqu.arian. 
contain no linguistic material. It was tlie 
intention of the editor of the Antiquarian, 
when the series should be tiuishcd, to issue 
them in book form. So far as they were 
printed in the magazine they were ivpaged and 
perhaps a numl)er of signatures struck otl". 
The sixth paper, for instance, titled above. I 
have in my possession, paged 44—18. 

The Twana. Chemakum, and Klallam 

Indians of Washington Territory. By 
Rev. Myron Eells. 

In Smithsonian Institution. Annual Kept, of 
the I'.oard of Regents for 1887. part i, pp. 005- 
1)81. Washington. 1889, 8\ (Pilling.) 

Kumerals 1-10 of a number of Indian lan- 
guages of AVashington Territory, among them 
the Chinook Jargon, p. 044.— Remarks on the 
same. p. 645. — Three wonls of the Chinook Jar- 
gon not found iu txibbs's dictionary, p. (V)2. — 
Wonl for liod in Twana. Nisqually. Klallam. 
and Chinook, p. 679. 

■•The Chinook Jargon has been ably coni- 
piletl by Hon. G. Glbbs. I know of hut thr«>e 
wonls in this locality of Indian origin wliich 
are not in his dictionary. . . Out of about 
800 words and j>hrases which answer for worda 



CTIINOOKAN J.ANGUACfES. 



27 



EellB (M.) — (Jontiiined. 

j;iv(Mi l)y liitii, only iildiiil, ITit ;irn iiHi^d lii-rc' 
wliioli hIiowx hitw tlm Huiiio laiiiiii;iK<! will vary 
ill difr<T('Ut loc.alitii'H." 

Thin articlo wan iHDiiod Hfparalcly, also, 
williDiit. rhaiii;!'. Ami a^aiii us I'oHowh: 

'riu^Twiuiii, ('hciiiiikiiMi, :iii<l Klallaiii 

Iiidi.ui.s of Wiisliiiii^toii (irriloiy. Hy 
Rev. Myron Im-IIs. 

Ill SiuitliHoiiiaii Iimtitiilioii, Mine. I'aiicrs 
nilatiiifj toaiitlirtipoloj-y, I'roiii tlii' SiiiitliMouiaii 
n^jioit for lKH0-'87, pp. f.0.j-(!Hl, WaHliiii^loii, 
lH8i», 8°. (EaninH, I'illmg.) 

Linguistic (ujiitonts as iiuilcr title next abovi'. 

Aboiijrinal ffcuigrajihid iiiiiiitis in the 

Htiito of WiiHliin^ton. Jiy Myron KcIIh. 

Ill Aiiitjrii'aii AiitlirojioloKist, vol. .1, ji]). Ii7 
3.''., Wasliiii^'toii, 1892, S'\ (PillinK-) 

Arraii<;(Ml alplialxitically anil ilorivatinns 
given. The languages reiiresi'iitiMl are: (Miiii- 
ook, Ciiinook .Jargon, Nez I'erci-, (.'lieiialis, 
(Uallani, Twaiia, Calispel, Oayuso. Piiyalliii), 
ami Sjiokaue. 

[ Dii'tionary of flii- CliiiionU .(iir- 

fi-on.] (") 

I'luler (late of .laniiary 9, 189:!, Mr. Eells 
writes me, lomoriiiiig this work, as follows : 

" I have been at work for the last ten mouths, 
as I have hall spare time, on a Chinook Jargon- 
English and Knglish-Chiiiook .Targou Diction- 
ary, with introduction, i-emarks about the lan- 
guage, and grammar. 1 am gathering all the 
words I can liud, whetliei' obsolete or not, from 
about lifteeii Chinook dictionaries which have 
been issued since lH:iH with the various spell- 
ings, marking, as far as I can, all those now in 
uae; also introducing all which have been 
ado])ted into tile langiiageof late years from the 
English and all phrases which can bo used as 
words. 1 have gone through with the Eiiglish- 
('liiiiook part and have nearly three thousand 
words; have gone through with the (^'hiiiook- 
English part except .S' and 7' and have about 
two thousand; I hope to linisli it this winter, 
though it is much more of a task than I sup- 
posed it would be when I begun. I hardly 
expect it will ever be ])iiblislied, but will keep 
it in manuscript, having done it largely to pre- 
serve the language in its ))roseiit transitional 
form, which is quite ditfereiit troiu what it was 
thirty or forty years ago. 

" I hardly know whether it is worth while for 
you to mention this, as it is in such an untin- 
isbed state; still I have even now |iut far more 
work on it than I have on all my other Chinook 
Jargon writings." 

[Words, phrases and sentences in 

tlie Chinook Jai'gon.] (") 

Manuscript in possession of its author. 
KecordiMl in a copy of I'owell's Introduction to 
the study of Indian languages, second edition, 
pp. 77-103, 105, 109-111, li:i-l'25, 127, 129, i;i2-188, 
189-227. Ou p. 228 isa translation of John iii, 10. 



Bells CM.) — (.'ontinticd. 

I Si^rnions in tin- Ciiinook .(ar- 
gon. J ( ') 

.Manuscript, 2<) pages, 8'^, in jioHsession of its 
author. 

■.Mioiil Ki years ago, in 187.'>, when I was 
learning lo talk the language, I wrote foiirser 
iiions in IlieChinook .largoii which I still liuve. 
Since that t iine I have jireached a great deal in 
the language, but do it ho easily that I simply 
make a few he.'idings in English and talk 
extempore. On looking over tliesir sermons I 
tiiid that were I tii use them again I should 
need to riivise thiMii and to change many 
expressions so as to make tlioiii clearer." 

Titles and notes of tliesi- three manuscripts 
furnished me by Mr. Eells. 

Siii' Bulmer (T. S.; 

lie v. Myron Kells was born at Walker's 
Prairie, Washington Territory, (October 7, 18-..'!; 
he is the son of lie v. Ciishing Eells, IJ. 1)., and 
Mrs. M. h\ Eells, who went to Oregon in IS.'iS as 
missionaries to the Siiokane Indians. He left 
Walker's Prairie in 1848 on account of the 
W'hitinuii massacre at W'allawalla and Cayuse 
war, and went to Salem, Oregon, where ho began 
to go to school. In 1849 he removed to Forest 
(rrove.Oregoii; inlHSl to llillsboro,0regon, and 
in 18.'J7 again to I'Virest (irove, at which places 
he continued liis school life. In 1802 heremovcd 
to Wallawalla, spending the time in farming 
and the wood business until 1808, except the 
falls, winters, and springs of 1803-04, 18G4-'C5, 
and 180;')-'G0, when he was at Forest Grovoi in 
college, graduating I'roiii Pacific ITniversity in 
1800, in the se.coiid class which ever grailiiated 
from that institution. In 1808 he went to 
Hartford, (-'oiiii., to study for the ministry, 
entering the Hartford Theological Seminary 
that year, graduating from it in 1871, and being 
ordained at Hartford, .June 10, 1871, as a (.'ou- 
gregatioral minister. He went to Bois6 City 
in October, 1871, under the American Home 
Missionary Society, organized the First Con- 
gregational church of that iilace in 1872, anil 
was pastor of it, until he left in 1874. Mr. Eells 
was also superintendent of its Sunday school 
from 1872 to 1874 ;iiid president of the Idaho 
Uible Society from 1872 to 1874. He went to 
Skokomish, Washington, in-Juiie, 1874, and has 
worked as missionary of the American Mis- 
sionary Association ever since among the Sko- 
komish orTwana, and Clallam Indians; pastor 
of Congregational church at Skokomish Keser- 
vatioii since 1870, and superintendent of Sun- 
day school at Skokomish since 1882. He 
organized a Congregational church among the 
(Jlallanis in 1882, of which he has since been 
pastor, and another ■iiiiong the whites at Sea- 
beck in 1880, of which he was jiiisfor until 1880. 
In 1887 he was chosen trustee of tlie Pacilic 
University, Oregon ; in 188."j was elected assist- 
ant .secret;iry .and ill 1889 .secretary of its board 
of trustees. He delivered the address before 
theUaiuinu .Sigma society of that institution in 



28 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Eells (M.) — Coutinued. 

1876, before the alumni in 1890, and preached 
the baccalaureate sermon in 1886. In 1888 he 
was chosen trustee of Whitman College, Wash- 
ington, delivered tlie coinmencement address 
there in 1888, and received the degree of D.D. 
from that institution in 1890. In 1888 he was 
elected its tinaucial secretary, and iu 1891 was 
aslied to become president of the institution, 
but declined both. 

He was elected an associate member of the 
Victoria Institute of London in 1881, and a 
corresponding member of the Anthropological 
Society at Washington in 1885, to l)oth of wliich 
societies he has furnished papers wliich have 
been published by them. He was also elected 
vice-president of the Whitman Historical 
Society at Wallawalla in 1889. From 1H74 to 
1886 he was clerk of the Congregational Asso- 
ciation of Oregon and Wasliington. 

Mr. Eells at present (1893) holds the position 
of superintendent of the department of etlinol- 
ogy for the State of Washington at the World's 
Columbian Exposition. 

Emmons (George Falconer) . Replies to 
inquiiies respecting the Indian tribes 
of Oregon and California. By George 
Falconer Emmons, U. S. N. 

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3. 
pp. 200-225, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. 

Vocabulary of the Clatsop dialect (about 40 
words), pp. 223-224. 

"Many words in this language, I piesume, 
are common to the Chinook language, and per- 
haps to the Cliickeelis and Kilamukes, who mix 
with and appear to understand each otlier.'' 

Everette (Dr. Willis Eugene). Compar- 
ative literal translation of the " Lord's 
Prayer" in the T^iluuk or Chinook Jar- 
gon with English. (*) 

Manuscript; recorded " from personal 
knowledge of the language. Written at Chil- 
cat, Alaska, 1884. Corrected word by word by 
Sitka and Chilcat Indians." 

Comparative literal translation of 

the Ten Conniiaudments in the lY4iiuk 
or Chinook .Jargon with English. (*) 

Manuscript; recorded "from personal 
knowledge of the language. Written at Pyra- 
mid Harbor, Alaska, in May, 1884, and cor- 
rected word by word Ijy repeating to Chilcat, 
Sitka, and British Columbia Indians until tliey 
were thoroughly satisfied with each word .and 
its meaning, as well as a full iiuderstanding of 
each sentence." 

A Dictionary of the Language of the 

"Kliukit"(Klirigrt) or Chilcat Indians 
of Alaska, together with that of the 
lY^iiiiik, or Chinook Trade Jargon used 
on the Noi'th American Pacitic Ci)ast 
compared with English. (*) 



Everette (W. E.) — Continued. 

Manuscript; 1,000 words, alphabetically 
arranged. Recorded " from personal knowledge 
of the language, and corrected word by word 
by tlie Indian trader, Mr. Dickinson, and 
Chilcat and Sitka Indians, during A]iril, 1884, 
at Pyramid Hailior. Alaska.' 

Tithes and notes coiicirning tlie above manu- 
scripts furuishcil liv the author. 

Hymn iu thi^ Chinook Jargon as 

sung by the Indians of Lake Chelan, 
Washington territory, U. S. A. 

Manuscript,! leaf, 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

The hymn, which is written in black ink, is 
accompanied by an English interlinear trans- 
lation iu red. 

The Lord's Prayer | in | Chinook 

Jargon | as spoken by the Indian Tribes 
that live on the Pacific coast of West- 
ern Oregon, U. S. A. 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4"^, in the libriiry of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

The prayer iu Jargon is written iu black, 
with an English interlinear translation in led. 

The two last mentioned mauuscripts were 
transmitted to the Bureau of Ethnology from 
the Yakama ludian Agency, August 15, 1883. 

From notes kindly furnished me by thi- sub- 
ject of this sketch, I have compiled the follow- 
ing: 

Dr. Willis Eugene Everette was born in 
Brooklyn, New York, in 1855. He was placed 
under the care of tvitors at an early age, and 
when his jiarents died, at the close of the war, 
he began to plan for his own education and 
future life work. After eight years of study 
under private tutors and in various schools of 
learning, lie resolved to attempt to investigate 
the origin of the aboriginal races of North 
America. He went direct into the lield among 
the Indians of the western shores of Hudson 
Bay, where he wintered. Here he began study- 
ing the languages, manners, and customs of the 
Cree, Athabasca, and Chippewa. Thence he 
journeyed amongst the Saidteux, Blood, Piegan. 
and Blackfeet; the Sioux, Gros- Ventres, Mau- 
dan, Assiniboiue, and Crow; the Paiute and 
Klamath people ; the Rogue River, Alzea, and 
Silctz Indians; the Umatilla and Nez Perce 
people; the Klikitat and Yakima tribes; the 
Indians of Piiget Sound: thence up along the 
British Columbia coast to Chilcat, Alaska, 
where theTliukit, Sheetkah, and other Alaskan 
races were found ; tiience across the main 
range of Alaska into the headwaters of the 
Yukon River, and down the Yukon throughout 
the inteiior of Alaska to the Ai'ctic sea coast, 
among the Kut<ha-Kutchin, Kvichpatshi, and 
Yiikoniyut peojile, of the valley of the Y'ukon 
River and seacoast of Nortou Sound; and, 
finally, down to the Aleutian Archipelago, 
among the Aleuts of Uualaska, thus com- 
pletiug a chain of investigation from the 



CHINOOKAN LuiNGUACiEf^. 



29 



Everette (W. E.) — (ontiitiuMi. 

norfhern cxtrpmitipK oftlit; Fnited States ami 
aloiif: tlu' Paritic- coast to tlir iiorthwrNtftii 
part of Nortli Aiiicrica. From tiiiir to tiini' lie 
returned to civilizatioTi for tlie piiijiose <if 
raakiiif; studies in Kf^ol'ifiy- medicine, ciieni 
istry, law, and niineralo>.'y. 

He is now -writirtr np bis numerous i x)>lora 
tions as fast as his miuin;; and law )iractice 
will permit. He lias several hundred manu- 
scripts, peiBonally collected, of the lanfruajies. 



Eveiette ( W. K. ) — Confiimed. 

manners, customs, and traditions of the North 
American aliorigines, and is in hopes that some 
day li(< will have leisure enou;;li to leduce them 
into a set of about ten i|Marlo \olurae8. 
.Mtlionj;h mining f;eoloKy and mining; law is 
his jirolession, hisaet ual life work has been the 
study of the anthropology of our Nortli Anieri 
can aborigines, and he devotes all his spare 
time to the latter. His present location is 
'I'aconia, Washington. 



F. 



Featherman (A.) Socinl lii.story | i)fihe 
I rii('(\s of iiiankind. | First division: | 
Ni{;riti;iiis[-'rhinl division: | Aoneo- 
Maranoiiiims]. | ]?y | A. Fcatlicrraau. | 
[Two liiit's (| notation.] | 

London :;Tiiibner& to.,LiidgateIlill, 
I 1S85[-1889]. I (All rights reserved.) 

:i vols. 8". 

A general discussion of a number of North 
American families of speecli occurs in volume 
3, among theiu the Chinook, wjiich occupies pp. 
369-378, and which includes a brief account of 
their language on p. 373. 

f'njries icen : Congress. 

Field (Tlionias Warren). An ossay | 
towards an | Indian bibliography. | 
Being a catalogue ol' books, relating 
to the I history, antiquities, langnagee, 
customs, religion, | wars, literature, 
and origin of the | American Indians, 
I in the library of | Thomas W. Field. 
I With bibliographical and historical 
notes, and | synopses c.f the contents of 
some of I the works least known. | 

New York : | Scribner, Armstrong, 
and CO. | 1873. 

Title verso nanu's nf printers 1 I. preface ](p. 
iii-iv, text pp. 1-430, 8°. 

Titles and descriptionsof worksinorrelating 
to the Chiuookan languages passim. 

Cnjiies seen. : Congress, Eames. I'illing. 

At the Field sale, no. 688, acopy brought$4.25: 
attheMenzies sale. no. 718, a " half (Tu.shed. red 
levant morocco, gilt top, uncut copy," brought 
$5.. 50. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, 18 fr. ; by (^uar- 
itch, no. 11996, 15s. ; at the Pinart sale, no. 368, 
it brought 17 fr. ; at the Murphy sale, no. 949, 
$4.50. Priced by Quaritch, no, 30224, \l. 

Catalogue | of the | library | belong- 
ing to I Mr. Thomas W. Field. | To be 
sold at auction, | by | Bangs, Merwin 
& CO., I May 24th, 1875. | and following 
days. I 

New York. | 187.5. 

Cover title 22 lines, title as above verso blank 
1 1. notice etc. pp. iii-viii, text pp. 1-376, list of 



Field iT. W. ) — Ctintiuued. 

l>rices ]ip. 377-393, sujijilement pi>. l-.')9, 8^. Com- 
liiled by Mr. .Tosei>h Sabin, mainly Ironi Mr. 
Field's Essay, title of which is given above. 

Cont;iins titles of a number of works in and 
relating to the Chiuookan languages. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology'. Con- 
gress, Eames. 

At the Squier sale, no. 1178. an uncut cojiy 
brought $1.25. 

Ford: This word following a title or inclosed 
^^ ithin ]iareiitheses after a note indiiates that 
a co]iy of the work referred tobas been seen by 
the comiiiler, belonging to the library of Mr. 
Paul L. Ford, Brooklyn, N. Y. 

Franchere ((iabriel). Relation | d'un | 
voyage | a la cotf du | iiord-ouest | dc 
I I'Amerique Septentrionale, | dans les 
nnn(<es | 1810, 11, 12, 13, et 11. | Par G. 
Franchere, tils, j 

Montreal : | de I'impriiuerie de C. B. 
Pasteur. | 1820. 

Half-title (Relation d'un voyage) verso blank 
1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 5-6, avant 
])ropos pp. 7-l(», text pp. 11-284, 8°. 

Quelques mots (46) de la langue Chinouque 
ou Tchinouk, pp. 204-205. — Eleven x>lirases in 
the same, p. 205. 

Copies seen : Georgetown, Jacques Cartier 
School, Mallet. 

Narrative | of a | A-oyage | to | the 

northwest coast of America | in the 
year8l811.1812, 1813, and 1811 | orthe | 
first American settlement on the Pacific 
I By (4abriel Franchere | Translated 
and edited by J. V. Huntington | 
[Vignette] | 

Eedfield | 110 and 112 Nassau street. 
New York | 1854. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright and 
name of stereotyper 1 1. preface to the second 
edition jip. 3-7, preface [in English] to the 
French edition pp. 9-10. contents pp. 11-16. in- 
troduction pp. 17-22, text pp. 23-376. 16°. 

A brief reference to the Chinook language, 
p.262. The vocabulary and phrases are omitted 
in this edition. 



30 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Franchfere (G. ) — Continued. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Congress, 
QeorKctown, Mallet, Pilling, Tmnibull. 

Gabriel Franehere was born on November 3, 
1786, in ^^(>nt real, where his father had estab- 
lished hiniseir as a merchant. His early life 
apjx'iirs to have been spent at school and 
behind his father's eounter. 

In the spring of 1810 Franchero sought 
employment in the Pacific Fur Company, and 
on May 24 he signed articles of engagement 
with one of the company's partners. By this 
agreement ho bound liiiuself to the service of 
the company, as a clerk, for Ave years. In July 
he left home, with a number of his young com- 
patriots, in canoes for New York. 

Tlu< Paeitic Fur Company was equipping 
two expeditions for the Columbia country — 
one overland, from St. Louis, aniT the other by 
sea, around Cape Horn, and Franchere was 
assigned to the party going by sea. September, 
1810, the ship Ton(iuin,.Tonathan Thorn, lieu- 
tenant IT. S. Navy, master, .set sail for the Pacific 
coast. On April 12 the party weie landed on 
the south side of the Columbia, ten miles from 
its mouth, and the company's principal port, 
called .Vstoria, was founded. 

Franeh^re exhibited a wonderful talent for 
aciiuiring the Indian languages of the country, 
and otherwise made himself so useful that he 
was retained at headquarters most of the 
time, although he made a number of excursions 
up the Columbia, tlie Cowlitz, and the Willa- 
mette. 

After the (lisbandTiient of the Pacific Fur Com- 
pany he entered temporarily into the service of 
the Northwest Company; but, although bril- 



Franchfere (G.) — Continued. 

liant offers were made to him, as soon as oppor- 
tunity offered he determined to return to 
^lontreal by the Canadian overland route up the 
Columbia, across the Rocky Mountains through 
the Athabasca Pass, down the Athabasca, 
across the marshes, down the Saskateliewan, 
across Lake Winnipeg, up Winnipeg and 
Rainy rivers, down the Kaiuinisti(iua, across 
Lakes Superior .and Huron, up the French 
River, across the height of lands at Lake Nipis- 
sing, down the Mattawan, .and finallj'down the 
Ottawa to the St. Lawrence, a distance of five 
thousand miles, traveled in canoes and on foot. 
He appeared under the paternal roof on the 
evening of September 1, 1814, greatly to the 
surprise of his family, who had received no 
intelligence of him since he had left New York, 
four years previously, and who mourned him 
as dead, since they imagined he had perished 
in the ill-fated Touquin, oft" the coast of New 
Caledonia. 

Franchere removed to Sault Ste. Marie with 
his young family in 1834 and engaged in the 
fur trade. Later he became a partner in the 
noted commercial house of P. Choteau, Son & 
Co., of St. Louis, and later still he established 
himself in Now York City as the senior partner 
in the firm of G. Franchere &. Co. 

He died at the residence of his sim-in-law, 
Hon. Jolm S. Prince, mayor of St. Paul, Minn., 
at the age of seventy years, the last survivor 
of the celebrated Astor expeditions. — Mallet, in 
Catholic Annual, 18S7. 

Frost (J. H.) See Lee (D.) and Frost 
(J.H.) 



G. 



Gairdner (Dr. — ). Notes on the Geog- 
r,aphy of the Columbi<i River. By the 
hate Dr. Gairdner. 

In Royal Geog. Soc. .lour. vol. 11, pp. 250-257, 
London. 1841, 8^. (Congress.) 

Notes on the Indian tribes of the upper and 
lower Columbia, pp. 255-250, contains a list of 
the peoples of that locality, with their habitat, 
among them the divisions of the Chinook. 

Gallatin (Albert). A wyuopsis of the In- 
dian tribes within the United States 
east of tlie Rocky Mountains and in 
the British and Russian possessions in 
North America. By the Hon. Albert 
Gallatin. 

In American Antiquarian Soc. Trans. 
(Archajologia Americana), vol. 2, pp. l-422,Cam- 
bridge, 1836,8°. 

A vocabulary of 33 words, and the numerals 
1-12, 20, in Chinook (mouth of the Columbia). 
p. 379. 



Gallatin (A.) — Continued. 

Hale's Indians of North-west Amer- 

ica,and vocabularies of North America ; 
with an introduction. By Albert Gal- 
latin. 

In American Ethnological Soc. Trans, vol. 2, 
pp. xxiii-clxxxviii, 1-1.30, New York, 1848, 8°. 

General account of the Tsiuuk, or Chinooks, 
pp. 15-17. — The Tshinuk family (pp. 56-58) 
includes pronunciation, p.. 56; personal pronouns 
of the Watlala, p. 56; possessive lu'onouns, 
p. 57; partial conjugation of the verb to be eoH, 
p. 57; transitive inflections, p. 58; pluralization 
of nouns in the Waiwaikuni, p. 58. — The "Jar- 
gon "or trade language of Oregon (pp. 62-70) 
includes a general account of tiie language, pp. 
62-64; .Jargon words (41) derived from the 
English, p. 64 ; derived from the French (33), p. 
05; formed by ononiatoixeia (12), p. 65; alpha- 
betical Englisli me;uiing of the words of the 
Jargou(165), p.66;grammatic treatise, pp. 66-70. 
"All the words thus brought together and 
combined in this singularly constructed speech 



CHINOOK AN LANGUAGES. 



31 



Gallatin (A.)^('niitiiin.(l. 

[Jargon] aro about two Iiiiii(lre«l and liCty in 
number. Of these, 11(1, iuclu<ling tlio nuiner- 
ala, arc from tlio Tshiuuk, 17 from the. Nootka.s, 
:i8 from either the one, or tlio otlier, but doubt- 
ful from which; '3'.i from the Fnuich, and 41 
from the English. These two last arc Hub- 
joiued, as well as the words formed by ononia- 
topieia; and an alphabetical English list of all 
the other words is added, which will show of 
what materials the scanty vocabulary c.onsist.s." 
Vocabulary of the lowerChinook (179 words), 
pp. SO-g.").— Vocabulary of the Watlala (60 
words), p. 121. 

Titl>l«'. of fj;cii('ri<- Iii<liaii t'amilitvs of 

liinj,niiij;rs. 

In Schoolcraft (II. R.), Indian tribes, vol. 3, 
pp. :3;)7 102, Philadelphia, 1&53. 4'>. 

Includes the Tshinook, ]). 402. 

Albert (lallatin was born in Geneva, Switzer- 
land,. Tanuary 29, 1761, and died in Astoria, L.I., 
August 12, 1K49. ilo was descended from an 
ancient jiatrician family of Geneva, whoso name 
had long been honorably connected with the 
history of Switzerland. Young Albert had 
been baptized by the name of Abraham Alfonse 
Albert. In 1773 he was sent to a boarding 
school and a year later entered the University 
of Geneva, where he was graduated in 1779. He 
sailed froui L'Orient late in May, 1780, and 
reached Boston on.Iulyl4. He entered Con- 
gress on December 7, 179.5, and continued a 
member of that body until his api)ointment as 
Secretary of the Treasury in 1801, which office 
ho held continously until 1813. His services 
were rewarded with the appointment of min- 
ister to France in February, 181.5 ; he entered 
on the duties of this otfice in January, 1816. In 
1826, at the solicitation of President Adams, he 
accepted the appointment of envoy extraordi- 
nary to Great Britain. Ou his return to the 
United States he settled in New York City, 
where, from 1831 to 1839, he was president of the 
Is'alional Bank of Xew York. In 1842 he was 
associated in the establishment of the American 
Ethnological .Society, becoming its first presi- 
dent, and in 1843 he was elected to hold a simi- 
lar othce in the New York Historical Soj'iety, an 
honor which was annuallycon ferred on him until 
his death. — \ppleton's Vi/clop. of Am. Biog. 

Gatschet : This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com - 
piler in the library of Mr. Albert S. Gatschet. 
Washington, U. C. 

Gatschet (All)ert .Samuel). ludiaii lau- 
gtiages of the Pacific states and terri- 
tories. 

In Magazine of American Hist, vol.1, ])p. 
145-171, New York, 1877, sm. 4°. (Pilling.) 

Short account of the Chinook language and 
its dialects, p. 167. — Same of the Chinook Jar 
gou, ]). 168. 

Issued separately with half-title as follows: 



Gatschet (A. S.) — ( 'oiitiiiMi'<l. 

Indian langiiage.s | of the | I'arific 

states and territories | Iiy | Allicrt S. 
Gatschet | Reprinted froiuMareli [1S77] 
Nunil)(!r of Tlie Magazine of American 
History 

[New York: 1X77.] 

Half-title ver.so blank 1 1. text pji. 14,5-171, 
sm. 4^. 

Linguistic contents asunder title next above. 

Go2>u'is seen : Astor, Eanu's, Pilling, Welles- 
ley. 

Reprinted in the following works; 

Beach (W. AV.), Indian Miscellany, j)]>. 416 
447, .Vlbany, 1877,8'^'. 

Drake (S. G.), Aboriginal races of North 
Americii, i>p. 748-763, New York, 1882, S'^. 

A supj)letnentary i)aper by the same author 
aiul with the .same title, which appeared in the 
Magazine of American History, vol. 8, contains 
no Chinookan material. 

Vocabulary of the, Claekama lan- 
guage. 

Manuscript, 7 leaves, 4'', in the library of the 
Bureaii of Ethnology. Collected at the Grande 
Rondo Reserve, Yamhill Co., Oregon, in Decem- 
ber, 1877, from Frank Johnson, a Clackama 
Indian, and recorded on one of the Smiths(mian 
forms (no. 170) of 211 words. About 150 words 
and phrases are given. 

Words, phrases, ;tnd sentences in 

the Clackama laugtuige. 

Manuscript; recorded in a copy of Intro- 
duction to the Study of Indian Languages, 1st 
edition. Material collected at Grande Konde 
reservation, Yamhill County, Oregon, Decem- 
ber, 1877. 

Vocabulary of the Wasco and \Vac- 

canessisi dialects of the Chinuk family. 

Manuscript, 7 iip. fidio. Taken at the Kla- 
math Lake Agency, Oregon, in 1877. 

Albert Samuel Gatschet was born in St. Beat- 
enberg, iu the Bernese Oberland, Switzerland, 
October 3, 1832. His propedeutic education wa.s 
acquired in the lyceums of Neuchatel (1843- 
1845) and of Berne (1846-1852), after which he 
followed courses in the universities of Berne 
and Berlin (1852-1858). His studies had for 
their object the ancient world in all its phases of 
religion, history, language, and art, and thereby 
his attention was at an early day directed to 
philologic researches. In 1865 he began the pub- 
licati(m of a series of brief monographs ou the 
local etymology of his country, entitled '' Orts- 
etymologische Forschungen aus der Schweiz" 
(186.5-'67). In 1867 he spent several numths iu 
London pursuing antiquarian studies in the 
British Museum. In 1868 he settled in New York 
and became a contribtitor to various domestic 
;iud foreign periodicals, mainly on scientilic 
subjects. Drifting iiitoamore attentive study 
of the American Indians, he published several 
compositions vipon their Liuguages, the most 



32 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Qatschet (A. S.) — Coutiuued. 

importaut of which is " Zwolf Sprachen aus 
dem Siidwesten Nordamerlkas," Weimar, 1876. 
This led to his beiug appointed to the position 
of ethnok)gist in the United .States Geological 
Survey, under Maj. -Tohn W. Powell, in March, 
1877, when he reiiiovcil to Washington, and first 
employed himself in arranging the linguistic 
manuscripts of the Smithsonian Institution, 
now the property of the Bureau of Ethnology, 
which forms a part of the Smitlisonian Institu- 
tion. Mr. Gatschet has ever since been actively 
connected with that bureau. To increase its 
linguistic collections and to extend his own 
studies of the Indian languages, he has made 
extensive trips of linguistic and ethnologic 
exploration among the Indians of Korth Amer- 
ica. After returning from a six months' 
sojourn among the Klamaths and Kalapuyas 
of Oregon, settled on both sides of the Cascade 
Range, he visited the Kataba in South Carolina 
and the Cha'hta and Shetimasha of Louisiana 
in 1881-'82, the Kayowe, Comanche, Apache, 
Yattassee, Caddo, Naktche, Modoc, and other 
tribes in the Indian Territory, the Tonkawe 
and Lipans in Texas, and the Atakapa Indians 
of Louisiana in 1884-'85. In 1886 he saw the 
Tlaskaltecs atSaltillo, Mexico, a remnant of the 
Naliua race, brought there about 1575 from 
Anahuac, and was the tirst to discover the affin- 
ity of the Biloxi language with the Siouan fam- 
ily. He also committed to writing tlie Tuni^ka 
or Touica language of Louisiana, never before 
investigated and forming a linguistic family of 
itself. Excursions toother parts of the country 
brought to his knowledge other Indian lan- 
guages : the Tuskarora, Caughnawaga, Penob- 
scot, and Karankawa. 

Mr. tiatschet has compiled an extensive 
report embodying his researches among the 
Klamatli Lake and Modoc Indians of Oregon, 
which forms Tol. II of Contributions to North 
American Ethnology. Among the tribes and 
languages discussed by him in separate publi- 
cations are the Timucua (Florida), Tonkawe 
(Texas), Tuma (California, Arizona, Mexico), 
Chumeto (California), Beothuk (Newfound- 
land), Creek, and Hitchiti (Alabama). His 
numerous papers are scattered tlirough the 
publications of the various learned societies, 
the magazines, and government reports. 

General discussion : 

See Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beach (W. W.) 



Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Cliinook 

('hinodk 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook Jargon 

Chinook Jargon 



Berghaus (H.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 
Duncan (D.) 
Eells (M.) 
Featherman (A.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Hale (H.) 
Sproat (G. M.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beach (W. W.) 



General discussion — 

Chinook Jargon See 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 

Geographic Jiaraes : 
Cliinook 



Continued. 

Clough(J. C.) 
Drake (S.G.) 
Eells (M.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Hale(H.) 
Nicoll(E.H.) 
Reade (J.) 
Sproat (G. M.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
AVestern. 
Wilson (D.) 



See Gibbs (G.) 

Geological Survey; These words following a title 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the comjiiler in the library of the United States 
Geological Survey, AVashington, D. C. 

Georgetown: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Georgetown University, 
Wa.shington,D. C. 

Gibbs (/Jr. George). Smithsouian miscel- 
laneous collections, j 161 1 A | dictionary 
I of the I Chinook Jargon, | or | trade 
langnage of Oregon. | Prepared for the 
Smithsonian institution. | By | George 
Gibbs. I [Seal of the institution.] | 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion: I March, 1863. 

Title verso advertisement 1 1. contents p. iii, 
preface pp. v-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xiv, half- 
title (Part I.Chinook-English) verso note I 1. 
text pp. 1-29, half-title (Part II. English- 
Chinook) p. 31, text pp. 33-44, 8°. 

General discussion of the language and its 
derivation, pp. v-viii. — Short comparative 
vocabulary (eighteen words and phrases) of 
English, Tlaoquatch and Niitka, and Colum- 
bian, p. ix. — Analogies between the Chinook 
and other languages (Haeltzuk, Bolbella, Clat- 
sop, Nutka, Cowlitz, Kwantlen, Selisli, Chi- 
halis, Nisqually, Takamaand Klikatit), p. x. — 
Bibliography of the Chinook Jargon (sixteen 
entries), pp. xiii-xiv. — Dictionary of the Chin- 
ook Jargon: Chinook-English, jip. 1-29; Eng- 
lish-Chinook, pp. 33-43. — The Lord's prayer in 
Jargon, with interlinear English translation, p. 
144]. 

Copies _ seen: Astor, Bancroft, Dunbar, 
Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

"Some years ago the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook 
Jargon, furnished by Dr. B. R. Mitchell, of the 
U. S. Kavy, and prepared, as I afterwards 
learned, by Mr. Liimnet. a Catholic priest, for 
his own use while studying the language at 
Chinook Point. It was submitted by the Insti- 
tution, for revision and preparation for the 
press, to the late Professor W. W. Turner. 



CHINOOK AN LANGUAGES. 



33 



Gibbs (G. ) — Continued. 

Although it received the critical examination 
of that distinguished i)hilolo>jist, and was ot 
use in directinj; att(^ntiou to the hmguage, it 
was deficieui in the iiiiinlur of words in use, 
contained nM»ny wliic^h did not jn'operly belong 
to the Jargon, and did not give the aources 
from which the words were derived. 

"Mr. Hale had previously given avocabulary 
and account of this Jargon in liis ' Ethnography 
of the United States Exploring Expedition,' 
which was noticed by Mr. Gallatin in the 
Transactions of the American Ethnological 
Society, vol. ii. Ho however fell into some 
errors in his derivation of the words, chiefly 
from ignoring the Chehalis element of the Jar- 
gon, and the number of words given by him 
amounted only to about two hundred and fifty. 
"A copy of Mr. Liounet's vocabulary having 
been sent to me with a request to make such 
corrections as itmight require, I concluded not 
merely to collate the words contained in this 
and other printed and manuscript vocabularies, 
but to ascertain, so far as possible, the lan- 
guages which had contributed to it, with the 
original Indian words. This had l)ecome the 
more important as its extended use by differ- 
ent tribes had led to ethnological errors in the 
classing together of essentially distinct fami- 
lies." — Preface. 

Issued also with title-page as follows: 

A I dictiouary | of tlie | Chinook 

Jargon, | or, | trade biugnage of 
Oregon. | By George Gibbs. | 
New York: | Cranioisy press. | 1863. 

Half-title (Shea's Library of American Lin- 
guistics. XII.) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 
1 1. preface pp. v-si, bibliography of theChinook 
Jargon pp. xiii-xiv, half-title of part I verso 
note 1 I.Chinook-English dictionary pp. 1-29, 
half-title of part II verso blank 1 1. English- 
Chinook dictionary pp. 33-43, the Lord's prayer 
in Jargon p. [44], 8°. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenajum, 
Congress, Dunbar, Harvard, Lenox, Smitli- 
fionian, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Some copies (twenty-five, I believe) were 
issued in large quarto form with no change of 
title-page. (Pilling, Smithsonian.) 

See Hale (H.) 

Alphabetical vocabulary | of the 

I Chinook language. | By | George 
Gibbs. I [Small design, with motto in 
Irish and Latin.] | 

New York : | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 

Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. iii-v, orthog- 
raphy p. vi, bibliography pp. vii-viii, text pp. 
9-23, 8°. 

Vocabulary (English-Chinook), pp. 9-20.— 
Local nomenclature, pp. 21-23. 

Copies seen : Astor, Boston Athenwiim, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Eames, Harvard, Lenox, 
Smithsonian, TrumbuU,Wellesley. 

CHIN 3 



Gibbs ((;.) — ContiniK-d. 

Some copies contain a loo.se half-title (Shea's 
I library of American linguistics. | VIII.) 
inserted afterwards. (Lenox.) 

Tiiero was a small edition (twenty-five 
copies, I believe) issued in largo quarto form, 
with title slightly changed, as follows : 

Ali)habetical vocabulary | of the | 

Chinook language. | By | George 
Gibbs. I Publisliod under the atispices 
of the Smithsonian institution. | 

New York : | Cramoisy press. ( 1863. 

Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. iii-v. 
orthography p. vi, l)ildiography pp. vii-viii, 
text pp. 9-23, 4'^. 

^'■ocal)uIa^y alphabetically arranged by 
English words, double columns, pp. 9-20. — 
Local nomenclature, pp. 21-23. 

Copies seen: Eames, Lenox, Pilling, Smith- 
sonian. 

Bibliography of the (!hinook. Jargon. 

In Gibbs ((i.). Dictionary of the Cliinook 
Jargon, i>p. xiii-xiv, Washington, 1863, S'^. 

Contains si.xteen titular entries, chronolog- 
ically arranged. 

Eeprinted in the same work : XewTork, 18(53, 
8^ and 4°, titled above. 

Bibliography [of the Chinook lan- 
guage] . 

In Gibbs (G.), Alphabetical vocabulary of the 
Chinook language, pp. vii-viii, New York, 18G3, 
S° and 4°. 

Contains six titular entries only. 

Chinook Jargon Vocabulary. Com- 
piled by Geo. Gibbs, Esq. 

Manuscript, 38 pages, 8°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in a blank 
book ; alphabetically arranged by Jargon words. 
Contains 481 entries. 

George Gibbs, the son of Col. George Gibbs, 
was bom on thelTth of July, 1815, at Sunswi<'k, 
Long Island, near the village of Halletts Cove, 
now known as Astoria. At seventeen he was 
taken to Europe, where he remained two years. 
On his return from Europe he commenced the 
reading of law, and in 1838 took his degree of 
bachelor of law at Harvard University. In 1848 
Mr. Gibbs went overland from St. Louis to 
Oregon and established himself at Columbia. 
In 1854 he received the appointment of collector 
of the port of Astoria, which he held during 
Mr. Fillmore's administration. Later he 
removed from Oregon to Waslilngton Territory, 
and settled upon a ranch a few miles from Fort 
Steilacoom. Here ho had his headquarters for 
several years, devoting himself to the study of 
the Indian languages and to the collection of 
vocabuliiries and traditiou.s of the northwest- 
ern tribes. During a great part of the time 
he was attached to the LTnited States Govern- 
ment Commission in laying the boundary, as 
the geologist or botanist of the expedition. He 



34 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 

was also attached as geologist to the survey of 
a railroad route to the Pacific, under Major 
Stevens. In 1857 he was appointed to the 
northwest boundary survey under Mr. Archi- 
bald Campbell, as commissioner. In 1860 Mr. 
Gibbs returned to New York, and in 1861 was 
on duty in Washington in guarding the Capital. 
Later he resided in Washington, being mainly 
employed in the Hudson Bay Claims Commis- 
sion, to which he was secretary. He was also 
engaged in the arrangement of a large mass of 
manu.script bearing upon the ethnology and 
philologyof the American Indians. His services 
were availed of by the Smithsonian Institution 
to superintend its labors in this field, and to his 
energy and complete knowledge of the .subject 
it greatly owes its success in this branch of the 
service. The valuable and laborious .service 
which he rendered to the Institution was 
entirelygratuitous, andin his death that estab- 
lishment as well as the cause of science lost an 
ardent friend and an important contributor to 
its advancement. In 1871 Mr. Gibbs married 
his cousin, Miss Mary K. Gibbs, of Newport, 
K. I., and removed to New Haven, where he 
died on the !)th of April, 1873. 

[Gill (John Kaye).] Dictionary | of the 

I Chinook Jargon | with examples of | 

Use in Conversation. | (Compiled from 

all vocabularies, and greatly improved 

I by the addition of necessary words 

I never before published.) | Ninth 

edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | published by J. 
K. Gill & CO. I 93 First Street. [1882.] 

Cover title : A complete | dictionary | of the 
I Chinook Jargon. | English-Chinook and 
Chinook-English. | Ninth edition. | Revised, 
Corrected and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon. | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. I 1882. I Himes the printer. 

Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 
3-4, text pp. 5-62, 18°. 

English and Chinook, double columns, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 5-33.— Numerals 
1-12, 20, 30, 100, 1000, p. 33. -Chinook and Eng- 
lish, alphabetically arranged, pp. 34-57.— Con- 
versations, pp. 58-60. — The Lord's prayer, with 
interlinear English translation, pp. 61-62. 

Copies teen : Eames, Pilling. 

In the preparation of this dictionary Mr. 
Gill had, he informs me, the assistance of Rev. 
W. C. Chaltin. An eighth edition was pub- 
lished in 1878, in continuation of those issued 
by the firm of S. J. McCormick (see Blanchet 
(F. N.), whose stock was purchased by the firm 
of which Mr. Gill was a member. Of th.'>fc 
edition I have been luiable to locate a copy. 

"The first attempt at publication of the 
trappers' and traders' Indian Jargon in use 
among the coast and interior tribes of the 
Northwest was made in 1825, by a sailor [Jolin 
K. Jewitt] who was captured from the ship 



Gill (J.K.) — Continued. 

Boston, which was surprised by the Indians at 
Nootka Sound, her captain and crew murdered, 
the sailor who issued his adventures under 
tlie title, 'The Captive in Nootka' and later 
the ' Traders' Dictionary,' being the only sur- 
vivor. 

" Several little books, mostly for traders' use, 
have been printed in this Jargon. A worthy 
mi.ssionary [Rev. Myron Eells] publi.shed quite 
a number of hymns translated from English, in 
Cliinook, which has been the only use of the 
language iu the field of belles-lettres. 

" The language of the native Indians is sel- 
doirt heard. The progressive English is forcing 
it.s way even into the lodges of the most savage 
tribes; and many of the original Indian dialects 
of the coast, of which Chinook was the most 
important, have disappeared entirely, with the 
nations that spoke them. 

" Of the ancient languages of the Chiuooks, 
but two hundred words are given in the i)re8ent 
dictionary, the remainder being words from 
other coast tribes, Yakimas, Wascos, Nez 
Perce.s, and other tongues." — Preface. 

Mr. Gills statement in regard to the "first 
attempt at publication of the trappers' and 
traders' Indian Jargon," quoted above, needs a 
word of correction. Jewitt's work, first issued 
under the title of "A journal kept at Nootka 
Sound," Boston, 1807, contains no linguistic 
material. Later it was published with thetitle 
"A narrative of the adventures and sufi'erings 
of John R. Jewitt," Middletown, Connecticut, 
1815, .and went through a number of edititms. 
Tills work does not contain a Jargon vocabu- 
lary at all, but one in the Nootka language 
("Wakashan family). The work entitled " The 
Captive in Nootka" is not by Jewitt, but is a. 
compilation from his work by S. G. Goodrich 
(Peter Parley), and was first issued, so far as I 
know, Philadelphia, 1832. It contains a few 
Nootka words and phrases passim, but no 
vocabulary. Of the Traders' Dictionary, by 
Jewitt, of which Mr. Gill speaks, I have been 
unable to trace a single copy. 

[ ] Dictionary | of the | Chinook 

Jargon | with examples of | Its Use in 
Conversation. ] Compiled from all exist- 
ing vocabularies, and greatly | im- 
proved by the addition of necessary | 
words never before published. | Tenth 
edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | published by J. 
K. Gill «fc CO. I 1884. 

Cover title: Gill's | complete dictionary | of 
the I Chinook Jargon. | English-Chinook and 
Chinook-English. | Tenth edition, | Revised, 
(Corrected and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. I 1884. 

Cover title, title verso name of i)rinter 1 1. 
preface signed J. K. Gill & co. pp. 5-6, text pp. 
7-60, 18°. 



OHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



35 



Gill (J. K.) — Continnod. 

EuglisliCliinookdictioniirj', double columns, 
alphal)(!tically arrangod, i)p. 7-32. — Numerals, 
J). 32. — Chinook- Kiigli.sh dictionary, alphalx'ti- 
rally arranged, pp. '.Vi-tii. — Conversations, En- 
glishfJliinook, ])p. .')5-.')8. — Lord's prayer, witli 
interlinear English translation, pp. 59-60. 

Copies seen : Boston Athona3um, British 
Museum, Karnes, Pilling. 

[ ] l)i(itiouary | of the | Chinook Jar- 

f^on I with examples of J Use iu Con- 
versation. I (Compiled from all vocab- 
ularies, and greatly im- | proved by 
the addition of necessary words | never 
before published.) j Eleventh edition. | 

1887. I Portland, Oregon : | published 
by .1. K. Gill & co., | Booksellers and 
Stationers. 

('uver title: Diotion.iry | of the | Chinook 
Jargon, 1 [De.sign] | English-Chiuook and 
Chinook-English. I Eleventh edition. | Revised, 
Corrected and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon : | J. K. Gill & co., pul.lish- 
ers. I 1887. 

Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. explanatory 
suggestions verso blank 1 1. preface (un.signed 
and dated Jan. 1, 1887) pp. 5-6, text pp. 7-60, 18'=. 

Linguistic contents as in tenth edition titled 
next above. 

Copies seen : Harvard. 

Gill's I dictionarj^ | of the | Chinook 

Jargon | with examples of ( Use in 
Conversation. | (Compiled from all 
vocabularies, and greatly im- | proved 
by the addition of necessary words | 
never before published.) | Twefth edi- 
tion. I 

1889. I Portland, Oregon : | published 
by J. K. Gill & co., | Booksellers and 
Stationers. 

Cover title: Gill's | dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon, | [Picture of an Indian.] | 
English • Chinook and Chinook ■ English. | 
Twelfth edition. | Revised, Corrected and En- 
larged. I 

Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. I 1889. I Swope & Taylor, printers. 

Cover title, title verso copyright (1889) 1 1. 
explanatory suggestions pp. 3-4, preface pp. 5- 
6, text pp. 7-63, 18^. 

English-Chinook dictionary, double columns, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 7-32. — Numerals, 
p. 32.— Chinook-English vocabulary, alphabet- 
ically arranged, pp. 33-5t. — Conversation, Eng- 
lish-Chinook, pp. 55-58. — Lord's prayer in Jar- 
gon, with interlinear English tran.slation, pp. 
59-60. — Appendix, English-Chinook, double 
cohimns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 61-63. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

Gill's I dictionary | of the | Chinook 

Jargon | with examples of | Use in Con- 



Gill (J. K.) — Coniinned. 
versation. | (Compiled from all vocab- 
ularies, and greatly im- | prove<l by the 
addition of necessary words | never 
before published.) | Thirteenth edi- 
tion. I 

Portland, Oregon : | Published by J. 
K. Gill & Co., I Booksellers and Sta- 
tioners. I 1891. 

Cover title : Gill's dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon. | [Picture of an Indian.] | 
English -. Chinook and Cliiuook - English. | 
Thirlec'utli edition. | Revised, oorrocted and 
enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon : | J. K. Gill it co., publish- 
ers. I 1891. I S.C. Beach, printer. 

Cover title, title verso copyright (1891) 1 1. 
explanatory suggestions pp. 3-4, preface pp. 5- 
6, text pp. '7-63, 180. 

English-Chinook, double columns, alphabet- 
ically arranged, pp. 7-32. — Numerals 1-12,20, 
30, 100, 1000, p. 32.— Chinook-Englisli, alphabet- 
ically arranged, pp. 33-54. — Conversation, pp. 
55-58.— The Lord's pray<>r, with interlinear 
English translation, pp. 58-60. — Appendix, 
English-Chinook, pp. 61-63. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

In response to certain iucjuiries of mine, Mr. 
Gill writes me, under date of November 19, 1891, 
as follows : 

" In your favor of October 27th you re([uest 
us to supply you with a copy of each edition of 
the Chinook Jargon which we hav(^ published, 
and also to state what we may be aldeiu regard 
to the bibliographj'ot the Cliinookan languages. 

"So far as tlie Chinook Dictionai-y published 
by McCormick is concerned [see Blanchet (F. 
N.)], we doubt very much whether we could 
find, without advertising, a single copy of it at 
this time. We received from McCormick & 
Co. some dozens of them of difl'erent dates of 
publication, but uniform as to contents, when 
we bought the dictionary from them. Weeither 
disposed of or destroyed them j'ears ago. It is 
now about twelve years since we began the 
publication of our Dictionary of Chinook. The 
dictator of this letter compiled our dictionary 
and added hundreds of necessary words to the 
vocabulary of the English-Chinook, which is 
yet quite insufficient as a dictionary for ordi- 
nary civilized people, but more than equal to 
the demands of the Indians and settlers for 
whom it was intended. It is, at least, quite as 
extensive as need be, but not, perhaps, so well 
selected. I flatter myself that the dictionary 
we produced in 187S, which I believe was our 
earliest publication of it, was the first one 
based upon a right conception of the origin of 
many of the words comprising the Chinook 
vocabulary, and also a phonetic basis whieh 
should produce the form of all Chinook words 
and the simjilest style corresponding to our 
method of writing English. We have just 
issued a thirteenth edition of this dictionary, 



36 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Gill (J. K.) — Coutiuued. 

which corresponds with the last two. We also 
seud you a copy of the ninth edition, which I 
believe represents the previous eight editions 
and tlie succeeding ones up to the eleventh. 
The work was stereotyped when we got out our 
tirst edition, and the only change has been in 
the preface and appendix. I have learned 
much about the Chinook Jargon and other 
Indian tongues since the compilation of the 
first dictionary, and if it were to be rewritten 
today I should make some very .slight changes 
in tlie book. I do not think the changes 
required would ati'ect more than twelve of the 
root- words of the Cliinook, but I should make 
some research into the literature of the early 
part of this century and pass some time among 
tlie Indians mo.st proficient in the Chinook to 
find if posijibletho words used intertribally for 
'■coyote,'' 'rock,' 'Jir,' 'maple,' 'mountain,' 'hill,' 
the names of difl'erent parts of the human 
body, its diseases, and many other subjects and 
things which must have been referred to by 
words in common use before the white people 
came to this region, hut which the compilers 
of the early dictionaries seem to have entirely 
neglected. 

" When I began the compilation of our own 
it was only because we had to have a new edi- 
tion of the dictionary. The head of our firm 
considered the old one was ' plenty good 
enough,' and for that reason my labors in 
increasing the vocahularv, both Chinook and 
English, were greatly curtailed. His view of 
the matter was a business one, however, and 
mine the impracticable side of it. Probably 
within the time we have been publishing this 
dictionary (thirteen years) the Indians who 
were restricted to the use of Chinook in con- 
versation with the settlers of the North Pacific 
coast have decreased more than one-half in 
number. A great portion of these have died 
or been killed by our enterprising settlers (the 
probable reason for this killing being that the 
Indians lived up<m lands our people wanted; 
an example which they have had before them 
since the settlement of Manhattan and which 
they have not been slow to follow). Chinook 
is becoming a joke on the Pacific coast. White 
peojile learn it for the sake of attempting to talk 
with Indians, who speak just as good English 
as their would-be patrons and interlocutors. 
The sale for the books slowly decreases also. 

"You are probably aware that during the 
last year a valuable book upon the Chinook was 
issued in London, written by Horatio Hale, 
M. A., E. R. S. C. It is the most ambitious 
publication on this subject which has ever 
been attempted, and to me il is a marvel that 
this work should have seen the light in Lon- 
don, so remote from any apparent interest in, 
or knowledge of, the Chinook. If you have it 
you will find that Mr. Hale has followed nearly 
the same system of spelling as that I adopted 
a dozen years ago. I judge that my dictionary 
was his model, to some extent, from the fact 



Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 

that he spells the word kloshe as I do; also 
klone, Hook, etc., which in some of the other 
vocabularies have been spelled with a 'c' 
instead of ' k ' and with a final ' se ' instead of 
' she,' and, in fact, three or four different ways 
of spelling for the same word. Mr. Hale uses 
Huh for the verb to tear, to rend, to plow, etc. 

" Now, this word, as I hear it spoken among 
the Indians, ends gutturally, and for that rea- 
son I .spelled it as I have heard it pronounced, 
Hugh. Mr. Hale accents the last syllable of 
klahane and spells the last syllable nie, 
which would make his pronounciation of the 
word very different from mine. Mine, I know, 
is the common, in fact, universal expression. I 
am often moved to open a correspondence witli 
Mr. Hale on the subject of his book because of 
his icouoclasm. He attempts to prove too much, 
as I l)elieve, and would make it appear that 
Chinook did not exist as an intertribal language 
prior to its necessity for the use of the trapper 
and tlie trader. I am convinced of the contrary. 
Within the year I have talked with an Indian 
who was a man grown when Lewis and Clarke 
came to this country, and have his assurance 
that the Klikitat, Multnomah, Clatsop, Chinook, 
and other tribes all talked to each other in this 
ancient Volapiik upon matters of business or 
any other inter-tribal affairs, while each tribe 
had its own language. I have said something 
on this subject in the preface to our dictionary. 
Mr. Hale's book has given me much pleasure in 
reading over his collection of Chinook romantic 
songs and examples of the common use of the 
language. It is not strange if there should be 
a wide difference in the pronunciation and use 
of the language between San Erancisco Bay 
and Sitka, between the mouth of the Columbia 
and the top of the Rocky Mountains. 

"Mr. Hale mentions one or two books or 
pamphlets which I liave not seen, but shall 
take my first opportunity to procure, giving 
more space to the Chinook. 

" I inclose you several books which I think 
you will be glad to get. . . . 

"You will see that none of these different 
books attempt to give the accent, and leave the 
learner entirely at a loss as to the force of 
the words. For instance, the Chinook word 
for blanket, pasesee (spelled in two or three 
ways by the different publishers), is properly 
pronounced with the accent on the second syl- 
lable. You will see how very different the 
word becomes if you attempt to accent the first 
or last syllables. I can assure you that there 
are no differences in our publications of the 
Chinook dictionary excepting what I have 
referred to in the two examples sent you. The 
books from other sources which I send are the 
only editions which had appeared at the time 
I procured them and I think they have noue of 
them been duplicated since." 

In response to criticism made by me in regard 
to the above, more especially of that portion of 
it relating to Jewitt's work (see under firat 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



37 



Gill .(J. K.) — Conhinned. 

(iill title above), Air. (}ill writes nic, iiuderdatc 
of October G, 1892, as I'ollows : 

"As to ray argmneiit that the Jargon was of 
an earlier date than 1820, T have to say that T 
wont rapidly last eveuin<r thronjili my copy of 
.lewitt's "Cai)tiv(> of Nootka " (18G1), and 
found scattered through tins following words, 
which I am sure have a relation more than 
accidental to tlie present Chinook. 

"Jewitt uses the word poiv for the firing of a 
gun. He speaks of an edible root called qua- 
nooee and another, yama. the latter doubtless 
a form of kainax and the fornit^r probably of 
koiise, both of which roots are still eaten by 
many of our jirimiti ve Indians. Tyee is identical 
with the present word for the deity or any- 
thing great. I'eUh-pelth is evidently pilpil; 
■peshak (bad) is also identical. Three other words 
used by Jewitt, kutnak, ijuahootze, and ahwelth, 
are all rather familiar to me in sound, and if I 
had time to hunt them up I believe I c(mld 
connect two of them with Chinook readily. 

"Now, I do not claim that the Chinook Jar- 
gon originated at the mouth of the Columbia 
Kiver, where the Chinook Indians lived, but 
that it was an intertribal language of quite 
ancient date, and used at first by the coast 
tribes, whose intercourse was much more fre- 
quent than those of the interior. It spread by 
the Columbia River and throvigh waterways, at 
last reaching the Rocky Mountains, and cov- 
ered the coast from San Francisco Bay to the 
Arctic. As the trading was done largely at 
Nootka Sound a centurj' ago, that, language 
would naturally be largely represented in such 
a jargon, but the fact that the oldest white 
peojtle who have made any records of this 
Oregon regmn have used tyee as a name for God, 
chuck for water, WosAe for good, etc., and that 
the same things are found in the Nootka and 
other northern tongues, other than the original 
Jargon, seems to mo only to prove my position. 
Jewitt encountered these words as long ago as 
1803, which certainly gives me reason for my 
theory that the Chinook is of an earlier date 
than opponents concede. The whole of Jewitt's 
narrative is so palpably that of a simple, old- 
time sailor spinning bis yarn, which bears 
internal evidence of its truth, and which agrees 
with established facts and circumstances on 
this northwest coast, that it leaves us no doubt 
as to the existence of most of the things -he 
speaks of though he was not a man of suffi- 
cient observation and experience to make the 
best use of his opportunities. When he wrote 
yama for kamaxs it may have been days or 
months from the time of hearing it, and ^vrote 
his remembrance, perhaps, of a word which may 
have been pronounced differently when he 
actually heard it. Authors who have edited 
Jewitt's work have taken some liberties with his 
text, and improved, according to their notions, 
upcni it. Like that Scotch pastor who, hearing 
Shakespeare's 'Sermons in stones, books in the 
running brooks,' and being convinced that the 



Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 

printer had done the poet injustice, said: 'Ay, 
he meant s(unions in books, stones in the run- 
ning brooks,' so many a simple story is made 
to serve the purpose of jiedagogism and quite 
loses its intended character. 

" The Nootka Indians in 1803, when Jewitt 
was among them, wore in the habit of using the 
words which I have quoted above among them- 
selves. There were no whites in the country 
excepting Jewitt and his companions, and the 
inference is that the Indians used only the lan- 
guage whicli was familiar to them, and not in 
any sense to accommodate their expressi(ni to 
Jewitt's comprehension. In sjieaking with 
strangers of other tribes, howe\'er, tli(\v would 
probably do wh.at Americans who converse 
with Germans sometimes do, that is, interpolate 
German words (if they know any) iu tlieir 
English conversation, with the idea that they 
exhibit their own knowledge, or that they set 
their auditor at ease. As Jewitt was of a dif- 
ferent race, the Jise of the words above may 
have been impressed upon hiui rather than the 
words which may have been in use for the 
same things in the nati ve tongue of the Nootkas. 
But if tins words are Nootka, as you insist, and 
I am willing to admit they may be, there is no 
doubt about their having been transplanted to 
the mouth of the Columbia and having spread 
into the interior of the Pacific Slope — a trans- 
planting which may have been from either 
source, as you can readilj' see. Andas the earliest 
whites on the Columbia heard the same words 
in use by Indians who spoke languages whicli 
were Greek to the Indians on Puget Sound and 
Vancouver Island, the fact is all the more cer- 
tainly established that many words were com- 
mon among a number of tribes who had their 
ovm native words also for the same things. As 
Jewitt gives but a dozen or less Indian words 
altogether in the edition of his book which I 
have, and at least six of them are congeners of 
the Chinook, I am inclined to think that if he 
had used sixty words of the people among whom 
he lived, he might have shown us the same 
proportion of Chinook words, and it is but fair 
to consider that he would not have chosen only 
words which were of this common Jargon." 

Mr. Gill's comments were forwarded by me 
to Mr. Horatio Hale, the author of the "Manual 
of the Oregon trade language or Chinook Jar- 
gon" referred to by Mr. Gill, who comments as 
follows : 

"In preparing my account of the Chinook 
Jai'gon for the enterprising London publishers, 
Messrs. Whittaker & Co., I had not the advan- 
tage of being able to refer to Mr. Gill's dic- 
tionary, which I have never seen. From his 
account of it, I have no doubt that it would 
have been of material service in my task. His 
care in marking the accented syllables is a 
scholarly precaution which compilers of such 
vocabularies are too apt to neglect. 

" My materials were derived mainly from 
my own collections, made iu Oregon in 1841, 



38 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OP THE 



Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 

and published iii 1846 in my volume of the IT. 
S. Exploring Expedition series. These were 
supplemented by later information obtained 
from the excellent dictionary of George Gibbs 
and from the letter.s and publications of Mr. 
Eells and Dr. Boas. I should have preferred to 
retain the ' scientific orthography' (consonants 
as in English, vowels as in Italian) which was 
adopted in my former work ; but as the. Jargon 
has now become, through its use by the mis- 
sionaries and others, a written language with 
the English orthography, it seemed proper to 
adopt that spelling, merely adding tlie scien- 
tific forms in parentheses as a guide to the pro- 
nunciation. 

"The word meaning out, which Mr. Gill 
spells klahane (dividing it in his dictionary, I 
presume, to show that it is a trisyllable) is 
written by Mr. Eells in his sermon printed in 
my Jargon volume (p. 32) klahanie (klahanie 
kopa town, out of town) , and by Mr. Gibbs, Uah- 
hanie, or klagh-anie, witli the accent affixed to 
the last syllable. The Jargon has several tri- 
syllables of this sort, such as saghalie or «a/i- 
halie, above, keekwilee, below, illahie, earth, 
which are variously written, and are accented 
indifferently on the first or on the last syllable. 
"In Mr. Gill's suggestion that 'Chinooli 
existed as an intertribal language prior to the 
necessity of the use of the trapper and trader,' 
he evidently confounds, as many do, the proper 
Chinook language with the Jargon, or artificial 
trade language. The Indians of Oregon terri- 
tory were quick in learning languages, and 
some of them could speak five or six native 
idioms. The genuine Chinook, being spoken 
by a tribe holding a central position along the 
Columbia River, and nmch gi^on to trade, would 
naturally be known to many natives of other 
tribes, and would be frequently spoken in inter- 
tribal intercourse, lilce the Chippewa among 
the eastern Indians and the Malay in the East 
Indian Archipelago. This was doubtless what 
was meant by Mr. Gill's aged native informant 
in referring to the Chinook as the common 
medium of intercourse before the white traders 
visited the country. That he could have 
referred to the Jargon is simply impossible, as 
the internal eyidence of Its structure suffi- 
ciently shows. 

"Both philology and ethnography are much 
indebted to the thoughtful labors of intelligent 
inquirers likeMr. Gill in preserving these inter- 
estingrelics of vanishing idioms and aboriginal 
customs. I ought, perhaps, to add that though 
the use of the Jargon is dying out, for the rea- 
son which Mr. Gill so pithily gives, in the 
country of its origin — the Pacific coast region 
south of Puget Sound— it is extending in 
British Columbia and Alaska, and seems 
likely to do good service there for many years 
to come." 

Gill's complete dictionary of tlie Chinook 
Jargon. See Gill (J. K.) 



Gill's dictionary of the Chinook Jargon^ 

(1889-1891.) See Gill (J. K.) 
Good (jRev. John Booth). A vocabulary 
I and I outlines of grammar | of the | 
Nitlakapamuk | or | Thompson tongue, 
I (The Indian language spoken 
between Yale, Lillooet, | Cache Creek 
and Nicola Lake.) | Together with a 
I Phonetic Chinook Dictionary, | 
Adapted for use in the Province of | 
British Columbia. | By J. B. Good, S. 
P. G. missionary, Yale-Lytton. | By aid 
of a Grant from the Right Hon. Superin- 
tendent of Indian | Affairs, Ottawa. | 

Victoria : | Printed, by the St. Paul's 
Mission Press, (S. P. C. K.) | Collegiate 
School, '1880. 

Cover title differing from the above in one 
lino of the imprint only ("Victoria, B.C.:"), 
tithi as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 5-6, 
text pp. 8-46, 8°. 

Chinook [Jargon] dictionary. English-Chin- 
ook, alphabetically arranged, in double col- 
umns, containing about 750 words and the 
numerals 1-11, 20, 30, 100. 1000, occupies the even 
numbered pages 8-30, the Thompson vocabu- 
lary occurring on the alternate, odd-numbered 
pages. — Conversations, English-Chinook, pp. 
32, 34. — The Lord's prayer in Jargon, with inter- 
linear translation in English, p. 34. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Dunbar, Eames, 
Mallet, Pilling, Wellesley. 
Grammar : 

Chinook See Boas (F.) 

Grammatic comments: 

Chinook See Gallatin (A.) 

Chinook Hale (H.) 

Chinook Jargon Crane (A.) 

Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) 

Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 

AVatlala Bancroft (H, H.) 

Grammatic treatise : 

Chinook See Boas (F.) 

Chinook Miiller (F.) 

Chinook Jargon Bulmer (T. S.) 

Chinook Jargon Demers (M.) et al. 

Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 

Grasserie (Raoul de la). Etudes | de | 
grammaire comparee | Des relations 
grammaticales | consid^r^es dans leur 
concept et dans leur expression | ou de 
la I categoric des cas | par | Raoul de 
la Grasserie | docteur en droit | Juge 
au Tribunal de Rennes | Membre de la 
Socicte de Linguistique de Paris. | 

Paris I Jean Maisonneuve, editeur | 
25, quai Voltaire, | 25 | 1890 

Printed cover as above, half-title verso blank 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-344, contents pp. 345- 
351, 8'3. 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



39 



Grasserie (R.) — Continued. 

Examples iroiii several North American lan- 
gUageH (ire made use of by tbo author : Nahiiatl, 
Dakota, Othomi, Maya, Quiche, Totonaque, 
Iroquois. Athai>aske, Chiapaileque, Sahaptin, 
Tcherokess, Algonquin, Tarasqnc, Esiialman, 
Tchinuk, Choctaw, pp. IT, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 
84, 129-132, 133, 177, 325-326, 394, 395. 
Copies seen : Gatschet. 

Greely: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been .seen by the 
compiler in the library of Gen. A. "VV". Greely, 
"Washington, D. C. 

Green (J. S.) Extracts from the report 
of an exploring tour ou tlie northwest 
coast of North America in 1829, by Rev. 
J. S. Green. 

In the Missionary Herald, vol. 26, pp. 343-345, 
Boston 1 1830], 8^. (Pilling.) 

"Their language," p. 344, includes four 
pbra.ses in the language of Queen Charlotte 
Island compared with the same in ihB Jargon 
of the tribes. 



Guide-Book to the Gokl Regions of 
Frazer River. "With a map of tlie dif- 
ferent routes, «SrCi 

New York, 1858. (*) 

55 pp. 24^. 

A vocabulary of tlie Jargon, pp. 45-55. 

Title and note from Gibbs's Dictionary of 
the Chinook Jargon. 
Guide 1 to the province of | British Co- 
lumbia, I for I 1877-8. | Compiled from 
tlie latest and most authentic sources | 
of information. | 

Victoria: | T. N. Hibben & co., pub- 
lishers. I 1877. 

Title verso (copyright notice (1877) and name 
of printer 1 1. i)reface verso bhiuk 1 1. cwuteuts 
pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-374, advertisements pp- 
375-410, S'^. 

Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Indian 
trade language of tlie Pacific coast. Part I, 
Chinook-English, pp. 232-239,— Part II. Eng- 
lish-Chinook, pp. 240-249. Each alphabetically 
arranged. 

Copies seen .- British Musemn, Eames, Pilling, 



H. 



Haines (Elijah Middlebrook). The j 
American Indian J (Uh-uish-iu-na-ba), 
] The Whole Subject Complete in One 
A''olume j lUustiated with Numerous 
Appropriate Eugravings. | By E.lij.ah 
M. Haines. | [Design.] j 

Chicago: | the Mas-sin-BL^-gan conj- 
pany, ] 1888, 

Title verso eopyrighit notice (1888) etc. 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-yiii,, .contents and list of illus- 
trations pp. 9-22; text pp.23-^821, large 8^. 

Chapter vi, Indian tribes, pp. 121-171, gives 
special lists and a genenil alpJiabetjclistof the 
tribes of North America, derivations of tribal 
names being frequently given:; among them 
the Chinook, pp. 131-132.— Chapter ix. Indian 
languages <pp. 184-212) contains much lin- 
guistic material relating .to the North Ameri- 
can peoples; iimongst it "the Chinook J9;rgon," 
■orhieh includes a general discussion of the lan- 
guage, p. 211, .and a vocabulary of 90 words, 
ailpliabetacally arranged by English words, pp. 
211-212.— Chapter xxxvi. Numeiralsand the use 
of numbers (pp. 433-451) includes the numer- 
als 1-12, 20, 100 (from Schoolcraft), p. 445.— 
Cliapter Iv. Vocabularies (668-703) includes a 
■"Vocab.ulary comparing pronouns and other 
p.TTts lof :8peech (J.,t/(o«, At^, .(/es, no) in the dia- 
lects of vai-iaus Indian tribes, among them the 
Chinook, 31. 676. 

(Copies seen :: Comgress, Eamea, Pilling. 

Haldeman (Samiuel S;tehman ) . Analytic 
aorttJiogi^apihy:: I aaa I investigation of the 
.«0Uind8 of the Vioice, i and their al})ha- 
ibetic nwtatioii ; | including | the mech- 
anism of apeecii, I and its beai'ingupon 



Haideman (S. S.) — Continued. 

I etymology, j By | S. S. Haideman, A. 
M., I professor m Delaware college ; | 
jnember ,[&c.. six lines.] | 

Philadelphia: | J. B.Lippincott&co. 
I London: Triibuer & co. Paris: Ben- 
jamin Duprat. I Berlin: Ferd. DUmm- 
ler. I 1860. 

Half-title (Trevelyan prize essay) verso blank 
1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi,contents 
pp. vii-viii, slip of additional corrections, text 
pp. 5-147, corrections and additions p. 148, 4°. 

Numerals 1-10 in a number of American lan- 
guages, among them the Chinook, "dictated 
by Dr. J. K. Townsend," p. 146. 

Copies seen : Boston Athenasum, British Mu- 
seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Trumbull. 

First printed in American Philosoph. Soc. 
Trans, new series, vol. 11. (*) 

Samuel Stehmau Haideman. naturalist, was 
born in Locust Grove, Lancaster County, Pa., 
August 12, 1812; died in Chickies, Pa., Septem- 
ber 10, 1880. He was educated at a classical 
school in Harrisburg and then spent two years 
in Dickinson College. In 1836 Henry D. 
Rogers, having been appointed State geologist 
ot New Jersey, sent for Mr. Haideman, who 
had been his pupil at Dickinson, to assist him. 
A year later, on the reorganization of the 
Pennsylvania geological survey, Haideman 
was transferred to his own State, and was 
actively engaged on the survey until 1842. He 
ma«le extensive researches among Indian dia- 
lects and also in Pennsylvania Dutch, besides in- 
vestigations in the English, Chine.se, and other 
laugna.gea.—Appleton'g Cyclop. 0/ Am. Biog. 



40 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Hale (Horatio), United States | explor- 
ing expedition. | During tlie years | 
1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the 
command of | Charles Wilkes, U. S. N. 
I Vol. YI. I Ethnogr.iphy and philol- 
ogy. I By I Horatio Hale, | philologist 
of the expedition. | 

Pliiladelphia: | ]>rinted by C. Sher- 
man. I 1846. 

H.ilf-title (Unitetl States exploring expedi- 
tion, by .luthority of Congress) verso blank 1 1. 
title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vii, alphabet 
pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3- 
C66, map, 4°. 

Languages of northwestern America (pp. 
553-650) contains general remarks and ex.am- 
ples of the languages of the peoples of that 
region, including the Tshiuuk family, pp. 562- 
564. — Remarks on the voi'.abiilaries, pp. 567- 
568. — Vocabulary (600 words) of the Tshinuk 
(Watlala or Cascade Indians, Nihaloitih or 
Echeloots, Tshiuuk, Tlatsop or (^latsops, 
VTakaikam or Wahkyecums), pp. 570-629. — The 
"Jargon" or trade language of Oregon .(pp. 
635-650) contains remarks on its origin, pp. 635- 
636. — Lists of 17 words derived from the 
Nootka, 41 words from the English, 100 words 
from the Tshinuk, 33 words from the French, 
12 words by ouomiitopceia, and 38 doubtful, pp. 
636-639. — Remarks on the phonology, grammar, 
etc. (including the numerals 1-10, 100, and the 
pronouns), pp. 640-644. — .Short sentences with 
English equivalents, pp. 644-646. — Vocabulary 
(English-Chinook, .about 325 words), pp. 646-650. 

For a reprint of much of this material see 
Gallatin (A.) 

Copies seen : Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Lenox, Trumbull. 

At the Squier sale, no. 446, a copy brought 
$13 ; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, half maroon 
- morocco, top edge gilt, $13. 

Issued also with the following title : 

United States | exploring expedi- 
tion. I During the years | 1838, 1839, 
1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command 
of I Charles Wilkes, U. S. N. | Ethnog- 
raphy and philology. | By | Horatio 
Hale, 1 philologist of the expedition. | 

Pliiladelphia: | Lea and Blanchard. 
1 1846. 

Half-title (United St.ates exploring expedi- 
tion) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. con- 
tents pp. v-vii, alphabet pp. ix-xii, half-title 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen : Eames, Lenox. 

Was America peopled from Poly- 
nesia? 

In CongrSs Int. des Am6ricanistes, Compte- 
rendu, 7th session, pp. 375-387, Berlin, 1890, 8°. 
(Eames, Pilling.) 



Hale (H.) — Continued. 

Table of the pronouns 7, thou, we (inc.),w« 
(oxc), ye, iind they in the languagesof Polynesia 
and of western America, pp. 386-387, includes 
the Tshiuuk. p. 386. line 21. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows : 

Was America peopled from Polyne- 
sia? | A study in comparative Philol- 
ogy- I By I Horatio Hale. | From tlie 
Proceedings of the International Con- 
gress of Americanists | ;it Berlin, in 
October 1888. | 

Berlin 1890. | Printed by H. S. Her- 
mann. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-15, 8°. 

Pronouns in the Languages of Polynesia and 
of western America, including the Tshinuk, p. 
14. 

Copies seen : Pilling, Wellesley. 

An international idiom. | A manual 

of the I Oregon trade language, | or | 
"Chinook Jargon." | By Horatio Hale, 
M. A., F. R. S. C, I member [etc. six 
lines. J I 

Loudon: | Whittaker &. co.. White 
Hart Street, | Paternoster square. | 
1890. 

Half-title verso bliink 1 1. title verso ntimes 
of printers 1 1. prefatory note verso extract 
from a work by Quatrefages 1 1. contents verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-63, 16^. 

The Oregon trade langu.age, pp. 1-3. — Its 
origin and composition, pp. 3-9. — Orthography 
.and pronunciation (pp. 9-12) includes three short 
comparative vocabularies — Chinook, Chinook 
Jai'gou, and meaning; English, Jargon, and 
meaning; French. Jargon, and meaning, pp. 9- 
11. — Grammar, including numerals and a list 
of pronouns, pp. 12-19. — The past and future of 
the Jargon, pp. 19-21. — The language as spoken 
(pp. 22-38) includes a list of sentences and 
phrases, pp. 22-23 ; songs (from Swan and Boas) 
with English translations, pp. 24-25; hymns 
(from Eells), with English translation,pp. 26-27; 
sermon (from Eells's manuscript), in English, 
pp. 28-31; the same in Jargon, with interlinear 
English transl.ation, pp. 32-37; the Lord's 
prayer (from Eells) in Jargon, with interlinear 
translation into English, pp. 37-38. — Tradelan- 
guage, alphabetically arranged, in double col- 
umns, by Jargon words, pp. 39-52. — English 
and tr.ade Ian guage, alphabetically arranged, in 
double columns, by English words, pp. 53-63. 

"This dictionary, it should be stated, is, in 
the main, a copy (with some additions and cor- 
rections) of that of George Gibbs [q.v.}, pub- 
lished by the Smithsonian Institution in 1863, 
and now regarded as the standard authority, so 
far as any can be said to exist; but it may be 
added that the principal part of that collection 
was avowedly derived by the estimable com- 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



41 



Hale (H.) — Continued. 

pilcrfroin my own vocabulary, published sevon- 
teeu year.s bol'oro." 

Copies ieen ; Eames, Pilling. 

For critical reviews of this work, seo Oha- 
rencey (II. do), Crane (A.), Leiand (C (1.), 
Reade (J.), and Western. 

Horatio Half, etiiuologist, born in Newport, 
N. H., Maylt, 1«17, w.is graduated at Harvard in 
18,'i7 and was appointed in tlu* same year philolo- 
gist to the United States exploring expedition 
under Capt. Charles Wilkes. In this i;ai)aeity 
be studied a large number of the languages of 
the Pacitic islands, as well as of North and 
South America, Australia, and .\frica, and also 
investigated the history, traditions, and cus- 
toms of the tribes speaking tliose languages. 
The results of his inquiries are given in his 
Ethnography and Philology (Philadelphia, 
1846), which forms the seventh volume of the 
expedition reports. Ho has published nmnerous 
memoirs on .antlu'opology and ethnology, is a 
member of many learned societies, both in 
Europe and in America, and in 1886 was vice- 
president of the American Association for the 
Advancement of Science, presiding over the 
section of anthropology. — Appleton's Cyclop, of 
Am. Bioq. 
Harvard: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Harvard University, 
Cambridge, Mass. 

[Hayden (Ferdinand Vandcver)], In 
charge. Department of tlie interior. | 
Bulletin | of | the United States | Geo- 
logical and geographical survey ) of | 
the territories. | No. l[-Vol. VI]. | 

Washington: | Government printing 
office. I 1874[-1881]. 

6 vols. 8=. 

Eells (M.), The Twana Indians, vol. 3, pp. 57- 
114. 

Copies seen : Geological Survey. 

Hazlitt (William Carew). British 
Columbia, | and | Vancouver island; | 
comprising | a historical sketch of the 
British settlements | in the north-west 
coast of America; | And a Survey of 
the I physical character, capabilities, 
climate, topography, | natural liistory, 
geology and ethnology | of that region ; 
I Compiled from Official and other 



Hazlitt (W. C.) — Continued. 
Authentic Sources. | By | William 
Carew Hazlitt, | author of [«fec. two 
lines.] I With a map. | 

London: | G. Koiitleilgo &, co., Far- 
ringdon street. | New York: | 18 Beek- 
man street. | 1858. ( (The author 
reserves the right of Translation.) 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. iireface ])p. v-vi, contents pp. 
vii-viii, text pp. 1-2411, appendix i)p. 241 -247, 
colophon p. 24H, 16'^. 

Vocabulary of the (Jhinook Jargon (365 
words and phrases, and the numerals 1-12, 100, 
1000) from the San Francisco Hiilletiu, June 4 
1 18.58], pp. 241-24;i. See Chinook. 

Copies seen: IJaucroft, British Museum, Con- 
gress, H.arvard. 

The I great gold fields of | Cariboo; 

I with an autlientic description, 
brought down | to the latest period, ] 
of I British Columl)ia j and | Vancouver 
island. | By William Carew Hazlitt, | 
of the Inner temple, barrister-at-law. | 
With an accurate map. | 

London: | Routledge, Warne, and 
Rotitledge, | Farringdon street. | New 
York : 56, Walker street. | 18()2. 

Title verso names of printers 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-v, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-165, appen- 
dices pj). 166-184. 16°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon as noted 
under title next above, pp. 179-180. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
naeum. 

This author's Cariboo, the neivly discovered 
gold fields of British Columbia, London, 1862, 
does not contain the vocabulary. 
Hymn-book : 

. Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargim 



Seo Eells (M.) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 



Hymns : 

Cascade 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinooli Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 



See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Blanchet (F. N.) 
Tate (CM.) 
Bulmer (T. S.) 
Demers (M.) et al. 
Everette (W. E.) 
Eells (M.) 
Hale(H.) 
Macleod (X. D.) 
St.Onge (L.N.) 



42 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



J. 



Jacques Cartier School : These words following a 
title or inclosed within parentheses after a note 
indicate that a copy of the work referred to 
has been seen by the compiler in the library of 
that institution, Montreal. 

Jehan (Louis-Franc^ois). Troisieme et 
derniere | Encyclopedic th<^ologique, | 
l&c. twenty-four lines] | publi^e | par 
M. I'abb^ Migne | [&c. six lines.] | 
Tome trente-quatrifeme. | Dictionnaire 
de linguistique. | Tome unique. | Prix : 
7 francs. | 

S'Imprime et se vend chez J. -P. Migne, 
^diteur, | aux ateliers catlioliques, rue 
d'Amboise, an Petit-Montrouge, | Bar- 
rifere d'enfer de Paris. | 1858. 

Second title : Dictionnaire | de | linguistique 

I et I de philologie comparee. | Histoire de 
toutes les langues mortes et vivantes, | Ou | 
traite coinpletd'idioniographie, | embrassant | 
Texamen critique des systferaes et de toutes les 
questions qui se rattachent I ^ I'origine et ii la 
filiation des langues, a leur essence organique 

I et k leurs rapports avec I'histoire des races 
humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Pr6c6de. 
d'un I Essai sur le role du langage dans revo- 
lution de 1 'intelligence humaine. | Par L.-F. 
Jehan (de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Soci- 
6t6 g6ologique de France, de 1' Acad6mie royale 
des sciences de Turin, etc. | [Quotation, three 
lines.J I Publie | parM. TAbb^ Migne, | editeur 
de la Biblioth6que universelle du clergS, | ou | 
des cours complets sur chaque branche de la 
science ecclesiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 
7 francs. | 

S'Imprime et se vend chez J. -P. Migne, edi- 
teur, I aux ateliers catholiques, rue d'Amboise, 
au Petit-Montrouge, | Barridre d'enfer de 

Paris. I 18,58. 

Outside title 1 1. titles as above 2 11. columns 

(two to a page) 9-1448, large 8°. 
See under title next below for linguistic con 

tents. 

Copies seen : British Museum. 

Troisieme et derniere | Eucyclop^die 

I tbeologique, | ou troisieme et der- 
niere I serie de dictionu aires svir toutes 
les parties de la science religieuse, | 
oftrant en frangais, et par ordre alpha- 
b^tique, I la plus claire, la plus facile, 
la plus commode, la plus vari6e | et la 
plus complete des theologies: | [&c. 



Jehan (L. F.) — Continued. 

seventeen lines] publiee | parM.l'abb^ ' 
Migne, | [&c. six lines.] | Tome trente- 
quatrieme. | Dictionnaire de linguis- 
tique. I Tomeunique.j Prix: 8 francs. | 
S'Imprime etse vend cliez.J.-P. Migne, 
oditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue 
d'Amboise, 20, au Petit-Montrouge, | 
autrefois Barriere d'enfer de Paris, 
maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 

/Second title: Dictionnaire | de | linguistiqAie 
I et 1 de philologie comparee. | Histoire de 
toutes I les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | 
trait6completd'idiomographie, | embrassant | 
I'examen critique des systfemes et de toutes les 
questions qui se rattachent | a I'origine et a la 
filiation des langues, a leur essence organique 
I et a leurs rapports avec I'histoire des races 
humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Pr6ced6 
d'un I Essai sur le role du langage dans revo- 
lution de I'intelligence humaine. | Par L.-F. 
Jehan (de Saint-Clavien). | Membre de la Soci- 
ety gC'ologique de France, del' Acad6mie royale 
des sciences de Turin, etc. | [Quotation, three 
lines.] I Publie | par M. I'abbe Migne, 6diteur 
de la Bibliotheque universelle du clerg6, | ou I 
• des cours complets sur chaque branche de la 
1 science ecclesiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix : 
\ 7 francs. I 

/ S'iinijrime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, Odi- 
teur, I aux ateliers catholiques, rue d'Amboise, 
20, au Petit-Montrouge, | autrefois Barri6re 
- d'enfer de Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 
1 First title Terso"avis important" 1 1. second 
. title verso printer 1 1. introduction numbered 
' by columns 9-208, text in double columns 209- 
1250, notes additionnelles columns 1249-1432, 
table des matieres columns 1433-1448, large 8°. 
} The article "Colombienne," columns 435^36, 
contains a brief enumeration only of the tribes 
speaking languages of five difi'erent families, 
of which two are Chinook, viz : 

2° Colombienne inferieure, including the dia- 
lects of the Ecbeloots, the Skilloots, the Wah- 
kiacum, the Catlilamahs, the Chinuooks, the 
Clatsops, and the Chilts. 

3" (Multnomah, including the dialects of the 
Multnomah, the Cathlacumup, the Cathlanah- 
quiah, the Cathlacomatup, the Clannahmina- 
muni, the Clahnaquah, the Quathlapottes, the 
Shotos, the Cathlahaws, and the Clackumos. 
Copies seen : Eames. 

Johnson (Frank). See Gatschet (A. S.) 

Julg (B.) See Vater (J. S.) 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



43 



K. 



Keane (Augnstns H.) Ethnography 
and philology of America. By A. H. 
Keano. 

Tn Bates (H. W.), Central America, the West 
Indies, etc. i)i>. 44;i-561, London, 1878, 8°. 

General srlieiiie of A7neii<iin races and lan- 
guages (pp. 4fU) 4i)7) includes a list of tlic 
brandies of flu- Chinimkan family, divided into 
languages and dialects, p. 474. -Alphabetical 
list of all laiown American tribes and lan- 
guages, ])p. 4i»8-.'J(')l. 

Reprinted in the 1882 and 188') editions of the 
same work and on the same pages. 



Keane (A. IT.) — Continued. 

American Indians. 

In Encydopadia Uritannica, ninth edition, 
vol. 12, pp. 822-830, New York, 1881, royal 8°. 

Columbia Ka<'e8, p. 82G, includes thedivisions 
of the Chiiiookan. 
Knipe (liei-. C.) [Comitarative A-ocahn- 
lary of the Chinook and Tahkaht.] 

Manuscript, 3 leaves, folio, written on one 
aide only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology. Included in an article by Mr. Knipe, 
entitled: T^oUta on the Indian tribes of the 
northwest coast of America. 



L. 



Langevin (H. L.) British Colnmhia. | 
Report of the hon. H. L. Langevin, C. 
B., I minister of pnhlic works. | Printed 
hy order of parliament. | [Vignette.] | 

Ottawa: | printed by I. B. Taylor, 29, 
31 and 33, Kideau street. | 1872. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
hlank 1 1. contents pp. iii-iv, [list of] appen- 
dices pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-55, appendices pp. 56- 
246, 8°. 

A])pendix CC. A dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon, or Indian trade language of the north 
I'acilic coast. Published by T. N. Hibben and 
Co., Victoria, B.C. Tart I. Chinook-English, 
pp. 161-173. Part II. English-Chinook, pp. 174- 
182. 

Copies seen : Georgetown. 

Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous 
contributions to the ethnography of 
North America. By R. G. Latham, M.l). 

In Philological Soc. [of LondonJ.Proc. vol. 2, 
pp. 31-50 [London], 1846, 8°. ((Congress.) 

Contains a number of Cathlascon terms in 
the comparative lists of words. 

Keprinted in the same author's Opusc-ula, pp. 
275-297, for title ot which see below. 
On the languages of the Oregon ter- 
ritory. By R. G. Latham, M. 1). Read 
before the Society on the 11th Decem- 
ber, 1844. 

In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1, 
pp. 154-166, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. (Congress.) 

A vocabulary of the Shoshonee, showing 
"affinities (such as they are) " with a number 
of American languages, among them the 
Chinook and Cathlascon, j^p. 159-160. 

This article reprinted in the same author's 
Opuscula, pp. 249-264, for title of which see 
below. 
The I natural history | of | the varie- 
ties of man. | By | Robert Gordon 



Latham (R. G. ) — Continued. 

Latham, M. D., F. R. S., | late fellow of 
King's college, Cambridge ; | one of the 
vice-presidents of the Ethnological soci- 
ety, London; | corresponding member 
to the Ethnological society, | New 
York, etc. | [Monogram in shield.] | 

London : | John Van Voorst, Pater- 
noster row. 1 M. D. CCCL [1850]. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso namea 
of printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xv, 
explanation of plates verso blank 1 1. contents 
pp. xix-xxviii, text pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, 
list of works by Dr. Latham verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

Division E, American Mongolida' (pp, 287- 
460) includes a classification of a number of 
North American families, among them the 
Chinucks, pp. 316-323. This includes a general 
discussion, pp. 316-321 ; Jargon words of Eng- 
lish origin (26), of French origin (22), and 
derived by onomatopceia (8), pp. 321-322. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Con- 
gress, Eames. 
On the languages of Northern, "West- 
ern, and Central America. By R. G. 
Latham, M. D. (Read May the 9th. ) 

In Philological Soc, [of London], Trans. 1856, 
pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) 

Brief references to the Chinook and its rela- 
tion to other northwest languages. 

This article reprinted in the same author's 
Opuscula, pp. 326-377, for title of which see 
below. 
Opuscula. I Essays | chiefly | philo- 
logical and ethnographical | by | Rob- 
ert Gordon Latham, | M. A., M. D.,F. 
K. S., etc. I late fellow of Kings college, 
Cambridge, late professor of English | 
in University college, London, late 



44 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Latham (R. G.) —Continued, 
assistant pliysiciau | at the Middlesex 
hospital. I 

Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta 
street, Covent garden, London | and | 
20 South Frederick street, Edinburgh. 
I Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860. 

Title verso uarao of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-iv, contents pp. v-vi, text pp. ]-;!77, addenda 
and corrigenda pp. .378-418, 8^. 

A reprint of a number of i)aper.s read before 
the ethnological and phihjlogical societies of 
London, among them the following, whicli 
include Chinoohan material : 

On the languages of Oregon territory (pp. 
249-264) contains a comparative vocabulary of 
the Shoshonie with other languages, among 
them the Chinook and Cathlascon, pp. 255-256. 

Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnog- 
raphy of North America (pp. 275-297) contains 
a number of Cathlascon words in the compara- 
tive lists. 

On the languages of northern, western, and 
central America (pp. 326-377) contains brief 
references to the Chinook and its relation to 
other languages. 

Addenda and corrigenda, 1859 (pp. 378-418) 
containsbrief comments on the Chinook, p. 388; 
Chinook words, p. 389: short vocabulary (12 
words) of tlie Cliinook compared with Selish 
and Shoshonie, pp. 415-416. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton, 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
"Watkinson . 

At the Squier sale a presentation copy, no. 
639, brought $2.37. The Murphy copy, no. 1438 , 
sold for $1. 

Elements | of | comparative ])hilol- 

ogy. I Bj I R. G. Latham, M. A., M. D., 
F. R. S., &c., I late fellow of Kings Col- 
lege, Caiubridge ; and late professor of 
English I in University college, Lon- 
don. I 

London : !WaltonandMaherly,iUpper 
Gower street, and Ivy lane, Paternoster 
row; I Longman, Green, Longman, 
Roberts, and Green, | Paternoster row. 
I 1862. I The Right of Translation is 
Reserved. 

Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-xi, contents pp. xiii-xs, tabular 
view pp. xxi-xxxii, errata p. [xxxiii], text pp. 
1-752, addenda pp. 753-757, index pp. 758-774, 8°. 

Vocabulary of 48 words, and the nnnierals 
1-10 in the "Watlala language, pp. 402-403. 

Gopleggeen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. 

Dufo8s6, 1887 catalogue, no. 24564, priced a 
copy 20 fr., and Hiersemann, no. 36 of cata- 
logue 16, 10 M. 



Latham (R. G.) — Continued. 

Itobert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the 
Rev. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage 
of Billingsborough, Lincolnshire, March 24, 
1812. In 1819 he was entered at Eton. Twoyears 
afterwards he was admitted on the foundation, 
and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took his 
fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was his 
first passion and his last, though for botany 
he had a very strong taste. He died March 9, 
IHSS.— Theodore Wam in The Athenceum, March 
17, 188S. 

Leclerc (Charles). Bibliotlieca | ameri- 
cana | Catalogue raisonne | d'une trt^s- 
prccieuse | collection de livres antdens 
I et modernes | sur I'Am^rique et les 
Philippines | Classes par ordre alpha- 
b(?tique de noms d'Anteurs. | JiMig6 
liar Ch. Leclerc. | [Design.] I 

Paris I Maisonueuve & C'« | 15, qnai 
Voltaire | M. D. CCC. LXVII [1867] 

Cover title as above, half-title verso details of 
sale 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. v-vii, catalogue pp. 1-407, 8°. 

Includes titles of a number of works contain- 
ing material relating to the Chinookan lan- 
guages. 

Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Pilling. 
At tlie Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought 
10*.; at the Squier sale, no. 651, $1.50. Leclerc, 
1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr. and Maisonneuve, in 
1889, 4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought 
$2.75. 

Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire, 

geographic, | voyages, archdologie et 
linguistique | des | deux Am^riques | 
et I des iles Philippines | r^dig^e | Par 
Ch. Leclerc | [Design] | 

Paris I Maisonneuve et C'% libraires- 
editeurs | 25, qnai Voltaire, 25. | 1878 

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. avant-propos 
pp. i-xvii, table des divisions pp. sviii-xx, cat- 
alogue pp. 1-643, supplement pp. 645-694, index 
pp. 695-737, colophon verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

The linguistic part of this volume occupies 
pp. 537-643; it is arranged under families, and 
contains titles of books in many American lan- 
guages, among them the following : 

Langues americaines en general, pp. 537-550; 
Chinook, p. .565. 

Copies seen .- Boston Athenseum, Eames, Pil- 
ling. 

Priced by Quaritch, no. 12172, 12s.; another 
copy, no. 12173, large paper, 11. Is. Leclerc's 
Supplement, 1881, no. 2831. prices it 15 fr., and no. 
2832, a copy on Holland paper, 30 fr. A large 
paper copy is priced by Quaritch, no. 30230, 12». 
Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr. 

Lee (Daniel) and Frost (J. H.) Ten 
years in Oregon. | By D. Lee and J. H. 
Frost, I late of the Oregon mission of 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES, 



45 



Lee (D.) aiid Frost (.1. II.) — Cont'd, 
tho Methoilist. o[)iMC()])iil cliuicli. | 
[Picture.] | 

New-Yi)rk: | pii1)lislicd IVir tlio 
authors: 200 Mulberry-street. | J. 
Collord, Printer. | 1814. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface p]>. 
3-6, contents pp. 7 11, text pp. 13-344, 12°. 

Specimen of an Indian [Cathlascon] prayer 
with Englisli translation, pp. 184-185. ^A num- 
ber of sentences .and grace before meals in the 
language of the Indians of the Cascades, p. 204. 
— Hymn (two verses) in the Cascade with 
English tran.slation, p. 205.— Vocabulary (50 
words) of the Clatsop [Chinook Jargon], south 
side of the Columbia River, pp. 343-344. 

CopieH seen ■ Astor, Bostim Athena'um, IJrit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Pilling, Trumbull. 

A few sentences in Chinook Jargon from this 
work are reprinted in Allen (J.), Ten Tears in 
Oregon. 
Legends: 

Chinook See Boas (F.) 

Chinook Jargon St. Ongo (L. N.) 

[Le Jeune (Pere Jean-Marie Kaphael).] 
Practical | Chinook [Jargon] vocabu- 
lary I comprising | all & the only usual 
words of that Avonderful | Language 
arranged in a nio.st | advantageous 
order for the speedily leai'niug of | the 
same, after the jilan of | right rev. 
bishop Durieu O M I. | the most experi- 
enced Missionary & Chinook | speaker 
in British Columbia. | 

St. Louis' mission | Kamloops. | 1886. 

Cover title verso directions for pronouncia- 
tion, no inside title; text jip. 1-16, 16°. 

The vocabulary, which is Chinook Jargon, is 
arranged by lessons, i-xviii, without headings. 
They comprise : i, numerals ; ii, the firmament, 
seasons, and days of the week; iii, geographic 
features, &c. ; iv, the family and relationships ; 
V, animals; vi, implements and uten-sils; vii, 
nationalities; viii, nouns; ix, money; x, parts 
of the body ; xi, wearing apparel ; xii, domestic 
utensils; xiii, nouns; xiv, adjectives ; xv, pro- 
nouns ; xvi, adverbs ; xvii, verbs ; xviii, scripture 
names and church terms. 

Copies seen : Eells. Pilling. 

A later edition with title-page as follows : 

Chinook [Jargon] Vocabulary. | 

Chinook-English. | From the Original 
of Rt. Rev. I Bishop Durieu, O. M. I. | 
With the Chinook Words in Phonog- 
raphy I By I J. M. R. Le Jeune O. M. I. 
I Second Edition. | 

Mimeographed at Kamloops. I Octo- 
ber 1892. 

Cover title verso " Duployan Phonetic Alpha- 
bet," no inside title, text (triple columns, 
Chinook Jargon in italics alphabetically 



Le Jeuue (J. M. R.) — Continued. 

arranged, .Jargon in stenographic characters, 
and Kjiglish in italics) pp. 1-lG, prayer in Jar- 
gon, stenographic cliaracters, on recto of back 
cover, verso list of publications by Father 
Le Jeune. 

Cojnes seen : I'illing. 

Early in October, 1892, I wrote to Bishop 
Durieu requesting a copy of the 1886 edition of 
the "Chinook Vocabulary," composed by him, 
and received in reply (November 1) a state- 
ment to the effect that he would be glad to 
oblige me, but that ho had written no such 
book. Transcribing the title-page of the little 
book in question, I sent it to him asking an 
explanation, as his name was given tliereon. 
The following is his response: 

Nkw 'Westminister, B. C, 

Nov. 16, 1893. 

Dear Sir: In answer to your favor of the 
11th inst., I beg to state tliat what I wrote you 
in my last is but the truth. I have not written 
anything in the Indian language or in the 
Chinook. "What you have enumerated under 
my name, because my name is mentioned on the 
title of the work, must be placed under the 
nameof llev. Father Le Jeune asthe publisher 
and the author. But to make sure of it, and 
in order that your bibliography may be correct, 
I will sei.d this letter to Rev. Father Le Jeune, 
of Kamloops, begging him to give you the 
name of the author of those works you have 
placed under my name. 
I have the honor to be. dear sir, 
Tour humble servant, 

Paul Durieu. 

This was sent me with the following explan- 
atory letter by Fatlier Le Jeune : 

Kamloops, B. C, Nov. SI, 1892. 
Dear Sir ; Bishop Durieu gave me those les- 
sons in Chinook, in a few flying sheets, over 
twelve years ago (September, 1879). Of course 
those sheets are lost long ago. As his lordship 
does not want to appear as the author of those 
little pamphlets, you had better mention them 
as arranged by myself out of lessons received 
from his lordship. 

Tours, 

Father Le Jeune. 

[ ] [Two lines stenographic charac- 
ters.] I No. 1. Kamloops Wawa May 2. 
'91 [_67. 26 Feb. 93] 

A periodical iu the Chinook Jargon, steno- 
graphic cliaracters. intended as a weekly, but 
issued iu its early stages at irregular intervals, 
at Kamloops, British Columbia, under the edi- 
torship of Father Le Jeune, and reproduced by 
liim with the aid of the mimeograph. See fac- 
ciimile of the first page of the initial issue. 

The first three numbers are in triple col- 
umns. Jargon in italics, Jargon in shorthand 
characters, and English in italics; the fourth 
number is in double columns, Jargon in short- 
hand and English iu italics: the subsequent 
issues are in shorthand with headings in Eng- 



46 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Le Jeune ( J. M. R. ) — Continued. 

llsh. All the issues are in 16° escept nos. 5-6 
and 7-8 (douWe numbers), whicli are in 32°. At 
the beginning each issue consisted of 8 pages, 
with continuous pagination, but occasionally 
the parts were separately paged. Beginning 
with no. 33, the first issue of vol. 2, all the num- 
bers con.sist of 4 pages each. 

The following is a detailed list of the issues, 
made up from nij' copy, which is the only one 
I have seen, giving number, date of issue, and 
pagination : 

No. 1 May 2, '91, pp. 1-8, 16°. 
3 9, '91, 1-16, 16°. 

3 16, '91, 17-24, 16°. 

4 Aug. 5, '91, 25-32, 16°. 
5-6 Sept. '91, 1-32, 320a. 

[7-8 Oct. '91, 1-32], 32°a. 
9 Feb. 1, '92, 1-4, 16«°. 

10 6, '92, 5-8, 16°. 

11 14, '92, 9-12,16°. 

12 21, '92, 13-16,16°. 

13 28, '92, 17-20, 16°. 

14 Mch. 0, '92, 21-24, 16°. 

15 13, '92, [25-29], 17-206, 16°. 

16 20, '92, 33-34,21-246,39-40,16°. 

17 27, '92, 41^8, 16°. 

18 Apr. 3, '92, 49-52, 1-4*;, 16°. 

19 10, '92, 25-286 (57-60 lacking), 

16°. 

20 10, '92, 65-66, 29-326, 71-72, 16°. 

21 17-24, '92, 73-74, 33-366, 79-80, 16°. 

22 24, '92, 81-82 (83 86 lacking), 87- 

88, 16°. 

23 May 1, '92, 89-90,37-406,95-96,16°. 

24 8, '92, 105-112 (97-104 lacking), 

16°. 

25 15, '92, 113-114, 41-446, 119-120, 

16°. 

26 22, '92, 121-122,123-1266,127-128, 

45-486, 16°. 

27 26, '92, 129-130,131-1346,135-136, 

16°. 

28 June 5, '92, 1.37-138, 139-1426, 139-142, 

6i:,?6, 143-144, 16°. 

29 12, '92, 145-146,147-1506,151-152, 

16°. 

30 19, '92, 155-158 [xic] 6, 16°. 

31 26, '92, 1.53-154, 159-160, 163-1666, 

16°. 

32 30, '92, (167-168 lacking) 169- 

1726, 16°. 
Vol.2: 

33 July 3, '92, 1-4,16°. 

34 10, '92, 5-8, 16°. 

35 17, '92, 9-12, 16°. 

36 24, '92, 13-16, 16°. 

37 31, '92, 17-20, 16°. 

38 Aug. 7, '92, 21-24, 16°. 
Supplement to nos. 33-38, pp. l-24rf, 16°. 

39 Aug.l4, '92,pp.25-28, 16°. 

40 21, '92, 29-32, 16°. 



Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 

No. 41 Aug.28, '92, pp. 33-36, 16°. 



42 


Sept. 4, '92, 


37-40, 16°. 


43 


11, '92. 


41-44, 16°. 


44 


18, '92, 


45-48, 16°. 


45 


25, '92, 


49-52, 16°. 


46 


Oct. 2, '92, 


53-56, 16°. 


47 


16 (gic) 


57-60, 16°. 


48 


16, '92, 


61-64, 16°. 


49 


23, '92, 


65-68, 16°. 


50 


30, '92, 


69-72, 16°. 


51 


Nov. 6, '92, 


73-76, 16°. 


52 


13, '92, 


77-80, 16°. 


53 


20, '92, 


81-84, 16°. 


54 


27, '92, 


85-88, 16°. 


55 


Dec. 4, '92, 


89-92, 16C. 


56 


11, '92, 


93-96, 16°. 


57 


18, '92, 


97-100, 16°. 


58 


25, '92, 


101-104, 16°. 


\'o\. 3 






59 


Jan. 1,93, 


1-4, 16°. 


60 


8, '93, 


5-8, 16°. 


61 


15, '93, 


9-12, 12°. 


62 


22, '93, 


13-16, 16°. 


63 


29, '93, 


17-20, 16°. 


64 


Feb. ■ 5, '93, 


21-24, 16°. 


65 


12, '93, 


25-28, 16°. 


66 


19, '93, 


29-32, 16°. 


67 


26, '93, 


33-36, 16°. 



The breaks in the pagination, beginning in 
no. 15, arc due to the intention of the editor lo 
make separates of different series of articles, 
one of which, entitled Sacred History, runs 
through many of the issues, beginning with no. 
9, each with its special heading, " The creation 
of the world," "Adam and Eve," etc. In all 
the later numbers of vol. 1, beginning with no. 
15, the middle sheet (4 pages) has its own head- 
ing, name of the paper, date, etc., as on the first 
sheet. The Sacred History series runs as fol- 
lows, page 17 in no. 15 connecting, it will be 
seen from the table below, with the si.Kteen 
pages, variou.sly numbered, appearing in the 
earlier numbers : 

ifo. 22, lacking. 
23, pp. 37-40 



No. 9, pp 


2-4 


10, 


6-8 


11, 


10-12 


12, 


16 


13, 


18-20 


14, 


22-24 


15, 


17-20 


16, 


21-24 


17, 


none 


18, 


none 


19, 


25-28 


20, 


29-32 


21, 


33-36 



24, 
25, 
26, 
27, 
28, 
28, 
29, 
30, 
31, 
32, 



none 

41-44 

123-126 

131-134 

139-142 

139-142 bis 

147-150 

155-158 

163-166 

169-172 



Referring to this list it will be seen that in 
no. 26 the author added four extra pages (45-48), 
after which the separate pagination was discon- 
tinued. In no. 28 also four extra pages (139- 
142 big) are included. 



oNos. 5-6 are entitled Chinook Hymns; nos. 7-8, Elements of shorthand; for titles see below. 

6 Sacred history pages. 

cNight prayers in tlie Shushwap language, 

dHistory of the old testament ; for title see St. Onge (L. N.) 



CTITNOOKAN LANGTTArTES. 



4? 



fJ 



_ c 




■^ 



Wo. 1, iiam\oop5 VUimo, M^/2.1i 



iKocm loops 

A 



crQy 



bf. 



V 






r^ 









(y 



'^. 



^ 



'^ 



'6 



^ry /Z^'^A 



<'^ 



er- 



0-' 



ei 



J^ want J 
to ajdpca 

fycc^rj^ to 



if' t/)t^ 6e 






FACSIMILE OF THE FIRST PAGE OF THE KAMLOOPS WAWA. 



J 



48 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 

In a few numbers the article on Sa<^rcd Tlis- 
tory ia omitted. Of theso no. 17 contains in lieu 
four pages of hymns set to miisic ; no. 18, niglit 
prayer in Shushwap; in no. 22 nothing was 
substituted; no. 24, list of subscribers, etc. 

In explanation of these ii-regularities Fatlier 
Le Jeune, under date of July 13, 1892, writes 
me as follows : 

"Concerning your remarks on missing pages 
and numbers, let mo say: There are only 4 
pages of no. 19, pp. 25-28; it was a mistake; no. 
18 is Aj). 3 and no. 20, which sliould have been 
no. 19, is Ap. 10. It was too late to correct the 
error, so I continued counting from no. 20 
upward. In the same way you will find no. 21, 
'Sacred History,' § 64-70, pages 33-36, is the 
same date as no. 22, Ap. 24. The list of sub- 
scribers can go in no. 24 as pages 97-100, and 
my French letter of Ap. 1st as pages 101-104. 

"I am ashamed that there should be so 
much confusion in the pagination of the little 
paper; as you see, I was trying to carry out 
two things at the same time — first to make the 
regular pages with the calendar of the week 
and second the four pages of Sacred History. 
These were not issued at the same time, but in 
two series, as I wished to have the Sacred His- 
tory bound separately. Then I am not sitting 
at rest in an office, but traveling throughout 
my mission, over 500 miles, taking my dupli- 
cating oiittit with me, with much besides to 
do, as, for instance, 300 confessions to hear at 
Kamloops at Easter, 400 last mouth at the 
Shusliwap, etc. 

"Tou will see that witli July I began the 
second volume, and hereafter the pages, four 
to each number, will be numbered in succes- 
sion. The Sacred History will be given 
monthly only — 16 pages to each number. I 
commeneo again from the very beginning, 
having F.ather St. Onge's translation." 

Most of the matter given is of a religious 
charai-ter, the .Sacred History series of articles 
being the most extensive. Beginning with no. 
13, each issue contains a list of the feast and 
fast days for the ensuing week, and with no. 15 
the gospels of the various Sundays are given. 

A Chinook vocabulary appears in the first 
three numbers, and a list of phrases in the 
fourth. 

During October, 1892, 1 received from Father 
Le Jeune copies of a reissue of nos. 1-8 of the 
Waiva. paged 1-40, all in 16', and containing for 
the most part the material given in the origi- 
nals. They are dated May, Juno, July, 
August, September, Xovember, and December, 
1892, and January, 1893. four pages each, con- 
secutively paged. To these is added a sup- 
plemental signature, paged 33-40, headed 
"Success of the Duployan Shorthand among 
the natives of British Columbia." 

There have also been issued two " Supple- 
ments to the Kamloops Wawa" "Chicago 
World's Fair Notes," numbered 1 and 2, and 
dated respectively November 1 and 8, 1892, each 



Le Jeune (.J. M. R.) — Continued. 

containing four pages, numbered 1-8. The lirst 
contains an illustration of a U. S. coast line 
battle ship, the second one of the Manufactures 
and Liberal Arts Building. 

There is also a third of these extras, a single 
quarto page headed : " Chicago News, Supple- 
ment to the Kamloops Wawa. No. 1, Nov. Isl, 
1892," at the top of which is tlie picture of the 
battle shiji. 

My inquiries in regard to these stray issues 
met with the following response from Father 
Le Jeune : 

"In answer to your letter of Nov. 1, 1892, 
pages 1-40 you mention are simply a new edi- 
tion of the first eight numbers. As you see by 
the first numbers I sent you, I did not exactly 
know what my little paper was going to be. 
Nowthat the Indianswant their papers bound, 
I find those first numbers exhausted. Besides, 
numbers 5, 6, 7, and 8 were never properly num- 
bered; so I made this new edition of eight 
numbers to be used as heading for the volume. 
I endeavored to get into these eight numbers 
what constitutes the first text-book for Indian 
students, so that they can be used separately. 
Now the collection follows in consecutive num- 
bers, 1, 2, 3, etc., to 18, no. 19 [except the sacred 
history supplement] being skipped by mistake ; 
then 20-31, supplements to nos. 15-32, save no. 
22, omitted also by mistake; then from no. 32 on 
in regular order. I reprint some of the run-out 
numbers of vol. I to complete the sets sent mo 
for binding, and redress as much as I can my 
former incorrectness of pagination. Concern- 
ing the pages " Success of the Duployan, " etc., 
I have given up the idea of embodying them 
into something else; so they remain as they 
are, a letter of information to correspondents. 
The " ChicagoNews ' ' supplement and any other 
I may hereafter produce are separate pages 
which I shall issue at my convenience to inter- 
est the Indians .and give them some useful 
information, but without binding myself to 
issue them regularly. They are rather essays 
than anything else." 

The supplemental signature of no. 8 of the 
reissue of the Wawa contains so many interest- 
ing facts bearing upon Father Le Jeune's work 
and upon the methods used in this new depart- 
ure in periodical making that I give it here- 
witli in full. 

Success of the Duployan Shorthand among the 
natives of British Columbia. 

" Tlie Duployan system of stenography made 
its apparition in France in 1867. The 
orginators are the Duploye brotliers, two of 
whom are members of the clergy and two 
others eminent stenographers in Paris. Father 
Le Jeune became acquainted with the system 
in 1871, being then 16 years old, and learned in 
a few hours. Two or three days after he 
■wTote to Mr. E. Duploye and by return mall 
received a very encouraging letter. Ho found 
the knowledge of shorthand very profitabl«^ 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGI<:S. 



49 



Le Jeune (J. M. K.) — (Jontiimed. 

ever Hini'O, cither for faking ilowu iioteH or for 
corri«iM)iirl(;U<'e. It was ouly in July, 1890, that 
tho idea first caiiio to try tlm shorthaud as an 
easy phonetic writing forthc Indians of British 
(.'oluinhia. The first trial bi-came a surcess. 
At the end of S<'i»tt;nilMT, 1«90, a poor Indian 
'•ripple, iiaiiii'il (Jharlcy-Alexis Mayoos, from 
the Lower Xicola, saw tlie writing for the first 
time, and got the intuit ion of the system at first 
sight. IIc8<;t to deciphira fi-w pagisof Indian 
prayers in shortliand. In less than two montiiH 
ho learned every word of liiem, and ho soon 
began to eomnniuieate his learning to his 
friends and relatives. 

"Through his endeavors some eight or ten 
Indians at Cold water, Nicola, B. C, became 
thoroughly acquainted with the writing system 
before April 1st, 1891. In July, 18U1, the first 
lessons were given to the Shusliwap Indians; 
they lasted an hour every day for four or five 
days. Three or four of the best .^oung men 
went on studying what tliey had learned, and 
were delighted to find tlieniselves able to 
correspond in shorthand in the early fall. 
During the winter montlis they helped to prop- 
agate the system of writing among their people. 
In the meantime Mayoos had come to Kam- 
loops and was pushing the work ahead among 
the .young people there. 

•'In December, 1891, the system was intro- 
duced U) the North Thomson Indians ; in Jan- 
uary, 1892, to those at IJouglas Lake; in Febru- 
ary at Spuzzum and North Bend; and, last of 
all, in March, to those at Deadnian's Creek, 
near Sarvina. Soon after, Indian letters came 
from William's Lake. In May, 1892, a few 
lessons were given at St. Mary's Mission to 
the Lower Fraser and seacoast Indians. Now 
the Indians teach each other and are verj- 
anxious to learn on all sides. The most 
advanced understand the value of the letters 
and the spelling of the words ; l)ut the greatest 
number begin by reading the words, then learn 
the syllables by comparing the words together, 
and at last come to the letters. They learn by 
analysis and much quicker than by synthesis. 

"The 'Kamloop AVawa ' was first issued in 
May, 1891, and in eight mcmthly numliers gave 
the rudiments of stenography and the Chinook 
hymns as first Chinook reader. 

" Withno. 9, February Ist, 1892, it has become 
weekly, and has ever since continued to reach 
every week the ever increasing number of sub- 
scribers. It is now issued at 250 copies, 4 
pages, 12mo, weekly. A supplement of equal 
size issued whenever convenient. The first 
volume of the Kamloops Wawa closed last 
June with number 32. Vol. II will tenninate 
with no. 58, Dec. 25, 1892. Contents: 1" Ele- 
ments of Stenography in Chinook and English. 
2° Chinook and Latin Hymns. 3" A number of 
Indian news. 4" Beginning of Sacreil History. 
5° "Weekly Calendar beginning with March 1st, 
'92. 6° Gospel for every Suudaj-. 7" Some 
prayers in Shusliwap. 8" A few hymns in 
CHIN 4 



Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — (JoiitinufMl. 

Shushwai» and Chinook. 9' A few English 
lessons. See nos. :j:{, 34, 35. 10" Narratives ol 
early Church History, St. Mary Magdalen, St. 
James, etc. 

" The Kamloo]is rimnographer had its first 
number issued in June. 1892. Six numbers are 
now ready, illustrating: 1" How shortliand is 
taught to the natives. 2' Alphabet and rules 
of shorthand. '.i" Syllables and syllabical 
tables. 4" 1st reading books of shorthand— lU 
Iiages monthly. The intention is, in the follow- 
ing niimbers. to make a study of abbreviative 
jdionography, showing how outlines can 1>6 
made according to the Duployan system. We 
do not pretend to tea<h shorth. ex professo, but 
only to give to those interested all the informa- 
tion that we can concerning our little work. 

[Seven numbers are issued, the last in Janu- 
ary, 189.3, none containing Chinookan material.] 

"In preparation : 1" A second edition of the 
Chinook and English Voc;tbulary. 2' Al- 
manac for 1893, of which these pages are 
iutende<l to become a part. 3" A Chinook trans- 
lation, by lit. Kev. Bishop Durieu [q.v.] from 
New Westminster, of Bishop Gilmour's Bible 
History. 200 copies of the Euglisb text have 
been received through the kindness of Eev. L. 
N. St. Ouge, Troj-, N. Y. These will be inter- 
leaved with the Chinook text so as to present 
the illustrationsof theoriginal, and the EugUsh 
text opposite its Chinook version. 

"Some will ask: How are all these works 
issued.' Up to date nearly all the work, auto- 
graphing and duplicating on the mimeograph, 
has been done by the author during the leisure 
hours of his missionary labors. But thatcourse 
can not be carried on any longer. Hired work 
has to be taken in. A few Indian women are 
already trained to do the piinting. With their 
cooi>eratiou 16 pages can be printed on 200 to 
2.50 copies in a day. But that work has to be 
jjaid for; and the resources are at an end. Peo- 
ple have first wondered at the work ; some find 
fault with it ; very little thus far has been done 
to help it. 

" Now is the time for the friends of a good 
cause to see if something better could not be 
done in favor of this little work. Voluntary 
donations will be accepted as a providential 
blessing. Subscriptions to papers are also a 
powerful means of support and improvement. 
Many say : "Wo do not want to study the pho- 
nography." But could they not take the i)apers 
as specimens of curiosity, etc., in thcirlibraries .' 
The first volume of the Kamloops Wawa is now 
bound, and would make a very interestingitem 
in any library. Price only $1..50. Send .$2.50 
and have the numbers of the Kamloops Pho- 
nographer as well. Please induce your friends 
to contribute according to their means. By 
doing .so, you by all means shall help to 
- enlighten many who are still sitting in dark- 
ness and in the shadow of death.'' 

The periodical is almost entirely the work of 
Pere Le Jeune, but few contributions of Jac- 



50 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



, Hcc/}] loops IVcc 2i/CU , 

/ - - - < -* -. ,) 



> 



C/ii'jooo ^ ^y^ ^$ , 



/ 




-^ 



.«^s« 



FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE'S JARGON HYMN BOOK. 



Le Jeune (J. M. R. ) — Continued. 

goii material appearing from other hands. The 
only exceijtions I have discovered are short 
articles in nos. 24, 34, anrt 35, from the pen of 
Dr. T. S. Bulmer, and occasionally one from 
rather St. Onge. 

An independent issue of the Wawa appeared 
under date of June 1, 1891, numbered 1; and 
two of the issues are in double numbers, 5-6, 
and [7-8] ; these latter, 32'^ in size, lack the 
heading as given in the periodical proper and 
evidently were not intended originally as a part 
of the series. The titles of these three issues 
are as follows: 

[ ] [Two lines stenographic charac- 
ters.] I No. 1. Kamloops Wawa. 1 Ju. '91 

No title page, heading on cover as above; 
text, headed " Chinook Vocabulary," pp. 1-32, 
advertisement on back cover, 16°. 

On the front cover following the heading are 
two columns of matter, one in English, italie 



Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 

characters, headed "Chinook vocabulary,'' the 
second in Jargon, stenographic characters. 
The vocabulary, alphabetically arrangifd, triiile 
columns. Jargon, shorthand, and English, pp. 
1-21. — Chinook hymns, pj). 23-32. 
Copies seen ; Pilling. 

[ ] [Two lines stenographic charac- 
ters.] I Kamloops Wawa, | September, 
1891 I Nos 5 ifc 6. I Chinook Hymns. | 
[One line stenographic characters.] 

[Kamloops, B. C. : 1891.] 

Cover title verso the alphabet, no inside title ; 
text (in stenographic characters, headings in 
Jargon and Latin In italics) pp. 1-32, alphabet 
and numerals on recto of back cover, list of 
publications by Father Le Jeune verso of back 
cover, 32°. See the facsimile of the cover title. 

Copiex seen : Pilling. 

Issued also with cover title as follows : 



CHINOOKi^N LANGUAGES. 



51 



Le Jeune (J. M. K.) — Coiitiinicd. 
r ] [Two lines Ht«!ii()grapliic charac- 
ters.] I Chinook Hymns. | 

Kainloops. B. C. | 1891 

Cover title verso ali>lial»et and iiunioral.s, no 
iiisido title; text in .stonograpliic characters 
pp. 1-32, alphabet recto of hack cover, list of 
publications by Father LeJouno verso of back 
cover, 32°. 

Contents asunder (ith^ next above; the verso 
of the front cover in tho one edition forms the 
recto of tho back cover in tho other. 

Coines ieen : Pillinj;. 

[ ] Elements | of | .sliort hand. | Part 

I- I 

Kainloops. | 1891 

Cover title verso the alphabet, text pp. [1-32], 
alphabet and numerals recto of back cover, list 
of publications by Father Lo Jeune verso of 
back cover, 32°. Inserted by Father Lo Jeune 
as a substitute for tho lacking nos. 7-8 of the 
Kamloops Wawa, Oct., 1891. 

Contains no Chinookan material. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

[ ] Chinook | primer. | By which | 

The Native of British Columbia | and 
any other persons | Speaking tho Chi- 
nook I are taught | to read and write 
Chinook | in Shorthand | in the Space 
of a few hours. | Price : 10 Cents. | 

Mimeographed at | St Louis Mis- 
sion. I Kamloops, B. C. | May, 1892. 

Cover title as above, ver.so advertisement, no 
inaido title ; text pp. 1-8. advertisement recto of 
back cover, verso list of publications by Father 
Le Jeune, 16"-'. 

See p. 52 for facsimile of tho cover title. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

A comparison of the facsimiles of the title- 
pages of tho hymn book and ])rimer with the 
printed text of the same will show a few differ- 
ences of punctuation. The printed text is cor- 
rect; the facsimiles are defective in that re- 
spect. 

A play I in. Chinook. | Joseph and 

his Brethren. | Act I. | By J. M. R. 
Le Jeune O. M. I. 

Kamloops, B. C. | July 1^* 1892, 

Cover title (manuscript, in the haudwritint; 
of its author), no inside title ; text (in Chinook 
Jargon, stenographic characters) pp. 1-20, 16-. 

Copies seen ; Pilling. 
Chinook | First Reading Book | in- 
cluding I Chinook Hymns, Syllabary | 
and Vocabulary. | By j J. M. R. Le Jeune 
O. M. I. I Price: 10 Cents. | [Eight 
lines stenographic characters.] | 

Kamloops. | 1893 

Title verso Chinook alphabet 1 ]. text in 
stenographic characters, with headings in Eng- 
lish and Jargon in italics, pp. 1-[18], 16°. 



Le Jeune (.1. M. R. ) — Continued. 

Hymns, pp. 1-11. —'Exercises, i)p. 12-15. — 
Vocabulary, i)p. 16-18. 
Copies seen : Pilling. 

See Durieu (P.) 

Pere Jean-^Lirie Kaiihael Lo Jeune was born 
at Pleybcrt Christ, Finistere, Franco. April 12, 
1855, and came to British Columoia as a mis- 
sionary i)riest in October, 1879. Ho made his 
first acquaintance with tho Thompson Indians 
in June, 1880, and lias been among them ever 
since. Ho began at onco to study their lan- 
guage and was able to express him.self ea.sily 
in that language after a few months. When he 
first came he found about a dozen Indians that 
knew a few prayers and a little of a catechism 
in tho Thompson language, composed mostly 
by Right llev. Bishop Durieu, O. M. I., the 
present bishop of New Westminster. From 
1880 to 1882 he traveled only between Yale and 
Lytton, 57 miles, trying to make acquaintance 
with as many natives as he could in that dis- 
trict. Since 1882 he has had to visit also the 
Nicola Indians, who speak the Thompson lan- 
guage and the Douglas Lake Indians, who 
are a branch of the Okanagan family, and had 
occasion to become acquainted with the Okan- 
agan language, in Avhicb he composed and 
revised most of the prayers they have in use up 
to the present. Since June 1, 1891, he has also 
had to deal with the Shushwap Indians, and, 
as the language is similar to that in u.se l)y the 
Indians of Thompson River, ho very soon 
became familiar with it. 

He tried several years ago to teach the In- 
dians to read iu the English characters, but 
without avail, and two years ago lie undertook 
to teach them in shorthand, exijerimeuting first 
upon a young Indian boy who learned the short- 
hand after a single lesson and began to help 
him teach the others. The work went on 
slowly until last winter, when they began to bo 
interested in it all over the country, and since 
then they have been learning it with eagerness 
and teaching it to one another. 

Leland (Charles Godfrey). The Chinook 
Jargon. 

In St. James Gazette, vol. 17, no. 2529, p. 6, 
London, July 13, 1888, folio. (Pilling.) 

General remark.s concerning the language, 
with words, phrases, and sentences therein. 

[ ] An international idiom. 

In the Saturday Review, vol. 30, no. 1822, pp. 
377-378, London, Sept. 27, 1890, folio. 

A review of Hale (H.), An international 
idiom, giving a number of examples. 

Lenox: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the Lenox Library, New York City. 

[Lionnet {Ph-e — ).] Vocabulary | of the 
I Jargon or trade language | of Oregon. 



52 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



1 



'^ 1 ill 



n\ T ,1 



i i '^ 




PEIMER. 

CX^%^<1 cv>Au t^M'^ei" pe^*50'AS" 

f"ortoul oAvd uifite Cru 'nook 
I>Yc ShorCKcK/Nvdl 



Pr\u . 10 Cem^s. 

M'lYVA^aarapKeoL at" 

St Louis iMiSSiovi,. 

>lay IMA. 



FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE'S JARGON PRIMER, 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



53 



Lionnet (7Vre — ) — Continued, 

Colophon: I'liblislifid by the Sinitli- 
soniiiii iu.stilntioii, | AVashington, 1). 
C, I April, 18r)3. 

No titli* page*, lii'ading only; letter of J'rof. 
Henry ami report of Prof. W. AV'. Turner 1 1. 
tost pp. 1-22, 8° form on 4° page. 

FreiK'Ii. Enjjlish, and Jarj;on vocabulary, 
alpliabetieally arranged by French words, pp. 
1-22. 

"Dr.B.Kusb Mitchell, of the United States 
Navy, recently iirescuitid to the Sniith.iouian 
Inst it ut ion a nianu.scrijit vocahulary, in Freiuh 
and Indian, obtained in Oregon, and said to 
have been coniiiiled Ity a French Catholic prie.st. 
It was sulmiitted for critical examination to 
Prof.W. "W. Turner, and in accordance!' with his 
suggestion the vocabulary has been ordered to 
be printed for distribution in ( )rcgon." — Extract 
from letter of Prof. Henry. 

"Some years ago the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook 
Jargon, furnished by Dr. E. B. Mitchell, of the 
XT. S. Navy, and prepareil, as I afterward 
learned, by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for 
his own use while studying the language at 
Chinook Point." — Extract from the iireface of 
(ribbs's Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 

Copies seen : Georgetown, Pilling, Smithson- 
ian. 
Lord's prayer: 

Cascade See Youth's. 

Chinook Bergholtz (G. F.) 

Chinook Duflot de Mofras (E.) 

Chinook Jargon Bancroft (H. 11.) 

Chinook Jargon Boldue (J. B. Z.) 

Chinook Jargon Bulmer (T. S.) 

Chinook Jargim Chinook. 

Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 

Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) 

Chinook Jargon Everetto ( W. E.) 

Chinook Jargon Gibbs (G.) 

Chinook Jargon Gill (J. K.) 

Chinook Jargon Good (J. B.) 

Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 

Chinook Jargon Marietti (P.) 

Chinook Jargon Nicoll (E. F.) 

Lowdermilk : This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of tbc work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the bookstore of W. H. Lowder- 
milk & Co., Washington, D. C. 

Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). Tbo ( liter- 
ature I of I American aboriginal lan- 
guages. I By I Hermann E. Ludewig. | 
With additions and corrections | by 
professor Wm. W. Turner. | Edited by 
Nicolas Triibner. | 

London : | Triibner and co., 60, Pater- 
noster ro^y. I MUCCCLVIII [1858]. 

Half title "Triibner'a bibliotheca glottica 
I" verso I)lank 1 1. title as above verso printer 
1 1. pieface pp. v-viii, contents verso blank 1 1. 



LudeTvig (II. E.) — ContinucMl. 

editor's advertisement jip. ix-xii, biographical 
memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory bibliograph- 
ical notices pp. X v-xxiv, text pp. 1-209, addenda 
pp. 210-240, index pp. 247-256, errata pp. 257-258, 
8°. Arranged alphabetically by languages. 
Addenda by Wm. W. Turner and Nicholas 
Triibner, pp. 210-24G. , 

Contains a listof grammars and vocabularies 
of the languages of the Ameri(!an peoples, 
among them the following: 

American languages generallj-, pp. xv-xxiv; 
Chintik and Chinnk Jargon, pp. 40-41, 47. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, 
Earaes, Georgetown, Pilling. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 990, a copy brought 5«. 
6d. ; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.03; ;it the 
Squiers.alc, no. 699, $2.02; another copy, no. 1906, 
$2.38. Priced by Loclerc, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. 
The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and 
the Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. 

"Dr. Ludewig has himself so fully detailed 
the plan and purport of this work that little 
more remains for me to add beyond the mere 
statement of the origin of my connection with 
the publication and the mention of such addi- 
tions for which I am alone responsible, and 
which, during its progress through the press, 
have gi-adually accumulated to about one-sixth 
of the whole. This is but an act of justice to the 
memory of Dr. Ludewig, because at the time of 
his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172 
pages were printed oft', and these constitute the 
only portion of the work which had the benefit 
of his valuable personal and final revision. 

" Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay 
in New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. 
Ludewig, during which he mentioned that ho, 
like myself, had been making bibliographical 
memoranda for years of all books which serve 
to illustrate the hi.story of sijokeu language. 
As a first section of a more extended work on 
the literary history of language generallj-, he 
had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the 
remains of aboriginal languages of Ajiierica. 
The manuscript had been deposited by him in 
the library of the Ethnological Society at Now 
York, but at my request he at once most kindly 
placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that 
it should be printed in Europe, under my per- 
sonal superintendence. 

" Upon my return to England, I lost no time 
in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, 
intending then to confine myself simply to pro- 
ducing acorrect copy of my friend's manuscript. 
But it soon became obvious that the transcrii)t 
bad been hastily made, and but for the valuable 
assistance of literary friends, both in this 
country and in America, the work would prob- 
ably have been abandoned. My thanks are more 
particularly due to Mr. E. G. Sqnier, and to 
Prof. William W. Turner, of Washington, by 
■whose considerate and valuable cooperation 
many difficulties were cleared away and my edi- 
torial labors greatly lightened. This encouraged 
me to spare neither person.<»l labor nor expense 



54 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Ludevvig (H. E.) — Continued. 

in the attempt to render the work aa perfect as 
possible, with what success must be left to 
the ,j uilgment of those who can fairly appreciate 
the labors of a pioneer in any new field of lit- 
erary research." — Editor's advertisement. 

"Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in 
this country [England], was held in consider- 
abloesteem as a jiirist, bothin Germanyand the 
United States of America. Born at Dresden in 
1809, with but little exception he continued to 
reside iu his native city until 1844, when he emi- 
grated to America ; but, though in both coun- 
tries he practiced law as a profession, his bent 
was the study of literary history, which was 
evidenced by his ' Livre dos Aua, Essai de 
Catalogue Manuel,' published at his own cost 
in 1837, and by his ' Bibliothekonomie, ' which 
appeared a few years later. 

"But even while thus encaged he delighted 
in investigating the rise and progress of the laud 
of his subsequent adoption, and his researches 
into the vexed question of the origin of the peo- 
pling of America gained him the highest consid- 
eration, on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man 
of original and inquiring mind. He was a 
contributor to Naumann's 'Serapa^um;' and 
among the chief of his contributions to that 
journal maybe mentioned those on 'American 
Libraries, ' on the 'Aids to American Bibliog- 
raphy,' and on the 'Book Trade of the United 
States of America.' In 1846 appeared his ' Lit- 
erature of American Local History,' a work of 
much importance and whicli required no small 
amount of labor and perseverance, owing to the 
necessity of consulting the manj' and widely 
scattered materials, which had to be sought out 
from apparently the most unlikely channels. 

"These studies formed a natural introduc- 
tion to the present work on ' The Literature of 
American Aboriginal Languages, ' which occu- 
pied his leisure concurrently with the others, 
and the printing of which was commenced In 



Ludevrig (H. E.) — Coutinuod. 

August, 1856, but wliich he did not live to see 
launched upon tlie world ; for at the date of Jiis 
death, on the 12th of December following, only 
172 pages were in type. It had been a labor of 
love with him for years ; and, if ever author 
wereraindfulof the »w)iM»i i;re(na<Mr in ftrtHtnn., 
ho was when he deposited his manuscript in the 
library of the American Ethnological Society, 
diffident hivnself as to its merits and value on a 
suljject of such paramount interest. lie liad 
satisfied himself that In duo time the reward of 
his patient industry might be the production of 
some more extended national work on the sub- 
ject, and with thi.s ho was contented; for it was 
a distinguishing feature in his character, not- 
withstanding his great and varied knowledge 
and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his 
own toll, even amounting to drudgery if need- 
ful, If he could in any way assist the promul- 
gation of literature and science. 

" Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member 
of many of the most dl.stiuguished European 
and American literary societies, and few men 
were held in greater consideration by .scholars 
bothin America and Germany, as will readily bo 
acknowledged should his voluminous corre- 
spondence ever see the light. In private life he 
was distinguished by the best qualities which 
endear a man's memory to those who survive 
him: he was a kind and atfectionate husband 
and a sincere friend. Always accessible and 
ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied 
to him for advice upon matters pertaining to 
literatiu-e, his loss will loug be felt by a most 
extended circle of friends, and in him Germany 
mourns one of the best representatives of her 
learned men iu America, a genuine typo of a 
class in which, with singular felicity, to genius 
of the highest order is combined a painstaking 
and plodding perseverance but seldom met with 
beyond theconflnes of the ' Fatherland.' " — Bio- 
graphic memoir. 



M. 



Macdonald (Duncan George Forbes). 
Britiah Columbia | and | Vancouver's 
island | comprising | a description of 
tbese dependencies: their physical | 
character, climate, capabilities, popu- 
lation, trade, natural history, | geology, 
ethnology, gold-fields, and future pros- 
pects I also I An Account of the Man- 
ners and Customs of the Native Indians 
I by I Dnncan George Forbes Macdon- 
ald, C. E. I (Late of the Government 
Survey Staff of British Columbia, 
and of the International Boundary | 
Line of North America) Author of 
' What the Farmers may do with the | 



Macdonald (D. G. F.) — Continued. 
Land' 'The Paris Exhibition' 'Deci- 
mal Coinage' &c. | With a comprehen- 
sive map. I 

London | Longman, Green, Longman, 
Eoberts, & Green | 1862. 

Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vil, contents pp. 
Ix-xili, text pp. 1-442, apiJendices pp. 443-524, 
map, 8°. 

Vocal)ulary of the Chinook Jargon and Eng- 
lish equivalent terms (375 words .and 10 phrases 
and sentences), pp. 394-398. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Congress. 

Sabin's Dictionary, no. 43149, mentions: Sec- 
ond edition, London, Longmans, 1863, 8°. 



CHINOOKAN LANGTTAGES. 



65 



Macfie (Mattliow). Vancouver Island 
and I British Columbia. | Their his- 
tory, resources, and jjrospects. | By | 
Matthew Macfio, F, R. G. 8. | Five years 
resident in Victoria, V. I. | 

London: | Longman, Green, Long- 
man, Roberts, «fe Green. | 1H65. 

Iliilf-titlo viirfto niiiiK! of printer 1 1. frontifl- 
picco 1 1. title vorso ))l:iuk 1 1. dodioation vtirso 
blank 1 1. prcfach pp. ix-xii, contents pp. xii- 
xxi, list of illuatrations vorso blank 1 1. text ijp. 
1-,')18, appendix pp. .'tl9-.")58,ind(ix pp. 5,'>9-574. 8'^. 

A f»!W aeutences in the Cbiuook Jargon, pp. 
472-473. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Boston Athenseuni, 
British Museum, Congress, Geological Survey, 
Pilling. 

Macleod (Eev. Xavier Donald). History 
of the devotion | to the | blessed virgin 
Mary | in | North America. | By | the 
rev. Xavier Donald Macleod, | professor 
[itc. two lines.] | With a memoir of 
the author, | by | the most rev. John B. 
Purcell, D. D., | archbishop of Ciiiciu- 
nati. I 

New York : | Virtue & Yorston, | 12 
Dey street. [Copyright 1866.] 

Prontispiece, title verso copyright notice 1 1. 
publishers' notice pp. iii-iv, inscription to tlie 
memory of tlie author verso blank 1 1. contents 
pp. 5-7, verso blank, memoir by Purcell pp. 
ix-xxiii verso blank, engraving, text pp. 1-461 
verso blank, index pp. 463-467, 8°. 

Hymn to the Blessed Mary, in the Chinook 
Jargon, p. 255. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Georgetown. 

History | of | Roman Catholicism | 

in I North America. | By | the rev. 
Xavier Donald MacLeod, | professor 
[t&c. one line.] | With a memoir of the 
author, I by | the most rev. John B. 
Purcell, D. D., ( archbishop of Cincin- 
nati. I 

New York: | Virtue &■ Yorston, | 12 
Dey street. [186-?] 

Portrait 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. publishers' 
notice pp. iii-iv, contents pj). v-vii, dedication 
verso blank 1 1. memoir pp. ix-xxiii, text pp. 
1-461, index pp. 463-467, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
p. 255. 

Copies seen : Boston Athenseum. 

Xavier Donald McLeod, author, born in New 
York city, November 17, 1821 ; died near Cincin- 
nati, Ohio, July 20, 1865; studied at Columbus, 
and surprised his family and friends bj' taking 
orders in the Protestant Episcopal cliurch in 
1845. After spending a few years in a country 
parish, he went in 1850 to Europe, where he 



Macleod (X. D.) — Cotitinucd. 

traveled and studied until 1852. The result of 
his Euroiicnu visit was his conversion to tho 
Koman Catliolic faith. In 1857 ho became edi- 
torially connected with tlie St. Louis "Leader." 
Subsi'tiuontly he was ordained a priest, and 
appointed professor of rhetoric and bellcH- 
lettres at Mount St. Mary's college, Ohio. He 
met his death in a railroad accident. — Apple- 
ton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 

Maisonneuve : This word following a title or 
included within parentheses after a note .ndl- 
catos that a copy of the work referred to liaa 
been seen by tho compiler in the bookstore of 
Maisonneuve et Cie., Paris, Fr.ance. 

Mallet : This word following a title or inclosed 
within parentheses after a nf)te indicates that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the comiiiler in the library of Major Edmond 
Mallet, Washington, D. C. 

Marietti (Pietfo), editor. Oratio Domi- 



nica I in CCL. lingvas versa | et CLXXX, 
charactervm formis ; vel nostratibvs vel 
peregriuis expressa | cvrante | Petro 
Marietti ; Eqvite Typographo Pontificio 
I Socio Administro | Typographei | S. 
Consilii de Propaganda Fide | [Print- 
er's device] | 

Romae | AnnoM. DCCC. LXX [1870]. 

Half-title 1 1. title 1 1. dedication 3 11. pp. xi- 
xxvii, 1-319, indexes 4 11. 4°. 

Includes 59 versions of the Lord's prayer in 
various American dialects, among them the 
Oregonice, p. 303. 

Copies seen: Trumbull. 

Massachusetts Historical Society: These words 
following a title or within parentheses after a 
note indicate that a copy of the work referred 
to has been seen by the compiler in the library 
of that society, Boston, Mass. 

Missionary's Companion. See Demers 
(M.) et al. 

Montgomerie (Lieut. JohnEglinton) and 
De Horsey (A.,F. R.) A | few words | 
collected from the | languages | spoken 
by the Indians | in the neighbourhood 
of the I Columbia River & Puget's 
Sound. I By John E. Montgomerie, 
Lieutenant R. N. | and Algernon F. R. 
De Horsey, Lieutenant, R. R. | 

London : | printed by George Odell, 
18 Princess-streetjCavendish-square. ( 
1848. 

Title verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. iii-iv, 
text pp. 5-30, 12°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook, Clikitat, Cas- 
cade and Squally languages, pp. 1-23. — Nunier- 
.als in Chinook Jargon, p. 23. — Numerals in 



56 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Montgomerie (J. E.) — Continued. 

Squally, p. 24.— Cliinook proper and Cliebalis 
numbers, p. 24. — Names of places, jip. 2.">-28. — 
Corruptions used in the trading language, pp. 
28-30. 

Copies seen : British Museum, Sir Tliomaa 
Phillips, Cheltenham, England. 

Miiller (Friedrich). Gruudriss | der | 
Sprachwissen.schaft | von | D'. Fried- 
rich Miiller j Professor [&c. three lines.] 
I I. Band | I. Abtheilung. | Einleitung 
in die Sprachwissen8chaft[-IY. Band. 
I I. AbtheiJunj?. [ Nachtrage zum Grund- 
ris.s aus den Jahren | 1877-1887] . | 

Wien 1876 [-1888].! Alfred Holder I K- 
K. Universitiits-Buchhaudler. | Rotli- 
euthnrmstrasse 15. 

4 v(ds. (vol. 1 in 2 parts, vol. 2 originally in 4 
divisions, vol. 3 originally in 4 divi.sions, vol. 4 



Miiller (F.) — Continued. 

part 1 all published), each part and division 
with an outside title and two inside titles. 8° 

Vol.2, part 1, which includes the American 
languages, was originally issued in two divi- 
sions, each with the following special title: 

DieSpr.aehen | der | schlichthaarigenRassen 
I von I D'. Friedi'ich Miiller | Professor [&.c. 
eightliucs.] | I. Abtheilung. | DieSpracheuder 
.austr.alisehen, der hyperboreischen | und der 
anierikanisoheu Eas.se [.fie]. | 

Wien 1879[-1882]. | Alfred Hiilder | K. K. 
Ilof-und Uuiversitiits-Buchliiindler I Kothen- 
thuruistrasse 1.'). 

Die Sprache der Tshinuk, vol. 2, p.art 1, 
division 2 (pp. 254-256) includes: DieLaute, p. 
254. — Das Nomen, p. 254. — Das Pronomen, p. 
255. — Das Verbum, pp. 255-256. — Die Zahlen- 
ausdriicke, p. 256. 

Copies seen : Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. 



I^. 



National Museum: These words following atitle 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of that institu- 
tion, Washington, D. C. 

Ne'W. The New Testament in Chinook. 
In the New York Times, Oct. 12, 1890. 
(Eames.) 

A short extract from a .sermon in the Chinook 
Jargon, with literal English translation. 
Copied from The Academy. (*) 

Ne^w edition. Dictionar j- of the Chinook 
Jargon. See Dictionary. 

Nicoll (Edward Holland). The Chinook 
language or Jargon. 

In Popular Science Monthly, vol. 35, pp. 257- 
261, New York, 1889, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, 
Pilling.) 

A conversation in Chinook Jargon, with 
English translation, p. 257. — Origin of the 
Chinook J.irgon, showing many words derived 
from the English, French, Chinook, Chehalis, 
etc., onomatopteia, prefixes, etc., pp. 257-259. — 
Numerals 1-11, 20, 100, p. 260.— Lord's prayer, 
with interlinear English translation, p. 260. 

Nihaloth : 

Vocabulary See Hale (H.) 

Norris(PhiletnsW.) The calumet of the 
Coteau, ; and otlier | poetical legends of 
the border. Also, | aglossary of Indian 
names, words, and | western provin- 
cialisms. ! Together with I aguide-book 
I of the I Yellowstoue national park. | 
By P. W. Norris, | five years superiu- 



Norris (P. W.) — Continued, 
tendeut of the Yellowstone nati(mal 
park. I All rights reserved. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
CO. I 1883. 

Frontisi)iece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. poem verso blank 
1 1. introduction pp. 9-12, contents pp. 1:5-14, 
illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 17-170, 
notes pp. 171-221, glossary pp. 223-233, guide 
book pp. 235-275, map, sm. 8°. 

Glossary of Indian words and provincialisms, 
pp. 223-233, contains a number of Chinook 
Jargon words. 

Copiesieen: National Museum. Pilling, Pow- 
ell. 



Numerals : 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chiuook Jargon 



See Boas (E.) 

Dutiot de Mofra» (E.) 
Eells (M.) 
Haldeman (S. S.) 
Ross (A.) 
Cos (R.) 
Dictionary. 
Gill (J. K.) 
Good (J. B.) 
Haines (E.M.) 
Hale(H.) 
Hazlitt (W. C.) 
Montgomerie (J. E.) 
Nicoll (E. r.) 
Palmer (J.) 
Parker (S.) 
Richardson (A. D.) 
Stuart (G.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Tate (CM.) 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



57 



R 



Palmer (Joel). Jonrnal of travels | over 
the I Kocky iiiountiiins, | to the | 
mouth of the Columbia river; | nuido 
(liiriiif^ the years 184") aud 1846: | con- 
taining minute descriiitions of the | 
valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, 
and Clamet; | a }j;en('ral description of 
I Oregon territory ; | its Inhahitauts, 
climate, soil, [^productions, etc., etc. ; 
I a list of I necessary outfits for emi- 
grants; I aud a I Table of Distances 
from Camp to Cam]) on tlie Route. | 
Also; I A Letter from the Rev. H. H. 
Spalding, resident Missionary, for the 
last ten years, | among the Nez Perce 
Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee 
River; The | Organic Laws of Oregon 
Territory; Tables of about 300 words 
of the Chinook | Jargon, and .about 200 
Words of the Nez Perct5 Language ; a 
Description of | Mount Hood ; Inci- 
dents of Travel, «fcc., &c. \ By Joel 
Palmer. | 

Cincinnati : | J. A. & U. P. James, 
Walnut street, | between Fourth and 
Fifth. I 1847. 

Cover title: Journal of travels | over the | 
Rocky niouutains, | to the ! mouth of the 
Colunihia river; | made tluriii;; the years 1845 
.ind 1846. I By Joel Palmer. 1 

Cincinnati : | J. A. & IT. P. James, Walnut 
street, 1 hetween Fourth and Fifth. | 1847. 

Cover title, title ver.so copyrijfhl notice etc. 1 
1. publishers' statement pp. iii-iv, text pp. 9-189, 
errata .slip, 12°. 

Words (200) used in the Chinook Jargon, 
alphahetii'ally arranged hy Jargon words, pp. 
147-151. — Chinook mode of computing numbers 
(1-500), p. 152. 

Copien ieen: British ^riiseuiii. Congress, 
Harvard. 

.lournal of travels | over the | Rocky 

mountains, | to the | mouth of tlie 
Columbia river ;| made during the years 
184.5 and 1846: | containing minute 
descriptions of the | valleys of the 
Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet ; | a 
general description of | Oregon terri- 
tory; I its inhabitants, climate, soil, 
jiroductions, etc., etc. ; | a list of | 
necessary outfits for emigrants; | and 
a I Table of Distances from Camp to 
Camp on the Route. | Also ; | A Letter 
from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident 
Missionary, for tlie last ten years, — 



Palmer (J.) — Continued. 

among the Nez Pen;*^ Tri1)e of Indians, 
on the Koos-koos-kee River; Tiie | 
Organic Laws of Orc^gon Territory; 
Tables of about .300 words of the (Mii- 
nook I Jargon, aud about 200 Words of 
the Nez Perc<i Language ; a Des<!ription 
of I Mount Hood ; Incidents of Travel, 
&c., &c. I I3y .loel Palmer. | 

Cincinnati : | J. A. & U. P. James, 
Walnut street, | V)etween Fourth and 
Fifth. I 1850. 

Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. i)ublisli- 
ers' stiitement pp. iii-iv, text pp. 0-180, 12'^'. 
Linguistic eontentsas undertitlenext .above. 
Copies seen: British Museum. 

.lournal of travels | over the | Rocky 

mountains, | to the | mouth of the 
Columbia river ;| made during the years 
1845 and 1846: | containing minute 
descriptions of the | vjilleys of the 
Willamette, Umiiqua, and Clamet; | a 
general description of | Oregon terri- 
tory; I its inhabitants, climate, soil, 
productions, etc., etc. ; | a list of | 
necessary outfits for emigrants; | .and 
a ( Table of Distances from Camp to 
Camp on the Route. | Also ; | A Letter 
from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident 
Missionary, for the last ten years, | 
among the Nez Perc6 Tribe of Indians, 
on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | 
Organic Laws of Oregon Territory; 
T.ables of about 300 words of the Chi- 
nook I Jargon, and about 200 Words of 
the Nez Percd Language; a Descrijition 
of I Mount Hood ; Incidents of Travel, 
&c.,&c. I By Joel Palmer. | 

Cincinnati: | .1. A. & U. P. James, 
AValuut street, | between Fourth and 
Fifth. 1 1851. 

Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. publishers' advertisement 
pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [sic], t«xt 
pp. 9-189, 12°. 

Linguistic contents .as under titles .above. 

Copies seen : Boston Athen.TBum. 

Journal of tr.'ivels | over the | Rocky 

mountains, | to the | mouth of the 
Columbia river ; | made during the years 
1845 aud 1846: | containing minute 
descriptions of the | valleys of the 
Willamette, Umpqua, aud Clamet; | a 



68 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Palmer (J.) — Continued. 

general description of | Oregon terri- 
tory; I its inhabitants, climate, soil, 
productions, etc., etc.; |a list of | 
necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a 
I Table of Distances from Camp to 
Camp on the Route. | Also ; | A Letter 
from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident 
Missionary, for the last ten years, | 
among the Nez Porct^ Tribe of Indians, 
on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | 
Organic Laws of Oregon Territory ; 
Tables of about 300 words of the Chin- 
ook I Jargon, and about 200 Words of 
the Nez Perc6 Language ; a Description 
of I Mount Hood ; Incidents of Travel, 
&c.,&c. I By Joel Palmer. | 

Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, 
Walnut street, | between Fourth and 
Fifth. I 1852. 

Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. publishers' advertisement 
pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [»-ic], text 
pp. 9-189, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Parker (Bev. Samuel). Journal | of an 
I exploring tour | beyond the Rocky 
mountains, | under the direction of the 
1 A. B. C. F. M. I Performed in the 
years | 1835, '36, and '37; | containing 
I a description of the geographj^, geol- 
ogy, climate, and | productions; and 
the number, manners, and | customs of 
the natives. | AVith a | map of Oi'egon 
territory. | By Rev. Samuel Parker, 
A. M. I 

Ithaca, N. Y. | Puljlished by the 
author. | Mack, Andrus, «fe Woodruff, 
Printers. | 1838. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-xii, text pp. 13-371, map 
and plates, 12°. 

Vocabulary (90 words) of the Chinook [Jar- 
gon] language as spoken about Fort Vancouver, 
pp. 336-338.— Numerals 1-10, 20, 40, 100, p. 338. 

Copies seen : Boston Athenieum, Boston Pub- 
lic, British Museum, Congress, Eames, Mallet, 
Trumbull. 

Journal | of an | exploring tour | 

beyond the Rockj^ mountains, | under 
the direction of the | American board of 
commissions [sk] for foreign missions, 
I in the years 1835, '36, and '37 ; | con- 
taining I a description of the geog- 
raphy, geology, climate, productions | 
of the country, and the number, man- 
ners, and I customs of the natives : I 



Parker (S.) — Continued. 

with a I map of Oregon territory. | By 
rev. Samuel Parker, A. M. | Second 
edition. | 

Ithaca, N. Y. | Published by the 
author. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff, 
printers. | 1840. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. recommen- 
dations pp. iii-iv, preface pp.v-viii, preface to 
the second edition pp. ix-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
text pp. 17-384, appendix pp. 385-399, addenda 
pp. 399-400, map and plate, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp. 396-398. 

Copies seen: Congress, K.-imes, Geological 

The edition: Edinburgh, 1841, 8°, does not 
contain the Chinook Jargon material. (Con- 
gress.) 

— ^ Journal | of an | exploring tour | 
beyond the Rocky mountains, | Under 
the direction of the | A. B. C. F. M. [ in 
the years 1835, '36, and '37 ; | containing 
I a description of the geography, ge- 
ology, climate, produc- | tions of the 
country, and the numbers, manners, | 
and customs of the natives : | with a ( 
map of Oregon territory. | By rev. 
Samuel Parker, A.M. | Third edition. | 
Itliaca, N. Y. | Mack, Andrus, &. 
Woodruff. I Boston : Crocker & Brew- 
ster.— New- York : Dayton & Saxton ; | 
Collins, Keese, & co. — Philadelphia: 
Grigg & Elliot. | London: Wiley & 
Putnam. | 1842, 

Title verso copyright notice (1838) and names 
of printers 1 1. recommendation.'^ pp. iii-iv, 
preface pp. v-viii, preface to the second and 
third editions pp. ix-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
text pp. 17-394, appendix pp. 395-408, map and 
plate, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
405-408. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Boston AthentEum, 
Eames, Geological Survey, Mallet. 

Journal | of an | exploring tour | 

beyond the Rocky mountains, | under 
the direction of the ] A. B. C. F. M. | con- 
taining I a description of the geography, 
geology, climate, pro- | ductions of the 
country, and the numbers, man- | ners, 
and customs of the natives : | with a | 
map of Oregon territorJ^ j By rev. Sam- 
uel Parker, A. M. | Fourth edition. | 

Ithaca, N. Y. | Andrus, Woodruff, «fe 
Gauntlett. | Boston : Crocker & Brew- 
ster. — New York: Huntington «fe Sav- 
age; I Robinson, Pratt, «&. Co. — Phila- 



CHlNOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



59 



Parker (S.) — Coiitimiod. 

<lelj)liia: Thomas, Co\v])cr- | thwait <fc 
Co.— London: Wiloy «fe Putnam. | 1844. 
[ Pp. i-xvi, 17-416, map, 12°. 

Linguistic couteuts us iiiulcr titles above, pp. 
413-41G. 

Onpies seen; Otie in the library of W. W. 
Bcacli, Tonkers, N. Y. 

Journal j of an | exploring tour | 

beyond tlio Rocky monntuins, | under 
the direction of the | A. B. C. F. M. | con- 
taining | a description of the geogra))liy, 
geology, climate, | productions of the 
country, and the nunihers, | manners, 
and customs of the natives: | with a | 
map of Oregon territory. | Jiyrev. Sam- 
uel Parker, A. M. | Fifth edition. | 

Auhurn : | J. C. Derby A: co. ; | New- 
York : Mark H. Newman <Sc co., — Gen- 
eva: G. H. Derby & co. | Cincinnati: 
Derby, Bradley & co. | 1846. 

Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. recom- 
mendations pp. iii-iv, preface ])p. v-vii, preface 
to tlio fifth edition p. ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
text pp. 17-422, map and plate. 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 419-421. 

Copies seen : Congress, Eauies, Georgetown, 
Harvard. 

Samuel Parker, clergyman, born in A.shfield, 
N. H., April 23. 1779; died in Ithaca, ^T. Y., 
March 24, 1866. He was graduated at Williams 
in 180G and at Andover Theological .Seminary 
in 1810, became a missionary in western New 
York, and subsequently was in charge of Con- 
gregational churches in Massachusetts .and 
New York. Mr. P.arker originated the mission 
of tlie American board in Oregon, traveled there 
in 1835-1837, subsequently lectured in many 
eastern States on the character of that territory, 
and did much to establish the claims of the 
United States Government to the lands, and to 
induce emigrants to settle there. He is also 
said to have been the first to suggest the possi- 
bility of constructing a railroad tlirougli tlie 
Rocky mount.ains to the Pacific ocean. — Apple- 
ton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 
Periodical : 

Chinook Jargon See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 

Pilling: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to is in the possession of the 
compiler of this catalogue. 

Pilling (James Constantine). Smithson- 
ian institution — Bureau of ethnology | 
J. W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of 
a I bibliography | of | the languages | 
of the I North American Indians | by | 
James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 



Pilling (J. C.) — Continued. 

Wasliington | Government ])rinting 
office I 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. TV. 
Powell p. iii, preface pp.v-viii, introduction pp. 
ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of 
libraries referred to by initi.als pp. xxxvii- 
xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text 
pj). 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, 
ijulex of laaiguages and dialects pp. 1091-113.'), 
plates, 4°. 

Arranged alpliabetically by name of author, 
I translator, or first word of litlc. One hundred 
and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side 
of the sheet only. 

Pinart (Alphonse L.) [Linguistic mate- 
rial relating to the Chinookan fam- 

ii.y.] C) 

Manuscripts in possession of their author, 
who, some years ago, in response to my request 
for a list of his linguistic material, |wrote me as 
follows : 

" I have collected, during my fifteen years of 
traveling vocabularies, tests, songs, general 
linguistic material, etc., in the following liin- 
guages and dialects . . . and some relating 
to the Chinook. It is impossible at present to 
give you the number of pages, etc., as most of 
it is contained in my note-books, and has not 
as yet been put into shape. 

Platzmann (Julius). Verzeichniss | einer 
Auswahl I amerikanischer | Gramma- 
tiken, | Worterbiicher, Katechismen | 
u. s. w. I Gesammelt | von | Julius 
Platzmann. | 

Leipzig, 1876. | K. F. Kohler's anti- 
quarium, | Poststrasse 17. 

Cover title as ahove, title as Jihove verso 
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. quotation 
from Rouquette verso blank 1 1. text, alphabet- 
ically arranged by family names, pp. 1-38, 9P. 

List of works in Chinuk, p. 10. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Pott (August Friedrich). Doppelung | 
(Reduplikation, Gemination) | als | 
eines der wichtigsteu Bildungsmittel 
der Sprache, | beleuchtet j aus Si)racheu 
aller Welttheile ] durch | Aug. Friedr. 
Pott, Dr. I Prof, der Allgemeinen 
Sprachwiss. an der Univ. zu Halle [»S:c. 
two lines.] | 

Lemgo «& Detmold, | im Verlage der 
Meyer'schen Hof buchhaudluug 1862. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso quo- 
tation! l.Vorwortpp.iii-iv, Inhaltsverzeichniss 
pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-304, List of books on vereoof 
back cover. 8°. 

Reduplicate words in Chinook, p. 114; in 
Lower Chinook, pp. 37, 41, 60, 61, 62, 90. 

Copies seen : Astor, British Museum, Eames. 



60 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Pott (A. F.) — Continue*!. 

Eiuleitung in die allgemoine Spraeh- 

wissencliaft. 

Ill Internationalo Zeitschrift f iir allgemeine 
Spracbwissenscliaft.vol. 1, pp. 1-68, 329-354, vol. 
2, pp. 54-115, 209-251, vol. 3, pp. 110-126, 249-275, 
Supp. pp. 1-193, vol. 4, pp. 07-96, vol. 5, pp. 3- 
18, Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn, 1889, largo 
8°. 

The literature of American linguistics, vol. 4, 
pp. C7-90. This portion was published after Mr. 
Pott's death, whicli occurred July 5, 1887. Tlio 
general editor of tlie Zeitschrift, Mr. Tochmer, 
states in a note tliat Pott'.s p.ipcr is continued 
from the manuscripts whicli he left, and that it 
is to close with the languages of Australia. In 
the section of American linguistics publica- 
tions in all the more important stock.s! of North 
America are mentioned, with brief characteri- 
zation. 

Powell: This word following a title or within 
jiarentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work rt^ferred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in tlie library of Major J. "W. Powell, 
Washington, D. C. 

Powell {Maj. John Wesley). Indian lin- 
guistic faniilie.s of America nortli of 
Mexico. By J. W. Powell. 

In Bureau of Ethnology, seventh annual 
report, pp. 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8^. 

Chinookan family, with a list of synonyms 
and principal tribes, derivation of the name, 
habitat, etc., pp. 6.3-65. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows : 

Indian linguistic families of America 

I nortli of Mexico | by | J. W. Powell 
I Extract from the seventh annual 
report of the Bureau of etlmology | 
[Design] | 

Washington | Government printing 
office I 1891 

Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title 
p. 1, contents pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, royal 
8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Gojrien seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Eamcs, 
Pilling, Powell. 

Practical Chinook [.Jargon] vocabuL'iry. 
.See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 

Prayers : 

Cathlascon See Lee (D.) .and Frost (J. H.) 
Chinook Blanchet (F. N.) 

Chinook .Jargon Bulmer (T. S.) 
Chinook Jargon Demers (M.) et al. 

Priest (.Josiah). American antiquities, | 
and I discoveries in the west: | being | 
an exhibition of the evidence | that an 
ancient population of partially civilized 
nations,! differing entircdy from those of 



Priest (J.) — Continued, 
the present In- 1 diaus, peopled America, 
many centuries before | its discovery by 
Columbus. I And | inquiries into their 
origin, | with a | copious description | 
Of many of their stupendous Works, 
now in ruins. | With | conjectures of 
what may have | become of them. | Com- 
piled I from travels, authentic sources, 
and the re.searches | of | Antiquarian 
Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | 

Alljany : | printed by Hoffman and 
Wliite, No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. 

Folded frontispiece, title verso copyright 
notice 1 1. i)reface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-viii, 
text pp. 9-400, map and plates, 8°. 

Rafinesque (C. S.), Languages of Oregon— 
Chopunisli and t'hinuc, pp. 395-397. 

Copies seen: Harvai'd. 

American antiquities, | and | dis- 
coveries in the west: | being | an exlii- 
liitiou of the evidence | that an ancient 
population of partially civilized na- 
tions, I differing entirely from those of 
the present In- ] dians, peopled America, 
many centuries before | its discovery by 
Columbus. I And | inquiries into their 
origin,' with a | copious description | Of 
many of their stupendous Works, now 
in ruins. | With j conjectures concerning 
what may have ] become of them, j Com- 
piled I from travels, authentic sources, 
and the researches | of | Antiquarian 
Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | Third 
Edition Revised. ] 

Albany: | printed by Holfmau and 
White, I No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. 

Folded frontispiece, title verso copyright 
notice 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-viii, 
text ]ip. 9-400, map and plate, 8°. 

Rafinesque (C. S.), Tabular view of the 
American generic languages, pp. 309-312. 

Languages of Oregon^Chopuuish and 

Chinuc, pp. 395-397. 

Copies seen: Boston Public, Congress, Fames, 
Harvard, Massachusetts Historical Society. 

The Brinley copy, no. 5435, sold for $1.50. 

These articles are omitted in the latereditions 
of Priest's work. 



Primer : 

Chinook Jargon 

Proper names : 
(/hinook 
Chinook 
Clakaiua 



See Le Jeune (J. M. II.) 

See Catlin (G.) 
Stanley (J. M.) 
Stanley (J. M.) 



[Prosch (i'homas W.)] The complete 
I Cliinook Jargon | or j Indian trade 



CHINUUKAN LANGUAGES. 



61 



Prosch (T. W.) — Continued. 

l;iiiKiiiiJi<' I <'t' I Oregon, Washington, 
Hrit-isli Co- | luiiil»i;i, Alaska-, Idaho | 
And otlnu" ports of the Nortli I'acilic | 
Coast. I The best yet issued. | 

G. ])a\ies & co., | ])iil>lishrrs. | TOO 
Front 8tre«'t, Seattle^ | 188S. 

Cover title : Dictionary i of the | Chinook, [ I lit' 
I Indian tradolangungo | of | Oregon, WaHliin;^- 
ton, Idaho, | British ('oluinhia and | Alaska. | 
Cliinook-Euiilish and EuglisliChinook. | 



Prosch (T. W.) — Continued. 

18H8. I C.Davies&co., | publishers, ] Seattle, 
\V.'l\ I (^opyri'iht IKS8 l>y G. Davies. 

(,'()vci- (Itlr, titl(^ verso blank 1 1. preface i)p. 
li-f). text lip. 7-40, IS". 

( 'hinook-Kni;lisli, alphabetically arranged, 
pp. 7-J(j. — Kngliali-CJhiuook, double column.^, 
alphabotiially arranged, pp. 27-38. — Conversa- 
tion in (Miinnok, free translation, pp. :(0— 10. — 
Lord'.s prayer with interlinear Euglish trans- 
lation, p. 40. 

<'i)2ii(K .seen : Tilling. 



Q- 



Quaritch: This word following a title or within 
I)aniitheHes after a note indicates that a (^opy 
of the work referred to has been seen by tb(> 
compiler in the bookstore of Bernard Quaritch, 
I.ond(ni, Eng. 

Qnaritch (Bernard). Catalogue | of 
l>ooks on the | history, geography, | 
and of I the phihdogy | of | America, 
Australasia, Asia, Africa. | I. Histin-ical 
geography, voyages, and | travels. ( II. 
History, ethnology, and philology | of 
America. | III. History, topography, 
and ethnology | of Asia, Polynesia, and 
Africa. | Offered for Cash at the affixed 
net prices by | Bernard (Quaritch. | 

London: | 15 Piccadilly, .June 1885 to 
October 1886. | 1886. 

Title verso contents 1 1. catalogue jjp. 2747- 
3162, index pp. i-lxii, 8=. Lettered on the back : 

QUARITCH'S I OENEItAL | CATALOGUE | PART Xn. 
I VOYAQKS I AND | TRAVELS | AMERICANA | AND | 

OKIENTALIA I LONDON 1886. This voUime com- 
prises no8. 362-364 (June, July,and August, 188,5) 
of the paper-covered series, with the addition of 
a special title and a general index. 

American languages, pp. 3021-3042, contains 
two titles of books uuderthe heading Chinook, 
p. 3026. 

The complete "Gencriil Catalogue," of which 
the above is a portion, comprises 1.") parts, each 
bound in red cloth, paged consecutively 1-4066, 
and a sixteenth part containing a general index 
of 427 i)ages in treble coliinuis. Each volume 
has its own special title and index, with the 



Quaritch (B.) — Continued. 

Iitl(' of (ho series and the number of the part 
lettered on the back. Excepting the index, it 
was originally issued as nos. 332-375 of the 
paper-cover<:d series, from November, 1880, to 
.Vugust, 1887, at which date tlie publication 
was discontinued. The index is dated 1892. 

Copies seen : Eames. 

A large-paper edition with title as follows : 

A general catalogue of books j offered 

to the public at the afitixed prices | by 
I Bernard Quaritch | Vol. I[-YII] | 

London : 1 15 Piccadilly, 1 1887[-1892]. 

7 vols, royal 8=. 

American languages, as under the preceding 
title, vol. 5, pp. 3021-3042. 

Copies seen: Lenox. 

This edition was published at 15?. for the set, 
including the seventh or index volume. 

No. 86. Loudon, December, 1887. | A 

rough list I of I valuable and rare books, 
I comprising | the choicest portions of 
Various Li})raries, and many very cheap 
works of every class of Literature, | at 
greatly reduced prices, | offered by | 
Bernard Quaritch, 15, Piccadilly, W. 

Cover title: "The miscellaneous and the 
nuisieal library of Mr. William Chappell," etc., 
catalogue with heading as above, pp. 1-128, 8^. 

American languages, pp. 1-13, contains titles 
of a l\'.w works giving information relating to 
lll(^ Chinook -Jargmi, p. 7. 

Copieb seen .- Eames, Pilling. 



62 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



B. 



Raflnesque (Constantiue Samuel). At- 
lantic journal, I and 1 friend of knowl- 
edge. I In eight numbers. | Containing 
about 160 original articles and tracts on 
Natural and | Historical Sciences, the 
Description of about 150 New Plants, | 
and 100 New Animals or Fossils. Many 
Vocabularies of Langua- | ges, Histor- 
ical and Geological Facts, &o. &c. &c. 
I By C. S. Rafinesque, A. M. . . Ph. D. 
1 Professor of Historical and Natural 
Sciences, Member of seve- | ral learned 
societies in Europe and America, &c. | 
[Quotation and list of figures, six 
lines.] I 

Philadelphia: | 1832-1833. | (Two 
dollars.) 

Tabular view recto blauk 1 1. title verso in- 
dex 1 1. iconography and illustrations etc. 1 1. 
text pp. 1-202, 205-212, 8°. Originally issued in 
numbers (1-8, and extra of no. 3), from the 
"spring of 1832" to the " winter of 1833." 

Americanhistory. Tabular View of the Amer- 
ican Generic Languages, and Original Nations, 
including the Chinuc, pp. 6-8. 

Languages of Oregon, Chopunish and Chinuc 
(pp. 133-134) contains a vocabulary, English 
and Chinuc, thirty-three words (including 
numerals 1-10), from Cox, Lewis, and other 
sources, p. 134. 

Copies seen : Boston Athenfeum, British Mu- 
seum, Congress, E.ime8. 

Tliese two articles reprinted in : 

Priest (J.), American antiquities, pp. 309-312, 
395-397, Albany, 1833, 8°. 

Constantine Samuel Rafinesque, botanist, 
born in Giilatz, a suburb of Con.stantinople, 
Turkey, in 1784, died in Philadelphia, Pa., Sep- 
tember 18, 1842. He wa.s of French parentage, 
and his father, a merchant, died in Philadelphia 
about 1791. Tlie son came to Philadelphia with 
his brother in 1802, and, after traveling through 
Pennsylvania and Delaware, returned with a 
collection of botanical specimens in 1805 and 
went to Sicily, where he spent ten years as a 
merchant and in the study of botany. In 1815 
he sailed for New York, but was shipwrecked 
on the Long Island coast, and lost his valuable 
books, collections, manuscripts, and drawings. 
In 1818 he went to the west and became pro- 
fessor of botany in Transylvania University, 
Lexington, Ky. Subsequently he traveled and 
lectured iu various places, endeavored to estab- 
lish a magazine and botanic garden, but with- 
out success, and finally settled in Philadelphia, 
where he resided until his death, and where he 
published The Atlantic Journal and Friend of 
Knowledge; a CyclopaedicJournaland Review, 
of which only eight numbers appeared (1832-'33). 
The number of genera »nd specioH that he 



Rafinesqite (C. S.) — Continued. 

introduced into liis works produced great con- 
fusion. A gradual deterioration is found in 
Rafinesque's botanical writings from 1819 till 
1830, when the passion for establishing new 
genera and species seems to have become a 
monomania with him. He .assumed thirty to 
one hundred years as the average time required 
for the production of a new species and five 
hundred to a thousand years for a new genus. 
It is said that he wrote a paper describing 
" twelve new species of thunder and lightning." 
In addition to translations and unfinished l>otan- 
ical and zoological works, he was the author of 
numerous books .ind pamphlets. — Appleton's 
Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 

[Reade (John).] Chinook versus Greek. 

In Montreal Gazette, vol. 119, no. 239, p. 4, 
Montreal, October 6, 1890. (Pilling.) 

A review of Hale (H.), An international 
idiom. 

Contains a general discussion of the Chinook 
Jargon, with a number of examples. 

Reviews: 

Chinook Jargon See Charencey (C. de.) 
Chinook Jargon Cr.ine (A.) 

Chinook Jargou Leland (C. G.) 

Cldnook Jargon Reade (J.) 

Chinook Jargon "Western. 

Richardson (Albert Deane). Beyond the 
Mississippi: | from the great river to 
the great ocean. | Life and adventure 
I on the I prairies, mountains, and 
Pacific coast. | With more than two 
hundred illustrations, from photo- 
graphs and original | sketches, of the 
prairies, deserts, mountains, rivers, 
mines, | cities, Indians, trappers, pion- 
eers, and great natural | curiosities of 
the new states and territories. | 1857- 
1867. I By I Albert D. Richardson, | 
author of ' Field, dungeon and escape.' 
I [Two lines advertisement.] | 

Hartford, Conn., | American pub- 
lishing company. ! National publishing 
company, | Philadelphia, Pa., Cincin- 
nati, 0., Chicago, 111., St. Louis, Mo., | 
New Orleans, La., Atlanta, Ga., Rich- 
mond, Ya. I Bliss & company. New 
York. I 1867. 

Engraved title : Beyond | the [ Mississippi | 
Albert B. Richardson. 

Map, engraved title verso blank, title verso 
copyriglit notice 1 1. extracts from Whittier and 
Longfellow verso blank 1 1. prefatory pp. i-ii, 
illustrations pp. iii-vii, contents pp. ix-xvi, text 
pp. 17-572. 8°. 

Short vocabulary (20 words, alphabeticijly 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



63 



Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. 

arnuiftwl by English words) of tlio Chinook 
Jargon, and the numorals 1-10,20,30,100, 1000 
in (ho same, pp. 50'2-50;t. 

Coi>ifs seen : A.stor, Boston Athensoum, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Trumbull. 

Soini^ copies vary slightly iu«the imprint, 
aTid omit the date. (Kames, Harvarti.) Another 
edition: Hartford, 1869, S°. (*) 

A. later edition with title-page as follows : 

Beyond the Mississippi : | from the 

great river to the j^reat oceuu. | Life 
and adventure \ on the | prairies, moun- 
tains, and racitic coast. | With more 
than two hundred illustrations, from 
photographs and original | sketches, 
of the prairies, deserts, mountains, 
rivers, mines, | cities, Indians, trap- 
pers, pioneers, and great natural | 
curiosities of the new states and terri- 
tories. I New edition. | Written down 
to summer of 1869. i By | Albert D. 
Richardson, | author of 'Field, dun- 
geon and escape,' and ' Personal | his- 
tory of Ulysses S. Grant.' | [Two lines 
advertisement.] | 

Hartford: ( American i)ublishing 
company, j 1875, 

2 p. 11. pp. i-xvi, 17-572, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Trumbull. 

Albert Deane Richardson, journalist, born 
in Franklin, Mass., October 6, 1833, died in 
New York city December 2, 1869. He was edu- 
cated at the district school of his native village 
and at Holliston academy. At eighteen years 
of age he went to Pittsburg, Pa., where he 
formed a newspaper connection, wrote a farce 
for Barney "Williams, and appeared a few times 
on the stage. In 1857 he went to Kansas, 
taking an active part in the political struggle 
of the territory, attending antislavery meet- 
ings, makingspeeches, and corresponding about 
the issues of the hour with the Boston Journal. 
He was also secretary of the territorial legisla- 
ture. Two years later he went to Pike's Peak, 
the gold fever being then at its height, in com- 
pany with Horace Greeley, between whom and 
Richardson a lasting friendship was formed. In 
the autumn of 1859 he made a journey through 
the southwestern territories, and sent accounts 
of his wanderings to eastern journals. During 
the winter that preceded the civil war he vol- 
unteered to go through the south as secret cor- 
respondent of the Tribune, and returned, after 
many narrow escapes, just before the firing on 
Sumter. He next entered the field as war cor- 
respondent, and for two years alternated 
between Virginia and the southwest, being 
present at many battles. On the night of May 
3, 1863, he undertook, in company with Junius 
Henri Browne, a feUow correspondent of the 



Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. 

Tribune, and Richard T. Coll)urn, of the New 
York World, to run the batteries of Vicksburg 
on two barges, which were laslied to a steam 
tug. After they had been under fire for more 
than half an hour, a large shell strui-k the tug, 
and. bursting in the furnace, threw tlie coals on 
the barges .and then set them on fire. Out of 
34 men, 18 were killed or wounded .and 16 wero 
captured, the correspondents among them. The 
Confederate government would neither release 
nor exchange the Tribune men, who, after 
spending eighteen months in seven southern 
prisons, escaped from Salisbury, N. C, in tlie 
dead of winter, and, walking 400 miles, arrived 
within the national liniis at Strawberry Plains, 
Teun., several months before the close of the 
war. — AjJpleton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 

Ross (Alexander). Adventures | of the 
first settlers on the ( Oregon or Colum- 
bia river : | being | <a narrative of the 
exjjedition fitted out by | John Jacob 
Astor, I to establish the ( '"Pacific fur 
company;" | with an account of some 
( Indian tribes on the coast of the 
Pacific. I By Alexander Ross, | one of 
the adventurers. | 

London: | Smith, Elder and co., 65 
Cornhill, | 1849. 

Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-v, contents pp. vi-xv, errata p. [xvi], text pp. 
1-352, 12°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook (200 words) and 
numerals (1-5000), pp. 342-348. — Vocabulary of 
the Chinook Jargon (30 words), p. 349. 

Copies seen : Astor, Bancroft, Boston 
Athenffium, British Museum, Bureau of Eth- 
nology, Congress, Trumbull. 

Alexander Ross, author, born in Nairnshire, 
Scotland, May 9, 1783, died in Colony Gardens 
(now in Winnipeg, Manitoba), Red River Set- 
tlement, British North America, October 23, 
1856. He came to Canada in 1805, taught in 
Glengarry, U. C, and in 1810 joined John Jacob 
A.stor's expedition to Oregon. Until 1824 he 
was a fur-trader and in the service of the Hud- 
son Bay Company. About 1825 he removed to 
the Red River settlement and was a member 
of the council of Assineboia, and was sheriff 
of the Red River settlement for sever.al years. 
He was for fifteen years a resident in the territo- 
ries of the Hudson Bay Company, and has given 
the result of his observations in the works : 
Adventures of the First Settlers on the Oregon 
or Columbia River; being a Narrative of the 
Expedition fitting out by John Jacob Astor to 
establish the Pacific Fur Company, with an 
Account of some Indian Tribes on the Coast of 
the Pacific (London, 1849) ; The Fur-Hunters of 
the Far West, a Narrative of Adventures in 
the Oregon and Rocky Mountains (2 vols. 1855), 
and The Red River Settlement {16b6).— Apple- 
ton's Cyclop, of Am. Biuy. 



64 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



s. 



Sabin (Joseph). A | ilictiouiiry | of | 
Books relating to America, | from its 
discovery to the present time. | By 
Joseph Sabin. | Volume I[-XX]. | 
[Three lines quotation.] | 

New-York : | Joseph Sabin, 84 Nassau 
street. | 1868 [-1892]. 

20 vols. 8-. Still ill course of publication. 
Parts cxv-€xvi, which begiu vol. 20, reach tho 
article " Smith." Now edited by Mr. "Wilber- 
force Eamos. 

Contains, passim, titles of books in and 
relating to the Chinookan lansuages. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological 
Survey, Lenox. 

See Field (T.AV.) 

[St. Onge (7>Vr. Louis Napoleon).] His- 
tory of the old testament. | Age I. | 
From Adam to Abraham. | Containing 
2083 Y'ears. 

[Kamloops, B. C. : 1892.] 

No title-page, heading only; text in the 
Chinook Jargon, stenographic characters, with 
English headings in italics, pp. 1-24, 16°. 

Forms a supplement to Le Jeune (J. M. R.), 
Kamloops Wawa, vol. 2, nos. 1-C (nos. 33-38 of 
the series), July 3-August 7, 1892. 

Copies seen : Pilling. 

-j- I Bible history | translated | into 

the Chinook Jargon by | the Rev. L. N. 
Saint Onge Missionary | anuing the 
Yakamas and other Imliau tribes of 
the Territo- | ries of Washington, 
Idaho, Montana, and of | Oregon. ( A. 
M. D. G. I 1892. 

Manuscript ; title verso blank 1 1. preface 13 
leaves, written on one side only, text (in the 
Jargon with interlinear English translation, 
written on both sides) 11. 1-142, 4°. In possession 
of Dr. T. S. Bulnier, Cedar City, Utah, who 
intends incorporating it in one of his publica- 
tions on the Chinook Jargon. Father St. Onge 
informs me that he intends publishing this 
paper separately also, under the title of 
" Chinook Jargon translation of the Epitome 
Historia) Sacrse." 

Chinook Jargon Dictionary | by | L. 

N, Saintouge, Ptre. | English-Chinook 
Jargon. | Part first. | 

Troy, N. Y., U. S. A. : | 1892. | A. M. 
D.G. 

Manuscript; title verso note 1 1. text (alpha- 
betically arranged by English words) pp. 1-184, 
8°. Recorded in a blank book bound in leather. 
In possession of its author. 

Chinook Wawa [writing], pp. 1-181. — Sounds 
Qf the letters used, pp. l'<2-184_. 



St. Onge (L.N.) — Continued. 

The dictionary contains probably 6,000 word's. 

Concerning the second part of this work, 
Father Saiutonge writes me, under date of 
January 24, 1893, as follows : 

"I am not now working at my dictionary 
(.second jiart) because I am not well enough, but 
I intend to finish it as soon as I can. lean not 
have it published now because I have not the 
means for that purpose. You may say it is 
intended for publication some time in the 
futur(\ Tlui second part will not be so volu- 
minous as the first; the list of words will not 
bo so groat, but thedetinitions will takogreater 
space, a.s I shall give the etymology and source 
from which each Jargon word comes." 

Hymns in the Chinook Jargon. 

In Bulmer (T. S.), Hymns, songs, cfeo., in 
Chinook Jargon (manuscript), 11. 34-45. 

[Legends in the Chinook Jargon.] 

In Bulmer (T. S.), Appendix to Buhner's 
Chinook Jargon grammar and dictionary (man- 
uscript) 11. 2(>-57, 4°. 

Accompanied by an interlinear translation in 
English. 

See Bulmer (T.S.) 

See Demers (M.), Blanchet (F.N.) 

and St. Onge (L. N.) 

" The subject of this sketch, the Rev. Louis 
N. St. Onge, of St. Alphonse de Liguori jiarish, 
was born [in the village of St. Cesaire] a few 
miles south of Montreal, Canada, Aprill4, 1812. 
He finished his classical course when yet very 
young, after which he studied law for two 
years. Feeling called to another field, he gave 
up this career in order to prepare himself to 
work for God's glory as an Indian missionary 
in the diocese of Nesqually, Washington Terri- 
tory. 

"A year and a half before his ordination, 
Right Rev. A. M. Blanchet, his bishop, ordered 
him to Vancouver, W. T., where he was occu- 
pied as a professor of natural philosoph3-, 
astronomy, and other branches in the Holy 
Angel's Ctdlcge. All his spare time was conse- 
crated to the study of the Indian languages, in 
which he is to-day one of the most expert, so 
that he was ready to go on active missionary 
work as soon as ordained. 

" The first years of his missionary life were 
occupied in visiting difi'erent tribes of Indians 
and doing other missionary work in the Terri- 
tories of Washington, Idaho, Montana, and 
other Rocky Mountain districts, among Indians 
and miners. After such labors be Was llien 
.appointed to take charge of the Yakamas, 
Klikitats, Winat('has, Wishrams, I'shwauwa- 
p.ams, Narchez, and other Indian tribes inhab- 
iting the central part of Washingtcui Territory. 
Having no means, of support iu his new mia- 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



65 



I 



St. Onge (L. N.) — (loiuiiuicd. 

8iiiii, lii.shoi) Hlanclict, in liis Holf-sacrificiii;; 
cliiiiity foi'tlic! IiidiaiiHof lii.s exlcimivcdioccsi', 
riiini«li('(l liiiii witli llii' iici'cs.sarv oiitlit; and 
witli a iiuiiil)cr of williu;; tliough uii.skillcd 
IiidiaiiH as a])i)rculicti (^arpt^iilfrH, tlir yoiin;; 
iiiis.sioiinrv wet to work to rolxiild tlio St. 
.JiKscpirs mission, de.slroyod ill 185<> by a party 
of vaudaLs called the Oregon Volunteers, wlio 
had lieen .sent to ti>;ht tlie Yakanias. 

"After four years of lahor, he and liis 
devoted companion, Mr. J. B. Boulet (now 
(U'dained and stationed auiuut; the Tulalip In- 
dians) had the satisfaction to see not only a 
comfortable residence, l)tit also a neat church, 
creeled, and a lini* tract of land planted with 
fruit trees, and in a profitahh' state of cultiva- 
tion, whore formerly only ruin and desolation 
reigned. 

"Ills health breaking down entirely, he was 
forced to leave his present and daily increasing 
congregation of noophites. Wishing to give him 
the best medical treatment, Bislio]) Blanchet 
sent Father St. Onge to his native land with a 
leave of absence until his health would be 
restored. During his eighteen months' stay in 
a hospital he, however, utilized his time l)y 
composing and printing two small Indian 
books, containing rules of granunar, catecdiism, 
hymns, and Christian prayers in Yakania and 
Chinook languages — the former for children, 
the latter for the use of missionaries on the 
Pacific coast. 

"By the advice of his physician he tlicn 
undertook a voyage to Europe, where he spent 
nearly a year in search of health. Back again 
to this country, he had charge of a congregation 
for a couple of years in Vermont ; and now he 
is the pastor of the two French churches of 
Glens Falls and Sandy Hill, in the diocese of 
Albany, New York. 

'■Father St. Onge, though a man of uncom- 
mon physical appearance, stoutly built and six 
feet and four inches in height, has not yet 
entirely recovered his health and strength. The 
French population of Glens Falls liave good 
cause for feeling very much gratitied with the 
present condition of the affairs of the parish of 
St. Alphonse de Liguori, and should receive the 
hearty congratulations of the entire commu- 
nity. Father St. Onge, a man of great erudition, 
a devoted servant to the church, and possessing 
a personality whose geniality and courtesy 
hav(» won him a place in the hearts of his peo- 
ple, has by his faithful application to his 
parish developed it and brought out all that 
was to inure to its benefit and further advance 
its interests." — Glenn Falls (X. Y.) lieptcblicaii, 
March 28, 18S9. 

Father St. Onge remained at Glens Falls until 
October. 1891, when increasing intirmities com- 
pelled him to retire permanently from the min- 
istry. He is now living with his brother, the 
rector of St.. Jean Baptiste church, in Troy, N. 
Y. Since his retirement he lias compiled an 
English-Chinook Jargon dictionary of about 

CHIN 5 



St. Onge (Ij. N.) — ("ouliniuxl. 

six thousand words, and this lie intends to 
sui)i)loment with a corresjionding Jargon-Kng- 
lish part. Jle has also begun the preparation 
of a Yakanui dictionary, which hi- liii|)is to 
make niuih more complete than that of Father 
Pandosy, published in Dr. Shea's Library of 
American linguistics. 

1 have adopted tliesjielling of his name as it 
appears on the title-page of J'isho)) Demers's 
Chinook Jargon dictionary, though the true 
spelling, and the one he uses now, is Saint 
onge — that of a French province in which his 
ancestors lived and from which four w five 
families came in ItiOG, all adopting the name. 
His family name is Payant. 

Sayce (Archibald Henry). Introduction 
to the I .science of hiugiiajxc. | liy | A. 
H. .Saycc, | depntyprofcSKor of compar- 
ative philohtjiy ill the university of 
Oxford. I In two voluinfH. | A'ol.I[-II]. 

London: | C. Kegan Paul & co., 1, 
Paternoster S(]nare. | 1880. 

2 vols. : half-title verso blank 1 I. title verso 
quotation and notice 1 1. preface pp.v-viii, table 
of contents verso blank 1 1. text jip. 1-441, colo- 
phon verso blank 1 1. ; half-title verso blank 1 1. 
title verso quot ation and notice 1 1. table of con- 
tents verso blank 1 1. text pji. l-;i.52, selected list 
of works pp. 35:5-36.!, index pp. 3()5-t21, 12'=. 

A classification of American languages (vol. 
2, pp. 57-64) includes the Chinook, p. 60. 

Coines seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Fames. 

Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe). Historical | 
and I statistical information, | respect- 
ing the I history, condition and pros- 
pects I of the I Indian tribes of the 
Ignited States : | collected and prepared 
under the direction | of the | bureau 
of Indian affairs, | i>er act of Congress 
of March 3d, 1847, by Henry R. School- 
craft, LL.D. lUustriited by S. Eastman, 
capt. U. S. A. I Published by Authority 
of Congress, j Part I [-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: Lippincott.Grambo«fe 
company, | (successors to Grigg, Elliot 
& CO.) I 1851 [-1857]. 

Engraved title : [Engraving.] | Historical | 
and I statistical information | respecting the | 
history, condition and prosjiects of the Indian 
tribes of the United .States : | Collected and i)re- 
jtared under the | direction of the bureau of 
Indian attairs, per act of Congress | of March 
3'^'il847 1 by Henry R. Schoolcraft L.L.D. | Illus. 
trated by | S. Eastman, cajit. U. S. army. | [Coat 
of arms.] | Published by authority of Con- 
gress. I Parti [-VI]. I 

Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo & co. 

6 vols. 4°. Beginning with vol. 2 the wordr. 
"Historical and statistical " are li'l't off the 



66 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Schoolcraft (II. R.) — Continued. 

title-pages, both engraved and printed. Subse- 
quently (1853) vol. 1 was .also issued with the 
abridged title beginning "Inform.ation respect- 
ing the history, condition, and prospects of the 
Indian tribes, " making it Tiniform with the 
other parts. 

Two editions with these title-pages were pub- 
lished by the same house, one on thinner and 
somewhat smaller paper, of wliicli but vols 1-5 
were issued. 

Part I, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological re- 
searches, I respecting [ the red man of America) 
verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso 
blank 1 1. printed title as above verso blank 1 1. 
introductory documents pp. iii-vi, preface pp. 
vii-x, list of plates pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xiii- 
xviii, text pp. 13-524, .ippendix pp. 525-5G8, 
plates, colored lithograplis and maps numbered 
1-76. 

Part 11, 1852. Half-title (as in part I) verso 
blank 1 1. engraved title (Information respecting 
the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
blank 1 1. printed title (Information respecting 
tbehistory, condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
printers 1 1. dedication verso blankl 1. introduc- 
tory document pp. vii-xiv, contents pp. xv-xxii, 
list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608, 
plates and maps numbered 1-29, 31-78, and 2 
plates exhibiting the Cherokee alphabet and its 
application. 

Part III, 1853. Half-title (as in part i) verso 
blank 1 1 .engraved title (as in part ii ) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part ii) verso printer 1 1. 
third report pp. v-viii, list of divisions p. ix, 
contents xi-xv, list of plates pp. xvii- xviii, 
text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 
1-21, 25-45. 

Part IV, 1854. Half-title <as in part i) verso 
blank 1 1. engraved title (as in part ii) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part II) verso blank 1 1. 
dedication pp. v-vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list 
of divisions p. xi, contents pp. xiii-xxiii, list of 
plates pp. xxv-xxvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and 
maps numbered 1-42. 

Pai-t V, 1855. Half-title (as in part I) verso 
blank 1 1. engraved title (as in part II) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part ii) verso blank 1 1. 
dedication pp. vii-viii, fifth report pp. ix-xii, list 
of divisions p, xiii, synopsis of general contents 
of vols, i-v pp. xv-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxii, 
list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 25-625, ap- 
pendix pp. 627-712, plates and maps numbered 
1-8, 10-36. 

Part VI, 1857. Half-title (General history | of 
the 1 North American Indians^ verso blank 1 1. 
portrait 1 1. printed title (History | of the | Indian 
tribes of the United States : | their | present 
condition and prospects, | and a sketch of their 
I ancient status. | Published by order of con- 
gress, ! under the direction of the department of 
the interior — Indian bureau. jBy | Henry Rowo 
Schoolcraft, LL. D. I Member [&c. six lines.] | 
AVith Illustrations by Eminent Artists. | In one 
volume. 1 Part vi of the series. | Philadelphia: 
I J. B. Lippincott & co. J 1857.) verso blank 1 1. 



Schoolcraft (H. R, ) — Continued. 

inscription verso blank 1 1. letter to the presi- 
dent pp. vii-viii, report pp. ix-x, preface pp. xi- 
xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxvi, list of plates pp. 
xxvii-xxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-756, 
fifty-seven plates, partly ."lelected from the other 
volumes, and three tables. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (340 words 
alphabetically arranged by English words) 
vol. 5, pp. 548-551. 

Emmons (G. F.), Replies to inquiries respect- 
ing the Indian tribes of Oregon and California, 
vol. 3, pp. 200-225. 

Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indian fami- 
lies of speech, vol. 3, pp. 397-402. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
naeum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, 
National Museum, Powell, Shea, Trumbull. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 1581, Quaritch bought 
a copy for il. 10s. The Field copy, no. 2075, sold 
for $72 ; the Menzies copy, no. 1765, lbr$132 ; the 
Squier copies, no. 1214, $120 ; no. 2032, $60 ; the 
Ramirez copy, no. 773 (5 vols.), 51. 5s. ; the Pinart 
copy, no. 828 (5 vols, in 4), 208 fr. ; the Murphy 
copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30017, 
101. 10s. ; by Clarke &. co. 1886, $65 ; by Quaritch, 
in 1888, 151. 

Reissued with title-pages as follows : 

Archives | of [ Aboriginal Knowledge. 

I Containing all the | Original Papers 
laid before Congress | respecting the | 
History, Antiquities, Language, Eth- 
nology, Pictography, | Rites, Supersti- 
tions, and Mythology, | of the | Indian 
Tribesof the United States | by] Henry 
R. Schoolcraft, LL. D. | With Illustra- 
tions. I Oua^ndun ih ieu muzziuyegun 
un. — Algonquin. | In six volumes. | 
Volume I [-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
Co. I 1860. 

Engraved title : Information | respecting the 
I History, Condition and Prospects | of the | 
Indian Tribes of the United States : | Collected 
and prepared under the | Bureau of Indian 
Atfairs | By Henry R. Schoolcraft L. L. D. | 
Mem : Royal Geo. Society, London. Royal An- 
tiquarian Society. Copenhagen. Ethnological 
Societj'. Paris, &c. &c. | Illustrated by | Cap.' 
S. Eastman, U. S.A. andother eminent artists. | 
[Vignette.] | Published by authority of Con- 
gress. I 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. 

6 vols, maps and plates, 4°. 

This edition agrees in the text page for page 
with the original titled above, and contains in 
addition an index to each volume. 

Copies .seen : Congress. 

P.irtially reprinted with title as follows: 

[ ] The I Indian tribes I of the I United 

States : \ their | history, antiquities, cus- 
toms, religion, arts, language, | tradi- 



CHINOOKAN LANGUACIE8. 



67 



Schoolcraft (H. K.) — ^'ont'uiK'l- 
tions, oral Icif^endw, iiudmyth.s. I E(li((Ml 
by I Francis S.Drako. | Illustrated with 
one hundred line eu<j;ravinj;s on steel. 
I In two volumes. | Vol. I [-II]. | 

Philadeljdiia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
CO. I London : 16 Southampton street, 
Covent Garden. | 1884. 

2 vol.s. : portrait 1 1. title verso copyriglit 
notice 1 1. pn^face i)p. S-5, contents pp. 7-8, list 
of plates pp. 0-10, introduction pp. 1 1-24, text 
pp. 25-458; frontispiece 1 1. title verso copy- 
right notice 1 1. contents pp. H-6. list of plates 
p. 7, text pp. 9-445, index pp. 447-455, plates, 4°. 

"In the following pages tlio attempt has been 
made to place before the pn))lic in a convenient 
and accessible form the results of the life-long 
labors in the lield of aboriginal researcli of the 
late Henry K. Schoolcraft." 

Chapter ii. Language, literature, and pic- 
tography, vol. 1, pp. 47-G3, contains general 
remarks on the Indian languages. 

Copies seen : Congress. 

Priced by Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6376, .$25. 

Henry Eowe Schoolcraft, ethnologist, born in 
[Watervliet] Albany county, IST. Y., March 28, 
1793, died in Washington, D. C, December 10, 
1864. Was educated at Middlebury college, 
Vermont, and at Union, where he pursued the 
studies of chemistry and mineralogy. In 1817-'18 
he traveled in Missouri and Ark.insas, and 
returned with a large collection of geological 
and mineralogical specimens. In 1820 he was 
appointed geologist to Gen. Lewis Cass's explor- 
ing expedition to Lake Superior and the head- 
waters of Mississippi River. He was secre- 
tary of a commission to treat with the Indians 
at Chicago, and, after a journey through Illi- 
nois and along Wabasli and Miami rivers, was 
in 1822 appointed Indian agent for the tribes 
of the lake region, establishing liimself at 
Sault Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mack- 
inaw, where, in 1823, he married Jane Joliuston, 
granddaughter of Waboojeeg, a noted Ojibway 
chief, who received her education in Europe. In 
1828 he founded the Michigan historical society 
and in 1831 the Algic society. From 1828 till 
1832 he was a member of the territorial legisla- 
ture of Michigan. In 1832 he led a government 
expedition, which followed the Mississippi 
River up to its source in Itasca Lake. In 1836 
he negotiated a treaty with the Indians on the 
upper lakes for the cession to the United States 
of 16,000,000 acres of their lands. He was then 
appointed acting superintendent of Indian 
afiairs, and in 1839 cliief disbursing agent for 
the northern department. On his return from 
Europe in 1842 he made a tour through western 
Virginia, Ohio, and Canada. He was appointed 
by the Xew York legislature in 1845 a commis- 
sioner to take the census of the Indians in the 
state and collect information conceruing the 
Six Nations. After the performance of this 
task, Con cress authorized him, on^Iarch 3, 1847, 
to obtain through the Indian bureau reports 



Schoolcraft (II. K'.) — (Jontinned. 

rl^lating to all the Indian tribes of tlie country, 
and to collate and c^dit the information. In this 
work he spent tin', remaining years of liis life. 
Through liis influence many laws were enacted 
for the protecti(m and benefit of the Indians. 
Numerous scientific societies in the United 
States and Europe elected him to membership, 
and the University of Geneva gave him the 
degree of LL.D. in 1846. He was the author of 
numerous iiocms, lectures, and reports on 
Indian subjects, besides thirty-ono larger 
works. Two of his lectures before the Algic 
society at Detroit on the ' ' Grammatical Con- 
struction of the Indian Languages" were trans- 
lated into French by Peter S. Duponcoau, and 
gained for their author a gold meilal from the 
Frencli institute. . . . To the five volumes 
of Indian researches compiled under the direc- 
tion of the war department ho added a sixtli, 
containing the post-Coluujljian history of tlio 
Indians and of their relations with Euro))e.aus 
(Philadelphia, 1857). He had collected material 
for two additional volumes, but the Govern- 
ment suddenly suspended the publication of 
the work. — Aj^plcton's Cyclop, of Am. liiog. 

Scouler ( Dr. John). Observations on the 
indigenous tribes of the N. W. coast of 
America. By John Scouler, M. D., F. 
L. S., &c. 

In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 11, 
pp. 215-251, London, 1841, 8°. (Congress.) 

Includes vocabularies of a number of the 
languages of the region named, among them 
the Chinook (entrance to Columbia River) and 
Cathlascon (banks of the Columbia), i)p. 242- 
247. Furuisbod tho author by Dr. W. F. Tolmio. 

Extracts from these vocabularies appear in 
G-ibbs (G.), Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 

On tlie Indian Tribes inhabiting the 

Norlli-West Coast of America. By John 
Scouler, M.D., F. L. S. Conmixmicated 
by the Ethnological Society. 

In Edinburgh Xew Philosoph. Jour, vol.41, 
pp. 168-192, Edinburgh, 1846, 8^. (Congress.) 

Vocabulary (19 words) of the Chikcelis [Clii- 
nook Jargon], compared with the Tlaoqnatcli 
(of Tolmie)and the Kootkan (of Mozino) p. 176. 

Reprinted in the Ethnological Soc. of Lon- 
don Jour. vol. 1, pp. 228-252, Edinburgh, n. d., 
8°, the vocabulary occurring on p. 236. 

Semple (J. E.) Vocabulary of the Clat- 
sop language. 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of (lie 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. Col- 
lected in 1870 near Fort Stevens, Oregon. 

Contains 35 words only. 
Sentences: 

Cascade See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 

Chinook Francbere (G.) 

Chinook Jargon Allen (A.) 

Cliinook .Jargon Chinook. 

Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 



68 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Sentences — C'outiniuMl. 

Chinook Jargon Sec Kells (M.) 



Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Cliinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Clakaiua 



Green (J. S.) 
Halo (H.) 
Loland(C.G.) 
Macfle (M.) 
Macdouald (D.G. F. 
Stuart (G.) 
Gatschet (A. S.) 



See Eells (M.) 
Hale(H.) 
New. 

Vocabulary of the 



Bermons: 

Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 

Shortess (Robert) 
Lower Cbiuook. 

Manuscript; title verso hiank 1 1. text 5 11. 
written on one side only, folio ; in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in 1853. 

Contains 180 words. 

Smith (Silas B.) Ou the Chinook names 
of the salmon in the Columbia Eiver. 
By Silas B. Smith. 

In National Mu.seum Proc. vol. 4, pp. 391-392, 
Washington, 1882, 8^. (Pilling.) 

Comprises a half-dozen names only. 

Smithsonian Institution : Those words following 
a title or within parentheses after a note indi- 
cate that a copy of the work referred to has 
been seen by the compiler in the library of that 
institution, Washington, D. C. 



Songs: 

Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 



See Boas (F.) 
Eells (M.) 
Buhner (T. S.) 
Crane (A.) 



Sproat (Gilbert Malcolm). Scenes and 
Btudies I of savage life. | By | Gilbert 
Malcolm Sproat. | [Two lines quota- 
tion.] I 

London : Smith, Elder and co. | 1868. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-x, preface 
pp. xi-xii, text pp. 1-310, appendix pp. 311-317, 
colophon p. [318], 12^. 

Chapter xv. Intellectual capacity and lan- 
guage (pp. 119-1-13) includes a vocabulary of 14 
words showing affinities between the Chinook 
Jargon and Aht, p. 139.— General discussion of 
the languages, including the Chinook Jargon, 
with examples, pp. 139-142.— Note on the Chi 
nook and Jargon- Chinook, pp. 313-314. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Boston Public, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Fames, Georgetown. 

Stanley (J. M.) Portraits | of | North 
American Indians, | with sketches of 
scenery, etc. I painted by | J.M.Stan- 
ley. I Deposited with | the Smithsonian 
iustitutiou. [Sealof the institution.] | 
Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion. I December, 1852. 



Stanley (.1. M.) — Continued. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
n.amesof printers 1 1. preface ver.so contents! 1. 
text pp. 5-72, index pp. 73-76, 8". 

Forms Smitlisonian Institution Miscellaneous 
Collections, 53 ; also part of a'oI. 2 of the same 
series, Wa.shington, 1862. 

Contains the names of personages of many 
Indian tribes of the United States, toanumber 
of which is added the English signification. 
Among the peoples represented are the Chi- 
nooks, p. 60; Clackamas, p. 61. 

Copies seen : Bureau of Ethnology, Earaes, 
Geological Survey, Pilling, Smitb.sonian, Wel- 
lesley. 

Steiger(E.) Steiger's | bibliotheca glot- 
tica, I i^art first. | A catalogue of | Dic- 
tionaries, Grammars, Readers, Exposi- 
tors, etc. 1 of mostly | modern languages 
1 spoken in all parts of the earth, | 
except of I English, French, German, 
and Spanish. | First division : ! Abeuaki 
to Hebrew. | 

E. Steiger, | 22 A: 24 Frankfort Street, 
I New York. [1874.] 

Half-title on cover, title as above verso name 
of printer 1 1. notice dated Sept. 1874 verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-40, advertisements 2 11. col- 
ophon on back cover, 12'^. 

Titles of works relating to American lan- 
guages generally, p. 3 ; Chinook, p. 24. 

The second division of the first part was not 
jiublished. Part second is on the English lan- 
guage and ])art third on the German language. 

In his notire the compiler states : "This com- 
pilation must not be regarded as an attempt at 
a complete linguistic bibliography, but solely as 
a bookseller's catalogue for business purposes, 
with special regard to the study of philology 
in America." 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

Stuart (Granville). Montana as it is; | 
being ] a general description of its re- 
sources,] both mineral and agricultural, 
I including a | complete description of 
the face of the | country, its climate, 
I etc.,i illustrated with a | map of the ter- 
j ritory, | drawn by capt. W.W. De Lacy, 
I showing the different roads and the 
locatioii of I the different mining dis- 
tricts. I To Avhich is appended, | a 
complete dictionary | of | the Snakts 
language, ] and also of the | famous 
Chiuno(dc lsic'\ Jargon, | Avith | numer- 
ous critical and explanatory notes, | 
concerning the habits, superstitions, 
etc., of I these Indians, | Avith | itiner- 
aries of all the routes across the plains. 
I By Granville Stuart. | 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



69 



Stuart ((i.) — Colli iimt'fl. 

New Yolk: I V. S. Wcstcott & co., 
ininters, | No. 79 John Ktreet. | 1865. 

Hall'-titl(^ : A I (lictioiiary | of Hit* | Cliimiook 
Jargon, I in n.so anionjj the tribes of | Oregon, 
Wasliinglon territory, BritiHli Colitiiibia, | and 
the north J'acific coast, | witli | crilii'al and 
explanatory notes. | ]5j' (IranviUe Stuart. 

Cover title as above, largo fohled map, tithi 
a.s al)ove verso copyright notice 1 1. preface p]>. 
:{-l, text pp. 5-98, lialftitle verso bhmk 1 1. 
l)reface verso rules of pronnneiation ](]>. l()l- 
l()2, text pp. 103-175, 8°. 

Dictionary of the Cliiunook Jargon, alpha- 
betically arranged by English words. i)p. 103- 
119.— Numerals 1-10, 20, 30, 100, 1000, p. 119.— 
Short dialogue in Chiunook Jargon, i)p. 120- 
121.— Exphmatory note.*, pp. 122 127. 

Oopieg seen : Astor, Bancroft, Congress, 
Eames, Georgetown. 

Swan (James Gilcliiist). Tlie | nortli- 
wt'st coast; | or, | three years' resi- 
dence in Washington | territory. | Ky 
James G. Swan. | [Territorial seal.] | 
With numerous illustrations. | 

Now York : | Harper &. brothers, 
publishers, | Franklin square. | 18i>7. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title ver.so cojjyright notice 
1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pi>. 
v-rii, contents pp. ix-xiv, list of illu-strationsp. 
[xv], map, text pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, 
index pp. 431-435, 12°. 

Language of the Indians (pp. 306-326) con- 
tains remarks on the Jargon, different methods 
of spelling words by writers, difficulty of 
rightly understanding the Jargon, etc., 
including a comparative vocabulary of iN'ootka, 
Chenook dialect or Jargon, and English (11 
words), p. 307; explanation of a number of 
Jargon words, pp. 316-317. — Vocabulary of the 
Chenook or Jargon (about 250 words, alphabet- 
ically arranged) and numerals 1-1000, pp. 415- 
421.— Comparative list of 12 words in Kootka, 
and Chenook or Jargon, p. 422. — Many Chinook 
terms passim. 

Copies eeen .- Astor, Bancroft, British 



S'wan (.1. ('>.) — roiitinuod. 

.VIus<!um, (y'ongress, Eames, Ci'ological Survey, 
Harvard. I'illing. 

Issued also witli title-page as follows: 

The I northwest coast; | or, | tiiree 

years' residence in Washington | terri- 
tory. I By I James G. Swan. | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

London: | Sampson IjOw, Sun A co., 
47 Ludgate hill. ( New York: Harper 
4S; brothers. | 18.57. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title 1 1. dedi(^ation verso 
l)lauk 1 I. introduction pp. v-vii, contents pp. 
ix-xiv, list of illu8t7'ations p. xv. uuip, text pp. 
17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431- 
435, 12^. 

Linguistic contents as undertitlenext above. 

Gopie» Keen: Cliarles L. Woodwaril, Kew 
York City. 

Mr. James Gilchrist Swan was born in Med- 
fonl, Mas?.. January 11, 1818, and was educated 
at an academy in that place. In 1833 lie went to 
Jioston to reside, and remained there until 1849, 
when heleft forSan Francisco, where he arrived 
in 1850. In 1852 he went to Shoalwater Bay, 
where he remained until 1856, when he returned 
east. In 1859 he returned to Puget Sound; since 
then Port Townsend has been his heailquarters. 
In 1860 Mr. Swan went to Neah Bay. In June, 
1802, he was appointed teacher of the Makah 
Indian Reservation, where he remained till 1866. 
In 1869 he went to Alaska, and in May, 1875, he 
went a second time to Alaska, this time under 
the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, as 
a commissioner to purchase articles of Indian 
manufacture for the Philadelphia Centennial 
Exposition. This fine collection is now in the 
U. S. National Museum at Washington. July 
31, 1878, Mr. Swan was appointed an inspector 
of customs at Neah Bay, Cape Flattery, and 
remained thereuntil August, 1888, addingmucb 
to our knowledge of the Makah Indians, which 
was reported to Prof. Baird and published in a 
bulletin of the tJ. S. Xational Museum. In 1883 
he went to Queen Charlotte Islands for the 
Smithsonian Institution and made another col- 
lection for the U. S. National Museum. 



T. 



Tate {liexK Charles Montgomery). Chi- 
nook I As Spoken by the Indians | 
of I Washington Territory, British 
Columbia \ and Alaska. | For the use 
of Traders, Tourists and others | who 
have business intercourse with ( the 
Indians. | Chinook-English. Euglish- 
Chinook. | By | rev. C. M. Tate, | 

Published by M. W. Waitt & co., | 
Victoria, B. C. [1889.] 

Cover title (as above, with the a<ldition of the 
following around the border: J'.ounhier & 
Higgins, I real estate brokers. | Insurance 



Tate (C. M.) — Continued. 

agents. | Financial agents), title as above verw 
copyright notice (1889) and name of printer 11 
preface (May 17, 1889) verso blank 1 1. text pp 
5-47, 16°. 

Part I. Chinook [JargonJ-Englisb, alphabet 
ically arranged, pp, 5-23.— Part 11. English 
Chinook [Jargon], alphabetically arranged, pp 
24-47.— Numerals, 1-12, 20, 50, 100, p. 4?. 

Copies seen; Eames, I'illing. 
[Hymn in the Chinook language.] 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, 8°, in the possession of the 
compiler of this bibliogr.aphy. 

One V erse and chorus of the hymn "Nothing 
but the blood of Jesus." 



70 



BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 



Tate (C. M.) — Cont'iuued. 

"Mr. Tate came to British Columbia from 
Northumberland, England, in 1870. He engaged 
in mission work among the Mathead Indians 
at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, in 1871, where 
he learned the Aukamenum language spoken 
by the Indian tribes on the east coast of Van- 
couver Island, lower Fraser River, and Puget 
Sound. Here he spent three years, when he 
removed to Port Simpson, on the borders of 
Alaska, among the Tsimpsheans. He next 
moved to the Eraser River and spent seven 
years amongst the Flathead tribes between 
Tale and Westminster, frequently visiting the 
Indians on the Nootsahk River in Washington 
Territory. Mr. Tate spent four years, 1880 to 
1884, among the IJella-Bellas, returning in the 
latter year to the mission on Fraaer River." 

Ten commandments : 
Chinook Jargon 



Texts: 

Chinook 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
'Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 



SeeEverette (W.E.) 

See Boas (F.) 

Bulmer (T.S.) 
Demers (M.) 
Dictionary. 
Eells (M.) 



Tolniie (Dr. William Fraser). [Vocabu- 
laries of certain languages of the 
northwest coast of America.] 

In Scoaler (J.), Observations on the indig- 
■cnous tribes of northwest America, in Royal 
'Geog. Soc. of London Jour. vol. 11, pp. 215-251. 
•London, 1841, 8°. 

Includes, among others, vocabularies of the 
'Chenook and Cathlascon, pp. 2i2-247. 

and Dawson (G. M. ) Geological and 

natural history survey of Canada. | 
Alfred E. C. Selwyu, F. R. S., F. G. S., 
Director. | Comparative vocabularies 
I of the I Indian tribes | of | British 
Columl)ia, | with a map illustrating dis- 
tribution. I By I W. F'raser Tolmie, | 
Licentiate of the Faculty of Physicians 
and Surgeons, Glasgow. | And | George 
M. Dawson, D.S.,A.S.R.M.,F.G.S.,&c. 
1 [Coat of arms.] \ Published by author- 
ity of Parliament. | 

Montreal : | Dawson brothers. | 1884. 

Cover title nearly as above, title as above 
verso blank 1 1. letter of transmittal signed by 
G. M. Dawson verso blank 1 1. jireface signed by 
G. M. Dawson pp. 56-76, introductory note 
signed by W. F. Tolmie pp. 96-126, text pp. 146- 
1316, map, 8°. 

Vocabulary (243 words) of the Tshinook 
tribe and of the Tilhilooit or upper Tshinook, 
pp. 506-616. — Comparison of words In various 
Indian languages of Nortli America, among 
them a few in the Chinook, pp. 1286-1306. 

Copies seen : Eames, Georgetown, Pilling, 
Wellesley. 



Tolmie (W. F.) — Continued. 

William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inver- 
ness, Scotland, February 3, 1812, and died De- 
cembers, 1886, afteranillnessof only threedays, 
at his residence, Cloverdale, Victoria, B. C. He 
was educated at Glasgow University, where he 
graduated in August, 1832. On September 12 
of the same year he accepted a position as sur- 
geon and clerk with the Hudson's Bay Com- 
pany, and left home for the Columbia River, 
arriving in Vancouver in the spring of 1833. 
Vancouver was then the chief post of the Hud- 
son's Bay Company on this coast. In 1841 he 
visited his native land, but returned in 1842 
overland via the plains and the Columbia, and 
was placed in charge of the Hudson's Bay po.sts 
on Puget Sound. He here took a prominent part, 
during the Indian war of 1855-'56, in pacifying 
the Indians. Being an excellent linguist, ho 
had acquired a knowledge of the native tongues 
and was instrumental in bringing about peace 
between the Americans and the Indians. He 
was appointed chief factor of the Hudson's Bay 
Company in 1855, removed to Vancouver Island 
in 1859, when he went into stock-raising, being 
the first to introduce thoroughbred stock into 
British Columbia ; was a member of the local 
legislature two terms, until 1878 ; was a member 
of the first board of education for several years, 
exercising a great interest in educational mat- 
ters ; held many ofiices of trust, and was always 
a valued and respected citizen. 

Mr. Tolmie was known to ethnologists for his 
contributions to the history and linguistics of 
the native races of the West Coast, and dated 
his interest in ethnological matters from his 
contact with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited the 
West Coast as an ethnologist to the Wilkes 
exploring expedition. He afterwards trans- 
mitted vocabularies of a number of the tribes 
to Dr. Scouler and to Mr. George Gibbs, some 
of which were published in Contributions to 
North American Ethnology. In 1884 he pub- 
lished, in conjunction with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a 
nearly complete series of short vocabularies of 
the principal languages met with in British 
Columbia, and his name is to be found fre- 
quently quoted as an authority on the history of 
the Northwest Coast and its ethnology. He fre- 
quently contributed to the press upon public 
questions and events now historical. 

Townsend (Br. J. K.) See Haldeman 

(S. S.) 

Treasury. The Treasury of Languages. 
I A I rudimentary dictionary | of | 
universal philology. | Daniel iii. 4. | 
[One line in Hebrew,] | 

Hall and Co., 25, Paternoster row, 
London. I (All rights reserved.) [1873?] 

Colophon : London : | printed by Grant and 
CO., 72-78, Turnmill street, E. C. 

Title verso blank 1 1. advertisement (dated 
February 7lh, 1873) verso blank 1 1. introduction 



CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 



71 



Treasury — Continufd. 

(signed J. B. iiiul (latftl Ootoboi- :Ust, 1873) pp. 
i-iv, dictionary of languaf^os (in alphabetical 
order) pp. 1-301, list of contributors p. [302], 
errata verso coloplion 1 1. 12°. 

Edited by James IJouwick, Esq.,F. R. (J. S., 
assisted by about twenty-two contributors, 
wbose initials are signed to the most important 
of their respective articles. In the compila- 
ti<m of the work ft-eo use was made of Hag.ster's 
Jiible of Every Land and Dr. Latham's Ele- 
men is of Comparative Philology. There are also 
references to an appendix, concerning which 
there is the following note on p. 301 : "Notici^. 
Owing to the unexpected cnlai'genient of this 
Book in course of ])rinting, tlie x^ppcndix is 
necessarily postponed ; and the more especially 
as additional matter has been received sutficieut 
to make a second volume. And it will be pro- 
ceeded with so soon as an adequate list of Sub- 
scribers shall be obtained." Under the name of 
each language is a brief statement of the family 
or stock to which it belongs, and the country 
where it is or was spoken, together with refer- 
ences, in many cases, to the principal author- 
ities on the grammar and vocabulary. An 
addenda is given at the end of each letter. 

Scattered reterences to the diale<'ts of the 
Chinookan. 

Copies seen : Eames. 



Tribal names : 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 



See Boas (F.) 
Douglass (J.) 
Haines (E. M.) 



Triibner & Co. Bibliotheca Hispano- 
Americanti. | A | ctitalogue | of | Span- 
iwli books I printed in | Mexico, Guate- 
mala, Honduras, the Antilles, | Vene- 
zuela, Columbia, Ecuador, Peru, Chili, 
I Uruguay, and the Argentine Repub- 
lic; I and of I Portuguese booksprinted 
in Brazil. | Followed by a collection of 
I works on the aboriginal languages 
I of America. | 

On Sale at the affixed Prices, by | 
Triibner & co., | 8 & 60, Paternoster 
row, London. | 1870. | One shilling and 
sixpence. 

Cover title as above verso contents 1 1. no in- 
side title; catalogue pp. 1-184, colophon verso 
advertisements 1 1. 16°. 

Works on the aboriginal langiiages of Amer- 
ica, pp. 162-184, contains a list of books (alpha- 
betically arranged by languages) on this sub- 
ject, including general works, pp. 162-168; 
Chinuk, pp. 169-170. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

> — A I catalogue | of | dictionaries and 
grammars ' of the Principal Languages 
and Dialects | of the World. | For sale 
by I Triibner & co. | 



Triibner & Co. — Continued. 

London: | Triibner &. co., 8 A fiO Pa- 
ternoster row. I 1872. 

Cover title as above, title ah above verso 
names of printers 1 1. notice verso blank 1 1. 
catalogue pp. 1-64, addenda and corrigenda 1 1. 
advertisements verso blank 1 1. a list of wor-ks 
relating to the .science of language et<-. pp. 
1-16,8-'. 

Contains titles of a few works in or relating 
to the Chinookan languages, p. 12. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

A later edition with title-page as follows : 

Triibner's | catalogue | of | dictiona- 
ries and grammars | of the | Princijjal 
Languages and Dialects of the World. | 
Second edition, , considerably enlarged 
and revised, with an alphabetical in- 
dex. ( A guide for students and book- 
sellers. I [Monogram.] | 

London : | Triibner & co., 57 and 59, 
Ludgate hill. | 1882. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso list of 
catalogues 1 1. notice and preface to the second 
edition p. iii, index pp. iv-viii, text pp. 1-168, 
additions pp. 169-170, Triibner's Oriental St 
Linguistic Publications pp. 1-95, 8°. 

Contains titles of works in American lan- 
guages (general), pp. 3. 169; Chinook, p. 37. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 
Trumbull: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Dr. J. Hammond Trum- 
bull, Hartford, Conn. 

[Trumbull (D/'. James Hammond).] Cat- 
alogue I of the I American Library | of 
the late | mr. George Brinley, | of Hart- 
ford, Conn. I Part I. ( America in gen- 
eral I New France Canada etc. | the 
British colonies to 1776 New England | 
[-Part IV. I Psalms and hymns music 
science and art | [etc. ten lines] | 

Hartford | Press of the Case Lock- 
wood & Brain ard Company | 1878 
[-1886] 

4 parts, 8=. Compiled by Dr. J. H. Trumbull. 
The fifth aud last part is said to be in prepara- 
tion. 

Indian languages : general treatises and col- 
lections, part 3, pp. 123-124; Northwest coast, 
p. 141. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling. 

James Hammond Trumbull, philologist, was 
born in Stonington, Conn., December 20, 1821. 
He entered Yale in 1838, and though, owing to 
ill health, he was not graduated with his class, 
his name was enrolled among its members in 
1850 and he was given the degree of A. M. He 
settled in Hartford in 1847 and was assistant 



72 



BIBLTOGRAPHY OF THE 



Trumbull (J. II.) — Continned. 

si'.-rrtai-.v nf state, in 1847-1852 and 18r)8-]s61, 
and secretary in 1861-1864, also state librarian in 
1854. Soon after going to Hartford ho joined tlie 
Conuecticut Historical Society, was its corre- 
sponding secretary in 1849-18615, and was elected 
its president in 186;i. He has been a trnstee of 
the Watkinson free library of Hartford and its 
librarian since 1863, and has been an officer of 
theWadsworthatheiKeiiui sin(^el864. Dr. Trum- 
bull was an original member of the American 
Philological Association iu 1869, and its presi- 
dent in 1874-1875. He has been a member of the 
Aniericau Oriental Society since 1860 and the 
American Ethnological Society since 1807, and 
lionorary member of many State historical soci- 
eties. In 1872 he was elected to the National 
Academy of Sciences. Since 18.j8 he has devoted 
special attention to the subject of the Indian 
languages of North Ameri(;a. He has prepared 
.1 dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot's 
Indian bible, and is probably the only Amer- 
ican scholar that is now able to road that work. 
In 1873 he was chosen lecturer on Indian lan- 
guages of North America at Yale, but loss of 
health and other Labors .soon compelled his 
resignation. The degree of LL.D. was con- 
ferred on him by Yale in 1871 and by Harvard 
in 1887, while Columbia gave him an L. H. D. 
in 1887. — Appleton's Cyclop, of Am. liiog. 

Tylor (Edward Burnett). Primitive 
culture : | Researclu's into tbe develop- 
raent of mytlioloify, pliilo.soj)liy, | reli- 
giou, art, and custom. | By | Edward 
B. Tylor, | author of " Re.searclies into 
the early history of mankind," &c. | 
[Two lines quotation.] | In two vol- 
umes. I Vol. I [-II]. I 

London : | John Murray, Albemarle 
street. | 1871. | (Rights of Translation 
and reproduction reserved. ) 

2 vols. : title versonames of printers 1 1. pref- 
.ace pp. v-vi, contents pj). vii-x. text pp. 1-453: 
half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of 
printers 1 1. contents pp. v-viii, text pp. 1-410, 
index pp. 411^26, 8°. 

Emotional and imitative language (chapters 
V and vi, vol. 1. pp. 14.')-217) contains, passim, 
woi'ds in a number of North American lan- 
guages, among them the Chinook and Chinook 
Jargon, pp. 167, 170, 174, 184, 186, 189, 191, 193. 

Copies .seen : British Museum, Congress, 
National Museum. 

Primitive Culture | Researches into 

the development of | mythology, phi- 
losophy, religion, | l.-inguage, art and 
custom I By | Edward B. Tylor, LL.D., 
F. R. S I Author of [&c. one line] | 
[Five lines quotation] | First Amer- 
ican, from the second English edition | 
In two volumes | Volume I [-II] | 
[Design] | 



Tylor (E. B.) — Continued. 

Boston I Estes & Lauriat | 143 Wash- 
ington Street | 1874 

2 vols. : half-title (Primitive culture) verso 
blank 1 1. title verso " Author's edition" 1 1. 
prelace to the first e